Coosp 3

Thank you for ordering the Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual, 3rd edition, 2004.
Please place
the chapter tabs in front of the title page for each chapter.
We welcome all comments about this manual. If you have any questions about BICSI and its services,
please contact our office at 800-242-7405 (USA/Canada toll free); +1 813-979-1991; fax +1 813-971-4311;
e-mail bicsi@bicsi.org; Web site www.bicsi.org.
Customer-Owned
Outside Plant
Design Manual
3rdedition
Tampa, Florida
2004 by BICSI
Printed in the United States of America

Third edition published 2004 by BICSI
First printing March 2004
ISBN: 1-928886-21-3
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be used, reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and
retrieval system, without prior agreement and written permission from the publisher, except for the
inclusion of brief quotations in a review.
The contents of this manual are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in
methodology, design, and manufacturing.
THIS MANUAL IS SOLD AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, RESPECTING THE
CONTENTS OF THIS BOOK, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR
THE MANUALS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. BICSI SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER
ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO ANY LIABILITY, LOSS, OR DAMAGE CAUSED DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY BY THIS MANUAL.
BICSI World Headquarters

8610 Hidden River Parkway
Tampa, FL 33637-1000 USA
800-242-7405 (USA/Canada toll free); +1 813-979-1991
fax: +1 813-971-4311
e-mail: bicsi@bicsi.org
Visit our Web site: www.bicsi.org
All brand names, trademarks, and registered trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Thank you for ordering the third edition of BICSIs Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) Design
Manual. The officers and directors of BICSI are pleased to provide an up-to-date reference manual that offers
proven design guidelines and methods accepted by the telecommunications industry. Volunteers from outside
the United States and Canada have provided input to make this edition of the CO-OSP more suitable for an
international audience.
An international telecommunications association, BICSI serves the industry by providing excellent
opportunities to learn new technologies through the Registered Communications Distribution Designer
(RCDD) registration program, LAN and OSP Specialty enhancements, telecommunications distribution
design and installation courses, several educational conferences each year, and technical publications such
as the Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, Network Design Reference Manual,
Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual, Residential Network Cabling Manual, and the
BICSI Telecommunications Dictionary.
If you have questions about BICSI and its services, please contact our office at 800-242-7405 (USA/Canada
toll free) or +1 813-979-1991; fax: +1 813-971-4311. You may also contact BICSI via e-mail and our Web
site: www.bicsi.org and bicsi@bicsi.org. We welcome your comments about the CO-OSP Design Manual.
To do so, simply complete the Readers Comment Form in the Preface of this manual and return it to BICSI.
Our goal is to make BICSI publications the most important tools in your office.
Russ Oliver, RCDD/LAN Specialist, President
John Bakowski, RCDD/LAN/OSP Specialist, President-Elect
Steve Calderon, RCDD/LAN/OSP Specialist, Secretary
Edward J. Donelan, RCDD/LAN Specialist, Treasurer
Christine Klauck, RCDD/LAN Specialist, U.S. Northeast Region Director
Jerry V. Allen, RCDD, U.S. Southeast Region Director
Brian Hansen, RCDD/LAN Specialist, U.S. North-Central Region Director
James R. Craig, RCDD/LAN Specialist, U.S. South-Central Region Director
Stephan Fowler, RCDD, U.S. Western Region Director
Roman Dabrowski, RCDD, Canadian Region Director
John Laban, RCDD/LAN Specialist, European Region Director
Colin Browitt, RCDD, South Pacific Region Director
Mel E. Lesperance, RCDD, Executive Director
Warning
It is the responsibility of the user of this manual to determine and use the applicable
safety and health practices (e.g., in the United States, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration [OSHA], National Electrical Code [NEC], National Electrical
Safety Code [NESC]) associated with customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP).
CO-OSP is inherently dangerous. BICSI shall not be liable to the purchaser or any
other entity with respect to any liability, loss, or damage caused directly or indirectly
by application or use of this manual. No project is so important, nor any completion
deadline so critical, to justify the nonconformance with industry standards.
This manual does not address safety issues associated with its use. It is the designers
responsibility to use established, and appropriate safety and health practices, and to
determine the applicability of all regulatory agencies.
Acknowledgments
BICSIs officers and membership wish to thank the following who have contributed their time and skills in
developing the 3rd edition of the Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) Design Manual.
George Fewell, RCDD, World IT Solutions LLC.

John Adams, RCDD/OSP Specialist, Adams Telecom
Donna Ballast, RCDD, dbi
Jeff Beavers, RCDD/OSP Specialist,University of Kansas, NTS
Carl Bonner, RCDD/OSP Specialist, Network Communications Supply Company
Ed Brower, RCDD/OSP Specialist, BellSouth Telecommunications
Terri M. Brown, Superior Essex
Cindy Corliss, BICSI
Edward C. Cronin, RCDD, Superior Essex
James R. Craig, RCDD/LAN Specialist, ComNet Communications, Inc.
Robert Faber, RCDD/LAN Specialist, The Siemon Company
Bob Gross, RCDD, RM Gross, Inc.
Joan Hersh, BICSI
Joe Hite, RCDD/OSP Specialist, CT Communications
Bob Jensen, RCDD, Fluke Networks, Inc.
Jay Paul Myers, RCDD, Ortronics
Sam Rosenthal, RCDD/LAN Specialist, General Dynamics
Mike St. Angelo, RCDD, A+, Network+
Ron Shaver, RCDD/LAN/OSP Specialist, BICSI
Ray Yeager, RCDD, Peachtree Telecommunications Intl, LLC
2004 BICSI
CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition
BICSI Policy for Numeric Representation of Units of Measure

International System of Units (SI)
BICSI technical manuals primarily follow the modern metric system, known as the
International System of Units (SI). The SI is intended as a basis for worldwide standardization
of measurement units. All units of measure in this manual are expressed in SI terms, followed
by an equivalent empirical (U.S. customary) unit of measure in parentheses (see exceptions
listed below).
Style Guidelines
In general, SI units of measure are converted to an empirical unit of measure and placed
in parentheses. Exception: When the reference material from which the value is pulled is
provided in empirical units only, the empirical unit is the benchmark.
In general, soft (approximate) conversions are used in this manual. Soft conversions are
considered reasonable and practicable; they are not precise equivalents. In some
instances, precise equivalents (hard conversions) may be used when it is a:
Manufacturer requirement for a product.
Standard or code requirement.
Safety factor.
For metric conversion practices, refer to ANSI/IEEE/ASTM SI 10-1997, Standard for

Use of the International System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System.
Trade size is approximated for both SI and empirical purposes. Example: 103 mm
(4 trade size).
American wire gauge (AWG) and plywood are not assigned dual designation SI units.
Dimensions shown in association with AWGs represent the equivalent solid conductor
diameter. When used in association with flexible wires, AWG is used to represent
stranded constructions whose cross-sectional area (circular mils) is approximately
equivalent to the solid wire dimensions provided.
In some instances (e.g., optical fiber media specifications), the physical dimensions and
operating wavelengths are designated.
When Celsius temperatures are used, an equivalent Fahrenheit temperature is placed in

parentheses.
ii
2004 BICSI
BICSIAn International Telecommunications Association

About BICSI
The BICSI mission statement says it best!
Leading the telecommunications industry in the enhancement of quality services
and methods around the globe by providing excellence in education, promoting
skills sharing, and assessing knowledge with professional registration programs.
BICSI is a professional not-for-profit telecommunications association, founded in 1974 to
serve and support telephone company building industry consultants (BICs) responsible for the
design and distribution of telecommunications wiring in commercial and multi-dwelling
buildings.
BICSI has grown dramatically since those early days and is now recognized worldwide as an
educational resource for the cabling infrastructure industry. Our membership spans the globe
and our services cover the broad spectrum of voice, data, and video technologies. BICSI
members include cabling contractors, manufacturers, systems integrators, electrical
contractors, end users, and many other types of telecommunications professionals.
BICSI is headquartered in Tampa, Florida, USA, and currently has offices in Australia, Brazil,
Japan, Mexico, and the United Kingdom. BICSI serves nearly 25,000 members and installers
in more than 110 countries around the world.
BICSI Member Benefits

BICSI membership is your key to a successful career in telecommunications. Member
benefits extend into the technical, legislative, and even the financial realms of this competitive industry. Membership offers ample opportunities for professional networking, and career
development and advancement. BICSI assists telecommunications professionals with their
careers by providing training, certification, conferences, and publications in the design and
installation of voice, data, and video technologies.
2004 BICSI
iii
BICSI Member Benefits, continued

Member Discounts
BICSI members receive substantial discounts on quality educationmanuals, design courses,
and conferences. BICSI members also receive discounts on TIA cabling standards, Cabling
Standards Update Newsletter, industry-related reports, CABA conferences, and SCTE
products and conferences. In addition, BICSI offers health, dental, vision, disability, term life,
accidental death and dismemberment, and errors and omissions insurance rates for individual
members and/or their companies.
International Credentials
BICSIs professional registration programs are internationally recognized.
RCDD RCDD/LAN Specialist RCDD/OSP Specialist
Registered Installer, Level 1 Registered Installer, Level 2 Registered Technician
Registered Residential Installer
The title Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) is awarded to BICSI

members who demonstrate expertise in the design, implementation, and integration of
telecommunications and data communications transport systems and related infrastructure
components.
Designed to enhance the RCDD, the Local Area Network (LAN) Specialty (RCDD/LAN
Specialty) designation recognizes a BICSI members proficiency in LAN and internetworking design.
The Customer-Owned Outside Plant Specialty (RCDD/OSP Specialty) designation

recognizes a BICSI members proficiency in CO-OSP design.
The Registered Cabling Installers and Technicians demonstrate their proficiency in

conducting site surveys, pulling cable, and terminating and testing copper and optical
fiber cable to the highest level of specification.
The Registered Residential Installers demonstrate their ability to design and install a
variety of residential structured cabling network systems, including new construction or
retrofits.
Vendor-Neutral Training
BICSI presents leading-edge technical training in all phases of telecommunications
distribution design and installation. These courses are offered at hundreds of locations across
the country and around the world, including more than 130 BICSI-licensed training centers.
In addition, BICSI can bring its first-class training to your location. All BICSI courses are
available for on-site training, BICSI also offers a number of online courses.
iv
2004 BICSI

Educational Conferences
BICSI members gain knowledge and continuing education credits by attending BICSI
conferences. Each year BICSI hosts design conferences in North America, as well as regularly
scheduled conferences held in other BICSI Districts and Regions worldwide. Conferences
include presentations by leaders in the telecommunications industry and opportunities to
network with your peers.
Technical Publications
Receive substantial discounts on BICSIs highly acclaimed manualslong considered the
definitive reference source of the industry. BICSI manuals serve as valuable reference tools
and detailed study guides for BICSI courses and exams. Also available on CD-ROM, BICSI
manuals are based on recognized codes, standards, and regulations. Our most popular
publications include the Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, Network Design
Reference Manual, LAN and Internetworking Applications Guide, Customer-Owned Outside
Plant Design Manual, Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual, Residential Network
Cabling Manual, and BICSI Telecommunications Dictionary. BICSI has also released an
Introduction to Commercial Voice/Data Cabling Systems video and workbook to aid the
noncabling professional.
In May 2004, the 1st edition of the Wireless Design Reference Manual will be published. In
addition to wireless LAN design information, this new manual encompasses many other
areas including radio frequency, personal area networks, antenna systems, cellular, paging,
networking, troubleshooting, and system optimization. The goal of this new manual is to
keep BICSI members up-to-date and on the cutting edge of wireless technology.
BICSIs reference manuals also are translated into selected foreign language editions.
Legislative and Standards Involvement
In the United States, the BICSI Governmental Relations Committee constantly monitors
legislative, regulatory, and judicial activities, and will advise you of any actions that affect
BICSI and its membership. In addition, BICSIs representatives take active roles in standardssetting panels and agencies worldwide.
Career Opportunities
BICSI members have an inside advantage when looking for employment opportunities. The
BICSI Web site (www.bicsi.org) offers free employment and resume listing on BICSIs Job
Board. In addition, BICSI awards more than US$30,000 per year in career development
scholarships for members and their families.
2004 BICSI

Newsletters and Web Site
BICSI helps keep you in touch with industry news and association activities through the
BICSI News. In addition, Region Directors and District Chairs help keep you current with
telecommunications happenings in your area through the local Region News and District
News. BICSI members also receive regular mailings about courses, conferences, and exams.
The updated BICSI Web site at www.bicsi.org offers information on BICSI publications,
training courses, educational conferences, professional registration programs, online ordering,
course registration, discussion forums, job board, member certifications, listings of almost
15,000 BICSI Registered Installers and Technicians, members-only access to valuable
documents, and member discounts. The Web site also is a valuable tool for promoting your
company online as a BICSI Corporate Member. This feature will allow you to establish a
direct link to your Web site.
Gain the Competitive Edge!
Combine all the benefits of BICSI membership into one complete package and youll
understand why BICSI members hold a competitive advantage. BICSI keeps you ahead of
your competition through a continuous flow of new information in the fast-changing field of
low-voltage distribution systems. By prominently displaying your BICSI membership, you
make known your professional ability to industry contacts. When you join BICSI, you will
gain a competitive edge.
Join BICSI Today!
BICSI membership is open to individuals and corporations serving the telecommunications
and building industries. Join BICSI and combine your expertise with your colleagues in the
network of telecommunications professionals. Complete BICSI information is available upon
request. For a membership application or other information, contact:
BICSI World Headquarters
800-242-7405 (USA/Canada toll free)
+1 813-979-1991; fax: +1 813-971-4311
e-mail: bicsi@bicsi.org
Visit our Web site: www.bicsi.org
vi
2004 BICSI
How to Use this Manual

Chapter number and name are indicated
at the outside top of each page.
Chapter 1: Overview
Chapters are divided into sections.
Section Heading
Topic Heading
Each chapter
section is divided
into multiple
subheadings.
Part Heading
Part headings are used to discuss major areas of a topic.
Bullet important terms and phrases.
Bullets are often followed by more detailed information.
Figures, examples, and tables are numbered sequentially in a given chapter.

Each is followed by a brief descriptive title.
Figure X.X
Title
2004 BICSI
Page numbers are

shown at the bottom of
the page. The chapter
number precedes the
page number.
X-X
Readers Comment Form

Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) Design Manual, 3rd edition
You may use this form to communicate your comments about this publication, its organization, or subject
matter. Your comments will be sent to BICSIs Technical Information and Methods Committee for review and
action, if any is deemed appropriate.
Comments (please include specific chapter and page reference; attach a marked-up page when a figure
change is needed):
Please complete the following information:

last name
first name
middle initial
date
city
state/province
zip/postal code
country
daytime phone
fax
e-mail
company name
mailing address
Thank you for your cooperation.

Send to: Attn: CO-OSP Design Manual User Response or fax to: +1 813-971-4311
BICSI
Office Use Only
Response from Technical Information and Methods Committee:
Class A
Class B
Class C
TI&M committee chair signature
date
TI&M panel chair signature
date
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Overview
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Definition ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Purpose ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
Background ................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Standardization ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
United States Codes, Standards, and Methodology ...................................................................... 1-4
Purpose of Codes and Standards ................................................................................................. 1-4
Methodology ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Planning ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Work Prints ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Right-of-Way ................................................................................................................................ 1-6
Pathways and Spaces ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Cabling ........................................................................................................................................ 1-7
Air-Pressure Systems .................................................................................................................. 1-7
Professionalism ............................................................................................................................... 1-8
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1-8
Professional Organizations .......................................................................................................... 1-8
Other Valuable Sources ............................................................................................................... 1-8
OrganizationsUnited States ......................................................................................................... 1-9
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) ........................... 1-9
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .............................................................................. 1-9
BICSIA Telecommunications Association ................................................................................ 1-9
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) .............................................................................................. 1-9
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) .................................................. 1-10
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Inc. ................................................................... 1-10
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) ........................................................................... 1-10
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) ............................................................. 1-10
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) .......................................................................... 1-10
PublicationsUnited States ......................................................................................................... 1-11
BICSI Publications ................................................................................................................... 1-11
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Inc. Publications ............................................... 1-11
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) .................................................................................. 1-12
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications ....................................................... 1-12
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Publications ......................................... 1-12
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) Publications ..................................................... 1-13
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Chapter 2: Cabling Infrastructure

Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) ........................................................................................ 2-1
Topology .................................................................................................................................. 2-2

Star .................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Hierarchical Star ................................................................................................................................. 2-3
Physical Wired Star/Logical Ring Topology ......................................................................................... 2-6
Physical Ring ..................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Clustered Star Topology ...................................................................................................................... 2-9
Optical Fiber Ring ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
Bus .................................................................................................................................................. 2-11
Tree and Branch ............................................................................................................................... 2-11
Chapter 3: Pathways and Spaces

Route Design .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Investigations and Surveys ............................................................................................... 3-1
Site Survey ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Alternate Route Considerations .......................................................................................................... 3-4
One-Call Systems International (OCSI) ............................................................................................... 3-5
Flagging, Painting, and Marking Utilities ............................................................................................. 3-7
Test Holes (Potholes) ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Documentation ................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Right-of-Way ...................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Joint Use Occupancy ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
Pathways .................................................................................................................................. 3-9

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Underground ....................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Direct-Buried ...................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Aerial ............................................................................................................................................... 3-10
Section 1: Underground Pathways

Underground Pathways ......................................................................................................... 3-11
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 3-11
Conditions Requiring Conduit Construction ....................................................................................... 3-12
ii
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Economics ....................................................................................................................................... 3-12

Conduit System Planning ................................................................................................................. 3-13
Finished Conduit System Design ..................................................................................................... 3-14
Conduit System Requirements ......................................................................................................... 3-14
Future Conduit System Requirements .............................................................................................. 3-16
Planning Lateral Ducts ..................................................................................................................... 3-16
Planning Subsidiary Ducts ............................................................................................................... 3-16
Section Length/Diameter Considerations .......................................................................................... 3-17
Maintenance Hole (MH) Location and Quantity ................................................................................. 3-18
Clearances ....................................................................................................................................... 3-19
Conduit Depth .................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Live or Dynamic Loads ..................................................................................................................... 3-20
Dead or Earth Loads ........................................................................................................................ 3-21
Tensile Stresses ............................................................................................................................... 3-21
Drain Slope ...................................................................................................................................... 3-22
Conduit Formations .......................................................................................................................... 3-22
Advantages of Multiple-Bore Conduit ................................................................................................ 3-25
Types of Conduit ............................................................................................................................... 3-25
Selecting a Type of Conduit .............................................................................................................. 3-26
Conduit Construction ........................................................................................................................ 3-28
Calculating Conduit Pulling Tensions ................................................................................................ 3-31
Designing Curved Conduit Sections .................................................................................................. 3-43
Air-Assisted Cable Installation .......................................................................................................... 3-43
Calculating Volume of Backfill .......................................................................................................... 3-45
Trench Work .................................................................................................................................... 3-47
Conduit Design for Bridge Crossing .................................................................................................. 3-51
Tunnels .................................................................................................................................. 3-60

Introduction
.................................................................................................................................. 3-60
Utility Tunnels .................................................................................................................................. 3-60

Pedestrian Tunnels ........................................................................................................................... 3-60
Vehicular Tunnels ............................................................................................................................. 3-60
Motivating Design Factors ................................................................................................................ 3-61
Application Areas ............................................................................................................................. 3-61
Advantages
.................................................................................................................................. 3-62
Disadvantages .................................................................................................................................. 3-62

Utility Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 3-62
Hazards
.................................................................................................................................. 3-63
Ventilation
.................................................................................................................................. 3-63
2004 BICSI
iii
Table of Contents
Fire Detection 3-63

Support Structures ........................................................................................................................... 3-63
Section 2: Direct-Buried Pathways

Direct-Buried Pathways ....................................................................................................... 3-65
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 3-65
Plow Route Selection ................................................................................................................. 3-67
Burial Depth ............................................................................................................................... 3-67
Placing Direct-Buried Cable ................................................................................................ 3-69

Trenching ................................................................................................................................... 3-69
Plowing ...................................................................................................................................... 3-70
Boring ........................................................................................................................................ 3-73
Section 3: Aerial Pathways

Aerial Pathways ..................................................................................................................... 3-77
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 3-77
Designing New Aerial Support Structures ................................................................................... 3-78
Types of Loading ........................................................................................................................ 3-79
Storm Load Requirements .......................................................................................................... 3-80
Pole Classification ..................................................................................................................... 3-84
Numerical Classification of Poles ............................................................................................... 3-85
Pole Depth Below Ground .......................................................................................................... 3-89
Depth Requirement .................................................................................................................... 3-89
Compaction ............................................................................................................................... 3-91
Transverse Load on a Pole from Aerial Line ................................................................................ 3-91
Loads Imposed by Service Drop Wires ....................................................................................... 3-94
Loads Imposed by Pole Attachments ......................................................................................... 3-94
Transverse Load Calculation ...................................................................................................... 3-95
Selection ................................................................................................................................... 3-96
Vertical Load .............................................................................................................................. 3-97
Bending Moments (Longitudinal Loads) ...................................................................................... 3-98
Calculation of Pole Height .......................................................................................................... 3-98
Pole Spacing and Span Lengths ................................................................................................. 3-99
Total Weight and Maximum Span Lengths of the Cable ............................................................ 3-100
Special Situation Designs ........................................................................................................ 3-104
Clearances .............................................................................................................................. 3-107
iv
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Support Strands ........................................................................................................................ 3-111

Anchor and Guys ..................................................................................................................... 3-112
Designing Additions to Existing Aerial Support Structures ........................................................ 3-124
Section 4: Spaces
Spaces ................................................................................................................................. 3-131
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 3-131
Confined Spaces ...................................................................................................................... 3-131
Maintenance Holes (MHs) ........................................................................................................ 3-132
Choosing Precast or Site-Poured Maintenance Hole (MH) ....................................................... 3-139
Maintenance Hole (MH) Size Extensions ................................................................................. 3-139
Selecting Maintenance Hole (MH) by Duct Entrance ................................................................ 3-139
Maintenance Hole (MH) Types ................................................................................................. 3-141
Cable Racking Provisions ........................................................................................................ 3-145
Administration .......................................................................................................................... 3-146
Sealing Ducts .......................................................................................................................... 3-146
Openings, Covers, and Frames ................................................................................................ 3-146
Maintenance Hole (MH) Extension Rings ................................................................................. 3-147
Handholes (HHs) ................................................................................................................. 3-148

Location ................................................................................................................................... 3-149
Pedestals, Cabinets, and Vaults ........................................................................................ 3-150

Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 3-150
Ground-Level Pedestals and Cabinet Criteria ............................................................................ 3-151
Cabinets .................................................................................................................................. 3-151
Controlled Environment Vault (CEV) ................................................................................ 3-154

Concrete Universal Enclosure (CUE) .............................................................................. 3-155
Marinas ................................................................................................................................ 3-156
Service at Marinas ................................................................................................................... 3-156
Terms and Definitions ............................................................................................................... 3-156
Docks with Floating Sections ................................................................................................... 3-156
Designating Specific Docks for Service .................................................................................... 3-157
Precabling Boat Slips .............................................................................................................. 3-157
Using Mechanical Protection ................................................................................................... 3-158
Protecting Cable, Conductors, and Terminals ........................................................................... 3-158
Choosing Conduit Size and Type ............................................................................................. 3-158
Bonding and Grounding ............................................................................................................ 3-159
System Separation .................................................................................................................. 3-159
Condominium Slips .................................................................................................................. 3-160
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Appendix ................................................................................................................................ 3A-1

Initial Strand Tensions and Sags ............................................................................................... 3A-1
Maximum Span Length ............................................................................................................. 3A-3
Sag and Tension of Installed Cables .......................................................................................... 3A-5
Chapter 4: Cabling
Cabling ..................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Recognized Cable .................................................................................................................. 4-3

Cable Types ....................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Optical Fiber Cable ............................................................................................................................. 4-3
Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable .............................................................................................................. 4-4
75 Ohm Coaxial Cable ....................................................................................................................... 4-4
Optical Fiber Cabling .............................................................................................................. 4-5

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 4-5
Attenuation ......................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Optical Fiber Cable Types ................................................................................................................ 4-18
Twisted-Pair Cabling ............................................................................................................ 4-24

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 4-24
Selection Criteria .............................................................................................................................. 4-24
Cable Attenuation Margin ................................................................................................................. 4-27
Cable Construction Types ................................................................................................................. 4-28
Plastic Insulated Conductor (PIC) Cable ........................................................................................... 4-35
Aerial ............................................................................................................................................... 4-36
Self-Supporting Cable ....................................................................................................................... 4-38
Direct-Buried .................................................................................................................................... 4-41
Underground ..................................................................................................................................... 4-46
Screened Cable ................................................................................................................................ 4-49
RUS Filled Cable .............................................................................................................................. 4-52
Aerial Drop Wire ............................................................................................................................... 4-63
Direct-Buried Service Wire ................................................................................................................ 4-63
Coaxial Cabling ..................................................................................................................... 4-64

Cable Selection ................................................................................................................................ 4-64
vi
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Mechanical Factors .......................................................................................................................... 4-64

Electrical Factors ............................................................................................................................. 4-65
Aerial Applications ............................................................................................................................ 4-67
Direct-Buried Applications ................................................................................................................ 4-68
Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable ......................................................................... 4-68
Design Criteria .................................................................................................................................. 4-69
Subscriber Service Drops ................................................................................................................. 4-70
Determine Bandwidth Requirements ................................................................................................. 4-72
Obtain Loss Budgets for Electronics from the Customer ................................................................... 4-72
Twinaxial Cabling .................................................................................................................. 4-73

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 4-73
Optical Fiber Coaxial Cabling .............................................................................................. 4-74

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 4-74
System Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 4-75
Applications ..................................................................................................................................... 4-76
Chapter 5: Cabling Hardware

Hardware .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Cabling Hardware ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
Closures for Twisted-Pair Cables ....................................................................................................... 5-3
Aerial ................................................................................................................................................ 5-4
Direct-Buried and Underground .......................................................................................................... 5-5
Closures for Optical Fiber Cables ...................................................................................................... 5-6
Cabling Hardware Selection ............................................................................................................... 5-7
Connecting Hardware ....................................................................................................................... 5-10
Design Considerations ..................................................................................................................... 5-10
Splicing Connectors for Twisted-Pair Cable ....................................................................................... 5-12
Twisted-Pair Cable ............................................................................................................................ 5-15
Splicing Methodogy .......................................................................................................................... 5-16
Splice Data ....................................................................................................................................... 5-18
Maximum Bundle Size for Closures .................................................................................................. 5-19
Testing ............................................................................................................................................. 5-23
Waterproof Splicing .......................................................................................................................... 5-23
2004 BICSI
vii
Table of Contents
Optical Fiber Cable ........................................................................................................................... 5-23

Optical Fiber Splicing Methods ......................................................................................................... 5-25
Splice Protection .............................................................................................................................. 5-26
Optical Fiber Splicing Hardware Considerations ................................................................................ 5-27
Hardware Labeling ............................................................................................................................ 5-28
Chapter 6: Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection

Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
Exposed Outside Plant (OSP) ........................................................................................................... 6-1
Bonding and Grounding ..................................................................................................................... 6-5
MGN and Non-MGN Power Systems ................................................................................................ 6-6
Bonding Requirements ....................................................................................................... 6-10

Aerial Cable Bonding Requirements ................................................................................................ 6-10
Direct-Buried Cable Bonding Requirements ..................................................................................... 6-13
Underground Cable Bonding Requirements ...................................................................................... 6-15
Maintenance Hole (MH) Bonding and Grounding .............................................................................. 6-16
Building Entrance Protection ........................................................................................................... 6-18
Protectors ............................................................................................................................. 6-21

Fuseless Protector Housing ............................................................................................................ 6-21
Fused Protector Housing ................................................................................................................. 6-21
Fuse Links ...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Protector Units ................................................................................................................................ 6-22
Primary and Secondary Protector Units .......................................................................................... 6-23
Chapter 7: Air-Pressure Systems

Air-Pressure Systems ............................................................................................................. 7-1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Air Feeder Pipe ................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Air Dryers .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Manifold Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 7-4
Automatic Shutoff Valve ..................................................................................................................... 7-4
Pressure Transducer Unit .................................................................................................................. 7-5
Cable Pressure Monitoring Systems ................................................................................................. 7-7
Standard Operating Environment ....................................................................................................... 7-8
Design Considerations ...................................................................................................................... 7-9
viii
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Chapter 8: Right-of-Way
Right-of-Way ............................................................................................................................ 8-1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Definition ........................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Types of Right-of-Way ....................................................................................................................... 8-3
Purchasing Right-of-Way ................................................................................................................... 8-3
Options ............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Acquiring Easement or Right-of-Way ................................................................................................. 8-4
Public Right-of-Way .......................................................................................................................... 8-5
Other Considerations ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
Easements ........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
Right-of-Way Easements and Permits ............................................................................................... 8-7
Property Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 8-9

Methods of Describing Property ........................................................................................ 8-10
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 8-10
Rectangular Grid System ................................................................................................................ 8-10
State Coordinate System ................................................................................................................ 8-16
Metes and Bounds .......................................................................................................................... 8-17
Subdivision Plat and Description ..................................................................................................... 8-21
Centerline Description ..................................................................................................................... 8-22
Point Description ............................................................................................................................. 8-23
Reference Description ..................................................................................................................... 8-24
Summary of Property Descriptions .................................................................................................. 8-24
Real Estate Law .............................................................................................................................. 8-24
Chain of Title ........................................................................................................................ 8-31

Restrictions, Covenants, and Conditions ......................................................................... 8-31
Liens and Encumbrances ................................................................................................... 8-32
Appraisers ....................................................................................................................................... 8-32
Private Right-of-Way ........................................................................................................................ 8-36
Obtaining and Recording a Private Easement .................................................................................. 8-37
Contents of the Private Easement Document .................................................................. 8-38

Easement Document ....................................................................................................................... 8-38
Permit Information ............................................................................................................... 8-39
2004 BICSI
ix
Table of Contents
State Highway Permit ...................................................................................................................... 8-39

Railroad Right-of-Way ...................................................................................................................... 8-42
Railroad Permit ............................................................................................................................... 8-42
Sample Letter of Request for Railroad Permit .................................................................................. 8-44
Casing Lengths for Various Railroad Crossing Angles ...................................................................... 8-45
Layout of a Railroad Crossing .......................................................................................................... 8-46
Chapter 9: Design Documentation

Work Prints ............................................................................................................................. 9-1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Schematic Design ............................................................................................................................. 9-1
Work Prints ....................................................................................................................................... 9-4
CO-OSP Design and Construction Checklist ..................................................................... 9-6

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 9-6
CO-OSP Design Checklist ................................................................................................................ 9-6
CO-OSP Construction Specifications Checklist ............................................................................... 9-11
Work Print Information Examples .................................................................................................... 9-17
Chapter 10: Scope of Work

Scope of Work ....................................................................................................................... 10-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Narrative .......................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Project Drawings ............................................................................................................................. 10-2
Systems Structure .......................................................................................................................... 10-2
Associated Hardware ...................................................................................................................... 10-2
Method of Placement ...................................................................................................................... 10-2
Splicing Twisted-Pair Cable ............................................................................................................. 10-3
Splicing Optical Fiber Cable ............................................................................................................ 10-3
Splicing Coaxial Cable ..................................................................................................................... 10-3
Terminating Twisted-Pair Cable ........................................................................................................ 10-4
Terminating Optical Fibers ............................................................................................................... 10-4
Terminating Coaxial Cable ............................................................................................................... 10-4
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Maintenance Hole (MH) Plan View and Elevation Detail Drawings ................................................... 10-4
Material List .................................................................................................................................... 10-5
Final Acceptance ............................................................................................................................ 10-5
Project Specific Note Section .......................................................................................................... 10-5
Optional Considerations .................................................................................................................. 10-6
Additional Issues ............................................................................................................................. 10-6
Chapter 11: Project Management

Project Management ............................................................................................................. 11-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 11-1
General Project Management Concepts .......................................................................................... 11-1
Project Tracking .............................................................................................................................. 11-2
Example Project Outline .................................................................................................................. 11-3
Project Scheduling .......................................................................................................................... 11-4
Preliminary Planning ....................................................................................................................... 11-6
Project Management Responsibilities ............................................................................................ 11-12
Schedule Updating ........................................................................................................................ 11-15
Project Management Terms and Conditions ................................................................................... 11-16
Chapter 12: Cost Estimating ................................................................................................ 12-1

Cost Estimating ..................................................................................................................... 12-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Statement of Work (SOW) ............................................................................................................... 12-2
Site Conditions ................................................................................................................................ 12-3
Outside Plant (OSP) Cost Estimating ............................................................................................. 12-5
Estimating the Cost of a Small Project (Example) ......................................................................... 12-10
Change Order Cost Estimating ...................................................................................................... 12-15
Chapter 13: Maintenance and Restoration

Maintenance and Restoration ............................................................................................. 13-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 13-1
Maintenance Issues ........................................................................................................................ 13-1
Routine Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 13-2
2004 BICSI
xi
Table of Contents
Demand Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 13-4

Restoration Issues .......................................................................................................................... 13-5
Operations Support Centers ............................................................................................................ 13-6
Locations of Operations Support Centers ........................................................................................ 13-7
Outside Plant (OSP) Infrastructure Characteristics .......................................................................... 13-8
Detailed Maintenance Plan .............................................................................................................. 13-8
Emergency Restoration Procedures ................................................................................................ 13-9
Glossary
Terms ..................................................................................................................................... G-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations ............................................................................................. G-23
Symbols ................................................................................................................................ G-33
Warning ................................................................................................................................ G-40
Bibliography ............................................................................................................................ B-1
Index .......................................................................................................................................... I-1
xii
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Figures
Figure 2.1
Star topology ............................................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2.2
Hierarchical star topology ............................................................................................ 2-3
Figure 2.3
Star topology (one-level hierarchical) ............................................................................ 2-4
Figure 2.4
Star topology (two-level hierarchical) ............................................................................ 2-5
Figure 2.5
Physical wired star/logical ring topology ...................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2.6
Buildings connected by a physical ring ........................................................................ 2-7
Figure 2.7
Main backbone ring and redundant backbone star combined ....................................... 2-8
Figure 2.8
Clustered star topology with physical star/logical ring .................................................. 2-9
Figure 2.9
Optical fiber ring topology .......................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2.10
Bus topology ............................................................................................................. 2-11
Figure 2.11
Tree and branch topology ........................................................................................... 2-12

Figure 3.1
Lateral and subsidiary ducts ...................................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3.2
Live or dynamic load dispersal ................................................................................... 3-20
Figure 3.3
Dead or earth load dispersal ...................................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3.4
Conduit casings under railroads ................................................................................. 3-29
Figure 3.5
Conduit casings under highway .................................................................................. 3-30
Figure 3.6
Forces acting on cable pulled through straight conduit ............................................... 3-33
Figure 3.7
Inclined straight conduit ............................................................................................. 3-34
Figure 3.8
Simple bend .............................................................................................................. 3-35
Figure 3.9
Typical concrete-encased conduit structure ............................................................... 3-45
Figure 3.10
Typical compacted fill conduit structure ...................................................................... 3-46
Figure 3.11
Typical trench shield .................................................................................................. 3-47
Figure 3.12
Typical trench with shoring in unstable ground ........................................................... 3-48
Figure 3.13
Typical trench with shoring in stable ground ............................................................... 3-49
Figure 3.14
Bell end conduit slip sleeve ........................................................................................ 3-51
Figure 3.15
Expansion joints ........................................................................................................ 3-52
Figure 3.16
Angle bracing ............................................................................................................. 3-53
Figure 3.17
Longitudinal bracing and load forces .......................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3.18
Anchor and plug ......................................................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.19
Back-to-back expansion joint units ............................................................................ 3-55
Figure 3.20
Back-to back expansion joint ..................................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.21
In-line single-expansion joint (over 30 m [100 ft]) ...................................................... 3-56
Figure 3.22
Expansion joint (under 30 m [100 ft]) .......................................................................... 3-56
Figure 3.23
Single expansion joint ................................................................................................ 3-57
2004 BICSI
xiii
Table of Contents
Figure 3.24
Angle bracing into stranded area ................................................................................ 3-57
Figure 3.25
Conduit installed in sidewalk portion of bridge ............................................................ 3-58
Figure 3.26
Conduit installed by hanging under sidewalk portion of bridge .................................... 3-58
Figure 3.27
Conduit run attached to side of bridge with steel brackets .......................................... 3-59
Figure 3.28
Conduit runs attached to steel I-beams ...................................................................... 3-59
Figure 3.29
Protection of direct-buried cable ................................................................................. 3-66
Figure 3.30
Hand operated plow ................................................................................................... 3-69
Figure 3.31
Trencher .................................................................................................................... 3-70
Figure 3.32
Trencher/vibratory plow .............................................................................................. 3-71
Figure 3.33
Rip plow ..................................................................................................................... 3-72
Figure 3.34
Auger bore ................................................................................................................. 3-73
Figure 3.35
Horizontal directional drilling machine ........................................................................ 3-74
Figure 3.36
Wind and ice loadings ............................................................................................... 3-80
Figure 3.37
Example of keying a pole ........................................................................................... 3-90
Figure 3.38
Pole placement utilizing terrain feature ....................................................................... 3-99
Figure 3.39
Slack span .............................................................................................................. 3-105
Figure 3.40
Building attachment methods ................................................................................... 3-106
Figure 3.41
Flying cross ............................................................................................................. 3-107
Figure 3.42
Midspan clearances ................................................................................................. 3-108
Figure 3.43
Vertical clearances over obstacles ........................................................................... 3-109
Figure 3.44
Vertical clearances between utilities ........................................................................ 3-109
Figure 3.45
Clearance distances ................................................................................................. 3-111
Figure 3.46
Push brace .............................................................................................................. 3-113
Figure 3.47
Guying configurations .............................................................................................. 3-114
Figure 3.48
Definition of lead and height ..................................................................................... 3-115
Figure 3.49
Calculating pull with pull finder ................................................................................. 3-116
Figure 3.50
Calculating pull with tape measure ........................................................................... 3-117
Figure 3.51
Guy rule ................................................................................................................... 3-120
Figure 3.52
Using guy strand selection chart example ............................................................... 3-121
Figure 3.53
Types of common anchors ....................................................................................... 3-122
Figure 3.54
Guy rod ends ........................................................................................................... 3-123
Figure 3.55
Aerial to underground transition ................................................................................ 3-126
Figure 3.56
Aerial to direct-buried transition ................................................................................ 3-127
Figure 3.57
Underground to direct-buried transition ..................................................................... 3-127
Figure 3.58
Underground to building transition ............................................................................ 3-127
Figure 3.59
Aerial to building transition ....................................................................................... 3-128
Figure 3.60
Direct-buried to building transition ............................................................................ 3-129
Figure 3.61
Typical maintenance hole (cutaway side view) .......................................................... 3-134
Figure 3.62
Maintenance hole diagram ....................................................................................... 3-135
xiv
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Figure 3.63
Maintenance hole frame, cover, and collar ................................................................ 3-136
Figure 3.64
Center conduit tray .................................................................................................. 3-137
Figure 3.65
Splayed conduit entry .............................................................................................. 3-137
Figure 3.66
Basic A precast maintenance hole ........................................................................... 3-138
Figure 3.67
Type A maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) ............................. 3-141
Figure 3.68
Type A maintenance hole with splayed window (plan view) ....................................... 3-141
Figure 3.69
Type J maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .............................. 3-142
Figure 3.70
Type J maintenance hole with splayed conduit windows (plan view) ......................... 3-142
Figure 3.71
Type L maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) ............................. 3-143
Figure 3.72
Type L maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view) ........................... 3-143
Figure 3.73
Type T maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) ............................. 3-144
Figure 3.74
Type T maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view) ........................... 3-144
Figure 3.75
Typical cable maintenance hole ............................................................................... 3-145
Figure 3.76
Typical handhole ...................................................................................................... 3-149
Figure 3.77
Pedestals and cabinets ........................................................................................... 3-152
Figure 3.78
Modular floating dock layout (with condominium-option terms, no scale) .................. 3-160
Figure 3.79
Sample marina layout .............................................................................................. 3-161
Chapter 4: Cabling
Figure 4.1
Cable sizing ................................................................................................................. 4-1
Figure 4.2
Loose-tube cable cross section ................................................................................. 4-19
Figure 4.3
Tight-buffered cables .................................................................................................. 4-20
Figure 4.4
ALPETH cable ........................................................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4.5
Self-supporting cable ................................................................................................. 4-38
Figure 4.6
Reinforced self-supporting cable ................................................................................ 4-40
Figure 4.7
PASP cable ............................................................................................................... 4-41
Figure 4.8
ASP cable ................................................................................................................. 4-44
Figure 4.9
Bonded ASP cable ..................................................................................................... 4-46
Figure 4.10
Underground (ductpic) cable ...................................................................................... 4-47
Figure 4.11
Air core screened cable ............................................................................................. 4-49
Figure 4.12
Filled screened cable ................................................................................................. 4-50
Figure 4.13
PE 39Filled solid ALPETH cable ............................................................................ 4-52
Figure 4.14
PE 39Filled solid 0.13 mm (0.005 in) cable ............................................................ 4-54
Figure 4.15
PE 39Filled solid gopher resistant sheath cable ..................................................... 4-57
Figure 4.16
PE 89Filled foam skin CACSP cable ...................................................................... 4-59
Figure 4.17
PE 89Filled foam skin ALPETH cable ..................................................................... 4-61
Figure 4.18
Coaxial cable ............................................................................................................. 4-64
Figure 4.19
Aerial coaxial cables .................................................................................................. 4-67
Figure 4.20
Armored cable ........................................................................................................... 4-68
2004 BICSI
xv
Table of Contents
Figure 4.21
Trunk/feeder system .................................................................................................. 4-70
Figure 4.22
Standard shield and super shield (quad) construction (drop cable) ............................. 4-71
Figure 4.23
Twinaxial cable .......................................................................................................... 4-73
Figure 4.24
Optical fiber-coaxial system ....................................................................................... 4-74

Figure 5.1
Splice closures and covers .......................................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5.2
Splice closures ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5.3
Filled/direct-buried splice closure systems ................................................................. 5-5
Figure 5.4
Optical fiber closure .................................................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5.5
Underground to direct-buried transition 5-8
Figure 5.6
Underground to building transition.. . 5-8
Figure 5.7
Direct-buried to building ........ 5-9
Figure 5.8
Example of IDC connection . 5-12
Figure 5.9
In-line, butt, and branch ............................................................................................. 5-13
Figure 5.10
Example of single pair splice connections and modules ............................................. 5-14
Figure 5.11
Example of multipair splice connectors and modules ................................................. 5-14
Figure 5.12
Examples of splice coding ......................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5.13
In-line splice .............................................................................................................. 5-16
Figure 5.14
Foldback splice ......................................................................................................... 5-17
Figure 5.15
Completed two-bank splice ........................................................................................ 5-17
Figure 5.16
Examples of splices required due to cable routing .................................................... 5-23
Figure 5.17
Splice tray examples ................................................................................................. 5-27

Figure 6.1
Ground potential rise .................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6.2
MGN power system ..................................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6.3
Non-MGN power system .............................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6.4
Wye power system ...................................................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.5
Delta power system ..................................................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.6
Ground connection on a pole (MGN system) ............................................................. 6-11
Figure 6.7
Grounding without access to transformers ................................................................. 6-14
Figure 6.8
Welded bonded attachment to rebar for site-poured maintenance hole ....................... 6-16
Figure 6.9
Clamped bonding attachment to rebar for precast or site-poured maintenance hole .... 6-16
Figure 6.10
Interior bonding and grounding for racking .................................................................. 6-17
Figure 6.11
Underground cable bonding ........................................................................................ 6-17
Figure 6.12
Maintenance hole bonding ......................................................................................... 6-18
Figure 6.13
Isolation joint ............................................................................................................. 6-20
xvi
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents

Figure 7.1
Air dryer showing door opened ..................................................................................... 7-3
Figure 7.2
Manifold assembly and shutoff valve ............................................................................ 7-4
Figure 7.3
Transducer housing mounted on framing channels ...................................................... 7-5
Figure 7.4
Example of pressure transducer installation ................................................................ 7-6
Figure 7.5
Flow transducer .......................................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7.6
Typical air-pressure schematic design ........................................................................ 7-9
Figure 7.7
Typical schematic of air-pressure system ................................................................. 7-10
Figure 7.8
Example of buried cable leaving underground ............................................................ 7-11
Figure 7.9
Underground to aerial interface .................................................................................. 7-12
Figure 7.10
Buffering arrangement at a splice .............................................................................. 7-13
Figure 8.1
Method of township numbering .................................................................................. 8-11
Figure 8.2
Theoretical township numbering ................................................................................ 8-12
Figure 8.3
Section subdivision ................................................................................................... 8-13
Figure 8.4
Small subdivision ...................................................................................................... 8-14
Figure 8.5
Legal subdivision and lotting ..................................................................................... 8-15
Figure 8.6
State coordinate system ........................................................................................... 8-17
Figure 8.7
Use of the protractor ................................................................................................. 8-18
Figure 8.8
Naming conventions for metes and bounds ............................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.9
Metes and bounds .................................................................................................... 8-20
Figure 8.10
Subdivision plat and description ................................................................................ 8-21
Figure 8.11
Centerline description ............................................................................................... 8-22
Figure 8.12
Point description ....................................................................................................... 8-23
Figure 8.13
Associated construction drawing for state permit application .................................... 8-41
Figure 8.14
Casing lengths for various railroad crossing angles ................................................... 8-45
Figure 8.15
Layout of a railroad crossing ..................................................................................... 8-46

Figure 9.1
Splicing together two sections of BKMA-200 cable, clearing and

capping the cable end ................................................................................................ 9-17
Figure 9.2
Splicing in a section of cable where a cable order may have been shorted.
This causes an additional splice, noted in a change order, with the additional
splice noted as 3A .................................................................................................... 9-17
Figure 9.3
Splice together two cables of different size and clear the ends of the
remaining pairs in the BKMA-900 .............................................................................. 9-17
Figure 9.4
Splice a new branch cable to a feed cable. Also, place a pressure plug .................... 9-17
Figure 9.5
New cables and a terminal spliced ............................................................................ 9-18
Figure 9.6
Cross-connect cabinet terminating gel-filled cables ................................................... 9-18
2004 BICSI
xvii
Table of Contents
Figure 9.7
Removal of NF-16 terminal ........................................................................................ 9-18
Figure 9.8
Replacing an NF-16 terminal with an NF-25 terminal ................................................. 9-19
Figure 9.9
Energizing dead pairs ............................................................................................... 9-19
Figure 9.10
Remove cross-connect terminal ................................................................................ 9-19
Figure 9.11
200-pair cable transfer at splice ................................................................................ 9-20
Figure 9.12
300-pair cable transfer to new feeder cable ............................................................... 9-20
Figure 9.13
Section replacement 300-pair cable .......................................................................... 9-20
Figure 9.14
Protector placement ................................................................................................. 9-20
Figure 9.15
Sample maintenance hole plan and profile drawing ................................................... 9-21
Figure 9.16
Butterfly detail worksheet .......................................................................................... 9-22
Figure 9.17
Butterfly detail ........................................................................................................... 9-23
Chapter 12: Cost Estimating

Figure 12.1
New construction proposal to ABC corporate office ................................................. 12-10
Tables
Table 3.1
Domestic and international one-call locate company telephone numbers ..................... 3-6
Table 3.2
Uniform color code for utility flagging, painting, or marking ........................................... 3-7
Table 3.3
Clearances ................................................................................................................ 3-19
Table 3.4
Conduit formations ..................................................................................................... 3-23
Table 3.5
Straight lengths of individual conduit ........................................................................... 3-24
Table 3.6
Rigid bends for individual conduit ............................................................................... 3-24
Table 3.7
Galvanized rigid steel conduit sizes ........................................................................... 3-28
Table 3.8
Coefficient of friction ................................................................................................... 3-32
Table 3.9
Cable pulling tension .................................................................................................. 3-36
Table 3.10
Minimum trench shoring requirements ....................................................................... 3-50
Table 3.11
Ice, wind, and temperature ......................................................................................... 3-82
Table 3.12
Pole class and transverse breaking strength .............................................................. 3-84
Table 3.13
Pole resistance moments .......................................................................................... 3-86
Table 3.14
Rated fiber strength for pole species .......................................................................... 3-86
Table 3.15
Resistance moments for various sizes of poles .......................................................... 3-87
Table 3.16
Pole setting depth required for various heights ........................................................... 3-89
Table 3.17
Transverse load on pole (kg/m per lb/ft of span length) ............................................... 3-92
Table 3.18
Load imposed by pole attachment ............................................................................. 3-94
xviii
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Table 3.19
Minimum pole class to support vertical load ............................................................... 3-97
Table 3.20
Maximum span lengths for self-supporting cable ...................................................... 3-100
Table 3.21
Weight for ALPETH cable ........................................................................................ 3-101
Table 3.22
Cable weight for self-supporting cable ...................................................................... 3-102
Table 3.23
Cable weight for self-supporting cable reinforced sheath ........................................... 3-103
Table 3.24
Typical attachment clearances ................................................................................. 3-108
Table 3.25
Minimum vertical clearances of cables above ground or rails at midspan crossing ... 3-110
Table 3.26
Minimum vertical clearance of cable runs along and within limits of public highways 3-110
Table 3.27
Strand sizes ............................................................................................................ 3-112
Table 3.28
Calculating pull when angle is known ....................................................................... 3-118
Table 3.29
Minimum guy strand selection table ......................................................................... 3-119
Table 3.30
Guy strand selection table ....................................................................................... 3-121
Table 3.31
Grades of construction for communications conductors ........................................... 3-125
Table 3.32
Maintenance hole ratings ......................................................................................... 3-132
Table 3.33
Maintenance hole window selection ......................................................................... 3-140
Table 3.34
Maintenance hole frames and covers ....................................................................... 3-147
Table 3.35
Pedestal types ........................................................................................................ 3-153
Table 3.36
Precabling guidelines ............................................................................................... 3-157
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table 4.1
Calculating the optical fiber attenuation margin ............................................................ 4-7
Table 4.2
Calculating losses ....................................................................................................... 4-9
Table 4.3
Splice loss values in dB ............................................................................................. 4-11
Table 4.4
System gain, power penalties, and the link-loss budget calculations ......................... 4-12
Table 4.5
Minimum system loss ............................................................................................... 4-14
Table 4.6
Supportable distances and channel attenuation for optical fiber applications by

optical fiber type ........................................................................................................ 4-15
Table 4.7

fiber type (10 Gb) ....................................................................................................... 4-17
Table 4.8
Color codingindividual optical fibers ........................................................................ 4-22
Table 4.9
Loop gauging table ..................................................................................................... 4-25
Table 4.10
Cable attenuation margin characteristics ................................................................... 4-27
Table 4.11
Insulation types ......................................................................................................... 4-28
Table 4.12
Access provider cable plan ........................................................................................ 4-29
Table 4.13
Description of codes .................................................................................................. 4-30
Table 4.14
Cable sheath compositions ........................................................................................ 4-31
Table 4.15
Cable usage guide ..................................................................................................... 4-32
Table 4.16
RUS-acceptance cable-coding plan ........................................................................... 4-32
Table 4.17
Description of codes .................................................................................................. 4-33
2004 BICSI
xix
Table of Contents
Table 4.18
RUS sheath composition ........................................................................................... 4-33
Table 4.19
RUS-acceptance cable usage guide .......................................................................... 4-34
Table 4.20
Standard color codes ................................................................................................. 4-35
Table 4.21
ALPETH cable ........................................................................................................... 4-37
Table 4.22
Self-supporting cable ................................................................................................. 4-39
Table 4.23
Reinforced self-supporting cable ................................................................................ 4-40
Table 4.24
Pressurized direct-buried cable .................................................................................. 4-42
Table 4.25
ASP cable ................................................................................................................. 4-45
Table 4.26
Underground (ductpic) cable ...................................................................................... 4-48
Table 4.27
Filled screened cable ................................................................................................. 4-51
Table 4.28
PE 39Filled solid ALPETH cable ............................................................................ 4-53
Table 4.29
PE 39Filled solid 0.13 mm (5 mil) copper cable ...................................................... 4-55
Table 4.30
PE 39Filled solid gopher resistant sheath cable ..................................................... 4-58
Table 4.31
PE 89Filled foam skin CACSP cable ...................................................................... 4-60
Table 4.32
PE 89Filled foam skin ALPETH cable ..................................................................... 4-62
Table 4.33
Cable attenuation at VSWR = 1.0, 50 ohm foam dielectric and

ambient 20 C (68 F) ................................................................................................ 4-69
Table 4.34
Coaxial attenuation at 20 C (68 F) over long distances ............................................ 4-69
Table 4.35
Drop cable and attenuation ........................................................................................ 4-71
Table 4.36
Drop cable and attenuation at maximum drop length .................................................. 4-72

Table 5.1:
Aerial closure size ....................................................................................................... 5-4
Table 5.2:
Direct-buried/underground closure size ....................................................................... 5-6
Table 5.3:
Two-bank fold-back splice data .................................................................................. 5-18
Table 5.4:
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] two-bank straight splice .............................................. 5-19
Table 5.5:
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] three-bank straight splice ............................................ 5-20
Table 5.6:
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] four-bank straight splice .............................................. 5-21
Table 5.7:
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] two-bank apparatus splice ........................................... 5-22

Table 7.1
Typical minimum pressure .......................................................................................... 7-8

Table 9.1
Work print specifications process ............................................................................... 9-5
Table 9.2
CO-OSP design checklist ........................................................................................... 9-7
Table 9.3
CO-OSP construction specifications checklist .......................................................... 9-12

Table 12.1
Matrix for estimating costs ....................................................................................... 12-13
xx
2004 BICSI
Table of Contents
Examples
Table 3.1
Tension worksheet form ............................................................................................. 3-38
Table 3.2
Conduit run layout ...................................................................................................... 3-39
Table 3.3
Worksheet A to B (empirical and metric) .................................................................... 3-41
Table 3.4
Worksheet B to A (empirical and metric) .................................................................... 3-42
Example 8.1 Typical state permit application .................................................................................. 8-40
2004 BICSI
xxi
Chapter 1
Overview
Overview of the customer-owned outside plant network
with updates to text. Includes a section on U.S. codes
and standards with subsections on AASHTO, ANSI,
EIA, TIA, IEEE, NFPA, and OSHA. Addresses
purpose of codes and standards.
Chapter 1: Overview
Table of Contents
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Definition ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Purpose ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
Background ................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Standardization ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
United States Codes, Standards, and Methodology ...................................................................... 1-4
Purpose of Codes and Standards ................................................................................................. 1-4
Methodology ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Planning ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Work Prints ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Right-of-Way ................................................................................................................................ 1-6
Pathways and Spaces ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Cabling ........................................................................................................................................ 1-7
Air-Pressure Systems .................................................................................................................. 1-7
Professionalism ............................................................................................................................... 1-8
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1-8
Professional Organizations .......................................................................................................... 1-8
Other Valuable Sources ............................................................................................................... 1-8
OrganizationsUnited States ......................................................................................................... 1-9
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) ........................... 1-9
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .............................................................................. 1-9
BICSIA Telecommunications Association ................................................................................ 1-9
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) .............................................................................................. 1-9
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) .................................................. 1-10
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Inc. ................................................................... 1-10
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) ........................................................................... 1-10
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) ............................................................. 1-10
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) .......................................................................... 1-10
PublicationsUnited States ......................................................................................................... 1-11
BICSI Publications ................................................................................................................... 1-11
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Inc. Publications ............................................... 1-11
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) .................................................................................. 1-12
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications ....................................................... 1-12
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Publications ......................................... 1-12
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) Publications ..................................................... 1-13
2004 BICSI
1-i
Chapter 1: Overview
Overview
WARNING:
It is the responsibility of the user of this manual to determine and use the
applicable safety and health practices (e.g., in the United States, Occupational
Safety and Health Administration [OSHA], National Electrical Code
[NEC], National Electrical Safety Code [NESC]) associated with
customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP). CO-OSP is inherently dangerous.
BICSI shall not be liable to the purchaser or any other entity with respect to
any liability, loss, or damage caused directly or indirectly by application or use
of this manual. No project is so important, nor any completion deadline so
critical, to justify the non-conformance with industry standards.
This manual does not address safety issues associated with its use. It is the designers
responsibility to use established, and appropriate safety and health practices, and to determine
the applicability of all regulatory agencies.
Definition
Outside plant (OSP) is defined in American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications
Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (ANSI/TIA/EIA-758), Customer-Owned
Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, as the telecommunications
infrastructure designed for installation exterior to buildings. OSP is composed of media,
balanced twisted-pair, 75 ohm coaxial or optical fiber, and the supporting structures required to
link the serving facilities to outlying locations to provide for voice, data, video, and other lowvoltage systems.
Introduction
The requirement for OSP began with the placement of the first telegraph system. It consisted of
a wire, or a pair of wires, linking two stations. From this simple beginning, OSP has expanded
into the vast global telecommunications infrastructure that exists today.
OSP facilities that were designated as unsuitable by the serving telco (e.g., the underground
segment within mines) or remote areas of the United States that were outside the local service
providers (SPs) serving area (uncertified territory) became the responsibility of the customer.
Private companies were formed to design, engineer, and construct CO-OSP, and to augment the
construction forces of the local SP.
Prior to 1984, American Telephone & Telegraph (AT&T) owned Western Electric, Bell
Laboratories, 22 Bell Operating Companies (BOCs), and other companies. The BOCs
provided basic telephone service within their franchised areas. At that time there were many
other telephone companies (usually called independents) that had their own franchised areas.
Companies could not encroach on each others franchise areas because federal law
established that regulated monopolies were the most cost effective way to provide service.
2004 BICSI
1-1
Chapter 1: Overview
Introduction, continued
The AT&T holdings were usually referred to as the Bell System, but there were many users
who were not part of it. However, the standards established by AT&T and other large service
providers (SPs) (e.g., General Telephone and Electronics [GTE] and the Rural Electrification
Administration [REA] now Rural Utilities Service [RUS]) were generally followed throughout
the industry. A lack of standardization would have impaired universal connectivity and
interoperability.
With the 1984 divestiture of AT&T, a door opened for competition among access providers
(APs) for the creation of companies that design, install, manage, and maintain OSP networks.
Before divestiture, APs were the primary source of practices and training for OSP.
Prior to divestiture, the SP was also the AP, that is, the entity that provided the physical
connection (wiring) to a facility also provided the service (e.g., dial tone) to the client within
that facility.
Today there can be a complete distinction between the company that acts as an AP (providing
the physical connection) and the SP, who is the provider of the desired service (e.g., telephone,
Internet access) that is delivered on that physical link.
The Telecommunications Act of 1996 provided for open competition in telecommunications
services.
Deregulation in the United States and other countries gives independent contractors access to
contracts for CO-OSP and creates opportunities for qualified telecommunications distribution
designers in todays open and competitive market.
Like most deregulation efforts, that of the CO-OSP also contains several drawbacks. One is the
loss of the standardization that was maintained by the APs prior to deregulation. This problem
has been and continues to be addressed by such organizations as the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), TIA, and BICSI.
The designer is responsible not only for designing the intrabuilding infrastructure, but also the
interbuilding infrastructure. The designer should have knowledge of the following aspects of
CO-OSP:
Pathways and spaces
Cabling
Cabling hardware
Bonding and grounding
Right-of-way
System documentation
Codes and standards
1-2
2004 BICSI
Chapter 1: Overview
Purpose
Background
Advances in technology and high levels of technical expertise in all aspects of the telecommunications field increase the importance of training. Based on the current standards for
CO-OSP network design, the methodology presented in this manual provides the end user
with a useful reference when seeking design help or training their staff.
Standardization
OSP networks may differ due to factors such as:
Topography.
Climate.
Choice of cable.
Economics.
Local code requirements.
Functionality of the network.
Current and future types of equipment to be supported.
Customer requirements.
The specifics of the telecommunications infrastructure may be unique; however, the overall
components of an OSP network and the methods used to complete and maintain the
installations are relatively standard. Standardizing cabling installations is necessary to ensure
performance from increasingly complex arrangements.
Standards are beneficial because they:
Promote design and installation consistency.
Impose conformance to physical and transmission line requirements.
Provide a structured telecommunications facility that enables efficient system expansion

and other changes.
Provide for uniform documentation.
The cabling industry in the United States accepts ANSI as the body responsible for providing
and maintaining standards within the telecommunications industry. Other countries have
standards (e.g., International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication [ITU-T] L Series
publication). ANSI, in conjunction with TIA/EIA, produces standards for CO-OSP
requirements. It is intended that the design methodologies and other content of this manual be
aligned with ANSI/TIA/EIA-758.
2004 BICSI
1-3
Chapter 1: Overview
United States Codes, Standards, and Methodology

Building codes and standards regulate construction in virtually all areas of North America.
Codes are normally enforced by a local jurisdictional agency. Codes and standards encompass
most, if not all, aspects of the construction industry.
While codes address minimum safety requirements, standards are intended to ensure system
performance by providing requirements and guidelines for proper installation. Installation
methods, materials, and electrical products must conform to local code requirements.
The use of shall and should in both codes and standards can have a major effect in how tasks
are accomplished. These terms are defined as:
ShallA mandatory requirement.
ShouldA recommendation.
Purpose of Codes and Standards

Building codes and standards govern installation practices and materials used when
constructing facilities.
The purpose of codes is to protect life, health and property. The purpose of standards is to
ensure construction quality.
Codes are not intended to cover measures that may be required to protect telecommunications
and equipment from:
Intrusion (e.g., wiretapping).
Induced noise.
Events that can disrupt the flow of information.
In general, standards are established as a basis to compare, measure, or judge:
Capacity.
Quantity.
Content.
Extent.
Value.
Quality.
Performance.
Limits.
Independent organizations exist that specialize in establishing, certifying, and maintaining these
codes and standards.
1-4
2004 BICSI
Chapter 1: Overview
Methodology
Methodology is the implementation of practices and procedures employed by a particular
industry. Instructional or installation manuals are examples of methodology.
Planning
When planning the construction of an OSP network, the following may be required:
Complete a needs assessment
Determine the capacity of the existing network
Calculate transmission requirements
Coordinate with APs, local authorities, and other utilities
Ensure compliance with safety regulations and practices
Determine the need for right-of-way
Select the physical topology
Select a route
Select the desired cable type
Prepare and send a request for information (RFI) and evaluation responses
Work Prints
After the planning decisions are made, construction drawings and specifications must be
generated. These typically include:
A plan view of the area showing obstacles, control points, and other utilities.
Notification of known hazardous conditions.
Measurements for placement of the facilities.
Limits of right-of-way.
Support structures
2004 BICSI
Conduit sizes and profile views of proposed routing.
Maintenance holes (MHs).
Handholes (HHs).
Poles, support strands, and guying information.
Media
Cable sizes, types, and gauges.
Cable identification and cable pair/strand counts.
Direction of cable placement.
Reel identifications for cables.
Protection
Overvoltage and overcurrent protection systems.
Bonding and grounding plans.
1-5
Chapter 1: Overview
Right-of-Way
If an OSP network is planned to extend beyond property owned or controlled by the customer:
Leased lines from the AP may be obtainable.
A franchise may be purchased.
The need for right-of-way arises.
To continue an OSP network outside the boundaries of a customers property, the customer
must either buy the strip of land or obtain permission:
To attach to a utility providers pole line.
To use a utility providers conduit.
From the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) to use public right-of-way or other AP or
utility easements.
From a private party to use their land.
Pathways and Spaces

The three basic types of OSP pathways and spaces are:
Aerial.
Underground.
Direct-buried.
Aerial pathways and spaces consist of:
Poles.
Support strands (messengers).
Anchors.
Guys.
Underground pathways and spaces consist of:
Conduit.
MHs.
HHs.
Utility tunnels.
Pedestals and cabinets.
Vaults.
Direct-buried pathways and spaces consist of:
Trenches for direct-buried cable.
1-6
2004 BICSI
Chapter 1: Overview
Cabling
Cable selection is dependent on the customers needs. CO-OSP cabling can consist of one or
more of the following cables:
Twisted-pair (overall shield)
Screened (group shield)
Coaxial
Optical fiber
OSP cables are specifically designed for one or more of the following installation types:
Aerial (lashed or self-supporting)
Direct-buried
Underground
Air-Pressure Systems
Air-pressure systems positively pressurize backbone cables in OSP networks to prevent
moisture from entering the cables. Air-pressure systems can be provided from:
The property owners main entrance facility.
Remote compressor dehydrators.
Remote air tanks.
Typically, air-pressure systems are used when air-core OSP cables are installed as directburied, underground, or aerial cables.
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
The need for air-pressure systems may be mitigated through alternate system
design and the use of cables and cabling hardware that are appropriate for the
environment. Where practicable, OSP designs that require the use of air-pressure
systems should be avoided due to high maintencance cost. Many legacy systems
are being removed as new designs and construction occur.
1-7
Chapter 1: Overview
Professionalism
Introduction
Staying professionally current requires a commitment on the part of the designer. The
competent designer must possess both management and business skills to be able to monitor
the design and construction of the OSP project. Listed below are some of the items that
should be considered.
Professional Organizations
To stay up-to-date, the designer should maintain membership or certification in one or more
professional organizations. The following is a partial list of national and international
organizations involved in the OSP portion of telecommunications:
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
BICSIA Telecommunications Association
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Inc.
International Organization for Standardization/International Electrotechnical

Commission (ISO/IEC)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
Other Valuable Sources

The Internet is also a valuable source of information. It is important to be computer literate
and to use these tools to the designers advantage. The designer can research topics of
particular interest as well as sign up for online services that periodically send updated
information to the designers e-mail address.
Many training companies specialize in continuing education for telecommunications. Designers
can take advantage of training courses to stay current or to expand their knowledge of the
telecommunications industry.
Attending professional meetings and conferences is a valuable networking tool that allows the
designer to learn about the latest changes in the industry and to meet others with the same
concerns.
Governmental regulations affect the designers work. Stay well informed by reading articles in
periodicals or accessing the governments Web site to understand changes in regulations.
BICSIs Governmental Relations Committee is an excellent source of information on
legislation affecting the designer.
New products appear on the market continually. By understanding all of the options available,
the designer can provide the customer with the optimum system available.
1-8
2004 BICSI
Chapter 1: Overview
OrganizationsUnited States
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO is a nonprofit, nonpartisan association representing highway and transportation
departments in the 50 states, the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico.
It represents all five transportation modes: air, highways, public transportation, rail, and
water. Its primary goal is to foster the development, operation and maintenance of an
integrated national transportation system.
The mission of AASHTO is to advocate transportation policies, provide technical services,
demonstrate the contributions of transportation and facilitate institutional change.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI is the administrator and coordinator of the U.S. voluntary standardization system.
Five engineering societies and three government agencies founded ANSI in 1918. It is a
private, nonprofit membership organization supported by a diverse group of private and
public sector organizations.
The primary goal of ANSI is to maintain the global competitiveness of U.S. businesses and
the American quality of life by facilitating and disseminating voluntary consensus standards,
conformity assessment systems, and promoting integrity.
ANSI itself does not develop American national standards. Instead, it facilitates the
development by establishing consensus among qualified groups. Once a document is
adopted by ANSI, it becomes an American National Standard.
BICSIA Telecommunications Association
BICSI is a professional not-for-profit telecommunications association, founded in 1974 to
serve and support telecommunications professionals with their careers by providing training,
certification, conferences, and publications in the design and installation of voice, data, and
video technologies. BICSI consists of nearly 26,000 members and installers in over 90
countries around the world.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
EIA is the primary trade organization representing U.S. high technology for over 75 years.
EIA has created activities to enhance the competitiveness of the American producer, including
technical standards development. It develops technical standards for electronic equipment.
Major manufacturers of wire, cable, and termination hardware had implemented incompatible
proprietary networks based on their products and services. In 1985, the EIA was approached
by the computer industry to help create standards for the installation of voice, data, video, and
low-voltage systems in commercial buildings. As a result of this request, EIA formed a
committee and charged it with beginning this effort. That committee subsequently became the
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA). Eventually, TIA became a separate, but
closely related, organization that works with EIA to establish standards for the wire and cable
industries.
2004 BICSI
1-9
Chapter 1: Overview
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)

IEEE is the worlds largest professional engineering society. IEEE provides:
Standards for rating the performance of equipment and materials.
Standards for installation and maintenance of equipment.
Courses to allow engineers to keep abreast of developments in the electrical and

electronic engineering fields.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Inc.

ICEA is a wire and cable manufacturers organization that writes telecommunications
specifications for the telephone and electrical power industries.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
The first National Electrical Code (NEC) was published in 1897, due to the interests of
the insurance, electrical, architectural, and other industries. The NFPA sponsors, controls, and
publishes the NEC within the U.S. jurisdictional area. The NEC provides electrical safety
standards that protect people and property from electrical fires and other electrical hazards.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Passed by the U.S. Congress in 1970, OSHA attempts to ensure a safe and healthful
environment for every working person in the United States. Under this statute, OSHA was
created within the U.S. Department of Labor. The provision and requirements of OSHA are set
forth in the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR).
While OSHA is responsible for the administrative work relating to the statute, most fieldwork
has been passed down to each states Department of Labor. As a result, each state is
responsible for field inspections and enforcement.
OSHA is responsible for job-site inspections. It has the authority to shut down a job site and
levy fines against companies for noncompliance to OSHA regulations. Additionally, OSHA is
responsible for the development, publication, and enforcement of safety standards.
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
TIA writes standards for the performance requirements of electronic and telecommunications
equipment and systems. Seven of these standards govern telecommunications cabling in buildings,
and one covers the CO-OSP. Each of these standards covers a specific part of a campus or
building cabling system, defining the required components. In addition, each of these standards lists
related standards and other reference materials.
1-10
2004 BICSI
Chapter 1: Overview
PublicationsUnited States
This section contains descriptions of the important codes, standards, and publications that
apply to CO-OSP.
BICSI Publications
In addition to standards, BICSI publishes four reference manuals that provide supplemental
information in the design and installation of CO-OSP. They are the:
Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM).
Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) Design Manual.
Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM).
Residential Network Cabling Manual (RNCM).
These manuals provide the methods and practices by which industry standards and codes are
implemented.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA), Inc. Publications
ICEA publications are:
Adopted in the public interest.
Designed to:
Eliminate misunderstanding between manufacturer and user.
Assist users in selecting and obtaining proper products for their particular need.
ICEA standards of particular interest are:
ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-2002, Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated

Copper Conductor.
ANSI/ICEA S-85-625-2002, Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor

Telecommunications Cable.
ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2002, Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted-Pair

Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.
NOTE: This standard was developed jointly by the Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, Inc. (ICEA) and the Telecommunications Wire & Cable Standards
Technical Advisory Committee (TWCS TAC).
2004 BICSI
ICEA S-83-596-2001, Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable (pending ANSI

approval).
ICEA S-104-696-2001, Standard For Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable (pending ANSI

approval).
1-11
Chapter 1: Overview
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

Standards published by IEEE that are applicable to OSP include the IEEE National
Electrical Safety Code (NESC). The most recent edition covers basic provisions for
the safeguarding of persons from the hazards arising from the installation, operation, or
maintenance of OSP overhead and underground:
Electrical supply lines.
Communication lines.
Most federal, state, and local municipalities have adopted the NESC, in whole or in part, as
their legal electrical code. Some states or localities adopt the NESC and add more stringent
requirements.
The NESC historically was revised every three years. The code cycle was lengthened to four
years in 1993 and to five years in 1996 starting with the 2002 edition. It is arranged by part,
section, and rule (e.g., Part 2, Section 21, Rule 214).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications
Some standards published by NFPA that are applicable to the telecommunications industry
include:
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 2002.
NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, 2002.
NFPA 75, Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing

Equipment,2003.
NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2003.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Publications

OSHA Regulations (Standards-29 CFR) 1910, General Industry Standards, includes two
sections that are of particular importance to the telecommunications field. They are:
1910.146, Permit-Required Confined Spaces, which states in 1910.146(b) that a confined

space means a space that:
(1) Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform
assigned work; and
(2) Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit; and
(3) Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.
MHs, splice pits, crawl spaces, and attics may fall under the OSHA definition of a
confined space.
1-12
2004 BICSI
Chapter 1: Overview
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Publications, continued
1910.268, Telecommunications. This section sets forth safety and health standards that
apply to the work conditions, practices, means, methods, operations, installations, and
processes performed at telecommunications centers and at telecommunications field
installations, which are located outdoors or in building spaces used for such field
installations.
OSHA Regulations (Standards-29 CFR) 1926, Construction Standards, covers such areas as
general safety and health provisions (subpart C); personal protective and lifesaving equipment
(subpart E); signs, signals, and barricades (subpart G); hand and power tools (subpart I);
electrical (subpart K); fall protection (subpart M); and stairways and ladders (subpart X). For
a detailed listing of applicable areas, check the OSHA Web site at www.OSHA.gov.
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) Publications
The eight TIA standards that govern telecommunications outside plant cabling include:
2004 BICSI
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard, Part 1: General Requirements, 2001.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components, 2001.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, 2000.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces, 2003.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-570-A, Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 1999.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructure, 2002.
ANSI-J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications, 2002.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications

Cabling Standard, 1999.
1-13
Chapter 2
CO-OSP Cabling
Infrastructure
Discussion of outside plant cabling infrastructure design.
Covers enhanced information on topologies and their
uses, including clustered star topology and tree and
branch topology. Discusses types and applications for
facility placement methods.
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 2-1

Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) ........................................................................................ 2-1
Topology .................................................................................................................................. 2-2

Star .................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Hierarchical Star ................................................................................................................................. 2-3
One-Level Hierarchical Star .......................................................................................................... 2-4
Two-Level Hierarchical Star .......................................................................................................... 2-5
Physical Wired Star/Logical Ring Topology ........................................................................................ 2-6
Physical Ring ..................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Clustered Star Topology ..................................................................................................................... 2-9
Optical Fiber Ring ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
Bus .................................................................................................................................................. 2-11
Tree and Branch ............................................................................................................................... 2-11
2004 BICSI
2-i
Figures
Figure 2.1
Star topology ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2.2
Hierarchical star topology ................................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2.3
Star topology (one-level hierarchical) .................................................................................. 2-4
Figure 2.4
Star topology (two-level hierarchical) ................................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2.5
Physical wired star/logical ring topology ............................................................................. 2-6
Figure 2.6
Buildings connected by a physical ring .............................................................................. 2-7
Figure 2.7
Main backbone ring and redundant backbone star combined .............................................. 2-8
Figure 2.8
Clustered star topology with physical star/logical ring ......................................................... 2-9
Figure 2.9
Optical fiber ring topology ................................................................................................. 2-10
Figure 2.10
Bus .................................................................................................................................. 2-11
Figure 2.11
Tree and branch topology ................................................................................................. 2-12
2-ii
2004 BICSI
Chapter 2: Cabling Infracstructure
Introduction
Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP)
CO-OSP is the cabling infrastructure located on a customers property, or between a
customers non-contiguous sites, which provides the capability to transport information
between buildings and other structures.
This manual provides design requirements for this infrastructure, which includes
telecommunications pathways and spaces, cable, connecting hardware, and bonding and
grounding systems. These elements of cabling infrastructure extension to buildings are
commonly referred to as outside plant (OSP); in a customer-owned campus environment,
they are commonly called customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP).
Campus backbone cabling is the segment of a network that presents the telecommunications
distribution designer and user with the most options, especially in major networks (e.g.,
universities, large industrial parks, and military bases). Campus backbone is also the network
segment most affected by physical considerations (e.g., duct availability, right-of-way, and
physical barriers).
There are three fundamental cabling topologiesstar, ring, and bus. From these three, a
number of hybrid topologies have developed, including star-wired ring, clustered star, and
hierarchical star, as well as tree and branch.
As protection against network downtime, many optical fiber cable systems use redundancy.
Options for redundancy include:
2004 BICSI
Devices that are coupled to optical fibers in the same cable as the primary system. If the
primary system fails, the redundant system will take over immediately. This protects
against active device failure; however, it does not help in the rare instance of a complete
cable cut.
Routing that provides the most protection. A redundant optical cable is placed in a second
route to immediately take over if cable is damaged. Consider using redundant routing in
cases where minimum downtime for the infrastructure is a requirement. Redundant
routing is the more costly of the two choices.
2-1
Topology
Star
A star topology is generally deployed for CO-OSP cabling. This configuration allows all
buildings to be cabled directly from the main cross connect MC (CD) in Building A as
illustrated in Figure 2.1. Star configurations centralize the physical management of the
backbone network. However, they can limit the ultimate distance the backbone network
can serve.
A star topology directly links, or home-runs, all buildings requiring connection to the
MC (CD [see Figure 2.1]). The cross-connect in each building then becomes the IC (BD),
linking the telecommunications rooms (TRs) in each building to the MC (CD).
By centralizing the physical management of the backbone cabling at the MC (CD), the owner
has the opportunity to connect the network to a remote location or campus. For example, this
connection can be made via microwave, satellite, or leased lines.
Figure 2.1
Star topology
MC
(CD)
Building A
2-2
2004 BICSI
Hierarchical Star
If the distance from the switch to the last workstation exceeds the transmission limit, the
designer should consider using a hierarchical star configuration.
Each cabling segment may connect to a hub location that supports the area as a star topology,
such as illustrated in Figure 2.2 where Building A is starred to Building F, and then Building F
is starred to Buildings G, H, and J. Hub locations can be connected to other topologies to
support technologies and equipment used for wide area applications (e.g., wireless,
synchronous optical network [SONET], integrated services digital network [ISDN], x digital
subscriber line [xDSL], asynchronous transfer mode [ATM], hybrid optical fiber/coaxial
[HFC]).
Figure 2.2
Hierarchical star topology
Building B
Building C
Building E
Building A
MC (CD)
Building F
IC (BD)
Building G
Building D
Building H Building J
Level 2
2004 BICSI
2-3
Hierarchical Star, continued

One-Level Hierarchical Star
A one-level hierarchical star links all buildings requiring connection to the MC (CD [see Figure
2.3]). The cross-connect in each building then becomes the IC (BD), linking the TRs in each
building to the MC (CD).
The MC (CD) should be close to (if not co-located with) the predominant equipment room
(data center). Ideally, the MC (CD) will:
Be at the center of the buildings being served.
Provide adequate space for cross-connect hardware and equipment.
Some of the advantages of using a one-level hierarchical star for the campus backbone
cabling are that it:
Provides centralized facilities administration.
Allows testing and reconfiguration of the systems topology and applications from
the MC (CD).
Provides increased flexibility.
Figure 2.3
Star topology (one-level hierarchical)
MC
(CD)
2-4
2004 BICSI
Hierarchical Star, continued

Two-Level Hierarchical Star
A two-level hierarchical star design provides an interbuilding backbone that uses selected
ICs (BDs) to serve a number of buildings, rather than linking all the buildings directly to the
MC (CD). The ICs (BDs) are then linked to the MC (CD [see Figure 2.4]).
Consider using a two-level hierarchical star when:
Available pathways do not allow for all cables to be routed to a MC (CD), or
Geographical or user grouping requirements make it desirable to segment the network.
Figure 2.4
Star topology (two-level hierarchical)
IC
(BD)
MC
(CD)
In large networks, this allows electronics (e.g., switches and bridges) to be used more
effectively to utilize bandwidth and distance capabilities of the cable or to segment the
network.
Many designers consider the two-level hierarchical star beneficial, especially if the number of
interbuilding ICs (BDs) is held to a minimum. There should be no more than five ICs (BDs)
serving other buildings unless unusual circumstances exist.
When the number of interbuilding ICs (BDs) is five or less, the user can segment the network
without significantly sacrificing control, flexibility, or manageability. Therefore, when the
two-level hierarchical star is used for an interbuilding backbone, a physical star should be
implemented in all segments. This will ensure that flexibility, versatility, and manageability
are maintained.
2004 BICSI
2-5
Physical Wired Star/Logical Ring Topology

A physical wired star/logical ring topology indicates the OSP cable is constructed in a star
configuration but the signaling will be routed in a logical ring topology. This type of
configuration should be used when the designer determines that a physical ring route is not
possible or an existing cable will be used in a segment of the total project (see Figure 2.5).
Whenever the star portion is used (i.e., from the MC [CD] to hub site A), that portion of the
route is known as a collapsed ring even though it is in a physical star configuration.
Figure 2.5
Physical wired star/logical ring topology
Node C
Node B
IC (BD)
IC (BD)
MC
Hub
(CD)
IC (BD)
Node D
IC (BD)
Node A
This topology allows for concentration of backup systems, maintenance, and performance
monitoring personnel to be located at the MC (CD) hub site. This creates economies of scale
in network operational costs and upgrades by concentrating a majority of the intelligence at a
central location. The down side, however, is a single point of failure.
2-6
2004 BICSI
Physical Ring
The designer may consider using a physical ring (see Figure 2.6) to link the interbuilding
ICs (BDs) and MC (CD)when:
The existing conduit supports it.
The primary purpose of the network is optical fiber distributed data interface (FDDI),
SONET, or token ring.
There is a redundant cable path.
Figure 2.6
Buildings connected by a physical ring
IC(BD)
IC(BD)
See note.
MC(CD)
IC(BD)
IC(BD)
IC(BD)
IC(BD)
The typical optical fiber cores/strands design for a cabling system that provides physical ring
routing would dedicate some of the cable optical fiber core strands to a ring and some to a star
by splicing through the ICs (BDs) back to the MC (CD).
NOTE:
Generally not recommended without direct connection to an MC (CD).
The typical design for a conduit system that provides physical ring topology would dedicate
some of the optical fibers to a ring and some of the optical fibers to a star. This is accomplished by splicing (rather than terminating) the star topology optical fibers through
the IC (BD) directly back to the MC (CD), as illustrated in Figure 2.6.
2004 BICSI
2-7
Physical Ring, continued

Figure 2.7 gives the end user the best of both worlds. However, the designer must have a
significantly detailed definition of present and future telecommunications requirements before
designing this kind of arrangement.
Figure 2.7
Main backbone ring and redundant backbone star combined
MC (CD)
IC ( B D ) 1
IC ( B D ) 3
IC(BD) 2
48-Fiber cable
(6 ring fibers +
42 star fibers)
= 6 Ring fibers
= 12 Star fibers
Optical fiber patch panel
Optical fiber splice center
= Splices
2-8
2004 BICSI
Clustered Star Topology

A clustered star with or without a physical star/logical ring indicates that from the MC (CD)
to the hub sites the topology can be either a star or a ring topology (see Figure 2.8). This
determination is at the designers discretion and is based upon the electronics, designers
survivability plans, and transmission budget selected at the MC and each hub site.
Figure 2.8
Clustered star topology with physical star/logical ring
Building 4
Building 3
Building 5
Hub site B
Building 2
Building 6
Building 7
Hub site A
Building 8
MC(CD)
Hub site C
Building 1
At the hub site the buildings are served via a physical star topology. The hub sites have the
ability to be either a star or ring configuration. This topology allows a designer to provide for
fault-tolerant redundant routing at the hub locations. At the same time, the designer can
reduce the design costs for electronics and OSP cable from the hub sites to the buildings via
a ring or a star-wired network topology. This configuration also takes advantage of the
concentration of electronic equipment intelligence in a common location for network
management operations.
2004 BICSI
2-9
Optical Fiber Ring

The optical fiber ring topology depicted in Figure 2.9 is a simplified view of a typical ring
application. Optical fiber ring strategies can become very sophisticated and complex in their
routing schemes and primary and protection switching capabilities. Most simple rings are
designed to provide a primary path and a secondary path in case there is either an electronic
failure at a node site or a service interruption related to the OSP cable.
In an optical fiber ring topology, separate and independent physical pathways are recommended for primary and secondary rings.
Figure 2.9
Optical fiber ring topology
Node A
Node D
Node B
Ring signaling
direction
Node C
Optical fiber ring topologies are quickly becoming the normal design architecture for OSP
operations because they can support high bandwidth transport applications. Ring topologies
provide the following benefits:
Fault-tolerant redundant routing
Greater reliability and significantly less cabling service downtime
Flexible architecture
2-10
2004 BICSI
Bus
A bus topology is a linear configuration of cable plant that has limited application if the
designer is looking for fault-tolerant redundancy (see Figure 2.10). A bus topology is
adequate if the route is secure (protected from breaks), redundancy is not required, and the
system traffic is not of a significantly critical nature to require alternate routing. All points
along the cable route are in communication with each other. If the route should suffer a break,
all network communications would be lost.
Figure 2.10
Bus topology
Building B
IC(BD)
MC(CD)
IC(BD)
Building C
Building A
ER
Building D
ER = Equipment room
Tree and Branch

Tree and branch topology typically refers to the configuration of the plant from a node site,
hub location, or directly from the MC (CD). This terminology is used in the planning of OSP
copper or coaxial cables for telephone or cable operations. The terminology describes the
main trunk of a tree with subsequent branches extending from this trunk line. It may extend in
multiple directions. The trunk is normally referred to in the telephony industry as feeder cable
and the branch is distribution cable (Figure 2.11). In the community antenna television
(CATV) industry, the terminology is reversed and the trunk is the main line from the headend
and the branch is called feeder cable. The parameters for the design of this type of network
are dependent upon the loss characteristics of the coaxial or copper plant and the geographic
area to be served.
2004 BICSI
2-11
Tree and Branch, continued

Figure 2.11
Tree and branch topology
Building
A
See note
Building
B
MC(CD)
Building
Building
D
Building
E
Building
F
Building
G
NOTE:
Locations such as this in a cable plant can take on many different configurations
depending on the type of cable system. For cables in general, this point could be
a pull hole with one cable from the MC (CD) through the pull hole to Building A,
and one cable from the MC (CD) through the pull hole to Building B. If this is a
twisted-pair copper cable, this could be a 100-pair cable from the MC (CD) to a
maintenance hole (MH) with a splice. The splice could have the first binder group
run to Building B, the second binder group run to Building A, and the third and
fourth binder groups cut dead for future requirements. If this were a CATV cable,
this could be a feeder or trunk cable to a pull hole and a splitter, sending one cable to
Building A and one cable to Building B. This could also be an optical fiber passive
optical network (PON) with an optical fiber cable from the MC (CD) to a MH and
a passive optical splitter sending an optical fiber cable to Building A and one to
Building B. This is only a representative sample of passive solutions. There are also
active cable system design configurations. There can be active solutions requiring
amplifiers and power arrangements. Cable direction changes in trees or branches
can be very complex arrangements. The planning and location of these points is a
major consideration in the cable plant design.
2-12
2004 BICSI
Chapter 3
Pathways and Spaces
Updated analysis of pathways and spaces, including new
information and graphics on controlled environmental vaults
(CEVs), confined spaces, and storm loading. Additional
information on placement of facilities by tunneling, boring or
drilling, and by pole line design. New graphics.
Table of Contents
Route Design .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Investigations and Surveys ............................................................................................... 3-1
Site Survey ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Route Construction ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
Alternate Route Considerations .......................................................................................................... 3-4
One-Call Systems International (OCSI) ............................................................................................... 3-5
Flagging, Painting, and Marking Utilities ............................................................................................. 3-7
Test Holes (Potholes) ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Documentation ................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Right-of-Way ...................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Joint Use Occupancy ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
Pathways .................................................................................................................................. 3-9

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Underground ....................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Direct-Buried ...................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Aerial ............................................................................................................................................... 3-10

Underground Pathways ......................................................................................................... 3-11
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 3-11
Conditions Requiring Conduit Construction ....................................................................................... 3-12
Economics ....................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Conduit System Planning ................................................................................................................. 3-13
Finished Conduit System Design ..................................................................................................... 3-14
Conduit System Requirements ......................................................................................................... 3-14
Future Conduit System Requirements .............................................................................................. 3-16
Planning Lateral Ducts ..................................................................................................................... 3-16
Planning Subsidiary Ducts ............................................................................................................... 3-16
Section Length/Diameter Considerations .......................................................................................... 3-17
Maintenance Hole (MH) Location and Quantity ................................................................................. 3-18
Clearances ....................................................................................................................................... 3-19
Conduit Depth .................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Live or Dynamic Loads ..................................................................................................................... 3-20
2004 BICSI
3-i
Dead or Earth Loads ........................................................................................................................ 3-21

Tensile Stresses ............................................................................................................................... 3-21
Drain Slope ...................................................................................................................................... 3-22
Conduit Formations .......................................................................................................................... 3-22
Advantages of Constructing Formations Using Individual Conduit ............................................... 3-23
Advantages of Multiple-Bore Conduit ................................................................................................ 3-25
Types of Conduit ............................................................................................................................... 3-25
Selecting a Type of Conduit .............................................................................................................. 3-26
Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit .................................................................................................. 3-27
Conduit Construction ........................................................................................................................ 3-28
Conduit Casings ........................................................................................................................ 3-29
Wall Thickness of the Casing Pipe ............................................................................................. 3-30
Calculating Conduit Pulling Tensions ................................................................................................ 3-31
Coefficient of Friction (f) ............................................................................................................. 3-32
Calculating Pulling Tension for Straight Horizontal Conduit ......................................................... 3-33
Calculating Pulling Tension for Inclined Straight Segment of Conduit .......................................... 3-34
Calculating Pulling Tension for Uniformly Curved Segment of Conduit ......................................... 3-35
Cumulative Tension Worksheet .................................................................................................. 3-37
Designing Curved Conduit Sections .................................................................................................. 3-43
Air-Assisted Cable Installation .......................................................................................................... 3-43
Calculating Volume of Backfill .......................................................................................................... 3-45
Trench Work .................................................................................................................................... 3-47
Subsurface Space ..................................................................................................................... 3-51
Conduit Design for Bridge Crossing .................................................................................................. 3-51
Under Bridge Hanger/Conduit Method ........................................................................................ 3-52
Tunnels .................................................................................................................................. 3-60

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 3-60
Utility Tunnels .................................................................................................................................. 3-60
Pedestrian Tunnels ........................................................................................................................... 3-60
Vehicular Tunnels ............................................................................................................................. 3-60
Motivating Design Factors ................................................................................................................ 3-61
Application Areas ............................................................................................................................. 3-61
Advantages ...................................................................................................................................... 3-62
Disadvantages .................................................................................................................................. 3-62
Utility Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 3-62
Hazards ........................................................................................................................................... 3-63
Ventilation ........................................................................................................................................ 3-63
Fire Detection ................................................................................................................................... 3-63
Support Structures ........................................................................................................................... 3-63
3-ii
2004 BICSI

Direct-Buried Pathways ....................................................................................................... 3-65
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 3-65
Route Selection ......................................................................................................................... 3-65
Plow Route Selection ....................................................................................................................... 3-67
Burial Depth ..................................................................................................................................... 3-67
Placing Direct-Buried Cable ................................................................................................ 3-69

Trenching ......................................................................................................................................... 3-69
Plowing ............................................................................................................................................ 3-70
Vibratory Plow ........................................................................................................................... 3-71
Rip Plow .................................................................................................................................... 3-72
Clearances from Existing Utilities .............................................................................................. 3-72
Boring .............................................................................................................................................. 3-73
Auger Bore System ................................................................................................................... 3-73
Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) ........................................................................................... 3-74
Missile Bore System ................................................................................................................. 3-75
Casing Type ............................................................................................................................... 3-75
Cable Markers ........................................................................................................................... 3-75

Aerial Pathways ..................................................................................................................... 3-77
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 3-77
Route Selection ......................................................................................................................... 3-77
Designing New Aerial Support Structures .......................................................................................... 3-78
Grade of Construction ................................................................................................................ 3-78
Existence of Pole Line ............................................................................................................... 3-78
Types of Loading .............................................................................................................................. 3-79
Storm Load Requirements ................................................................................................................ 3-80
Combined Ice and Wind Loading ................................................................................................ 3-81
Light Loading ............................................................................................................................. 3-81
Medium Loading ........................................................................................................................ 3-81
Heavy Loading ........................................................................................................................... 3-81
Extreme Wind Loading .............................................................................................................. 3-82
Required Pole Strength .............................................................................................................. 3-83
Moment Strength ....................................................................................................................... 3-83
Method of Summing Loads ........................................................................................................ 3-83
Pole Classification ............................................................................................................................ 3-84
Numerical Classification of Poles ..................................................................................................... 3-85
2004 BICSI
3-iii
Pole Depth Below Ground ................................................................................................................ 3-89

Depth Requirement ........................................................................................................................... 3-89
Compaction ...................................................................................................................................... 3-91
Transverse Load on a Pole from Aerial Line ...................................................................................... 3-91
Storm-Loading Districts .............................................................................................................. 3-91
Load Table ................................................................................................................................. 3-92
Moment ..................................................................................................................................... 3-93
Transverse Load from Wind Pressure on Pole ............................................................................ 3-93
Assumed Load ........................................................................................................................... 3-93
Loads Imposed by Service Drop Wires ............................................................................................. 3-94
Unbalanced Service Drop Wires ................................................................................................. 3-94
Balanced Drop Wires ................................................................................................................. 3-94
Loads Imposed by Pole Attachments ............................................................................................... 3-94
Transverse Load Calculation ............................................................................................................. 3-95
Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 3-95
Calculation ................................................................................................................................. 3-95
Estimation ................................................................................................................................. 3-96
Required Resistant Moment ....................................................................................................... 3-96
Selection ......................................................................................................................................... 3-96
Selection of Pole Class .............................................................................................................. 3-96
Vertical Load .................................................................................................................................... 3-97
Bending Moments (Longitudinal Loads) ............................................................................................ 3-98
Calculation of Pole Height ................................................................................................................ 3-98
Attachment Space ..................................................................................................................... 3-98
Pole Spacing and Span Lengths ....................................................................................................... 3-99
Total Weight and Maximum Span Lengths of the Cable .................................................................. 3-100
Special Situation Designs ............................................................................................................... 3-104
Optical Fiber Cable Considerations .......................................................................................... 3-104
Slack Span Design .................................................................................................................. 3-105
Pole to Building Design ............................................................................................................ 3-106
Flying Cross Construction ........................................................................................................ 3-107
Clearances ..................................................................................................................................... 3-107
Attachment Clearances ........................................................................................................... 3-108
Midspan Clearances ................................................................................................................ 3-108
Vertical Clearances .................................................................................................................. 3-109
Facility Clearances (Government) ............................................................................................ 3-110
Radial Clearances ..................................................................................................................... 3-111
Support Strands .............................................................................................................................. 3-111
Support Strand Size ................................................................................................................. 3-112
3-iv
2004 BICSI
Anchor and Guys ........................................................................................................................... 3-112

Anchor and Guy Configuration .................................................................................................. 3-112
Common Anchor and Guy Configurations ................................................................................. 3-112
Guy Attachment Hardware ....................................................................................................... 3-114
Lead-to-Height Ratio ................................................................................................................ 3-115
Measuring the Corner Pull ........................................................................................................ 3-116
Guy Size ................................................................................................................................. 3-119
Anchors ................................................................................................................................... 3-122
Guy Rod Size .......................................................................................................................... 3-123
Guy Rod Ends ......................................................................................................................... 3-123
Designing Additions to Existing Aerial Support Structures .............................................................. 3-124
Pole Line Adequacy ................................................................................................................. 3-124
Pole Line Construction Classification ....................................................................................... 3-124
Systems Plans ........................................................................................................................ 3-126
Joint-Use Agreements .............................................................................................................. 3-126
Design Transition Structures ........................................................................................................... 3-126
Section 4: Spaces
Spaces ................................................................................................................................. 3-131
Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 3-131
Confined Spaces ............................................................................................................................ 3-131
Maintenance Holes (MHs) .............................................................................................................. 3-132
Choosing Precast or Site-Poured Maintenance Hole (MH) .............................................................. 3-139
Maintenance Hole (MH) Size Extensions ....................................................................................... 3-139
Selecting Maintenance Hole (MH) by Duct Entrance ...................................................................... 3-139
Maintenance Hole (MH) Types ........................................................................................................ 3-141
Cable Racking Provisions ............................................................................................................... 3-145
Administration ................................................................................................................................ 3-146
Sealing Ducts ................................................................................................................................. 3-146
Openings, Covers, and Frames ...................................................................................................... 3-146
Maintenance Hole (MH) Extension Rings ....................................................................................... 3-147
Handholes (HHs) ................................................................................................................. 3-148

Location ......................................................................................................................................... 3-149
Pedestals, Cabinets, and Vaults ........................................................................................ 3-150

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 3-150
Ground-Level Pedestals and Cabinet Criteria .................................................................................. 3-151
2004 BICSI
3-v
Cabinets ......................................................................................................................................... 3-151

Pole/Wall Mounted Cabinets .................................................................................................... 3-151
Environmentally Controlled Cabinets ........................................................................................ 3-152
Controlled Environment Vault (CEV) ................................................................................ 3-154

Concrete Universal Enclosure (CUE) .............................................................................. 3-155
Marinas ................................................................................................................................ 3-156
Service at Marinas .......................................................................................................................... 3-156
Terms and Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 3-156
Docks with Floating Sections ......................................................................................................... 3-156
Designating Specific Docks for Service ........................................................................................... 3-157
Precabling Boat Slips ..................................................................................................................... 3-157
Using Mechanical Protection .......................................................................................................... 3-158
Protecting Cable, Conductors, and Terminals ................................................................................. 3-158
Choosing Conduit Size and Type .................................................................................................... 3-158
Bonding and Grounding .................................................................................................................. 3-159
System Separation ......................................................................................................................... 3-159
Condominium Slips ........................................................................................................................ 3-160
Appendix ................................................................................................................................ 3A-1

Initial Strand Tensions and Sags ...................................................................................................... 3A-1
Maximum Span Length .................................................................................................................... 3A-3
Sag and Tension of Installed Cables ................................................................................................ 3A-5
3-vi
2004 BICSI
Figures
Figure 3.1
Lateral and subsidiary ducts ............................................................................................. 3-15
Figure 3.2
Live or dynamic load dispersal .......................................................................................... 3-20
Figure 3.3
Dead or earth load dispersal ............................................................................................. 3-21
Figure 3.4
Conduit casings under railroads ....................................................................................... 3-29
Figure 3.5
Conduit casings under highway ........................................................................................ 3-30
Figure 3.6
Forces acting on cable pulled through straight conduit ..................................................... 3-33
Figure 3.7
Inclined straight conduit .................................................................................................... 3-34
Figure 3.8
Simple bend ..................................................................................................................... 3-35
Figure 3.9
Typical concrete-encased conduit structure ...................................................................... 3-45
Figure 3.10
Typical compacted fill conduit structure ............................................................................ 3-46
Figure 3.11
Typical trench shield ......................................................................................................... 3-47
Figure 3.12
Typical trench with shoring in unstable ground .................................................................. 3-48
Figure 3.13
Typical trench with shoring in stable ground ...................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3.14
Bell end conduit slip sleeve .............................................................................................. 3-51
Figure 3.15
Expansion joints .............................................................................................................. 3-52
Figure 3.16
Angle bracing ................................................................................................................... 3-53
Figure 3.17
Longitudinal bracing and load forces ................................................................................. 3-54
Figure 3.18
Anchor and plug ............................................................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.19
Back-to-back expansion joint units ................................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.20
Back-to back expansion joint ........................................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.21
In-line single-expansion joint (over 30 m [100 ft]) ............................................................ 3-56
Figure 3.22
Expansion joint (under 30 m [100 ft]) ................................................................................ 3-56
Figure 3.23
Single expansion joint ...................................................................................................... 3-57
Figure 3.24
Angle bracing into stranded area ...................................................................................... 3-57
Figure 3.25
Conduit installed in sidewalk portion of bridge ................................................................... 3-58
Figure 3.26
Conduit installed by hanging under sidewalk portion of bridge ........................................... 3-58
Figure 3.27
Conduit run attached to side of bridge with steel brackets ................................................ 3-59
Figure 3.28
Conduit runs attached to steel I-beams ............................................................................ 3-59
Figure 3.29
Protection of direct-buried cable ....................................................................................... 3-66
Figure 3.30
Hand operated plow .......................................................................................................... 3-69
Figure 3.31
Trencher ........................................................................................................................... 3-70
Figure 3.32
Trencher/vibratory plow ..................................................................................................... 3-71
Figure 3.33
Rip plow ........................................................................................................................... 3-72
Figure 3.34
Auger bore ....................................................................................................................... 3-73
Figure 3.35
Horizontal directional drilling machine ............................................................................... 3-74
Figure 3.36
Wind and ice loadings ...................................................................................................... 3-80
Figure 3.37
Example of keying a pole ................................................................................................. 3-90
Figure 3.38
Pole placement utilizing terrain feature ............................................................................. 3-99
2004 BICSI
3-vii
Figure 3.39
Slack span ..................................................................................................................... 3-105
Figure 3.40
Building attachment methods ......................................................................................... 3-106
Figure 3.41
Flying cross ................................................................................................................... 3-107
Figure 3.42
Midspan clearances ....................................................................................................... 3-108
Figure 3.43
Vertical clearances over obstacles ................................................................................. 3-109
Figure 3.44
Vertical clearances between utilities ............................................................................... 3-109
Figure 3.45
Clearance distances ........................................................................................................ 3-111
Figure 3.46
Push brace ..................................................................................................................... 3-113
Figure 3.47
Guying configurations ..................................................................................................... 3-114
Figure 3.48
Definition of lead and height ............................................................................................ 3-115
Figure 3.49
Calculating pull with pull finder ........................................................................................ 3-116
Figure 3.50
Calculating pull with tape measure ................................................................................. 3-117
Figure 3.51
Guy rule ......................................................................................................................... 3-120
Figure 3.52
Using guy strand selection chart example ...................................................................... 3-121
Figure 3.53
Types of common anchors ............................................................................................. 3-122
Figure 3.54
Guy rod ends ................................................................................................................. 3-123
Figure 3.55
Aerial to underground transition ...................................................................................... 3-126
Figure 3.56
Aerial to direct-buried transition ...................................................................................... 3-127
Figure 3.57
Underground to direct-buried transition ........................................................................... 3-127
Figure 3.58
Underground to building transition ................................................................................... 3-127
Figure 3.59
Aerial to building transition ............................................................................................. 3-128
Figure 3.60
Direct-buried to building transition ................................................................................... 3-129
Figure 3.61
Typical maintenance hole (cutaway side view) ................................................................ 3-134
Figure 3.62
Maintenance hole diagram ............................................................................................. 3-135
Figure 3.63
Maintenance hole frame, cover, and collar ...................................................................... 3-136
Figure 3.64
Center conduit tray ......................................................................................................... 3-137
Figure 3.65
Splayed conduit entry ..................................................................................................... 3-137
Figure 3.66
Basic A precast maintenance hole ................................................................................. 3-138
Figure 3.67
Type A maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .................................... 3-141
Figure 3.68
Type A maintenance hole with splayed window (plan view) .............................................. 3-141
Figure 3.69
Type J maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .................................... 3-142
Figure 3.70
Type J maintenance hole with splayed conduit windows (plan view) ................................ 3-142
Figure 3.71
Type L maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .................................... 3-143
Figure 3.72
Type L maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view) ................................. 3-143
Figure 3.73
Type T maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view) .................................... 3-144
Figure 3.74
Type T maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view) ................................. 3-144
Figure 3.75
Typical cable maintenance hole ...................................................................................... 3-145
Figure 3.76
Typical handhole ............................................................................................................ 3-149
Figure 3.77
Pedestals and cabinets .................................................................................................. 3-152
Figure 3.78
Modular floating dock layout (with condominium-option terms, no scale) ........................ 3-160
Figure 3.79
Sample marina layout .................................................................................................... 3-161
3-viii
2004 BICSI
Tables
Table 3.1
Domestic and international one-call locate company telephone numbers ............................ 3-6
Table 3.2
Uniform color code for utility flagging, painting, or marking .................................................. 3-7
Table 3.3
Clearances ....................................................................................................................... 3-19
Table 3.4
Conduit formations ........................................................................................................... 3-23
Table 3.5
Straight lengths of individual conduit ................................................................................. 3-24
Table 3.6
Rigid bends for individual conduit ...................................................................................... 3-24
Table 3.7
Galvanized rigid steel conduit sizes .................................................................................. 3-28
Table 3.8
Coefficient of friction ......................................................................................................... 3-32
Table 3.9
Cable pulling tension ........................................................................................................ 3-36
Table 3.10
Minimum trench shoring requirements .............................................................................. 3-50
Table 3.11
Ice, wind, and temperature ............................................................................................... 3-82
Table 3.12
Pole class and transverse breaking strength .................................................................... 3-84
Table 3.13
Pole resistance moments ................................................................................................. 3-86
Table 3.14
Rated fiber strength for pole species ................................................................................ 3-86
Table 3.15
Resistance moments for various sizes of poles ................................................................ 3-87
Table 3.16
Pole setting depth required for various heights .................................................................. 3-89
Table 3.17
Transverse load on pole (kg/m per lb/ft of span length) ..................................................... 3-92
Table 3.18
Load imposed by pole attachment .................................................................................... 3-94
Table 3.19
Minimum pole class to support vertical load ..................................................................... 3-97
Table 3.20
Maximum span lengths for self-supporting cable ............................................................ 3-100
Table 3.21
Weight for ALPETH cable ............................................................................................... 3-101
Table 3.22
Cable weight for self-supporting cable ............................................................................. 3-102
Table 3.23
Cable weight for self-supporting cable reinforced sheath ................................................. 3-103
Table 3.24
Typical attachment clearances ....................................................................................... 3-108
Table 3.25
Minimum vertical clearances of cables above ground or rails at midspan crossing .......... 3-110
Table 3.26
Minimum vertical clearance of cable runs along and within limits of public highways ...... 3-110
Table 3.27
Strand sizes ................................................................................................................... 3-112
Table 3.28
Calculating pull when angle is known ............................................................................. 3-118
Table 3.29
Minimum guy strand selection table ............................................................................... 3-119
Table 3.30
Guy strand selection table ............................................................................................. 3-121
Table 3.31
Grades of construction for communications conductors .................................................. 3-125
Table 3.32
Maintenance hole ratings ............................................................................................... 3-132
Table 3.33
Maintenance hole window selection ................................................................................ 3-140
Table 3.34
Maintenance hole frames and covers .............................................................................. 3-147
Table 3.35
Pedestal types ............................................................................................................... 3-153
Table 3.36
Precabling guidelines ..................................................................................................... 3-157
2004 BICSI
3-ix
Examples
Table 3.1
Tension worksheet form .................................................................................................... 3-38
Table 3.2
Conduit run layout ............................................................................................................ 3-39
Table 3.3
Worksheet A to B (empirical and metric) .......................................................................... 3-41
Table 3.4
Worksheet B to A (empirical and metric) .......................................................................... 3-42
3-x
2004 BICSI
Route Design
The telecommunications distribution designer should select routes to preclude the need for
future pathway relocation. Important factors to consider when planning a route include:
Safety.
Location.
Topography.
Local restrictions.
Cost.
Existing infrastructure
Future (proposed) development.
Preliminary Investigations and Surveys

Preliminary investigations and field surveys provide the designer with the information needed
to select pathways and spaces and prevent possible safety hazards. Before beginning
construction, consult available records and contact other utilities and government agencies to
determine existing or proposed facilities (e.g., power, fuel [oil, gas], sewer, water mains,
telephone, and cable systems).
NOTE:
Natural gas and oil mains should be given special consideration because of the fire
hazards they present and the potential liability associated with these structures.
If discrepancies are found between records and observable field conditions, the designer
should request verification from utilities and possibly have test holes dug in order to determine
existing conditions. When foreign lines, pipes, or structures not appearing on records are
discovered, determine, and contact the owner.
If existing facilities present an obstacle the designer may change the proposed route or
elevation.
Preliminary investigations also allow the designer to consider:
2004 BICSI
Traffic conditions.
Building construction.
Road improvement or repair operations.
Landscaping.
Safety conditions.
Work site equipment access.
Future maintenance.
3-1
Preliminary Investigations and Surveys, continued

Generally, when planning pathways, it is advisable to avoid:
Sewer catch basins.

Heavy traffic areas and possible future street locations.
Springs or underground streams.
Combustible gas or liquid storage facilities.
Existing underground utilities.
Aboveground structures and obstacles.
Foreign subsurface structures.
Surfaces that are difficult to restore.
Adverse soil conditions.
Environmentally sensitive areas
Swamp
Quicksand
Rock
During a field survey, prepare sketches and notes, showing the measured distances from curb,
centerline, or property lines to catch basins, sewer maintenance holes (MHs), hydrants, tracks,
utility cover plates, and MHs. Notes should also be made of construction details (e.g., railroad
crossings, bridge attachments, and abnormal soil conditions) that might influence the cost or
feasibility of the proposed structure.
Site Survey
The site survey is one of the most important parts of any job. It allows the designer to take the
time to look at the overall picture and resolve any possible conflicts that could delay or stop
the job. At this stage, the designer gathers general information about the existing outside plant
(OSP) conditions and begins to determine where the proposed OSP facilities will be placed.
The designer also draws detailed notes about the existing field conditions. Upon the
completion of this stage, all corrective information would also be provided.
Route Construction
In planning for customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP) cabling, the particular cable
infrastructure must be first determined. The choices are:
Aerial.
Direct-buried.
Underground.
3-2
2004 BICSI
Site Survey, continued

Typically, aerial plant (e.g., poles, cable, hardware, guys) has an expected life of about
30 years before replacement is needed.
Direct-buried plant has a similar or lesser lifespan depending on other conditions. (The cable
has no external protection from vermin damage or construction unearthing other than its own
sheath and armoring.)
Underground plant, while the most expensive system, usually has the highest cable placement
capacity (dependent on the number and size of conduits placed), and the longest projected
lifespan, typically in excess of 50 years. Despite its initial high cost, it is considered the most
economical route placement system over the span of its service life.
While the expected service life of the selected facility is a factor in the route construction, so
also are the expected technical capabilities. The rapid development of technology makes
todays products outmoded very quickly. The designer must factor in the expected useful life
of the design, and must advise the owner. Getting long life from a technology that has been
bypassed by newer developments may have little value. This is a decision the owner must
make.
Prior to performing a site assessment for a customer, obtain permission from the customer to
work at the facility. If there are sensitive areas involved, determine what security measures
need to be taken to satisfy customer requirements.
While performing the site survey for a customer or potential customer, either for new
construction or overbuilds, it is important to discuss the aesthetic requirements of the job so
that both parties understand the expected end result. For example, if open cuts are being used
to cross streets, does the customer require only the immediate path repaired or will an entire
section be replaced or repaved?
While determining the proposed route for the cable or conduit, discuss the routing with the
customer. There may be reasons for not using the proposed route, such as future plans for
buildings, parking lots, etc. Once the customer approves the proposed route, identify splice or
taper points for the new cable.
Even after the customer has approved the proposed route, the following field conditions may
force changes in the route:
2004 BICSI
Adverse ground conditions

Coordination with other utilities
Lack of easement or permits
Customer space utilization issues
Errors or omissions in documents
3-3
Site Survey, continued

It is not always necessary to build new pathways when placing cables. The existing route may
be fully adequate. The designer should evaluate the existing:
Pole lines.
Conduit.
MHs.
Tunnels.
If space is available, use these structures to place the new cable(s) provided that the customer
owns those structures. If the customer does not own the structures, written permission must
be obtained from the owner(s) before placement is made.
When selecting the appropriate topology, involve the customer in the discussions to determine
any geographic or special requirements. Any route selection involves tradeoffs. A route that
takes a new path may involve obtaining permits and licenses in addition to the costs of
construction, but may provide diversity if the original route remains in service. On the other
hand, following an existing route may have the advantage of minimizing structural costs, but
it may not provide the most direct route. Consequently, owner involvement is most desirable.
Alternate Route Considerations
An alternative route may be considered if the field investigation indicates the proposed route
will be exposed to heavy traffic, expensive pavement replacement, adverse soil conditions, or
other factors that might create:
High installation costs,

Right-of-way problems, or
An unsafe working environment.
Except where safety is a concern, the designer should determine whether a change should
be made by deciding which is most cost efficient (the proposed route or an alternative route).
When selecting the most cost-effective route consideration must be given to legal fees and
the cost associated with delays due to permitting, easement acquisition, and local approvals.
Even if the most direct route appears to require a greater initial cost (more excavation or
restoration costs), this cost should be compared to that required for a longer route (e.g., larger
cable gauges, longer cable loops, more splicing).
3-4
2004 BICSI
One-Call Systems International (OCSI)

OCSI is a committee of the Common Grounds Alliance (CGA). The CGA is a nonprofit
association comprised of 16 shareholder groups (including telecommunications) responsible for
developing and maintaining best practices in the arena of damage prevention to the
underground infrastructure. Its purpose is to minimize the damage to underground utilities,
reduce the cost of repairs, and minimize the danger to workers and the general public when
excavations are being performed.
To locate utilities for nonmembers of OCSI, one option is to purchase or lease

an electronic locating device to perform required location services. A number of
manufacturers make electronic locating devices that, when operated properly, do
an excellent job of locating subsurface utilities. Accessibility to the utilities and certification
of training of these devices should be secured prior to applying this option.
The OCSI has established responsibilities for the excavator as well as the participating
facility owner as listed below.
Excavator responsibilities include:
Notify and comply with the one-call center in advance of work in accordance with
local regulations.
Meet with owners field representative if necessary.
Look for, observe, and preserve markings.
Excavate in a careful and prudent manner in accordance with local regulations.
NOTE:
Most states have limits as to how close machines may dig when attempting to
physically locate utilities for exposure. This clearance is usually 300 mm (12 in)
to 1 m (39 in) from the utility.
WARNING:
Notify the facility owner immediately of any damage to facility, coating, or

disturbance of special backfill. Do not cover up until repair is completed and
facilities, fills, and coatings can be restored.
The responsibilities of the participating facility owners include:

Respond to notices in a timely manner in accordance with
one-call center guidelines and local regulations.
Properly mark customer-owned facility locations.
Honor all field meeting appointments with excavators.
Respond promptly to call for assistance or information.
The CGA best practices (www. commongroundalliance.ca) include sections on onecall centers, locating and marking, as well as excavation best practices.
Table 3.1 lists the domestic and international telephone numbers for established one-call
centers.
2004 BICSI
3-5
One-Call Systems International (OCSI), continued

Table 3.1
Domestic and international one-call locate company telephone numbers
Area
Alabama
Alaska
Arizona
Arkansas
California
Colorado
Connecticut
Delaware
Florida
Georgia
Hawaii
Idaho
Phone Number
800-292-8525
800-478-3121
800-782-5348
800-482-8998
800-227-2600
800-922-1987
800-922-4455
800-282-8555
800-432-4770
800-282-7411
800-227-2600
800-626-4950
800-822-1974
800-428-4950
800-398-3285
800-424-5555
Illinois
800-342-1585
800-892-0123
312-744-7000
Indiana
800-382-5544
Iowa
800-292-8989
Kansas
800-344-7233
Kentucky
800-752-6007
Louisiana
800-272-3020
Maine
888-344-7233
Maryland
800-257-7777
800-282-8555
Massachusetts 888-344-7233
Michigan
800-482-7171
Minnesota
800-252-1166
Mississippi
800-227-6477
Missouri
800-344-7483
Montana
800-424-5555
800-551-8344
Nebraska
800-331-5666
Nevada
800-227-2600
New Hampshire 888-344-7233
New Jersey
800-272-1000
New Mexico
800-321-2537
888-526-0400
New York
800-962-7962
800-272-4480
Australia
61-3-9217-2833
61-8-9424-8116
61-2-9365-7582
61-7-3217-6332
08-8230-5024
Region Covered
Area
North Carolina
North Dakota
Ohio
Oklahoma
Oregon
Pennsylvania
Rhode Island
South Carolina
South Dakota
Tennessee
Texas
Bonner, Boundary
Northern area
Kootenai
Shoshone and
Benewah
Clearwater, Idaho,
Lewis and
Nez Perce
all other counties
Statewide except
Chicago
Chicago
Utah
Vermont
Virginia
Washington
Phone Number
800-632-4949
800-795-0555
800-362-2764
800-522-6543
800-332-2344
800-242-1776
888-344-7233
888-721-7877
800-781-7474
800-351-1111
800-245-4545
800-344-8377
800-669-8344
800-662-4111
888-344-7233
800-552-7001
800-257-7777
800-441-8355
800-424-5555
360-532-3550
360-425-2506
509-663-6111
509-456-8000
Eastern shore
800-553-4344
Statewide
Northwest
Statewide
Dona Ana
Statewide except
NYC and Long
Island
NYC and Long
Island
West Virginia
Wisconsin
Wyoming
District of
Columbia
Victoria, Tasmania,
NSW, S. Australia,
Australian Capital
and Northern
Western Australia
NSW, Australian
Capital
Queensland
South Australia
and Northern
Canada
Finland
Republic of
China
Scotland
3-6
Region Covered
Statewide
Statewide
Statewide
Statewide except
North and Eastern
shore
Northern Virginia
Eastern shore
Grays Harbor and
Pacific counties
Cowlitz and
Wakkiakun
counties
Chelan and
Douglas counties
Spokane and
Stevens counties
Clark, Walla Walla,
Skamanial,
Klicckitat,
Columbia,
Garfield, Asotin,
Kittitas, Yakima,
Witman, Lincoln,
Greys Harbor,
Pacific,
Wahkiakum,
Latah, and
Clearwater
counties
800-245-4848
800-242-8511
800-348-1030
800-849-2476
800-257-7777
Statewide
Statewide
800-242-3447
800-400-2255
800-663-9228
800-474-6886
352-02-271-1181
Alberta
Ontario
Quebec
British Columbia
Southern and
Central
86-02-351-2345
44-800-800-333
2004 BICSI
Flagging, Painting, and Marking Utilities

To mark utilities in the field, the APWA recommends the uniform color code (as shown in
Table 3.2):
Table 3.2
Uniform color code for utility flagging, painting, or marking
The color
Is used to identify
White
Proposed excavation.
Pink
Temporary survey markings.
Red
Electric power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cables.
Yellow
Gas, oil, steam, petroleum or gaseous materials.
Orange
Communications, alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit.
Blue
Potable (drinking) water.
Purple
Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines.
Green
Sewers and drain lines.
Test Holes (Potholes)

Identify obstacles located along the proposed route. By using either electronic means or test
holes, locate any underground obstacles.
A test hole is created by hand-digging or using other non-invasive methods (as described in
CGA best practices) a small hole either directly above or to the side of the obstacles assumed
positions. It is important to note that the obstacle could be an undocumented utility.
This test hole is within the tolerance zone. This zone varies between 300 mm (12 in) to
990 mm (39 in) from the marked obstacle. Check local ordinances or state laws for tolerances
and advance notice requirements. If the zone is not identified by law or code, the measured
zone is 450 mm (18 in) measured horizontally from each side of the facility.
When an obstacle is located, create a plan and profile drawing to identify its location. Using
this information, the route can be plotted.
2004 BICSI
3-7
Documentation
Make a record of the proposed route details (e.g., path, quantity, size, and depth) with
references to a fixed point, showing the condition of road surfaces and various adjoining
structures. This record may be valuable if it becomes necessary to challenge future property
damage claims. A videotape record or dated, notarized photographs showing pre- and
post-installation may also be useful for this purpose.
Right-of-Way
When working on public or private right-of-way (see Chapter 8: Right-of-Way), it is important
to obtain the necessary permits and/or easements before beginning construction. If
construction is planned on a:
Public right-of-way, obtain permits from appropriate authority having jurisdictions (AHJs)
(e.g., federal, state, county, city, park) for use of the proposed route.
Private right-of-way/easement, the right to use the property must be negotiated with each
land owner.
Joint Use Occupancy

To reduce the cost of multiple trenches and minimize the potential for damage of the existing
facilities, the telephone company, community antenna television (CATV), and power company
occasionally choose to dig one trench and share it with one or all of the others. If joint
trenching is an option in a particular situation, refer to the National Electrical Safety Code
(NESC), Part 3, for rules on separation of cables.
NOTE:
Under a joint-use agreement, be sure to obtain the concurrence of all parties

involved.
3-8
2004 BICSI
Pathways
Introduction
This section addresses design criteria that require attention by the designer when designing
CO-OSP, including:
Underground pathways and spaces.

Direct-buried pathways and spaces.
Aerial pathways and spaces.
IMPORTANT:
No cutting can be performed that may affect a building structurally,

without the prior approval of the architect/building owner. No structural
members can be cut or coring/sleeves installed without prior approval of a
professional engineer who is licensed in the state where the work is taking
place.
Do not make alterations that may affect a building structurally, without the
prior approval of the architect or building owner.
Do not cut structural members or core sleeves without prior approval of a
licensed structural professional engineer (PE).
Underground
The advantages of underground cable systems are that they:
Provide out-of-sight service and maintain the aesthetic appearance of the property.
Are adaptable for future facility placement or removal.
Provide additional physical cable protection.
The disadvantages of underground cable systems are that they:
Have a high initial installation cost.

Require more careful route planning.
Provide a possible path for unwanted water or gases to enter buildings.
Direct-Buried
The advantages of direct-buried cable systems are that they:
2004 BICSI
Provide out-of-sight service and maintain the aesthetic appearance of the property.
Have a low initial installation cost when compared to underground.
Can easily bypass obstructions.
3-9
Direct-Buried, continued
The disadvantages of direct-buried cable systems are that they:
Are not flexible for future service reinforcements or changes.

Do not provide the same physical protection for the cable sheath as conduit.
May be difficult to locate in the case of all dielectric optical fiber cable.
Provide a possible path for unwanted water or gases to enter buildings.
Aerial
The advantages of aerial systems are that they:
Usually have the lowest installation costs.

Are readily accessible for maintenance.
The disadvantages of aerial systems are that they:
Are aesthetically displeasing.

Create potential clearance problems.
Are susceptible to environmental damage.
Are more susceptible to damage by the public, with potential liability to the owner.
May have a higher cost of ongoing maintenance.
3-10
2004 BICSI
Underground Pathways
Introduction
Underground conduit structures are pathways used for placing telecommunications cable
between access points such as maintenance holes (MHs), handholes (HHs), and building
entrances.
Before selecting a route, a field survey can assist the designer in determining if any
construction problems exist and whether any cost savings could be realized by selecting a
different route. Use good judgment when planning a conduit route to obtain the best location
for construction, maintenance, cable placing, and to ensure an optimum design.
NOTE:
The shortest route is not necessarily the optimum design.
The number of ducts required in a proposed conduit system, addition or extension depends on
the number of cables necessary to provide for the service being installed, expected growth,
and maintenance. Cables required for growth may include facilities necessary to cutover and
relieve an existing cable that is at maximum capacity.
Do not attempt a detailed conduit system design until compiling and carefully considering all
facts that might influence the final placement location. To allow ample time for preliminary
plan changes, necessary investigations should be performed well in advance. The most
desirable location for the conduit structure and MHs can be determined after a careful review
of the proposed main conduit routes, approximate MH locations, and alternative routes. This
data must be supplemented with field surveys and information obtained from other subsurface
users (i.e., other utilities). Every effort should be made to avoid exposing or coming into
contact with existing underground facilities owned by other utilities. In many areas, public
utilities have developed public utility underground facilities damage prevention systems. (See
Table 3.1 for locating centers telephone numbers.)
To make optimum use of the conduit structure for subsequent cable-placing operations,
particular care should be given to the MH locations and spacing. A conduit system should be
designed with a minimum number of horizontal and vertical directional changes. The ideal
structure is essentially straight runs between MHs with a grade drop for water run-off.
The designer can ensure a structures usefulness, regardless of reel location, by calculating
the pulling tensions expected if the cable is pulled from either direction and using the larger
value for design purposes. (See Section Length/Diameter Considerations for information
regarding conduit sizing and pull tension calculations.) Maximum lengths of certain cables that
can be placed on a reel should be considered when placing MHs.
Additionally, it is important for the designer to recognize that conduit bend locations and the
geometry of each bend (horizontal and vertical) are important factors to be considered
throughout the conduit design.
2004 BICSI
3-11
Conditions Requiring Conduit Construction

The area to be served is usually determined by a needs assessment. When considering new
conduit, additions or extensions, review all data that could cause changes to the needs of the
area to be served.
Conduit construction may be required when:
A pole line (existing or new) cannot support additional cable placements.

Required by government, property owner, or the customer.
Direct-buried plant needs reinforcement if the construction corridor has limited space.
Right-of-way limitations eliminate other choices.
An area is too congested to permit other construction methods.
Underground subdivision agreements forbid other types or methods.
Once the need for conduit construction has been determined, the conduit route should be
designed in order to provide the most direct and accessible route from the service feed.
Factors affecting route selection include:
Right-of-way availability.
Topographical limitations (e.g., rock, sand, clay).
Land use and development (e.g., buildings, watersheds, storm/sewer drains).
Economic factors (e.g., right-of -way costs, congestion of utilities).
Joint-use potential.
Future right-of-way expansions.
Environmental impact limitations.
Economics
When conduit construction is required, design the most economical plant possible, keeping in
mind the costs associated with:
Right-of-way.
Materials (e.g., conduit, select backfill, concrete).
Labor, freight, and other costs that vary depending upon the job-site location.
Subsurface conditions (e.g., rock, sand, and obstructions).
Restoration of landscape.
Roads.
Railroads (RRs).
Water crossings.
Surface restoration.
Protection from traffic.
Type of duct formation.
Operations and maintenance expenses.
Environmental impact.
3-12
2004 BICSI
Conduit System Planning

Conduit routes can be classified into two basic groups:
New routes (no existing conduit).

Existing routes (existing conduit and the existing structure must be reinforced, expanded,
extended, etc.).
Most design factors are the same in both an existing or new conduit route. However, when
planning to use an existing route, the designer must evaluate the existing MHs to determine:
Is there a safe working environment?

Will the racking hardware accommodate the additional supporting hardware?
Is there sufficient room for splices cases or other additional hardware?
Is entry space available in the MH walls?
If MHs meet the above requirements, and the existing route is used, the designer must decide
whether to place the conduit:
Above the existing conduit.

Beside the existing conduit.
At some distance from the existing conduit, using existing MHs as duct termination points.
Directional boring below existing facilities.
If the new structure is placed above or beside the existing conduit:
The ground cover must be able to sustain the expected loads (vehicular or otherwise).
Must meet all applicable codes.
Municipal right-of-way restrictions must be satisfied, if required.
The existing conduit must not be damaged.
If bends are required the designer must consider the increased pulling tension. Tension
calculations should be made before any design is finalized.
When an existing MH does not provide sufficient space and safe working conditions and a
new MH is required:
2004 BICSI
The existing MH may be rebuilt and/or expanded.

A new MH may be installed (at a new location).
3-13
Finished Conduit System Design

The designer plans the conduit system and specifies the types and quantities of
material needed.
A finished design should consist of construction plans and specifications showing the:
Location of all existing and proposed conduit.

Size and configuration of MHs.
Total duct length (linear length times number of ducts) of conduit (adjacent MH
wall-to-wall measurements).
Type of conduit material.
Special conduit fittings required.
Conduit (ductbank) formation and depth requirements.
Encasement specifications and materials.
MH or cable entrances.
Locations of any existing substructures.
Restoration requirements.
Required cuts (e.g., concrete, asphalt).
Location and depth of other structures (profile).
Traffic control plan.
Conduit System Requirements

The designer should determine the number of conduits to be placed in a proposed system
installation based on:
Initial requirements plus one maintenance conduit.

The estimated growth over the life cycle of the system.
Consultation with owner or owners representative.
As part of the design process, the designer should also determine the inside diameter of the
conduit appropriate for the conduit system. It is not advisable to decrease the diameter of the
conduit run except where a branch (lateral) conduit run intersects with the main conduit route.
Other factors requiring consideration when determining the number of conduits to be placed in
a system include:
Routing changes.
Special construction.
Public inconvenience caused by further expansion.
Other wire-using utilities (e.g., low voltage systems, leased conduits).
Franchise agreements (e.g., city, fire, police).
Rearrangement of feeds to different areas.
3-14
2004 BICSI
Conduit System Requirements, continued

When a main conduit run has two or more branches, it is possible for the total number of
branch conduits (initial and estimated) to exceed the number indicated for the main conduit
run. This may be a result of using large cables in the main run as opposed to the smaller ones
used in branch runs.
Lateral/subsidiary conduits may be conduits that connect to structures (e.g., buildings,
pedestals, cabinets, or poles). Lateral ducts are typically placed from the sidewall of a MH to
the structure. Subsidiary ducts are extended from the end wall of a MH along with the main
conduit run to feed a structure. This type of construction may be advantageous when the
location of future buildings is known. Examples of lateral ducts and a subsidiary duct are
illustrated in Figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1
Lateral and subsidiary ducts
Bldg
A
Bldg
B
Lateral
duct
Lateral
duct
MH
MH
Subsidiary duct
MH = Maintenance hole
At times, it is desirable, if not mandatory, to place all conduits when initially installing a
conduit system. Because they are difficult to access, all conduits should be placed during
initial installation when working at locations such as railroad crossings, bridges, and freeways.
2004 BICSI
3-15
Future Conduit System Requirements

Customer demand for high-bandwidth transmission and the available technology to meet this
demand greatly affects the sizing of future conduit. Some of these changes include:
The increased use of T-1 digital lines reduces the need for large pair-count, twisted-pair
cables which, in turn, may affect the conduit size or number of conduits in a system.
Use of optical fiber cables may reduce conduit requirements.
Reclaiming of existing conduit systems. While this was a common practice for twistedpair cables (e.g., replace a 1200 and a 1500 pair cable with a 2700 pair to regain a spare
duct, or replace a 1200 pair with an 1800 pair to gain 600 growth pairs), the use of a spare
100 mm (4 in) duct to receive 32 mm (1.25 in) high density polyethylene (HDPE) for optic
fiber cables allows existing routes to grow in capacity without additional structural
investment. The replacement of two or more smaller twisted-pair or optical fiber cables,
each in its own duct, with a larger cable in a single duct, reclaims duct space for growth
and avoids additional infrastructure investment.
Planning Lateral Ducts

When planning lateral ducts to distribution points, spare ducts for future use should be
provided. Lateral duct size is dependent on whether two or more ducts should be placed
between a MH and a terminating point such as a building or pole. A larger duct should be used
when placing one duct. Lateral duct length is limited by the size of the cable to be pulled into
it, the number of bends it will contain, and limitations by ANSI and local codes. It is
recommended to install a minimum of one spare.
Planning Subsidiary Ducts
If constructed at the same time as a main conduit run, place subsidiary ducts on top of the
main run. This is the most economical way to place subsidiary ducts. It also affords some top
protection for the main run.
It is the designers responsibility to research the need for subsidiary duct (such as the planning
for future buildings). This is the additional ducts required to house cables extending from the
main underground system to a pole or building. Subsidiary ducts can be:
Individual conduits.
Incorporated as part of a multiple duct structure.
When individual ducts are planned at the same time as the main conduit, position them on the
top of the main conduit formation or, if applicable, in the side wall corner of the MH.
However, the designer should try to avoid duct placed in the side walls as such placement
reduces racking space and prohibits proper bending radii of large cables. If there is doubt
about the terminating point, place the subsidiary conduit as a continuous section from the MH.
When the subsidiary duct is part of a multiple-duct structure, design the upper tiers of the
structure (preferably the corner ducts) for subsidiary use since they are more readily
accessible. This results in reduced excavating and restoration costs and uses less subsurface
space.
3-16
2004 BICSI
Planning Subsidiary Ducts, continued

Conduit system arrangements should be compatible with MH cable racking arrangements and
are subject to:
Trench width and/or depth constraints imposed by terrain.

Presence of other structures.
Required working space.
Generally, 2-, 3-, or 4-wide conduit arrangements are preferred for single- or double-wall
racking. Where a large number of ducts or other circumstances require center racking and
wall racking, wider duct arrangements may be appropriate.
Section Length/Diameter Considerations
The designer must determine the proper length of the conduit section. A primary objective of
conduit design is to make conduit section lengths as long as possible to reduce the number of
MHs, cable splices, and associated cable setups needed for construction.
The length of the conduit section will vary. Section length considerations are based on:
The frequency and location of present and future subsidiary ducts, branch cables, etc.
Load coil, build-out capacitor, and carrier equipment locations.
Subsurface obstructions located along the conduit route.
Conduit route intersections.
Cable cutting lengths from the manufacturer (i.e., splices are not allowed in conduits).
The need for:
Intermediate MHs due to excessive cable pulling tensions caused by bends.
MHs for splicing, based on the maximum available reel length of cable.
Maintaining a safe MH environment.
Applicable ANSI standards.
The designer must consider all facts pertinent to the route and exercise the best judgment in
each case.
Ducts must be large enough for a cable or cables to be pulled through the duct. As a rule of
thumb, the diameter of a duct should be at least 1.15 times the diameter of the cable, or onehalf trade size larger in diameter than the diameter of the largest anticipated cable (whichever
provides the greater clearance). It is the diameter of the pulling eye that is more important.
Cables are normally ordered from the cable manufacturer with the pulling eye installed. If not,
a core hitch is provided by the onsite crews for pulling cable.
Except for small cables, the diameter of the pulling eye (de) may be calculated as follows:
de < 1.1 dc
Where:
dc = cable diameter
2004 BICSI
3-17
Maintenance Hole (MH) Location and Quantity

The safety of personnel, and the general public, is a primary concern when selecting MH
locations. A desirable location will:
Provide a safe work area.

Allow for adequate traffic control when the MH is open (e.g., the placing of traffic
warning devices to alert motorists of upcoming construction).
Provide sufficient space for cable trailers, pulling trucks, etc., during construction.
Be suitable for placing, splicing, and maintenance of cables and associated equipment.
Not jeopardize vehicular or pedestrian traffic flow.
Be located out of the roadway (when possible).
MHs should not be located in or near an intersection or near the point where a curve occurs in
a road. Protection of the work area at these locations is difficult.
The number of MHs built into a conduit run should be kept to a minimum. When planning MH
locations, the designer should:
Document MH locations on work drawings.

Locate MHs at junction points that permit installation of main, and lateral or subsidiary
ducts with minimum bending.
Factors that may impact MH location include:
Municipal, county, state, or federal restrictions.

Surface water drainage into the MH.
Water table.
Public and worker safety (when MH is open).
Future street widening.
Provisions for cable placement.
Customer input.
Applicable ANSI standards.
Before installing/constructing a MH, the designer should investigate each proposed location to
determine subsurface conditions and/or the existence of foreign pipes or ducts. If unable to
determine subsurface conditions from the existing records and field observations, or there is
doubt about subsurface conditions, the designer should request a test hole be dug.
The test hole should be made diagonally across the proposed site and wide enough to ensure
clearance for the MH.
If foreign pipes or substructures are encountered during test hole or MH excavations,
immediately investigate their ownership. It is possible that these pipes and/or substructures
may be removed if they are not in use and their owner(s) grant(s) permission. If the pipes
and/or substructures cannot be removed, the designer must decide whether to change the
MHs location or grade.
3-18
2004 BICSI
Clearances
The minimum recommended separations between telecommunications conduit systems and
outside surfaces of foreign structures (see Table 3.3) are:
150 mm (6 in) when crossing pipes (e.g., gas, water, oil).

300 mm (12 in) when parallel to pipes (e.g., gas, water, oil).
For personnel safety and the protection of telecommunications equipment in the United States,
the following clearances are required by the NESC.
Table 3.3
Clearances
Structure
Minimum Clearance
Power or other
75 mm (3 in) concrete foreign conduit

100 mm (4 in) masonry
300 mm (12 in) of well-tamped earth
Power conduit
terminated on poles
Separate poles, if possible. If same pole, preferably 180 degrees

but not less than 90 degrees.
Railroads
When crossing 1.27 m (50 in) below top of rail.
Street railways
900 mm (36 in) below top of rail
NOTE:
Check local authorities for applicable codes.
Conduit Depth
It is the designers responsibility to be aware of any unusual depth requirements that are
established for subsurface structures.
Installing conduit improperly can result in conduit deformations, sinking of the backfill, and
subsequent collapse of the road surface.
The top of the conduit should be located at a sufficient depth (normally 610 to 762 mm
[24 to 30 in]) below surface grade so the loads (live and dead) can be sustained by the conduit
structure. Live (or dynamic) loads have a greater effect on conduit than dead (or earth) loads.
2004 BICSI
3-19
Live or Dynamic Loads

Live or dynamic loads are caused by vehicular traffic (see Figure 3.2) and result from the
combination of both a vehicles weight and speed. It is assumed they are transmitted through a
conical-shaped region extending downward from the point of application. The greater the
distance from the point of application, the greater the area over which the load is spread, and
the less load per unit area. When conduits are located at least 1.8 m (6.0 ft) below grade, the
load is so dispersed there is no need for concern.
Highway and road engineers usually work with specified loading conditions designated as
H-10, H-20, H-40, etc. This number refers to the maximum vehicular tonnage. For design
purposes, 80 percent of the weight is assumed to be concentrated on the rear axle. For
example, H-20 loading means that the roadway is built to accommodate a 20-ton vehicle with
80 percent or 14 515 kg (32,000 lb) per rear axle, assuming the vehicle has one rear axle.
Figure 3.2
Live or dynamic load dispersal
Load
Lines of
load dispersal
3-20
Depth
2004 BICSI
Dead or Earth Loads

Dead or earth loads are created by the backfill and other aggregates. Dead loads are not
excessive when the amount of backfill measures 610 mm (24 in) or less; however, the exact
weight measurements vary with soil type (see Figure 3.3).
Figure 3.3
Dead or earth load dispersal
Lines of
load dispersal
Depth
Recommended conduit materials must be designed to withstand loads created from normal
traffic flow when there is an adequate amount of fill between the top of the conduit structure
and ground surface. However, when the cover is less than recommended, additional
mechanical protection must be provided (e.g., a reinforced concrete slab placed above the
conduit structure.)
NOTE:
If concrete encasement is used, the reinforcing bars can be included along the base
of the encasements.
Tensile Stresses
Tensile stresses in the conduit structure can cause conduit units to separate at the joints.
The causes for tensile stresses include:
Trench irregularities.
Unstable soil conditions.
Conduit structure damage.
The placement of reinforcement bars within the concrete encasement, along the base of the
structure, could prevent these stresses.
2004 BICSI
3-21
Drain Slope
Installing underground conduit so that a slope exists at all points of the run allows drainage and
prevents the accumulation of water. A drain slope towards the MH from the center of the
conduit run or from the building of no less than 10 mm per meter (0.125 in per foot).
Conduit Formations
Design conduit formations to facilitate orderly cable racking within the MH and ensure
minimal change in the formation when entering a MH. The following recommendations allow
for the design of the most efficient cable formation.
Preferably, main conduit formations should enter the end walls of the MH at a point
approximately halfway between the floor and ceiling.
For wall racking considerations, design splayed ductbank entrances at the end walls rather
than center placement (see figures 3.64 and 3.65).
If the total number of conduits being placed is significantly less than the capacity of the
terminating MH or cable entrance, conduits should enter at a lower level within the MH.
The upper space should be reserved for future conduit additions.
The conduit entrance into the MH should be sized for the ultimate number of conduits to
prevent the need for future wall breakouts.
3-22
2004 BICSI
Conduit Formations, continued

Table 3.4 lists recommended conduit formations for up to 40 conduits at the MH entrance. If
more than 40 conduits are planned, special racking (center and wall) is recommended.
Table 3.4
Conduit formations
No. of Ducts
Using Conduit
Multiple Duct
2 wide by 2 high
One, 4-duct
3 wide by 2 high
One, 6-duct
4 wide by 2 high
Two, 4-duct
3 wide by 3 high
One, 9-duct
10
One, 6-duct and one, 4-duct
12
4 wide by 3 high
Two, 6-duct or three, 4-duct
15
One, 9-duct and one, 6-duct
16
4 wide by 4 high
Four, 4-duct
18
Two, 9-duct
20
4 wide by 5 high
Two, 6-duct and two, 4-duct
24
4 wide by 6 high
Four, 6-duct or two, 12-duct
28
4 wide by 7 high
30
32
4 wide by 8 high
36
4 wide by 9 high
Four, 9-duct (3 wide) or three, 12-duct
40
4 wide by 10 high
Four, 9-duct (3 wide) and one, 4-duct
Over 40*
* Investigate center racking possibilities.

Advantages of Constructing Formations Using Individual Conduit
At times, conduit can be the best choice (see tables 3.5 and 3.6) because it:
2004 BICSI
Is lightweight. Mechanical handling equipment is not required.

Provides good joint integrity.
Produces a strong, stable structure if concrete encased.
Can be easily rearranged to avoid obstacles.
Can be pneumatically rodded.
Is available with bell end to allow ease of joint connection.
3-23
Conduit Formations, continued

Table 3.5
Straight lengths of individual conduit
Weight kg/m (lb/ft)

Material
Length
Type B
Type C
Type D
Type E
Plastic
6 m* (20 ft)
.3-.6
.6-.7
.5-.8
N/A
(0.6-1.0)
(1.0-1.5)
(1.2-1.7)
*Longer and shorter lengths available from manufacturer.

Type B (thin wall) requires concrete encasement.
Type C (thick wall) may be direct-buried with selected backfill in straight runs.
Type D is ultraviolet (sunlight) and flame resistant.
NOTE:
Type E is not used for straight line conduit.
Table 3.6
Rigid bends for individual conduit
Rigid Bends for 103 mm (4 Trade Size) Individual Conduit

Material
B, C, or D Plastic
E Plastic*
Angle (Degrees)
Radius
Length
4.6 m (15 ft)
0.71 m (2.33 ft)
30***
4.6 m (15 ft)
2.54 m (8.33 ft)
30***
3.7 m (12 ft)
2.06 m (6.75 ft)
45***
2.7 m (9 ft)
2.31 m (7.58 ft)
45***
2.7 m (9 ft)
1.60 m (5.25 ft)
45***
0.9 m (3 ft)
0.86 m (2.83 ft)
90***
0.9 m (3 ft)
1.60 m (5.25 ft)
90**/***
0.9 m (3 ft)
1.83 m (6.00 ft)
64***
0.9 m (3 ft)
1.17 m (3.83 ft)
* Replaces cast iron for subsidiary conduit.

** Also available in split form for repairs.
*** Requires concrete encasement.
3-24
2004 BICSI
Advantages of Multiple-Bore Conduit

In some situations, it is advantageous to use multiple-bore conduit since it does not require:
Long trench openings.

Select backfill.
Ready-mix concrete.
Types of Conduit
Types of conduit include:
EB-20For encasement in concrete.

EB-35For encasement in concrete.
DB-60For direct burial.
Rigid nonmetallic conduit Schedule 40For direct burial or encasement in concrete.
Rigid nonmetallic conduit Schedule 80For direct burial or encasement in concrete.
Multiple plastic duct (MPD)For direct burial or installation in conduit.
Rigid metallic conduitFor direct burial or encasement in concrete.
Galvanized rigid steel conduitFor direct burial.
Intermediate metallic conduitFor direct burial or encasement in concrete.
Fiberglass ductFor direct burial or encasement in concrete.
Innerduct polyethylene (PE)For direct burial or installation in conduit.
Innerduct polyvinyl chloride (PVC)For direct burial or installation in conduit.
Multiple celled conduitFor fiber optics and other small diameter cables.
NOTES: Encased buried (EB) and direct-buried (DB) must meet the requirements of
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) TC-6 and TC-8.
Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 rigid nonmetallic conduit must meet the requirements
of NEMA TC-2.
NEMA TC-10 covers telecommunications Type B and D.
Additional specifications can be found in American Society for Testing and
Materials ASTM F512-95, Smooth-Wall (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Conduit Fittings
for Underground Installation.
The conduit classifications above differ based on the type of material used, and in the wall
thickness of the pipes. Thin-walled conduit may require encasement in concrete to protect the
structure from being crushed by traffic load or from dead load form the earth itself. Conduit
with a thicker wall may be direct buried, although if it cannot be buried deeply enough, it may
also be encased in concrete. Once built, the conduit should remain usable for 75 to 100 years
and fulfill design specifications.
2004 BICSI
3-25
Selecting a Type of Conduit

Selecting the appropriate conduit material can combine favorable first-cost and long-term
serviceability for each specific job. To make the best possible decision, the designer must
consider numerous factors, including cost (especially when pavement demolition and
restoration is involved).
In locations where:
The expense of pavement demolition and restoration is considerable, use material that
lends itself to narrow, deep formations.
Soil is loose or wet, a shallow or wide formation is desirable.
Numerous changes in direction are anticipated, and rolling or splitting of the formation is
required, single-bore conduit generally provides the best facility to avoid subsurface
obstructions.
Other factors that affect the selection of conduit materials include:
Job specifications.
Local codes.
Material cost.
Local availability.
Ease of handling.
Ease of joining.
Concrete encasement requirements (curves, bends, elevation changes, etc.).
Backfill requirements.
Soil conditions.
Special conditions (e.g., heat, gas, loads, chemical environments, limited cover).
NOTE:
Some factors may be unique to the conduit material.
3-26
2004 BICSI
Selecting a Type of Conduit, continued

Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
Galvanized rigid steel conduit is intended for use in locations only where other materials are
not suitable.
Galvanized rigid steel is the recommended choice when:
Vertical space available for conduits is limited.

Conduit will be subjected to impact loads from heavy traffic.
Conduit is to be placed by means of a pipe pusher.
Conduit is to be preformed and lowered into the bed of a stream or river.
Environmental conditions are too severe for other types of conduit.
Designing submarine crossings.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit used in telecommunications conduit construction must meet the
following requirements:
The conduit must be made from a soft, weldable quality steel that is suitable for bending.
The hot-dipped zinc coating (galvanization) placed on the interior of the conduit must be
smooth and free from:
Blisters.
Projections.
Other defects.
The weight of the zinc coating on the interior and exterior surfaces should not be less
than 0.12 kg per 0.09 square meters (2.0 oz per square foot) of total coated surface.
Galvanized pipe for ordinary uses, such as water pipe, does not meet requirements for use in
telecommunications systems. Commercial electrical conduit does not have the required weight
of zinc coating on the outside surface and there may be no zinc coating on the interior surface.
2004 BICSI
3-27
Selecting a Type of Conduit, continued

Galvanized rigid steel conduit is available in all commercial sizes with or without threaded ends
and couplings. Table 3.7 indicates typical sizes.
Table 3.7
Galvanized rigid steel conduit sizes
Trade
Size
Plain End
OD mm (in)
ID mm (in)
33.53 (1.32)
26.67 (1.05)
1-1/2
48.26 (1.90)
40.89 (1.61)
60.45 (2.38)
52.58 (2.07)
88.90 (3.50)
77.98 (3.07)
3-1/2
101.60 (4.00)
90.17 (3.55)
114.30 (4.50)
102.36 (4.02)
ID
OD
=
=
Inside diameter
Outside diameter
A disadvantage of steel conduit is that it tends to choke current flow in a cable. To

overcome this choke effect, the steel conduit must be bonded to the cable shield at both ends
of the conduit run. Refer to Chapter 6: Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection.
Conduit Construction
Conduit construction methods of the past contained joints that allowed silt to leak into the duct.
In many instances, this duct must be cleaned (commonly called rodding and mandreling)
before cables can be installed. In several cases, dig-ups may be required to clear
obstructions. To prevent these types of expenses, certain operational considerations should be
examined when selecting conduit material, including:
The conduits susceptibility to silting.

Coefficient of friction as it affects cable pulling tensions.
Smoothness and strength of bends or grade changes to minimize winch-line cutting.
Encasement.
Conduit with poorly made joints, or joints that open while in service, eventually become fouled
with silt, a condition that becomes progressively worse over time. Proper installation
procedures prevent this and limit the amount of water ingress to the system. This minimizes
the opportunity for corrosion, primarily in MHs, and reduces MH maintenance in areas where
the water table is high.
3-28
2004 BICSI
Conduit Construction, continued

Rodding by mechanical or manual means is required where there are minor obstructions or
slight misalignments (e.g., in multiple clay or concrete conduit). Where conduit is broken it
must be unearthed and repaired. Plastic conduits having substantially airtight joints between
MHs can be rodded with compressed air systems. Investment for equipment is lower than
that required for mechanical rodding, and costs per conduit length are generally more
economical. Rodding costs vary depending on the condition of the conduits and the methods
employed.
Conduit Casings
It may be a requirement to place conduit in large steel tubes (casings) as a means of
protection or to facilitate a crossing where an open trench cannot be provided. This may occur
at railroads, major state highways or freeways, river or stream crossings, etc. For additional
requirements on casing lengths, etc., refer to Chapter 8: Right-of-Way.
This type of protection usually requires that the tubing be placed by boring methods. It is an
expensive operation and should be specified only when other methods are not practical.
Typical installations under railroads and highways are shown in figures 3.4 and 3.5.
Figure 3.4
Conduit casings under railroads
7.6 m (25 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
Ditch
0.91 m
(3.00 ft)
Roadbed
CL
Track
0.91 m (3.00 ft)
CL
Track
1.4 or 1.7 m
(4.5 or 5.5 ft)
0.91 m
(3.00 ft)
1.7 m
(5.5 ft)
Sand fill
Conduits
Casing
CL = Center line
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
After conduit installation is complete, the casings must be filled with fine sand
(blown in under air pressure) and sealed at both ends with a 75 mm (3 in) concrete
wall.
3-29
Conduit Construction, continued

Figure 3.5
Conduit casings under highway
Roadway structure
1.5 m
(5.0 ft)
Roadway
Shoulder
Pavement
Unpaved
ditch
Base
Subbase
1.2 m (4.0 ft)
0.91 m (3.00 ft)
0.91 m (3.00 ft)

Conduits
Casing
NOTE:
Sand fill is optional.
Thick-wall plastic and concrete conduit requires encasement only when:
Subject to heavy vehicular traffic.

Placed in unstable soil conditions.
A high soil compaction is required (85 percent or greater).
A minimum 750 mm (30 in) cover cannot be maintained.
Thin-wall plastic must always be encased in concrete or some type of approved stable
sleeving.
Wall Thickness of the Casing Pipe
The wall thickness of the casing pipe is dependent on several factors such as the:
Live or dynamic load from vehicular traffic.

Dead or earth load.
Diameter of the casings used.
NOTE:
Casing walls must be at least 4.8 mm (0.188 in) thick.
3-30
2004 BICSI
Calculating Conduit Pulling Tensions

The designer should understand there is a limit to the amount of tension that can be used to
pull cables into a length of duct. The tension limit is based on either the winch-line strength or
the cable strength.
Cable strength, also known as the maximum recommended installation load (MRIL), is the
load a particular cable can withstand without experiencing electrical or mechanical
degradation. MRIL is based on the conductor strength within the cable sheath and must be
obtained from the manufacturer for each type of cable to be installed in the conduit system.
Pulling tension should be constantly monitored when using a mechanical pulling device, such
as a winch or tugger. The mechanical pulling device should be equipped with a tension meter
or dynamometer. This should be placed between the cable head and the power winch, and
should be monitored throughout the pulling operation. This pulling device should be equipped
with a limit clutch to adjust tension. The maximum pulling tension as specified by the cable
manufacturer must never be exceeded. The maximum pulling tension must not exceed the
rated working load for the winch cable. For 11.9 mm (0.47 in) non-rotating wire ropes, the
maximum pulling tension is 30 kN (6500 lbf).
Winch-line tension fluctuates during cable-pulling operations and may reach peak values
greater than the average cable pulling tension. Conduit section length for large conduits
(103 mm [4 trade size] or larger) should be designed so that the maximum calculated
cable-pulling tension never exceeds 30 kN (6500 lbf). Refer to the cable manufacturers
recommended pulling tensions for the specific cable.
In a conduit run composed of an arbitrary succession of straight lines and bends, two basic
equations, when applied in a step-by-step fashion, can be used to calculate the cable tension at
any point in a conduit run.
The determination for bends should include changes in horizontal and vertical direction. For a
large cable, the tension (T) required to maintain a steady motion at any point on the cable and
winch line can be expressed in terms of the:
Coefficient of friction (f) between the cable and the conduit segment.
Tension (T0) at the feed end of the segment.
Weight (w) per unit length of the cable or winch line.
Geometry of the segment.
Since cable can be pulled into the conduit from either direction, the greater pulling tension
value should always be considered when designing conduit section lengths. Keep in mind that
the cable pull tension stated by the manufacturer is the point at which the cables performance
characteristics are altered. Cable tensile strength is the point where the cable is pulled apart.
2004 BICSI
3-31
Calculating Conduit Pulling Tensions, continued

Coefficient of Friction (f)
The coefficient of friction (f) is the ratio of force needed to pull the cable through the conduit
to the force normal to the plane of the conduit. In a horizontal plane, the normal force is equal
to the total weight of the cable section. Field measurements of pulling tensions suggest the
coefficients of friction shown in Table 3.8. Items that have an effect on the coefficient of
friction include:
Dirt or contamination.
Type of surface.
Lubrication of cable.
Conduit deviations.
Conduit deformations.
Placement of setup equipment.
Calculations assume the conduit will be relatively free of silt and other obstructions at the time
the cable is placed. Unless otherwise indicated, all cable identified in this manual is high
density polyethylene (HDPE). It should be noted, however, that cable manufacturers today
are producing more low density polyethylene (LDPE) than HDPE.
Table 3.8
Coefficient of friction
Coefficient of Friction
Conduit Material
High Density
Polyethylene
Low Density
Polyethylene
Dry
Dry
Lubricant
Lubricant
Polyvinyl chloride
0.31
0.13
0.36
0.16
Concrete
0.48
0.37
0.57
0.41
Corrugated plastic
0.22
0.13
0.40
0.13
NOTE:
Coefficients of friction are unitless and work in both metric and empirical
calculations.
Optical fiber cable is usually pulled into a smooth bore or corrugated duct liner, commonly
known as innerduct. The coefficient of friction for pulling lubricated cable into a:
Smooth bore innerduct = 0.25.

Corrugated innerduct
= 0.20.
When installing optical fiber cable, use suitable innerduct to maximize the length of optical
fiber cable that can be placed in a single pull.
3-32
2004 BICSI

Calculating Pulling Tension for Straight Horizontal Conduit
The pulling tension necessary to pull a cable through a straight horizontal conduit can be
calculated using the following equation:
T =
T0 + f w s
T =
the pulling tension required at the point of interest (N or lbf).
T0 =
the holdback tension at some reference point, usually the beginning of

the straight section. This is the tail load at the reel if the point
considered is in the first segment from the reel location. For large
conduits, a value of 890 N (200 lbf) is considered a reasonable value
for the tail load.
coefficient of friction between the cable and the conduit.
Where:
w =
weight per unit length of cable (N/m or lb/ft). For empirical

measurement units, the cable weight (lb) is the same as the force of
its weight (lbf). For metric units, the cable weight (kg) must be
converted to the force of its weight by multiplying it by 9.8 N/kg.
distance from the reference point to the point of interest (m or ft).
Figure 3.6 illustrates the forces that act on the cable when pulled steadily through a straight
segment of conduit.
Where:
Fr = frictional force between the cable and conduit Fr = f w s.
Figure 3.6
Forces acting on cable pulled through straight conduit
Pulling direction
Fr
2004 BICSI
3-33

The use of this equation is illustrated in the following basic example.
Problem:
Determine the maximum pulling tension that can be expected when a DCMZ-24
cable (11.3 kg/m [7.6 lb/ft]) is pulled into a 30.5 m (100 ft), straight, horizontal
section of plastic conduit without lubricant.
Solution:
Assuming a tail load of 890 N (200 lbf) is caused by the friction of the cable reel
supports, and using the coefficient of friction of 0.31 from Table 3.8:
T =
T0 + f w s
T =
200 + (0.31 x 7.6 x 100)
T =
436 lbf
In metric units:
NOTE:
T =
890 + (0.31 x [9.8 x 11.3] x 30.5)
T =
1937 N
Final answers should be rounded to two significant digits.
Calculating Pulling Tension for Inclined Straight Segment of Conduit

For inclined straight conduit (as in Figure 3.7) segment, the pulling tension can be calculated
using Equation 1:
T =
T0 + w (fx h)
Where:
T, T0, f, and w are the same as defined in the simple horizontal case above, and
x
= horizontal projection of segment.
= vertical projection of segment (h is positive for an increase in

elevation, h is negative for a decrease in elevation, and h is 0 for no
change in elevation).
NOTES:
Use trigonometric formulas to relate s, h, and x.

The total length, s, of the segment is equal to x2 + h2.
For level conduit having only shallow slope for conduit drainage, it
may be acceptable to ignore h.
Figure 3.7
Inclined straight conduit
T
s
h
x
3-34
2004 BICSI

Calculating Pulling Tension for Uniformly Curved Segment of Conduit
The basic equation applying to a uniformly curved segment of conduit is Equation 2 (often
called a capstan equation):
T =
wr sinh [sinh-1 (T0/(wr)) + f /57.3]
Where:
T, T0, f, and w have the same meaning as in Equation 1 and:
r
radius of curvature of the simple bend (m or ft [see Figure 3.8])
arc length of bend (m or ft)
displacement angle (degrees)
57.3 (s/r)
Figure 3.8
Simple bend
Conduit
B
Radius of
curvature
s
A
Displacement
angles
Simple bend
A cable-pulling tension table was constructed from this formula and can be used to determine
the tension that develops in a conduit bend. Table 3.9 lists the results of the trigonometric
functions sinh and sinh-1 used in Equation 2. Equation 2 is modified to simplify the terms:
T =
T/(wr) =
(wr) sinh [sinh-1 (T0/(wr)) + f /57.3]

sinh [sinh-1 (T0/(wr)) + f /57.3]
PTR
sinh [sinh-1 (BTR) + RUB/57.3]
PTR
T/wr (pulling tension ratio)
BTR
T0/wr (back tension ratio)
Where:
RUB =
2004 BICSI
f (resistance under bend)
3-35

To use the table:
1. Calculate back tension ratio (BTR) and resistance under bend (RUB).
2. Look up the result pulling tension ratio (PTR) in Table 3.9. If interpolation is not used
with this table, round BTR and RUB up to the closest higher value for a worst-case
result.
3. Calculate the pulling tension T = (wr) PTR.
NOTE:
Using interpolation with this table will provide a more accurate result.
A scientific calculator may be used to calculate the result from Equation 2.
Table 3.9
Cable pulling tension
PTR
BTR = Back tension ratio
PTR = Pulling tension ratio
RUB = Resistance under bend
3-36
2004 BICSI

The following explains the use of Table 3.9.
Problem: Determine the maximum pulling tension that can be expected when a DCMZ-24
cable (w = 11.3 kg/m [7.6 lb/ft]) is pulled into a 30.5 m (100 ft) curved horizontal
segment of plasic conduit having a displacement angle of 70 degrees. No lubricant
is used so the coefficient of friction is 0.31, and the tail load is assumed to be
890 N (200 lbf).
1. Calculate the bending radius:
if
57.3 (s/r)
then r =
57.3 (s/)
= 57.3 (100/70)
= 82 ft
Calculate the back tension ratio:

BTR
T0/(wr) = 200/(7.6 x 82) = 0.32
Calculate the resistance under bending:

RUB =
f q = 0.31 x 70 = 21.7
2. Look up the pulling tension ratio from the table:

(The closest higher entry is BTR = 0.4 and RUB = 25.0.)
PTR
0.92
3. Calculate the tension:

T
(wr) PTR
7.6 x 82 x 0.92
573 lbf
In metric units:
Note that BTR, RUB, and PTR are unitless. Except for soft conversion variations, these will
be the same as the empirical calculations.
1.
57.3 (30.5/70) = 25 m
BTR
890/(9.8 x 11.3 x 25) = 0.32
RUB =
21.7
2.
BTR
8.92
3.
9.8 x 11.3 x 25 x 0.92 = 2547 N
Cumulative Tension Worksheet

A worksheet (see Example 3.1) can be used for calculating the cable tension as it
accumulates through each segment of the conduit run.
2004 BICSI
3-37
PTR
r
BTR
x
f
w
T
T0 + w [(fx) h] =
Straight Segment
fq =
RUB
T0/(wr) =
Curved Segment
PTR (wr) =
Example 3.1
Tension worksheet form
3-38
2004 BICSI

A step-by-step use of this method can best be described in the following example using
Equation 1, the table, and the worksheet. A layout is shown in Example 3.2.
Example 3.2
Conduit run layout
r = 18 m (60 ft)
61 m (200 ft)
30
45 m (150 ft)
r = 12 m (40 ft)
Problem:
B
40
30.5 m (100 ft)
Determine the pulling tension on a DCMZ-24 cable (11.3 kg/m [7.6 lb/ft]) being
pulled into a horizontal plastic conduit run from point A to B. Assume a tail load of
890 N (200 lbf) and a friction coefficient of 0.31. See worksheets A to B (see
Example 3.3) and B to A (see Example 3.4).
Step 1 Determine the pull tension on the cable for the first segment as it reaches the end of
the 200 ft straight segment of conduit.
T = T0 + f w s
T =
200 + (0.31 x 7.6 x 200)
T = 671 lbf
This is entered as the first straight segment tension and as the first curved segment T0
(both in the first row of the table).
Step 2 Calculate the resistance under bending:
RUB
RUB
0.31 x 30
RUB
9.3
Using the value of tension from Step 1, find the back tension ratio for the 30 curved
segment.
T0/(wr)
BTR
BTR
671/(7.6 x 40)
BTR
2.2
From the table (using RUB = 10, BTR = 2.8):

PTR
3.36
(wr) PTR
1021 lbf
This is entered as the first curved segment tension (in the first row) and as the second
straight segment T0 (in the second row).
2004 BICSI
3-39

Step 3 As the cable enters the 150 ft straight segment, T0 = 1021 lbf.
T
T0 + f w s
1021 + (0.31 x 7.6 x 150)
1374 lbf
This is entered as the second straight segment tension and as the second curved
segment T0 (both in the second row of the table).
Step 4 Calculate the resistance under bending:
RUB
RUB
0.31 x 40
RUB
12.4
Using the value of Step 3, find the back tension ratio for the 40-degree curved
segment.
BTR
T0/(wr)
BTR
1374/(7.6 x 60)
BTR
3.0
From the table (using RUB = 15, BTR = 4.5):

PTR
5.88
(wr) PTR
7.6 x 60 x 5.88
2681 lbf
This is entered as the second curved segment tension (in the second row) and as the
third straight segment T0 (in the third row).
Step 5 As the cable enters the 100 ft straight segment, T0 = 2681 lbf.
T
T0 + f w s
2681 + (0.31 x 7.6 x 100)
2917 lbf (rounded to two significant digits)
This is the final pulling tension. If the direction of pull were reversed, the pulling
tension at A would have been 2107 lbf (see Example 3.3). Since the cable can be
pulled into the conduit from either direction, the greater pulling tension must be
assumed for this conduit system. Installers should use the lower direction, if possible.
3-40
2004 BICSI

Example 3.3
Worksheet A to B (empirical and metric)
EMPIRICAL
Straight Segment
Curved Segment
T = T0 + fws
T0 /(wr) =
f =
T
RUB
671
0.31
30
9.3
1374
0.31
40
12.4
2917
T0
200
7.6
0.31
200
1021
7.6
0.31
150
2680
7.6
0.31
100
T0
PTR(wr) =
671
7.6
40
1374
7.6
60
BTR
PTR
2.2
3.36
7.6
40
1021
3.0
5.88
7.6
60
2681
METRIC
Straight Segment
Curved Segment
T0 = w [(fx) h] +
T0
f =
T0 /(wr) =
RUB
T0
PTR(wr) =
BTR
PTR
111
0.31
61
2989
0.31
30
9.3
2989
111
12
2.2
3.36
111
12
4476
4476
111
0.31
45
6024
0.31
40
12.4
6024
111
18
3.0
5.88
111
18
11750
11750
111
0.31
30.5
13000
890
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Many manufacturers of pulling lubricants offer online or direct assistance in

calculating expected pulling tensions. Software programs can also be purchased
from them.
3-41

The cable pulling tension should also be calculated for pulling in the opposite direction (see
Example 3.4)
Example 3.4
Worksheet B to A (empirical and metric)
EMPIRICAL
Straight Segment
Curved Segment
T = T0 + fws
T0 /(wr) =
f =
T
RUB
436
0.31
40
12.4
1052
0.31
30
9.3
2107
T0
200
7.6
0.31
100
698
7.6
0.31
150
1636
7.6
0.31
200
T0
PTR(wr) =
436
7.6
60
1052
7.6
40
BTR
PTR
.96
1.53
7.6
60
698
3.46
5.38
7.6
40
1636
METRIC
Straight Segment
Curved Segment
T0 = w [(fx) h] +
T0
1940
0.31
40
12.4
4605
0.31
30
9.3
890
111
0.31
30.5
3057
111
0.31
45
0
0
9300
111
0.31
61
NOTE:
RUB
7166
f =
T0 /(wr) =
T0
PTR(wr) =
BTR
1940
111
18
4605
111
12
PTR
.97
1.53
111
18
3057
3.46
5.38
111
12
7166
Many manufacturers of pulling lubricants offer on-line or direct assistance in

calculating expected pulling tensions. Software programs can also be purchased
from them.
3-42
2004 BICSI
Designing Curved Conduit Sections

Curved section design allows conduit structure to be utilized effectively so that cable can be
pulled with the least amount of tension.
A curved section can be either a simple bend or an offset bend (also called a compound curve,
reverse curve, double curve, or S curve).
Because more tension is required to pull a cable through a curved section of duct than through
a straight section of equal length, the total length will generally be reduced. The amount of
reduction depends on:
The number of bends.

The displacement angle and radius curvature of each bend.
Bend locations in the conduit section.
Type of conduit.
Amount and type of lubricant used.
In designing curved sections, consider the following:
Continuous lengths of straight individual plastic conduit can be formed into shallow curves
(if a curvature radius of 12 m [40 ft] or more is used).
Where the radius is less then 12 m (40 ft), 4.6 m (15.0 ft) radius manufactured bends
must be used. If possible, the entire change in direction should be made with a single arc
of 4.6 m (15.0 ft) radius.
If using an individual conduit with a curvature radius of less than 24 m (80 ft), the duct
must be encased in concrete. The encasement at a minimum should result in 50 mm (2 in)
of top cover, 25 mm (1 in) at the sides and beneath the structure.
The arcs in an offset bend should be symmetrical.
Air-Assisted Cable Installation

An alternative to installing optical fiber cable, some coaxial cables and some smaller diameter
multipair twisted-pair cables in underground structures is by pulling it with a winch line or
using cable blowing equipment.
Blowing cable differs from traditional cable pulling in many ways. During cable pulling the
cable remains taut and under stress with pulling force applied to the cable end. The cable
tends to travel in a straight line unless a bend or curve in the duct alters its path. The cable
rubs on the duct at each bend, curve, or undulation of the duct creating friction that can
damage either the cable sheathing or the duct. As friction increases additional cable-pulling
force must be applied to keep the cable moving. With additional pulling force the stress on the
cable increases. (See Coefficient of Friction in Table 3.8 in this chapter.)
2004 BICSI
3-43
Air-Assisted Cable Installation, continued

Cable placement by means of cable blowing or jetting has advantages of reduced tensile force
from that which is required for pullingfewer personnel, and longer cable run lengths
between access points. Air flow through the duct is used to overcome the frictional resistance
of cable movement. Cable movement speed is significantly faster with blowing rather than
traditional pulling. Cable blowing minimizes the stress on the cable during installation.
Depending on characteristics of duct, cable, and ambient temperature, installations of about
2 km (1.2 mi) are the most common. Cable blowing is one of the most efficient and safest
means of installing optical fiber cable, some types of coaxial cable, and some quantity and
arrangement of twisted-pair cable. Smooth wall or longitudinal ribbed are acceptable with
smooth wall being the best. Duct and couplings must be able to withstand the air pressure that
is present during blowing operations.
The innerduct joints are joined by a coupler via screwing, fusion (gluing), or a pressure
coupling as a means of joining the ends. Pressure testing devices are available that can
measure whether the joint can withstand a pressure of more than 1032 kPa (150 psi) once
joined. The test involves plugging one end and applying pressure through the pipe, then
measuring the loss in kPa (psi) during a time interval following the pressurization.
3-44
2004 BICSI
Calculating Volume of Backfill

The volume of concrete or granular backfill will vary with trench width and the degree of
irregularity of the trench surface. Volumes given for each arrangement are for the minimum
trench width consistent with the specified clearances. Volumes for sand or granular backfill
should include an allowance for compaction. Concrete encasement will be required at bends
using PVC conduit or where surface loads are in excess (see figures 3.9 and 3.10).
Figure 3.9
Typical concrete-encased conduit structure
Ground line
Warning tape
610 mm
(24 in) min*
51 mm (2 in)
Top level
of concrete
25 mm (1 in)
38 mm (1.5 in)
25 mm (1 in)
38 mm (1.5 in)
* 457 mm (18 in) permitted under

driveways and sidewalks
Cubic Yards of Concrete Per 30.5 m (100.0 ft) of Trench

Trade
2 Conduit
Size 4
Wide
2 conduit high
2.7
3 conduit high
3.7
4 conduit high
4.6
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
3 Conduit
Wide
3.7
5.0
6.4
4 Conduit
Wide
4.8
6.4
8.1
To convert from cubic yards to cubic meters, multiply by 0.76.
3-45
Calculating Volume of Backfill, continued

Figure 3.10
Typical compacted fill conduit structure
Selected material
free of large stones,
frozen material, etc.
Ground line
Warning tape
305 mm
(12 in) min*
Compacted
sand or
granular
backfill
305 m (12 in)
25 mm (1 in)
25 mm (1 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
25 mm
25 mm (1 in) Typical
(1 in)
* 152 mm (6 in) permitted under
driveways and sidewalks
Cubic Yards of Compacted Fill Per 30.5 m (100.0 ft) of Trench
NOTE:
Trade
Size 4
2 Conduit
Wide
3 Conduit
Wide
4 Conduit
Wide
2 conduit high
3 conduit high
4 conduit high
6.4
7.4
8.5
8.7
10.1
11.6
11.0
12.8
14.5
To convert from cubic yards to cubic meters, multiply by 0.76.
3-46
2004 BICSI
Trench Work
For all excavations deeper than 1.5 m (5.0 ft) in which a person must enter or work,
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requires the walls be shored,
sheeted, braced, or otherwise supported except when:
Working in solid rock, hard shale, or hard slag.

The side walls are cut to an approved slope.
Requirements may vary with soil type and location. Consult OSHA and local regulations.
Other safety precautions include:
Shoring trenches less than 1.5 m (5.0 ft) deep if they present a hazardous work
environment.
Assigning an individual at the surface of an excavation to monitor persons working in the
trench.
NOTE:
The person must be in sight of the monitor at all times.
Prefabricated trench boxes or shields have become lighter and are available in a variety of
materials. Manufacturer specifications will vary and must be qualified for design purposes.
Typical shoring arrangements are shown in figures 3.11, 3.12, and 3.13; see also Table 3.10.
Figure 3.11
Typical trench shield
Loose soil
Steel sidewall
Cross brace
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
If depths are greater than 6 m (20 ft), it is recommended that shoring construction
should be designed by a qualified professional engineer.
3-47
Trench Work, continued

Figure 3.12
Typical trench with shoring in unstable ground
100 mm x 150 mm
(4 in x 6 in)
cross brace
(or trench jack)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
50 mm x 150 mm
(2 in x 6 in) tight
spaced uprights
Loose soil
1.2 m
(4 ft)
100 mm x 150 mm
(4 in x 6 in)
stringer
Trench depth
3 m (10 ft)
or less
(See NOTE)
Sharpen toe
of uprights
NOTE:
Trench width
1.8 m (6.0 ft)
or less
Sharpen toe
of uprights
Leave 100 mm to 150 mm (4-6 in) working space between brace and conduit.
3-48
2004 BICSI

Figure 3.13
Typical trench with shoring in stable ground
50 mm x 150 mm
(2 in x 6 in) upright
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
100 mm x 100 mm
(4 in x 4 in)
cross brace
(or trench jack)
50 mm x 150 mm
(2 in x 6 in) upright
1.2 m
(4 ft)
Hard, compact soil

100 mm x 100 mm
(4 in x 4 in)
cross brace
(or trench jack)
Trench depth
3 m (10 ft)
or less
(See NOTE)
Cleat
Trench width
1.8 m (6.0 ft)
or less
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Sharpen toe
of uprights
Leave 100 mm to 150 mm (4-6 in) working space between brace and conduit.
3-49

Table 3.10
Minimum trench shoring requirements
Trench
Depth
Soil
(Note 1)
1.5-3 m
(5-10 ft)
A
B
3-4.6 m
(10-15 ft)
C
D
A
B
C
D
4.6-6 m
(15-20 ft)
NOTES:
All
Cross-Braces for Trench

Width up to
Uprights
(Notes 3, 4, and 5)
Size
Spacing
Stringers
1.8 m
2.7 m
3.7 m
4.6 m
(Note 5)
m/ft
(Notes 2&5) (6.0 ft) (9.0 ft)
(12.0 ft) (15.0 ft)
1.8 m
None
(6.0 ft)
4 by 4
4 by 6
6 by 6
6 by 8
3 by 4
0.91 m
4 by 6
or 2 by 6
(3.0 ft)
Tight
4 by 6
4 by 6
6 by 6
6 by 8
8 by 8
Tight
6 by 8
1.2 m
4 by 6
(4.0 ft)
4 by 6
6 by 6
6 by 8
8 by 8
3 by 4
0.6 m
4 by 6
or 2 by 6
(2.0 ft)
Tight
4 by 6
6 by 6
6 by 8
8 by 8 8 by 10
3 by 6
Tight
8 by 10
3 by 6
1. Soil type or conditions:
Tight
A
B
C
D
4 by 12
6 by 8
8 by 8
8 by 10 10 by 10
Hard, compact
Likely to crack
Soft, sandy, or filled
Hydrostatic pressure
2. Stringer vertical spacing = 1.2 m (4.0 ft)

3. Cross braces spaced = 1.2 m (4.0 ft) vertically, 1.8 m (6.0 ft) horizontally.
4. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of, or in combination with, cross braces.
5. Size refers to construction grade lumber in inches.
3-50
2004 BICSI

Subsurface Space
The amount of subsurface space required for the conduit structure is dependent on the type,
size, and number of ducts to be installed.
Where sheeting or shoring is not required, the amount of required subsurface space is based
on the width of the conduit formation plus the space needed for:
Working.
Backfill.
Concrete encasing.
The depth of the trench is the height of the conduit formation plus 610 mm (24 in) of cover
and any top protection or bedding requirement. (The NESC requires 610 mm [24 in]; however,
local requirements may differ.)
NOTE:
Where shoring or plywood sheeting is required, the width must include the
dimensions of the material used.
Conduit Design for Bridge Crossing

Whenever conduit must cross a bridge, always consult the AHJ regarding:
Structural strength problems if the ducts are to be incorporated in the bridge structure.
Obstruction of waterways if the ducts are to be attached under the bridge.
Compensation for axial movement at each required expansion joint.
Slip sleeve requirements at a bridge abutment (see Figure 3.14) or a MH wall, if the MH
is close to the bridge.
Figure 3.14
Bell end conduit slip sleeve
Bridge structure
Bridge abutment
2004 BICSI
3-51
Conduit Design for Bridge Crossing, continued

When conduit crosses a bridge, MHs built as termination points should be constructed close
to the bridge ends in the approach fill. If, due to bridge length, this results in an excessively
long section, it may be necessary to place pull boxes or specially designed splicing chambers
of sufficient size to aid cable pulling and splicing along the span. Refer to figures 3.15
through 3.24.
Conduit supports are modular-type hangers designed to support and maintain the integrity
of conduit systems on bridge crossings.
Each bridge crossing must be individually designed to conform to local conditions and
restraints imposed by the bridge site, design, and construction.
In the design phase, consult the AHJ to obtain right-of-way and design information on load
limits and expansion requirements.
During temperature changes, exposed plastic conduit will change length in proportion to the
magnitude of the temperature change. The conduit system must be designed so that length
changes can take place without disengaging at the expansion coupling or developing excessive
stresses or deflections.
Bridge conduit support hardware manufacturers provide the required data to properly design
and install their product.
Under Bridge Hanger/Conduit Method
To provide secure support of the conduit system, conduit hangers are located at specific
intervals along the structure. They should be spaced at 2.4 m (8 ft) intervals for Type D
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic conduit and at 1.8 m (6 ft) intervals above 32 C (90 F).
Because of the inherent thermal expansion and contraction of the conduit materials,
expansion joints (see Figure 3.15) must be provided for each 30 m (100 ft) of PVC Type D
conduit.
Figure 3.15
Expansion joints
28 m (90 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
28 m (90 ft)
Abutment
= Back-to-back expansion joint
NOTE:
= Anchor point support with stop ring
An expansion joint is not placed at bridge abutment due to possible misalignment.
3-52
2004 BICSI

There are two general types of bracing:
Angle bracing (Figure 3.16).

Longitudinal bracing (Figure 3.17).
Angle bracing enables supports to resist the forces developed from expansion and contraction,
cable pulling, and longitudinal stranding. Angle bracing is required on both sides of all anchor
point supports.
Figure 3.16
Angle bracing
Anchor point
hanger
Strut bolted to
threaded insert
in bridge deck
50 mm (2 in) x 50 mm (2 in)
frame member
2004 BICSI
3-53

Intermediate conduit supports experience primarily three different loadings:
Loads in the vertical direction from the weight of the conduit, cable, and hangers.
Load in the transverse direction imposed by wind.
Load in the longitudinal direction imposed by the frictional force developed by the
expansion and contraction of the conduit.
Intermediate hangers transfer these forces at two points:
Attachment bolts
Longitudinal bracing
Figure 3.17
Longitudinal bracing and load forces
Direction of
conduit run
Support
Vertical
direction
Weight of
conduit
Transverse load or
normal direction of wind
Longitudinal
bracing
Direction of expansion
frictional force
Longitudinal direction
Direction of load
on stranding
Anchor points experience the same loading as intermediate-type supports except forces due to
friction. Anchor points must also withstand cable pulling force and longitudinal strand loads.
The total longitudinal stranding load will be the summation of the intermediate loads on the
strand. See Figure 3.18 for anchor and plug.
3-54
2004 BICSI

Figure 3.18
Anchor and plug
Expander plug
Anchor
Back-to-back expansion joint units:
Are located at anchor point hangers.

Control expansion and contraction of the conduit run 30 m (100 ft) in each direction (see
figures 3.19 and 3.20).
Figure 3.19
Back-to-back expansion joint units
30 m (100 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
Anchor-type
support
Expansion
joint
30 m (100 ft)
Stop-ring
restraint
point
30 m (100 ft)
Intermediatetype support
Figure 3.20
Back-to back expansion joint
Approximately
30 m (100 ft)
Approximately
30 m (100 ft)
Approximately
30 m (100 ft)
Anchor point
Nipple
2004 BICSI
Expansion
joint sleeve
3-55
Split stop ring

In some cases, spans of 91 m (300 ft), 152 m (500 ft), 210 m (700 ft), etc., make it
necessary to combine the back-to-back system with one in-line single expansion
joint assembly (see Figure 3.21).
Figure 3.21
In-line single-expansion joint (over 30 m [100 ft])
30 m (100 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
In short crossings, under 30 m (100 ft), only one expansion joint is required (see Figure 3.22).
The expansion joint should be located near the center of the bridge between supports.
Figure 3.22
Expansion joint (under 30 m [100 ft])
30 m (100 ft)
3-56
2004 BICSI

In installations under 30 m (100 ft), normally only one expansion joint is required for each
conduit line. It can be installed near the center of the bridge in between two supports (see
Figure 3.23).
Figure 3.23
Single expansion joint
Cement
Nipple
Conduit
Support
Single-action
expansion
joint sleeve
Second
support
Cement
When using longitudinal stranding, angle bracing should be angled into the stranded area.
Figure 3.24 shows the concept and a designed system without the conduit.
Figure 3.24
Angle bracing into stranded area
Back-to-back
expansion joints
30 m (100 ft)
Longitudinal
bracing with
wire strand
2004 BICSI
3-57

Many other methods of bridge crossing exist; some are shown in figures 3.25 through 3.28.
Figure 3.25
Conduit installed in sidewalk portion of bridge
Sidewalk
Roadway
Figure 3.26
Conduit installed by hanging under sidewalk portion of bridge
Sidewalk
Roadway
3-58
2004 BICSI

Figure 3.27
Conduit run attached to side of bridge with steel brackets
Steel brackets
Figure 3.28
Conduit runs attached to steel I-beams
I-Beam
2004 BICSI
3-59
Tunnels
Introduction
New or existing tunnels may be the only means available to provide service into or throughout
a building. There are three general types of tunnels:
Utility tunnels.
Pedestrian tunnels.
Vehicular tunnels.
Utility Tunnels
Utility tunnels are spaces/pathways that house various utilities. Some of the utilities housed are
steam, power, gas, water, sanitary sewer, and telecommunications. Designing space
configurations for these tunnels is of prime concern for the designer. The power cables
located in the tunnels can produce electromagnetic interference (EMI). Gas lines can produce
a hazardous atmosphere. Steam lines can damage the telecommunications plant if the
telecommunications plant is located too close to the steam lines. Water lines may create a
humid atmosphere along with the steam lines. Sanitary sewer lines can create a biological
hazard if ruptured. Storm drains that feed into the tunnels can cause flooding.
Pedestrian Tunnels
Pedestrian tunnels are used to allow passage of personnel from one part of the campus to
another part, usually under streets, railways, or other thoroughfares. These tunnels are usually
environmentally conditioned and contain spaces that can efficiently house pathways for
telecommunications. They tend to be shorter than utility tunnels, but can be used effectively
for the housing of telecommunications infrastructure from one point on a campus to another.
Vehicular Tunnels
Vehicular tunnels allow restricted traffic inside. These tunnels provide passage for vehicles
from one part of the campus to another and are not usually environmentally controlled.
Pathways can be installed inside these tunnels that will house telecommunications cables in a
cost-effective manner.
Telecommunications cable must be installed in these tunnels according to local codes, and
must also provide a safe environment for operation of all facilities. For large projects, tunnels
will require extensive advanced planning and cooperation among all involved:
Utilities.
Customers.
Municipal planning boards.
Environmental groups.
Department of Transportation (DoT).
All of these entities must be in agreement regarding tunnel use and design and the designs of
the proposed utility installations within the tunnel.
3-60
2004 BICSI
Vehicular Tunnels, continued

Considerations that are particularly critical include:
Routing.
Safety.
Access.
Capacity.
Sizing.
Facility protection.
Right-of-way.
Cost.
Accessibility is usually the reason for installation of tunnels. When designing the tunnel, locate
the access point off the traveled roadway to improve workers safety.
When the public accesses a tunnel or when the customers workers must enter the structure
to install, operate, or maintain the facilities, the design must include a controlled, safe
environment including barriers, detectors, alarms, ventilation, and pumps.
Motivating Design Factors
The motivating design factors for considering the use of existing utility tunnels are:
Increasing congestion of below-ground space.

Rate of growth.
Removing obsolete plant after placing new plant.
Environmental awareness.
Cost analysis and utilization of facilities.
Application Areas
There are five areas where tunnels may provide an optimum long-range solution to a
customers space requirements:
2004 BICSI
Transit subway station construction.

Urban renewal districts.
Central business districts.
Campus or institutional projects.
Large-capacity pathways under known underground obstructions such as buildings.
3-61
Advantages
The primary advantages for using tunnels include the following:
Reduce street maintenance.

Decrease the chances of accidental dig-ups.
Reduce ground corrosion factors.
Allow a continuous inspection path for all facilities.
Offer permanent space allocation.
Reduce surface interference to both vehicular and pedestrian traffic, except during
open-cut phase.
Disadvantages
The disadvantages of using tunnels include the following:
May require confined space rules.

Require significant planning and approvals from all aspects.
Increase liability and work priority factors.
May require increased security measures.
Utility Requirements
A joint-use tunnel may require sizing for:
Heating and cooling.

Electric power.
Gas.
Sanitary sewers.
Telecommunications.
Water.
CATV.
Storm water runoff monitoring
When either sizing tunnels or placing telecommunications facilities in tunnels, allowances

should be made for regulated, non-regulated, and multiple transmission media such as copper
twisted-pair, optical fiber, and coaxial cabling. Each individual utility should be marked at
regular intervals for easy identification.
When selecting media for installation, the designer should ensure that it meets heat and steam
requirements to ensure protection of the telecommunications physical plant, where necessary.
3-62
2004 BICSI
Hazards
Major hazards found in tunnels are:
Confined space.
Steam.
Flooding.
Gas.
Fire.
Electricity.
Asbestos.
While various sensors and alarms can be used to monitor the environmental quality of a tunnel,
telecommunications installers should always observe caution and report any suspicious
conditions to the appropriate safety office or the director of physical plant immediately.
Ventilation
A common rule of thumb for personnel ventilation is three complete air changes per hour.
Tunnels may contain combustible or suffocating gasses. Per the NESC, provisions shall be
made for an adequate continuous supply of air.
Fire Detection
Types of fire detection systems used in tunnels are:
Infrared.
Ultraviolet.
Temperature.
Detectors for products-of-combustion (smoke or carbon dioxide).
Support Structures
Additional support structures may be needed for telecommunications. Consult with your AHJ
for installations. Some examples are:
2004 BICSI
Pulling eyesGenerally made of steel and concreted into the sides or ends of the tunnel
to facilitate the pulling of cable into or through the tunnel. Pulling eyes should be placed at
about the same level as the ductbank at the opposite end of the tunnel.
Cable and equipment supportsVertical steel channels should be installed to support
cables, splice cases, and equipment.
3-63
3-64
2004 BICSI
Direct-Buried Pathways
Introduction
When faced with the option of placing either direct-buried or aerial plant, the appropriate
decision can be made by considering:
Initial costThis is the cost normally associated with building each type of structure.
Susceptibility to damage.
Ongoing maintenance costs.
AestheticsDirect-buried cable installations are generally hidden from view.
Direct-buried cable is less susceptible to storm damage than aerial cable. Even though repair
costs may be higher, these structures are less frequently damaged, especially in areas prone to
fires or severe weather (e.g., ice storms, hurricanes).
Route Selection
When considering an underground or direct-buried route, many variables must be considered,
many of which may be related. These common variables are:
Safety
Costs
Waterways
Environmental areas
Soil conditions
Right-of-way
Obstacles
Other below grade utilities
Existing infrastructure
Both underground and direct-buried pathways may be affected by:
2004 BICSI
Buildings
Culverts
Bridges
Pole lines
Pavement
Landscaped areas
Railways
Roadways
3-65
When crossing another utility facility, always remember:
Maintain 305 mm (12 in) of separation. Placing cable in this manner adds further
protection against dig-ups.
Cabling systems should be routed to allow safe access for construction, inspection, and
maintenance.
There shall be no transfer of load (weight) from one utility to the other.
When crossing roads, railroads, and waterways, the cable should be placed inside either a
metal or rigid plastic duct for protection.
Soil conditions play a major role in route selection. Areas of rock or unstable soil should be
avoided if possible. If it is not practical to avoid areas of rock, consideration should be given to
decreasing the depth of placement and then mechanically protecting the cable by the use of
cable shields (see Figure 3.29). These shields can be either metallic or non-metallic and may
be field-constructed (using split duct, short conduit sections, or U-guards).
Figure 3.29
Protection of direct-buried cable
Minimum
required
depth
Less than minimum

required depth
Ground
level
Buried cable
Shield
Rock
Direct-buried cable
3-66
2004 BICSI
Plow Route Selection

When selecting a plow route, the designer must also consider:
An acceptable route must be wide enough to accommodate a plowing tractor.

Cable reels are typically mounted above and in front of the tractor. The route must have
sufficient vertical clearance to permit safe and proper operation of equipment.
When selecting a bore route, the designer should consider:
Number of bores it will take to accomplish the crossing. For example, when crossing a
multi-lane highway, an additional pit may have to be set up in the median, requiring two
bores instead of one.
Space needed for a boring and receiving pit. The size of the equipment being used and the
rod lengths must be known before making this decision.
Costs of surface cuts and restoration.
Burial Depth
The burial depth should be determined by the end user. At a minimum, the NESC requires the
placement of direct-buried cable 610 mm (24 in) below finished grade. This depth may be
reduced if the cable is adequately protected by additional means such as concrete encasement
or capping.
Burial depth will also be affected by:
Crossing under railroads and highways.

Crossing bodies of water.
Crossing other utilities.
Frost line depth. Cable should be placed below the frost line because frost uplift has been
known to damage cables.
Each of the above situations may require adherence to specific requirements mandated by
their governing agencies. If joint trenching is being used, agreements with other occupants
must be obtained.
Copper cable should be placed at a minimum depth of 610 mm (24 in). However, in areas
where future excavation is anticipated, it may be advisable to place the cable at a greater
depth. For example, if road grading is planned that will remove 610 mm (24 in) of dirt in a
particular area, it would be wiser to place the cable at 1.2 m (4.0 ft) initially versus the
standard 610 mm (24 in). Also, remember that depth requirements can vary by local code.
Optical fiber cable should be placed at a minimum depth of 0.91 m (3.0 ft). However,
considering the bandwidth of optical fiber cables, thought should be given to extra depth in
situations where future potential excavations could damage the cable.
2004 BICSI
3-67
Burial Depth, continued

Bore sites play an important role in selecting bore depth. Different depth requirements will
exist when boring under:
Sidewalks.
Streets and highways.
Railroads.
Waterways.
Environmentally sensitive areas.
In any of these cases, the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) sets the minimum boring depth.
3-68
2004 BICSI
Placing Direct-Buried Cable

Trenching
There are three basic methods of trenching:
Hand DigThis method is used when there is not enough room for machinery or where
care must be exercised to avoid an obstacle.
Back HoeThis method is used in areas not accessible by a trencher.
TrencherThis is the method preferred when the proposed cable route is open and free
from obstacles.
The smaller trenchers are walk-behind types and are typically used for small-diameter
cable applications and short distances (see Figure 3.30). Larger trenchers are generally
used for placing larger cables (see Figure 3.31).
Depending on the method employed, trench width can range from 75 to 610 mm (3 to 24 in)
and up to 2.3 m (7.5 ft) in depth.
Smaller cables may be placed using a machine that is less cumbersome. It can be controlled
by the individual walking behind it, and can readily avoid obstructions. While it has limited use
for long runs or large sizes of cable, it may be effective in placing smaller lateral cables or
service wires. There are many configurations of cable placing machines, and the designer
should determine the best route without being concerned about the machinery used to place
the cable.
Figure 3.30
Hand operated plow
2004 BICSI
3-69
Trenching, continued
Figure 3.31
Trencher
Plowing
The most economical rates for plowing will be realized when the route is open and relatively
free from rock.
There are two major types of plows:
Vibratory plow
Rip plow
3-70
2004 BICSI
Plowing, continued
Vibratory Plow
This type of plow slices open the trench, places cable, and closes the trench behind it. Some
machines possess both trenching and plowing capabilities (see Figure 3.32). The major
difference is that these types of machines are generally rubber tired to minimize surface
damage. This limits their usefulness in some field conditions.
Figure 3.32
Trencher/vibratory plow
2004 BICSI
3-71
Plowing, continued
Rip Plow
This type of plow opens a trench with one or more passes of the plow share (see
Figure 3.33). The rip plow ensures all subsurface obstacles are removed prior to
placing the cable. Use of this plow is common in hard ground conditions such as
clay in the summer months.
Figure 3.33
Rip plow
Clearances from Existing Utilities

Since plowing is not as accurate as mechanical trenching, use of a back hoe or hand digging,
will allow enough space between the proposed trench and existing utilities to minimize the
chance for contact while plowing.
3-72
2004 BICSI
Boring
The three main types of bores are:
Auger bore (also known as jack and bore).

Horizontal directional drilling (HDD [formerly known as a directional bore]).
Missile bore (also known as impact moling).
Auger Bore System

The auger boring system (jack and bore) uses an auger bit attached to the end of a boring rod.
The boring machine drills a hole with the first rod and auger. Once the machine has reached
the length of the rod, a second rod is added and the boring continues. As additional length is
needed, more rods are added until the auger reaches the receiving pit. This method should only
be used for short bores since it is not very accurate. Any obstacle encountered during the bore
can deflect the auger bit to a different path. It is always wise to know the exact length of the
bore. If the auger does not appear in the receiving pit after the appropriate number of rods
have been added to the machine, there is a good chance that it has taken a different route. A
metal detector can be used to track its progress during the bore.
A casing may be installed simultaneously with the boring process to make this a less costly
alternative to cutting and patching. It is used for crossing under small obstacles such as roads
or railroad tracks, and can be used to place casings as large as 1200 mm (48 in). Figure 3.34
illustrates an auger bore.
Figure 3.34
Auger bore
2004 BICSI
3-73
Boring, continued
Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD)
HDD is a much more accurate method of boring (see Figure 3.35). This system uses a liquid
chemical mixture that, when forced through the end of the boring head, carves a hole in the
earth. However, unlike using a slurry mixture that merely washes away the dirt, this mixture
hardens and forms a crust after carving the hole. The boring head is controllable in all planes
by the operator. Most machines carry enough pipes on board to complete a bore well beyond
100 m (328 ft). Based on instructions, the operator adjusts the boring path head to ensure its
arrival at the receiving pit.
The boring rig typically consists of a track-based boring machine, a cable locator and a
separate trailer or truck to hold the mixing tanks for the boring fluid.
A cable locator traces the path of the boring head during the boring. This type of construction
can be used in many types of soil conditions, and can create a path up to 2 km (1.2 mi) long
and 1200 mm (48 in) diameter. It allows for placement of multiple ducts or direct placement
of facilities in the path and enables crossing obstacles (e.g., rivers, utility clusters).
Figure 3.35
Horizontal directional drilling machine
3-74
2004 BICSI
Boring, continued
Missile Bore System
The missile bore system (e.g., also known as impact moling) is used for short run cable
installations under sidewalks, driveways, roads, and other obstacles. With these units, a pipe
can be pulled or pushed under an obstacle by repetitive impacts. The force may be applied by
either pneumatic or hydraulic means. Typically, bores from 50-150 mm (2-6 in) in diameter
can be made with this method.
Pits are dug at the beginning of the (launch) pit as well as at the receiving end, generally
7.6 to 15 m (25 to 50 ft) apart, and the missile is directed forward by a series of pneumatic
blasts until it reaches the target pit. The pipe or casing is carried forward with the drill head.
This method is not accurate because it has no steering capabilities, so it is limited to short
distances only.
Casing Type
Depending on the customers or AHJs requirements, one of the following casings may be
used:
Steel
Plastic
Flexpipe
Cable Markers
Buried cable markers should be used to reduce the possibility of cable damage during
excavation and will assist in the location of dielectric fiber cable.
Some types of common markers are:
Above-ground post markers, typically placed 76 m (250 ft) or at a directional change.

Buried marker tape 150-300 mm (6-12 in) below final grade.
Buried electronic markers, typically located at splice locations and buried
handholes (HHs).
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Tracer wire should be installed with all dielectric optical fiber cable to
facilitate locating.
3-75
3-76
2004 BICSI
Aerial Pathways
Introduction
When faced with design and implementation of an aerial plant system, the designer must
consider:
Initial cost.
Possible exposure of poles to damage from vehicular traffic.
Risk of damage to conductors or pole structures from falling tree limbs, high winds, ice
loading, and other environmental factors.
Access
Route Selection
When selecting the route for the aerial plant, the designer must consider a number of
variables, including:
Safety.
Terrain.
Aesthetics.
Direct-buried or underground utilities.
Soil conditions.
Other aerial plant.
Access.
A proposed pathway may be affected by obstacles and/or clearances due to:
2004 BICSI
Utilities.
Existing pole lines.
Parking lots.
Buildings, including architectural impediments to locating building attachment structures.
Water crossings.
Intersections (e.g., street, alley, controlled access roads).
Driveways.
Right-of-way for railways.
Maintenance access to the pole line.
Swimming pools.
Environmental areas.
Tree branches.
Clearance above sidewalks.
Clearance above or to the side of buildings and other structures.
Airport and heliopad.
3-77
Aerial construction or a combination of aerial and direct-buried construction may be less
expensive in heavily developed or rocky areas. Aerial construction may also reduce costs
when a pre-existing pole line (partial or complete) can be used.
Designing New Aerial Support Structures
When determining design for aerial plant, consider the:
Weight of cableMaximum span allowed for cable and future cables with appropriate
strand.
Height of polesDetermined by spacing requirements from other utilities, ground
clearances, roads, rail, and water crossings.
Grade of Construction
Based on the importance of the services they offer, pole lines are classified by Section 24 of
the NESC as either Grade B, C, or N. Grade B is the highest classification and is normally
used when crossing limited access highways, railroads, and other special situations. While
most telephone companies use Grade C construction for their distribution networks, particular
situations may necessitate a higher grade of construction. Grade N construction is appropriate
for use when the pole line is not expected to be subjected to unusual stress since it does not
use overload or strength factors in determining pole size. Rural Utilities Service (RUS)
standards do not recognize Grade N as an acceptable class of poles.
Existence of Pole Line
Where possible, the designer may want to use an existing pole line. The existence of the pole
line should be field verified and the poles along the proposed route physically examined to
ensure their physical integrity. Do not rely on records alone when planning to use existing
structures. When proposing placement of aerial cable on an existing joint use pole line, it is
mandatory to obtain authorization from the pole owner.
For transitions from sub-surface to aerial construction, facility ownership may be determined
based on pole placement and pole markings. For new pole installation the designer will work
with the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) to obtain a permit to place the pole and will call
the one-call system to locate subsurface utilities.
3-78
2004 BICSI
Types of Loading
There are three types of loading with which the designer should be concerned:
Transverse Storm LoadingThis is the pressure exerted on a pole and its attachments by
the wind (at a right angle to the line). The pressure on the pole varies with the length and
diameter of the pole. RUS adopted an approximation of 222 N (50 lbf) in the heavy and
medium storm loading districts and 334 N (75 lbf) in the light storm loading districts. This
force would be applied 610 mm (24 in) from the top of the pole.
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Areas with light storm loading are considered to be subject to higher horizontal
wind loads, leading to higher transverse loading for light storm loading
districts.
Vertical LoadingThis is the weight of the attachments as well as the downward force
produced by the guys. For medium and heavy storm loading areas, the weight of ice
coatings on attachments should be included.
Bending MomentsThese are the forces produced by such things as transformers
(eccentric) or unbalanced tensions at corners and deadends.
3-79
Storm Load Requirements

The 2002 NESC sets forth standards for determining a pole lines storm load requirements. As
pictured in Figure 3.36, the NESC divides the United States into three geographical areas.
These divisions are based on:
Severity.
Frequency.
Damaging effects of wind and ice storms.
The divisions reflect the force exerted on overhead lines by the combination of wind, ice, and
snow. Light loading applies to areas receiving little or no ice and snow accumulation, whereas
medium loading and heavy loading applies to areas where annual ice and snow accumulation
is great.
Figure 3.36
Wind and ice loadings
= Heavy
= Medium
= Light
National Electrical Safety Code Copyright
2002. IEEE. All rights reserved.
3-80
2004 BICSI
Storm Load Requirements, continued

Combined Ice and Wind Loading
The three degrees of loading due to weather conditions require treatment in calculating the
effects of the loads on the structure. Ice loading is not considered a factor in the light load
areas, but is included when addressing medium and heavy load areas. Wind loading is a factor
everywhere. The NESC defines two weather loadings that may occur on a line. Rule 250B
addresses combined ice and wind loading, while Rule 250 C addresses extreme wind loading.
Light Loading
Light loading is a horizontal wind pressure of 40.8 kg/m2 (9 lb/ft2) upon the projected area of
supported wires, support strands, and cables at a right angle to the line. Light loading applies to
areas receiving little or no ice and snow accumulation.
Medium Loading
Medium loading is a horizontal wind pressure of 18.1 kg/m2 (4 lb/ft2) upon the projected area
of supported wires, support strands, and cables when coated with a radial thickness of 6.5 mm
(0.25 in) of ice at a right angle to the line. Medium loading applies to areas receiving moderate
amounts of ice and snow accumulation.
Heavy Loading
Heavy loading is a horizontal wind pressure of 18.1 kg/m2 (4 lb/ft2) upon the projected
area of supported wires, support strands, and cables when coated with a radial thickness of
12.5 mm (0.50 in) of ice at a right angle to the line. Heavy loading applies to areas where
annual ice and snow accumulation is great.
Storm-loading districts are shown in Table 3.11, as described in NESC 2002. Within any stormloading district, areas may exist where heavier or lighter loadings prevail than are indicated for
that district. In those areas, the designer must alter the requirements set up for the loading
district to comply with local conditions. The conditions must not be decreased without written
approval from the AHJ.
Storm-loading districts outside the United States should be determined by coordination with the
local meteorological service for that country.
2004 BICSI
3-81

Table 3.11
Ice, wind, and temperature
Loading Districts
(For use with Rule 250B)
Heavy
Medium
Light
Radial thickness of ice mm (in)
12.5 (0.50)
6.5 (0.25)
0 (0)
Horizontal wind pressure Pa (lb/ft2)
190 (4)
190 (4)
430 (9)
Temperature C (F)
-20 (0)
-10 (15)
-1 (30)
NOTE:
Extreme Wind Loading

(For use with Rule 250C)
0 (0)
15 (60)
For additional information, refer to NESC Table 250-1.
Extreme Wind Loading

The NESC rule for addressing extreme wind loading applies only to structures or support
facilities that exceed 18m (60 ft) above ground or water level, with the exception of two
rules:
Rule 261A1c applies to supporting structures of any height which must withstand
(without attached conductors) extreme wind load applied from any direction.
Rule 261A2f applies to wood structures of any height which must withstand (without
attached conductors) extreme wind load applied from any direction.
The formulas for calculating wind load from wind speeds associated with extreme wind
loading are complex and seldom used. Existing tables contain safety factors used with
overload conditions. Refer to Section 253 of the NESC 2002.
3-82
2004 BICSI

Required Pole Strength
Poles subjected to heavy transverse loads tend to break at ground level. Selecting poles with
sufficient strength at ground level to withstand transverse loads is a major consideration for
the designer.
The design strength of a pole at any given point is a function of its rated fiber stress and its
circumference. The higher the rated fiber stress and the larger the pole circumference, the
greater the transverse load that the pole will be able to withstand. Transverse loads that must
be considered are those caused by wind pressure on:
Cable and support strand.

Pole-mounted equipment and service drops.
The pole.
Moment Strength
Each transverse load causes a moment on the pole that tends to move the pole in the
direction of the applied load. The value of that moment (in pound-feet [lb-ft]) at any point is
equal to the transverse load (in pounds) times the distance (in feet) from the load point to the
point where the moment is being considered. In the metric system, the moment (in newtonmeter [Nm]) is equal to the transverse load (in newtons [N]) times the distance (in meters)
from the load point to the point where the moment is being considered. One pound-foot equals
1.3556 newton-meters.
The moments caused by each of the transverse loads must be summed together to obtain the
total load. A pole with sufficient resistant moment must be selected to handle the total
moment. As far as the moment is concerned, the ground line is usually the critical point unless
the pole is extra narrow at some other point, or a sidewalk anchor and down guy is employed.
The rated breaking strength of the pole is based on the resistant moment that the pole can
withstand at ground level.
Method of Summing Loads
A systematic method of summing loads on a pole is to convert all transverse loads into
equivalent loads at a point 0.6 m (2.0 ft) from the top of the pole. A pole is then selected
that has a breaking strength that will withstand the sum of all the equivalent loads at a point
0.6 m (2.0 ft) from the top of the pole. In the metric system, the same point (0.6 m) should
be used if tables based on loads 0.6 m (2.0 ft) from the top of the pole are utilized.
2004 BICSI
3-83
Pole Classification
To determine the class of poles required in a pole line, the designer should consider:
The total number of cables to be placed during the life of the pole line.
The total weight of the cables.
The size of the support strands.
Any guy requirements (i.e., corners and deadends).
Using this information, the designer will be able to determine:
The species of wood.

Required pole height.
Desired preservation materials.
Required class (width/diameter).
Nine common pole classes used in OSP construction and their breaking strengths (measured
610 mm [24 in] from top of pole) are provided in Table 3.12. NESC Grade C guidelines limit
total transverse load to 50 percent of the pole breaking strength.
Table 3.12
Pole class and transverse breaking strength
Pole
Class
Transverse Breaking Strength

N
lbf
20 017
(4500)
16 458
(3700)
13 345
(3000)
10 676
(2400)
8452
(1900)
6672
(1500)
5338
(1200)
3292
(740)
10
1646
(370)
N = Newton
lbf = pound force
Poles used as push braces or stubs for overhead guys should be the same class as the
poles they brace. From both a cost and strength perspective, it is generally acceptable
to use Class 7 poles for most CO-OSP applications.
3-84
2004 BICSI
Numerical Classification of Poles

A numerical system of classifying poles has been established to standardize pole types and
facilitate the selection of poles for specific applications. This system is based on nine pole
classes used in telecommunications. The classes are numbered 1 through 10 with the Class 8
poles omitted.
The rated breaking strength and dimensions distinguish pole classes. The breaking strength is
specified in terms of placing a load 0.6 m (2 ft) from the top of the pole. Table 3.13 lists the
breaking strengths, established by ANSI, for pole classes 1 through 7.
ANSI does not specify a definite breaking strength for classes 9 and 10, but the values listed
in Table 3.13 for those classes are considered minimum acceptable values for pole selection.
Class 8 is not used. This table also provides conversion of breaking load to resistant moment
for various pole heights. The numerical classifications listed in the table are valid for any poles
regardless of the species or length.
This implies that a Class 7 southern (yellow) pine pole and a Class 7 northern white cedar pole
(see Table 3.14) will both have a rated breaking strength of 544.32 kg (1200 lb). Poles
measuring 6 m (20 ft) and 10.7 m (35 ft) in either species will also have a rated breaking load
of 544.32 kg (1200 lb) using standard pole setting. See Table 3.15 for resistance moments for
various sizes of poles.
2004 BICSI
3-85
Numerical Classification of Poles, continued

Table 3.13
Pole resistance moments
T
(pounds)
Resistant Movement (pound-feet)
NOTES: This table is based on a load 2 feet from the top of the pole and a standard setting.
To convert breaking load from pounds to newtons, multiply by 4.448.
To convert resistant moment from pound-feet to newton-meters, multiply by 1.356.
Table 3.14
Rated fiber strength for pole species
Rated
Fiber
Strength
(psi)
Average
Circumference
Taper in
Inches per Foot
of Length*
Lodgepole pine (LP)
Ponderosa pine (WP)
* For poles conforming to pole classes.

NOTES: To convert from psi to pascals, multiply by 6.895 x 103.
To convert from taper in inches per foot to centimeters per meter, multiply
by 8.33.
3-86
2004 BICSI

Table 3.15
Resistance moments for various sizes of poles
(inches)
2004 BICSI
Resistant Moment (pound-feet)
3-87

Table 3.15
Resistance moments for various sizes of poles, continued
(inches)
Resistant Moment (pound-feet)
3-88
2004 BICSI
Pole Depth Below Ground

To provide the resistant moment referred to in the paragraphs above, the pole must have a
sufficient segment of its length implanted in the ground. This offsets the force from the wind,
ice, apparatus cases, transformers, or other loadings. The following information regarding the
depth of the pole that is below ground level is contained in the RUS specifications for
construction of aerial plant.
The pole hole shall be of sufficient diameter to permit the pole to settle freely to the bottom
of the hole without trimming the butt and still have sufficient space between the pole and the
sides of the hole to permit proper tamping of the backfill at every point around the pole, and
throughout the entire depth of the hole. The setting depth, in feet (or meters), for poles of
various lengths is shown in Table 3.16.
Table 3.16
Pole setting depth required for various heights
Length of Pole
m/ft
6.10
7.62
9.14
0.67
12.19
13.72
15.24
16.76
18.29
(20)
(25)
(30)
(35)
(40)
(45)
(50)
(55)
(60)
Setting in Soil
m/ft
1.22
1.52
1.68
1.83
1.83
1.98
2.13
2.29
2.44
(4.0)
(5.0)
(5.5)
(6.0)
(6.0)
(6.5)
(7.0)
(7.5)
(8.0)
Setting in Solid Rock

m/ft
0.91
1.07
1.07
1.22
1.22
1.37
1.37
1.52
1.52
(3.0)
(3.5)
(3.5)
(4.0)
(4.0)
(4.5)
(4.5)
(5.0)
(5.0)
Depth Requirement
The setting in soil depth as shown in Table 3.16 applies when:
Poles are to be set in soil only.

There is a layer of soil more than 0.6 m (2 ft) in depth over solid rock.
The pole in solid rock is not substantially vertical.
The diameter of the hole at the surface of the rock exceeds approximately twice the
diameter of the pole at the same level.
The setting in solid rock depth applies where solid rock is encountered at the ground line and
where the hole is substantially vertical, approximately uniform in diameter, and large enough to
permit the use of tamping bars the full depth of the hole.
Where there is a layer of soil 0.6 m (2 ft) or less in depth over solid rock, the depth of
the hole shall be the depth of the soil in addition to the depth specified in setting in solid rock
provided; however, that such depth shall not exceed the depth specified under setting in soil.
2004 BICSI
3-89
Depth Requirement, continued

On sloping ground, the depth of the hole should be measured from the low side of the hole.
When a pole is to be set on the side of a steep grade where soil erosion is a consideration,
the hole should be 0.3 m (1 ft) deeper than specified under setting in soil.
Holes in soil for poles at unguyed corners where the pole will not be keyed shall be
0.3 m (1 ft) deeper than the setting in soil depth. For holes in solid rock the setting in
solid rock depth will apply.
NOTE:
See Figure 3.37 for an example of keying. The process amounts to

bolting a horizontal member (e.g., wood or a nonrusting substance)
to the pole 150 mm (6 in) below the ground line to provide a resistance
to torsional forces.
Figure 3.37
Example of keying a pole
Wood pole key
3-90
2004 BICSI
Compaction
When an earth boring machine is employed for holes for guyed poles, the bottom of the hole
must be thoroughly tamped to compact any loose earth that may be present. All holes must
be backfilled with soil or small rock.
Backfill shall be thoroughly tamped the full depth of the pole hole. Earth must be banked
around the pole to a minimum height of 150 mm (6 in) above ground level.
Holes in soil for poles at unguyed corners where the pole will not be keyed shall be
0.3 m (1 ft) deeper than the setting in soil depth. The setting in solid rock depth will apply
for holes in solid rock.
Poles should be set plumb (vertical) except at corners where they shall be set and raked
against the load so that the pole top will be in line after the load is applied. The rake in pole
must not exceed 150 mm (6 in) for each 3 m (10 ft) of pole length after the conductors are
installed at the required tension. The deadend shall be set so as to be plumb and in line after
the load it applied.
Pole lightning protection shall be a 6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)] solid copper wire installed in
accordance with standard practice.
Transverse Load on a Pole from Aerial Line
The transverse load imposed on a pole by the aerial line is the result of wind pressure on the
line. This load per foot of span length is P times D.
Where:
P
wind pressure in kilograms per square meter (kg/m2 [pounds per

square foot (lb/ft2)])
and
D =
diameter of the aerial line (including ice coating) in meters/feet (m/ft)
To calculate the actual transverse load, the designer must multiply the PD by the span length
(S). Where the span lengths on both sides of the pole are not equal, use the average of the
two span lengths.
Storm-Loading Districts
The transverse load equation for the three storm-loading districts based on Table 3.17 is
PD (lb/ft) = 0.75d.
NOTE:
d = wire/cable diameter, including support strand, in mm (in).
Within any storm-loading district, areas may exist where heavier or lighter loadings prevail
than are indicated for that district. In those areas, the designer must alter the requirements set
for the loading district to comply with local conditions. The conditions must not be decreased
without written approval from the AHJ.
Storm-loading districts outside the United States should be determined by coordination with the
local meteorological service for that country.
2004 BICSI
3-91
Transverse Load on a Pole from Aerial Line, continued

Load Table
Typical values of transverse load as a result of storm loading on cables and support strands
are shown in Table 3.17.
Table 3.17
Transverse load on pole (kg/m per lb/ft of span length)
Support Strand or Cable
Heavy
Medium
Light
Support strand
6M
10M
16M
25M
kg/m (lb/ft)
0.20 (0.44)
0.21 (0.46)
0.22 (0.48)
0.23 (0.50)
kg/m (lb/ft)
0.12 (0.27)
0.13 (0.28)
0.14 (0.31)
0.15 (0.33)
kg/m (lb/ft)
0.10 (0.23)
0.12 (0.28)
0.14 (0.31)
0.16 (0.36)
Lashed cable including support strand

Less than 1 inch cable (6M)
1.0 to 1.9 inch cable (6M)
2.0 inch or greater cable (6M)
2.0 inch or greater (10M)
2.0 inch or greater cable (16M)
2.0 or greater cable (25M)
0.35 (0.77)
0.50 (1.10)
0.65 (1.44)
0.35 (0.77)
0.51 (1.12)
0.66 (1.46)
0.37 (0.81)
0.52 (1.14)
0.67 (1.48)
0.38 (0.83)
0.83 (1.17)
0.68 (1.50)
0.27 (0.60)
0.43 (0.94)
0.58 (1.27)
0.28 (0.62)
0.44 (0.96)
0.59 (1.29)
0.29 (0.64)
0.44 (0.98)
0.59 (1.31)
0.30 (0.67)
0.45 (1.00)
0.60 (1.33)
0.44 (0.98)
0.79 (1.74)
1.12 (2.48)
0.47 (1.04)
0.81 (1.78)
1.15 (2.53)
0.49 (1.08)
0.83 (1.83)
1.17 (2.57)
0.51 (1.13)
0.85 (1.87)
1.19 (2.63)
Self-supporting cable
100 pair, 26 gauge
50 pair, 22 gauge
300 pair, 26 gauge
0.34 (0.76)
0.35 (0.77)
0.39 (0.87)
0.27 (0.59)
0.28 (0.61)
0.32 (0.71)
0.44 (0.96)
0.45 (1.00)
0.55 (1.22)
3-92
2004 BICSI
Transverse Load on a Pole from Aerial Line, continued

Moment
The moment Mw, in kilogram-meter (kg-m [pound-feet (lb-ft)]) at ground level caused by a
transverse load on the pole from the wires/cables is defined by the following equation:
M w = PDSLN
Where:
P
= wind pressure in kg/m2 (lb/ft2)
D = diameter of the line (support strand, cable, and wire) m (ft)

S
= span length
L = height of line attachment aboveground m (ft)

N = number of equivalent lines
Table 3.18 gives the product of P times D for commonly used conductors. To obtain the total
moment, multiply by S, L, and N. If there are two or more types of conductors, compute the
moment for each type and add.
Transverse Load from Wind Pressure on Pole
The moment Mp, in kg-m (lb-ft) at ground level as a result of wind pressure on the pole itself
may be calculated from the following equation:
Mp = PH (2Ct + Cg)
Where:
P
= wind pressure kg/m2 (lb/ft2)
H = height of pole above ground m (ft)

Ct = circumference of pole at top mm (in)
C g = circumference of pole at ground level mm (in)
Assumed Load
As calculated by the above formula, the transverse load on a pole caused by wind against
the pole will always be a very small percentage of the breaking strength of the pole.
Accordingly, a highly accurate value is not required. For routine design purposes, bending
moments of 207 kg-m (1500 lb-ft) in the heavy and medium storm-loading districts and a
414 kg-m (3000 lb-ft) in the light storm-loading district are assumed.
2004 BICSI
3-93
Loads Imposed by Service Drop Wires

Unbalanced Service Drop Wires
Service drop wires impose transverse loads on poles. Where the angle of departure between a
service drop wire and the line wire is 45 degrees or less, the drop wire is considered as the
line wire. Where the angle of departure between a service drop wire and the line wire is
greater than 45 degrees, the drop wire is considered to impose a transverse load on the pole.
The transverse load per meter/foot for unbalanced service drop wires is:
0.09 kg (0.20 lb) in the medium/heavy storm-loading district.

0.07 kg (0.16 lb) in the light storm-loading district.
Balanced Drop Wires

Balanced loads are line attachment loads that are offset by an equal holding force applied to
the opposite side of the pole. When the same type of communications service drop wires are
attached to opposite sides of a pole, the transverse loads caused by those drop wires are
balanced.
In this case, the pole acts like a strut, supporting only the vertical load caused by the weight of
the wires/cables and transverse attachments (including ice load).
Loads Imposed by Pole Attachments
Certain types of pole attachments, such as cable terminals and loading coil cases, cause a
transverse load on the pole. Table 3.18 provides loads in kg/m2 (lb/ft2) for the various stormloading districts. As an alternative, the load can be included in the formula in the previous
section titled, Moment, by increasing N (number of equivalent lines). To find the equivalent N
for an attachment, divide the projected area of the attachment by the projected area of one
span of bare wire.
Table 3.18
Load imposed by pole attachment
Storm Loading District

Heavy
Load per kg/m2 (lb/ft2) of projected area
3-94
Medium
4
Light
9
2004 BICSI
Transverse Load Calculation

Every pole must be selected to withstand the transverse moment attempting to break the pole
at ground level. The amount of bending moment at ground level is equal to the sum of the
moments produced by the wires/cables (Mw), pole equipment and service drops (Me), and the
pole itself (Mp). To determine the required resistant moment, multiply the value of the bending
moment applied to the pole by a factor of safety (FS) set for the specific conditions. The
formula:
Mr = (Mw + Me + Mp) FS
Mw = wires and cables
Me = pole equipment and service drop
Mp = pole
FS = factor of safety
Conditions
The following illustrates the calculation of required pole strength for a given transverse load,
assuming the indicated conditions:
A 106.68 m (350.00 ft) average span

Two 58 mm (2.3 in) cables lashed to a 10M support strand
A 9 m (30 ft) unguyed pole is used
Height of cable above ground is 7.3 m (24 ft)
Grade B construction
Heavy storm-loading district
No pole equipment or service drops
Calculation
The formula for Mw is used with the numerical values given in Conditions.
Where:
PD = 2.19 kg-m (1.46 lb-ft) of span length (See heavy storm-loading
in Table 3.17)
S
= 106.68 m (350.00 ft)
L = 7.3 m (24 ft)

N = 2
then:
M w = 1.46 x 350.00 ft x 24 ft x 2 = 24,528 lb-ft
M w = 2.19 x 106.68 m x 7.3 m x 2 = 3411 kg-m
2004 BICSI
3-95
Transverse Load Calculation, continued

Estimation
The bending moment caused by wind on the pole (Mp) is assumed to be 207 kg-m (1500 lb-ft)
in the heavy storm-loading area.
Required Resistant Moment
Substituting the formula for Transverse Load Calculation,
Where:
M w = 3411 kg-m (24,528 lb-ft)
Me = 0
M p = 207 kg-m (1500 lb-ft)
FS = 1.33 for Grade B construction
then:
Mr = 24,528 lb-ft + 1500 lb-ft x 1.33 = 34,617 lb-ft
Mr = (3411 kg-m + 207 kg-m) x 1.33 = 4812 kg-m
Selection
Selection of Pole Class
As indicated in the previous calculations, a 9 m (30 ft) pole must have sufficient strength to
withstand an applied bending moment of 4812 kg-m (34,617 lb-ft) at the ground line.
As shown in Table 3.12, a Class 6, 9 m (30 ft) pole has the closest resistant moment,
4692 kg-m (33,750 lb-ft), which is insufficient to support the applied moment. A Class 5,
9 m (30 ft) pole, which has a resistance moment of 5973 kg-m (42,750 lb-ft) must be used.
NOTE:
Since optical fiber cable is extremely light in weight, the final result of the above
formulas above often will suggest the usage of Class 9 or Class 10 poles. For all
practical purposes, do not use Class 9 or 10 poles. These poles are very small in
diameter and are rarely used today for anything except temporary poles. Class 7 or
larger poles should be used.
3-96
2004 BICSI
Vertical Load
Vertical loads on poles may be caused by any combination of loading factors. These
factors include anchor guying and the dead weight of wires, cables, and other attachments
on the poles.
As a general rule, vertical loads caused by conductors and pole attachments need not be
considered in pole line design; however, these loads should be considered in the case of guyed
poles. The most severe vertical load to which a guyed pole may be subjected is the vertical
component of the tension in the guy or guys. For purposes of pole selection, the maximum
tension in the guy is usually assumed to be the minimum breaking strength of the guy.
Table 3.19 may be used to determine the minimum pole class.
Table 3.19
Minimum pole class to support vertical load
Length of pole m (ft)
Vertical Load
kg/lb
6
(20)
2268 (5000) 10
4536 (10,000) 9
6804 (15,000) 9
9072 (20,000) 7
13 608 (30,000) 6
22 680 (50,000) 5
45 360 (100,000) 3
8
(25)
9
(30)
11
(35)
12
(40)
14
(45)
15
(50)
9
9
7
7
6
4
2
9
7
7
6
5
4
1
7
7
6
6
5
3
1
7
7
6
6
4
3
1
7
6
5
5
4
2
-
7
6
5
4
3
2
-
Length of pole m (ft)

17
Vertical Load (55)
kg/lb
2268 (5000)
4536 (10,000)
6804 (15,000)
9072 (20,000)
13 608 (30,000)
22 680 (50,000)
45 360 (100,000)
2004 BICSI
6
6
5
4
3
1
-
18
(60)
6
5
4
4
3
1
-
20
(65)
5
5
4
4
2
1
-
21
(70)
5
5
4
3
2
1
-
3-97
23
(75)
4
3
2
1
-
24
(80)
4
3
2
1
-
26
(85)
3
3
2
1
-
27
(90)
3
2
1
-
Bending Moments (Longitudinal Loads)

Bending moments on a pole are caused by an unbalanced tension in the line. This load can
be calculated at any point on the pole.
The bending moment on an unguyed pole is equal to the sum of the total unbalance of the
longitudinal tensions in the conductors. When the pole is not guyed, any longitudinal load on
the pole at the point of wire/cable attachments causes a bending moment at the ground line.
To find the longitudinal load on an unguyed pole, apply the following formula:
M = TxL
Where:
M = total bending moment (kg-m [lb-ft]) at the ground line caused by
longitudinal loading
T = total unbalanced force (kg/lb) of conductor tensions
L = height (m/ft) of wire/cable attachment above the ground
Calculation of Pole Height
The height of a pole depends on many factors. The main considerations are the:
Type of conductors it supports.

Conductor configuration.
Conductor voltage.
Nature of the ground beneath the conductors.
Depth of the pole setting.
Topography of the ground.
Restrictions that may be placed upon the height of wires (i.e., nearby radio facilities,
aviation activity).
Equipment to be mounted on pole.
Attachment clearances.
Attachment Space
Pole height should provide sufficient space for the maximum number of attachments that will
be made during the service life of the pole line. The attachment space must include the space
between the top of the pole, as well as the highest and lowest attachments.
For pole lines supporting cable, 457 mm (18 in) should be provided at the top of the pole and
305 mm (12 in) for each cable attachment.
3-98
2004 BICSI
Pole Spacing and Span Lengths

In determining spacing and span lengths, the designer should consider the:
Total number of cables to be placed during the life of the pole line.
Total weight of the cables.
Size of the support strands.
Climatic conditions.
Loading conditions.
Minimum ground clearance.
Other factors that may impact the maximum span lengths include:
The length of a city block.

Driveways.
Property lines.
Terminal requirements.
Terrain.
Ground clearance.
Branch cables.
Corners.
Joint-use requirements.
Equal distance spacing of poles in a pole line is not required. However, poles should be placed
utilizing terrain features to allow for maximum span length with minimum height poles as
shown in Figure 3.38.
Figure 3.38
Pole placement utilizing terrain feature
Greater ground clearance
with shorter poles
Correct placement of poles
Taller poles required to maintain

minimum ground clearance
Incorrect placement of poles
2004 BICSI
3-99
Pole Spacing and Span Lengths, continued

Tables 3.20 through 3.23 may be referenced to calculate maximum span lengths and the total
weight of the cable(s).
Sample:
An existing pole line has 1 BKMA-200 and 1 BKTA-100 on separate, 6M

strands. One additional BKTS-100 is planned for the pole line. The average span
length for the pole line is 91 m (300 ft). As shown in Table 3.20, a BKTS-100 has
a maximum span limit of 101 m (331 ft). Therefore, from the standpoint of span
lengths, the pole line will be sufficient for the placement of the proposed cable.
These tables are based on average weights. Check with the cable manufacturer for exact
weights.
Table 3.20
Maximum span lengths for self-supporting cable
Pairs
19
BHBS
22
BHAS
24
BKMS
(ft)
(ft)
(ft)
26
BKTS
m
19
BHBP
(ft)
(ft)
22
BHAP
m
(ft)
24
BKMP
m
(ft)
26
BKTP
m
(ft)
25
145 (475)
168 (550)
183 (600)
198
(650) 122
(400)
145 (475)
145 (475)
152
(500)
50
114 (375)
145 (475)
168 (550)
183
(600) 107
(350)
122 (400)
130 (425)
145
(475)
100
114 (375)
130 (425)
152 (500)
101
(331) 114
(375)
130 (425)
200
107 (350)
122 (400)
107 (350)
94
(310) 107
(350)
300
107 (350)
96 (315)
NOTE:
For an explanation of cable description codes, see Cable Construction Types in

Chapter 4: Cabling.
Total Weight and Maximum Span Lengths of the Cable

Use the following tables 3.21 through 3.23 to calculate the total weight. Refer to the Appendix
and to tables 3a.4, 3a.5, and 3a.6 to calculate the maximum span lengths of the cable.
3-100
2004 BICSI
Total Weight and Maximum Span Lengths of the Cable, continued

Table 3.21
Weight for ALPETH cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
Approximate
Weight
mm (in)
kg/km (lbs/kft)
19 AWG
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
85-031-01
85-034-01
85-038-01
25
50
100
19 (0.74)
25 (1.00)
34 (1.35)
453 (305)
846 (568)
1597 (1073)
85-042-01
200
47 (1.86)
3121 (2098)
85-044-01
300
57 (2.25)
4609 (3098)
85-046-01
400
66 (2.35)
6095 (4096)
85-062-01
25
15 (0.57)
258 (174)
85-065-01
50
19 (0.75)
459 (308)
85-069-01
100
25 (1.00)
853 (573)
85-073-01
200
34 (1.35)
1630 (1095)
85-075-01
300
41 (1.62)
2391 (1607)
85-077-01
85-081-01
400
600
47 (1.85)
57 (2.24)
3147 (2115)
4680 (3145)
85-083-01
900
69 (2.71)
6939 (4663)
85-097-01
25
12 (0.48)
180 (121)
85-100-01
50
16 (0.62)
314 (211)
85-104-01
100
21 (0.81)
567 (981)
85-108-01
200
28 (1.09)
1067 (717)
85-110-01
300
33 (1.30)
1568 (1054)
85-112-01
37 (1.47)
2056 (1381)
85-116-01
400
600
45 (1.78)
3025 (2033)
85-118-01
900
55 (2.15)
4467 (3002)
85-120-01
1200
63 (2.46)
5891 (3959)
22 AWG
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
24 AWG
[ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
26 AWG
[ 0.40 mm (0.016 in) ]
2004 BICSI
85-132-01
25
10 (0.41)
127
85-135-01
50
13 (0.52)
214 (144)
85-139-01
100
17 (0.66)
374 (252)
85-143-01
200
22 (0.88)
691 (464)
85-145-01
300
26 (1.04)
1012 (680)
85-147-01
400
30 (1.19)
1324 (889)
85-151-01
600
36 (1.42)
1929 (1296)
85-153-01
900
44 (1.72)
2837 (1906)
85-155-01
1200
50 (1.96)
3725 (2503)
85-156-01
1500
55 (2.18)
4618 (3104)
85-157-01
1800
60 (2.37)
5510 (3703)
3-101
(85)

Table 3.22
Cable weight for self-supporting cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
Approximate
Weight
mm (in)
kg/km (lbs/kft)
Minor
BHBS - 19 AWG
Major
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
20-026-43
12 (0.48)
24 (0.95)
20-031-43
25
15 (0.60)
27 (1.07)
731 (491)
50
25 (0.98)
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
37 (1.45)
1042 (700)
20-034-43
BHAS - 22 AWG
422 (283)
20-062-43
25
15 (0.58)
27 (1.05)
461 (310)
20-065-43
50
19 (0.74)
31 (1.20)
662 (445)
20-069-43
100
25 (1.00)
37 (1.47)
1049 (705)
BKMS - 24 AWG
[ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
20-097-43
25
12 (0.49)
24 (0.96)
387 (260)
20-100-43
50
16 (0.62)
28 (1.09)
513 (345)
20-104-43
100
20 (0.80)
32 (1.27)
766 (515)
20-108-43
200
28 (1.09)
40 (1.56)
1250 (840)
BKTS - 26 AWG
[ 0.40 mm (0.016 in) ]
20-132-43
25
11 (0.45)
23 (0.92)
381 (256)
20-135-43
50
13 (0.52)
25 (0.97)
417 (280)
20-139-43
100
17 (0.67)
29 (1.14)
580 (390)
20-143-43
200
24 (0.93)
36 (1.40)
964 (647)
20-145-43
300
32 (1.25)
44 (1.72)
1271 (853)
3-102
2004 BICSI

Table 3.23
Cable weight for self-supporting cable reinforced sheath
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Minor
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
Major
BHBP - 19 AWG
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
20-026-20
21 (0.83)
33 (1.31)
562 (377)
20-031-20
25
30 (1.18)
42 (1.66)
940 (631)
20-034-20
50
35 (1.39)
47 (1.87)
1420 (953)
25
19 (0.75)
31 (1.21)
625 (420)
20-065-20
50
24 (0.93)
35 (1.39)
885 (595)
20-069-20
100
30 (1.18)
42 (1.64)
1332 (895)
25
17 (0.66)
28 (1.12)
528 (355)
20-100-20
50
20 (0.79)
32 (1.25)
692 (465)
20-104-20
100
25 (0.99)
37 (1.45)
977 (670)
20-108-20
200
32 (1.27)
44 (1.73)
1562 (1050)
20-132-20
25
15 (0.59)
27 (1.05)
454 (305)
20-135-20
50
18 (0.70)
29 (1.16)
573 (385)
20-139-20
100
21 (0.84)
33 (1.28)
774 (520)
20-143-20
200
28 (1.09)
39 (1.55)
1153 (775)
20-145-20
300
31 (1.23)
43 (1.69)
1495 (1005)
BHAP - 22 AWG
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
20-062-20
BKMP - 24 AWG
[ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
20-097-20
BKTP - 26 AWG
[ 0.40 mm (0.016 in) ]
2004 BICSI
3-103
Special Situation Designs

There are special design requirements needed when working with:
C wireAerial 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)] drop wire used for extended span lengths.
Drop (service) wireDrop wire is either 2-conductor or limited pair count aerial wire that
is extended to a residence, typically from an aerial run. Service wire is the same as drop
wire except extended to a residence below grade (underground).
Generally speaking, these items are lighter than a cable and there is less need for guying.
Smaller class poles may be used.
Optical Fiber Cable Considerations
Although the following aerial cables would experience such tension under storm loading, the
maximum rated cable pulling tensions are as follows:
For all cables, except self-supporting cable: 2.7 kN (600 lbf).

For figure-eight self-supporting cable: 14.7 kN (3300 lbf).
For dielectric circular self-supporting cable: 5.8 kN (1300 lbf).
NOTE:
Consult the manufacturer for specific cable pull tension capabilities.
3-104
2004 BICSI
Special Situation Designs, continued

Slack Span Design
As long as the last section is 30.5 m (100 ft) or less, a slack span design (see Figure 3.39)
may be used when it is not possible to terminate an aerial run with a deadend guy. By using
less than normal stringing tension in the final span, guying on that end can be omitted.
Situations that may require the use of a slack span design include space deficiencies and
right-of-way problems.
Figure 3.39
Slack span
Slack span
Last section
Pole to pole slack span
Slack span
Last section
Pole to building slack span
2004 BICSI
3-105

Pole to Building Design
In designing pole to building aerial spans, the critical point becomes the attachment to the
building (see Figure 3.40). If a solid terminating point cannot be found on which to attach
hardware, a portion of a buildings masonry or framework may be dislodged.
Figure 3.40
Building attachment methods
Square
washer
NOTE: Holes are enlarged for clarity.
Sleeve
through
wall
Not less than
0.6 m (2 ft) from
corner
Guy bolt
Cable clamp
False
dead end
Seal entrance holes

around cable with
hydraulic cement.
150 mm (6 in)
to 203 mm (8 in)
U-wall strap
150 mm (6 in)
to 203 mm (8 in)
1/2 x 3-1/2 in
Drive anchors
1/2 x 3-1/2 in
Drive anchors
(See Note)
Plate wall strap
Strand grip
Use
with
Use
with
three-bolt guy clamp

6M strand.
one-bolt guy clamp
2.2M strand.
NOTE: Place strap in such a

position that anchors
will be approximately
at center of bricks.
Alternate method U wall strap
Alternate method plate wall strap
It is recommended that pole to building slack span consruction be used for cables under
300 pair. For cables 300 pair or greater, select an alternate route into the building.
3-106
2004 BICSI

Flying Cross Construction
Use a flying cross when field conditions prevent placing a pole at a point of intersection
(see Figure 3.41).
Figure 3.41
Flying cross
EOP
Street
Support strand
Cable
Merge lane
Turn lane
Street
EOP
EOP
EOP = Edge of pavement
Clearances
A designer should be concerned with the following types of clearances:
2004 BICSI
Vertical clearances of cables, hardware, and equipment above roadways, driveways,

railroads, buildings, etc.
Vertical clearances between telecommunications cables and other utilities (e.g., power,
CATV, other communications, etc.).
Horizontal clearances between poles, stubs, anchors and guys, and conflicting plant.
3-107
Clearances, continued
Attachment Clearances
The latest edition of the NESC 2002 lists typical attachment clearances as shown
in Table 3.24:
Table 3.24
Typical attachment clearances
Description
Vertical Clearance
Grounded metal sheath power cables, nonmetallic

sheath power cables on grounded support strand,
and power cables consisting of insulated conductors
lashed to or spiraled around a grounded strand
Open supply conductors
0 to 8.7 kV
8.7 to 50 kV
1000 mm (40 in)*
Drip loops for luminaries or traffic signal brackets
300 mm (12 in)
Grounded supply equipment (transformers, etc.)
760 mm (30 in)
1000 mm (40 in)

1000 mm (40 in) plus 10 mm
(0.4 in) per kV over 8.7 kV
* May be reduced to 760 mm (30 in) for supply neutrals meeting Rule 230E1 and cables
meeting Rule 230C1. See NESC for details.
Midspan Clearances
Since the aerial support strand is strung between poles with a specified tension, the addition
of the cables weight produces a sag. The lowest point of this sag is termed the midspan
because of its centralized location between two poles. Midspan clearances should be at least
75 percent of the clearance required at the pole. Consult the 2002 NESC for specific details.
Vertical clearances between telecommunications cables and other utilities (e.g., power, CATV,
other communications, etc.) should be checked at midspan clearances (see Figure 3.42).
Figure 3.42
Midspan clearances
Power
Telephone
Midspan
clearance
Midspan
clearance
CATV
CATV = Community antenna television

3-108
2004 BICSI
Vertical Clearances
Both attachment clearances and midspan clearances must meet the NESC 2002 requirements
for vertical clearances over:
Sidewalks.
Driveways, parking lots, and alleys.
Railroad tracks.
Roads, streets, and other areas subject to truck traffic.
Roofs accessible to vehicular and truck traffic.
Balconies and roofs accessible to pedestrians only.
Water areas not subject to sailboat traffic.
Sailboat rigging and launching areas, serving water areas.
Rural roads.
Consult figures 3.43 and 3.44 and tables 3.25 and 3.26 for vertical clearance requirements.
Figure 3.43
Vertical clearances over obstacles
Vertical
clearance
Vertical clearance
Vertical clearance
Driveway
Roadway
Building
Figure 3.44
Vertical clearances between utilities
Vertical
clearance
Power
CATV
Telephone
Vertical
clearance
CATV = Community antenna television
2004 BICSI
3-109
Table 3.25
Minimum vertical clearances of cables above ground or rails at midspan crossing
Span
Length
m
ft
Public Streets,
Alleys
Roads, or Alleys
Not Meeting
m
ft
m
ft
Residence
Driveways
m
ft
Ways for
Pedestrians
Only
m ft
Railroad
Tracks
m
ft
107 (350)
5.5
(18.0)
3.0 (10.0)
3.0
(10.0)
2.4 (8.0)
7.6 (25.0)
122 (400)
5.6
(18.5)
4.7 (15.5)
3.2
(10.5)
2.6 (8.5)
7.9 (25.8)
137 (450)
5.8
(19.0)
4.9 (16.0)
3.4
(11.0)
2.8 (9.0)
8.1 (26.5)
152 (500)
5.9
(19.5)
5.0 (16.5)
3.5
(11.5)
2.9 (9.5)
8.3 (27.3)
168 (550)
6.0
(20.0)
5.2 (17.0)
3.7
(12.0)
3.0 (10.0)
8.5 (28.0)
183 (600)
6.2
(20.5)
5.3 (17.5)
3.8
(12.5)
3.2 (10.5)
8.8 (28.8)
NOTE: Based on 15 C (60 F), no wind, and initial stringing sag.

Table 3.26
Minimum vertical clearance of cable runs along and within limits of public highways
Span
Length
m
ft
Urban Streets
Alleys
ft
ft
Ways for
Pedestrians Only
m
ft
Rural Roads
m
ft
107
(350)
5.5
(18.0)
3.0
(10.0)
2.4
(8.0)
4.3
(14.0)
122
137
(400)
(450)
5.6
5.8
(18.5)
(19.0)
4.7
4.9
(15.5)
(16.0)
2.6
2.7
(8.5)
(9.0)
4.4
4.6
(14.5)
(15.0)
152
(500)
5.9
(19.5)
5.0
(16.5)
2.9
(9.5)
4.7
(15.5)
168
(550)
6.0
(20.0)
5.2
(17.0)
3.0
(10.0)
4.9
(16.0)
183
(600)
6.2
(20.5)
5.3
(17.5)
3.2
(10.5)
5.0
(16.5)
NOTE: Based on 15 C (60 F), no wind, and initial stringing sag.
Facility Clearances (Government)

When federal, state, city, or county requirements differ from those of the NESC 2002, adhere
to the more stringent requirements.
3-110
2004 BICSI
Radial Clearances
The 2002 NESC (Section 234) requires a 1.40 m (4.5 ft) horizontal and a 3.20 m (10.5 ft)
vertical clearance (see Figure 3.45) from:
Antenna.
Signs.
Pole structures.
Storage tanks.
Chimneys.
Figure 3.45
Clearance distances
Minimum 1 m (3 ft)
radius
Sign
Support Strands
Select support strands based on:
Cable weights.
Number of cables.
Storm loading.
Tensile strength.
Pole spacing.
Based on stringing tension, the designer should plan the pole line to not exceed 60 percent
of the rated breaking strength of the cable support strand. Storm loading specifications are
included in the 2002 NESC, Section 25. Cable support strands are available in various classes,
depending on the weight of the zinc coating applied to the support strands. To avoid long-term
deterioration, higher rated zinc coatings should be used in highly corrosive environments such
as coastal areas.
2004 BICSI
3-111
Support Strands, continued

Support Strand Size
Strands are available in the sizes shown in Table 3.27. These sizes are applicable to both
support strands and guys.
Table 3.27
Strand sizes
Size
Diameter
Breaking Strength
Weight
6M
7.9 mm (0.312 in)
26.7 kN
(6000 lbf)
0.335 kg/m (0.225 lb/ft)
6.6M
6.4 mm (0.250 in)
29.6 kN
(6650 lbf)
0.180 kg/m (0.121 lb/ft)
10M
9.5 mm (0.375 in)
51.2 kN (11,500 lbf)
0.402 kg/m (0.270 lb/ft)
16M
11.1 mm (0.438 in)
80.1 kN (18,000 lbf)
0.580 kg/m (0.390 lb/ft)
25M
13.0 mm (0.500 in)
111.0 kN (25,000 lbf)
0.759 kg/m (0.510 lb/ft)
To select a support strand, refer to tables 3a.4, 3a.5, and 3a.6 in the Appendix.
As seen in the above table, the maximum span length for cables of the same weight increases
as the size of the support strand increases. However, since each step up produces a larger
and more expensive support strand, exercise caution when arbitrarily increasing the size of the
support strand. In OSP construction, 6M and 10M are the most commonly used cable support
strands; 2.2M should not be used to support aerial cable.
Anchor and Guys
Anchor and Guy Configuration
When installing multiple strands on a pole line, the designer should design separate guys
and anchors for each strand. One guy may be used when the distance between two strands
is 610 mm (24 in) or less.
Generally, all corner poles should be guyed except when a pole line supporting 6M or 6.6M
has less than 910 mm (36 in) of pull, or when a pole line supporting 10M strand has less than
610 mm (24 in) of pull.
Common Anchor and Guy Configurations
Some of the more common anchor and guy configurations include:
Deadend.
Unguyed span (slack [see Figure 3.39]).
Push brace (see Figure 3.46).
Corner (see Figure 3.47).
False deadend (used when changing strand size).
Sidewalk (see Figure 3.47).
Span guy.
3-112
2004 BICSI
Anchor and Guys, continued

A push brace (see Figure 3.46) may be used where guys cannot be installed, such as:
A corner pole where overhead guys cannot be installed.

Where terrain makes guying ineffective.
Figure 3.46
Push brace
Push brace
Cable
Push brace
Street
Plan view
Grade
Anchor planks
Push brace
Street
Elevation view
2004 BICSI
3-113

Guy Attachment Hardware
After selecting the cable support strand, the appropriate attachment hardware must be
selected.
Three common guying configurations (see Figure 3.47) are:
DeadendThis type of attachment is used at the end of a cable run or when the pull on a
corner exceeds 15 m (50 ft). If a pull exceeds 15 m (50 ft), a double deadend is required.
TangentThis is the attachment used at an in-line pole.
Corner or pullThis attachment is used to fasten cables at a corner.
Figure 3.47
Guying configurations
Wall/fence
Deadend guy
Cul-de-sac
Sidewalk
guy
Cable
Deadend
guy
Holder
(Galvanized
iron pipe)
Corner guy
Sidewalk guy
Anchor
Plan view
Wall/fence
Sidewalk
Cul-de-sac
Corner guy
Anchor
3-114
2004 BICSI

Lead-to-Height Ratio
Measured in meters or feet, lead-to-height ratio is equal to the lead divided by the height of the
attachment (see Figure 3.48).
Figure 3.48
Definition of lead and height
Height
Height
Lead
Height
Height
Lead
Lead
in
Lead
ing
ra
er
op
Sl
Height
Lead
Lead
(L)
Height
(H)
Height (H)
Guy attachment
Pipe
Sidewalk
Description of lead and height
2004 BICSI
Sidewalk anchor guy
3-115

Measuring the Corner Pull
The pull on a pole can be calculated using one of three methods. These include using a pull
finder, using a tape measure, and measuring the included angle created by the three points.
A pull finder (seen in Figure 3.49) is the method used by many companies. To use a
pull finder:
1. Screw the threaded end of the pull finder into a pole.
2. Sight down each sight to the next pole in the line (proposed or existing).
3. Read the pull off the scale.
Figure 3.49
Calculating pull with pull finder
5/8 in
od
Screw
thread
Front
sight
25
6M
6.
M nd
10 tra
S
Rod
Underside view of guy rod

and strand gauge
Front
sight
Back
sight
Index
mark
3-116
2004 BICSI

As shown in Figure 3.50, the pull may also be calculated by using a tape measure. The lines
of the poles adjacent to the corner pole is extended 30.5 m (100 ft) farther; a straight line is
established between those points; and the distance from those lines to the corner pull
determine the pull.
Figure 3.50
Calculating pull with tape measure
Corner pole
m
15
15
(50
(50
ft)
30
.5
(10
0f
t)
Pull
t)
0f
Pull
.5
30
(10
N
Corner pole
ft)
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
Corner pole
30.5 m (100 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)

Pull
Pole
2004 BICSI
Pole
3-117

By calculating the interior angle at the corner pole (see Figure 3.50), the pull may be
determined (see Table 3.28).
Table 3.28
Calculating pull when angle is known
Interior Angle
(degree)
Pull
m
ft
180
175
0
1.33
0
4.4
170
2.66
8.7
165
3.98
13.1
160
5.30
17.4
155
6.60
21.6
150
7.89
25.9
145
9.17
30.1
140
10.40
34.2
135
11.70
38.3
130
12.90
42.3
125
120
14.10
15.20
46.2
50.0
3-118
2004 BICSI

Guy Size
Guys are available in the same range of sizes as support strands (see Table 3.27).
Once the pull is calculated (either in feet or degrees) and the lead over height determined,
refer to:
Table 3.29 (if angle of corner is known) to determine the required guy size.
The guy rule (if pull in feet is known) to determine the required guy size (see Figure 3.51).
Cable deadend guys may be the same size as the cable support strand so long as the lead-toheight ratio is equal to or greater than 3/4. If the lead-to-height ratio is between 1/2 and 3/4,
then the deadend guy should be one size larger than the cable support strand.
Table 3.29
Minimum guy strand selection table
Filled Copper or Optical Fiber Cable Corner and Deadends

Heavy, Medium, and Light Loading Districts
Suspension
Strand Size
L/H
Ratio
Corner Angles (Degrees)

5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
10M
6M
10M 10M 10M

6M 6M 6M
10M 10M
6M 6M
10M
6M
6M
6M
6M 10M
10M
10M
16M 16M 16M
16M 16M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
6M
10M 10M 10M
10M 10M
6M
6M 10M
10M 10M
16M
16M
20M 20M 20M
26M 26M
6M
6M
6M
6M 10M
10M
10M
6M 16M 16M
16M 16M
6M
6M 10M
10M 16M
16M
20M
26M 26M 26M
32M 32M
6M
6M
6M 10M
10M
16M
16M 16M 20M
20M 20M
16M
20M
6M
NOTES: For deadends, use a 60 degree corner angle guy.

For 20M guy size, use two 10M guys or equivalents.
For 26M guy size, use one 10M guy and one 16M guy or equivalents.
For 32M guy size, use two 16M guys or equivalents.
2004 BICSI
3-119

Figure 3.51
Guy rule
Front
Back
3-120
2004 BICSI

Table 3.30 lists maximum corner angle for filled self-supporting optical fiber cable. The corner
angle and the interior angle must add to 180 degrees. Figure 3.52 shows an example using the
information in the guy strand selection table.
Table 3.30
Guy strand selection table
Filled, Self-Supporting Optical Fiber Cables

Integral Support
Strand Size
L/H
Ratio
6.35 mm (0.25 in)
Maximum Corner Angle in Degrees

for Size of Guy Strand
6M
10M
35
60
60
60
Figure 3.52
Using guy strand selection chart example
Height
6 m (20 ft)
10M
10M
20
Lead
6 m (20 ft)
For the above example:

L/H
= 20/20 =
Support Strand = 10M

Angle
= 20
Then, from Table 3.29, the guy strand should be 6M.
2004 BICSI
3-121

Anchors
Existing field conditions will determine the type of anchor to be used (see Figure 3.53). Types
of anchors include:
Expansion anchor.
Screw anchor.
Plate anchor.
Plank anchor.
Pole-to-pole anchor.
Stub and anchor.
Swamp anchors.
Figure 3.53
Types of common anchors
Expansion anchor
Screw anchor
Plate anchor
Pipe anchor rod
Screw plate
Coupling
Pipe eye nut
Swap anchor
3-122
2004 BICSI

Guy Rod Size
There are three main rod sizes available:
12M9.5 mm (5/8 in) diameter

18M19 mm (3/4 in) diameter
32M32 mm (1 1/4 in) diameter
These rating indicates the maximum capacity of the rod. For example, an 18M (3/4 in)
diameter rod can accept three 6M guys, one 10M and one 6M, or one 16M guy.
Guy Rod Ends
Based on the number of guys to be attached, the designer must size the rod end
(see Figure 3.54) as either:
Single thimble eye.

Double thimble eye.
Triple thimble eye.
Figure 3.54
Guy rod ends
Single thimble eye
Double thimble eye
Triple thimble eye
For aerial construction, facility ownership may be determined based on poles and pole
markings. For new pole, underground, and buried installation, the designer will work with
the AHJ and locate subsurface utilities.
2004 BICSI
3-123
Designing Additions to Existing Aerial Support Structures

Pole Line Adequacy
A pre-existing pole line must be capable of supporting the proposed cable(s). To determine
its adequacy, poles along the proposed route should be physically inspected and their loading
capabilities determined.
When physically inspecting the poles, verify the:
Poles physical integrity. Check to see if the poles are bent, split, or rotted. Probing
sections of the pole below the ground line with a pole prod will help detect nonvisible,
rotted areas.
Presence of guys or anchors. If guys and anchors are missing, verify that there is
sufficient room to place new ones. A line may need additional guying before the addition
of the proposed cables to prevent unbalanced loads.
Existence of a grounding system.
Existing cable/equipment on the poles.
Proper clearances from other utilities.
Obstructions.
Height of pole.
Class of pole.
Age of pole.
Pole composition.
Owner.
Joint use.
Pole Line Construction Classification

By referring to Table 3.31 the designer should determine which grade of construction applies
to the existing pole line.
The voltages listed in this table are phase-to-ground values for:
Effectively grounded ac circuits.
Two-wire grounded circuits.
Center-grounded dc circuits.
In other instances, phase-to-phase values shall be used. The grade of construction for supply
conductors, as indicated in Table 3.31, shall also meet the requirements for any lines at lower
levels except when otherwise noted.
NOTE:
Placing of telecommunications conductors at higher levels at crossing or on jointly

used poles should generally be avoided, unless the supply conductors are trolley
contact conductors and their associated feeders.
3-124
2004 BICSI
Designing Additions to Existing Aerial Support Structures, continued

Table 3.31
Grades of construction for communications conductors
Communication conductors
(communication conductors, rural or
urban, open or cable, including those
run in the supply space.)
N
N
B
N
Conductors, tracks,
and rights-of way
at lower levels
Exclusive private right-of-way
Common or public rights-of-way
Railroad tracks and limited-access highways5
Constant-potential supply conductors1
0 to 750 V
Open or cable
750 V to 2.9 kV
Open or cable
Exceeding 2.9 kV
Open
Cable
Constant-current supply conductor1
0 to 7.5 A
Open2
Exceeding 7.5 A
Open2
B
C
C
B3
Communications conductors, open or cable, urban

or rural including those run in the supply space
B, C, or N4
The words open and cable appearing in the headlines have the following meaning as applied to supply conductors: Cable means
Type 1 cables as described in Rule 241A1; open means open-wire and also Type 2 cables, as described in Rule 241A2.
Where constant-current circuits are in Type 1 cable, the grade of construction shall be based on the nominal full-load voltage.
Grade C construction may be used if the open-circuit voltage of the transformer supplying the circuit does not exceed 2.9 kV.
See Rule 242C.
There is no intent to require Grade B over ordinary streets and highways.
National Electrical Safety Code Copyright 2002. IEEE. All rights reserved.
2004 BICSI
3-125
Designing Additions to Existing Aerial Support Structures, continued

System Plans
A designer should be aware of any existing future system plans for an existing pole line.
These may include city, county, or state road move plans or any future plans for the additions
of cable.
Joint-Use Agreements
If the existing pole line is owned by another utility or municipality, the designer must verify the
existence of a joint-use agreement and submit the proper documentation to the utility in order
to obtain permission to attach. Approval can be as simple as providing the utility with a set of
construction drawings or as complicated as negotiating a joint-use agreement and rental fees
for the use of the pole space.
Design Transition Structures
Aerial to underground (see Figure 3.55).
Aerial to direct-buried (see Figure 3.56).
Aerial to tunnel.
Underground to direct-buried (see Figure 3.57).
Underground to tunnel.
Underground to building (see Figure 3.58).
Aerial to building (see Figure 3.59).
Direct-buried to building (see Figure 3.60).
Tunnel to building.
Figure 3.55
Aerial to underground transition
Splice case
Aerial cable
Lateral cable
Pole
Conduit or
cable guard
Lateral cable
Subsidiary conduit
Conduit
Conduit
Underground cable
Splice case
3-126
Maintenance hole
2004 BICSI
Design Transition Structures, continued

Figure 3.56
Aerial to direct-buried transition
Splice case
Aerial cable
Conduit or cable guard
Pole
Pedestal/splice closure
Lateral cable
Buried cable
Figure 3.57
Underground to direct-buried transition
Buried cable
Subsidiary conduit
Buried cable
Conduit
Conduit
Underground cable
Maintenance hole
Splice case
Figure 3.58
Underground to building transition
Building
Backboard
Protector
Lateral cable
Splice
case
Conduit
Underground
cable
2004 BICSI
Subsidiary
conduit
Conduit
Maintenance hole
3-127

Figure 3.59
Aerial to building transition
Support strand to building

Aerial cable
Splice case
Terminal
protector
Sleeve through
building wall
Aerial
cable
Backboard
Protector
3-128
2004 BICSI

Figure 3.60
Direct-buried to building transition
Terminal protector
Grade
Sleeve
Direct-buried cable
Protector
Backboard
Sleeve through
building wall
Cable
Grade
Direct-buried cable
2004 BICSI
3-129
3-130
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Spaces
Introduction
In OSP construction, there are various types of spaces that perform a variety of functions.
This section will cover space types, including:

Handholes, pedestals, and cabinets.
Controlled environmental vaults (CEVs).
Concrete universal enclosures (CUEs).
Confined Spaces
Confined space, as defined by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), is
one a worker can enter and work in but that has limited or restrictive means of entry or exit
and that is not designed for continuous occupancy (e.g., maintenance holes, splice pits, crawl
spaces, and attics).
In a confined space, harmful gasses or vapors may accumulate or there may not be sufficient
oxygen to support life. Hazardous atmospheres may be classified as:
Flammable.
Explosive.
Asphyxiating.
Toxic.
Additional adverse conditions are:
Excessive noise (hearing protection required).

Dust accumulation (combustibles).
Flooding/engulfment.
Excessive heat (e.g., exhaustion, stroke).
OSHA requirements 29 CFR-1910.268 address telecommunications work performed on

underground lines in MHs and unvented vaults.
In the telecommunication industry, the following are considered confined spaces:
Telecommunications MHs
Ductbank trenches
Tunnels
Building entrance facilities
Vaults
Drop ceilings
Mechanical equipment rooms
Motor control cabinets
IMPORTANT: It is the designers responsibility to determine if any spaces to be entered

are defined as confined spaces, or as permit-required confined spaces
(PRCSs), and to follow all related OSHA procedures.
2004 BICSI
3-131
Section 4: Spaces
Maintenance Holes (MHs)

A MH is considered a confined space.
WARNING:
Be aware of hazards such as explosions, suffocation, entrapment, and

vehicular accidents. Verify that established procedures are in place. Typical
precautions include two-person crews, barricades, and ventilation. Carefully
follow established procedures.
MHs have multiple uses, including underground cable placement and splicing. They can be
constructed of either:
Concrete with metallic access covers, or

Polyethylene with polyethylene access covers.
Maintenance holes are selected based upon size, location and traffic loading. Table 3.32
provides rating information.
Table 3.32
Maintenance hole ratings
This rating
Is used for
Light duty
H-5
H-10
Pedestrian traffic only.

Sidewalk applications and occasional non-deliberate traffic.
Driveways, parking lots, and off-road application subject to
occasional non-deliberate heavy vehicles.
Deliberate heavy vehicular traffic.
H-20
NOTE:
The suffix denotes the ability to withstand a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) in
tons (e.g., H-5 represents 5,000 Kg, or 11,000 pounds).
MHs provide accessible space in underground systems for:
Placing and joining cables.

Pulling cables.
Splicing-in cable stubs.
Load coil cases.
Maintenance and operation equipment.
Repeater cases (T-1, ISDN).
3-132
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Maintenance Holes (MHs), continued

MHs must be equipped with:
A sump.
Corrosion-resistant pulling irons.
Cable racks (grounded per applicable electrical code or practice).
Cable racks (grounded per applicable electrical code or practice).
MHs should be constructed in such a way that they:
Are capable of supporting the heaviest anticipated street traffic weight.

Are reasonably waterproof.
Provide sufficient racking space for the ultimate number of cables and other equipment
that requires permanent anchorage.
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
BICSI recommends the placement of a ladder (fixed or movable).
3-133
Section 4: Spaces

Except when needed to support telecommunications equipment, MHs (see figures 3.61, 3.62,
and 3.63) should not be used as pathways for power and light conductors. For specific details,
consult the NESC (or applicable safety code).
If the MH is to be occupied by other utilities, obtain their agreement prior to ordering or
construction of the MH.
Figure 3.61
Typical maintenance hole (cutaway side view)
Cover
Frame
Brick collar or
precast collar
(neck plastered)
Neck
Steps
(as required)
Headroom
Cable racks
Window
recess
Sump
Pulling iron
Ceiling
Ducts
Floor
Single bay
racking area
Ground rod
Pulling iron
Ground rod
Double bay
racking area
3-134
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces

Figure 3.62
Maintenance hole diagram
Installation box to be placed
on 6" of compacted rock or
sand to ensure uniform
distribution of soil pressure
on floor.
Weight:
Top slab
(w/ 30" dia. opening)
Reinforcement for H-20

traffic bridge loading
7'
OD
13
'O
Opening size and

location can vary
Top slab
30"
Diameter
opening
8"
7"
Notch on underside
of top slab to accept
base section
1'
1'
6'
0"
12
'
5" diameter
knock-outs
(4 each end)
Base section
7'
Pull iron
each end
Depth
9'
13" DIA
sump
6"
OD height
8' 1"
6' 0" x 12' 0 Maintenance hole
OD = Outside dimension
2004 BICSI
3-135
Section 4: Spaces

Figure 3.63
Maintenance hole frame, cover, and collar
30"
Clear opening
See detail.
Step
adjustment
notch
9" or 12" as required

Grade rings
as required
Steps grouted
between joints
as required
6"
36"
" adjusting stud with

double nut and washer
as shown
Collar
Dry pack
grout
1" to 2"
as required
6"
" diameter
insert
Cross-section
Maintenance hole
cover collar
Cover Adjustment Detail

Cast iron or
polymer
concrete cover
Cast iron ring
Adjusting studs
with slotted head
for installing into
insert (4 places)
1/2" diameter
inserts
(4 places for
adjustments)
Maintenance hole
cover collar (designed for
H-20 bridge load)
30
"
" diameter galvanized

steel steps grouted between
joints as required
Notch to receive step

(available in 12" grade
ring only)
36"
diameter
opening
Precast concrete
grade rings
(3", 6", 12" heights available)
Maintenance hole top
3-136
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces

MHs have either center conduit entry or splayed conduit entry. The center entry MH (see
Figure 3.64) allows the main duct run to enter at the center of the MH. Cables that are placed
in the duct must be routed to the side wall for racking or splicing. A splayed entry (see
Figure 3.65) does not require the cables to be routed since they align with the cable racks.
See Figure 3.66 for a basic A precast MH.
Figure 3.64
Center conduit tray
Figure 3.65
Splayed conduit entry
2004 BICSI
3-137
Section 4: Spaces

Figure 3.66
Basic A precast maintenance hole
Basic A splayed
Basic A center window
Basic A splayed with

height extension
3-138
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Choosing Precast or Site-Poured Maintenance Hole (MH)

When determining which MH to order or construct, consider several factors:
Physical space required to construct

Number of ducts required
Space configuration requirements
Duct entry (splayed or center)
Meets AHJ requirements for loading
Cable racking (single or double)
Is there:
Available placement space for a precast MH?

Obstacles forcing a non-standard shape MH?
Special weight loading requirements?
Precast MHs possess certain advantages over poured or cast in place MHs, rendering them
the better choice. Precast MHs:
Are economical.
Are constructed under controlled, uniform conditions that render a quality superior to MHs
poured or cast in place.
Are stocked by a precaster and readily available for emergency projects.
Can be installed under severe weather conditions.
Allow quicker in-service times and traffic blockage is kept to a minimum.
Maintenance Hole (MH) Size Extensions

MHs are designed for use in main and branch conduit systems that require more than three,
103 mm (4 trade size) ducts.
At times, conduit depth (or other reasons) requires that a MH be placed below normal depth.
It is then advisable to place the MHs roof at normal depth below the ground level and
increase the headroom. This eliminates the need for deep collars and provides better lighting
and ventilation in the MH. It is advisable to design the racking space so that sufficient
headroom is left in the MH.
Selecting Maintenance Hole (MH) by Duct Entrance
When main conduit enters the side wall of a MH, the main conduit should be splayed (see
Figure 3.70). The splaying of ducts usually results in a greater racking capacity of a MH and
simplifies future reinforcements. There may be instances when center entrances cannot be
avoided. Center duct entrances reduce the racking capacity and work space available. Refer
to Table 3.33 to select the appropriate MH based on configuration and duct entrance arrangement. The three configurations are prioritized as recommended first, second, or third choice.
2004 BICSI
3-139
Section 4: Spaces
Selecting Maintenance Hole (MH) by Duct Entrance, continued

Table 3.33 is provided for general information. Contact manufacturer for specific
configurations. Consider angled entrance windows to facilitate routing of large cables.
Table 3.33
Maintenance hole window selection
No. of
Duct
Ductbank
Configuration
Maintenance Hole Window Selection

Splayed
Use One Side
Splayed
Center
Use Two Sides
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
No
2nd
1st
1st
2nd
3rd
No
1st
2nd
No
2nd
1st
10
1st
2nd
3rd
12
1st
2nd
3rd
12
No
1st
2nd
12
No
2nd
1st
14
1st
2nd
3rd
15
No
2nd
1st
16
No
1st
2nd
16
1st
2nd
3rd
18
No
2nd
1st
20
No
1st
2nd
24
No
1st
2nd
28
No
1st
2nd
32
No
1st
2nd
3-140
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Maintenance Hole (MH) Types

Historically, the types of MHs depicted in figures 3.67 through 3.74 represent configurations
of the four most common telecommunications MH types. Manufacturers and some other
organizations may use different terms.
Type AEnd wall entrance only
Type JEnds and side wall entrance
Type LEnd and side wall entrance
Type TEnd and both side walls entrance
NOTE:
See ANSI/TIA/EIA-758 standard for other configurations.
Figure 3.67
Type A maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
Figure 3.68
Type A maintenance hole with splayed window (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
2004 BICSI
3-141
Section 4: Spaces
Maintenance Hole (MH) Types, continued

Figure 3.69
Type J maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
Figure 3.70
Type J maintenance hole with splayed conduit windows (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
3-142
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces

Figure 3.71
Type L maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
Figure 3.72
Type L maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
2004 BICSI
3-143
Section 4: Spaces

Figure 3.73
Type T maintenance hole with center conduit window (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
Figure 3.74
Type T maintenance hole with splayed conduit window (plan view)
3.7 m (12.0 ft)
1.8 m
(6.0 ft)
3-144
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Cable Racking Provisions

When it is necessary to change the elevation of cables, it is desirable to accomplish as much
of the change as possible on the ends of the MH where the cable makes a sweep from the
conduit to the side wall.
Where cables make a considerable change in level, this change should be made in the corners
of the MH behind other cables. These should always be placed against the wall, in the corner,
and formed without sharp bends.
When two conduit structures have different numbers of conduits entering a MH, racking
positions in the MH should be based on the structure having the largest number of conduits.
The cable and completed splice should be supported with cable hangers at each cable rack
(see Figure 3.75).
Figure 3.75
Typical cable maintenance hole
Elevation
change
Cable
hanger
Cable rack
support
Splice
closure
Cable
Conduit
duct bank
2004 BICSI
3-145
Section 4: Spaces
Administration
All MHs and MH covers should be clearly labeled with ownership information and type of
utility. The labeling must be unique and the method must be consistent throughout the
installation.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Telecommunications Industry Association
(TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA), ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration
Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure, addresses the subject
of administration. Even though it is directed mainly at inside plant facilities, many of the
guidelines also apply to OSP facilities.
Sealing Ducts
All ducts entering MH and building entrance point locations must be sealed to prevent the
intrusion of liquids and gases into the MH or building. Universal duct plugs are available in a
variety of sizes for use in unoccupied ducts. In those ducts where the cable has been installed,
ducts can be sealed through the use of putty sealant, cementitious compounds, and hydraulic
cement.
Openings, Covers, and Frames
Construct MH roof openings and necks (collars) so that they are large enough to
accommodate the smallest, inside measurement of a standard MH cover frame.
Collars may be constructed of brick; however, precast collars are more easily placed.
If the vertical distance between the MHs ceiling and the street level exceeds 610 mm (24 in),
use the 760 mm (30 in) collar to place permanent steps in the neck of the MH.
If a MH has two or more openings, all of the openings should be the same size. At least one
opening should be provided for MHs up to 3.7 m (12.0 ft) in length, two openings beyond
3.7 m (12.0 ft) in length, and three openings beyond 6 m (20 ft) in length. The number of MH
openings is doubled for center-racked MH.
Select MH covers based on the environment where they are placed. For instance, a MH
located beneath a traffic lane must have a cover capable of supporting the traffics weight
(e.g., type B, SB). For light loads such as grass areas, use type R.
For frames and covers, the 760 mm (30 in) size is recommended for all applications and
should be specified for use with precast MHs. Although other frames and covers are
available, their use is not generally recommended. It is easier to get into and out of the
760 mm (30 in) size, especially with a blower or pump hose in the opening, and there is
more room for placing apparatus into the maintenance hole. Examples of available frames
and covers are listed in Table 3.34.
NOTE:
See figures 3.62 and 3.63 for examples of MH frames and covers.
3-146
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Openings, Covers, and Frames, continued

Table 3.34
Maintenance hole frames and covers
Type
Opening
Diameter
Height of
Frame
Remarks
686 mm (27 in)*

760 mm (30 in)
279 mm (11 in)
SA
686 mm (27 in)*

760 mm (30 in)
143 mm (5-5/8 in)
686 mm (27 in)

760 mm (30 in)
254 mm (10 in)
SB
686 mm (27 in)

760 mm (30 in)
143 mm (5-5/8 in)
760 mm (30 in)
51 mm (2 in)
686 mm (27 in)*

760 mm (30 in)
254 mm (10 in)
SG
686 mm (27 in)*

760 mm (30 in)
143 mm (5-5/8 in)
686 mm (27 in)*

760 mm (30 in)
254 mm (10 in)
SH
686 mm (27 in)

760 mm (30 in)
143 mm (5-5/8 in)
686 mm (27 in)*

760 mm (30 in)
38 mm (1-1/2 in)
Has inner cover and sealing gasket;

recommended for central office, carrierequipped loading, and critical junction MHs or
wherever a watertight or secured cover is required.
Shallow version of A type.
Most commonly used frame and cover.
Shallow version of A type.
Comes with pentagonal head locking bolts.
Has four equally spaced 25 mm (1 in) diameter
holes in the frame flange to permit securing the
frame to concrete collars and to 38Y maintenance
hole roofs. Used with both the G (non-locking)
and H (locking) covers.
Shallow version of G type.
Same remarks as G type.
Covers only are equipped with two captive bolts with
attached locking plates that engage the rim of either
the B, G and SG frame.
Shallow version of H type.
Used where not subject to vehicular traffic.
NOTES: *686 mm (27 in) is not recommended.

A and SA Types are not commonly used.
WARNING:
For safety, use only one size frame on maintenance holes with more than one
opening.
Maintenance Hole (MH) Extension Rings

Use MH extension rings when pavement resurfacing operations necessitate the raising of
MH covers. These are rings sized to mate with the existing frame and cover. They allow the
opening to be raised to the new pavement level, thus allowing full access without creating a
traffic hazard. Check local codes for the maximum number of rings that can be used until the
collar or MH roof must be raised.
2004 BICSI
3-147
Section 4: Spaces
Handholes (HHs)
Handholes (HHs) are smaller than maintenance holes (MHs), but the covers provide full
access to the entire space inside the hole (see Figure 3.76). HHs are manufactured as
concrete, polyethylene, or composite structures. They can be placed in the same areas that
MHs are placed in. When planned for traffic areas, they must be traffic rated.
When HHs are used in an underground installation, they are used as pull-through points and
shall not be used as splice points according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-758.
HHs should:
Facilitate cable placement.

Have drainage provisions (e.g., drain holes, open bottom, sump-hole).
Aid cable pulling when the bends exceed either two 90 degree bends or a total of
180 degrees, or the conduit section is so long it must be pulled in two segments.
Meet applicable code requirements.
HHs shall not be:
Used in a main conduit system or in place of a MH.

Larger than 1.2 m (4 ft) in length by 1.2 m (4 ft) in width by 1.2 m (4 ft) height.
Used in runs of more than three, 103 mm (4 trade size) conduits.
Shared with electrical installations other than those used for telecommunications.
Conduit entering a HH should be aligned on opposite walls at the same elevation. Some
handholes are available without bottoms for drainage. When installed without bottoms, these
HHs should be equipped with a 100 mm (4 in) layer of small rock in the bottom to prevent
mud from intruding into the HH.
3-148
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Handholes (HHs), continued

Figure 3.76
Typical handhole
1000 mm
(40 in)
600 mm
(24 in)
Lifting eye
750 mm (30 in)
100 mm (4 in)
terminators
1200 mm
(48 in)
450 mm
(18 in)
Location
When planning the location of a HH, the designer should consider:
2004 BICSI
Ground topography.
Soil conditions.
Location with respect to surrounding structures,
Accessibility for personnel.
Difficulty in using the HH for placing cable.
3-149
Section 4: Spaces
Pedestals, Cabinets, and Vaults

Introduction
Pedestals, cabinets, and vaults are housings used for storing splice closures and terminals in
OSP. Smaller housings are generally known as pedestals, and larger ones are known as
equipment or splice cabinets. They provide above-grade environmental protection, security,
and quick access to splice closures, terminals, excess cable, and optical fiber equipment.
Vaults provide environmental protection, security, and access to splice cases, cables, and
distribution equipment. They may be above or below the ground.
Pedestals, cabinets, and vaults may be mounted directly in the ground or on concrete pads,
mounting feet/stakes, floor stands, walls, or on poles. RUS has established classifications of
pedestals as the general purpose channel Type (H) and the dome Type (M). The Type H
pedestal has either front only access or back and front access while the Type M pedestal has
top only access. These housings may include or provide space for:
Locking device or hasp.

Adjustable mounting bracket/panel to secure taps.
Splitters.
Couplers.
Line extenders.
Amplifiers.
Interdiction devices.
Mounting hardware.
Reels for cross connect wire storage.
Warning labels.
Grounding/bonding provisions.
Identification.
Manufacturers markings.
Cable knockouts.
Grommets.
Pedestals, cabinets, and vaults are used in aerial, direct-buried, and underground plant design.
In a direct-buried application, these housings create the ability for flexible cable and terminal
placement. They provide a high concentration of feeder cable to several distribution cables
with even higher cable pair needs. This can provide an economical means of providing service
over a short period of time.
When selecting pedestals and cabinets, the designer should consider:
Cable bend radius to 15x the cable diameter.

Capacity to accommodate four cables for current and future requirements.
Capacity to accommodate both inline and butt splice closures.
Securityspecial bolts, keys, and security alarm monitoring.
3-150
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Flood control provisions.
Weather-tight seals/gaskets/grommets.
Optical cable storage to permit moving the splice closure to a working location.
Ventilation for environmental control and/or heat extraction (forced air fan optional).
Resistance to rodent and insect intrusion.
Environmentally controlled cabinets (fans, heaters, and thermostats included).
Color options.
Impact resistance (vandalism).
Resistance to dust intrusion.
Resistance to water spray.
Chemical resistance.
Ground-Level Pedestals and Cabinet Criteria
Pedestals should be located in areas where water drainage will continue after the installation.
In some instances, the soil grading will be sufficient, while in other instances gravel may have
to be placed in the bottom of the pedestal at specified depths. The location of the pedestal
should be away from traffic conditions that could cause injury to personnel, yet it should be
easily accessible for maintenance.
As an example, a pedestal 150 mm (6 in) wide and 100 mm (4 in) deep, 900 mm (36 in) above
ground (hole measuring would be classified as a BD4, since it has approximately 0.01 m3 of
volume. The general shape of the housing is usually rectangular or cylindrical, with the
particular shape at the discretion of the manufacturer. Figure 3.77 shows some standard
pedestal and cabinet shapes. The narrow ones are pedestals, and the larger ones are cabinets.
The designer needs to determine the size requirements and consult manufacturer
specifications to select the proper housing.
Cabinets
Cabinets are used for splicing or for placing equipment. A particular use is as a cross-connect
point for serving area interfaces (SAIs). Large pair count splice cabinets are classified
according to their splice capacity.
Pole/Wall Mounted Cabinets
Pole/wall mounted cabinets must be constructed of corrosion-resistant metal or nonmetallic
materials. The housed components are typically accessed by means of a door or by removing
a portion of the housing. Special mounting brackets are used to secure cabinets to utility poles
or building walls.
2004 BICSI
3-151
Section 4: Spaces
Cabinets, continued
Environmentally Controlled Cabinets
Environmentally controlled cabinets provide a suitable environment for electronic equipment.
The cabinets typically provide air circulation with fans and thermostatically controlled heating
and cooling. The air conditioning units may be internally rack mounted or be physically
attached to the exterior of the cabinet.
Figure 3.77
Pedestals and cabinets
BD3Accepts 25-50 pair cables.

Maximum splice size 100 pairs.
Primary distribution pedestal.
BD5Accepts 200-600 pair cables.

May contain distribution terminals.
UP1248Accepts 1200-2400 pair cables.

Not for distribution.
UP900 Cross-connect
Primary connect point between feeder and
distribution can be configured with X-feeder
pairs and X-distribution pairs = 900 total
pairs can be pole mounted.
4200 Series Pedestal

Provides a cross-connect distribution point
for feeder and distribution copper cables or
optical fiber cables. The 4200 series pedestal
can also be configured to house electronic
equipment.
3-152
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Cabinets, continued
Table 3.35 provides information on typical pedestal types and capacities.
Table 3.35
Pedestal types
Pedestal Type
Cable Arrangement
BD2
6 or 12 pair cables with pedestal caps. Not to exceed 25-pair splice.
BD3
25 or 50 pair cables with pedestal caps. Not to exceed 100-pair splice.
BD4
50, 75, 100, 150, or 200 pair cable with pedestal caps. Will house up to 400-pair
cable without pedestal caps. Not to exceed 400-pair splice.
BD5
200, 300, 400, or 600-pair cable with pedestal caps. Will house up to 600-pair
cables without pedestal caps. Not to exceed 600 pair splice.
BD7
900-pair with pedestal caps. Will house 1200, 1500, 1800, 2100, or 2400-pair cable
without pedestal caps. Not to exceed 2400 pair splice.
CAD4
6, 12, 25, or 50-pair cable with pedestal caps. Will house up to 100-pair cable
without pedestal caps. Not to exceed 150 splice.
CAD6
50, 75, 100, 150, or 200-pair cable with pedestal caps. Will house up to 300-pair
cable without pedestal caps. Not to exceed 400-pair splice.
CAD8
200, 300, or 400 pair cable with pedestal cable. Will house up to 500 pair cable
without pedestal caps. Not to exceed a 900 pair splice.
CAD12
600 or 900 pair cable with pedestal caps. Will house up to 1200 pair cable without
pedestal caps. Not to exceed 2400 pair splice.
CAD16
900 pair cable with pedestal caps. Will house 1200 or 1500-pair cable without
pedestal caps. Not to exceed 1500-pair splice.
UP900
600 or 900-pair cable without pedestal caps. Will house 400 pair 19 AWG
[0.91 (0.036 in)] cable with load coils.
UP1000
1200, 1500, or 1800-pair cable without pedestal caps.
UP1200
2100 pair or 2400-pair cable without pedestal caps.
UP1246
Will house up to a 900-pair cable without pedestal caps.
UP1248
1200, 1500, 1800, 2100, or 2400-pair cable without pedestal caps. Will house up to
900 pair cable with pedestal caps. Not to exceed 2400-pair splice.
UP1652
1200 or 1500 pair cable without pedestal caps. Will house up to 900 pair cable
with pedestal caps. Not to exceed 1500-pair splice.
BD = Buried distribution
CAD = Controlled access design
U P = Universal pedestal
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Cable arrangement may vary from company to company.
3-153
Section 4: Spaces
Controlled Environment Vault (CEV)

CEVs are below-ground enclosures that house not only the cables and connecting hardware,
but the electronic equipment they are connected to. When planning for CEVs, the designer
should consider shipping the equipment to be housed in them to the CEV manufacturer. The
equipment will be installed in the lower section of the vault and shipped to the job site. At the
job site, the lower section is installed first and the top section placed sealing the container to
the surrounding elements.
CEVs are:
Precast concrete structures consisting of top and bottom sections.

Available in various sizes (standard sizes are 1.8 m x 5 m [6 ft x 16 ft] and
1.8 m x 7.3 m [6 ft x 24 ft]).
Designed to provide underground housing for electronic equipment (e.g., subscriber loop
carrier systems, lightwave digital transmission system generators).
Generally placed in close proximity to a MH on a main underground route.
CEVs are equipped with power, lights, sump pumps, dehumidifiers, ventilation blowers,
heaters, and atmospheric monitors. Air conditioning is optional depending on where they are
being installed. CEVs contain expensive and critical equipment. As a result they include
extensive alarm systems (e.g., door intrusion, emergency lights, smoke detector, power,
moisture). They receive the same level of security as the CO, and have controlled entry. It
usually requires that the technician or engineer contact the maintenance center before
entering so that the alarm does not trigger a security dispatch.
The designer must exercise caution when selecting a location for a CEV. Because CEVs are
designed to protect environmentally sensitive equipment, the bottom exhaust air vent must be
above the 100-year flood level.
A private right-of-way agreement must be executed prior to the installation of a CEV if the
unit will be placed on property owned by someone other than the customer. The sizable
investment made by the customer must be protected. The location of the unit depends on
execution of the agreement.
3-154
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Concrete Universal Enclosure (CUE)

CUEs are above-ground environmentally enclosed cabinets that house OSP cable and
electronic equipment. In some circumstances, a CUE can be used in place of a CEV.
CUEs:
Are all-concrete construction, which provides equipment protection and security.

Can accommodate six 2 m (7 ft) x 584 mm (23 in) equipment racks and provide wall
space for other equipment (e.g., protection blocks).
Are designed to provide environmentally controlled housing (air conditioning/heating and
environmental alarms).
Should be used in applications requiring additional security.
As is true for CEVs, and for the same reasons, CUEs include extensive alarm systems (door
intrusion, emergency lights, smoke detector, power, etc.).
Check local building permit requirements before installation.
2004 BICSI
3-155
Section 4: Spaces
Marinas
Service at Marinas
A telecommunications distribution designer needs to give special consideration to
telecommunications services at marinas due to unique conditions such as:
Changing water levels.

High moisture/humidity.
Severe weather (winds, waves, sun).
Salt.
Transiency of boat owners.
Potential for physical abuse of a distribution cable.
Difficulty in establishing a dependable, approved electrical grounding point.
Terms and Definitions

The following list contains terms and definitions of significant words used in this section.
Boat slip The space reserved for a boat adjacent to a dock.
Common element A portion of a dock that is publicly accessible to all marina users.
Condominium slip A boat slip that is owned or subleased.
Limited common element (LCE) A portion of a dock that is accessible only to those
boat slips that it serves on either side.
Docks with Floating Sections
Docks with floating sections are less desirable than fixed docks because of the increased risk
of strain and wear on all facilities, particularly during inclement weather. Floating docks are
usually found where water levels can change drastically. This condition should be taken into
consideration for locations that experience tides and seasonal changes.
To accommodate the movement of a floating dock to and from a shoreline, use:
Hose-reeling cable on a floating section.

A point of connection at both ends of a dock section to ease adding or removing sections
of cable.
Jack and plug arrangements for smaller installations that need only a few service cables.
See figures 3.78 and 3.79 for detail of a dock with a floating section and an example of a
marina.
3-156
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Designating Specific Docks for Service

A designer and an owner must designate specific docks in a marina for telecommunications
service. This eliminates the cost of placing facilities where demand may be minimal or
nonexistent. Generally, the demand for telecommunications at marinas is directly proportional
to the:
Clients affluence.
Size of the boats moored.
Nontransient (e.g., permanent resident) population.
Precabling Boat Slips

Use Table 3.36 for guidelines when precabling boat slips.
Table 3.36
Precabling guidelines
If
Then
It is known in advance
that all or most of the
boat slips require
communications
services
Precable each boat slip during construction of the dock. For

security, each run should be terminated in the patch panel
cross-connect at the dockmaster or marina office.
Fewer than ten boat

slips are cabled
Run one- or two-pair cables from the boat slips to a distribution

terminal on the closest point of land.
If ten or more boat

slips are cabled
Place distribution cable onto the dock and terminate in a

suitable cabinet or enclosure. Run service drop to each boat slip.
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
This minimizes the need for terminals on the dock

where damage can occur due to the harsh environment
or vandalism (except for utility pedestals at every slip).
3-157
Section 4: Spaces
Using Mechanical Protection

Mechanically protect all cable splices, etc. from the hostile environment by using:
Conduit.
Cable trays.
Weatherproof enclosures.
Other structures suited for harsh, outdoor conditions.
These support structures (pedestals) must be made of nonmetallic material to minimize

corrosion. A variety of weatherproof utility pedestals are available for terminating service
facilities at boat slips. These pedestals accommodate:
Electrical power.
Telecommunications.
CATV.
Water.
Protecting Cable, Conductors, and Terminals

Use water-blocked cable on docks. Terminals (if necessary) must be equipped with a binding
post and screw-down conductor lugs. Compound-filled protector caps must also be used
where corrosion is of particular concern.
Choosing Conduit Size and Type
Choose the type and size of conduit following these guidelines:
Use rigid nonmetallic conduit wherever possible.

Join the sections of rigid conduit with flexible duct where movement of a dock is probable.
Use minimum 21 mm (3/4 trade size) conduits for service cables to each slip.
The size of conduits for distribution cable varies depending on the:
Pulling distance.
Bends.
Cable size.
3-158
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Bonding and Grounding

Electrical bonding and grounding at marinas:
Requires close analysis.

Is addressed on a case-by-case basis.
The closest approved ground is on the nearest land unless a dock has metallic support
members extending into the lake or sea bottom, and electrical power service is grounded to
these supports.
This may require:
Locating station protectors on land where an approved ground is available.

Discussions and review with the:
Electrical contractor.
Electrical power utility company.
Marina owner.
Local electrical authority having jurisdiction.
System Separation
The transient nature of most marina users makes telecommunications served through
a premises PBX impractical in many cases. However, a common telecommunications
conduit within a prefabricated dock section (see Figure 3.78) might be the only available
cabling medium:
In areas where direct local exchange service and public telephone service are provided by
different companies.
Where CATV is requested.
With coordination, simultaneous placement of both facilities instead of individual pull cords in
one duct is beneficial to both the telephone and CATV companies.
2004 BICSI
3-159
Section 4: Spaces
System Separation, continued

Figure 3.78
Modular floating dock layout (with condominium-option terms, no scale)
Pedestal
Main
Dock (common element)
Weatherproof
communications
jack
Finger dock
(limited common
element)
Slip A
Slip C
Prefabricated,
laminated,
fiberglass-enclosed
floating dock section
Slip B
Power conduit
50 mm (2 in) PVC
communications conduit
Finger dock
(common element)
Under
deck
cabling
100 mm (4 in) PVC
communications conduit
Waterproof splice
terminal chamber
PVC = Polyvinyl chloride
Condominium Slips
The marina (see Figure 3.79) usually owns the:
Serving finger dock to which each finger slip is attached.

Originating main dock (common elements).
When an individual boat slip is owned and subleased as a regular condominium, only the two
bordering boat slip owners can legally use a finger slip (limited common element).
This arrangement raises questions about:
Right-of-way and easement factors.

The possibility of seasonal subleasing of boat slips.
Prefabricated modular dock construction with built-in conduits and splice boxes neatly
structures full conductor and cable concealment while providing physical protection.
3-160
2004 BICSI
Section 4: Spaces
Condominium Slips, continued

Figure 3.79
Sample marina layout
Easement A (parking and utilities)
Easement B
(dock access
and utilities)
Main
feed
Terminal B
Pedestal B
Parking
Easement C
(pedestrian
and utilities)
Distribution feed
Pedestal A
Slips
Boat
launching
ramp
Floating
docks
Distribution
feed
Finger
dock
Terminal A
Easement D (dock
access and utilities)
Finger
dock
Each finger dock is a limited common
element (LCE), reserved for use by only
the units directly adjacent to it. For
example, the shaded finger dock (see
arrow) is reserved for use by slips D-4
and D-5 only. All other walkways are
common elements (CE).
D
D -3
-4
D
D -5
D -7
D -6
D 8
-9
Typical float detail
2004 BICSI
3-161
Section 4: Spaces
3-162
2004 BICSI
AppendixTension and Sags
Chapter 3Pathways and Spaces

Initial Strand Tensions and Sags
These tables are based on RUS Bulletin 1751F-635 and are provided for information
purposes. Metric conversions are not provided for all tables.
The initial strand tension required depends on the suspension strand size, the temperature at which the strand is tensioned, and on the average span length. There is a
definite tension for each strand size for each average span length at each temperature. The initial tension and sag data for the installation of only the 6M, 10M, and 16M
extra high strength (EHS) galvanized steel suspension strands at various temperatures
and average span lengths are given in Tables 3a.1, 3a.2, and 3a.3.
Table 3a.1
6M EHS suspension strand initial installation tensions and sags
3A-1
2004 BICSI
Initial Strand Tensions and Sags, continued

Table 3a.2
2004 BICSI
3A-2
Initial Strand Tensions and Sags, continued

Table 3a.3
Maximum Span Length

Tables 3a.4, 3a.5, and 3a.6 indicate the maximum span length for 6M, 10M, and 16M
EHS suspension strands with aerial cable lashed to the suspension strands for each
storm loading district as defined in the latest edition of the NESC.
Table 3a.4
Maximum span lengths by loading districts 6M EHS strand with aerial cable lashed to strand
3A-3
2004 BICSI
Maximum Span Length, continued

Table 3a.5
Table 3a.6
2004 BICSI
3A-4
Sag and Tension of Installed Cables

The sag and tension in a strand and a copper or optical fiber cable after their installation depends on the installation temperature, strand size, cable weight on a per foot
basis, and the span length. The above information is known as the initial cable sag and
tension.
The initial sags and tensions for copper cables installed on 6M, 10M, and 16M EHS
suspension strands at various span lengths and temperatures are given in Tables 3a.7
through 3a.49.
Table 3a.7
Initial sag and tension 6M EHS suspension strand supporting cable weighing 0.2 lb/ft for heavy, medium, and light
loading districts
3A-5
2004 BICSI
Sag and Tension of Installed Cables, continued

Table 3a.8
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-6

Table 3a.9
loading districts
3A-7
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.10
loading districts
Table 3a.11
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-8

Table 3a.12
loading districts
Table 3a.13
loading districts
3A-9
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.14
loading districts
Table 3a.15
loading districts
Table 3a.16
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-10

The initial sags and tensions for filled optical fiber cables installed on 6M EHS suspension strands at various span lengths and temperatures in the three NESC storm
loading districts should be obtained from the optical fiber cable manufacturer.
Table 3a.17
loading districts
3A-11
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.18
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-12

Table 3a.19
loading districts
3A-13
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.20
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-14

Table 3a.21
loading districts
3A-15
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.22
loading districts
Table 3a.23
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-16

Table 3a.24
loading districts
Table 3a.25
loading districts
3A-17
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.26
loading districts
Table 3a.27
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-18

Table 3a.28
loading districts
Table 3a.29
loading districts
3A-19
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.30
loading districts
Table 3a.31
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-20

Table 3a.32
loading districts
Table 3a.33
loading districts
Table 3a.34
loading districts
3A-21
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.35
loading districts
Table 3a.36
loading districts
Table 3a.37
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-22

Table 3a.38
loading districts
Table 3a.39
loading districts
Table 3a.40
loading districts
3A-23
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.41
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-24

Table 3a.42
loading districts
3A-25
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.43
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-26

Table 3a.44
loading districts
3A-27
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.45
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-28

Table 3a.46
loading districts
Table 3a.47
loading districts
3A-29
2004 BICSI

Table 3a.48
loading districts
Table 3a.49
loading districts
2004 BICSI
3A-30
Chapter 4
Cabling
Includes enhanced information about splicing components
and procedures. Covers the ICEA cable coding plan and its
usage. Updated reference section on fiber, twisted-pair, and
coaxial cables, including typical performance specifications.
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table of Contents
Cabling ..................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Recognized Cable .................................................................................................................. 4-3

Cable Types ....................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Optical Fiber Cable ............................................................................................................................. 4-3
Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable .............................................................................................................. 4-4
75 Ohm Coaxial Cable ....................................................................................................................... 4-4
Optical Fiber Cabling .............................................................................................................. 4-5

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 4-5
Attenuation ......................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin Calculations Worksheet ............................................................ 4-8
Part A. Calculating the Passive Cable System Attenuation .......................................................... 4-9
Effects of Temperature on Optical Fiber Loss ............................................................................. 4-10
Splice Loss Values .................................................................................................................... 4-11
Part B. Calculating the Link-loss Budget .................................................................................... 4-11
Part C. Verifying the Attenuation Margin ..................................................................................... 4-13
Check Minimum System Loss ................................................................................................... 4-13
Final Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 4-14
Supportable Distance and Maximum Channel Attenuation ......................................................... 4-15
Optical Fiber Cable Types ................................................................................................................ 4-18
Loose-Tube Cables .................................................................................................................... 4-18
Tight-Buffered Cables ................................................................................................................. 4-19
Composite Cables ..................................................................................................................... 4-21
Cable Coding ............................................................................................................................. 4-21
Color Coding .............................................................................................................................. 4-22
Twisted-Pair Cabling ............................................................................................................ 4-24

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 4-24
Selection Criteria .............................................................................................................................. 4-24
Resistance Design ..................................................................................................................... 4-24
Serving Area Design ................................................................................................................... 4-25
Cable Attenuation Margin ................................................................................................................. 4-27
Cable Construction Types ................................................................................................................. 4-28
Insulation ................................................................................................................................... 4-28
Bell System Type ....................................................................................................................... 4-31
RUS Type Cable ........................................................................................................................ 4-32
Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable ................................................................... 4-34
Plastic Insulated Conductor (PIC) Cable ........................................................................................... 4-35
Aerial ............................................................................................................................................... 4-36
Self-Supporting Cable ....................................................................................................................... 4-38
2004 BICSI
4-i
Chapter 4: Cabling
Direct-Buried .................................................................................................................................... 4-41

Aluminum, Steel, Polyethylene (ASP) Direct-Buried Cable ......................................................... 4-44
Underground ..................................................................................................................................... 4-46
Aluminum, Steel, Polyethylene (ASP) ........................................................................................ 4-46
Ductpic ...................................................................................................................................... 4-47
Screened Cable ................................................................................................................................ 4-49
Air Core Screened Cable ............................................................................................................ 4-49
Filled Screened Cable ................................................................................................................ 4-50
RUS Filled Cable .............................................................................................................................. 4-52
PE 39Filled Solid Copper ALPETH Cable (Aluminum) ............................................................. 4-52
PE 39Cable ............................................................................................................................ 4-54
PE 89CACSP Cable ............................................................................................................... 4-59
PE 89ALPETH Cable ............................................................................................................. 4-61
Aerial Drop Wire ............................................................................................................................... 4-63
Direct-Buried Service Wire ................................................................................................................ 4-63
Coaxial Cabling ..................................................................................................................... 4-64

Cable Selection ................................................................................................................................ 4-64
Mechanical Factors .......................................................................................................................... 4-64
Center Conductor ....................................................................................................................... 4-64
Dielectric ................................................................................................................................... 4-65
Outer Conductor ........................................................................................................................ 4-65
Jackets ...................................................................................................................................... 4-65
Electrical Factors ............................................................................................................................. 4-65
Aerial Applications ............................................................................................................................ 4-67
Direct-Buried Applications ................................................................................................................ 4-68
Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable ......................................................................... 4-68
Design Criteria .................................................................................................................................. 4-69
Subscriber Service Drops ................................................................................................................. 4-70
Determine Bandwidth Requirements ................................................................................................. 4-72
Obtain Loss Budgets for Electronics from the Customer ................................................................... 4-72
Twinaxial Cabling .................................................................................................................. 4-73

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 4-73
Optical Fiber Coaxial Cabling .............................................................................................. 4-74

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 4-74
System Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 4-75
Space Allocation ........................................................................................................................ 4-75
Power ........................................................................................................................................ 4-75
Applications ..................................................................................................................................... 4-76
4-ii
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Figures
Figure 4.1
Cable sizing ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Figure 4.2
Loose-tube cable cross section ........................................................................................ 4-19
Figure 4.3
Tight-buffered cables ........................................................................................................ 4-20
Figure 4.4
ALPETH cable ................................................................................................................. 4-36
Figure 4.5
Self-supporting cable ........................................................................................................ 4-38
Figure 4.6
Reinforced self-supporting cable ....................................................................................... 4-40
Figure 4.7
PASP cable ..................................................................................................................... 4-41
Figure 4.8
ASP cable ........................................................................................................................ 4-44
Figure 4.9
Bonded ASP cable ........................................................................................................... 4-46
Figure 4.10
Underground (ductpic) cable ............................................................................................. 4-47
Figure 4.11
Air core screened cable .................................................................................................... 4-49
Figure 4.12
Filled screened cable ....................................................................................................... 4-50
Figure 4.13
PE 39Filled solid ALPETH cable ................................................................................... 4-52
Figure 4.14
PE 39Filled solid 0.13 mm (0.005 in) cable ................................................................... 4-54
Figure 4.15
PE 39Filled solid gopher resistant sheath cable ............................................................ 4-57
Figure 4.16
PE 89Filled foam skin CACSP cable ............................................................................ 4-59
Figure 4.17
PE 89Filled foam skin ALPETH cable ........................................................................... 4-61
Figure 4.18
Coaxial cable ................................................................................................................... 4-64
Figure 4.19
Aerial coaxial cables ........................................................................................................ 4-67
Figure 4.20
Armored cable .................................................................................................................. 4-68
Figure 4.21
Trunk/feeder system ......................................................................................................... 4-70
Figure 4.22
Standard shield and super shield (quad) construction (drop cable) .................................... 4-71
Figure 4.23
Twinaxial cable ................................................................................................................. 4-73
Figure 4.24
Optical fiber-coaxial system ............................................................................................. 4-74
2004 BICSI
4-iii
Chapter 4: Cabling
Tables
Table 4.1
Calculating the optical fiber attenuation margin ................................................................... 4-7
Table 4.2
Calculating losses .............................................................................................................. 4-9
Table 4.3
Splice loss values in dB .................................................................................................... 4-11
Table 4.4
System gain, power penalties, and the link-loss budget calculations ................................ 4-12
Table 4.5
Minimum system loss ...................................................................................................... 4-14
Table 4.6

optical fiber type ............................................................................................................... 4-15
Table 4.7

fiber type (10 Gb) ............................................................................................................. 4-17
Table 4.8
Color codingindividual optical fibers ............................................................................... 4-22
Table 4.9
Loop gauging table ........................................................................................................... 4-25
Table 4.10
Cable attenuation margin characteristics .......................................................................... 4-27
Table 4.11
Insulation types ................................................................................................................ 4-28
Table 4.12
Access provider cable plan ............................................................................................... 4-29
Table 4.13
Description of codes ......................................................................................................... 4-30
Table 4.14
Cable sheath compositions .............................................................................................. 4-31
Table 4.15
Cable usage guide ............................................................................................................ 4-32
Table 4.16
RUS-acceptance cable-coding plan .................................................................................. 4-32
Table 4.17
Description of codes ......................................................................................................... 4-33
Table 4.18
RUS sheath composition .................................................................................................. 4-33
Table 4.19
RUS-acceptance cable usage guide ................................................................................. 4-34
Table 4.20
Standard color codes ........................................................................................................ 4-35
Table 4.21
ALPETH cable ................................................................................................................. 4-37
Table 4.22
Self-supporting cable ........................................................................................................ 4-39
Table 4.23
Reinforced self-supporting cable ....................................................................................... 4-40
Table 4.24
Pressurized direct-buried cable ........................................................................................ 4-42
Table 4.25
ASP cable ........................................................................................................................ 4-45
Table 4.26
Underground (ductpic) cable ............................................................................................. 4-48
Table 4.27
Filled screened cable ....................................................................................................... 4-51
Table 4.28
PE 39Filled solid ALPETH cable ................................................................................... 4-53
Table 4.29
PE 39Filled solid 0.13 mm (5 mil) copper cable ............................................................ 4-55
Table 4.30
PE 39Filled solid gopher resistant sheath cable ............................................................ 4-58
Table 4.31
PE 89Filled foam skin CACSP cable ............................................................................ 4-60
Table 4.32
PE 89Filled foam skin ALPETH cable ........................................................................... 4-62
4-iv
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table 4.33
Cable attenuation at VSWR = 1.0, 50 ohm foam dielectric and ambient 20 C (68 F) ..... 4-69
Table 4.34
Coaxial attenuation at 20 C (68 F) over long distances .................................................. 4-69
Table 4.35
Drop cable and attenuation ............................................................................................... 4-71
Table 4.36
Drop cable and attenuation at maximum drop length ........................................................ 4-72
Example
Example 4.1 Optical fiber attenuation margin calculations worksheet ...................................................... 4-8
2004 BICSI
4-v
Chapter 4: Cabling
4-vi
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Cabling
Introduction
The telecommunications distribution designer must first assess the customer requirements
prior to selecting the type and size of cabling to be used in a proposed outside plant (OSP)
project:
Number of work areas to be served.
Types of equipment to be served.
Information to be transmitted.
Voice.
Video.
Data.
Audio.
Community antenna television (CATV).
Distance involved.
Future growth.
Selecting the appropriate type and size of cable(s) is critical to the success of a design. In
order to determine the requirements for a job, the designer must:
Talk to the customer. The customer should know how many users or work areas will be
served by the OSP facilities. If not, the customer or consultant must initiate a survey.
Calculate pair requirements. Once the above information has been tabulated, add all of the
requirements back to the beginning of the route (Figure 4.1). Begin with the building or
work area farthest from the beginning of the project. Size the cable to include any future
requirements.
Figure 4.1
Cable sizing
72
101
200-pair
cable
65
51
Bldg G
Fill box legend

Planned future pair requirement
100-pair
cable
300-pair cable
152
600-pair cable
Bldg E
110
200-pair
cable
Bldg D
262 155
173 85
200-pair
cable
Bldg B
482
309
Existing pair requirement

Bldg A
2004 BICSI
4-1
Chapter 4: Cabling
Once the requirements have been tabulated, the designer can then determine:
If optical fiber cable, balanced twisted-pair cable, or both are appropriate.
How many pairs of balanaced twisted-pair or strands of optical fiber are required.
If there is a need for coaxial cable.
This chapter discusses the types of cable available along with their transmission
characteristics, construction specifications, cable coding descriptions, advantages, and
disadvantages. Methods for selecting the right optical fiber, balanced twisted-pair, or coaxial
cable are also addressed.
4-2
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Recognized Cable
Cable Types
With the myriad of telecommunications services available, one particular cabling plan may not
be suitable to serve all of these needs. Time, money, performance, and equipment specifications become the determining factors in the selection process.
Currently, recognized cable includes:
Singlemode optical fiber.
50/125 m multimode optical fiber.
62.5/125 m multimode optical fiber.
100 ohm balanced twisted-pair.
75 ohm coaxial.
Optical Fiber Cable

Optical fiber cable transports information as coded light pulses. Some advantages of optical
fiber cable are:
2004 BICSI
Extended distances.
Expanded bandwidth.
Immunity to electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Low transmission loss.
Compact and lightweight materials.
Security.
4-3
Chapter 4: Cabling
Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable

Balanced twisted-pair cable transports information as electrical signals. Twisted-pair is
generally referred to as a balanced transmission medium as the signals on each of the
conductors of a pair are of equal value but have opposite phase or polarity. Historically, in the
United States, the public telephone companies (Regional Bell Operating Company and Public
Telecommunications Networks) installed balanced twisted-pair cable for OSP distribution in
public and private networks.
The advantage to balanced twisted-pair is that it has a large installed base and is a familiar
technology. However, as the increased use of optical fiber occurs in both the feeder and the
distribution segments of the network, this advantage fades. Technicians currently entering the
field of outside plant are likely to be more familiar with optical fiber cable. The shear amount
of copper plant in place still capable of performing satisfactorily, as well as the high cost of
replacement makes it important.
The disadvantages of balanced twisted-pair cable are that:
It is potentially more sensitive to external EMI.
Its high bandwidth applications have a distance limitation.
75 Ohm Coaxial Cable

Coaxial cable transports information as electrical signals. CATV providers traditionally
installed coaxial cable from their headend source point to the subscribers. Coaxial cable is
referred to as an unbalanced transmission medium, because one conductor is at ground value
or zero volt potential and the other conductor is at a value off-ground. Coaxial cable is also
used in customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP) distribution for private networks, primarily
for broadband video services.
The advantages of 75 ohm coaxial cable are that it:
Is less susceptible to interference and radiation than twisted-pair.
Has high bandwidth relative to balanced twisted-pair.
The disadvantages are that:
It is more expensive than other cable types.
Shield connections pose an increased risk of ground loops.
4-4
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Optical Fiber Cabling

Introduction
Optical fiber technology is economically feasible and beneficial for use in most
telecommunications systems including telephony, data, and CATV.
In campus backbone environments, optical fiber is used between buildings for:
Voice.
Video.
Data.
Audio.
CATV.
Security and fire alarms.
In campus applications, it is an advantage to use optical fiber in backbones because of its

ability to serve several different logical protocols and topologies by offering:
2004 BICSI
Increased distance.
High data rates.
Lightning immunity.
All-dielectric cable.
EMI
No crosstalk.
No grounding requirement for all-dielectric cable.
4-5
Chapter 4: Cabling
A properly planned system can anticipate growth and provide network flexibility and longevity
for:
Voice.
Data.
Video.
Audio.
CATV.
Multimedia.
Often, a backbone comprised of both multimode and singlemode optical fiber is recommended
to satisfy present and future needs in the backbone.
For backbone applications, the following components have been standardized within ANSI/
TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standards;
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Component Standard; and ANSI/TIA/
EIA-568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1:
General Requirements:
Singlemode optical fiber cable
50/125 m and 62.5/125 m multimode optical fiber cables
Connectors that meet Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS)

requirements and environmental conditions for where they are installed
Multimode fibers are frequently referred to by the core and cladding diameter in micrometers/
microns (m). For example, a multimode optical fiber with a core diameter of 62.5 microns
and a cladding diameter of 125 microns is typically designated as 62.5/125 m optical fiber.
Attenuation
The maximum permissible end-to-end system attenuation in a given link is determined by the
average transmitter power and the receiver sensitivity. To analyze a systems attenuation and
determine if the proposed electronics will operate over the cable plant, use the nine steps
below then check the minimum system loss.
The nine steps are illustrated in Table 4.1, Calculating Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin; and
in Example 4.1, Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin Calculations Worksheet.
NOTE:
Be sure the test setup simulates the actual system. (Use the jumpers or at
least include their losses in final calculations.)
4-6
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Attenuation, continued
Table 4.1
Calculating the optical fiber attenuation margin
Objective
A. Calculate the
passive cable
system attenuation.
B. Calculate link
loss budget.
C. Verify the attenuation

margin.
2004 BICSI
Step
Calculation
1.
Calculate the optical fiber loss.
2.
Calculate the connector loss.
3.
Calculate the splice loss.
4.
Calculate other component losses (e.g., bypass

switches, couplers, splitters).
5.
Calculate the total passive cable system attenuation

by adding the results of Steps 1-4.
6.
Calculate the system gain.
7.
Determine the power penalties.
8.
Calculate the link loss budget by subtracting the

power penalties from the system gain.
9.
Subtract the passive cable system attenuation

(result of Step 5) from the link loss budget (result
of Step 8). The result is the system attenuation
margin. If this result is a negative number, the
system will not operate.
4-7
Chapter 4: Cabling
Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin Calculations Worksheet
Example 4.1 illustrates how to calculate the system attenuation margin to verify adequate
power. Detailed information for each alphabetical listing (e.g., parts A, B, C) is further
provided in the sections following Example 4.1.
Example 4.1
Optical fiber attenuation margin calculations worksheet
Part A. Calculating the Passive Cable System Attenuation

1
Calculate Optical Fiber Loss

at Operating Wavelength
Calculate Connector Loss

(Exclude Tx and Rx Connectors)
Calculate Splice Loss

x
4
5
Calculate Other Components Loss

Calculate Total Passive
Cable System Attenuation
+
+
+
Cable Distance
Individual Optical Fiber Loss
Total Fiber Loss
Connector Pair Loss
Number of Connector Pairs
Total Connector Loss
Individual Splice Loss
Number of Splices
Total Splice Loss
Total Components (None)
Total Fiber Loss
Total Connector Loss
Total Splice Loss
Total Components
Total System Attenuation
1.5
x 1.5
2.25
0.75
x 4
3.0
0.3
x 3
0.9
0.0
2.3
+ 3.0
+ 0.9
+ 0.0
6.2
km
dB/km
dB
dB
System Wavelength
Fiber Type
1300 nm
62.5/125 m
multimode
- 18.0 dBm
- 31.0 dBm
11.0 dB
- 18.0 dBm
- 31.0 dBm
13.0 dB
2.0 dB
+ 0.0 dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
Part B. Calculating Link Loss Budget

Example Manufacturers
Electronic Specifications
Calculate System Gain

-
Determine Power Penalties

+
+
Calculate Link Loss Budget

-
Average Transmitter Output

Receiver Sensitivity (109 BER)
Receiver Dynamic Range
Average Transmitter Power
Receiver Sensitivity
System Gain
Operating Margin (none stated)
Receiver Power Penalties
(none stated)
Repair Margin (2 fusion
splices at 0.3 dB each)
Total Power Penalties
System Gain
Power Penalties
Total Link Loss Budget
+ 0.6 dB
2.6
13.0
- 2.6
10.4
dB
dB
dB
dB
Part C. Verifying Performance

9
Calculate System Performance

Margin to Verify Adequate Power
NOTE:
Link Loss Budget

Passive Cable System Attenuation
System Performance Margin
10.4 dB
6.2 dB
4.2 dB
4.2 > 0. Therefore, the system will operate as installed.
4-8
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Part A. Calculating the Passive Cable System Attenuation
To calculate the passive cable system attenuation, total the values for the:
Optical fiber loss.
Connector loss.
Splice loss.
Other component losses.
NOTE:
When working with existing cable plant, passive cable system attenuation can be
measured directly. Table 4.2 explains how to calculate each of these losses.
Table 4.2
Calculating losses
To Calculate the . . .
You Must . . .
Optical fiber loss
Multiply the length of the proposed link by the

normalized cable attenuation (dB/km) for the optical fiber at
the operating system wavelength.
NOTE:
Connector loss
Temperature may affect the loss of the optical

fiber
cable. See Effects of Temperature on Optical
Fiber Loss.
Add the individual attenuation values (in dB) for every

connector pair along the optical fiber route, from transmitter
to receiver, excluding the transmitter and receiver
connectors (see Connector Loss Values).
NOTE:
When choosing link lengths that require more

than two connectors, selecting the lowest loss
connector may be important in order to stay
within the loss budget.
Splice loss
Add the individual local attenuation values (in dB) for

every splice along the optical fiber route, from transmitter to
receiver (see Splice Loss Values).
Other component
Add the attenuation values of any other components

(passive stars, etc.) that contribute to losses in the
optical fiber route, from transmitter to receiver.
Add the values for each of these losses to get the total passive cable system attenuation.
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Example calculations for the passive cable system attenuation and its four
components are shown in Example 4.1, Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin
Calculations Worksheet.
4-9
Chapter 4: Cabling
Effects of Temperature on Optical Fiber Loss
Temperature changes may affect the loss of optical fiber cable. Loss variations due to
temperature changes can sometimes be as high as 2 dB/km. Some manufacturers
specifications indicate the cables loss only at room temperature, rather than throughout the
operating temperature range. Add an additional margin (in dB/km) to the normalized optical
fiber attenuation value when calculating the optical fiber link loss (see Example 4.1, Part A,
Calculating the Passive Cable System Attenuation) if the cables specifications are:
For room temperature only.
Based on an average of several fibers.
4-10
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Splice Loss Values
General splice loss values for system planning and link loss analysis are given in the following
table. Specific suppliers or contractors may use other values (see Table 4.3).
Table 4.3
Splice loss values in dB
Splice Type
Multimode
Maximum
Singlemode
Maximum
Fusion
0.3
0.3
Mechanical
0.3
0.3
Part B. Calculating the Link-loss Budget

The link-loss budget is the maximum allowable loss for the end-to-end cable system. To
calculate the link-loss budget, first calculate the system gain and power penalties:
System gain is the difference between the transmitter average power and the receiver
sensitivity.
Power penalties are factors, including operating margin, receiver power penalty, and
repair margin, which adjust the system gain.
Table 4.4 explains how to calculate system gain, power penalties, and the link-loss budget.
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
For information on link-loss budget calculations by the manufacturer, see the

footnote at the end of Table 4.4.
4-11
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table 4.4
System gain, power penalties, and the link-loss budget calculations
To Calculate the
You Must
System gain
Subtract the receiver sensitivity (in dBm) from the

transmitter average power (in dBm). This gives the
maximum allowable loss (in dBm) between the transmitter
and receiver.
Power penalties
Add the loss values for the:
Operating Margin*This loss accounts for:

Variations in transmitter center wavelength.
Changes in transmitter average power and receiver
sensitivity that result from age.
Variations in component temperature within the
operating range of the system.
If the system manufacturer does not specify the
operating margin, use values of:
2 dB for light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
3 dB for lasers.
Link-loss budget*
Receiver Power Penalty*Some manufacturers may

specify other power penalties (dispersion, jitter,
bandwidth, or clock recovery) that must be subtracted
from the system gain. If these are provided, they must
be subtracted from the available system gain.
Repair Margin*If the cable is located where it could

be cut or damaged by accident, allow sufficient loss
margin in the design to accommodate at least two repair
splices. If the cable is in a high-risk area or reroutings
are anticipated, the designer may decide to allow for
more than two splices.
Subtract the total value (in dB) for all of the power
penalties from the system gain. The result is the link loss
budget.
In some cases, the electronics manufacturer will already have calculated the linkloss budget. In these instances, it is usually safe to assume the operating margin
(i.e., transmitter aging) and receiver power penalties have been included in the
manufacturers calculations. However, the repair margin is usually not included in a
manufacturers link-loss budget calculations, unless the product documentation
specifically states a repair margin. When the manufacturer does not state a repair
margin, the system designer must subtract it from the system gain to determine the
link-loss budget.
4-12
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Part C. Verifying the Attenuation Margin
To verify attenuation margin, subtract the passive cable system attenuation from the link-loss
budget. If the result is:
Above zero (i.e., the passive cable system attenuation is less than the link-loss budget),
the system has enough power to operate over the passive portion of the link.
Below zero (i.e., the passive cable system attenuation is more than the link-loss budget),
the system does not have enough power to operate.
If the result is below zero and the system has not been installed, make design changes
(e.g., use lower-loss connectors, splices or optical fiber, or reroute the design) to reduce
passive system losses. In rare cases, it may be necessary to add active components with
greater system gains.
When working with an existing cable plant, passive cable system attenuation can be measured
directly. Remember that the test setup should simulate the actual system (use the jumpers or
at least include their losses in the final calculations).
Link-loss calculations are shown in the Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin Calculations
Worksheet.
Check Minimum System Loss
After verifying that the electronics have enough power to operate, there remains one more
attenuation check of the system design: compare the link attenuation to the receivers dynamic
range to ensure there is not too little loss in the link (see Table 4.5).
Insufficient minimum system loss (i.e., too little loss in the link) is sometimes a problem when
a laser source is used in premises environments (where lengths are short).
To calculate the minimum required system loss, subtract the receivers dynamic range from
the system gain (both in dB). Using the example in the Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin
Calculations Worksheet:
System Gain
- Receivers Dynamic Range
Minimum Required System Loss
2004 BICSI
4-13
13 dB
- 11 dB
2 dB
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table 4.5
Minimum system loss
If the Result Is
Then
Less than zero
No further checking is necessary as it is impossible to

overdrive that transmitter/receiver combination.
Greater than zero
The resulting number represents the minimum loss that must

be introduced into the link between the transmitter and
receiver to maintain the specified BER. The total optical
fiber, connector, and splice loss must exceed this value.
Using the example in the Optical Fiber Attenuation Margin
Calculations Worksheet:
Optical fiber loss:
2.3 dB
Connector loss:
3.0 dB
Splice loss:
0.9 dB
Total
6.2 dB
6.2 > 2; therefore, the system will operate as installed.

If additional loss is required in a given link, it is easy to add an appropriate link attenuator to
the system. Attenuators are devices that can be inserted into optical fiber transmission
systems, usually at a point where there is a connector, to introduce additional loss. There are
two types of attenuators:
Fixed attenuators cause a specific level of additional loss.
Variable attenuators can be tuned to a given link.
Final Analysis
Determine whether the minimum loss criteria are met by measuring the attenuation of each
link after it is installed.
4-14
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Supportable Distance and Maximum Channel Attenuation
Table 4.6 is taken from ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, and provides information to assist in the
selection of optical fiber cable, and lists maximum supportable distances and maximum
channel attenuation for optical applications by optical fiber type. Applications are identified
using both industry standard and common names. The maximum supportable distances and
maximum channel attenuation listed apply to the specific assumptions and constraints provided
in the notes. Different assumptions or constraints may change the maximum supportable
distance and maximum channel attenuation.
Table 4.6
Supportable distances and channel attenuation for optical fiber applications by optical fiber type
Wavelength
Maximum Supportable
Maximum Channel
2
2
Distance (m)
Attenuation (dB)
7
1
7
Singlemode
62.5 m
50 m
Singlemode 62.5 m
50 m
Application
(nm)
10BASE-FL
(Ethernet)
Token Ring 4/16
Demand Priority3
(100VG-AnyLAN)
100BASE-FX
(Fast Ethernet)
FDDI (Low Cost)
FDDI (Original)
ATM
52
155
8
155
622
8
622
Fibre Channel
266 8
266 8
1062
1062
8
1000BASE-SX
(Gigabit Ethernet)
8
1000BASE-LX
(Gigabit Ethernet)
850
2000
2000
NST
12.5
7.8
NST
850
1300
850
1300
2000
2000
500
2000
2000
2000
500
2000
NST
NST
NST
13.0
7.0
7.5
11.0
8.3
2.3
2.8
6.3
NST
NST
NST
1300
1300
500
2000
500
2000
NST
40,000
7.0
11.0
2.3
6.3
NST
10.0 to 32.0
1300
1300
850
1300
850
3000
2000
1000
500
300
3000
2000
1000
500
300
15,000
15,000
15,000
-
10.0
10.0
7.2
6.0
4.0
5.3
5.3
7.2
1.3
4.0
7.0 to 12.0
7.0 to 12.0
7.0 to 12.0
-
1300
850
850
1300
850
1500
700
4
300
5
220
1500
2000
500
6
550
10,000
10,000
-
6.0
12.0
4.0
9
3.2
5.5
12.0
4.0
9
3.9
6.0 to 14.0
6.0 to 14.0
-
1300
550
550
5000
4.0
2004 BICSI
4-15
3.5
4.7
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table 4.6
Supportable distances and channel attenuation for optical fiber application by optical fiber type, continued
NOTES:
1.
A worst case source coupling loss of 4.7 dB is used when coupling 50/125 m fiber to an
LED source optimized for use with 62.5/125 m fiber. This coupling loss is based on the
theoretical maximum coupling loss. 10BASE-FL specifies 5.7 dB maximum coupling loss
into 50 m fiber. Token Ring, FDDI (Low Cost), FDDI and 100BASE-FX specify
5.0 dB maximum coupling loss into 50/125m fiber.
2.
NST (non-standard) entries indicate where this Standard does not specify support for
the media, but where equipment is commonly available to convert the native application
signals to a form compatible with the non-native media.
3.
Application specifies 62.5/125 m fiber with 200 MHzkm bandwidth at 850 nm.
4.
300 m (984 ft) capability specified in Fibre Channel update, FC-PH-2.
5.
For 62.5/125 m fiber, IEEE specifies 220 m (721 ft) for 160/500 MHzkm modal
bandwidth and 275 m (902 ft) for fiber with 200/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth.
6.
For 50/125 m fiber, IEEE specifies 500 m (1640 ft) for 400/400 MHzkm modal
bandwidth and 550 m (1804 ft) for 500/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth.
7.
Power budget and distance capability depends on classification option of transmitter and
receiver. Distance specified is for the highest power budget option.
8.
This is a laser-based application. When not so noted, multimode applications are

LED-based.
9.
Maximum channel attenuation based on channel insertion loss plus unallocated margin
from IEEE 802.3z.
10. Distances for specific implementations should be verified with application standards.
4-16
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table 4.7 is taken from ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-3, Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements,
Addendum 3Supportable Distances and Channel Attenuation for Optical Fiber
Applications by Fiber Type.
Table 4.7
Supportable distances and channel attenuation for optical fiber applications by fiber type (10 Gb)
Maximum Supportable Distance 1 (m)

Application
Wave
Length
(nm )
Multimode
Multimode
62.5/125
m
50/125
m
850-nm
LaserOptimized
3
50/125 m
850
300
300
300
10GBASE-S
10GBASE-L
850
1310
26 4
NST
82 5
NST
10GBASE-E
1550
NST
NST
10GBASE-LX4
1300
300
30011
10GBASE-LX4
1310
10/100BASE-SX
10G Ethernet
Maximum Channel Attenuation1 (dB)

2
62.5/125
m
50/125
m
850-nm
LaserOptimized
3
50/125 m
NST
4.0
4.0
4.0
NST
300
NST
NST
10000 9
2.6 6,
NST
2.6
NST
NST
6.0
NST
40000
NST
NST
11.0 10
300
10000
Singlemode
2.3 6,
NST
NST
Singlemode
2.5 6,12
2.0 6,12
2.06,12
6.6 6
1. NST (non-standard) entries indicate where this standard does not recognize use of the media, but
where equipment may be available to convert the native application signals to a form compatible with
the non-native media.
2. Specifications shown in this table are for TIA-568-B.1 recognized fiber types. Specifications for other
non-recognized types of fibers are included in these footnotes where applicable.
3. 850-nm laser-optimized 50/125 m multimode fiber supports the same maximum channel distances and
insertion losses as 500/500 MHzkm 50/125 m multimode fiber for applications specified within TIA568-B.1.
4. For 62.5/125 m fiber, IEEE specifies 26 m (85 ft) for fiber with 160/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth and
33 m (108 ft) for fiber with 200/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth.
5. For 50/125 m fiber, IEEE specifies 66 m (216 ft) for fiber with 400/400 MHzkm modal bandwidth and
82 m (269 ft) for fiber with 500/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth.
6. Includes maximum channel insertion loss plus additional allowable insertion loss.
7. For 62.5/125 m multimode fiber, IEEE specifies 2.6 dB for fiber with 160/500 MHzkm modal
bandwidth and 2.5 dB for Fiber with 200/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth.
8. For 50/125 m multimode fiber, IEEE specifies 2.2 dB for fiber with 400/400 MHzkm modal band
width and 2.3 dB for Fiber with 500/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth.
9. Channels are specified within TIA-568-B.1 up to 3 km (9840 ft). Distances provided within this table are
the maximum distances specified within IEEE 802.3 and invoke cabling
specifications that may differ from TIA-568-B.3.
10. 10GBASE-E channels are specified to have a minimum of 5 dB and maximum of 11 dB channel
insertion loss.
11. For 50/125 m multimode fiber, IEEE specifies 240 m (787 ft) for fiber with 400/400 MHzkm modal
bandwidth and 300 m (984 ft) for fiber with 500/500 MHzkm modal bandwidth.
12. The maximum channel attenuation is allowed to be up to 0.5 dB higher than the value shown when including loss
from mode conditioning patch cords.
2004 BICSI
4-17
Chapter 4: Cabling
Optical Fiber Cable Types

Cables are categorized by their:
Buffering mechanism.
Function.
Common functions on customer premises include:
Interbuilding backbone.
Intrabuilding backbone.
Horizontal distribution.
Patch cords and equipment cables.
The two types of buffering mechanisms for optical fiber cable are:
Loose tube (OSP and some inside plant cables).
Tight buffered (inside plant and underground plant cables).
Loose-Tube Cables
Loose-tube cables are constructed so the optical fibers are decoupled from tensile forces that
the cable may experience during installation and operation (see Figure 4.2). Loose-tube cables:
Are more robust than tight-buffered cables for aerial outdoor applications.
Are designed and proven for long outdoor runs.
Are less expensive than indoor cable per optical fiber-meter, specifically at optical fiber
counts above 24.
Have better packing density.
4-18
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Optical Fiber Cable Types, continued

Figure 4.2
Loose-tube cable cross section
Central member
Loose buffer tube
Fiber bundle
Tensile strength
member
Inner sheath
Steel-tape armor
(optional)
Outer sheath
(optional)
NOTE:
This illustration is not to scale.
Unlike cables that have a 900 m buffer, loose-tube cables generally have a 250 m coating.
Loose-tube cables are available in:
Armored constructions for use in direct-buried applications.
All dielectric constructions for use in aerial and underground applications.
Riser-rated constructions for use in riser applications.
Tight-Buffered Cables
Tight-buffered fibers generally have a 900 m coating applied directly to the optical fiber.
Some applications for tight-buffered cable are:
Intrabuilding backbone.
Horizontal distribution.
Patch cords and equipment cables.
Interbuilding underground (below the frost line).
Tight-buffered cables are usually more sensitive to adverse temperatures and outside forces
than loose-tube cables and are desirable because of their:
2004 BICSI
Increased physical flexibility.
Smaller bend radius for low optical fiber-count cables.
Easier handling characteristics in low optical fiber counts.
4-19
Chapter 4: Cabling

The two typical constructions of tight-buffered cables (see Figure 4.3) are:
Distribution design, which has a single jacket protecting all the tight-buffered optical
fibers.
Breakout design, which has an individual jacket for each tight-buffered optical fiber.
The distribution design cables are recommended for typical installations because of lower
cost and smaller diameter. Generally, large optical fiber count distribution cables (greater
than 24 fibers) are constructed in a unitized design in which an inner jacket is placed around
units of 6 or 12 fibers.
In outdoor environments, use loose-tube cables that are recommended by the manufacturer
for outdoor use. Loose-tube cables are recommended because they:
Are rugged.
Are specified to operate over a wide temperature range.
Allow higher optical fiber densities per sheath size than tight-buffered designs. Where
duct space is limited, this becomes a significant factor.
Loose-tube or tight-buffered cable, either alone or in combination, may be used in conduits

below the frost line. Tight-buffered cables are not recommended for use above the frost
line because they are subject to damage from freezing water or moisture.
The National Electrical Code (NEC) limits the use of exposed unlisted OSP cable to the
first 15 m (50 ft) within the building from the point of entrance.
Figure 4.3
Tight-buffered cables
Breakout design
Distribution design
Fiber
Fiber
Buffer
Buffer
Tensile strength
member
Tensile
strength
member
Subunit
jacket
Tensile strength
member
Central
member
Outer
jacket
Central
member
4-20
Outer
jacket
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

Composite Cables
Composite cables contain balanced twisted-pair and optical fiber. Environments for composite
cables are:
Long haul.
Premises.
Campus.
OSP cables for long-haul applications are available with voice-grade balanced twisted-pair
pairs for splicing and testing communications needs. These pairs are usually used for technician
communications convenience in long-haul situations where there is a remotely located splice
point. As premises applications are relatively short, these pairs are usually not required.
Cable Coding
Unlike balanced cable, standardization of cable-coding plans among optical fiber manufacturers
does not exist. However, manufacturer-specific coding generally allows ordering of optical fiber
cable with the following characteristic options:
2004 BICSI
Optical fiber design:
Multimode.
Singlemode, depressed clad.
Singlemode, matched clad.
Singlemode, dispersion shifted.
Singlemode, unshifted.
Cable core design:
Filled
Dry water block
Non-filled
Sheath design:
Optical power ground wire (OPGW)
All dielectric self-support (ADSS)
Dielectric.
Self-supporting.
Armored self-supporting.
Metallic.
Oversheath design:
Stainless steel.
Coated steel.
None.
Self-supporting.
Number of optical fibers.
4-21
Chapter 4: Cabling
Wavelength:
Singlemode 1310/1550 nm.
Singlemode, dispersion shifted 1550 nm.
Multimode 850 nm, 1300 nm.
Transmission parameters.
Rural Utilities Service (RUS) specifications.
Color Coding
Individual optical fibers are identifiable by color code (see Table 4.8):
Table 4.8
Color codingindividual optical fibers
Fiber
Color
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
White
Red
Black
Yellow
10
Violet
11
Rose
12
Aqua
For loose-tube optical fiber cables with more than 12 fibers, the fibers are grouped within
color-coded tubes typically containing either 6 or 12 fibers. The tubes are color-coded using
the same color code for optical fiber (e.g., the first tube is blue, the second is orange, etc.).
The fibers within the tube would use the color code shown in Table 4.8. Where the cable
contains both single and multimode optical fibers, the singlemode fibers are typically contained
within the first group of tubes.
NOTE:
In cables with 24 optical fibers, some manufacturers use a white and a black (or
gray) tube. The first group of fibers, or the singlemode fibers, are grouped within
the white tube.
4-22
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

For tight-buffered cables with more than 12 optical fibers, the fibers are grouped within
sequentially numbered tubes typically containing either 6 or 12 fibers. The fibers within the
tube use the color code shown in Table 4.8. Where the cable contains both singlemode and
multimode fibers, the singlemode fibers are typically grouped within sequentially numbered
yellow tubes, while the multimode fibers are grouped within sequentially numbered orange
tubes.
2004 BICSI
4-23
Chapter 4: Cabling
Twisted-Pair Cabling
Introduction
Balanced twisted-pair cabling is feasible and applicable for a wide range of telecommunications systems, including telephony, data, premises, and special applications.
In interbuilding backbone environments, balanced twisted-pair cabling is used between
buildings for:
Voice.
Data.
Security and fire alarms.
Selection Criteria
Resistance Design
Traditional balanced twisted-pair cable selection is based on resistance design of the cable.
Balanced twisted-pair cable exhibits a resistance to current flow, measured in ohms; they
are typically available in up to four sizes: 19 [0.91 mm (0.036 in)], 22 [0.64 mm (0.025 in)],
24 [0.51 mm (0.020 in)], and 26 [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] American wire gauge (AWG). The
gauge of the wire is proportionate to its resistance per unit length at a specified temperature.
The length of a cable loop from the switch to a customer is dependent on three factors:
Resistance of the cable in ohms
Signaling limits of the telephone and terminating device switch in ohms
Loading
Since every customer in a loop (see Table 4.9) could potentially require a different resistance
design, the telephone industry developed a transmission design standard known as gauge
coding area number (GACAN).
GACAN was developed to eliminate individual circuit design and to identify distances that a
specific gauge or combination of gauges could serve. The use of a resistance design
worksheet is typical for traditional copper loop design. GACAN limits usage to no more than
two cable gauges.
4-24
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Selection Criteria, continued

Table 4.9
Loop gauging table
GACAN Less than 9.1 km (30.0 kft)
Subscriber Loop Design
Gauging
Code Area
26
26
24
24
24
22
Design
Range
(ohms)
1300
1
2.4 (7.8)
GACAN Area from

Central Office km (kft)
2
3
4.8 (15.6)
6.0 (19.8) 7.4 (24.4) 9.0 (29.6)
GACAN = Gauge coding area number
The second factor in loop design is the transmission signaling limits of the switch. These limits
are based on the switchs ability to deliver signaling at various loop lengths. Earlier switch
platforms could service loops that exhibited resistance of up to 1300 ohms. Depending on the
cable AWG makeup, the resistance of the loop length would vary. As switch technology
evolved, the resistance design limits increased to 1500, 1800, and 2100 ohms, allowing greater
loop lengths.
The third factor impacting loop design is loading. A load is a device designed to counter the
effect of capacitance buildup in loop lengths over 5.5 km (3.4 mi). The capacitance buildup
within a pair is the primary reason for the manufacturing of low cap (low capacitance) cable.
The effect of loading has become a major reason for the development of current serving area
design parameters for local loops.
Serving Area Design
Most serving area designs are based on identifying a core or hub location that will be used to
serve a geographic area. A serving area design contains a:
Centrally located hub site that may include remote electronics.
Feed cable extending to the host switch.
Cross-connect point for distributing services through distribution cables within the serving
area.
The primary reason for the paradigm shift in design is to:
2004 BICSI
Eliminate loads (they inhibit high speed transport).
Increase bandwidth in the loop.
4-25
Chapter 4: Cabling
Selection Criteria, continued

Serving area design has multiple names that are often used interchangeably between design
firms and companies. The serving area core is fed with high-speed digital service (DS-1, DS-3)
through copper and optical fiber cabling. Electronics serving this area are known as digital
subscriber loop (xDSL).
This design parameter is driving the asymmetrical digital subscriber loop/digital subscriber loop
(ADSL/DSL) technologies that may extend a serving area to 5.5 km (3.4 mi). A 5.5 km (3.4 mi)
design will reduce the number of serving areas to a minimum and lower the corresponding costs.
The issue of ADSL/DSL serving areas design is that the technology has not been widely
implemented in the industry. For this reason, 3.7 km (2.30 mi) service areas are the accepted
norm.
There are several other state-of-the-art networks being developed:
Hybrid fiber/coaxial (HFC)
Fiber to the curb (FTTC)
Fiber to the home (FTTH)
All of these network technologies are designed to accommodate service areas of at least
3.7 km (2.30 mi).
4-26
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Cable Attenuation Margin

Table 4.10 is a representative table of OSP cable attenuation margin characteristics. These
values will vary by manufacturer. Contact the manufacturer or distributor to obtain the
specific values for the design.
Table 4.10
Cable attenuation margin characteristics
PE 22
Solid Air Core
AW G
Average Mutual
Capacitance nF/mile
< 12 pair (+ or - 7)
> 12 pair (+ or - 4)
Capacitance Unbalance
[pF/kft] (maximum)
Pair-to-Pair 6 pair
12 pair
Pair-To-Ground
(maximum) [pF/kft]
Cable Average 12 Pair
dc Conductor
Resistance at
20 (ohm/1 kft) maximum
Resistance Unbalance
Maximum Average %
Maximum Individual %
Minimum Dielectric
Strength (kV)
Conductor-to-Conductor
3 Sec
Core-to-Sheath 3 Sec
Insulation Resistance
(Megohm-mile)
100-500 Vdc for 1 minute
at 23 C + 1 C
Nominal Attenuation
(dB/mile)
at 150 kHz and 20 C
at 772 kHz
Equal Level Far End
Crosstalk (ELFEXT)
(minimum) (dB/kft)
at 772 kHz
Mean Power Sum
Worst Pair Power Sum
Near-end Crosstalk (NEXT)
(minimum) Power Sum
dB/kft at 722 kHz
Mean Power Sum (minimum)
2004 BICSI
PE 39
Solid Filled
PE 89
Depic Filled
19
22
24
26
19
22
24
26
19
22
24
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
Individual
100
800
150
rms
25
800
150
800
175
Individual
100
800
175
8.7
17.4
27.5 44.0
1.5
4.0
1.5
4.0
4.5
10.0
3.6
10.0
3.0 2.4
10.0 10.0
10K
10K
10K 10K
7.1
16.8
10.0
23.6
51
45
47
1.5
5.0
2.0
5.0
800
150
800
150
rms
25
800
175
8.7 17.4 27.5

1.5
4.0
800
175
44.0
1.5
5.0
2.0
5.0
7.0 5.0 4.0

15.0 15.0 15.0
2.8
15.0
1K
1.5
4.0
Individual
100
1K
1K
13.4 18.3
29.8 36.3
6.4 9.2 12.1

13.8 19.9 24.8
49
43
49
43
47
43
51
45
49
43
47
47
47
47
47
Conversions for table:
nF/mi
nF/km
multiply by 0.62 mi/km
pf/km
multiply by 3.28 kft/km

pf/kft
/kft
/km
-kft
-km
multiply by 1.61 km/mi
dB/mi
dB/kft
dB/km
dB/km
multiply by 0.62 mi/km

4-27
1K
800
175
26
83
83
rms
25
800 800
175 175
8.7 17.4 27.5

1.5
4.0
44.0
1.5
5.0
2.0
5.0
4.5 3.6 3.0

15.0 15.0 15.0
2.4
15.0
1K
1.5
4.0
800
175
1K
1K
1K
17.6
31.4
7.1 10.0 13.4

16.8 23.6 29.8
18.3
36.3
49
43
47
43
51
45
49
43
49
43
47
43
47
47
47
47
47
47
Chapter 4: Cabling
Cable Construction Types

The Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA) publishes cable standards that are
intended to encourage quality and uniformity for manufacturers producing telecommunications
cables. These are voluntary standards and do not prevent the manufacturers from producing
cables that do not adhere to the standards.
Even though the standards do not cover all specifications for cable design, they do cover
mechanical and electrical requirements. Alternative choices are offered for type of insulation,
type of filling compound, core assembly, color code, sheath design, and screened or non-screened
core.
Typically, manufacturers of Bell type (see Table 4.15) and RUS type (see Table 4.16)
construction cables adhere to these standards. These designations are for reference only
and should not be regarded as recommendations for use of one type of cable over another
with alternative cable coding plans.
The ICEA established a four-letter coding sequence for designating balanced twisted-pair
telecommunications cables. If required, after the four letters, a two-letter code known as the
outer protection covering designation is added.
The cable designation would be shown as follows:
First Cable Code Letter - Design
Second Cable Code Letter - Insulation Type
Third Cable Code Letter - Conductor Gauge
Fourth Cable Code Letter - Sheath Designation
Outer Protection Code
Pair Count
For additional information, see Coding Guide for Copper Outside Plant and Riser
Telecommunications Cables (ANSI/ICEA P-61-694-1999).
Insulation
OSP cables are available in many configurations. Insulation types for conductors are listed in
Table 4.11.
Table 4.11
Insulation types
Sheath
PIC
Composition
Plastic insulated conductor
Application
Used where a strong insulation is required
DEPIC
Dual-expanded plastic
insulated conductor
Used where smaller cables are required

since this type of insulation reduces the
overall diameter of the cable
Ductpic
Plastic insulated conductor
Cable designed for placement underground
XPE-PVC
Expanded polyethylenepolyvinyl chloride
Used where fire-retardant insulation is

required
4-28
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Cable Construction Types, continued

Table 4.12 describes the cable methodology used by most manufacturers for Bell system type
cable and reflects a 100-pair plastic insulated conductor (PIC) air core cable with solid
polyolefin air core insulated conductors 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] aluminum polyethylene
(ALPETH) sheath with unsoldered mechanical protection.
Table 4.12
Access provider cable plan
2004 BICSI
Cable
Design
Type of
Conductor
Insulation
Gauge of
Conductor
T
4-29
Sheath
Designation
Outer
Protection
Pair Size
UM
0100
4-30
Outer
Protection
Protection
Code
H&K
Air core
Low
Low cap
Screened
foam
cable capacitance screened
skin
SA
ASP
coated
24
S*
PAP
ALVYN
H
Bonded
PASP
28
T
26
P
Reinforced
selfsupport
N*
ASP
bonded
med
jacket
NOTE: * Nonstandard
* Indicated for record removal purposes only.
Submarine
double
wire armor
DA
ALPETH
coated
Unsoldered Submarine
mechanical
single
protection wire armor
UM
Cupeth
ALPETH
bare
A
22
Gopher
copper
S
Selfsupport
PIC
limited Broadband Terminating
cable
color
coded
Filled
ASP
Bonded
ASP
Bonded
STALPETH
Table 4.13
Description of codes
Type of
Sheath
19
16
Gauge Code
Sheath Code
High
potential
Solid
Expanded Foam
Dual
Solid
Dual
Solid
Foam
polyolefin expanded polyethylene with
polyolefin
expanded
polyolefin
air core
with
80 C
polyvinyl
polyolefin
air core
polyolefin
filled
filling
chloride
filled
core
core
PIC
air core
PIC
filled
or PIC
riser
AWG
Core Type
and
Conductor
Insulation
Core Code
Cable
Design
Cable Code
Chapter 4: Cabling

Table 4.13 lists and defines the codes used in the cable-coding plan.
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

Bell System Type
Typical cable sheath specifications that were used under Bell system type requirements are
listed in Table 4.14.
Table 4.14
Cable sheath compositions
2004 BICSI
Sheath
Composition
Application
ALPETH
Aluminum polyethylene
Basic sheath
ASP
Aluminum, steel, polyethylene
Electrical and mechanical protection
Bonded
A co-polymer adhesive is used

to bond the steel to the
polyethylene.
Extra strength jacket for use

in underground applications
Bonded
ASP
In addition to the characteristics

of the ASP-type of sheath, the
steel is bonded to the
polyethylene for strength.
Filled cables for underground

applications
PASP
Polyethylene, aluminum, steel,

polyethylene
Gopher and lightning protection
PVC
Polyvinyl chloride
Fire resistant
Self-support
Undulated core with aluminum,

polyethylene, and a support strand
For aerial applications
STALPETH
Steel, aluminum, polyethylene
Minimizes jacket damage
UM
Unsoldered mechanical protection

Additional steel and polyethylene
over inner polyethylene jacket
Additional mechanical protection
4-31
Chapter 4: Cabling

The most common sheath types, and the recommended environment in which they should be
used, are shown in Table 4.15.
Table 4.15
Cable usage guide
Sheath
Aerial
Buried
Underground
Inside
ALVYN
No
No
No
Yes
ALPETH
Yes
No
No
No
Bonded ALPETH
No
Yes
Yes
No
Self-support
Yes
No
No
No
Reinforced self-support
Yes
No
No
No
Filled self-support
Yes
No
No
No
Bonded PASP
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
ASP
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Bonded ASP
No
Yes
Yes
No
Ductpic
No
No
Yes
No
RUS Type Cable

The RUS cable-coding plan differs from the Bell system type shown previously.
The following tables are for information purposes only. ICEA coding is the current
standard for cable coding and should be used in place of RUS coding. Table 4.16 describes
each of the codes used. This table shows an example of a standard exchange solid conductor
air core 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)] ALPETH RUS-acceptance 100-pair cable.
Table 4.16
RUS-acceptance cable-coding plan
Cable
Design
Core Type and

Conductor
Insulation
Gauge
Code
4-32
Sheath
RUSDesignation Acceptance
Pair Size
0100
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

Table 4.17 lists and defines the common codes used in ordering an RUS type cable.
Table 4.17
Description of codes
Cable Code
Cable Design
K
Screened
cable
Core Code
A
Core Type and Filled foam
Conductor
skinDEPIC
Insulation
Gauge Code
9
W
Standard
exchange cable
B
Air core solid
G
Filled solid
AWG
19
22
24
26
Sheath Code
Type of Sheath
Coated
ALPETH
Gopherresistant
Self-support
Coated aluminum
and coated steel
Type Code
Cable Type
RUS-Acceptance
5-mil copper
sheath
Table 4.18 lists RUS sheath specifications, which differ from those in Table 4.17.
Table 4.18
RUS sheath composition
2004 BICSI
Sheath
Composition
Application
ALPETH
Coated aluminum polyethylene
Basic sheath
CACSP
Coated aluminum, coated steel,

polyethylene
Provides additional strength and

protection
Gopher-resistant
Copper
0.13 mm (5 mil)
Copper
Gopher-resistant copper alloy
Provides shield and added

protection in a single layer
Provides added electrical
protection
Solid copper shield
4-33
Chapter 4: Cabling

Table 4.19 lists the more common RUS sheath types and appropriate environment for their
use.
Table 4.19
RUS-acceptance cable usage guide
Cable Sheath
Description
Aerial
Buried
Underground
Coated ALPETH
PE 89
Yes
Yes
Yes
CACSP
PE 89
Yes
Yes
Yes
Coated ALPETH
PE 39
No
Yes
Yes
CACSP
PE 39
No
Yes
Yes
Gopher Resistant
PE 39
No
Yes
Yes
0.13 mm (5 mil) Copper
PE 39
Yes
Yes
No
Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable

The ICEA publishes cabling standards for broadband twisted-pair telecommunications cables
intended to encourage quality and uniformity for manufacturers producing these cables.
These are voluntary standards and do not prevent the manufacturers from producing cables
that do not adhere to the standards.
Broadband twisted-pair telecommunications cables are typically used to transport broadband
services from a remote switch to the end user. The remote switch feeding the broadband
cable is usually connected to the main switch or central office by optical fiber cable.
Broadband transmission divides the available bandwidth into multiple channels. Since many
channels are available for transmission, more than one device can transmit at a time;
therefore, simultaneous transmission can occur without collisions. Simultaneous transmission
of telephone service, computer, fax, and video are possible with broadband systems.
Broadband transmission can transfer large quantities of information at a time and is not
limited to handling only digital transmission. It can also support analog traffic, making it
capable of handling traditional voice and video signals simultaneously with data.
Broadband transmission was designed for signaling over long distances, with channel lengths
measured in kilometers (km) or miles (mi). The maximum distance allowable is a function of
the signal to noise ratio, protocol, and bit rate used. A network using this technology can cover
a much larger geographic area than one using baseband technology.
4-34
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Plastic Insulated Conductor (PIC) Cable

Every pair of conductors in a typical PIC cable is identifiable by the color of their insulation and
the color of their binder group. Table 4.20 shows the standard color code used by most
manufacturers in the production of PIC cables.
Table 4.20
Standard color codes
Number
Sequence
25-Pair Group (or Subgroup)

Binder Color Code
1
2
3
4
5
White
White
White
White
White
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
White
White
White
White
White
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
6
7
8
9
10
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
11
12
13
14
15
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
16
17
18
19
20
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
21
22
23
24
25
Violet
Violet
Violet
Violet
Violet
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
Slate
Violet
Violet
Violet
Violet
Blue
Orange
Green
Brown
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Pair Color Code

Tip
Ring
Copper cables in excess of 600 pair will utilize various color schemes to identify
super groups. See specific manufacturer for color-coding schemes.
4-35
Chapter 4: Cabling
Aerial
There are three methods for placing cable on pole lines:
Lash new cable to a support strand
Lash new cable to an existing support strand/cable
Use self-supporting-type cable that contains a support strand
Placing new cable on an existing pole line is the least-expensive method compared to directburied and underground.
The ALPETH cable shown in Figure 4.4 is used primarily in aerial applications; however, it
can be used in short runs of conduit, including nonpressurized. It consists of:
Solid annealed copper in 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)], 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)],
24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)], or 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)].
Color-coded polyethylene insulation.
Pairs of conductors assembled with varying twists to minimize crosstalk.
Color-coded binders.
Non-hygroscopic dielectric tape wrapped along the length of the cable.
0.2 mm (8 mil) aluminum tape wrapped along the length of the cable.
Periodic markings on the cable that indicate code, pair size, date, and length.
Figure 4.4
ALPETH cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Solid
insulated
conductors
Core
wrap
4-36
Corrugated
aluminum
shield
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Aerial, continued
Some of the more common types of OSP cables are described in Table 4.21.
Table 4.21
ALPETH cable
Part
Number
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
BHBA - 19 AWG [ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
2004 BICSI
Pair
Count
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
20-031-42
21 (0.81)
25
20-034-42
27 (1.07)
50
100
20-038-42
37 (1.47)
20-042-42
51 (1.99)
200
20-044-42
61 (2.39)
300
BHAA - 22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
483 (324)
882 (592)
1700 (1141)
3226 (2166)
4726 (3173)
20-062-42
20-065-42
20-069-42
20-073-42
20-075-42
20-077-42
20-081-42
20-083-42
BKMA - 24 AWG
20-097-42
20-100-42
20-104-42
20-108-42
20-110-42
20-112-42
20-116-42
20-118-42
20-120-42
20-121-42
20-124-42
BKTA - 26 AWG
25
15 (0.61)
50
20 (0.78)
100
26 (1.03)
200
36 (1.42)
300
43 (1.69)
400
49 (1.91)
600
58 (2.30)
900
72 (2.84)
[ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
25
13 (0.52)
50
17 (0.66)
100
22 (0.88)
200
29 (1.13)
300
35 (1.38)
400
39 (1.54)
600
46 (1.83)
900
56 (2.21)
1200
66 (2.60)
1500
73 (2.88)
1800
78 (3.08)
[ 0.40 mm (0.016 in) ]
273 (183)
478 (321)
873 (586)
1683 (1130)
2446 (1642)
3195 (2145)
4689 (3148)
6895 (4629)
20-132-42
20-135-42
20-139-42
20-143-42
20-145-42
20-147-42
20-151-42
20-153-42
20-155-42
20-156-42
20-157-42
20-158-42
20-161-42
25
50
100
200
300
400
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
2700
12 (0.46)
15 (0.60)
19 (0.73)
24 (0.96)
28 (1.10)
32 (1.24)
39 (1.52)
47 (1.84)
53 (2.09)
59 (2.31)
63 (2.47)
68 (2.69)
77 (3.05)
4-37
194 (130)
329 (221)
587 (394)
1084 (728)
1616 (1085)
2103 (1412)
3066 (2058)
4494 (3017)
5920 (3974)
7329 (4920)
8734 (5863)
140 (94)
231 (155)
399 (268)
721 (484)
1037 (696)
1345 (903)
2005 (1346)
2921 (1961)
3897 (2576)
4744 (3185)
5643 (3788)
6533 (4386)
8316 (5583)
Chapter 4: Cabling
Self-Supporting Cable
The self-supporting cable shown in Figure 4.5 is intended for aerial applications. It is
sometimes referred to as self-supporting cable and features a lower:
Cost of installation than that of non-self-supporting cable.
Instance of corrosion to the support strand than non-self-supporting cable due to its
encasement in a polyethylene jacket. This makes it more suitable for applications where
corrosive atmospheres exist (e.g., industrial complexes or coastal areas).
It consists of:
A 0.2 mm (8 mil) aluminum tape wrapped along the length of the cable. Cables greater
than 20 mm (0.8 in) in diameter have a co-polymer coated aluminum liner bonded to the
jacket.
A high-strength support strand with flooding compound, typically 6.3 mm (0.25 in)
galvanized steel.
A polyethylene jacket that holds the cable and strand together.
Figure 4.5
Polyethylene
jacket
Support
strand
Core
wrap
Corrugated
aluminum
Solid
insulated
conductors
4-38
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Self-Supporting Cable, continued

Some of the more common types of self-supporting cables are described in Table 4.22.
Table 4.22
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Approximate
Weight
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Minor
BHBS - 19 AWG
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
20-031-43
20-034-43
BHAS - 22 AWG
kg/km (lb/kft)
Major
25
15 (0.60)
27 (1.07)
731 (491)
50
25 (0.98)
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
37 (1.45)
1042 (700)
20-062-43
25
15 (0.58)
27 (1.05)
461 (310)
20-065-43
50
19 (0.74)
31 (1.20)
662 (445)
20-069-43
100
25 (1.00)
37 (1.47)
1049 (705)
BKMS - 24 AWG
[ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
20-097-43
25
12 (0.49)
24 (0.96)
387 (260)
20-100-43
50
16 (0.62)
28 (1.09)
513 (345)
20-104-43
100
20 (0.80)
32 (1.27)
766 (515)
20-108-43
200
28 (1.09)
40 (1.56)
1250 (840)
BKTS - 26 AWG
[ 0.40 mm (0.016 in) ]
20-132-43
25
11 (0.45)
23 (0.92)
381 (256)
20-135-43
50
13 (0.52)
25 (0.97)
417 (280)
20-139-43
100
17 (0.67)
29 (1.14)
580 (390)
20-143-43
200
24 (0.93)
36 (1.40)
964 (647)
Figure 4.6 shows a reinforced version of the cable shown in Figure 4.5 and is intended for aerial
applications. It is sometimes referred to as reinforced self-supporting cable and features a:
Lower cost of installation than that of non-self-supporting cable.
Lower instance of corrosion to the support strand than non-self-supporting cable due to its
encasement in a polyethylene jacket. This makes it more suitable for applications where
corrosive atmospheres exist such as industrial complexes or coastal areas.
It consists of:
2004 BICSI
Solid annealed copper in 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036)], 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)],
A corrugated aluminum shield inside an inner polyethylene jacket, which is in turn

surrounded by corrugated steel and a flooding compound. Large cables have a
co-polymer-coated aluminum liner bonded to the jacket.
A high-strength support strand with flooding compound, typically 6.3 mm (0.25 in)
galvanized steel.
A polyethylene jacket that holds the cable and strand together.
4-39
Chapter 4: Cabling
Self-Supporting Cable, continued

Figure 4.6
Reinforced self-supporting cable
Polyethylene
Polyethylene
self-support
jacket
Support
strand
Corrugated
steel
Corrugated
aluminum
Solid
insulated
conductors
Plastic
core wrap
Some of the more common types of reinforced self-supporting cables are described
in Table 4.23.
Table 4.23
Reinforced self-supporting cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Minor
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
Major
BHBP - 19 AWG
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
20-026-20
21 (0.83)
33 (1.31)
20-031-20
25
30 (1.18)
42 (1.66)
940 (631)
20-034-20
50
35 (1.39)
47 (1.87)
1420 (953)
20-062-20
25
19 (0.75)
31 (1.21)
625 (420)
20-065-20
50
24 (0.93)
35 (1.39)
885 (595)
20-069-20
100
30 (1.18)
42 (1.64)
1332 (895)
20-097-20
25
17 (0.66)
28 (1.12)
528 (355)
20-100-20
50
20 (0.79)
32 (1.25)
692 (465)
20-104-20
100
25 (0.99)
37 (1.45)
977 (670)
20-108-20
200
32 (1.27)
44 (1.73)
1562 (1050)
20-132-20
25
15 (0.59)
27 (1.05)
454 (305)
20-135-20
50
18 (0.70)
29 (1.16)
573 (385)
20-139-20
100
21 (0.84)
33 (1.28)
774 (520)
20-143-20
200
28 (1.09)
39 (1.55)
1153 (775)
20-145-20
300
31 (1.23)
43 (1.69)
1495 (1005)
562 (377)
BHAP - 22 AWG
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
BKMP - 24 AWG
[ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
BKTP - 26 AWG
[ 0.40 mm (0.016 in) ]
4-40
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Direct-Buried
Direct-buried OSP cables are subject to different environmental conditions than those of aerial
cables. Moisture, rodent damage, and lightning are some of the more critical areas that are
addressed in the manufacture of direct-buried OSP cables.
The PASP cable shown in Figure 4.7 is used primarily in pressurized direct-buried applications
but can also be used in aerial and underground applications. It consists of:
Nonhygroscopic dielectric tape wrapped along the length of the cable.
An inner polyethylene jacket surrounded by corrugated 0.2 mm (8 mil) aluminum shield

wrapped along the length of the cable, which is surrounded by 0.15 mm (6 mil) corrugated
steel and a bonded polyethylene jacket.
Figure 4.7
PASP cable
Solid
insulated
conductors
Inner
polyethylene
jacket
Corrugated
aluminum
shield
Core
wrap
2004 BICSI
4-41
Outer
polyethylene
jacket
Corrugated steel
with copolymer
adhesive coating
Chapter 4: Cabling
Some of the more common types of pressurized direct-buried cables are described
in Table 4.24.
Table 4.24
Pressurized direct-buried cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
BHBH - 19 AWG [ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
20-031-05
25
24 (0.95)
20-034-05
50
30 (1.20)
1062 (713)
20-038-05
100
40 (1.58)
1962 (1317)
20-042-05
200
611 (410)
56 (2.20)
3611 (2424)
20-044-05
300
BHAH - 22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
66 (2.59)
5209 (3497)
20-062-05
25
19 (0.76)
371 (249)
20-065-05
50
23 (0.92)
611 (410)
20-069-05
100
30 (1.17)
1062 (713)
20-073-05
200
41 (1.60)
1965 (1319)
20-075-05
300
47 (1.85)
2805 (1883)
20-077-05
400
53 (2.09)
3612 (2475)
20-081-05
600
63 (2.49)
5222 (3506)
20-083-05
900
75 (2.97)
7567 (5080)
20-085-05
1200
BKMH - 24 AWG [ 0.50 mm (0.020) ]
86 (3.37)
9833 (6601)
20-097-05
25
17 (0.66)
277
(186)
20-100-05
50
21 (0.81)
439
(295)
20-104-05
100
26 (1.01)
740
(493)
20-108-05
200
33 (1.29)
1335
(896)
20-110-05
300
39 (1.52)
1904 (1278)
20-112-05
400
44 (1.72)
2437 (1626)
20-116-05
600
52 (2.04)
3493 (2345)
20-118-05
900
61 (2.42)
5035 (3380)
20-120-05
1200
69 (2.72)
6557 (4402)
20-121-05
1500
78 (3.06)
8026 (5388)
20-124-05
1800
85 (3.35)
9474 (6360)
20-125-05
2100
91 (3.58)
10917 (7329)
4-42
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Table 4.24
Pressurized direct-buried cable, continued
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
BKTH - 26 AWG [ 0.40 mm (0.016) ]
2004 BICSI
20-132-05
25
15 (0.61)
212 (142)
20-135-05
50
18 (0.71)
325 (218)
20-139-05
100
22 (0.87)
526 (353)
20-143-05
200
28 (1.10)
898 (603)
20-145-05
300
32 (1250)
1283 (861)
20-147-05
400
36 (1.42)
1647 (1106)
20-151-05
600
42 (1.65)
2346 (1575)
20-153-05
900
50 (1.97)
3347 (2347)
20-155-05
1200
57 (2.23)
4335 (2910)
20-156-05
1500
63 (2.47)
5306 (3562)
20-157-05
1800
67 (2.65)
6282 (4217)
20-158-05
2100
79 (2.87)
7214 (4843)
20-159-05
2400
80 (3.05)
8141 (5465)
20-161-05
2700
80 (3.30)
8706 (5850)
4-43
Chapter 4: Cabling
Aluminum, Steel, Polyethylene (ASP) Direct-Buried Cable
Shown in Figure 4.8, ASP cable is used in buried applications. It consists of:
Color-coded dual expanded high-density polyethylene insulation.
A flooding compound.
A corrugated 0.2 mm (8 mil) aluminum shield wrapped along the length of the cable that
is surrounded by 0.15 mm (6 mil) corrugated steel and a polyethylene jacket. A flooding
compound is applied over the core wrap and each metal covering.
Figure 4.8
ASP cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Conductor
filling
compound
Corrugated
coated steel
Foam skin
insulated
conductors
Core
wrap
4-44
Corrugated
coated
aluminum
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Some of the more common types of ASP cables are described in Table 4.25.
Table 4.25
ASP cable
2004 BICSI
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
ANBW - 19 AWG [ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
22-031-83
25
23 (0.92)
22-034-83
50
29 (1.13)
1168 (784)
22-038-83
100
40 (1.59)
2161 (1451)
22-042-83
200
666 (447)
55 (2.18)
4070 (2732)
22-044-83
300
ANAW - 22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
66 (2.59)
5921 (3975)
22-062-83
25
18 (0.72)
386 (259)
22-065-83
50
22 (0.88)
646 (434)
22-069-83
100
29 (1.15)
1137 (763)
22-073-83
200
38 (1.50)
2111 (1417)
22-075-83
300
45 (1.79)
3051 (2048)
22-077-83
400
52 (2.04)
3968 (2664)
22-081-83
600
63 (2.47)
5774 (3876)
22-083-83
900
77 (3.04)
8440 (5666)
22-085-83
1200
ANMW - 24 AWG [ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
88 (3.46)
11132 (7473)
22-097-83
25
15 (0.60)
276
(185)
22-100-83
50
18 (0.72)
450
(302)
22-104-83
100
24 (0.96)
767
(515)
22-108-83
200
32 (1.25)
1363
(915)
22-110-83
300
38 (1.50)
1978 (1328)
22-112-83
400
42 (1.65)
2553 (1714)
22-116-83
600
51 (2.01)
3702 (2485)
22-118-83
900
60 (2.38)
5386 (3616)
22-120-83
1200
69 (2.72)
7177 (4818)
22-121-83
1500
77 (3.04)
8851 (5944)
22-124-83
1800
83 (3.28)
10528 (7068)
22-125-83
2100
ANTW - 26 AWG [ 0.40 mm (0.016 in) ]
89 (3.50)
12127 (8141)
22-132-83
25
13 (0.52)
210
(141)
22-135-83
50
16 (0.62)
329
(221)
22-139-83
100
20 (0.80)
535
(359)
22-143-83
200
27 (1.04)
935
(628)
22-145-83
300
32 (1.25)
1311 (880)
22-147-83
400
36 (1.41)
1712 (1449)
22-151-83
600
42 (1.64)
2444 (1641)
22-153-83
900
52 (2.06)
3547 (2381)
22-155-83
1200
59 (2.34)
4701 (3156)
22-156-83
1500
64 (2.51)
5786 (3884)
22-157-83
1800
70 (2.76)
6857 (4603)
22-158-83
2100
76 (3.00)
7928 (5322)
22-159-83
2400
78 (3.08)
8990 (6035)
22-161-83
2700
84 (3.30)
10049 (6746)
4-45
Chapter 4: Cabling
Underground
Underground cable is subject to some of the same environmental problems as those of directburied cable. Moisture and lightning are a problem, but rodent damage is less likely. Both are
subject to excavation damage, although underground cable has some mechanical protection by
the conduit that encases it. Some of the more common Bell system type cables are described
below.
Aluminum, Steel, Polyethylene (ASP)
The bonded ASP cable in Figure 4.9 is used in underground as well as direct-buried
applications. It consists of:
Solid annealed copper in 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)], 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)]
or 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)].
A corrugated 0.2 mm (0.008 in) aluminum shield wrapped along the length of the cable
that is surrounded by 0.15 mm (0.6 in) corrugated co-polymer coated steel and a
polyethylene jacket. A flooding compound is applied over the core wrap and each metal
covering.
Figure 4.9
Bonded ASP cable
Co-polymer
adhesive
coating
Conductor
filling
compound
Foam skin
insulated
conductors
Polyethylene
jacket
Corrugated
steel shield
Core
wrap
Corrugated
aluminum
shield
4-46
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Underground, continued
Ductpic
Shown in Figure 4.10, underground cable is used in underground applications. It consists of:
or 26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)].
A corrugated 0.2 mm (0.008 in) aluminum shield wrapped along the length of the cable,
which is surrounded by 0.15 mm (0.6 in) corrugated co-polymer coated steel and a
polyethylene jacket. The steel is permanently bonded to the jacket.
Figure 4.10
Underground (ductpic) cable
Corrugated
aluminum
shield
Extruded
polyethylene
jacket
Foam skin
insulated
conductors
Copolymer coated
corrugated steel
Core
wrap
2004 BICSI
4-47
Chapter 4: Cabling
Underground, continued
Some of the more common types of underground (ductpic) cables are described
in Table 4.26.
Table 4.26
Underground (ductpic) cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
DCAZ - 22 AWG
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
19-081-01
25
55 (2.17)
4561 (3065)
19-083-01
50
65 (2.55)
6658 (4474)
19-085-01
100
DCMZ - 24 AWG
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
73 (2.87)
8734 (5869)
19-116-01
600
45 (1.77)
2982 (1997)
19-118-01
900
51 (2.02)
4308 (2895)
19-120-01
1200
59 (2.31)
5645 (3793)
19-121-01
1500
65 (2.55)
6976 (4683)
19-124-01
1800
70 (2.75)
8285 (5562)
19-125-01
2100
76 (3.00)
9585 (6435)
19-126-01
DCTZ - 26 AWG
[ 0.41 mm (0.020) ]
2400
84 (3.30)
10884 (7307)
19-151-01
600
37 (1.45)
1959 (1316)
19-153-01
900
43 (1.68)
2825 (1898)
19-155-01
1200
46 (1.82)
3663 (2459)
19-156-01
1500
52 (2.04)
4499 (3020)
19-157-01
1800
56 (2.20)
5333 (3580)
19-158-01
2100
62 (2.45)
6166 (4143)
19-159-01
2400
65 (2.55)
6988 (4691)
19-161-01
2700
70 (2.76)
7822 (5256)
19-162-01
3000
71 (2.80)
8635 (5797)
19-164-01
19-167-01
3600
4200
76 (3.00)
83 (3.25)
10266 (6892)
11890 (7982)
4-48
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Screened Cable
Air Core Screened Cable
Shown in Figure 4.11, air core screened cable is used specifically for digital applications
and is typically used in aerial applications. An aluminum Z-screen divides the cable, allowing
bi-directional transmission. It consists of:
Solid annealed copper in 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)].
0.10 mm (4 mil) aluminum screen that divides the cable in half.
Non-hygroscopic dielectric tape wrapped along the length of the cable (core wrap).
An inner polyethylene jacket surrounded by a corrugated 0.2 mm (8 mil) aluminum shield

wrapped along the length of the cable, which is surrounded by 0.15 mm (6 mil) corrugated
steel and a bonded polyethylene jacket.
Figure 4.11
Air core screened cable
Aluminum
Z-screen
Inner
polyethylene
jacket
Solid
insulated
conductors
Outer
polyethylene
jacket
Aluminum
screen
Cable
core
2004 BICSI
Corrugated
aluminum
shield
Core
wrap
4-49
Corrugated steel
with co-polymer
adhesive coating
Chapter 4: Cabling
Screened Cable, continued

Filled Screened Cable
Filled screen cable, as seen in Figure 4.12, is also used specifically for digital applications and
is typically used in direct-buried or underground applications. Like the air core screened cable,
the filled screen cable has an aluminum Z-screen that divides the cable and isolates the group.
It consists of:
Solid annealed copper in 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)].
Color-coded dual expanded high-density foam polyethylene insulation.
0.10 mm (4 mil) aluminum screen that divides the cable in half.
Non-hygroscopic dielectric tape wrapped along the length of the cable (core wrap).
Flooding compound.
Corrugated 0.2 mm (0.008 in) shield wrapped along the length of the cable, which is
surrounded by 0.15 mm (0.6 in) corrugated co-polymer coated steel and a polyethylene
jacket. A flooding compound is applied over the core and the shield.
Figure 4.12
Filled screened cable
Aluminum
Z-screen
Polyethylene
jacket
Conductor
filling compound
Core
wrap
Corrugated
aluminum
shield
Corrugated
steel
Cable
core
4-50
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Screened Cable, continued

Some of the more common types of filled screened cables are described in Table 4.27.
Table 4.27
Filled screened cable
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
KNAW - 22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
2004 BICSI
Part
Number
Pair
Count
24-417-83
28
19 (0.73)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
548 (368)
24-440-83
54
24-456-83
106
24-472-83
158
24-493-83
210
24-526-83
314
24-564-83
418
24-586-83
616
KNMW - 24 AWG [ 0.50 mm (0.020 in) ]
24-618-83
28
23 (0.92)
29 (1.15)
34 (1.34)
38 (1.48)
45 (1.76)
51 (2.00)
61 (2.39)
24-642-83
54
20 (0.78)
603 (405)
24-657-83
106
24 (0.96)
906 (629)
24-692-83
210
35 (1.39)
KNAW-UM - 22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
24-417-84
28
26 (1.02)
1621 (1123)
24-440-84
54
30 (1.20)
1144 (769)
24-456-84
106
38 (1.49)
1786 (1200)
24-472-84
158
44 (1.72)
2419 (1626)
24-493-84
210
49 (1.93)
3105 (2087)
24-526-84
314
57 (2.23)
4229 (2842)
24-564-84
418
63 (2.48)
5324 (3578)
24-586-84
616
73 (2.89)
7357 (4944)
4-51
16 (0.62)
853
1400
1973
2539
3573
4577
6448
(573)
(941)
(1326)
(1706)
(2401)
(3076)
(4333)
318 (214)
792 (532)
Chapter 4: Cabling
RUS Filled Cable

RUS approaches cable construction somewhat differently than did the original Bell
companies. The following cables are representative of the types available under RUS
requirements.
PE 39Filled Solid Copper ALPETH Cable (Aluminum)
Shown in Figure 4.13, filled solid ALPETH cablePE 39 is used in direct-buried applications.
It consists of:
A corrugated co-polymer coated 0.2 mm (0.008 in) aluminum shield wrapped along the
length of the cable. A flooding compound is applied over the core wrap and metal
covering.
An overall polyethylene jacket.
Figure 4.13
PE 39Filled solid ALPETH cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Filling
compound
Solid
insulated
conductors
Coated
corrugated
aluminum
Core
wrap
4-52
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
RUS Filled Cable, continued

Some of the more common types of filled solid ALPETH cables are described in Table 4.28.
Table 4.28
PE 39Filled solid ALPETH cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
19 AWG
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
2004 BICSI
04-026-21
16 (0.63)
229 (154)
04-028-21
12
20 (0.79)
390 (262)
04-031-21
25
04-034-21
50
04-038-21
100
22 AWG
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
25 (1.05)
35 (1.37)
48 (1.89)
714 (479)
1332 (894)
2511 (1686)
04-057-21
12 (0.47)
139
04-059-21
12
15 (0.59)
222 (149)
(93)
04-062-21
25
19 (0.75)
386 (259)
04-065-21
50
25 (0.99)
681 (457)
04-069-21
100
33 (1.29)
1244 (835)
04-073-21
04-075-21
200
300
45 (1.77)
53 (2.10)
2395 (1608)
3492 (2344)
04-077-21
400
61 (2.40)
4586 (3079)
04-081-21
600
74 (2.90)
6748 (4530)
04-083-21
24 AWG
[ 0.50 mm (0.020) ]
900
88 (3.46)
9948 (6678)
04-092-21
10 (0.41)
106
04-094-21
12
13 (0.51)
161 (108)
04-097-21
25
16 (0.63)
268 (180)
04-100-21
50
21 (0.83)
462 (310)
04-104-21
100
27 (1.05)
827 (555)
04-108-21
200
35 (1.38)
1560 (1047)
04-110-21
300
42 (1.64)
2258 (1516)
04-112-21
400
48 (1.89)
2949 (1980)
04-116-21
600
59 (2.39)
4321 (2901)
04-118-21
04-120-21
04-121-21
900
1200
1500
72 (2.82)
79 (3.10)
88 (3.46)
6355 (4266)
8310 (5579)
9902 (6655)
04-124-21
1800
96 (3.78)
12143 (8159)
4-53
(71)
Chapter 4: Cabling

PE 39Cable
Shown in Figure 4.14, filled solid 0.13 mm (0.005 in) copper cablePE 39 is used in directburied applications. It consists of:
Solid annealed copper in 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)], 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)], or
24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)].
Color-coded polyolefin insulation.
A 0.13 mm (0.005 in) corrugated copper shield wrapped along the length of the cable. A
flooding compound is applied over the core wrap and the copper shield.
A polyethylene jacket.
Figure 4.14
PE 39Filled solid 0.13 mm (0.005 in) cable
Filling
compound
Solid
insulated
conductors
Core
wrap
0.13 mm
(5 mil)
copper
shield
4-54
Polyethylene
jacket
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

Some of the more common types of filled solid copper cables are described in Table 4.29.
Table 4.29
PE 39Filled solid 0.13 mm (5 mil) copper cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
04-031-04
25
04-034-04
50
04-038-04
100
22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
25 (1.05)
35 (1.37)
48 (1.89)
764 (513)
1400 (940)
2604 (1748)
04-062-04
25
19 (0.75)
422 (283)
04-065-04
50
25 (0.99)
730 (490)
04-069-04
100
33 (1.29)
1309 (879)
04-073-04
04-075-04
200
300
45 (1.77)
53 (2.10)
2486 (1669)
3597 (2415)
04-077-04
400
61 (2.40)
4705 (3159)
04-081-04
04-083-04
600
900
74 (2.90)
88 (3.46)
6891 (4626)
10116 (6791)
19 AWG [ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
24 AWG [ 0.50 mm (0.020) ]
2004 BICSI
04-097-04
25
16 (0.63)
398 (200)
04-100-04
50
21 (0.83)
502 (337)
04-104-04
100
27 (1.05)
882 (592)
04-108-04
200
35 (1.38)
1633 (1096)
04-110-04
300
42 (1.65)
2345 (1574)
04-112-04
400
48 (1.89)
3046 (2045)
04-116-04
600
59 (2.32)
4438 (2979)
04-118-04
04-120-04
04-121-04
900
1200
1500
72 (2.82)
79 (3.10)
88 (3.46)
6492 (4358)
8464 (5682)
10453 (7017)
04-124-04
1800
96 (3.78)
12145 (8160)
4-55
Chapter 4: Cabling

Shown in Figure 4.15, filled solid gopher resistant sheath cablePE 39 is used in direct-buried
or 24 AWG [0.51 mm (0.020 in)].
Color-coded polyolefin insulation.
A 0.15 mm (0.6 in) or 0.18 mm (0.007 in) corrugated gopher resistant copper shield
wrapped along the length of the cable. A flooding compound is applied over the core wrap
and the copper shield.
4-56
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

Figure 4.15
PE 39Filled solid gopher resistant sheath cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Solid
insulated
conductors
Filling
compound
Corrugated gopher
resistant copper shield
Core
wrap
Some of the more common types of filled solid gopher resistant sheath cables are described in
Table 4.30.
2004 BICSI
4-57
Chapter 4: Cabling

Table 4.30
PE 39Filled solid gopher resistant sheath cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
19 AWG
[ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]
04-026-27
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
16 (0.63)
258
(173)
12
20 (0.79)
425
(285)
04-031-27
25
04-034-27
50
04-038-27
100
22 AWG
[ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
04-057-27
6
25 (1.05)
35 (1.37)
48 (1.89)
12 (0.47)
159
(107)
04-059-27
12
15 (0.59)
249
(167)
04-062-27
25
19 (0.75)
422
(283)
04-065-27
50
25 (0.99)
730
(490)
04-069-27
100
33 (1.29)
1309
(879)
04-073-27
04-075-27
200
300
45 (1.77)
53 (2.10)
2486 (1669)
3597 (2415)
04-077-27
400
61 (2.40)
4705 (3159)
04-081-27
04-083-27
24 AWG
[ 0.50 mm (0.020) ]
04-092-27
600
900
74 (2.90)
88 (3.46)
6891 (4626)
9950 (6680)
10 (0.41)
106
(71)
04-094-27
12
13 (0.51)
183
(123)
04-097-27
25
16 (0.63)
398
(200)
04-100-27
50
21 (0.83)
502
(337)
04-104-27
100
27 (1.05)
882
(592)
04-108-27
200
35 (1.38)
1633 (1096)
04-110-27
300
42 (1.64)
2345 (1574)
04-112-27
400
48 (1.89)
3046 (2045)
04-116-27
600
59 (2.39)
4438 (2979)
04-118-27
04-120-27
04-121-27
04-124-27
900
1200
1500
1800
72 (2.82)
79 (3.10)
88 (3.46)
96 (3.78)
04-028-27
4-58
764 (513)
1400 (940)
2600 (1750)
6492
8464
10453
12393
(4358)
(5682)
(7017)
(8327)
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

PE 89CACSP Cable
Shown in Figure 4.16, filled foam skin CACSP CablePE 89 is used in buried applications.
It consists of:
Color-coded dual expanded polyolefin insulation.
A corrugated co-polymer coated 0.2 mm (0.008 in) aluminum shield wrapped along
the length of the cable that is surrounded by a corrugated co-polymer coated
0.15 mm (0.006 in) steel shield wrapped along the length of the cable. A flooding
compound is applied over the core wrap and metal shields.
Figure 4.16
PE 89Filled foam skin CACSP cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Foam skin
insulated
conductors
Conductor
filling compound
Corrugated coated
aluminum shield
Core wrap
2004 BICSI
4-59
Chapter 4: Cabling

Some of the more common types of filled foam skin CACSP cables are described in Table 4.31.
Table 4.31
PE 89Filled foam skin CACSP cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
19 AWG [ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]

09-031-92
25
09-034-92
50
09-038-92
100
22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
09-062-92
25
09-065-92
50
09-069-92
100
09-073-92
200
09-075-92
300
09-077-92
400
09-081-92
600
09-083-92
900
09-085-92
1200
24 AWG [ 0.50 mm (0.020) ]
09-097-92
25
09-100-92
50
09-104-92
100
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
24 (0.95)
31 (1.21)
41 (1.60)
657 (441)
1150 (772)
2136 (1434)
19 (0.75)
23 (0.91)
29 (1.14)
39 (1.52)
45 (1.79)
52 (2.00)
62 (2.44)
75 (2.96)
86 (3.40)
398 (267)
661 (444)
1166 (783)
2155 (1447)
3166 (2092)
4056 (2733)
5902 (3962)
8632 (5795)
11342 (7614)
16 (0.63)
19 (0.73)
25 (0.97)
293 (197)
468 (314)
797 (535)
09-108-92
200
32 (1.26)
1415 (950)
09-110-92
300
38 (1.51)
2060 (1383)
09-112-92
400
09-116-92
600
09-118-92
900
09-120-92
1200
09-121-92
1500
09-124-92
1800
09-125-92
2100
09-126-92
2400
26 AWG [ 0.40 mm (0.016) ]
09-132-92
25
09-135-92
50
09-139-92
100
09-143-92
200
09-145-92
300
09-147-92
400
09-151-92
600
09-153-92
900
09-155-92
1200
09-156-92
1500
09-157-92
1800
09-158-92
2100
09-159-92
2400
09-162-92
3000
42 (1.65)
51 (2.00)
62 (2.43)
69 (2.72)
77 (3.06)
84 (3.30)
89 (3.51)
95 (3.75)
2671
3858
5616
7348
9073
10782
12462
13582
(1793)
(2590)
(3770)
(4933)
(6091)
(7238)
(8366)
(9118)
14 (0.57)
16 (0.63)
20 (0.78)
28 (1.09)
32 (1.26)
36 (1.43)
42 (1.65)
52 (2.06)
60 (2.35)
64 (2.52)
70 (2.76)
76 (3.00)
78 (3.09)
90 (3.54)
219
340
563
973
1361
1779
2543
3694
4814
5921
7015
8111
9203
11373
(147)
(228)
(378)
(653)
(914)
(1194)
(1707)
(2480)
(3232)
(3975)
(4709)
(5445)
(6178)
(7635)
4-60
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling

PE 89ALPETH Cable
Shown in Figure 4.17, filled foam skin ALPETH cablePE 89 is used in direct-buried
Color-coded dual expanded polyolefin insulation.
Flooding compound.
A corrugated co-polymer coated 0.2 mm (0.008 in) aluminum shield wrapped

along the length of the cable. A flooding compound is applied over the core wrap
and aluminum shield.
Figure 4.17
PE 89Filled foam skin ALPETH cable
Polyethylene
jacket
Foam skin
insulated
conductors
Conductor
filling compound
Corrugated coated
aluminum shield
Core wrap
2004 BICSI
4-61
Chapter 4: Cabling

Some of the more common types of filled foam skin ALPETH cables are described
in Table 4.32.
Table 4.32
PE 89Filled foam skin ALPETH cable
Part
Number
Pair
Count
Nominal
Outside Diameter
mm (in)
Approximate
Weight
kg/km (lbs/kft)
19 AWG [ 0.90 mm (0.035 in) ]

09-031-02
25
09-034-02
50
09-038-02
100
22 AWG [ 0.64 mm (0.025 in) ]
22 (0.86)
29 (1.13)
38 (1.50)
569 (382)
1032 (693)
1966 (1320)
09-062-02
25
17 (0.67)
329 (221)
09-065-02
50
22 (0.85)
575 (386)
09-069-02
100
29 (1.13)
1044 (701)
09-073-02
09-075-02
200
300
37 (1.45)
45 (1.76)
1987 (1334)
2893 (1942)
09-077-02
400
51 (2.02)
3791 (2545)
09-081-02
600
61 (2.40)
5571 (3740)
09-083-02
900
09-085-02
1200
24 AWG [ 0.50 mm (0.020) ]
09-097-02
25
75 (2.94)
88 (3.46)
8217 (5516)
1843 (7279)
14 (0.57)
234
(157)
09-100-02
50
18 (0.73)
396
(266)
09-104-02
100
24 (0.93)
703
(472)
09-108-02
200
31 (1.21)
1287
(864)
09-110-02
300
36 (1.42)
1896 (1273)
09-112-02
400
41 (1.61)
2473 (1660)
09-116-02
600
51 (2.01)
3612 (2425)
09-118-02
09-120-02
900
1200
61 (2.39)
69 (2.72)
5307 (3563)
6985 (4689)
09-121-02
1500
75 (2.97)
8658 (5812)
09-124-02
09-125-02
1800
2100
84 (3.30)
90 (3.54)
10172 (6929)
11959 (8028)
09-126-02
2400
96 (3.78)
13248 (8893)
26 AWG [ 0.50 mm (0.020) ]

09-132-02
25
12 (0.49)
171
(115)
09-135-02
50
15 (0.61)
280
(188)
09-139-02
100
20 (0.77)
481
(323)
09-143-02
200
26 (1.01)
865
(581)
09-145-02
300
31 (1.21)
1235
(829)
09-147-02
400
35 (1.37)
1628 (1093)
09-151-02
600
41 (1.60)
2365 (1588)
09-153-02
900
51 (2.02)
3451 (2201)
09-155-02
1200
56 (2.20)
4523 (3043)
09-156-02
1500
62 (2.44)
5602 (3761)
09-157-02
1800
69 (2.72)
6666 (4475)
09-159-02
2400
77 (3.05)
8793 (5903)
09-164-02
3600
96 (3.78)
12646 (8489)
4-62
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Aerial Drop Wire

Aerial drop wire extends the telecommunications circuit from an aerial terminal to a
building/residential entrance protector or network interface. Types of manufactured aerial
drop wire include:
Aerial drop wireUsed for runs less than 213 m (700 ft).
Aerial distribution wireUsed for runs over 213 m (700 ft).
Aerial drop wire is typically:
22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)].
2, 3, 5, and 6 pair.
Air core or filled.
Equipped with support strand or supported by its own sheath.
Direct-Buried Service Wire

Direct-buried service wire extends the telecommunications circuit from a direct-buried
terminal to a building/residential entrance protector or network interface. Types of directburied service wire manufactured include:
Direct-buried service wireUsed for runs less than 213 m (700 ft).
Direct-buried distribution wireTo be used for runs over 213 m (700 ft).
Direct-buried service wire is typically:
2004 BICSI
22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)] (optional 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)]).
2, 3, 5, and 6 pair.
Filled.
Regular polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket or rodent-resistant shield.
4-63
Chapter 4: Cabling
Coaxial Cabling
Cable Selection
Coaxial cable is capable of delivering full-motion video, digital, and analog with full duplex
transmission of data, as well as voice, over long and short distances. Determine the
customers requirements before proceeding with the design.
In order to determine the size of coaxial cable necessary for any application, it is necessary to
define and understand the properties of the cable. By definition, a coaxial cable consists of
two metallic conductors sharing the same axis, hence the term coaxial. Coax has a metallic
center conductor, coaxially positioned within an outer metallic conductor with the two
separated by a dielectric (nonconducting) material.
Figure 4.18
Coaxial cable
Outer
Sheath
Center
conductor
Aluminum outer
conductor
Dielectric
adhesive
Dielectric
When determining the size and type of coaxial cable, there are two major factors a designer
has to considerattenuation margin and cost.
Mechanical Factors
Coaxial cable is available in many different physical configurations. There are variations in
center conductors, dielectric materials, outer conductors, and jackets. Coaxial cable also
comes in semi-rigid, flexible, and super-flexible styles, with differing loss characteristics for
each. Coaxial cable sizes range from 6.4 mm (0.25 in) round and can get as large as 125 mm
(5 in) diameter, though typical sizes are 9.5 mm (0.375 in); 13 mm (0.5 in); 16 mm (0.63 in);
22 mm (0.87 in); 32 mm (1.25 in); and 41 mm (1.6 in). The following describes the different
environmental conditions and the type of coaxial cable commonly used.
Center Conductor
The center conductor may be solid, stranded, or tubular. Coaxial cables with solid center wires
or tubes will typically have the lowest attenuation factor, but are the least flexible. Stranded
center wires will afford more flexibility but increased attenuation. Tube construction allows for
a lighter-weight cable for larger overall outer diameters.
4-64
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Mechanical Factors, continued

Dielectric
The dielectric provides the necessary spacing between the inner (or center) and outer
conductors. The spacing allows for propagation of the signal down the coaxial line. The
dielectric materials range from air to air and foam (cellular or extruded polyethylene) to
Teflon. Extruded polyethylene is the cheapest, most commonly used dielectric that provides
high strength combined with a low dielectric constant and good attenuation margin in low
temperatures. Teflon dielectric is better suited for high temperature environments while still
providing excellent strength and dielectric constant characteristics. When choosing a
dielectric material, you must also consider in the design that you want the velocity of
propagation (which will be discussed later) as close to 100 percent as possible.
Outer Conductor
The outer conductor, or shield, can be either metal braid or corrugated or straight tubing.
Braiding is more common for flexible applications and can come in single or adjacent
configurations (two adjacent shields offer better shielding). The braids are generally made
from copper, tinned-copper or silver-plated copper. Tubular construction is used where
strength and a high degree of shielding is required along with low signal attenuation.
Jackets
Insulating jackets protect the coaxial cable. Different jacket materials protect the cable
from corrosion and inclement weather, and come in varying temperature ranges from
-55 C (-67 F) and as high as 250 C (482 F). Each material has its own classifications for
environment settings and soil/air conditions. The designer should consult with the client to
determine the specific application and choose the correct jacket accordingly.
Electrical Factors
There are six electrical characteristics a designer has to consider when choosing a coaxial:
Capacitance/Inductance
Impedance
Velocity of propagation
Direct current (dc) resistance
Radio frequency (RF) attenuation
Structural return loss
The relative capacitance and inductance from differing cable sizes does not vary much. For
example, a 13 mm (0.5 in) foam dielectric coax cable has a capacitance of 23.1 pF/ft while
32 mm (1.25 in) foam dielectric coax has a capacitance or 22.9 pF/ft. Similarly, the relative
inductance for 13 mm (0.5 in) and 32 mm (1.25 in) coax is 0.058 H/ft and 0.056 H/ft,
respectively.
2004 BICSI
4-65
Chapter 4: Cabling
Electrical Factors, continued

The characteristic input impedance for coaxial cables from the manufacturer is typically
either 50 ohm or 75 ohm. The designer needs to verify the application with the client to
determine which input impedance coax is best.
As mentioned before, the velocity of propagation, or phase velocity, is expressed as a
proportion of the speed of light in vacuum and is inversely proportional to the square root of
the effective dielectric constant:
VP = c /
Ideally, the ratio would be 100 percent, but realistically, manufacturers provide coaxial cables
in the 85 to 90 percent range.
The two most pertinent factors that change from one cable size to another are dc resistance
and attenuation. These specifications are easily attainable from manufacturers.
The cable manufacturers information usually lists dc resistance three wayscenter
conductor, outer conductor, and loop resistance. This information, along with cable lengths
and amplifiers, is valuable in calculating the powering of the network. Power calculations are
usually calculated after the plant layout is complete. The cable dc loop resistance is the
specification used for this calculation. Attenuation is a phenomenon that is dependent on the
cable size, the dielectric material, and frequency of the system. The higher the frequency, the
greater the attenuation. For a given dielectric, the larger the cable OD, the lower the
attenuation. The manufacturer lists attenuation in dB/100 ft of cable or in dB/1000 ft of cable.
In some instances, the attenuation may be listed in dB per meter. Attenuation is arguably the
key factor that a designer has to keep in mind when considering coaxial cable. It determines
how often the signal has to be amplified in the network. The attenuation factor can be
expressed as:
= B * f + A * f
Where:
A is the conductor loss, B is the dielectric loss, and f is the operating frequency.
For typical rigid copper coaxial cables, there are practically no dielectric losses, so:
= 0.433/Z0 * (1/D + 1/d) * f
Where:
Z0 is the characteristic impedance, D is the diameter of the outer conductor and
d is the diameter of the inner conductor, all in inches.
4-66
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Aerial Applications
See Figure 4.19 for examples of bare aluminum, jacketed, and self-support aerial coaxial
cables.
Bare aluminumThis is the simplest type of coaxial cable. All others are a variation of
this. It consists of a seamless aluminum tube (outer conductor) foam dielectric and center
conductor, which is usually made of copper clad aluminum or steel. This cable is best used
in moderate climates.
JacketedThis is the same as the bare aluminum cable with the exception that it is
encased in a high molecular weight polyethylene outer jacket. This cable is best used in
hostile climates. It offers protection from salt oxidation as well as from ice.
Self-supportThis cable is identical to jacketed cable with the exception that there is a
supporting strand wire fused to the outer jacket. The purpose of this wire is to eliminate
the hanging of strand as well as the lashing of cable to the strand. This type of cable
lowers plant construction costs but inhibits the future possibility of overlashing a second
cable onto the existing constructed plant.
Figure 4.19
Aerial coaxial cables
Bare aluminum
Jacketed
Self-support
2004 BICSI
4-67
Chapter 4: Cabling
Direct-Buried Applications
FloodedThis cable is a jacketed cable with a flooding compound between the jacket
and the aluminum outer conductor. The flooding offers protection from nicks and tears of
the outer jacket during the construction process.
Figure 4.20
Armored cable
Armored
Armored/floodedThis cable is a flooded cable with a metallic armor encasing the jacket,
an additional layer of flooding compound, and a final outer polyethylene jacket. This
protective covering provides additional defense from the construction process as well as
rodents and cuts from digging and excavation.
The types of cables mentioned above are known as semi-rigid (hard-line) cables. They
typically are available in the following sizes: 13 mm (0.5 in); 16 mm (0.63 in); 22 mm
(0.87 in); 32 mm (1.25 in) and 41 mm (1.6 in). Larger sizes are available but very difficult
to acquire and are not widely used. Coaxial is measured by the OD of the aluminum or
copper outer conductor, not the jacket.
Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable
The ICEA publishes cabling standards for broadband twisted-pair telecommunications cables
that are intended to encourage quality and uniformity for manufacturers producing these
cables. These are voluntary standards and do not prevent the manufacturers from producing
cables that do not adhere to the standards.
Broadband cables are typically used to transport broadband services from a remote switch to
the end user. The remote switch feeding the broadband cable is usually connected to the main
switch or central office by optical fiber cable.
Broadband transmission divides the available bandwidth into multiple channels. Since there are
many channels available for transmission, more than one device can transmit at a time;
therefore, simultaneous transmission can occur without collisions. Simultaneous transmission
of telephone service, computer, fax, and video are possible with broadband systems.
Broadband transmission can transfer large quantities of information at a time. It is not limited
to handling only digital transmission. It can also support analog traffic, making it capable of
handling traditional voice and video signals simultaneously with data.
Broadband transmission was designed for signaling over long distances, with channel lengths
measured in kilometers (km) or miles (mi). The maximum distance allowable is a function of
the signal to noise ratio, protocol, and bit rate used. A network using this technology can cover
a much larger geographic area than one using baseband technology (see Table 4.33).
4-68
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable, continued

Table 4.33
Cable attenuation at VSWR = 1.0, 50 ohm foam dielectric and ambient 20 C (68 F)
Diameter (OD)
mm
(in)
450 MHz
1000 MHz
2000 MHz
dB/100 m
(dB/100 ft)
dB/100 m
12.7 (0.500)
4.75
(1.45)
7.28
(2.22)
15.9 (0.625)
3.46
(1.05)
5.38
(1.64)
8.02
(2.44)
22.2 (0.875)
2.65
(0.808)
4.12
(1.25)
6.11
(1.86)
31.75 (1.25)
1.87
(0.571)
2.94
(0.897)
4.43
(1.35)
41.3
1.53
(0.467)
2.43
(0.742)
3.71
(1.13)
(1.625)
(dB/100 ft)
dB/100 m
(dB/100 ft)
10.7
(3.25)
Design Criteria
Selection of different types of cables should be based on the losses per unit length for specific
point-to-point distances, untapped and unspliced. Table 4.34 shows the attenuation of various
size cables at the given frequencies per kilometer (mile).
Table 4.34
Coaxial attenuation at 20 C (68 F) over long distances
Diameter (OD)
mm
(in)
450 MHz
1000 MHz
2000 MHz
dB/km
(dB/mi)
dB/km
(dB/mi)
dB/km
(dB/mi)
12.7 (0.500)
47.5
(76.6)
72.8
(117.2)
107
(171.6)
15.9 (0.625)
34.6
(55.4)
53.8
(86.6)
80.2
(128.8)
22.2 (0.875)
26.5
(42.7)
41.2
(66.0)
61.1
(98.2)
31.75 (1.25)
18.7
(30.2)
29.4
(47.4)
44.3
(71.3)
41.3
15.3
(24.7)
24.3
(39.1)
37.1
(59.7)
(1.625)
Although cables with lower diameter are less expensive, their comparatively higher loss may
result in added expense for network equipment such as amplifiers. To minimize network noise,
it is desirable to limit the number of amplifiers per backbone run.
2004 BICSI
4-69
Chapter 4: Cabling
Design Criteria, continued

The designer should also keep in mind that if the network is to be of significant size, two sizes
of cable could be selected. Use a larger size (22 mm [0.87 in] or larger) to trunk the signal
into the service areas. Use a smaller cable (16 mm [0.63 in] or smaller) as feeders to tap into
and deliver the signals to the terminations. This is known as trunk and feeder architecture (see
Figure 4.21).
Figure 4.21
Trunk/feeder system
Return
Trunk
Feeder
Subscriber Service Drops

The subscriber service drop is the last and most important piece of any network. It is also the
final piece of cable that a designer has to choose. Drop cable is different from semi-rigid
(hard-line) coaxial cable in that it is much smaller, more flexible, and easier to handle. It also
has higher attenuation. Subscriber service drop is compared to that of semi-rigid.
Sizes and types of drop cable are listed in Table 4.35. Drop cable is similar to semi-rigid in its
make-up with a few exceptions. The outer conductor of drop wire is not a thick seamless
aluminum tube, but a thin, flexible, aluminum foil. The foil is wrapped with aluminum braid,
used for shielding, which is available in different coverage percentages. There is also a super
shield or quad shield, drop cable. This type of cable has an additional foil wrap around the
aluminum braid and a second aluminum braid around the second foil wrap and should be used
in two-way applications (see Figure 4.22).
Drop service cables are not designated by the outer conductor size, but by a specific joint
Army Navy (JAN) designation such as Series 6 and Series 11. Drop service wires are also
available in self-supporting and filled versions just like the semi-rigid coaxial cables.
4-70
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Subscriber Service Drops, continued

Figure 4.22
Standard shield and super shield (quad) construction (drop cable)
Center conductor
Center conductor
Dielectric
Dielectric
Bonded aluminum foil shield
Bonded aluminum foil shield
Aluminum-braided shield
Jacket
Aluminum foil shield
Jacket
Standard shield construction
Super shield (quad) construction
Table 4.35
Drop cable and attenuation
Size
(JAN)
2004 BICSI
450 MHz
dB/100 m (dB/100 ft)
550 MHz
dB/100 m (dB/100 ft)
750 MHz
dB/100 m (dB/100 ft)
Series 6
14.40
(4.40)
16.10
(4.90)
18.50
(5.65)
Series 11
9.02
(2.75)
10.00
(3.04)
12.00
(3.65)
4-71
Chapter 4: Cabling
Subscriber Service Drops, continued

Sizes and types of drop cable at maximum drop length are listed in Table 4.36.
Table 4.36
Drop cable and attenuation at maximum drop length
Size
(JAN)
Max Drop Length

m
(ft)
450 MHz
(dB/drop)
550 MHz
(dB/drop)
750 MHz
(dB/drop)
Series 6
54.0
(177)
7.8
8.7
10
Series 11
74.1
(243)
7.5
8.3
10
The factors that a designer should consider are the following:
Amplifier link budgets
Amplifier cascade limitations
Environmental factors
Drop length
Signal level minimums to the house
Price
With the information provided, a designer should be able to decide what types and sizes of
cable will work best with the network.
Determine Bandwidth Requirements
Bandwidth requirements have no bearing on determining coaxial cable size. The limiting factor
is the electronics and passive components.
Obtain Loss Budgets for Electronics from the Customer
Loss budgets of the different types and sizes of cables depend on the gain and outputs of the
network electronics to be used. This was discussed earlier as a necessary means of
determining the size of coaxial cable along with distance, amplifier cascade, and cost.
4-72
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
Twinaxial Cabling
Introduction
Twinaxial cable is a configuration having two center conductors. Each individual conductor is
surrounded by a dielectric material, usually a hard or soft foam polymer, depending upon the
installation design specification and application. The dielectric material of both conductors is
wrapped with a continuous aluminum-polyester shield and tinned copper braid or other
shielding configurations (see Figure 4.23).
Figure 4.23
Twinaxial cable
Dielectric
Jacket
Foil shield
Braided shield
2004 BICSI
4-73
Chapter 4: Cabling
Optical Fiber Coaxial Cabling

Introduction
Fiber coaxial communication systems utilize both optical fiber cables and coaxial cabling (see
Figure 4.24). The signal, whether it represents data, video or voice light, is digitally generated.
It is sent to a master signal converter within the base station where it is converted to a light
signal. It is then transmitted over a pair of singlemode or multimode optical fiber cables from
the master signal converter to a remotely located signal converter. The light signal is then
reconverted and transmitted to antennas via coaxial cabling.
The benefit of using both mediums is to transmit the signal(s) via optical fiber over large
distances to multiple remote localized areas, and then to broadcast to several antennas via
coaxial cable. This system allows for greater channel capacities and smaller quantities and
sizes of cabling as well as for the use of centrally located switching equipment. Transmitting
the signal over coaxial cable by itself would not be a viable option because of the large cable
diameter required. Additionally, the signal would be severely attenuated over the long distance.
Optical fiber cable by itself is not a good option, either, due to increased numbers of fibers and
hardware needs. The combination of these mediums provides a much more cost-effective
system.
Figure 4.24
Optical fiber-coaxial system
Remote
signal
converter
Antennas
(via couplers)
Tx
Communications
switch
equipment
Fiber
or
copper
Rx
Master
signal
converter
Optical fiber
cable
Coaxial
cable
Tx
2
Rx
Tx
X
Rx
Rx = Receiver
Tx = Transmitter
4-74
2004 BICSI
Chapter 4: Cabling
System Requirements
Space Allocation
The designer needs to consider the specific application of fiber-coaxial systems and determine
the customers needs. The heart of the system is the switch or base station. These fibercoaxial systems may be fed from concrete universal enclosures (CUEs), controlled
environment vaults (CEVs), or cabinets. There must be significant space to accommodate the
switching equipment along with the master signal converter unit within those spaces. To feed
the remote locations, routing must be determined via conduit, cable tray, or free air (if
feasible). Spare conduits or tray space must be identified or available space in the overhead or
underground must be determined if new conduits are to be installed. For both optical fiber and
coaxial cable, know the bend radii and conduit fill code requirements and use innerduct or
sleeving to facilitate the installation. Pulling distances and tensions must be kept within
specifications. The size and type of cable, along with the conduit system, will determine the
maximum pulling lengths. Although most manufacturers offer flexible models, coaxial cable is
typically rigid. Most manufacturers offer flexible models, and conduit should be oversized to
allow smooth installation without kinking or flattening the coaxial cable, resulting in signal
degradation and unwanted reflections. There must also be adequate space in the various
remote locations for installing the remote signal converters, allowing space around them for
cooling, and for splice boxes.
Power
Power requirements must be determined at both the remote and base locations. The designer
must determine if the remote units should be powered from the central base station location or
if each remote signal converter should get power local to the units themselves. Some benefits
of centralized power are adding a battery back-up uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to the
system for more reliable operation and having total control over remote power (no inadvertent
switching off power to the remote units at their respective locations). Benefits of powering
each unit locally are the decreased length of power cabling back to the base station and the
elimination of power conduits.
2004 BICSI
4-75
Chapter 4: Cabling
Applications
Fiber coaxial cabling systems provide a wide variety of communication applications. These
systems work particularly well for in-building solutions where there may be problems with
interference and long distances. Routing optical fiber cables from a central switch location
throughout campus environments and from building to building allows for expanded
communications. Positioning remote equipment and/or antennas from floor to floor within
dormitories, provides easy access to the system.
This type of system allows students to access the Internet for class information and to
communicate with professors and fellow classmates. It also allows administrators to distribute
informational video throughout the campus. Airports and hospitals are other prime candidates
for fiber-coaxial cabling systems. The central switching equipment can be placed in a secure
area, and use the fiber-coaxial cable backbone to feed the remote antennas. Several airline
terminals can be connected for internal security communication. Different floors of a hospital
can be linked to the communication system to better correspond in emergency situations.
4-76
2004 BICSI
Chapter 5
Cabling Hardware
This chapter includes information about cabling hardware
selection, labeling, and requirements/design considerations.
Discussion of closures and connectors for fiber and twistedpair cable. New graphics show optical fiber splice closures
and splice trays.
Table of Contents
Hardware ................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Cabling Hardware ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
Closures for Twisted-Pair Cables ....................................................................................................... 5-3
Aerial ................................................................................................................................................ 5-4
Direct-Buried and Underground .......................................................................................................... 5-5
Closures for Optical Fiber Cables ...................................................................................................... 5-6
Cabling Hardware Selection ............................................................................................................... 5-7
Splice Closures ........................................................................................................................... 5-7
Distribution Centers/Housing ....................................................................................................... 5-7
Transition/Indoor Splice Hardware.....5-8
Transition Structure ...................................................................................................................... 5-8
Outdoor Splice Hardware ............................................................................................................ 5-10
Connecting Hardware ....................................................................................................................... 5-10
Splicing Connectors for Twisted-Pair Cable ....................................................................................... 5-12
Twisted-Pair Cable ............................................................................................................................ 5-15
Modular Splicing ........................................................................................................................ 5-15
Splicing Methodogy .......................................................................................................................... 5-16
Splice Data5-18
Maximum Bundle Size for Closures .................................................................................................. 5-19
Testing ............................................................................................................................................. 5-23
Waterproof Splicing .......................................................................................................................... 5-23
Optical Fiber Cable ........................................................................................................................... 5-23
Splice Design ............................................................................................................................. 5-23
Optical Fiber Splicing Methods ......................................................................................................... 5-25
Fusion Splicing .......................................................................................................................... 5-26
Mechanical Splicing ................................................................................................................... 5-26
Mass Splicing ............................................................................................................................ 5-26
Splice Protection .............................................................................................................................. 5-26
Optical Fiber Splicing Hardware Considerations ................................................................................ 5-27
Hardware Labeling ............................................................................................................................ 5-28
2004 BICSI
5-i
Figures
Figure 5.1
Splice closures and covers ................................................................................................ 5-2
Figure 5.2
Splice closures .................................................................................................................. 5-3
Figure 5.3
Filled/direct-buried splice closure systems ........................................................................ 5-5
Figure 5.4
Optical fiber closure .......................................................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5.5
Underground to direct-buried transition .. 5-8
Figure 5.6
Underground to building transition . ..5-8
Figure 5.7
Direct-buried to building . 5-9
Figure 5.8
Example of IDC connection .5-12
Figure 5.9
In-line, butt, and branch .................................................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5.10
Example of single pair splice connections and modules ..5-14
Figure 5.11
Example of multipair splice connectors and modules.5-14
Figure 5.12
Examples of splice coding . 5-16
Figure 5.13
In-line splice . .5-16
Figure 5.14
Foldback splice . 5-17
Figure 5.15
Completed two-bank splice .5-17
Figure 5.16
Examples of splices required due to cable routing ........................... 5-23
Figure 5.17
Splice tray examples ........................................................................................................ 5-27
Tables
Table 5.1
Aerial closure size .............................................................................................................. 5-4
Table 5.2
Direct-buried/underground closure size .............................................................................. 5-6
Table 5.3
Two-bank fold-back splice data ......................................................................................... 5-18
Table 5.4
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] two-bank straight splice ..................................................... 5-19
Table 5.5
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] three-bank straight splice .................................................. 5-20
Table 5.6
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] four-bank straight splice ..................................................... 5-21
Table 5.7
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] two-bank apparatus splice ................................................. 5-22
5-ii
2004 BICSI
Hardware
Introduction
As described in ANSI/TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Cabling Standard, cabling hardware is used in outside plant (OSP) to enclose splices. They
are more commonly known as splice cases or closures. Cabling hardware is distinct from
connecting hardware in that cabling hardware attaches to the sheath whereas connecting
hardware connects to the conductors or optical fiber strands. While the connecting hardware
and the cabling hardware should complement each other, there are many combinations of
either which will satisfactorily establish the connectivity required to establish and maintain a
high quality transmission path.
Cabling Hardware
Cabling hardware can be constructed of metallic or nonmetallic materials and can be found in
aerial, underground, and direct-buried construction, such as:
Handholes (HHs).
Poles.
Support strands.
Walls.
Splice closures are used in both copper and optical fiber applications and can be pressurized or
nonpressurized. They typically serve the following functions:
2004 BICSI
Secure and protect cable and splices
Provide strain relief
Allow for reentry
5-1
Cabling Hardware, continued

See Figure 5.1 for three representatives of splice closures.
Figure 5.1
Splice closures and covers
Closure
cover
Closure
cover
Closure
cover
Splice closure
Splice closure
Splice closure
Splice closures are classified according to the configuration that cables enter the closure,
such as:
StraightProvisions are made for only one cable to enter each end of the closure.
BranchProvisions are made for two or more cables to enter one end or both ends of the
closure.
ButtProvisions are made for two or more cables to enter one end and no cables enter
the other end of the closure.
UniversalProvisions are made for adapters that allow multiple cables to enter either or
both ends of the closure.
Consult manufacturers specifications for splice closure capacity.
5-2
2004 BICSI
Cabling Hardware, continued

Splice closures (see Figure 5.2) are specifically designed for an intended application.
Figure 5.2
Splice closures
Buried straight splice
Aerial branch splice
Underground butt splice
Closures for Twisted-Pair Cables

Closures for twisted-pair cables are used to protect splices from mechanical and environmental hazards. These can be used in:
2004 BICSI
Aerial applications (on poles, strands, and building exteriors).
Direct-buried applications.
Underground applications.
Aboveground pedestals, whether fed by aerial, underground, or buried cables.
In-building applications (fire resistant).
5-3
Closures for Twisted-Pair Cables, continued

Closures are reenterable and may be watertight or vented. However, the encapsulant choice
may preclude splice reentry. Copper closures are capable of:
Storing and organizing splices (whether individually spliced or mass spliced).
Providing bonding and grounding facilities.
Aerial
Aerial closures are housings used for splicing, bonding, and grounding aerial cables. They can
be equipped with terminal blocks and fusible-link stub cables that are housed in separate
chambers to allow for the termination of service wires.
Aerial closures are typically support strand mounted and do not affect the integrity of the
support strand. They can be used to maintain the bond continuity of the splice point along the
cable. Additionally, they can be pole- or wall- mounted.
Aerial closures are available in many sizes, based on the size and number of cables entering
and exiting the closure. Table 5.1 is representative of the range of sizes available; however,
the telecommunications distribution designer should consult manufacturers specifications for
the exact capacities of their closures.
Table 5.1
Aerial closure size
Type
Length
Cable
Diameter
Sheath
Opening
Splice
Diameter
Straight
660 mm (26 in)
0.0-30.5 mm (0.0-1.2 in)
480 mm (19 in)
61 mm (2.4 in)
Straight
660 mm (26 in)
25-45.7 mm (1-1.8 in)
480 mm (19 in)
114 mm (4.5 in)
Straight
660 mm (26 in)
38-64 mm (1.5-2.5 in)
480 mm (19 in)
163 mm (6.4 in)
Branch
660 mm (26 in)
0.0-30.5 mm (0.0-1.2 in)
480 mm (19 in)
114 mm (4.5 in)
Branch
660 mm (26 in)
25-56 mm (1-2.2 in)
480 mm (19 in)
163 mm (6.4 in)
Branch
660 mm (26 in)
50-75 mm (2-3 in)
480 mm (19 in)
200 mm (8 in)
5-4
2004 BICSI
Direct-Buried and Underground

Direct-buried/underground closures provide housing for splices, bonding, and grounding. These
closures are designed to restore the mechanical integrity and electrical properties of the
sheath. Cables may enter these closures from one or both ends.
To protect splices from moisture when air-pressure systems are not used, direct-buried/
underground closures should be filled with an encapsulant after splicing operations are
complete, making them watertight (see Figure 5.3). Reenterable encapsulant is removable
from the splice closure to allow future splicing operations.
Figure 5.3
Filled/direct-buried splice closure systems
2004 BICSI
5-5
Direct-Buried and Underground, continued

Direct-buried/underground closures are available in many sizes, based on the size and number
of cables entering and exiting the closure. Table 5.2 is representative of the range of sizes
available; however, the designer should check with the manufacturer for the exact capacities
of their closures. Certain closures will be pressurized when the cables being spliced are part
of an air-pressure system (see Chapter 7: Air-Pressure Systems).
Table 5.2
Direct-buried/underground closure size
Length
Cable
Diameter
Sheath
Opening
Splice
Diameter
530 mm (21 in)
13-41 mm (0.5-1.6 in)
300 mm (12 in)
58 mm (2.3 in)
740 mm (29 in)
20-66 mm (0.8-2.6 in)
508 mm (20 in)
84 mm (3.3 in)
1143 mm (45 in)
30.5-86 mm (1.2-3.4 in)
914 mm (36 in)
135 mm (5.3 in)
Closures for Optical Fiber Cables

Closures for optical fiber cables are used to protect splices from mechanical and environmental hazards (see Figure 5.4). Closures are reenterable and may be watertight or vented.
However, the encapsulant choice may preclude splice reentry. They are used:
On poles, strands, and buildings.
In underground installations, direct-buried installations, and aboveground pedestals.
Figure 5.4
Optical fiber closure
Service loop
Splice tray
5-6
2004 BICSI
Closures for Optical Fiber Closures, continued

Optical fiber closures are capable of:
Storing and organizing the optical fiber strands.
Storing and organizing splices (whether individually spliced or mass spliced) generally
through the use of splicing trays.
Providing bonding and grounding facilities.
Maintaining minimum bend radius for the individual optical fiber strands.
Ensuring no light loss by restricting cable movement.
Consult manufacturers specifications for splice closure capacity.

Cabling Hardware Selection
Splice Closures
Splice closure selection is based mainly on the quantities of optical fibers and cables at a splice
point. Splice closures can accommodate both high and low optical fiber-count splice points.
The standard maximum number of cable entries is four, but up to eight cable entries are
possible. Closures can either be factory- or field- drilled to a specific cable diameter, or can be
ported for easy cable entry. Many closures are available with an inner closure to keep
encapsulant out of the splice trays when the closure is encapsulated. The use of an inner
closure also simplifies the reentry process.
Splice closures are designed for aerial, buried, or underground applications. These closures
can usually be installed quickly with ordinary tools.
Distribution Centers/Housings
Distribution centers are typically available in either 12- or 24- optical fiber configurations.
They can be placed in a totally exposed environment and have a National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) rating of 4.
These units can be mounted to a utility pole. A bracket is provided for this application. The
units can also be mounted to an outside wall or cable tray. These devices are available with
either two 50 mm (2 in) conduit fittings or a no holes version for field drilling.
These units are designed for use with outdoor-rated conduit. They should not be placed in an
environment where water will completely immerse the unit. Some housings are designed to be
mounted to a wall or cable tray in a semi-sheltered environment. More specifically,they should
have an overhead roof. These housings are also available with either two 50 mm (2 in) conduit
fittings or are available in a no holes version for field drilling.
Both the distribution centers and the housings will accommodate splice trays and pigtails or
can be used as a direct termination point. These distribution centers are ideally suited for use
in an indoor/outdoor industrial environment where data acquisition or video cameras are
needed.
2004 BICSI
5-7
Cabling Hardware Selection, continued

Transition/Indoor Splice Hardware
A transition splice point shall be required when the termination point is greater than
15 m (50 ft) from the building entrance and the unlisted campus backbone loose-tube
cable cannot be installed in a properly rated conduit. The campus backbone cable can be
spliced to a building backbone cable to meet National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements for fire-rated cables. Additionally, inside splice hardware can be used to route fiber
circuits to different locations when a patch panel is not desired, or to splice pigtails to
terminate fibers versus direct connectorization.
A transition splice is typically located near the building entrance point. Wall-mountable
hardware is generally required; however, rack-mountable products may be used, specifically
when splicing pigtails for termination. If armored cable is used, the grounding of metallic cable
elements shall be required. Transition points (TPs) frequently act as consolidation points
(CPs). The hardware housing may be required to strain relieve several cables.
Transition Structure
Situations exist where construction may transition from one type of construction to another.
Examples of such transitions appear in figures 5.5 through 5.7.
Figure 5.5
Underground to direct-buried transition
Buried cable
Subsidiary conduit
Buried cable
Conduit
Conduit
Underground cable
Maintenance hole
Figure 5.6
Underground to building transition
Splice case
Building
Backboard
Protector
Lateral cable
Splice
case
Conduit
Underground
cable
Subsidiary
conduit
Conduit
Maintenance hole
5-8
2004 BICSI
Figure 5.7
Direct-buried to building
Terminal protector
Grade
Sleeve
Direct-buried cable
Protector
Backboard
Sleeve through
building wall
Cable
Grade
Direct-buried cable
2004 BICSI
5-9

Outdoor Splice Hardware
The outdoor hardware consists of splice closures, wall- and pole- mountable distribution
centers, and pedestal-mountable cross-connects. These units provide environmental protection
for splices, connectors, and jumpers in the OSP environment (often required in industrial and
other special applications). Although products used outdoors should be designed for outdoors,
the end user may also use indoor-rated hardware outdoors if it is placed inside an enclosure
that has a NEMA rating suitable for the environment. This technique is also used in industrial
environments that use harsh or caustic chemicals that could cause failure to standard indoor or
outdoor hardware.
Field splices occur in aerial, duct, direct-buried, or aboveground locations. The termination or
distribution center must provide mechanical and environmental protection in the OSP.
A wide range of fiber counts exists in the field. Additionally, the number of cables may vary,
especially when the field splice point is a CP.
If a splice closure is to be encapsulated, it should be reenterable to allow for cable additions or
splicing plan changes.
Connecting Hardware
OSP splices generally occur in aerial, direct-buried, aboveground, or underground locations.
The termination or distribution center must provide mechanical and environmental protection.
Cable splice locations and other splicing details should be specified in work order prints.
Design Considerations
Whether the transmission medium is twisted-pair cable or optical fiber cable, the designer
should carefully consider the amount and the location of the splices that result. The goal is to
minimize splices, since they may be a source of a disproportionate amount of subsequent
troubles. Additionally, labor is usually a more expensive factor than material in a design. At the
cost of additional material avoiding splices may be the wiser economic choice. When a splice
cannot be reasonably avoided, the goal is to avoid creating a future maintenance problem. This
can be done by careful splicing, and selecting splicing tools and techniques that are reliable,
regardless of the transmission medium.
When constrained duct or conduit space prevents the use of multiple sheaths, a splice should
be used to consolidate the sheaths into one higher pair or fiber-count sheath. Combine as
many cables as possible at a single splice point, since the incremental cost per additional
conductor or fiber spliced is lower than the cost for splicing at different locations. It is
important to analyze the entire system when planning splice points. For example, if a planned
cross-connect is near a MH that is being considered for a splice point, consider routing the
cables to the cross-connect in order to combine the splice point with the termination point.
This can result in substantial labor cost savings.
5-10
2004 BICSI
Design Considerations, continued

The designer must determine the splicing configurations used for distributing cable counts
in the aerial, direct-buried, and underground network. Many design issues for splicing
configurations should be considered by the designer, including:
Will this splice configuration have to be opened in the future?
Can an additional cable be placed into this splice configuration without major
rearrangements?
Will a stub cable between splice configurations be required? If so, what type, size, and
cable count?
What type of splice configuration will be used?
Should spare facilities be allocated in the stub cable?
For schematic representation of various splice configurations, see Chapter 9: Design

Documentation.
The use of any particular type of configuration should be determined by the:
Geographic area where the splice configuration has to be placed.
Number of physical cables and related cable counts that have to be spliced and
redirected.
Space that is available to construct this splice configuration.
Safety related to working with the configuration.
The critical considerations in designing splice configurations are to design a splice that may:
Require very little future reentry.
Be reentered to change splice counts easily.
Accept an additional stub cable, if required.
Most of the difficulties encountered in OSP are man-made. Reentering splices invites
difficulty. The designer should minimize the potential for requiring reentry at the same time
the initial design is developed. If this cannot be avoided, any reentry should keep manipulation
to a minimum.
2004 BICSI
5-11
Splicing Connectors for Twisted-Pair Cable

The splicing operation can be done with one of two widely used types of equipmentMS2 or
Type 710 (see Figure 5.8). Both have insulation displacement connectors (IDCs).
Figure 5.8
Example of IDC connection
Direction of
insertion
Insulation
Conductor
View from top
IDC
IDC = Insulation displacement connectors
5-12
2004 BICSI
Splicing Connectors for Twisted-Pair Cable, continued

Most twisted-pair cable splicing is performed with modular and discrete connectors. There are
three general splicing methods: in-line, butt, and branch (see Figure 5.9).
These connectors are used for OSP or intrabuilding use and, depending on the manufacturer,
accommodate 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)] to 28 AWG [0.32 mm (0.013 in)] wire.
In addition, these connectors are available in several pair sizes (e.g., 1-pair, 5-pair, 10-pair,
25-pair), and should be placed in 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-bank configurations within the splice. Testing
the cable and the splice should be done either during or after construction.
Figure 5.9
In-line, butt, and branch
In-line
In
Out
Butt
In
Out
Branch
Out
In
Out
Out
2004 BICSI
5-13

Single connectors (see Figure 5.10):
Are available in designs capable of terminating two or three conductors.
Can be filled or nonfilled.
Accept different gauge wires.
Require minimum setup time.
Figure 5.10
Example of single pair splice connections and modules
Full pair in-line splice connector
Box tap splice connector
Butt splice connector
Multipair splicing modules (see Figure 5.11):
Splice up to 25 pairs.
Cut off excess conductor as connection is being made.
Require an equipment investment.
Produce higher productivity once the setup is complete.
Figure 5.11
Example of multipair splice connectors and modules
Write-on surface
Cover
Body
Base
5-14
2004 BICSI

In order for the splicing operation to be successful, the designer must consider some key
factorsthe closure should be lightweight, compact, and watertight.
When the closure is installed, it must be properly supported, grounded, and tested for air leaks
according to manufacturers recommendations.
Labels must also be affixed to all cables entering the splice, indicating cable number and paircounts. Care must be taken to clearly designate the in and out for the spliced cables.
Twisted-Pair Cable
Modular Splicing
A major planning consideration for module type designs is the planning of reentry into these
splices. Most module types are available in:
Dry versions for pressurized, vault, or inside splice applications.
Encapsulated versions for moisture resistance in free-breathing aerial splice closures.
Dry versions with a sealant box for maximum moisture protection in nonpressurized
plastic insulated conductor (PIC) splicing applications.
Dry module types are available in flame-retardant versions for vault and inside splice
applications. All fire-retardant modules must meet Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 94,
Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances,
requirements and possess an oxygen index of 28 or greater per American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM) D2863-00, Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum
Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index).
Splicing reentries determines how many module banks will be required in a splice. Splice bank
configurations and splice types listed on the work print at each splice location using a coding
system helps convey required configurations needed.
An example of one typical coding system as shown below would tell the splicer what
connectors are required and in what configuration the splice is to be built. It also indicates to
the designer what flexibility the splice has for the future. This coding is added to the cable
records for future reference:
S Straight
F Facility
J Junction
L Load
X Nonstandard
RN Rebuild needed
RC Rebuild completed
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Code always starts with a number representing the number of banks in a splice (see
Figure 5.12). One of three configurations will be used.
5-15
Twisted-Pair Cable, continued

Figure 5.12
Examples of splice coding
Example 1
3LXR
3 bank
Must be rebuilt
Non-standard
Load
Example 2
2FRC
2 bank
Facility
Rebuild completed
Splicing Methodology
The primary splicing methods within cases are:
In-Line Splicing MethodWire is placed in a straight-line arrangement. This method is

not designed to be rearranged and should have minimum handling. See Figure 5.13.
Figure 5.13
In-line splice
5-16
2004 BICSI
Splicing Methodology, continued
Foldback Splicing MethodConductors are folded into the splice to provide slack in the
conductors for maintenance, rearrangement, or transfer of conductors. See Figure 5.14.
Two-Bank Splicing MethodBinder groups are arranged into groups or banks (see
Figure 5.15). This allows high pair-count copper splices to maintain a smaller diameter
relative to the spliced cable diameter. As racking space in MHs could be at a premium,
this also permits a splice closure of smaller diameter to be used.
Figure 5.14
Foldback splice
Figure 5.15
Completed two-bank splice
2004 BICSI
5-17
Splice Data
Data in tables 5.3 through 5.7 was obtained from splices utilizing the MS2 modular splicing
method. When the bundles outside diameter (OD) is close to the splice case or sleeves inside
diameter (ID), the designer must use extra care not to exceed the maximum OD. If sealant
boxes are used, increase values by approximately 25 percent.
Table 5.3
Two-bank fold-back splice data
Pair
Count
AWG
Recommended
Splice Opening
In-Line
Splice Diameter
mm
in
mm
in
mm
in
26
0.41
(0.016)
432
17
71
(2.8)
24
0.51
(0.020)
89
(3.5)
22
0.64
(0.025)
102
(4.0)
26
0.41
(0.016)
81
(3.2)
24
0.51
(0.020)
99
(3.9)
22
0.64
(0.025)
122
(4.8)
26
0.41
(0.016)
104
(4.1)
24
0.51
(0.020)
127
(5.0)
22
0.64
(0.025)
432
(17)
147
(5.8)
26
0.41
(0.016)
432
(17)
119
(4.7)
24
0.51
(0.020)
432
(17)
127
(5.0)
26
0.41
(0.016)
483
(19)
137
(5.4)
24
0.51
(0.020)
145
(5.7)
26
0.41
(0.016)
152
(6.0)
24
0.51
(0.020)
160
(6.3)
26
0.41
(0.016)
157
(6.2)
24
0.51
(0.020)
170
(6.7)
2400
26
0.41
(0.016)
165
(6.5)
2700
26
0.41
(0.016)
183
(7.2)
3000
26
0.41
(0.016)
483
(19)
193
(7.6)
3600
26
0.41
(0.016)
483
(19)
203
(8.0)
400
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
5-18
2004 BICSI
Maximum Bundle Size for Closures

Table 5.4
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] two-bank straight splice
Main
Cable
Pair
Zero
Count mm (in)
100 33.0 (1.3)
200 48.3 (1.9)
300 55.9 (2.2)
400 66.0 (2.6)
600 78.7 (3.1)
900 96.5 (3.8)
1100 101.6 (4.0)
1200 106.7 (4.2)
1500 124.5 (4.9)
1800 137.2 (5.4)
2100 147.3 (5.8)
2400 157.5 (6.2)
2700 167.6 (6.6)
200
mm (in)
Number of Pair Bridged

300
400
600
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
100
mm (in)
43.2 (1.7)
53.3 (2.1)
66.0 (2.6)
73.7 (2.9)
86.4 (3.4)
101.6 (4.0)
111.8 (4.4)
114.3 (4.5)
129.5 (5.1)
142.2 (5.6)
155.0 (6.1)
165.1 (6.5)
177.8 (7.0)
61.0 (2.4)
68.6 (2.7)
76.2 (3.0)
88.9 (3.5)
106.7 (4.2)
116.8 (4.6)
121.9 (4.8)
137.2 (5.4)
150.0 (5.9)
160.0 (6.3)
170.2 (6.7)
180.3 (7.1)
76.2 (3.0)
81.3 (3.2)
96.5 (3.8)
111.8 (4.4)
121.8 (4.8)
127.0 (5.0)
142.2 (5.6)
152.4 (6.0)
162.6 (6.4)
172.7 (6.8)
182.9 (7.2)
94.0 (3.7)
104.1 (4.1)
119.4 (4.7)
127.0 (5.0)
132.1 (5.2)
144.8 (5.7)
155.0 (6.1)
165.1 (6.5)
175.3 (6.9)
185.4 (7.3)
3000 177.8 (7.0) 188.0 (7.4)

3600 195.6 (7.7) 208.3 (8.2)
190.5 (7.5)
210.8 (8.3)
193.0 (7.6) 195.6 (7.7)

213.4 (8.4) 215.9 (8.5)
900
mm (in)
1200
mm (in)
111.8 (4.4)
124.5 (4.9)
129.5 (5.1)
134.6 (5.3)
152.4 (6.0)
162.6 (6.4)
172.7 (6.8)
182.9 (7.2)
193.0 (7.6)
134.6 (5.3)
142.2 (5.6)
147.3 (5.8)
160.0 (6.3)
167.6 (6.6)
182.9 (7.2)
193.0 (7.6)
198.1 (7.8)
160.0 (6.3)
170.2 (6.7)
180.3 (7.1)
190.5 (7.5)
200.7 (7.9)
208.3 (8.2)
203.2 (8.0)
221.0 (8.7)
210.8 (8.3)
228.6 (9.0)
218.4 (8.6)
231.1 (9.1)
Main
Cable
Pair
Count
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
1500
mm (in)
177.8 (7.0)
185.4 (7.3)
193.0 (7.6)
200.7 (7.9)
210.8 (8.3)
3000
3600
218.4 (8.6) 226.1 (8.9) 236.2 (9.3) 248.9 (9.8) 256.5 (10.1)
233.7 (9.2) 243.8 (9.6) 251.5 (9.9) 261.6 (10.3) 269.2 (10.6) 276.9 (10.9)
1800
mm (in)

2100
2400
2700
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
193.0 (7.6)
200.7 (7.9) 210.8 (8.3)
208.3 (8.2) 218.4 (8.6) 223.5 (8.8)
218.4 (8.6) 226.1 (8.9) 238.8 (9.4)
3000
mm (in)
243.8 (9.6)
NOTES: Zero is straight splice measurement in in-line configuration.

For 22 AWG [0.64 mm (0.025 in)] conductors, increase values by 25 percent.
If sealant boxes are used, increase values approximately 25 percent.
2004 BICSI
5-19
Maximum Bundle Size for Closures, continued

Table 5.5
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] three-bank straight splice
Main
Cable
Pair
Count
400
600
Zero
mm (in)
50.8 (2.0)
58.4 (2.3)
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
3000
3600
71.1 (2.8)
81.3 (3.2)
94.0 (3.7)
106.7 (4.2)
116.8 (4.6)
124.5 (4.9)
137.2 (5.4)
144.8 (5.7)
157.5 (6.2)
Main
Cable
Pair
Count
1500
mm (in)
1800
mm (in)
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
3000
134.6 (5.3)
144.8 (5.7)
155.0 (6.1)
162.6 (6.4)
170.2 (6.7)
177.8 (7.0)
155.0 (6.1)
162.6 (6.4)
170.2 (6.7)
177.8 (7.0)
185.4 (7.3)
167.6 (6.6)
175.3 (6.9)
182.9 (7.2)
190.5 (7.5)
177.8 (7.0)
188.0 (7.4)
198.1 (7.8)
190.5 (7.5)
200.7 (7.9)
208.3 (8.2)
3600
193.0 (7.6)
200.7 (7.9)
208.3 (8.2)
218.4 (8.6)
226.1 (8.9)
238.8 (9.4)

100
200
300
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
53.3 (2.1) 55.9 (2.2)
58.4 (2.3)
63.5 (2.5) 66.0 (2.6)
68.6 (2.7)
76.2 (3.0)
86.4 (3.4)
96.5 (3.8)
106.7 (4.2)
116.8 (4.6)
124.5 (4.9)
137.2 (5.4)
144.8 (5.7)
160.0 (6.3)
78.7 (3.1)
88.9 (3.5)
99.9 (3.9)
109.2 (4.3)
119.4 (4.7)
129.5 (5.1)
139.7 (5.5)
147.3 (5.8)
162.6 (6.4)
81.3 (3.2)
91.4 (3.6)
101.6 (4.0)
111.8 (4.4)
121.9 (4.8)
132.1 (5.2)
142.2 (5.6)
150.0 (5.9)
165.1 (6.5)
400
mm (in)
63.5 (2.5)
73.7 (2.9)
600
mm (in)
78.7 (3.1)
86.4 (3.4)
96.5 (3.8)
106.7 (4.2)
116.8 (4.6)
127.0 (5.0)
137.2 (5.4)
144.8 (5.7)
152.4 (6.0)
167.6 (6.6)
91.4 (3.6)
101.6 (4.0)
109.2 (4.3)
121.9 (4.8)
132.1 (5.2)
142.2 (5.6)
150.0 (5.9)
157.5 (6.2)
172.7 (6.8)

2100
2400
2700
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
900
mm (in)
99.1 (3.9)
109.2 (4.3)
119.4 (4.7)
129.5 (5.1)
142.2 (5.6)
150.0 (5.9)
157.5 (6.2)
165.1 (6.5)
177.8 (7.0)
1200
mm (in)
119.4 (4.7)
129.5 (5.1)
137.2 (5.4)
147.3 (5.8)
155.0 (6.1)
162.6 (6.4)
170.2 (6.7)
185.4 (7.3)
3000
mm (in)

5-20
2004 BICSI

Table 5.6
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] four-bank straight splice
Main
Cable
Pair
Zero
Count mm (in)
300 45.7 (1.8)
100
mm (in)
53.3 (2.1)
200
mm (in)
61.0 (2.4)
600
900
66.0 (2.6)
83.8 (3.3)
71.1 (2.8)
88.9 (3.5)
78.7 (3.1)
96.5 (3.8)
1200
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
3000
99.1 (3.9)
114.3 (4.5)
129.5 (5.1)
139.7 (5.5)
150.0 (5.9)
157.5 (6.2)
165.1 (6.5)
104.1 (4.1)
116.8 (4.6)
132.1 (5.2)
142.2 (5.6)
152.4 (6.0)
160.0 (6.3)
167.6 (6.6)
3600 175.3 (6.9) 177.8 (7.0)
Main
Cable
Pair
Count
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
3000
3600
1500
mm (in)
167.6 (6.6)
177.8 (7.0)
188.0 (7.4)
195.6 (7.7)
203.2 (8.0)
208.3 (8.2)
218.4 (8.6)
1800
mm (in)
185.4 (7.3)
195.6 (7.7)
203.2 (8.0)
210.8 (8.3)
218.4 (8.6)
226.1 (8.9)

300
400
600
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
68.6 (2.7)
900
mm (in)
1200
mm (in)
83.8 (3.3) 86.4 (3.4)

101.6 (4.0) 104.1 (4.1)
94.0 (3.7)
109.2 (4.3)
121.9 (4.8)
109.2 (4.3)
119.4 (4.7)
134.6 (5.3)
144.8 (5.7)
155.0 (6.1)
162.6 (6.4)
170.2 (6.7)
114.3 (4.5)
124.5 (4.9)
137.2 (5.4)
147.3 (5.8)
157.5 (6.2)
165.1 (6.5)
172.7 (6.8)
119.4 (4.7)
129.5 (5.1)
139.7 (5.5)
150.0 (5.9)
160.0 (6.3)
167.6 (6.6)
175.3 (6.9)
127.0 (5.0)
139.7 (5.5)
150.0 (5.9)
160.0 (6.3)
167.6 (6.6)
175.3 (6.9)
182.9 (7.2)
139.7 (5.5)
150.0 (5.9)
160.0 (6.3)
170.2 (6.7)
177.8 (7.0)
182.9 (7.2)
190.5 (7.5)
144.8 (5.7)
160.0 (6.3)
170.2 (6.7)
177.8 (7.0)
185.4 (7.3)
193.0 (7.6)
200.7 (7.9)
180.3 (7.1)
182.9 (7.2) 185.4 (7.3)
193.0 (7.6)
200.7 (7.9)
210.8 (8.3)

2100
2400
2700
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
198.1 (7.8)
205.7 (8.1)
215.9 (8.5)
221.0 (8.7)
233.7 (9.2)
213.4 (8.4)
221.0 (8.7)
228.6 (9.0)
238.8 (9.4)
3000
mm (in)
223.5 (8.8)
231.1 (9.1) 236.2 (9.3)
241.3 (9.5) 246.4 (9.7)

2004 BICSI
5-21

Table 5.7
26 AWG [0.41 mm (0.016 in)] two-bank apparatus splice
Main
Cable
Pair
Zero
Count mm (in)
50 33.0 (1.3)
100 40.6 (1.6)
200 58.4 (2.3)
300 68.6 (2.7)
400 78.7 (3.1)
600 94.0 (3.7)
900 121.9 (4.8)
1200 137.2 (5.4)
1500 155.0 (6.1)
1800 170.2 (6.7)
2100 185.4 (7.3)
2400 198.1 (7.8)
2700 210.8 (8.3)
3000 218.4 (8.6)
3600 241.3 (9.5)
Main
Cable
Pair
Count
600
900
1200
1500
1800
2100
2400
2700
3000
3600
50
mm (in)
40.6 (1.6)
48.3 (1.9)
66.0 (2.6)
78.7 (3.1)
86.4 (3.4)
104.1 (4.1)
127.0 (5.0)
144.8 (5.7)
162.6 (6.4)
177.8 (7.0)
190.5 (7.5)
200.7 (7.9)
210.8 (8.3)
218.4 (8.6)
241.3 (9.5)

100
200
300
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
58.4 (2.3)
68.6 (2.7)
83.8 (3.3)
96.5 (3.8)
111.8 (4.4)
132.1 (5.2)
150.0 (5.9)
167.6 (6.6)
182.9 (7.2)
195.6 (7.7)
208.3 (8.2)
218.4 (8.6)
231.1 (9.1)
246.4 (9.7)
83.8 (3.3)
96.5 (3.8)
106.7 (4.2)
121.9 (4.8)
142.2 (5.6)
157.5 (6.2)
175.3 (6.9)
188.0 (7.4)
200.7 (7.9)
210.8 (8.3)
221.0 (8.7)
231.1 (9.1)
251.5 (9.9)
106.7 (4.2)
116.8 (4.6)
132.1 (5.2)
150.0 (5.9)
165.1 (6.5)
180.3 (7.1)
193.0 (7.6)
205.7 (8.1)
218.4 (8.6)
231.1 (9.1)
241.3 (9.5)
259.1 (10.2)

600
900
1200
1500
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
mm (in)
160.0 (6.3)
172.7 (6.8) 195.6 (7.7)
188.0 (7.4) 203.2 (8.0) 213.4 (8.4)
200.7 (7.9) 218.4 (8.6) 223.5 (8.8) 238.8 (9.4)
213.4 (8.4) 233.7 (9.2) 238.8 (9.4) 241.3 (9.5)
228.6 (9.0) 243.8 (9.6) 251.5 (9.9) 259.1 (10.2)
241.3 (9.5) 254.0 (10.0) 261.6 (10.3) 271.8 (10.7)
254.0 (10.0) 269.2 (10.4) 274.3 (10.8) 281.9 (11.1)
266.7 (10.5) 271.8 (10.7) 279.4 (11.0) 289.6 (11.4)
284.5 (11.2) 289.6 (11.4) 297.2 (11.7) 307.3 (12.1)
400
mm (in)
132.1 (5.2)
147.3 (5.8)
160.0 (6.3)
172.7 (6.8)
185.4 (7.3)
198.1 (7.8)
213.4 (8.4)
226.1 (8.9)
241.3 (9.5)
251.5 (9.9)
274.3 (10.8)
1800
mm (in)
261.6 (10.3)
269.2 (10.6)
279.4 (11.0)
292.1 (11.5)
302.3 (11.9)
315.0 (12.4)

5-22
2004 BICSI
Testing
Manufacturers offer a variety of plugs and cords to mate with the modules being utilized. With
the use of these modules, testing may be completed during the splicing operation.
Waterproof Splicing
A series of waterproof sealing boxes are available that will encapsulate the splicing module,
making it waterproof.
Optical Fiber Cable
Splice Design
In customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP) applications, a designer normally avoids the
requirement of fiber-to-fiber field splicing by installing a continuous length of cable. This is
normally the most economical and convenient solution. Splices cannot always be avoided due
to the cable plant layout, length, raceway congestion, requirements for a transition splice
between nonlisted OSP cables and listed cable at the building entrance point, and unplanned
requirements (e.g., cable damaged during the installation or during a cable unearthing).
Figure 5.16
Examples of splices required due to cable routing
12-Fiber
Field splice
point
12-Fiber
48-Fiber
12-Fiber
12-Fiber
Cable length
in excess of
4 km (2.5 mi)(MM) or
12 km (7.5 mi)(SM)
Transition
splice
12-Fiber
36-Fiber
Congested duct
allowing only one
cable
Consolidation
field splice point
km = Kilometer
MM = Multimode
SM = Singlemode
2004 BICSI
5-23
Optical Fiber Cable, continued

The physical design of the system should minimize splices whenever possible. In most cases,
the small size and long lengths of optical fiber cable allow the use of separate cable sheaths
to serve each cross-connect, telecommunications room (TR), intermediate cross-connect
(IC) building distributor (BD), providing conduit space allows. This avoids cable splices and
results in fewer different fiber-count cables, thus allowing for an easier installation and
typically avoiding minimum order requirement issues. In short, the small incremental cost of
additional sheaths will usually offset the cost of splicing different fiber-count cables together.
Splice point locations should be chosen only after considering the requirements for performing
optical fiber splicing:
To effectively perform a splice, the cable ends must reach a satisfactory work surface
(preferably a vehicle or table that is clean and stable). The distance can be as much as
9 m (30 ft). The chosen location should have provisions for storing the slack cable after
splicing is completed.
Physical protection of all slack is recommended, although not required.
Splicing and racking slack should be considered when making cable length calculations.
Optical fiber splice closures typically require 2.4 to 3 m (8 to 10 ft) of stripped cable inside
the closure.
Special applications exist (e.g., the combination of a star and ring topology), where access to
individual fibers is required without disturbing the remaining fibers. The designer should allow
for cable slack, normally 9 m (30 ft), allowing for easy mid-span access.
Ideally, the number of fibers being accessed will correspond to the number of fibers in the
cable units, buffer tube, or unitized subunit (usually 6 or 12 fibers). While this is not required,
it provides an easier and cleaner procedure.
A small amount of slack cable (6 to 9 m [20 to 30 ft]) can be useful in the event cable repair
or relocation is needed. If a cable is cut, the slack can be shifted to the damaged point,
necessitating only one splice point in the permanent repair, rather than two splices if an
additional length of cable is added. This results in reduced labor and hardware costs and link
loss budget savings.
Additional cable slack (approximately 9 m [30 ft]) stored at planned future cable drop points
will result in savings in labor and materials when the drop is finally needed. Relocation of
terminals or cable plant can also take place without splicing if sufficient cable slack is
available.
5-24
2004 BICSI
Optical Fiber Splicing Methods

There are two major categories of field-splicing methods for optical fibersfusion and
mechanical. Both single-fiber and mass-fiber (typically 12 fibers) splicing methods are
available. Both of these methods are field-proven and have excellent long-term reliability
when completed according to manufacturers instructions.
For OSP splice locations, the splices and stripped cables are usually protected and secured by
a splice closure. For splicing inside a building, a splice enclosure that is secured to a rack or
wall is often used. In both cases, the splice closure or enclosure contains the fiber splices in
splice trays or organizers, typically in groups of 6, 12, 24, or more fibers per splice tray or
organizer.
Splicing can occur between two optical fiber cablesloose-tube cables containing 250 m
coated fiber and tight-buffer cables containing 900 m buffered fibers. Both mechanical or
fusion splice methods can perform 250 m to 250 m splicing, 250 m to 900 m splicing, or
900 m to 900 m splicing.
Typically, multimode fibers are 50/125 m or 62.5/125 m while singlemode fibers are
8-9/125 m. Mechanical or fusion splicing can accommodate both multimode and singlemode
fiber.
Single-fiber and mass-fiber (typically 12) splicing methods are available for both fusion and
mechanical methods for various cable constructions.
There are advantages and disadvantages for each method, but the choice primarily depends
on:
The telecommunications installers equipment.
Preference.
Training.
Application.
Volume of optical fiber splicing.
All of these methods and categories:
2004 BICSI
Are field-proven.
Have excellent long-term reliability.
Can be used for termination of optical fiber cables.
5-25
Optical Fiber Splicing Methods, continued

Fusion Splicing
Fusion splicing consists of aligning two clean (stripped of coating), cleaved fibers, then joining
and fusing the ends together with an electric arc. Typical splice loss under field conditions is
less than 0.05 dB for singlemode fiber.
Mechanical Splicing
By comparison, a mechanical splice is an optical junction where two or more optical fiber
strands are aligned and held in place by a self-contained assembly approximately 50 mm (2 in)
in length. Single-fiber mechanical splices rely upon alignment of the outer diameter of the
fibers, making the accuracy of core/cladding concentricity critical to achieving low splice
losses. Mechanical splices can consistently achieve losses on singlemode fibers in the 0.10 to
0.15 dB range.
Mass Splicing
For high fiber-count applications, an increasingly popular method is mass splicing. Mass
splicing can be fusion or mechanical. The term mass indicates that multiple fibers are being
spliced at once, typically in a ribbon configuration. Most common today are 12-fiber ribbons.
The chief advantage of mass splicing is speed. Mass splicing is typically four to five times
faster than single-fiber splicing. Typical loss for this splice is less than 0.10 dB for singlemode
fiber.The system designer needs to understand the loss requirements of the fiber system and
the capabilities of the various types of splice equipment (under field conditions) to manage
splicing trade-offs of productivity and splice loss when deciding to use single-fiber or mass
splicing.
Ribbon fiber is not necessarily needed to take advantage of mass splicing. Sometimes there is
a requirement to splice loose-tube cable to ribbon cable. One method of accomplishing this is
to break out the individual fibers in the ribbon cable for single-fiber splicing, or ribbonize the
fibers from the loose-tube cable.
Splice Protection
Fusion and mechanical splicing are reliable and suitable for both indoor and outdoor use when
the splices are completed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and allow for
adequate protection.
When splicing outdoors, typically the splices and stripped cable should be protected by a splice
closure. When the cable is installed in a splice closure, there are various methods of providing
strain relief and protection of the stripped fiber splice. All fiber splices are housed in splice
trays or organizers inside a closure. The proper splice tray should be selected based on the
type of protection required by the splice. For example, mechanical splices have a form of
built-in strain relief and fiber protection, which are then secured in a splice tray or organizer.
Fusion splices, however, require additional protection and strain relief that can be provided by
heat-shrink sleeves, crimp protectors, or silicone sealant. Heat-shrink and mechanical crimp
connectors are the most common methods.
When splicing inside a building, a splice center can be used when rack or wall space is
available. Additionally, most termination patch panels have built-in or accompanying splice
centers that allow fiber termination and through splicing when required.
5-26
2004 BICSI
Optical Fiber Cable Splicing Hardware Considerations

There are many types of splices and splicing methods that dictate a large variety of splice
trays for a particular hardware unit.
The optical fiber strands and splices must be well organized and protected. The splice tray
should be easy to use and allow for easy reentry.
The minimum bend radius requirements of the optical fiber strands must not be violated. Trays
must be large enough to handle worst-case bending. Trays must provide adequate strain relief
for buffer tubes, pigtails, or pre-terminated modules.
Splice trays are available in metallic or plastic versions, for singlemode or multimode optical
fiber strands, to provide physical protection for both fusion and mechanical splices.
The standard fusion splice tray is the singlemode tray with a 12-optical fiber splice capacity
that can be used with loose-tube or tight-buffered cables. A high-precision, molded, step-slot
organizer protects the fusion splice without the need for individual splice protection parts.The
completed splices are placed in the organizer and coated with a room temperature vulcanization (RTV) compound to protect the bare optical fiber strands.
The standard mechanical splice tray is the singlemode tray with a 12-optical fiber capacity.
Most splice trays are available with clear, plastic covers for easy visual inspection. Other trays
are available for most splicing methods.
Splice trays are required to protect and organize optical fiber strands and splices at splice
points (see Figure 5.17). As with the copper closures, additional kits may be required to
complete the closure assembly.
Figure 5.17
Splice tray examples
Singlemode fusion splice tray (12-fiber splice capacity)
Singlemode mechanical splice tray (12-fiber splice capacity)
2004 BICSI
5-27
Hardware Labeling
Proper labeling of hardware is important for system administration. One recommendation is to:
Label each panel from left to right, starting at the top and labeling to the bottom.
Be consistent with the labeling code.
Use the customers labeling procedure (campus environment).
Identify all splice points on the as-built drawings.
Provide written documentation as to:
Location.
Manufacturer.
Type of splice.
Pair count or optical fiber strand count.
Date of splice.
Splice technicians name.
NOTE:
Refer to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure, for additional labeling and administration
recommendations.
5-28
2004 BICSI
Chapter 6
Grounding, Bonding, and
Electrical Protection
Includes additional information about fused protectors
including air gap, gas tube, solid state, current-interrupting
devices, and isolating transformers. Updated graphics.
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
Exposed Outside Plant (OSP) ...........................................................................................................
Exposure to Lightning .................................................................................................................
Power Contact ............................................................................................................................
Power Induction ..........................................................................................................................
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) ......................................................................................................
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
Bonding and Grounding ..................................................................................................................... 6-5

MGN and Non-MGN Power Systems ................................................................................................ 6-6
Bonding Telecommunications and Power Grounds ...................................................................... 6-9
Bonding Requirements ....................................................................................................... 6-10

Aerial Cable Bonding Requirements ................................................................................................
Maintaining Electrical Continuity of Shields ...............................................................................
Metallic Conductors ..................................................................................................................
Bonding Support Strands to Ground ..........................................................................................
Bonding Cable Shields to Support Strands ................................................................................
Bonding at Power Crossings .....................................................................................................
Bonding in Joint Use or Joint Occupancy ..................................................................................
Underground/Direct-Buried Cable Dips in Aerial Cable Runs ......................................................
AerialUnderground Transitions ...............................................................................................
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-13
Direct-Buried Cable Bonding Requirements .....................................................................................

Direct-Buried Plant Exposed to Power ......................................................................................
Joint Random Direct-Buried Plant .............................................................................................
Methods and Precautions .........................................................................................................
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-14
Underground Cable Bonding Requirements ...................................................................................... 6-15

Metallic Conductors .................................................................................................................. 6-15
Maintenance Hole (MH) Bonding and Grounding .............................................................................. 6-16
Building Entrance Protection ........................................................................................................... 6-18
Bonding and Grounding ............................................................................................................. 6-19
Corrosion and Noncorrosion Areas ............................................................................................ 6-19
Protectors ............................................................................................................................. 6-21

Fuseless Protector Housing ............................................................................................................ 6-21
Fused Protector Housing ................................................................................................................. 6-21
Fuse Links ...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Protector Units ................................................................................................................................ 6-22
Primary and Secondary Protector Units .......................................................................................... 6-23
2004 BICSI
6-i
Grounding for Lightning Protection .................................................................................. 6-24

Soil Resistance ............................................................................................................................... 6-24
Ground Resistance .......................................................................................................................... 6-24
Obtaining a 25-Ohm Ground ............................................................................................................ 6-25
Bonding Electrodes ......................................................................................................................... 6-25
Reducing Resistivity ........................................................................................................................
Chemical Electrodes .................................................................................................................
Using Ground Enhancement Material ........................................................................................
Advantages of Ground Enhancement Material ...........................................................................
Ideal Conditions ........................................................................................................................
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-27
Concrete-Encased Electrode ........................................................................................................... 6-27

Building Exterior Grounds ......................................................................................................... 6-27
Cable to Electrode Connections ................................................................................................ 6-28
Electrical Protection in Tunnels ......................................................................................... 6-29

Spacing Between Bonding Points .................................................................................................... 6-29
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) .................................................................................................. 6-30
Mutual Impedance ........................................................................................................................... 6-30
6-ii
2004 BICSI
Figures
Figure 6.1
Ground potential rise .......................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6.2
MGN power system ........................................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6.3
Non-MGN power system .................................................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6.4
Wye power system ............................................................................................................ 6-8
Figure 6.5
Delta power system ........................................................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.6
Ground connection on a pole (MGN system) .................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6.7
Grounding without access to transformers ........................................................................ 6-14
Figure 6.8
Welded bonded attachment to rebar for site-poured maintenance hole ............................. 6-16
Figure 6.9
Clamped bonding attachment to rebar for precast or site-poured maintenance hole .......... 6-16
Figure 6.10
Interior bonding and grounding for racking ......................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6.11
Underground cable bonding .............................................................................................. 6-17
Figure 6.12
Maintenance hole bonding ................................................................................................ 6-18
Figure 6.13
Isolation joint .................................................................................................................... 6-20
2004 BICSI
6-iii
6-iv
2004 BICSI
Introduction
Properly designed and installed electrical protection, grounding, and bonding can mitigate
voltage potentials and currents hazardous to people, property, and telecommunications equipment in addition to aiding quality of service. The sources of these abnormal potentials and
currents are usually external to the telecommunications cabling and are frequently referred to
as foreign potentials. The purpose of electrical protection is to:
Minimize electrical hazards to telecommunications system users and protect those engaged in construction, operation, and maintenance of the system.
Reduce the risk of electrical damage to aerial, direct-buried, or underground plant, telecommunications equipment, and associated buildings or structures.
Mitigate noise.
Where telecommunications system users and plant personnel are concerned, safety from
shock hazard is a prime design consideration.
The National Electrical Safety Code(NESC) requires cable shields, support strands, and
other noncurrent-carrying metallic hardware to be effectively grounded. It is especially
important to effectively ground cable shields, support strands, and noncurrent-carrying metallic
hardware at dead-ends and junction points for noise mitigation, personnel protection, and
power contact protection.
In the United States, the common electrical supply is 120 volt (V) 60 hertz (Hz) nominally. In
many other countries, the common electrical supply is 240 V 50 Hz nominally. In all cases,
refer to local electrical codes and regulations.
Exposed Outside Plant (OSP)
In the United States, the telecommunications distribution designer must be familiar with the
definition of exposed outside plant (OSP) cable as defined by the NESC and the National
Electrical Code(NEC).
Protective measures are required on aerial, direct-buried, and underground cable when there
is exposure to:
Disturbances from lightning.

Accidental contact with power conductors operating at more than 300 V to ground.
Ground potential rise (GPR) exceeding 300 V.
Voltage induction (e.g., alternating current [ac] power) exceeding 300 V.
The designer should consider all the exposures encountered for a specific cable installation
when determining protection measures. Whatever the source, protective measures should be
coordinated and considered as a whole to abate these exposures.
2004 BICSI
6-1
Exposed Outside Plant (OSP), continued

The terms exposed and unexposed are used to describe OSP with respect to its vulnerability
to sources of current and voltage. OSP subject to electrical disturbances from any of these
sources is exposed. OSP not subject to these effects is not exposed.
The designer should consider the physical characteristics of the OSP cable (metallic components of cable such as a strength member, metallic shield, or conductors) when determining
whether an outside facility should be classified as exposed or unexposed. Furthermore, the
source and severity of the exposure must also be considered to determine the protection
measures to be specified.
Often, a segment of the OSP cabling may not appear to be exposed to lightning and power;
yet, by way of exposed branches or extensions connecting with that segment, it is classified as
exposed. For example, underground plant is not directly exposed to power contact, but individual cables can be exposed to power or lightning if they extend into an exposed location by
aerial or direct-buried facilities. A telecommunications system is exposed or unexposed
according to whether the OSP serving it is exposed or unexposed.
NOTE:
Consult the appropriate requirements and practices of applicable authorities, regulations, and codes concerning their policies with respect to exposed and unexposed
plant. Frequently, the policy is to treat all locations as exposed and to protect the
plant accordingly.
Exposure to Lightning
IMPORTANT:
Lightning strikes are a common source of hazardous foreign potentials.

OSP cabling is classified as exposed to lightning except when located in:
Areas having five or less thunderstorm days per year and where the
ground resistivity is less than 100 ohm-meters. Such areas are rare.
For example, in the continental United States, they are found along
the Pacific coast.
Areas where buildings are close and sufficiently high to intercept

lightning.
Campus cabling runs that are 42 m (140 ft) or less with the cable
bonded to each building ground electrode system.
Power Contact
Since power and telecommunications cabling serve the same customers, OSP facilities for
these services are sometimes located close to one another and may even share the same pole
or trench (joint-use). Aerial or direct-buried plant that is subject to possible contact by power
conductors operating at more than 300 V to ground is considered to be exposed to power
contacts. All primary power systems operate at more than this voltage, while most secondary
systems operate at lower voltages. Such systems must also be considered as hazardous since
the currents imposed as a result of accidental contact can severely damage physical plant or
be fatal to personnel.
CO-OSP Manual, 3rd edition
6-2
2004 BICSI

Power Induction
Disturbances from electromagnetic induction (power induction) can occur wherever telecommunications and power lines run parallel for long distances. OSP subject to power induction of
more than 300 V to ground is considered to be exposed. Although lower voltages may exist as
a result of unbalanced power line operation, induced voltages exceeding 300 V to ground are
most likely caused by power line faults.
A properly constructed bonding and grounding system will mitigate noise from power induction
sources such as:
Electrified railroads.
Trolley systems.
Subways.
Electrified buses.
Electrified cranes.
Electric substations.
Ground Potential Rise (GPR)

OSP subject to a GPR of more than 300 V to ground is considered to be exposed. The
likelihood of a GPR is greatest in the vicinity of a power generating station or a substation.
Substations are commonly located on campus premises to provide service to the campus and
its associated structures. GPRs can develop between the power station ground and remote
grounds as a result of a fault in the power network and will persist until the fault is cleared.
GPR is a function of the transmission of current to ground at some discrete point. While this
may be temporary (i.e., a lightning bolt) or continuous (i.e., operation of a substation), it
creates a difference between the voltage readings taken at different geographical points in the
telecommunications system. Unless the telecommunications system is properly bonded to
ensure electrical continuity and equivalence, and grounded to ensure delivery of the charge to
a ground point, the system and persons in contact with it could be harmed.
2004 BICSI
6-3

In the following GPR example, the power system multi-ground neutral (MGN) system
ground receives a 120 V fault (see Figure 6.1). This power fault induces 120 V onto the
MGN ground. The voltage is dissipated through the ground but causes a GPR. Any telecommunications facilities or ground systems located in close proximity to the point of induced
voltage will be influenced by that GPR. In this example, a telecommunications cable shield
ground is located 1.2 m (4 ft) from the induced voltage to the MGN ground. The120 V fault is
dissipated to a 30 V ground potential rise when it reaches the telecommunications cable shield
ground.
Figure 6.1
Ground potential rise
Telephone
cable shield
ground
Power
conductor
120 V
power
fault
Power system
(MGN) ground
1.2 m (4 ft)
*55 V
*44 V
*36 V
*30 V
0.91 m (3 ft)
0.6 m (2 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft)
* Voltage to remote earth

MGN = Multiground neutral
V = Volt
Accidental power contacts, power induction, and GPR are individual threats to OSP cabling,
but the protection measures used to prevent one source of power disturbance are generally
effective against all three.
6-4
2004 BICSI

Bonding refers to the electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to maintain a
common electrical potential. Bonding conductors must be of sufficient gauge to carry anticipated current due to power contact.
Grounding refers to the electrical connection of telecommunications hardware to an effective
electrical ground. An effective electrical ground can be the vertical down lead (VDL) of a
power system MGN, a grounded neutral of a secondary power system, or a specially constructed grounding system.
An effective electrical ground is a low-resistance path such as the power MGN. Electrical
connection to a low-resistance ground permits current to flow to ground without the build-up
of hazardous voltages on the telecommunications cabling, in the event of power contact.
Electrical connections of aerial plant to anchor rods or down guys are not effective electrical
grounds. These types of connections are high-resistance grounds. A high-resistance ground
does not provide adequate protection against hazardous voltages resulting from power contact
or lightning.
The purpose of bonding and grounding in a telecommunications system is to:
2004 BICSI
Reduce the hazard of electrical shock and damage to structures and equipment from
alternating current (ac) and direct current (dc) voltages and from lightning surges.
Abate the hazardous and damaging effects of lightning and power surge voltages and
currents in telecommunications facilities.
De-energize the power circuit quickly in the event of an accidental contact by causing
operation of power circuit breakers or fuses.
Provide paths to ground for shield currents in metallic cable shields, thereby reducing the
voltages induced in cable conductors.
Reduce noise voltages in sensitive circuitry by providing an effective common reference
point for circuit potentials to which outside induced currents can drain without disturbing
circuit operation.
6-5
MGN and Non-MGN Power Systems

MGN and non-MGN power systems vary in structural design from area to area based on
service needs and economy of the design; however, these systems must be compliant with the
NESC.
MGN power systems are characterized by a neutral conductor, which originates at the
substation and is carried continuously along the primary and secondary circuits to the
subscribers premises. This neutral conductor is grounded at 0.40 km (0.25 mi) intervals.
The top wire is the primary circuit and carries high voltage from the power substation to the
secondary circuits. There may be more than one primary conductor on a line, but the neutral
conductor is always below the primary. In an MGN power system, the neutral conductor is
grounded at each transformer and continues through to the secondary circuits and the
customers premises (see Figure 6.2).
Figure 6.2
MGN power system
Primary
Primary
Primary
Primary
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Approximately 0.40 km
(0.25 mi) separation
between vertical
down leads
Ground rods placed

at base of pole
At every transformer pole in an MGN power system, the neutral conductor is connected to a
ground wire that leads down to the ground electrode at the base of the pole. This wire is
called the vertical down lead (VDL). Approximately every 0.40 km (0.25 mi), even where no
transformers are located, the power company runs a VDL from the ground rod to bond the
primary neutral and secondary neutral for an effective ground.
6-6
2004 BICSI
MGN and Non-MGN Power Systems, continued

The multigrounding of this power system is more common than non-MGN systems (see
Figure 6.3) because over-current devices (e.g., fuses or relay-protection systems) operate
more rapidly due to low impedance ground paths.
NOTE:
The MGN system discussed above is the type of MGN system generally used in
the United States and may vary from area to area.
In cases where aerial runs are installed on a joint-use pole with a non-MGN system, a dedicated telecommunications VDL shall be provided at least every 0.40 km (0.25 mi).
The telecommunications designer should coordinate the use of an MGN as the grounding
source with the power company when placing cables on a joint-use pole line. In these instances, bonding the cable support strand to the MGN should ground both the cable shield and
the cable support strand. This assumes that the cable shield has already been bonded to the
cable support strand. Grounding is accomplished by connecting a bonding conductor from the
support strand to the VDL.
Coordinate bonding and grounding connections to the VDL or MGN with the power company.
Many power companies require that only their qualified employees make these connections.
In cases where the telecommunications pole line intersects at a joint-use pole supporting
power lines, ground the cable support strand by bonding it to the MGN. Midspan crossings of
telecommunications cables and power lines should be avoided if possible. If unavoidable,
buried crossings should be considered. Most power companies will not allow midspan crossings without an attachment.
Figure 6.3
Non-MGN power system
Three primaries
Primary
bushings
Lightning
arrester
Three secondaries
2004 BICSI
6-7

Non-MGN power systems do not utilize a MGN conductor. Two common non-MGN are the:
Unigrounded wye power systemThis system has a neutral ground at a single point in
the power line. Figure 6.4 illustrates a wye power system.
NOTE:
There may not be a neutral conductor carried with the phase conductor.
Figure 6.4
Wye power system
208 V
A
120 V
120 V
208 V
Neutral
208 V
C
Ground
120 V
V = Volt
Delta power systemA delta power system is a 3-legged, nongrounded configuration

with an equal potential between legs. Figure 6.5 illustrates a Delta power system.
Figure 6.5
Delta power system
240 V
240 V
240 V
V = Volt
6-8
2004 BICSI

Non-MGN power systems also vary in structure and appearance. A non-MGN power system
may not have a continuous neutral conductor or pole grounding system.
In a typical non-MGN system, there are two primary feeds; each one is attached to a primary
bushing on the transformer. The transformers secondary tap is grounded to the VDL. There
is no ground connection from the primary of the transformer to the secondary.
NOTE:
The power company can provide information on the type(s) of power system(s)
used in their area.
Bonding Telecommunications and Power Grounds

A bond between power and telecommunications plant must be established using at least a
6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)] bonding conductor.
2004 BICSI
6-9
Bonding Requirements
Aerial Cable Bonding Requirements
Maintaining Electrical Continuity of Shields
It is important that electrical continuity of aerial cable shields be maintained. Bond all connecting direct-buried or underground cable shields to provide a(n):
Ground for lightning and power currents.

Effective noise shield.
Metallic Conductors
The required intervals for bonding the telecommunications support strand to the power system
MGN depend on the power voltages involved.
NOTE:
The bonding and grounding requirements should be reviewed with the power and
access provider (AP) if it is a jointly used pole line.
All connectors and clamps must be listed, rated for outside use, and properly sized to accept
the wire and strand size.
The bonding of telecommunications hardware to power company facilities on aerial plant shall
be performed:
Only by telecommunications personnel on telecommunications cable plant.

In or below the telecommunications pole space.
Only when authorized by the power company.
Telecommunications personnel shall not perform any work within nor climb into the power
space on a pole. Where the connection to the MGN must be made above the telecommunications space, sufficient wire should be coiled and temporarily attached to the pole for later
connection by power company personnel.
Bonding Support Strands to Ground
Suspension strands are bonded to reduce the possibility of electrical shock and to minimize
plant damage.
Grounding and bonding of the suspension strand will:
Limit the voltage on the strand in the event of an accidental contact with energized power
conductors.
De-energize the power circuit quickly in the event of an accidental contact by causing
operation of power circuit breakers or fuses.
Minimize induced voltages that may be on the strand.
Establish and maintain shield continuity of the cable, terminals, and splices.
Bond the strands of separate cables or wires together:
Every 0.40 km (0.25 mi).
At each crossover.
At each branch.
6-10
2004 BICSI
Aerial Cable Bonding Requirements, continued

Bonding Cable Shields to Support Strands
Cable shields should be bonded to support strands at frequent intervals to prevent arcing and
to provide a low impedance ground for power contact or lightning-related surge currents.
Shielded cables should be bonded between the shield and support strand at all splices, terminals, and load points. The method used to bond the shield to the support strand depends on the
types of enclosures.
If a shielded cable is exposed to lightning, the shield should be bonded to the strand every
0.40 km (0.25 mi), usually at splices and terminals.
An example of bonding and grounding the telecommunications support strand is shown in
Figure 6.6.
Figure 6.6
Ground connection on a pole (MGN system)
Coil and tie bonding

conductor to pole
for attachment by
power company.
6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)]
bonding conductor doubled
under strand bond clamp
Staple
Support
strand
6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)]

bonding conductor doubled
under strand bond clamp
Staples
Bonding at Power Crossings

Where possible, aerial telecommunications cable and electric distribution lines should be
crossed on jointly used or occupied poles rather than midspan. At joint pole crossings with
MGN-type power lines, the cable support strand should be connected to the MGN via a VDL.
Span crossings may be used where it is not feasible to have:
2004 BICSI
Joint pole crossings with electric distribution lines.

Aerial crossings with electric transmission lines.
6-11

Bonding in Joint Use or Joint Occupancy
Where the same poles used for MGN electric supply circuits support a telecommunications
cable, the cable shield and support strand should be bonded to the MGN. These bonding
connections should be made:
Where the joint use or joint occupancy arrangement begins and ends.
On every electric supply pole that carries a VDL to which the following are connected:
Transformers
Capacitors
Other types of power equipment that draws load current under normal conditions
If the joint use or joint occupancy section is longer than 0.8 km (0.5 mi), these bonds
should be made to the MGN every 0.40 km (0.25 mi). The NESC requires additional
grounding considerations for certain support strand sizes where the support strands are
exposed to possible power contacts, power induction, or lightning. If the ampacity of the
support strands is not adequate for system grounding conductors, additional bonds must be
made at intervals of 0.20 km (0.12 mi).
Where the same poles used for non-MGN electric supply circuits support a telecommunications cable, shields should be grounded by bonding them to a telecommunications ground
system.
Under certain conditions, it may be necessary to use an additional telecommunications grounding system with ground rods connected to the support strand and cable sheath.
VDL on utility poles interconnected to transformers or capacitor banks should be designed by
power company engineers for direct bonding to the power system neutral. At such locations,
visual inspections from the ground should be made before climbing the pole to determine
whether the VDL is actually connected to the neutral.
WARNING:
If the VDL is not connected to the neutral, the power company should
be informed and the wire regarded as energized. Telecommunications line
workers should not touch or climb the pole until the power company
reconnects the VDL to the neutral.
Where bonding of the support strand and MGN is recommended, the bond should be accomplished by the appropriate method for the conditions prevailing at the pole as listed below:
If the pole already has a VDL connected to the MGN, then a bonding conductor should be
installed by power company personnel.
A bonding conductor should be left with sufficient slack to connect it to the MGN. Connection of the bonding conductor to the MGN should be made only by the power company. For recommended intermediate bonds, a pole already equipped with a VDL should
be selected and a bonding conductor installed.
In most instances, bonding the cable shield to the MGN will reduce noise levels in the telecommunications cable.
6-12
2004 BICSI

Underground/Direct-Buried Cable Dips in Aerial Cable Runs
No special protection is required at junctions of aerial cable and short underground or directburied plastic-sheathed cable dips in aerial cable runs.
AerialUnderground Transitions
If an aerial cable exposed to lightning is connected to a single underground cable that extends
for 300 m (1000 ft) or more before paralleling other cables, ground the aerial cable shield at
the last pole. The shield and supporting strand should be bonded to an MGN vertical down
lead (VDL) if one exists. Otherwise, use a telecommunications ground rod.
Direct-Buried Cable Bonding Requirements
Direct-Buried Plant Exposed to Power
In general, bond wherever cable is specified. The following methods should be used to protect
telecommunications cable direct-buried near power conductors. Protection requirements are
based on the distances between the two systems:
2004 BICSI
Less than 0.91 m (3 ft) separationTo maintain shield continuity in terminals and splice
closures, direct-buried telecommunications cable must be bonded when it is located less
than 0.91 m (3 ft) from a power cable. Bonding must be performed regardless of whether
the cables are in the same or separate trenches.
Additionally:
Telecommunications cable shields should be bonded to the power neutral or to the
power apparatus at all above-ground telecommunications terminals, pedestals, apparatus cases, and direct-buried cable closures located within 1.8 m (6 ft) of any aboveground power apparatus.
For every terminal located near a power transformer, provide a bonding conductor for
connection to either the transformer housing, primary neutral, secondary neutral, or
secondary pedestal served from the transformer. This connection must be installed by
power company personnel.
Grounding should be performed at every other pedestal if no transformer is present
(see Figure 6.7).
The ground shall not be omitted on any two adjacent terminals.
The distance between ground locations shall not exceed 300 m (1000 ft).
No exposed point of the telecommunications cable should be more than 152 m (500 ft)
from a bond connection.
6-13
Direct-Buried Cable Bonding Requirements, continued

Figure 6.7
Grounding without access to transformers
Pedestals
Bond cable
to ground rod.
Bond cable
to ground rod.
Earth
Direct-buried
cable
Place ground rods.

(Length varies with soil conditions
not to exceed 300 m [1000 ft].)
More than 0.91 m (3 ft) separationWhen direct-buried telecommunications cable and

power cable are separated by more than 0.91 m (3 ft), only bonding is required.
Where direct-buried telecommunications cable is separated from direct-buried power cable

with more than 0.91 m (3 ft) of well-tamped earth, the chance for accidental contact with
power conductors is minimal.
Joint Random Direct-Buried Plant
Joint random direct-buried plant is plant direct-buried in the same trench as power conductors
where a minimum 300 mm (12 in) separation has not been maintained. Joint random spacing is
limited to distribution cable that is joint buried. The NESC specifies the voltage limitations in
joint random construction (see NESC, Section 35, Rule 354).
In addition to voltage limitations placed on joint random construction, the NESC specifies that
the power conductors include a bare or semi-conducting, jacketed, grounded conductor in
continuous contact with the earth. An overall insulating jacket with a copper concentric
conductor that is grounded a minimum of eight times per 1.6 km (1 mi) in each random directburied section is required.
Close coordination with the local power company is required.
Methods and Precautions
Bonds must be made using minimum 6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)] solid copper wire and listed
clamps. Convenient bonding locations should be chosen to minimize the length of the bonding
wire.
Maintain cable shield bond continuity of all telecommunications plants.
6-14
2004 BICSI
Underground Cable Bonding Requirements

Metallic Conductors
Telecommunications and power facilities occupy separate structures in an underground plant;
therefore, underground metallic conductor cables are not exposed to power contact.
Bonding cables in telecommunications maintenance holes (MHs) reduces the overall
resistance to ground and equalizes the potentials between the cables. Equalizing the potentials
between cables protects personnel by reducing the possibility of shock hazards and minimizes
plant damage.
Cables used in the underground conduit system have either an outer metallic sheath or a
plastic sheath. Generally, cables with an outer metallic sheath are bonded at each MH, while
cables with an outer plastic sheath are bonded at MHs where a splice is made.
In some instances, when cables are exposed because of aerial to underground OSP
(e.g., cable dip) extensions, the following guidelines should be applied:
2004 BICSI
Establish and maintain continuity of all metallic cable elements.

Nonmetallic splice case bonding connections, as well as lead sleeves and metallic splice
cases, should be connected to the MH grounding system at every MH.
Plastic sheath cables do not need to be bonded at pull-through MHs.
6-15
Maintenance Hole (MH) Bonding and Grounding

To bond and ground monolithic (site-poured) MHs, follow the same procedures used in
precast MHs. If these procedures are not followed, a driven ground rod and associated
bonding ribbon is required (see Figures 6.8 through 6.10).
Figure 6.8
Welded bonding attachment to rebar for site-poured maintenance hole
Welded
Grade 60
new billet
steel rebar
Bonding
ribbon
Concrete
Bonding
ribbon
connector
Figure 6.9
Clamped bonding attachment to rebar for precast or site-poured maintenance hole
(In concrete)
Brass ground clamp
Bonding ribbon
Rebar
To wall inserts
6-16
2004 BICSI
Maintenance Hole Bonding and Grounding, continued

Figure 6.10
Interior bonding and grounding for racking
Copper
ground wire
1.8 m (6 ft)
Concrete
inserts
Sump
Ground rod
Concrete in earth tends to draw moisture from the soil and maintain its own water content.
This condition accounts for its consistent low resistivity even under desert conditions. Ground
identification plates must be used either in precast or site-poured MHs.
Figure 6.11 illustrates how splice closures within a MH are bonded and grounded.
Figure 6.12 also shows the bonding of metallic members within the MH.
Figure 6.11
Underground cable bonding
Telecommunications
cable
Maintenance hole
bonding ribbon
Splice closures
Maintenance hole
ground system
Cable
racks
2004 BICSI
6-17
Maintenance Hole Bonding and Grounding, continued

When a splice occurs in an MH, the metallic strength member and other metallic sheath
components of the cables must be bonded to the MH grounding system. All closures should
also be bonded to the MH ground. No bonding is required in handholes (HHs) and MHs when
the cable is pulled through without a splice.
Figure 6.12
Maintenance hole bonding
Side view of 2-piece precast maintenance hole
Cable
rack
Bonding
ribbon
Seam between
top and bottom
section of MH
Sump
Ground rod
MH
NOTE:
Maintenance hole
Bonding ribbon is clamped or welded to embedded steel at the time of casting. Bond
connection for splice cases, cables, etc., is established with use of vertical bonding
ribbon. At time of cable rack installation, attach bonding ribbon.
Building Entrance Protection

All exposed telecommunications cables that contain metallic components (e.g., metallic shield,
metallic strength member, or metallic pair) require some form of electrical protection at the
building entrance, including:
Bonding and grounding of cable metallic sheath components and metallic strength
members.
Installation of protectors to metallic pairs, along with fuse links, where required.
Air pressure pipe that is exposed and is metallic or contains a metallic vapor barrier also
requires bonding and grounding. At locations where air pressure equipment is connected
to the air feeder pipe, connect the metallic lining of the pipe to the MH grounding system.
6-18
2004 BICSI
Building Entrance Protection, continued

The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) is the location within a building
where all grounding conductors are connected to the earth electrode (see ANSI-J-STD607-A, Commercial Building Grounding [Earthing] and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications). Bonding and grounding is performed to maintain potential
equalization between the:
Equipment ground.
Power ground.
Metallic cable sheath components.
Cable metallic strength members.
Main cross-connect ground.
The metallic sheath components and metallic strength members of all cables entering the
building must be connected to the TMGB.
When buildings are served by exposed cables:
Ground entrance cable shields as close to the entrance as possible.

Use fire-resistant splice cases for all splices of entrance cables.
Ground the protector or protected cable terminal using a minimum 6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16
in)] copper ground wire, to the TMGB.
Protector ground, power ground, and interior metallic water pipe system must be bonded
together.
Corrosion and Noncorrosion Areas

When there are no insulating joints, use 6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)] copper wire or bonding
ribbon to bond entrance cable metallic sheath components and strength members to the
TMGB.
Insulating joints (isolation gaps) may be required in certain areas where cable corrosion is a
problem such as in the vicinity of dc trolley and rail systems or pipeline cathodic protection
systems. These joints do not provide protection against hazardous voltages.
WARNING:
Cathodic protection systems are used to provide a constant low current

connection to various metallic ducts or other metallic structures in order to
mitigate galvanic corrosion of the structures. Although the cathodic
protection system may provide the appearance of a ground connection, it
may not be used as part of the buildings grounding electrode system. The
designer must not attach the telecommunications grounding and bonding
system to such a cathodic protection system.
In a noncorrosion (low-risk) area, the sheaths or shields of all OSP cables must be bonded
with 6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)] copper wire or bonding ribbon to the telecommunications
grounding system.
2004 BICSI
6-19
Building Entrance Protection, continued

In a corrosion (high-risk) area:
Install insulating joints or isolation gaps on all cables entering a building. The purpose of
these kind of joints is to separate the building ground from the outside plant ground, and to
prevent the flow of currents that may cause electrolytic corrosion.
For cables that are exposed to lightning inductive interference or power contact, use isolation
gaps as follows:
Bond the OSP sides of shields or sheaths, and isolate them from the telecommunications
ground system. Figure 6.13 shows the configuration of an isolation joint.
Figure 6.13
Isolation gap
Isolation gap
Isolation joint
When insulating joints are used:
Bridge insulating joints on exposed cables with decoupling capacitors to minimize coupled
noise.
Use 6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)] copper wire or bonding ribbon on the outside of the
insulating joint to bond the metallic sheath components and strength members of all
entering cables (paired conductor and optical fiber). Cables and all associated metal
(i.e., elements) must be isolated from all grounded objects such as building steel, equipment, and racks on the OSP side of the insulating joint.
Locate insulating joints as near as possible to the point of entry.
On the building side of the insulating joint, use a minimum of 6 AWG [4.1 mm (0.16 in)]
copper wire or bonding ribbon to bond the metallic sheath components and strength
members of all cables to the TMGB.
6-20
2004 BICSI
Protectors
There are two general types of protector housings: fused and fuseless. All fuseless protector
housings are equipped with voltage-limiting devices (e.g., carbon blocks, gas tubes, or solidstate components).
Fuseless Protector Housing
Fuseless protectors do not offer protection for sustained fault current like fused protectors.
When used in conjunction with fuseless protectors where power exposure exists, a fuse link is
required between exposed plant and the protector in order to minimize any fire or shock
hazard in the event of a sustained power contact.
Fused Protector Housing
Fuse links may not protect a connecting cable from lightning exposure because the operating
(time-current) characteristics of fuse links of any type could allow lightning surges to pass
through the fuse without operating it.
Fused protectors are required when:
No fuse link has been provided, as in the following examples:

Direct-buried drop wire is connected to 19 AWG [0.91 mm (0.036 in)] or 22 AWG
[0.64 mm (0.025)] conductors of joint direct-buried plant, and the protector is located
on an exterior wall or within the building being served.
Drop wire is run more than one span on joint-use poles with power and is not shielded
by a grounded strand or grounded conductor.
A portion of a service wire is jointly trenched with power distribution cables greater than
300 V to ground.
Fuseless protectors should only be installed with a fusible link.

NOTE:
2004 BICSI
Fusible links are current-limiting devices. Fuseless protectors (e.g., carbon, gas tube,
or solid state) are voltage-limiting devices.
6-21
Fuse Links
Fuse links are shorter sections of finer (larger AWG number) gauge cable than normally
required for transmission purposes. In the event of prolonged current flows caused by foreign
potentials (e.g., power contacts), fuse links burn open, protecting terminating equipment or
cabling.
The protector stubs, or internal protector wiring, should be at least two gauges finer than the
entrance cable. For transmission reasons, fuse links should be as short as possible. However,
a minimum of 0.6 m (2.0 ft) of fuse link is required.
Protector Units
Protector units limit the voltage difference between conductors and ground by providing a
low impedance path to ground when the operating voltage of the protector unit is reached.
Protector units are required on all exposed circuits entering the building; this includes tip and
ring conductors contained in conventional paired conductor cables and those in hybrid cables.
The following list outlines some of the more common devices used to prevent damage to
equipment and personnel for exposed OSP facilities:
Air gap discharge protectorsFeatures a carbon air gap and fail-safe mechanism that
shorts to ground when a voltage exceeds its rating.
Gas tube protectorsGenerally contains a two or three electrode high amperage ceramic
nonradioactive gas-tube arrestor and a fail-safe mechanism. These are used in areas
where frequent transient overvoltages are a problem or where operating values must be
tightly controlled. This type of protector will recover repeatedly from the overvoltage and
provide 30 to 40 times longer life than carbon air-gap protectors.
Solid state protectorsContains diodes intended for use with sensitive equipment. They
can be equipped with heat coils of varying values. The diode is a fast semiconductor
switch with operating voltages nearly independent of transient rise time. It can operate
repeatedly and provides longer protection life than either carbon air gap or gas-tube
protectors.
Current-interrupting devices (fusing)Overcurrent protective units with a circuit-opening
fusible element that is severed when heated by the passage of an overcurrent. They are
normally one-time devices.
Isolating transformersThese units have no direct electrical connection between the
primary and secondary sides.
6-22
2004 BICSI
Primary and Secondary Protector Units

The designer should consider providing both primary overvoltage protection and secondary
overcurrent protection for exposed OSP twisted-pair copper cables. The NEC requires
primary protection for cables considered exposed to lightning, power line crosses, or accidental power contact. Secondary protection should also be considered to protect equipment from
sneak currents typically defined as continuous foreign current exceeding 0.35 amperes.
Typically, sneak currents are not high enough to engage primary protectors but can cause
damage to equipment and can present a fire hazard if the current is sustained.
Fast response secondary protectors conforming to Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
497A, Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits, should be installed in series
between the primary protectors and the switching equipment at the main building and between
the primary protectors and the station equipment at the remote buildings. These protection
devices can consist of overcurrent limiting heat coils or sneak current fuses.
NOTE:
Per the NEC, secondary protectors on exposed circuits are not intended for use
without primary protectors. Overcurrent conditions are caused by a low impedance
connection to ground, power line contact (either direct or indirect), or via a line short
circuit.
It is permissible (and preferred) to utilize an assembly that integrates both primary and
secondary overvoltage and overcurrent protection rather than create two protector fields. For
example, a single protection assembly that uses modules having both current and fast response
voltage suppression capability, and that meet safety requirements for primary and secondary
protection, would protect both personnel and equipment.
It is recommended that protector modules be equipped with in-service test points so that faulty
or blown modules can be determined without accidentally disengaging a working circuit when
determining whether the fuse module has operated or not.
2004 BICSI
6-23
Grounding for Lightning Protection

Soil Resistance
The goal of any grounding system is to provide a low-impedance path for fault currents until
they reach the earth. When considering the grounding conditions at any site, it is essential to
test soil resistivity. In general, black dirt, or soils with high organic content, are usually very
good conductors because they tend to retain more moisture, leading to low resistivity. Sandy
soils, which drain faster, tend to be less moist and are therefore higher in resistivity. Solid rock
and volcanic ash have virtually no moisture and have such high resistivity as to be practically
useless as a grounding material.
Ground Resistance
Ground resistance is usually measured with an instrument called a megger. A megger consists
of:
A voltage source.
Switches that change the instruments measurement range.
Grounding system installers may be required to measure or otherwise determine the ground
resistance of the system they have installed. The NEC (2002), Section 250-56, requires a
single electrode consisting of a rod, pipe, or plate that does not have a resistance to ground of
25 ohm or less to be augmented by one additional electrode of the types listed in the NEC
(2002), Section 250.52(A)(2) through Section 250.52(A)(7). Multiple electrodes should always
be installed so that they are at least 1.8 m (6 ft) apart. Spacing electrodes at distances greater
than 1.8 m (6ft) increases rod efficiency. Proper spacing and quantity of the electrodes
ensures the maximum amount of fault current that can be safely discharged into the earth.
To properly design a grounding system, the earth resistivity should be measured. Several
measurement methods can be used:
Four-point method
Variation in-depth method (three-point method)
Two-point method
The four-point method is most accurate.

NOTE:
Instructions for setting up and making these measurements are included with the
testing equipment.
6-24
2004 BICSI
Obtaining a 25-Ohm Ground

A ground at every location with a resistance-to-ground of 25 ohm or less cannot always be
accomplished with a 1.5 m (5 ft) ground rod. Instead, it may be necessary to use a longer rod
or to connect multiple rods. This is especially true in areas with extremely high resistivity. In
areas where the winter frost line exceeds 457 mm (18 in) or more, the use of 2.4 m (8 ft) rods
should be made standard practice.
NOTE:
25 ohm ground is a safety requirement and has nothing to do with system

performance. Some system performance requirements can only be met by less
than 1 ohm impedance to ground. The National Security Agency (NSA) specifies
0.000025 ohm impedance to ground. For additional information, visit their Web site
at www.nsa.gov.
Bonding Electrodes
Types of electrodes include:
Solid copper.
Copper-clad steel.
Plain steel.
Galvanized steel.
Stainless-clad steel.
Solid stainless steel.
When selecting the type of electrode to use, the designer should consider:
The soil chemistry.

Any nearby electrically bonded structures.
Whether the electrode is installed in a corrosive area.
Soil with a high sulfur content may cause copper to corrode.

Any direct-buried steel items connected to a copper grounding system will corrode due to the
galvanic action between the copper and the steel. The rate of galvanic corrosion depends on
the ratio of exposed copper and steel areas. The higher the ratio of copper exposed to steel,
the greater the rate of corrosion. Coating steel to protect it can make corrosion worse since
there will probably be at least one unprotected area. With only a small steel area exposed, the
copper to steel ratio is high and all the corrosion takes place at the small area of unprotected
steel and at a much higher rate than if the steel were uncoated.
Steel ground rods are often used to prevent the galvanic corrosion possible with copper rods.
To protect the steel, the rods are usually galvanized (zinc coated). The zinc creates a galvanic
cell with any nearby, bonded steel, with the zinc being the anode and thus sacrificing itself to
protect the steel.
Any dc equipment operating in the area can cause severe corrosion on the grounding system.
An example of this may be a dc transit system substation. The large amounts of stray dc
currents possible can cause severe corrosion of any nearby steel that may be part of the
return circuit and grounding system. Some transit systems use a stainless steel grounding
system in their substations.
2004 BICSI
6-25
Reducing Resistivity
In the absence of low-resistance soil conditions, there are other options for improving
conductivity. These include filling the ground rod hole with bentonite, treating the soil with
a salt (copper magnesium sulfate or rock salt), or using ground enhancement material.
Chemical Electrodes
Some installations specify a very low resistance, often lower than what is easily obtainable
using multiple rods, deep driven rods, or long direct-buried grounding conductors. In these
instances, it may be necessary to select a chemical-type electrode.
Chemical-type electrodes are copper tubes containing a salt that slowly leaches into the soil,
lowering the soils resistance and possibly contaminating the soil; however, non-contaminating
materials, generally referred to as ground enhancement materials, are available. Bentonite, a
form of clay, is a common ground enhancement material. To use bentonite, a hole is drilled into
the earth. The ground rod or conductor is then placed into the hole and the bentonite added,
usually in dry form.
Bentonite will absorb up to five times its weight in water and increase up to 13 times its dry
volume, obtaining moisture from the surrounding soil. This creates exceptional contact between
the rod or conductor and the soil. Bentonites ideal moisture content is three times its weight in
water, at which time its resistivity will be approximately 2500 ohm-mm (100 ohm-in). Although
bentonitess resistivity is much higher than that of the grounding rod, it is much lower than that
of the surrounding soil. Therefore, in effect, bentonite increases the effective diameter of
the rod.
Using Ground Enhancement Material
Other ground enhancement materials are available commercially, some with a resistivity of
less than 120 ohm-mm (4.7 ohm-in [less than five percent of the resistivity of bentonite]).
This material can be used dry or, when premixed with water, hardens like concrete. Ground
enhancement materials are permanent and will not leach any chemicals into the soil. They
can be used to surround a rod or conductor in a drilled hole, or may be used to surround a
conductor in a trench.
Ground enhancement material improves grounding effectiveness regardless of soil conditions
and is ideal for areas with high resistance, such as rocky ground, mountain tops, and sandy soil.
Ground enhancement material can be installed wet or dry.
6-26
2004 BICSI
Reducing Resistivity, continued

Advantages of Ground Enhancement Material
Ground enhancement material has many advantages over bentonite and rock salt. Unlike rock
salt, it does not require periodic charging treatments or replacement. And, because it is
chemically stable and very low in sulfate and chloride, it protects ground conductors from
corrosion instead of attacking them like salts do. Once set, it maintains high conductivity in
wet or dry conditions. Ground enhancement material meets environmental requirements for
landfill.
Ground enhancement material may be used where ground rods cannot be driven, or where
limited land area makes adequate grounding difficult with conventional methods. Although it
costs more initially than standard fill materials such as bentonite, only a small amount is
needed, so the size of the grounding array can be reduced dramatically.
Ideal Conditions
Even under ideal circumstances, soil structure can vary and make it difficult to achieve
uniform, low levels of resistivity across a wide area. However, with ground enhancement
material, the results can be a lot more predictable because it offers:
Reduction in earth resistance that remains for the life of the system even during dry
seasons.
Wet or dry installation.
Test-proven resistivity of 120 ohm-mm (4.7 ohm-in) or less.
Maintenance-free grounding.
In summary, ground enhancement materials improve grounding system performance.

Concrete-Encased Electrode
This type of ground uses a non-insulated ground wire (no finer than 4 AWG [5.2 mm (0.20 in)]
encased along the bottom of a concrete building foundation footing in direct contact with the
earth. The length of the conductors run inside the concrete is important, as the effective
resistance is inversely proportional to the length of conductor within the concrete.
Typically, a 6 m (20 ft) run3 m (10 ft) in each directiongives a 5 ohm ground in 1000
ohm-m (3300 ohm-ft) soil conditions.
Building Exterior Grounds
When effectively grounded, columns around the perimeter of a building are excellent
grounding electrodes and provide a good path to the earth for any fault currents that may
be imposed on the system. When grounding large or multiple-building facilities, perimeter
grounding provides an equipotential ground for all the building and equipment bonded to the
perimeter ground. The grounding conductor size depends on the size of the electrical service.
2004 BICSI
6-27
Concrete-Encased Electrode, continued

Cable to Electrode Connections
According to the NEC (2002), Article 250-8, Grounding conductors and bonding jumpers shall
be connected by exothermic welding, listed pressure connectors, listed clamps, or other listed
means. Connection devices or fittings that depend solely on solder shall not be used. Sheet
metal screws shall not be used to connect grounding conductors to enclosures.
Exothermic welding is the most permanent method of making cable-to-ground rod or
small-sized cable-to-cable connections. An exothermic system is the most convenient process
for achieving welded ground connections. The resulting molecular bond produces a permanent
connection that will not loosen or corrode over the lifetime of the installation.
The exothermic system makes fast, positive grounds without any outside power source or
heat. Connections are made by powdered metals (copper oxide and aluminum) within a mold
by using a flint lighter to ignite the powdered metal. Once the connection is made, the ceramic
mold can be left intact or broken off, revealing a permanent connection made in less than five
minutes.
6-28
2004 BICSI
Electrical Protection in Tunnels

Protecting metallic telecommunications cabling plant and personnel from hazardous
electrical effects is particularly important in joint-use utility tunnels. Electrical protection
requirements of other utilities may be similar in many ways, but the overall susceptibility
of telecommunications facilities to induced voltages and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
influence the requirements. Acceptable electrical protection for telecommunications
installments should:
Maintain adequate separation between metallic telecommunications cable and electrical

power facilities to prevent accidental contact between the telecommunications and
electrical plant.
Yield a facility where there is no possibility of accidental contact with energized electrical
power facilities.
Maintain separation and/or shielding between metallic telecommunications and electrical
plant to ensure that voltages hazardous to either workers or plant are not induced into the
telecommunications facilities.
Ground and bond the telecommunications facilities to the electrical facilities to prevent a
hazardous potential difference from developing between various surfaces that workers
may contact during normal work operations.
Protective conduit is generally not used for telecommunications cabling. Using conduit
reduces access required for inspection, maintenance, and random location of splices.
Because flame spreads easily in a tunnel, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit should never be
used. Power cables can dissipate heat more effectively when exposed to air than when
enclosed in conduit. Evaluate each situation based on its particular characteristics. Where
possible, telecommunications and electrical facilities should be placed on opposite sides of the
tunnel. In some cases, this placement eliminates the need for additional shielding of the power
or telecommunications cables and reduces the effects of EMI.
Spacing Between Bonding Points
When determining the spacing between bonding points in a tunnel there is no general, practical
rule. Many factors must be considered. For example, cables placed in a tunnel will not be
subjected to the lightning hazard of aerial plant. Therefore, less frequent bonding points are
required than in aerial plant. In some cases (when entering utility facilities that may carry
lightning currents), bonding at the access and equipment areas may be adequate. Provide a
common grounded bonding conductor throughout the tunnel.
2004 BICSI
6-29
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

Three major components of electromagnetic-induced interference problems that relate to
metallic telecommunications transmission facilities placed in a joint-use utility tunnel with a
power system, are the:
Unbalanced electromagnetic fields of the power system.

Coupling between the power and telecommunications systems.
Susceptibility of the telecommunications system.
The magnitude of the power line influence is determined by the magnitude of the:
Unbalanced current being transmitted.

Physical configuration of the line.
If large enough, voltages induced into a telecommunications plant can create personnel safety
hazards and service problems. The harmonics of 60 Hz (particularly the odd triples such as
540 Hz and 900 Hz) produce circuit noise and can interfere with normal equipment operation.
This is especially true of electronic equipment designed to operate at low signal levels.
Methods of minimizing the power system influence include using well balanced, three-phase
systems and filters to reduce the harmonics.
Mutual Impedance
The coupling or mutual impedance between power and metallic telecommunications facilities
is a function of the:
Physical separation between them.

Length (in meters/feet) of exposure.
Resistance of the return path for the unbalanced current.
Power and telecommunications line shielding effectiveness.
In a tunnel, using shielding on either facility (where appropriate) can reduce coupling.
The separation requirement overshadows other utilities requirements; therefore, metallic
telecommunications cables should be placed at maximum separation from power cables.
Two characteristics of the telecommunications circuit that determine susceptibility or extent to
which the circuit is adversely affected by inductive fields are the:
Amount of shielding provided by the telecommunications cable sheath or by other

grounded conductors.
Balance of the telecommunications circuit.
6-30
2004 BICSI
Concrete-Encased Electrode, continued

Cable to Electrode Connections
According to the NEC (2002), Article 250-8, Grounding conductors and bonding jumpers shall
be connected by exothermic welding, listed pressure connectors, listed clamps, or other listed
means. Connection devices or fittings that depend solely on solder shall not be used. Sheet
metal screws shall not be used to connect grounding conductors to enclosures.
Exothermic welding is the most permanent method of making cable-to-ground rod or
small-sized cable-to-cable connections. An exothermic system is the most convenient process
for achieving welded ground connections. The resulting molecular bond produces a permanent
connection that will not loosen or corrode over the lifetime of the installation.
The exothermic system makes fast, positive grounds without any outside power source or
heat. Connections are made by powdered metals (copper oxide and aluminum) within a mold
by using a flint lighter to ignite the powdered metal. Once the connection is made, the ceramic
mold can be left intact or broken off, revealing a permanent connection made in less than five
minutes.
6-28
2004 BICSI
Electrical Protection in Tunnels

Protecting metallic telecommunications cabling plant and personnel from hazardous
electrical effects is particularly important in joint-use utility tunnels. Electrical protection
requirements of other utilities may be similar in many ways, but the overall susceptibility
of telecommunications facilities to induced voltages and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
influence the requirements. Acceptable electrical protection for telecommunications
installments should:
Maintain adequate separation between metallic telecommunications cable and electrical

power facilities to prevent accidental contact between the telecommunications and
electrical plant.
Yield a facility where there is no possibility of accidental contact with energized electrical
power facilities.
Maintain separation and/or shielding between metallic telecommunications and electrical
plant to ensure that voltages hazardous to either workers or plant are not induced into the
telecommunications facilities.
Ground and bond the telecommunications facilities to the electrical facilities to prevent a
hazardous potential difference from developing between various surfaces that workers
may contact during normal work operations.
Protective conduit is generally not used for telecommunications cabling. Using conduit
reduces access required for inspection, maintenance, and random location of splices.
Because flame spreads easily in a tunnel, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit should never be
used. Power cables can dissipate heat more effectively when exposed to air than when
enclosed in conduit. Evaluate each situation based on its particular characteristics. Where
possible, telecommunications and electrical facilities should be placed on opposite sides of the
tunnel. In some cases, this placement eliminates the need for additional shielding of the power
or telecommunications cables and reduces the effects of EMI.
Spacing Between Bonding Points
When determining the spacing between bonding points in a tunnel there is no general, practical
rule. Many factors must be considered. For example, cables placed in a tunnel will not be
subjected to the lightning hazard of aerial plant. Therefore, less frequent bonding points are
required than in aerial plant. In some cases (when entering utility facilities that may carry
lightning currents), bonding at the access and equipment areas may be adequate. Provide a
common grounded bonding conductor throughout the tunnel.
2004 BICSI
6-29
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

Three major components of electromagnetic-induced interference problems that relate to
metallic telecommunications transmission facilities placed in a joint-use utility tunnel with a
power system, are the:
Unbalanced electromagnetic fields of the power system.

Coupling between the power and telecommunications systems.
Susceptibility of the telecommunications system.
The magnitude of the power line influence is determined by the magnitude of the:
Unbalanced current being transmitted.

Physical configuration of the line.
If large enough, voltages induced into a telecommunications plant can create personnel safety
hazards and service problems. The harmonics of 60 Hz (particularly the odd triples such as
540 Hz and 900 Hz) produce circuit noise and can interfere with normal equipment operation.
This is especially true of electronic equipment designed to operate at low signal levels.
Methods of minimizing the power system influence include using well balanced, three-phase
systems and filters to reduce the harmonics.
Mutual Impedance
The coupling or mutual impedance between power and metallic telecommunications facilities
is a function of the:
Physical separation between them.

Length (in meters/feet) of exposure.
Resistance of the return path for the unbalanced current.
Power and telecommunications line shielding effectiveness.
In a tunnel, using shielding on either facility (where appropriate) can reduce coupling.
The separation requirement overshadows other utilities requirements; therefore, metallic
telecommunications cables should be placed at maximum separation from power cables.
Two characteristics of the telecommunications circuit that determine susceptibility or extent to
which the circuit is adversely affected by inductive fields are the:
Amount of shielding provided by the telecommunications cable sheath or by other

grounded conductors.
Balance of the telecommunications circuit.
6-30
2004 BICSI
Chapter 7
This chapter includes additional information on the
applicability and design of buried and underground airpressure systems, as well as the use of nitrogen bottles
as buffers. New graphics show buffering arrangement
at a splice point.
Table of Contents
Air-Pressure Systems ............................................................................................................ 7-1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Air Feeder Pipe ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
Air Dryers ......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Manifold Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 7-4
Automatic Shutoff Valve ................................................................................................................... 7-4
Pressure Transducer Unit ................................................................................................................. 7-5
Cable Pressure Monitoring Systems ................................................................................................ 7-7
Standard Operating Environment ..................................................................................................... 7-8
Air Pipe Manifold Spacing .......................................................................................................... 7-9
Optimum Air Usage (OAU) Calculations .................................................................................. 7-10
Design Stick Maps ................................................................................................................... 7-10
Buried Design .......................................................................................................................... 7-11
Aerial Design ............................................................................................................................ 7-12
Device Logs ............................................................................................................................. 7-13
Buffering Information ................................................................................................................ 7-13
2004 BICSI
7-i
Figures
Figure 7.1
Air dryer showing door opened ........................................................................................... 7-3
Figure 7.2
Manifold assembly and shutoff valve .................................................................................. 7-4
Figure 7.3
Transducer housing mounted on framing channels ............................................................ 7-5
Figure 7.4
Example of pressure transducer installation ...................................................................... 7-6
Figure 7.5
Flow transducer ................................................................................................................. 7-7
Figure 7.6
Typical air-pressure schematic design ............................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7.7
Typical schematic of air-pressure system ........................................................................ 7-10
Figure 7.8
Example of buried cable leaving underground .................................................................. 7-11
Figure 7.9
Underground to aerial interface ........................................................................................ 7-12
Figure 7.10
Buffering arrangement at a splice .................................................................................... 7-13
Table
Table 7.1
Typical minimum pressure ............................................................................................... 7-8
7-ii
2004 BICSI
Introduction
Air-pressure systems are used to protect air-core cables from water and other liquid
contaminants that could be introduced through sheath cracks, breaks, or leaky splice
closures. They subject the inner core of the cable under the outer sheath to a dry (low water
content), constant pressure air source and may extend the life of a cable plant. Though
generally used in underground conduit systems, air-pressure systems may also be used in
direct-buried and aerial plants.
Air-pressure systems shall be maintained in order to ensure service integrity. Extensions on
existing systems may appear to be cost-efficient; however, new (initial) outside plant (OSP)
designs that require the use of air-pressure systems should be avoided because they require
substantial maintenance. In addition, there are alternate and more reliable plant designs
available.
The evolution of technology has provided for more effective cable construction, where
the sheath has higher integrity, and the core of the cable itself contains materials that are
resistant to water penetration. Consequently, many owners of air-core cable that is
protected by air-pressure systems are actively removing that type cable as they provide
route relief or facility upgrades. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant
Telecommunications Cabling Standard, provides suggestions and information for those
customers that are maintaining existing air-pressure systems. The standard requires that
all air core cables placed in subsurface pathways be pressurized. A recommendation for
venting of aerial cables is also included.
Generally, new OSP cabling systems are designed to eliminate the need for introduction of
air-pressure systems. The number and extent of legacy air systems are diminishing. The
economics of continually investing in monitoring systems and air pressure paraphernalia, the
cost of deploying technicians to maintain target pressure levels, versus the availability of
alternatives combine to make the expansion of networks that use air pressure unattractive.
Still, the amount of air-core cable that is in servicewhether aerial, underground, or
buriedrepresents a sizable capital investment. An effective program that uses air pressure
to minimize troubles and to protect an investment can still return value during the remaining
useful life of the cabling system.
A method using a pipe system for cable pressurization is essentially a configuration that
applies air pressure through an air pipe to cables. Air pressure is also supplied at selected
maintenance holes (MHs) or handholes (HHs) along an underground cable route. This is
accomplished by connecting individual cables to a paralleling air-feeder pipe that carries
pressurized dry air from an air source. The flow resistance of the pipe is low with typical
pressure drops of 14-21 kPa (2-3 psi) over several kilometers (e.g., 5 km [3 mi]) from the
sources.
2004 BICSI
7-1
The components of a complete air-pressure system vary with the configuration and design
requirements. The assembly units for a typical system are:
Air pipe (feeder, distribution).
Air dryer (compressor, dehydrator).
Manifold assembly.
Automatic shutoff valve.
Pressure transducer unit.
Cable pressure monitoring system.
Air-Feeder Pipe
An air-feeder pipe is a tube that is used as the basic dry air artery in pipe systems. Typically,
the pipe:
Is aluminum lined.
Is constructed of black polyethylene.
Has an approximate inside diameter (ID) of 15 mm (0.6 in).
Has an approximate outside diameter (OD) of 19 mm (0.75 in).
Weighs approximately 3.6 kg per 30 m (8 lb per 100 ft). Shipped from the factory under
pressure, air feeder pipe is typically available in reel lengths of 600 to 1070 m (2000 to
3510 ft). It can be hand-formed to a 125 mm (5 in) radius for installation. The maximum
allowable pulling stress for the pipe is 68 kg (150 lb).
IMPORTANT: Overstressing can shear the bond between the aluminum

and the polyethylene.
Additionally, air-feeder pipe with mechanical protection for additional strength is available in
the same internal dimensions as the above-mentioned pipe. This pipe is used in underground
or direct-buried applications for added protection against rodents.
7-2
2004 BICSI
Air Dryers
Air dryers (see Figure 7.1) are the initial dry air source. They generate the required air
pressure that is fed through the manifold system and into the cables. Air dryers can also be
placed in remote field locations. These remote dryers are designed to extend air pressure to
the points in the system where the main unit cannot sustain pressure requirements.
A dual dryer system at the MC (CD) will ensure air pressure to the cables. An automatic
transfer switch will ensure that the idle dryer will activate should the on-line dryer fail.
Figure 7.1
Air dryer showing door opened
Master
stop-start
switch
Lifting lug
Refrigeration
thermostat
Heat exchanger
temperature gauge
High-pressure
gauge
Output pressure
regulator
Gel-fill plug
Humidity-sensing
element
Main gel tower
Reserve
gel tower
Gel drain plug
Air compressor
Refrigeration
compressor
Fan guard
Condensate tank
drain valve
Damper
(in stored position)
Heater guard
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
The air dryer shown is representative of units that could be in the field. Check
manufacturer for current product.
7-3
Manifold Assembly
A manifold assembly is a unit that facilitates the connection between the air dryer and OSP
cables. A manifold is usually equipped with an automatic shutoff valve and could have a
number of ports for attaching air pipes to cables. One of the more commonly used units has
five ports, threaded pipe connections, and individual valves to measure pressure to each
cable.
Automatic Shutoff Valve
An automatic shutoff valve is essentially a check valve that is connected in the dry air line
between the air-feeder pipe and the manifold assembly, at each manifold location. If there is a
pipe failure, the shutoff valve protects underground cables from abnormal air loss by closing
the air connection to the manifold. The valve will close if there is a condition causing reverse
airflow. When the pipe pressure builds up to 2 kPa (0.3 psi) above the manifold or cable
pressure, the valve will reopen.
If the air-pressure system and manifold assembly are in a MH, it is necessary to bond all
manifold assembly units to the permanent MH ground.
All aerial assembly units shall be grounded. All aerial feeder pipe shall be bonded at the first,
the last, and every fifth pole (see Figure 7.2).
Figure 7.2
Manifold assembly and shutoff valve
Valve for testing

pipe pressure
Manifold assembly
Valve for testing

manifold pressure
Valve for
testing
individual
cable
pressure
Connection
for tubing from
pipe line
Automatic
shutoff valve
9.5 mm (3/8 in)

Threaded pipe
plastic tubing to
individual cable
7-4
2004 BICSI
Pressure Transducer Unit

Activated by air pressure, a pressure transducer unit is a stepped switch instrument that
converts cable pressure to electrical resistance. The transducer measures pressure in
3.4 kPa (0.5 psi) increments with corresponding resistance values from 100K ohms to
3.82M ohms and is capable of measuring pressures in a 0 to 65 kPa (0.0 to 9.5 psi) range.
The unit connects from the electrical side of the housing via cable pairs and is spliced into
one of the cables feeding back to the monitoring station. It transmits all data regarding airflow
logistics at that point back to a monitoring panel.
A cable pressure monitoring system can be accessed from an administration monitoring
location (see Figures 7.3 and 7.4, respectively).
Figure 7.3
Transducer housing mounted on framing channels
Framing channels anchored to masonry

Underground pressure transducer
Remove plug
to expose zero
adjustment screw.
Blank
cover
plate
To cable or equipment
to be monitored
2004 BICSI
7-5
Pressure Transducer Unit, continued

Figure 7.4
Example of pressure transducer installation
Pressure
transducer
housings
Plastic tubing to
cable or pipe
Framing channel
Underground
pressure
transducer
Transducer
housing
stub cables
Junction box
Pressure
testing
valve
Junction
box stub
cable
Framing channel
Stub cable fitting
Splice closure
7-6
2004 BICSI
Cable Pressure Monitoring Systems

Cable pressure monitoring systems have evolved significantly over the years. Early versions
used on/off contacts that could be set to alarm once a certain pressure threshold occurred.
A triggered alarm indicated failure to hold the specified pressure. The alarm amounted to
an on/off indicator, and did not provide information about the dynamics of the system (i.e.,
whether there was a slow leak or whether there was an imminent failure about to happen).
Current models offer a microprocessor-based device that continuously monitors the airflow
at meter panels and pipe alarms at the monitoring station. They provide surveillance of total
airflow from the panels or manifolds to the pressurized cable network, including air pipes.
Measuring airflow is the best indicator of a pressurization systems condition. Properly
analyzing changes in air consumption aids in identifying the most damaging system leaks and
provides the basis for prioritizing both cable and pressure system maintenance.
Airflow can be monitored for multiple pipe alarms as a stand-alone system. This can be
reported to a remote monitoring location by the use of signal wires within the cable sheath.
A flow transducer (see Figure 7.5) provides precise flow measurements in both standard
cubic meters per hour (m3/h), cubic feet per hour (ft3/h [SCFH]), and standard cubic meters
per day (m3/d), cubic feet per day (ft3/d [SCFD]).
NOTE: The metric equivalence would be standard cubic meters per hour (SCFH), and
standard cubic meters per day (SCFD).
Figure 7.5
Flow transducer
Channel
Channel
Flow
transducer
Serial
port
Flow card number
Flow card number
2004 BICSI
7-7
Standard Operating Environment

Although every company will adopt their own standards for designing, supporting, and
maintaining air-pressure systems, a company or a designer may want to review what larger
companies use as a standard operating environment for their air-pressure systems. The values
in Table 7.1 represent typical minimum pressure.
Table 7.1
Typical minimum pressure
The typical minimum pressure for
Is
Air pipes
52 kPa (7.5 psi)
Underground cable
34 kPa (5 psi)
Direct-buried cable
21 kPa (3 psi)
Aerial cable
14 kPa (2 psi)
The typical flow per sheath kilometer is 0.025 m3/h or 0.60 m3/d (0.88 ft3/h or 18.72 ft3/d).
(Flow per sheath is 0.035 m3/h [1.25 ft3 /h] or 0.85 m3/h [30 ft3/d].)
In addition to the above standards, all:
Main entrance facility airflows (e.g., pipe panels and distribution panels) should be
monitored with a properly sized flow transducer.
Air dryers should be remotely monitored 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, for proper
operation.
Main entrance facilities with dual air dryers must have an alternator installed and both
dryers properly alarmed.
Underground air-core cables should be monitored at properly spaced intervals the entire
length of the cable run.
Air pipes should be monitored for pressure at all end points.
7-8
2004 BICSI
Standard Operating Environment, continued

See Figure 7.6 for an example of a typical air pressure schematic design.
Figure 7.6
Typical air-pressure schematic design
Entrance facility
01 CA
02 CA
03 CA
04 CA
05 CA
CA
Manifold
Flow transducer
Pressure transducer
Cables
End cables
End pipe pressure transducer
Design Considerations
Air Pipe Manifold Spacing
Air pipe manifolds are installed in the field as a means of splitting the air source from the air
pipe to serve multiple cables. The distance for separating manifolds has increased from 600
to 1830 m (2000 to 6000 ft). When designing a new air-pressure system, consider a common
distance for all current and future spacing requirements. Evaluate this process when
considering MH locations and spacing.
Manifolds and monitoring devices should not be placed in MHs containing load apparatus,
repeater housings, or congested MHs. These locations experience frequent splicing activity
and often lack space required for installation and future maintenance activity.
2004 BICSI
7-9

Optimum Air Usage (OAU) Calculations
OAU calculations are used to determine air pipe and air dryer requirements and the degree
of protection an existing pressure system is providing. The calculations are based on the
standard allowable consumption of a sheath kilometer of cabling that is 0.025 m3/h. Multiply
the number of sheath kilometers by 0.025 m3/h (a sheath mile of cabling is 1.25 ft3/h and the
optimum air-usage is obtained by multiplying the total number of sheath miles by 1.25 ft3/h).
Design Stick Maps
Stick maps show the complete layout of a pressure system in simple stick format (see
Figure 7.7) and include OAU target levels and device locations.
Figure 7.7
Typical schematic of air- pressure system
Telecommunications equipment room
Cables
Air
dryer
Cables
Low
Meter pressure panel
MF
MF
Monitoring points
Pipe route B
V
Approx.
Approx.
UG
900 m
900 m
cables (3000 ft)
(3000 ft)
Approx.
900 m
(3000 ft)
Approx.
900 m
(3000 ft)
PP B
PP A
MF
MF
Approximately
1830 m (6000 ft)
Approximately
1830 m (6000 ft)
MF
Approximately
1830 m (6000 ft)
MF = Pipe manifold. Connected to each designated cable in maintenance hole.

PP = Air feeder pipe. The letter following the symbol PP is the pipe route designation.
UG = Underground
V = High valve. Pressure testing valves located in neck of maintenance hole and
connected with plastic tubing to each designated cable.
Air-pressure design drawings should show the pipe routes, assigned conduits, locations of
manifold, and both flow and pressure transducers.
7-10
2004 BICSI

Buried Design
When a buried cable leaves the underground system (see Figure 7.8) within 450 m (1500 ft)
of an underground manifold, the next transducer should be installed on the buried cable at the
normal spacing interval, or approximately 900 m (3000 ft) from the underground manifold.
It is desirable to place a bypass at the point where the cable leaves the underground system
to install a pressure controller (adjusted to maintain a minimum of 21 kPa [3 psi] at the cable
end).
Figure 7.8
Example of buried cable leaving underground
Field
Buried cable
Air pipe
MH
MC
(CD)
Field
Bypass tube and

pressure controller
Field
MC
(CD)
Pressure plug
MH
2004 BICSI
Maintenance hole
7-11

Aerial Design
When an air core cable transitions from UG to aerial cable, treat the pressure transducer
spacing as a continuation of the underground system. At the point the cable leaves the
underground, a bypass arrangement with a pressure controller set from 14 kPa (2 psi) to
28 kPa (4 psi) is installed. The objective is to maintain a pressure of 14 kPa (2 psi) at the end
of the aerial cable (see Figure 7.9).
Figure 7.9
Underground to aerial interface
Pressure plug, bypass

tube, and pressure
controller placed
under U-guard
MC
(CD)
Field
Cable
7-12
2004 BICSI

Device Logs
A device log is a recordkeeping tool that cross-identifies the air-pressure system or device to
the cable and the cable count it feeds.
Buffering Information
Cable buffering is a means of supporting the air pressure at cable sheath openings during
splicing activities. This is achieved by introducing supplemental air sources (e.g., nitrogen
cylinders or truck-mounted compressors). By adding this supplemental source to the cable
sheath, the open splice does not act as a zero leak or endanger the pressure network and its
surrounding cables. Multiple methods and configurations can be used to buffer a cable
sheath break adequately. The key is to ensure that cable pressure is maintained during
splicing or repair operations.
Figure 7.10 shows one such example. A supplemental air source is introduced to the field
side of the cable opening, and in combination with the air supplied from the MC (CD) side,
positive air pressure is maintained.
IMPORTANT: Nitrogen gas is used to buffer the pressure system because nitrogen is a
noncombustible gas.
Figure 7.10
Buffering arrangement at a splice
Air pipe
Manifold
Open splice
Plug
60m
(200 ft)
2004 BICSI
7-13
7-14
2004 BICSI
Chapter 8
Right-of-Way
Includes updated graphics and engineering considerations to
be addressed when acquiring right-of-way. This section
covers methods of creating property descriptions, including
rectangular grid system, state coordinate system, and metes
and bounds. Includes basic real estate ownership, such as
easement, license, life estate, and title transfer. Describes
deeds (conveyances), chain of title, and liens and
encumbrances.
Table of Contents
Right-of-Way ............................................................................................................................ 8-1

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Definition ........................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Purchasing Right-of-Way ................................................................................................................... 8-3
Options ............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Acquiring Easement or Right-of-Way ................................................................................................. 8-4
Public Right-of-Way .......................................................................................................................... 8-5
Other Considerations ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
Easements ........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
Right-of-Way Easements and Permits ............................................................................................... 8-7
Property Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 8-9

Methods of Describing Property ........................................................................................ 8-10
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 8-10
Rectangular Grid System ................................................................................................................ 8-10
State Coordinate System ................................................................................................................ 8-16
Metes and Bounds .......................................................................................................................... 8-17
Subdivision Plat and Description ..................................................................................................... 8-21
Centerline Description ..................................................................................................................... 8-22
Point Description ............................................................................................................................. 8-23
Reference Description ..................................................................................................................... 8-24
Summary of Property Descriptions .................................................................................................. 8-24
Real Estate Law ..............................................................................................................................
Fee Ownership ..........................................................................................................................
Leasehold .................................................................................................................................
Easement .................................................................................................................................
License .....................................................................................................................................
Life Estate ................................................................................................................................
Ownership .................................................................................................................................
Single Ownership ......................................................................................................................
Joint Ownership ........................................................................................................................
Title Transfer .............................................................................................................................
Adverse Possession .................................................................................................................
Eminent Domain (Condemnation) ..............................................................................................
2004 BICSI
8-i
8-24
8-24
8-24
8-25
8-25
8-25
8-25
8-26
8-26
8-27
8-29
8-29
Chain of Title ........................................................................................................................ 8-31

Restrictions, Covenants, and Conditions ......................................................................... 8-31
Liens and Encumbrances ................................................................................................... 8-32
Appraisers .......................................................................................................................................
Engineering ...............................................................................................................................
Legal .........................................................................................................................................
Appraisal ..................................................................................................................................
Supply and Demand ..................................................................................................................
Change of Use ..........................................................................................................................
Substitution ..............................................................................................................................
Highest and Best Use ...............................................................................................................
Anticipation ...............................................................................................................................
Negotiation ...............................................................................................................................
8-32
8-33
8-33
8-34
8-34
8-34
8-34
8-35
8-35
8-35
Private Right-of-Way ........................................................................................................................ 8-36

Obtaining and Recording a Private Easement .................................................................................. 8-37
Contents of the Private Easement Document .................................................................. 8-38

Easement Document ....................................................................................................................... 8-38
Permit Information ............................................................................................................... 8-39

State Highway Permit ......................................................................................................................
Application ................................................................................................................................
Approval Process ......................................................................................................................
Enforcing the Permit .................................................................................................................
8-39
8-39
8-42
8-42
Railroad Right-of-Way ...................................................................................................................... 8-42

Railroad Permit ...............................................................................................................................
Application ................................................................................................................................
Permit Approval and Starting Work ............................................................................................
When Work is Completed .........................................................................................................
Retention of Records ................................................................................................................
Sale of the Physical Plant .........................................................................................................
Special Requirements for Direct-Buried or Underground Plant ...................................................
8-42
8-43
8-43
8-43
8-43
8-43
8-43
Sample Letter of Request for Railroad Permit .................................................................................. 8-44

Casing Lengths for Various Railroad Crossing Angles ...................................................................... 8-45
Layout of a Railroad Crossing .......................................................................................................... 8-46
8-ii
2004 BICSI
Figures
Figure 8.1
Method of township numbering ........................................................................................ 8-11
Figure 8.2
Theoretical township numbering ...................................................................................... 8-12
Figure 8.3
Section subdivision ......................................................................................................... 8-13
Figure 8.4
Small subdivision ............................................................................................................ 8-14
Figure 8.5
Legal subdivision and lotting ............................................................................................ 8-15
Figure 8.6
State coordinate system ................................................................................................. 8-17
Figure 8.7
Use of the protractor ........................................................................................................ 8-18
Figure 8.8
Naming conventions for metes and bounds ...................................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.9
Metes and bounds ........................................................................................................... 8-20
Figure 8.10
Subdivision plat and description ...................................................................................... 8-21
Figure 8.11
Centerline description ...................................................................................................... 8-22
Figure 8.12
Point description ............................................................................................................. 8-23
Figure 8.13
Associated construction drawing for state permit application ........................................... 8-41
Figure 8.14
Casing lengths for various railroad crossing angles .......................................................... 8-45
Figure 8.15
Layout of a railroad crossing ............................................................................................ 8-46
Example
Example 8.1 Typical state permit application ........................................................................................ 8-40
2004 BICSI
8-iii
8-iv
2004 BICSI
Right-of-Way
Introduction
While the contents of this section are United States (U.S.) specific, it provides useful
information and guidance for telecommunications distribution designers in other regions of
the world. In this chapter, only empirical units of measure have been applied.
Designers who deal with any type of outside plant (OSP) construction will, at some point,
become involved in acquiring right-of-way. Even if not directly involved in the actual
right-of-way acquisition, designers need to be aware of the responsibilities that other parties
have in obtaining right-of-way, including:
Permitting processes.
Types of permits required.
Legal ramifications involving clients.
Although clients can make the contractor responsible for obtaining the right-of-way permits,
the clients must execute the permits because they own the physical plant to be installed.
The permitting process can be one of the greatest factors to affect a projects schedule.
When choosing various construction alternatives, the designer should consider the potential
difficulty in permitting. As an OSP project becomes more invasive, the permitting process will
become more difficult and time consuming. For example, installing fiber optic cable in an
ILECs existing underground duct system has little adverse impact on a community and is
likely to be supported by public officials. Conversely, trenching a roadway in an urban center
to install new duct for fiber optic cable is likely to cause traffic delays and other associated
impacts, making for a more difficult permitting process. Projects with more adverse impacts
are likely to take more time because the permit granting authority will want a higher level of
detail and may seek additional information for assurance that impacts have been mitigated to
the greatest extent possible. Depending on the locality, the permit granting authority may also
negotiate an exaction (fee) for compensation due to impacts they feel are particularly burdensome.
It is crucial to ensure that all permits and right-of-way issues have been properly identified. If
one small segment of an OSP route is not properly authorized, that segment becomes the
weakest link, and prevents the entire OSP project from going into operation.
One issue involving right-of-way is the terms under which the rights are acquired. There must
be recognition of the need for access in order to maintain the facilities that are placed in order
to rebuild, reinforce, and expand or remove them. The more difficult or undefined the terms
are, the more likely access will be denied. The designer must consider these issues before
executing the grant.
2004 BICSI
8-1
Definition
Right-of-way can be defined as the land on which facilities are built. These facilities can take
the form of:
Transmission lines.
High-pressure gas lines.
Railroads.
Telecommunications facilities.
Right-of-way can be a:
Fixed width (e.g., roads, railroads, utilities).

Variable width (e.g., expensive land, permanent structures).
In previous chapters, customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP) has been considered the
facilities connecting buildings on neighboring private property. However, in certain instances
there could be a requirement to bridge the gap between several pieces of property that
make up the complex being served. In that instance, it is necessary to acquire the permission
of other landowners to cross the adjacent property. The legal document used to acquire this
permission can be an easement, license, or permit. Permits are normally used when the
right-of-way crosses public property (i.e., a roadway) or some private land (i.e., a railroad).
Usually, CO-OSP facilities are placed on the customers property. When placing a facility on
the customers property, only the customers permission is required unless unusual situations
exist (i.e., the presence of wetlands or railroad spurs into the property).
If a customer plans to continue facilities beyond the propertys boundaries, permission is
required from others, including the:
City.
County.
State.
Federal agencies.
Department of Transportation (DoT).
Railroads.
Utilities.
Private property owners.
NOTE:
All of the agencies listed above have different requirements and restrictions for
placing facilities. Government authorities with legal jurisdiction are sometimes
referred to as authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
8-2
2004 BICSI
Definition, continued
Acquiring access to public right-of-way is more difficult for customers who are not franchised
utility providers. Public right-of-way is usually reserved for franchised utility providers such as:
Power.
Water.
Sewer.
Telephone.
Cable television.
Gas.
Even franchised utility providers can be required to pay substantial annual premiums for the
right to use the public right-of-way. These premiums can be based on the linear footage of the
easement and facilities.
Example:
If multiple cables are placed in one trench, the premium could be based on
the total cable footage of all cables placed in the trench as opposed to the
length of the trench itself.
In the United States, the Federal Telecommunications Act of 1996 has relaxed the way
governmental bodies consider who is eligible to use the public right-of-way.
Types of Right-of-Way
There are two primary categories of right-of-way. A third category shares characteristics of
the other two. They are:
Public right-of-way, which involves land owned by government agencies.

Private right-of-way, which involves land owned by an individual, company,
or corporation.
Railroad right-of-way, which involves land owned by railroad companies. Though
privately owned, railroad companies are granted much greater power over land use
and procurement than other private landowners, and in that respect resemble public
right-of-way.
Purchasing Right-of-Way
Purchasing private right-of-way grants the purchaser the same rights as any property owner,
as well as the responsibility to pay all related taxes and fees associated with ownership.
Generally, right-of-way is purchased when placing structures such as:
2004 BICSI
Buildings.
Towers.
Remote property locations.
8-3
Options
If it has been determined that the facilities need to extend beyond the boundaries of a
customers property, it must be decided whether to use public right-of-way or private
right-of-way.
If the decision is to use public right-of-way, the only option is to acquire an easement through
a permiting process since the purchasing of public right-of-way is not normally possible.
If the decision is to use private right-of-way, two options become available:
Purchase a strip of land from the property owner.

Negotiate the granting of an easement from the property owner for the placement and
maintenance of the facilities.
Acquiring Easement or Right-of-Way

The decision to acquire an easement or purchase a private right-of-way should not be taken
lightly. Depending on the complexity of a right-of-way issue, it could be beneficial to employ a
company specializing in right-of-way acquisition.
Much like the telecommunications business, an entire industry is built around the discipline
of right-of-way and easement acquisition. The professionals employed in this business
possess various certifications confirming their credibility just as the designations Registered
Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD); Local Area Network (LAN) Specialist,
Installer, Level 1; Installer, Level 2; or Technician attest to the expertise of individuals in the
telecommunications industry.
The International Right-of-Way Association (IRWA) ensures that a minimum level of
qualification exists for individuals who represent themselves as right-of-way agents. For
example, the designation of Senior Right-of-Way Agent indicates the individual:
Is a member of the IRWA.

Has attended the requisite IRWA training courses.
Has more than five years of right-of-way experience.
Has training in:
Appraisals.
Engineering.
Environmental.
Negotiation/acquisition.
Property management.
Relocation assistance.
Surveying.
Titles.
8-4
2004 BICSI
Public Right-of-Way
Public right-of-way permits generally are used for placing utilities on the areas immediately
adjacent to roads, highways, byways, and bridges. Acquiring a public right-of-way permit
usually requires obtaining permission from the appropriate government agencies through a
process known as easement procurement (also called execution of an encroachment permit).
In the United States, government agencies with jurisdiction over the right-of-way could be:
Municipal.
County.
Regional.
State.
Federal.
NOTE:
In countries other than the United States, there are similar government agencies
with jurisdiction over right-of-way.
The actual permit process and regulations are different for each government agency.
Designers must be familiar with the procedures required by the agency involved. Failure to do
so could hamper the ability to protect the best interests of clients. The agencies usually have
pre-printed forms that are used to apply for the permit.
The encroachment permit details a specifically defined route along, under, over, or across the
government-owned property within which OSP facilities could be placed. The permit also
contains the rules and regulations by which the permit is granted.
NOTE:
Before including specifications for obtaining a permit in a request for quote (RFQ),
consult with the appropriate government agencies for:
State-owned property, consult with the Department of Transportation (DOT)

in the state where the project is located.
Property under the jurisdiction of a municipal, county, or regional government,
contact the engineering office for that government to obtain permit details.
Types of Right-of-Way
The type of right-of-way is directly related to the type of facility planned for the project:
2004 BICSI
Direct-buried
Underground
Aerial
Wireless
Combination of the above
8-5
Other Considerations
Utilities placed in public right-of-way occasionally cross private lands. Sometimes, it is easier
and less expensive to obtain private rights-of-way than to attempt to encroach on a public
domain.
It is also possible to encroach on waterways and wetlands. If the waterway is navigable,
contact the United States Army Corps of Engineers and in some cases, the U.S. Coast Guard.
If the area is designated a wetland, avoid it if at all possible. If it is unavoidable, consider
directional boring as an alternate. Coordinate all activities and permits through the appropriate
Department of Natural Resources or AHJ.
Easements
Whether public or private, the granting of an easement is the approval to use a specified strip
of land (in the case of placing a telecommunications facility) for a specified purpose. Typically,
easements are obtained for the placement of:
Underground utilities.
Overhead utilities.
Wireless utilities.
An easement also gives the holder the right:
Of ingress/egress (entering/exiting).
To place and maintain the facilities being proposed.
A landowner who grants an easement is precluded from building a structure of any kind on the
easement but retains the right to use the land within certain limits to:
Plant grass.
Farm.
Otherwise use the property.
Since land is considered one of the most valuable possessions a person could acquire, its
ownership and transfer is subject to significant regulation. Therefore, it is necessary to have
a basic understanding of the methods used to describe and identify land.
8-6
2004 BICSI
Right-of-Way Easements and Permits

Easements (written right-of-way) from individual property owners are required before any
excavation on private property begins. In some cases, owners could perform such work
themselves, which would lift the requirement for an easement. In either case, the party
responsible for the work must be clearly stipulated in a contract before excavation begins.
Where adjacent property owners are affected, a perpetual easement (called a recorded or
permanent easement) must be obtained. Access providers (APs) have a standard easement
agreement, which applies for any method by which facilities are provided on private property.
When pursuing easements, it is important to remember that the building owner, building user,
and property owner are often different parties.
Most local municipalities require construction permits to be obtained before any excavation
begins. Other locations (e.g., government property, railroad crossings, airports, bridges,
navigable waterways, or wetlands) also require special permits and/or environmental impact
studies. These items are high-cost elements. Submittal of these elements does not guarantee
route approval. Some processes take years and end with disapproval.
To better prepare for permit approval, a meeting with the permit granting authority should
be scheduled to obtain information about the permit granting process. At this meeting, the
following questions are useful:
1. What permits will be required to perform this work? Be prepared to provide a preliminary
overview of your project in order to obtain feedback. If permits are required, ask for
application forms and any written regulations, ordinances, bylaws or typical
specifications associated with the permit. This information is critical in the design phase
of a project.
2. Are there any plans to pave or do utility work along our proposed route? This information
is important to know to coordinate your work with other proposed work. This could
cause your project to be delayed or could provide an argument to request an accelerated
permitting process.
3. Are there any portions of our route that are in another agencys jurisdiction? Roadways
could be under the jurisdiction of a municipal, county, state, regional agency or a combi
nation of these government entities. It is not always obvious where the boundaries of
these jurisdictional boundaries begin and end. The people responsible for maintenance of
the roadways are typically well aware of jurisdictional boundaries.
2004 BICSI
8-7
Right-of-Way Easements and Permits, continued

4. Is there a government agency that has a geographical information system (GIS) or
computer-aided design (CAD) plans for our route that might be purchased? Obtain this
data in an electronic format and use it as a base map for your construction and permitting
plans. With more government agencies developing GIS databases, obtaining base map
data in this fashion is becoming increasingly easy to do. Obtaining base map
data in a digital format can save an enormous amount of time and money.
5. Do you have as-built plans showing existing utilities? If excavation is proposed, it will be
necessary to identify exiting utilities near your route on a plan. The permit granting
authority, to ensure that your proposed route minimizes the potential to cause damage to
existing utilities during construction or maintenance, will review this plan.
6. What are your bonding and insurance requirements? A contractor is almost always
required to post a bond and insurance prior to construction in a public right-of-way.
Knowing these requirements will help you qualify contractors.
7. How often does the permit granting authority meet and what is their permitting process?
This information is important to help in the development of a schedule for your project. It
is also important to know if there is any period of the year when the permitting granting
authority does not meet. Many government boards and commissions limit meetings during
the summer and holidays to accommodate volunteer members vacation schedules.
8. What are the winter moratorium rules? In northern states, it is common to limit or prohibit
underground work in the winter. This is due to problems with compaction of subsurface
materials during freezing conditions and to avoid the safety hazard of plow trucks hitting
steel plates left over trenches. Waivers of winter moratoriums are often granted for
emergency situations.
9. Are there any utilities that are not members of a one-call location system? Not all utilities
are members of these organizations. To prevent potentially expensive utility hits or face
worse consequences, including death, it is critical to ensure that all existing utilities are
notified so that their plant can be properly marked in the field prior to any subsurface
work.
10. Do you restrict work on newly paved streets? If trenching is proposed down a roadway,
you need to know if there are restrictions or prohibitions on working in newly paved
streets. This could affect what route you select and an aerial option may be required.
11. Are there any sensitive issues or areas of special concern that should be known? Is work
being proposed (e.g., in front of a school, fire station, hospital) that could require special
considerations to ensure access is maintained throughout the construction process?
Exchange business cards. Contact information is always necessary. Most government officials
will expect you to make sure that your project moves through the permitting process. It is
important to ensure that all of the permit granting authoritys issues and concerns have been
addressed.
NOTE:
Take the initiative to ask if you are scheduled to meet with any boards or
commissions. Do not assume you will be notified and guided through the
permitting process.
8-8
2004 BICSI
Property Descriptions
In the case of right-of-way acquisition, the property description is essential for the
identification of existing land ownership. Once the proposed route has been identified, the
property description(s) are used to identify the precise boundary lines of the right-of-way.
This property description is required to:
Describe the tract or parcel in precise detail so that any interested party may identify it.
Meet the legal requirements to pass title.
The property description is normally composed of five distinct segments:
IntentThe description of the property must be such that the buyer, seller, and any other
interested party not familiar with the property can read and understand the intent of both
the seller and buyer.
LocationEach parcel of land has a unique location on the earth. The description must be
in sufficient detail that its precise location can be fixed in relation to its surroundings. This
can be accomplished by reference to a fixed survey monument, an established road
centerline, or a larger survey of which this property is a part.
Geometric shapeA continuous series of bearings and lines that totally encompass the
property (metes and bounds).
SizeThe area within the geometric shape should be described in terms of acres, square
feet, etc., to an acceptable degree of accuracy.
OwnershipThe description of the property shall state the name(s) of the current owner.
Additional items include references to the:
Public land record.

Name of the surveyor who completed the land survey upon which the record is based.
In the case of an easement, the conveyance document should clearly define the rights
being acquired along with the specific use. For aerial plant, minimum line heights should
be specified.
2004 BICSI
8-9
Methods of Describing Property

Introduction
Accurate and legally acceptable methods of describing property in use are the:
Rectangular grid system.

State coordinate system.
Metes and bounds description.
Subdivision plat and description.
Centerline description.
Point description.
Reference description.
The following are brief descriptions of each of these methods.

Rectangular Grid System
The U.S. rectangular grid system, established by the Continental Congress in 1785, is in use
in all states west of Ohio with the exception of a portion of the state of Texas. As part of the
system, 35 special meridians, called principal meridians, running in a north-south direction,
were established. Along with the principal meridians, base lines, running in an east-west
direction, provided the base of reference for rectangular land division.
The first principal meridian is the west boundary line of the state of Ohio. The corresponding
baseline is the 41st parallel. From this point, the rectangular grid system consists of a series of
guide meridians spaced at 24-mile intervals. The guide meridians run parallel to the principal
meridian and are called First Guide Meridian East, Second Guide Meridian East, or First Guide
Meridian West, etc. Corresponding to the guide meridians are the standard parallels north and
south.
8-10
2004 BICSI
Rectangular Grid System, continued

These are labeled as First Standard Parallel North, Second Standard Parallel North, or
First Standard Parallel South, etc. The 24-mile squares formed by these lines are known as
quadrangles and are displayed in Figure 8.1.
Figure 8.1
Method of township numbering
North and south from baseline and east and west from
meridian
Range line
T.3.N.
Township line
Meridian
T.2.N.
T.1.N.
Baseline
R.3.W.
R.2.W.
R.1.W.
R.1.E.
R.2.E.
R.3.E.
Range line
T.1.S.
T.2.S.
Township line
T.3.S.
Each quadrangle is further subdivided into 16 townships that are 6 miles on a side. Townships
are arranged in four tiers above and four tiers below the baseline and are numbered
according to their position above and below the baseline. For example, the first township
above the baseline would be referred to as Township 1 North (T.1.N.).
The quadrangles are also arranged in four columns east and four columns west of the
guide meridian. These columns are called ranges and are referred to as Range 1 East
(R.1.E.) or Range 1 West (R.1.W.), etc.
2004 BICSI
8-11

Townships are further divided into 36 sections, each being 1 mile on a side, as shown
in Figure 8.2.
Figure 8.2
Theoretical township numbering
Method of numbering sections with adjoining sections
36
31
32
80 ch
33
34
6 mi480 ch
35
1 mi
36
31
80 ch
80 ch
12
10
11
12
18
17
16
15
14
13
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
19
25
30
29
28
27
26
25
30
36
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
13
24
6 mi480 ch
ch = chain
mi = mile
Before further subdividing the sections within the township, one must understand the units
of measure that define the section. Referring to Figure 8.2, each township is shown as being
6 miles480 chains on a side. The primary units of linear measurement are:
1 mile equals 5280 feet.

1 mile equals 80 chains.
1 chain equals 100 links.
1 link equals 7.92 inches.
1 rod, pole, or perch equals 16.5 feet.
NOTE: The linear measurement generally used in right-of-way description is the rod.
8-12
2004 BICSI

Units of area are:
1 acre equals 10 square chains.

1 acre equals 43,560 square feet.
1 square mile equals 640 acres.
Based on these measurements, a theoretical township is 6 miles square, containing 36

sections, each being one mile square or 640 acres. The area of a theoretical township is
23,040 acres. Each section can be further subdivided into distinct segments as shown in
figures 8.3 and 8.4, respectively.
Figure 8.3
Section subdivision
Legal subdivisions of section

80 ch
80 ch
N2
320 ac
80 ch
Sec.
40 ch
Sec.
All 640 ac
40 ch
40 ch
Sec. cor.
Quarter
sec. cor.
40 ch
Quarter
sec. cor.
40 ch
40 ch
Sec. cor.
S
320 ac
Sec.
E2
320 ac
ac
ch
sec
sec cor
2004 BICSI
=
=
=
=
40 ch
40 ch
4
4
4
4
NE NE
NW NE
40 ac
40 ac
4
4
4
4
SW NE
SE NE
40 ac
40 ac
Sec.
40 ch
40 ch
W
320 ac
NW4
160 ac
80 ch
40 ch
40 ch
20
20
SW4
160 ac
SE4
160 ac
40 ch
40 ch
acre
chain
section
section corner
8-13

Figure 8.4
Small subdivision
Section diagram showing small subdivisions
4
2
40 ch
2
S NW NE
20 ac
S N NE NE
and
2
4
4
S NE NE
30 ac
SE4 NW4
40
NE4
SW4 NE4
SE4 NE4
NW4 SE4
NE4 SE4
80
20
N N NE NE
10 ac
NW4
SW4 NW4
N NW NE
20 ac
E E NE NW
10 ac
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
E NW NW
20 ac
4
2
W W NE NW
10 ac
W NW NW
20 ac
20
W E NE NW
and
2
2
4
4
E W NE NW
20 ac
80 ch
40 ch
Sec.
NE SW
E W SE SW
and
2
2
4
4
E W SE SW
30 ac
SE
SE4 SE4
SW4 SE4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
W W W SE SW 5 ac
2 2 2
4
4
E W W SE SW 5 ac
4
4
E W SW SW
10 ac
4
4
2
W E SW SW
10 ac
4
4
2
E W SW SW
10 ac
20
W W SW SW
10 ac
SW
40
20
NW SW
2.5 2.5
ac = acre
ch = chain
8-14
2004 BICSI

Another commonly used convention is that of lotting. By this method, smaller tracts could
be broken out and given a distinct reference as shown in Figure 8.5.
Figure 8.5
Legal subdivision and lotting
Part of township showing legal subdivisions and lottings

80
80
2
N
320 ac
2
W
320 ac
Sec
E
320 ac
Sec
2
NW NW NE NW NW NE NE NE NW NW NE NW NW NE NE NE
4
2
1
SW NE SE NE
SE
160 ac
NW2
NE2
12
11
10
13
14
15
16
8
3
SW SE SE SE SW SW SE SW
2
7
4
4
4
4
NW NW NE NW 2
1
4
SW NW
Sec
6
7
6
8
3
4
4
4
er
k
Riv 5 SE NE
Ban
Sec
nk
4
4
4
4
Ba
NW SE NE SE
6
7
5
1
4
ft
Le
t
Sec
Sec
4
NW SE NE SE NW SW NE SW NW SE
Rig
h
SW
160 ac
Sec
Reservation
NE
160 ac
Sec
S
320 ac
NW
160 ac
SE SW SW SE SE SE
ac = Acre
sec = Section
Based on Figure 8.5, Lot 1, located in Section 31, could be described by a series of letters and
numbers as follows: Lot 1, Sec 31, T.4.N., R.3.W., Third Principal Meridian, First Standard
Parallel North. This description applies to only one piece of land within the United States.
It is important to note that there are many variations of the rectangular grid system within the
United States. Where lines of ownership (e.g., land grants, Native American lands, railroad
surveys) already existed, fractional townships and fractional sections were established.
Another factor affecting the rectangular grid system is the fact that true meridians converge
at both the North and South poles. Due to this convergence, without some type of correction,
townships would grow narrower as they continued north and wider as they continued south.
To counteract this effect, new guide meridians are established in each quadrangle. This is why
when one travels down a road that runs parallel to the section lines there is a jog to the right or
left every 24 miles.
2004 BICSI
8-15

Though widely used, the rectangular grid system is not the most accurate land measurement
system. To increase the level of accuracy, the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, in existence
for over a century, developed what is known as the state coordinate system.
State Coordinate System
The U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey established a separate system for each state in the
Union. Using this system, measurements of the earth are mathematically projected onto cones
or cylinders and then flattened into planes. Using this method, a strip of land 158 miles in width
and of infinite length could be represented to an accuracy of about one-foot in two miles.
The U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey established a beginning point in each state, which has
been documented by a monument. From this point of beginning, the north-south direction is
termed the x-coordinate and the east-west direction the y-coordinate. Dimensions are given in
feet and decimals of a foot.
Although many engineers and surveyors use this system of property description, since it
does not reference the adjacent property, it has not gained popularity with the real estate
community. The state coordinate system is most often seen in conjunction with other methods
of description, or as supplemental reference material.
Using the description of Lot 1 from the rectangular grid system, the previous example could
be amplified as follows:
Lot 1, Sec 31, T.4.N., R.3.W., Third Principal Meridian, First Standard Parallel North, and
being more fully described as follows: Beginning at a point in the north line of Section 31, said
point being 173,259.67 feet West and 1,796,479.5 feet South, and being the northeast corner of
said property.
8-16
2004 BICSI
State Coordinate System, continued

By using the state coordinate system in conjunction with the rectangular grid system, the
location of the property has been more accurately described (see Figure 8.6).
Figure 8.6
State coordinate system
North pole
Check
24 mi
2
24 mi
Baseline
24 mi
2
1st standard parallel north

Principal meridian
1st guide meridian west
2nd standard parallel north
1st standard parallel south

Longitude lines
(meridians)
Latitude lines
(parallels)
24 mi
24 mi
24 mi
mi = Mile
Metes and Bounds

The metes and bounds description of property describes the tract with a series of lines,
distances, and bearings. The metes and bounds description begins at a well-established and
documented reference point. This point will not normally be on the tract being described. It
becomes a point of beginning, but not the point of true beginning. From the point of true
beginning, the tract is normally described in a clockwise direction around the complete perimeter of the property. The bearing or angular direction of each line is written in terms of a
compass direction expressed in degrees, minutes, and seconds. The distances along the
bearing are expressed in terms of feet, tenths, or hundredths of a foot. All bearings are
measured from a north-south reference expressed as N or S preceding the angle. Following
the angle is the letter E or W depending on the direction from the north-south direction line. In
this way, an angle could be expressed as N151215"E.
2004 BICSI
8-17
Metes and Bounds, continued

Figure 8.7 shows the compass as it is used with land descriptions.
Figure 8.7
Use of the protractor
an
d
North
10
10
20
30
40
40
t
es
No
rth
20
N
or
th
d
an
30
30
W
0
N2
t
es
50
50
60
60
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
10
0
South
20
10
20
as
40
30
an
W
es
60
30
h
ut
NOTE:
40
So
50
0
S7
East
90
West
80
80
70
70
Point from which

course is run
th
ou
an
The direction north could be expressed in several ways. It could be in reference

to true north, having its origin at the North Pole, or in terms of magnetic North,
which is located some distance from the North Pole and varies by location. In
most cases, the North reference used will be one that has been established and
documented from previous local or regional surveys.
Using the example developed from the rectangular grid and state coordinate systems, the
description could be further amplified as follows:
point being 173,259.67 feet South and 1,796,479.5 feet West, and being the northeast corner of
said property.
8-18
2004 BICSI

This description could be continued using the metes and bounds description methods to more
accurately describe Lot 1. Since the northeast corner of the tract has been established using
the state coordinate system, it can also be used as the point of beginning for the metes and
bounds description. Therefore, the metes and bounds description would be:
point being 173,259.67 feet West and 1,796,479.5 feet South, and being the northeast corner of
said property. Thence S2000"E 2600 feet to a point on the east line of Sec 31, thence S
88000" W 2680 feet, thence N2000"W 2600 feet to a point in the north line of Sec 31,
thence S88000"2680 feet to the point of beginning and containing 159.963 acres more or
less.
At this point, three of the requirements for the description of property (location, shape, and
area) have been completed (see figures 8.8 and 8.9, respectively).
Figure 8.8
Naming conventions for metes and bounds
Naming directions for a

metes and bounds survey
Mapping a curve
ft
.0
90
ft
=
28
E
60
N
E
N 80
N 80
W
44
45
N 4 E
E
S1
5
S 85 W
S 80
E
S
45
E
A = Length of the arc. (Some maps use

the letter "L.")
R = Radius of the circle necessary to
make the required arc (shown
here by the broken lines).
= Angle necessary to make the arc
(i.e., the angle between the broken
lines).
Moving in a clockwise direction from the

point of beginning, set the center of a
circle compass (see above) on each
corner of the parcel to find the direction
of travel to the next corner.
ft = Feet
2004 BICSI
8-19

Figure 8.9
Metes and bounds
199.5 ft
160.0
ft
S 15
0' 00"
W
Permanent
reference mark
Point of
beginning
Monument
N 4 11' 8" E
00"
0'
N 80
.0 ft
152
S 80
0' 00"
E
180.0
ft
"W
0' 00
S 85
ft
151.0
ft = Feet
8-20
2004 BICSI
Subdivision Plat and Description

In the case of the subdivision, the description is not in narrative form, but rather in the form of
a drawing or plat where all of the boundaries are identified and tied to the original tract of land
being subdivided. Using the previous example, the narrative description identifies the larger
parcel while a metes and bounds drawing, called a plat, identifies the streets, lots, and easements within the tract (see Figure 8.10).
Figure 8.10
Subdivision plat and description
N
N 89 59' 59" E
388 ft
80.0 ft
65.0 ft
216.0 ft
.0
ft
R 60 ft
182.1 ft
231.5 ft
56.1 ft
250.0 ft
R 60 ft
40.0 ft
110.5 ft
150.0 ft
406.5 ft
S 00 00' 01" W
156.5 ft
136.0 ft
N 00 00' 01" E
471.5 ft
175.0 ft
240.0 ft
40
162.1 ft
17
0.
0
ft
240.0 ft
308.2 ft
80.1 ft
752.0 ft
388.3 ft
S 89 59' 59" W
SE Corner of section 4
T14N, R2E, 4th principal meridian
Plat of block 31, Painted Hills Tract,

recorded in map book 192
page, at the ABC county records
office, state of XYZ.
ft = Feet
2004 BICSI
8-21
Centerline Description
The centerline description (see Figure 8.11) is one of the primary methods used in the description of an easement. Rather than describe a rectangle, when the easement is of uniform width,
only the centerline is described by the metes and bounds method. The width of the easement
is stated as being x-number of feet on each side of the line.
Figure 8.11
Centerline description
7.5 ft
C
450 ft
7.5 ft
ft = Feet
8-22
2004 BICSI
Point Description
This type of metes and bounds description is also used to describe an easement. In the point
description is a centerline description in which each point of change in alignment along the
perimeter of the tract is referenced to the centerline (see Figure 8.12).
Figure 8.12
Point description
7.5 ft
S 80 0' 00
"E
90 ft
0" E
0' 0
N 80
ft
150
S 15
0'
00"
W
125
ft
C
L
7.5 ft
7.5 ft
N
7.5 ft
C
L
= Center line
C
L
ft = Feet
2004 BICSI
8-23
Reference Description
The reference description is primarily used in urban areas or rural subdivisions where the
tract has been subdivided and each lot given a number. Once the original plat and description
has been recorded, the description of each individual lot can be referenced to the original plat.
A typical description would read:
Lot 34, Block 14-B, Woodhaven Country Club Estates, 3-B filing, an Addition to the City of
Fort Worth, Tarrant County, Texas, according to the plat recorded in Volume 388/97, Page 25,
Plat Records, Tarrant County, Texas.
Summary of Property Descriptions
Property descriptions are an important part of right-of-way acquisition. The requirement of
having a complete and accurate description of the property cannot be overemphasized.
The description identifies a piece of property to the extent that any competent person could
identify it at any time in the future. It also satisfies all of the legal requirements for the transfer
of land. The primary systems in use today are U.S. rectangular grid system, the state coordinate system, and the metes and bounds system of land identification.
With the aid of these systems, three of the five requirements usually considered a part of the
property description are satisfied. The remaining two components concern the intent of the
seller and buyer and the establishment of ownership.
Real Estate Law
In order to determine who owns a parcel of property, the basic types of ownership associated
with real estate must be understood.
Interests in real estate are called estates. An estate is defined as the nature, quality, degree, or
extent of a persons interest in real property. Although numerous types of interests exist, the
most common types are:
Fee ownership.
Leasehold.
Easements.
License.
Life estate.
Fee Ownership
Fee ownership is the highest and most complete type of ownership. Fee ownership is
also termed in fee, in fee simple, or in fee simple absolute. With fee ownership, the person
possesses all rights to the property and has no limitations as to what they could be done with
the property.
Leasehold
A lease is a contract that grants the lessee (tenant) the right to occupy the property of
the lessor (landlord) for a specified period of time. As a result of this contract, the lessee
becomes, in fact, an owner of an interest in the land or leasehold interest.
8-24
2004 BICSI
Real Estate Law, continued

Easement
An easement is defined as the right acquired by one entity (person or company) to use the
property of another for a special or particular use. In CO-OSP, the purpose of obtaining an
easement is for the placement of telecommunications media. The term could be as long as
required by the purchaser to support the telecommunications requirement.
An easement also gives the holder the right:
Of ingress/egress (entering/exiting).
To place and maintain the facilities being proposed.
A landowner who grants an easement is precluded from building a structure of any kind on the
easement, but retains the right to use the land within certain limits to:
Plant grass.
Farm.
Otherwise use the property.
Right-of-way is a type of easement giving one person or company the right to pass over the
land of another. By common usage, the term right-of-way could refer to the right or the strip
of land on which the right is located.
License
A license is an interest in property for a limited time and purpose. Normally, unauthorized
entry onto someone elses property would be considered trespassing. When the entry is
authorized, the person entering is said to have a license. For example, when someone buys a
ticket to see a motion picture, that person has, in fact, purchased a license for a seat in the
theater for that date and that motion picture.
Life Estate
This interest in real property could be created by deed or will. The owner of the life estate is
allowed to use the property for the duration of their life. Upon the owners death, all rights
revert to the person granting the life estate, their heirs, or assigns. The person who had the life
estate has no further interest in the property.
Ownership
In addition to estates in land, there are also types of ownership. The primary types of
ownership are:
2004 BICSI
Single ownership.
Joint ownership.
Joint tenancy, including tenancy by entirety, community property, dower, and curtesy.
Tenancy in common.
8-25

Single Ownership
When one person is the sole owner of a parcel of real estate, that person is known as the
owner in severalty. In the majority of cases, ownership is not this restrictive but is shared by
one or more persons.
Joint Ownership
There are two types of joint ownership: joint tenancy and tenancy in common. Each type
creates a difference in the property.
Joint Tenancy
A joint tenancy is one in which two or more persons hold an estate. Upon the death of one,
the right to that portion reverts to the remaining person without creating a new document
or deed. It is assumed that the joint tenants individually own the entire property. Some states
have abolished joint tenancy, allowing the property of the deceased to pass to their heirs.
Other types of joint tenancy are created between married persons. They are tenancy by
entirety, community property, dower, and curtsey.
In the case of tenancy by entirety, some states treat a husband and wife as one person.
Therefore, upon the death of one spouse, unless another intent is shown in the deed, the
survivor is entitled to the entire property. This right only exists if the couple is married at
the time of purchase.
Some states have provided for property that a couple acquires during marriage as opposed to
separate property that each person had prior to the union. Separate property could also include
property acquired by one spouse after marriage as a gift, inheritance, or conveyed by one
spouse to the other. In addition, interests, rent, royalty, or profit from the separate property
would remain separate property as long as it is not commingled with community funds.
Dower is the wifes interest in the estate of her husband, while curtesy is the husbands
interest in his wifes estate.
Tenancy in Common
Tenancy in common is another type of multiple ownership in which each owner has an
undivided share in the property, and at any time, action could be brought to divide the property.
Upon the death of one of the owners, a new ownership group is formed consisting of the
original owners and the heirs of the deceased. In a tenancy in common, there is no right of
survivorship as there is in other types of joint tenancy.
Having looked briefly at the estates in land and types of ownership, the next area of interest is
the method and documentation that could be used to transfer title to real property.
8-26
2004 BICSI

Title Transfer
The primary methods used to transfer title to real estate are:
Escrow.
Conveyances.
Grant or warranty deed.
Quitclaim deed.
Deed of bargain and sale.
Patent.
Mortgage and deeds of trust.
Contract of sale.
Escrow
In todays market, an escrow company handles the majority of real estate transactions. An
escrow holder is a third party who has been instructed, by both the seller and the buyer, under
what conditions the transfer is to be completed. Once the conditions have been fulfilled by
both parties, the escrow holder has the deed delivered and recorded, and delivers the funds to
the seller.
Conveyances
An interest in real property is transferred from the seller to the buyer by means of a written
document called a conveyance, more commonly known as a deed. The requisites for a valid
deed are:
There must be a written instrument containing the names of the grantor and grantee,
operative words of conveyance, and sufficient legal description to unmistakably identify
the property.
The parties must be capable. The escrow company must be satisfied that the grantors are
competent to grant, and that the grantees are capable of receiving title (e.g., the grantee is
a living person or entity that can hold title to real property in its name).
The property must be legally transferred. As a rule of title practice, a title company would
decline to insure an attempted conveyance of the expected interest of an heir apparent.
The deed must be properly executed. Although slight defects in the execution of an
instrument will not necessarily impair its validity, high standards of care and thoroughness
will prevent defects. Be certain that the instruments are signed in ink exactly as the
names are typed.
The deed must be delivered and accepted. Questions on these points usually arise in
situations where the intent of the parties is not clear. The requisite of delivery is not likely
to become a problem in an escrow transaction. There are a number of factors that could
have a bearing on the conclusion as to delivery, but questions on this point are a rare
occurrence.
The two most common types of deeds used in the United States are the grant or warranty
deed and the quitclaim deed.
2004 BICSI
8-27

Grant or Warranty Deed
The grant or warranty deed protects the buyer in that the seller guarantees that the grantor
has not previously transferred the title to another person, and the property is free of any
encumbrance or defect in the title that would affect the validity of the transfer. Grant or
warranty deeds are broken down into two subcategoriesgeneral warranty deed and special
warranty deed. In a general warranty deed, the grantor warrants the property in total, while
the special warranty deed only warrants the property against defects after the grantor
acquires the property.
Quitclaim Deed
This type of deed only conveys those rights in the property, which the grantor has at the time
of sale. This deed is commonly seen in a divorce settlement when one of the parties retains
the common real estate.
NOTE:
The granting of a quitclaim deed does not warrant that the person granting the deed
has or had any interest in the property. For example, for a fee I could sell all of my
rights to the Brooklyn Bridge and issue a quitclaim deed. Even though I have no
right to the Brooklyn Bridge, I am in no way bound insofar as the deed itself is
concerned.
Deed of Bargain and Sale

The bargain and sale deed is a hybrid document somewhere between a warranty deed and a
quitclaim deed. This deed specifies a monetary consideration and states the transfer of title to
the buyer. It may or may not offer any type of warranty and could purport to convey to the
buyer more interests in the property than the grantor owns.
Patent
A state or the federal government uses this type of instrument in the conveyance of title to
public land. When researching the ownership of property, the patent is the base document
upon which the chain of title is based.
Mortgage and Deeds of Trust
This type of deed serves primarily as a security interest in the property. The main difference
between a deed of trust and a mortgage is that a deed of trust could provide for the transfer
of the borrowers interest in the property to a party called a trustee. The lender could call
upon the trustee to sell the secured property should the borrower be unable to repay the loan.
The mortgage creates a security interest in the property, but the effect on the document
varies by location. In many states, the mortgage is considered to give the mortgagee title to
the land. In other states, it is considered a lien or encumbrance in favor of the mortgagee. The
mortgage is an agreement between the mortgagor (borrower) and the mortgagee (lender).
Therefore, to assert right, the mortgagee must initiate a lawsuit for foreclosure.
8-28
2004 BICSI

Contract of Sale
The contract of sale could be one of two types. The first type provides for immediate transfer
of ownership of the property by the buyer. The price is paid in cash or cash with the balance
paid by some type of promissory note. The second type is a land installment contract where
the buyer does not acquire a recordable interest in the property until all payments have been
made and the seller agrees to convey title to the buyer. In addition to the outright purchase of
land, two other methods of land acquisition exist in the United Statesaccretion and adverse
possession.
The term accretion is normally applied to land that lies adjacent to a navigable body of water,
such as the Mississippi River. When the natural action of the water deposits soil on adjacent
lands, the process of accretion forms additional land. If the tract were sold, the accreted land
would be included in the sale, even though it was not a part of the original tract. On the other
hand, if the land is washed away and deposited elsewhere, the owner loses title to that portion
of the land.
Adverse Possession
Adverse possession goes back to the theory that possession is nine-tenths of the law.
To acquire land by adverse possession, the possession must be hostile, actual, notorious,
exclusive, continuous, and under claim of title. To be valid, the person claiming the property
must continually occupy the land for the specified amount of time in such a manner that the
original owner can observe that it is in possession in opposition to the owners claim. One
example of adverse possession is when a fence line becomes the property line rather than the
original lot or survey line.
Up to this point the original question remains, how does one establish ownership? Normally,
title to land can be established through public records and developing what is termed a chain
of title.
Eminent Domain (Condemnation)
As the ownership of OSP is not limited to private entities, but can be owned by governmental
agencies as well, no discussion of right-of-way acquisition would be complete without a
discussion of eminent domain. Eminent domain can be defined as the right or power of public
and semipublic agencies to take private property for public purposes without the owners
consent on payment of just compensation. The power of eminent domain is commonly
referred to as the right of condemnation. Though rooted in common law, the right of kings, the
basis for the right of eminent domain in the United States is found in the final clause of the
Fifth Amendment to the U.S. Constitution.
No person shall be held to answer for a capital, or otherwise infamous crime, unless
on a presentment or indictment of a Grand Jury, except in cases arising in the land
or naval forces, or in the militia, when in actual service in time of war or public
danger; nor shall any person be subject for the same offence to be twice put in
jeopardy of life or limb; nor shall be compelled in any criminal case to be a witness
against himself, nor be deprived of life, liberty, or property, without due process of
law; nor shall private property be taken for public use, without just compensation. (Emphasis added.)
2004 BICSI
8-29

While the statement, nor shall private property be taken for public use,
without just compensation applies to the federal government, language similar to
this exists in many state constitutions. In states where it has not been included,
eminent domain is based on case law.
In addition to the use of this power by a governmental agency, this power has also been
expended to utility companies, as their availability throughout an area has been deemed for
the public good. This power thus prevents any individual from withholding their permission to
place CO-OSP upon their property. An example of this could be the placement, by a city, of an
optical fiber LAN in support of city emergency services (e.g., 911). Once the route has been
established and verified that the only method available to bridge the gap is through this property, the designer of such a network would turn the matter over to the proper city agency to
acquire the right-of-way.
Once the ownership of the parcel of land and the amount of land required for the easement
are determined, the value of the easement needs to be established. The amount that one is
willing to pay and the amount that the owner desires are probably not the same. It is, therefore, necessary to have an appraisal of the partial acquisition.
8-30
2004 BICSI
Chain of Title
In most areas, an abstract of title is available from either an attorney or an abstract company.
In this instance, a researcher has verified the public record and traced the history of the
property back to the original grant or patent. The abstract of title is a summary of this
research. Additionally, title insurance companies located throughout the country make it
possible for a person acquiring property to buy an insurance policy that will insure the title to
the property.
Based on this information, and going back to the earlier example, the property description
would be further amplified as:
Lot 1, Sec 31, T4N, R3W, Third Principal Meridian, First Standard Parallel North, and being
more fully described as follows: Beginning at a point in the north line of Section 31, said point
being 173,259.67 feet South and 1,796,479.5 feet West, and being the northeast corner of said
property. Thence S2000"E 2600 feet to a point on the east line of Sec 31, thence S 8800"0'
W 2680 feet, thence N2000" W 2600 feet to a point in the north line of Sec 31, thence
S88000" 2680 feet to the point of beginning and containing 159.963 acres more or less.
Being the same premise conveyed to John Smith by deed recorded in Book 1279, at page 965,
Jefferson County, State of Indiana.
At this point, the property description is complete. The intent of the seller and the buyer would
normally be spelled out in the beginning of the deed document. The intent would state the
name of the seller, the buyer, and the consideration given for the parcel.
In addition to the various types of deeds, certain restrictions could be written into the deed that
restricts the use of the land. These are known as restrictions, covenants, and conditions.
Restrictions, Covenants, and Conditions

The use of property can be limited or restricted in one of two ways. In most metropolitan
areas, zoning laws set certain restrictions. Additionally, the developer could have incorporated
additional restrictions at the time the land was subdivided. These restrictions could apply to the
manner in which the utilities are placed. For example, it could require all utilities to be underground. Due to this restriction, if an aerial telecommunications lead was placed past the
property, it would have to be buried for this portion of the project. Changes to the covenants
would require the approval of all owners of the subdivision. Additional restrictions could also
apply in the form of liens and encumbrances.
2004 BICSI
8-31
Liens and Encumbrances

An encumbrance can be defined as any lien, claim, or liability attached to the land.
Encumbrances could be in the form of a mortgage, unpaid taxes, a mechanic or vendors
lien, a judgment, or even an easement or right-of-way previously granted on the property.
A lien is more restrictive than an encumbrance in that the debt owed could require the sale
of the property with the proceeds going to the lien holder. The term encumbrance can be
defined as anything that affects or limits the fee simple title to property.
Appraisers
The Appraisal Foundation (subset of IRWA) certifies appraisers and requires that they have
training in:
Influences on real estate value.

Legal considerations in appraisal.
Types of value.
Economic principles.
Real estate markets and analysis.
Valuation process.
Property description.
Highest and best-use analysis.
Appraisal math and statistics.
Sales comparison approach.
Site value.
Cost approach.
Income approach.
Valuation of partial interests.
Appraisal standards and ethics.
Narrative report writing.
8-32
2004 BICSI
Appraisers, continued
Once the decision has been made to acquire an easement(s), the process is broken down into
four phases:
Engineering
Legal
Appraisal
Negotiation
Engineering
Where possible, consider several routes. They could be prioritized based on the site survey.
Once this is accomplished, the engineering phase can begin. First and foremost is the
requirement to have a complete and accurate description of the property upon which the
easement is located, together with an accurate description of the easement. The description
should be written so it can be clearly recognized by a competent person at any time in the
future. It should also satisfy the legal requirement for the transfer of an interest in real estate.
The description of the property as stated on the deed should fulfill this requirement. The
location of the easement on the property must also meet this same requirement. The licensed
land surveyor can prepare this description. It is also advisable to have both the written
description along with a plat (drawing) of the easement. Once these documents have been
prepared, the next phase of the acquisition process can begin.
Legal
The legal aspect of right-of-way acquisition can be broken down into two distinct segments:
establishing ownership of the parcel of land upon which the easement is located and preparation of the easement document (deed).
The establishment of the chain of title can be accomplished by an attorney or through an
abstract company. Be certain that the deed is free from any defects and/or encumbrances.
Right-of-way forms are available and can be prepared by a right-of-way agent working under
the direction of an attorney with the right-of-way company. If the form is prepared in-house,
be certain to have an attorney review and approve the form.
CAUTION:
2004 BICSI
When writing the description, state the intended use as generally as possible.
If the original purpose of the easement is the placement of a 25-pair, selfsupporting aerial cable and is stated as such, it will not be possible to increase
the size of or replace the cable with optical fiber without obtaining a new
easement. It would be better to state the purpose as the placement of aerial
telecommunications cables.
8-33
Appraisal
The appraisal of the easement, also known as the appraisal of partial acquisitions, is
concerned with two aspects of land valuation:
Value of the land before the easement

Value of the land after it has been encumbered by the easement
Land is a limited resource and the land required to tie two portions of a complex together is
even more limited. The valuation of property is based on several key factors:
Supply and demand

Change of use
Substitution
Highest and best use
Anticipation
Supply and Demand

A basic rule of physics states that the shortest distance between two points is a straight
line. The rule could also be applied to the route between two properties. However, the land
available for the placement of OSP between the two is a limited resource. Assume that the
best route is along a public road. If space is available on public land, then an application for a
permit from the AHJ is in order. However, if this space is occupied by other utilities, the only
recourse is the use of private land or the development of an alternate or longer route. When
developing the value of the route located on private property, the appraisal process must
consider three factorschange of use, substitution, and highest and best use.
Change of Use
In many instances, the requirement for CO-OSP is driven by change. The client is expanding
their facility. The same change could take place throughout the area. Land that is in use
today as agricultural land could change to either an industrial or commercial use. In this case,
the value of the land also increases relative to its supply. For example, if the shortest route is
directly across an agricultural field and is placed at a sufficient depth, CO-OSP will not impact
the use of that segment of the field for agricultural purposes. If the use of that same piece of
land were changed to an industrial use, then the location of the easement may have a definite
impact on the location of a building.
Substitution
Substitution is another approach that an appraiser uses to establish value. In this case, a
similar and equal piece of property is compared to the piece over which OSP will be placed.
In the substitution process it is assumed that all other factors being equal, the one with the
lowest price will be substituted for all others.
8-34
2004 BICSI
Highest and Best Use
The highest and best use of the property may not be the current use of the land, but the use
that will provide the highest return to the owner. For a tract of land five miles outside the city
limits, the highest and best use could be agricultural. Should the land be incorporated into the
city, the highest and best use could change from agricultural to single-family dwellings. This
change would greatly enhance the value of the property.
Factors that could impact the highest and best use are zoning and private restriction(s) that
may have been placed on the land. It is, therefore, advisable that these factors be considered
when designing the proposed placement of an easement. As in the earlier example, if the
easement was placed where it would not impact the highest and best use of the land, its
impact on the value of the land would be minimal.
Anticipation
To the owner or buyer of real estate, the value of the land may not be what it is capable
of producing today, but rather what it will produce in years to come. Because of this, one
of the functions of the marketplace is to derive todays price for the right to obtain future
satisfaction.
Based on these principles, the appraiser must measure this value in terms of the compensation
required for the property together with any compensable damages that could occur to the
land. One example of a compensable damage would be the requirement to cut a driveway,
which would be replaced. The owner or tenant could require additional damages for the
inconvenience caused during the construction period.
Aesthetics is another aspect that must be considered. In an area where aerial construction
is common, one more pole line may not have an aesthetic impact. However, in an area where
all utilities are underground, an aerial line could be totally unacceptable. After the value has
been established for each route, a decision can be made as to which route will be the most
cost-effective for the project. Following this decision, the fourth and final phase, negotiation
with the landowner for acquisition of the easement can commence.
Negotiation
In the area of easement acquisition, negotiation is the most crucial phase of the project.
If the negotiation with the owner is not completed in a successful manner, all of the actions
completed prior to the negotiation are lost. Therefore, negotiation can be defined as the
process by which property is sought to be acquired through discussion, conference, and final
agreement on the terms of a voluntary transfer of property.
Most textbooks on the subject of negotiations will list at least three types of negotiation
methods:
2004 BICSI
Bargaining
Attitudinal
Integrative
8-35
Of these three types, the one most people think of when they hear the word negotiation is
bargaining. A good example of bargaining negotiation is the negotiation process between labor
and management. The problem with this concept is that bargaining negotiation is also thought
of as a win-loss situation for one of the parties. Therefore, bargaining negotiation has a very
limited use in right-of-way acquisition. Remember, for any sale to take place there must be a
willing seller and a willing buyer.
In the case of the easement acquisition, there is a willing buyer, but not necessarily a
willing seller. A better approach could be to use a combination of attitudinal and integrative
negotiations. In the attitudinal approach to negotiation, a set of ground rules is established
between both parties and a sense of trust could develop between the two. Once this trust is
developed, the integrative phase can begin.
Integrative negotiation, sometimes called a win-win situation, is more of a problem-solving
approach between the buyer and the seller. By using this method, the buyer understands the
sellers problems and vice versa. In most cases, an agreement may be reached that will meet
the needs of the buyer, and, at the same time, minimize any negative effects for the seller.
Due to the preconceived ideas that most people possess, it is incumbent on the buyer to
approach this phase with caution.
Depending on the buyers relationship with the landowner, the negotiation could be
accomplished by the buyer or through a third party, such as a right-of-way agent or an
attorney. After the easements have been acquired, the easement documents must be
recorded in the same fashion as any other real estate transaction. In addition, the overall
environmental and aesthetics impact of the project must be considered.
Private Right-of-Way
Private right-of-ways are usually obtained by executing with the property owner a
right-of-way acquisition document, called an easement. Easement documents detail a
specifically defined route along, under, over, or across the property with which OSP facilities
are placed. The primary reasons for obtaining a private right-of-way easement are to:
Decrease the likelihood of having to move the physical plant in the future.
Restrict the owner from certain types of construction on the property contained in the
easement that might interfere with the physical plant.
8-36
2004 BICSI
Obtaining and Recording a Private Easement

In the United States, the laws of each state are different regarding the obtaining and recording
of easements; however, there are several key factors that apply to all easements.
It is crucial to determine the correct owner of the private property before obtaining an
easement. Failure to do so can render the easement invalid and cause loss of money paid
for the easement.
The easement must be executed between the actual owner of the physical plant seeking
permission to encroach on the property and the owner of the property (or the person or
company who holds power of attorney for the owner). A contractor can assist in preparing
and recording the easement, but the plant owner must perform the actual execution.
Private right-of-way acquisitions are not legal unless the person or company requesting the
easement pays a monetary fee to the owner of the property. The amount can vary depending
on:
The details of the easement.

How much property is being tied up.
Terms and conditions of the easement.
Independent parties must witness the execution of the easement, and the executed document
must be recorded at the Clerk of the Courts office for the county in which the property is
located. Failure to record the document could result in the document being ruled invalid if
conflicts occur.
Keep the executed and recorded easement document with the records of the project.
2004 BICSI
8-37
Contents of the Private Easement Document

Easement Document
The details contained in the easement document are related to the type of physical plant
planned for the project:
Direct-buried
Underground
Aerial
Combination of the above
An easement application should contain a minimum of two documents including:
The terms and conditions of the easement. Legal counsel should prepare these with the
assistance of the consultant.
A detailed engineering sketch indicating prominent features and a legal description of the
property, along with details about any adjacent public right-of-way such as:
Road names and numbers.
Shoulder width.
Sidewalk, curb, and gutter locations.
Significant drainage structures.
North arrow.
Right-of-way width.
Exact location of the proposed utility with respect to property lines.
Nearest intersecting road on the public road system, if available.
Any unusual issues or arrangements for use of the property.
8-38
2004 BICSI
Permit Information
State Highway Permit
The following information about obtaining an encroachment permit illustrates, in general, the
terms and process involved in obtaining a public right-of-way encroachment permit. Other
states requirements vary but are essentially similar.
Application
Normally, the application package is required to include a(n):
Permit application (see Example 8.1). This is a formal application signed by the applicant
and, if approved by the DoT, it will summarize information about:
Applicant (name, address, and phone number).
Highway involved (county, road/route number, and road name).
Type of public service line.
Description of the location of the line on the highway.
Any special provisions tied to the approval of the permit.
Key map (see Figure 8.13). This is a state highway map indicating the general location of
the encroachment. The area containing the work must be detailed along or across the
public roads affected by the encroachment.
Engineering sketch indicating roadway features such as:
Pavement width.
Shoulder width.
Sidewalk, curb, and gutter locations.
Significant drainage structures.
North arrow.
Right-of-way width.
Exact location of the proposed utility with respect to the roadway centerline and
nearest intersecting road on the state system.
NOTE:
2004 BICSI
In some cases, submission of a completed set of construction drawings will

suffice for the above requirements.
8-39
State Highway Permit, continued

Example 8.1
Typical state permit application
State Department
of Transportation
0199 (02/99)
THIS SPACE FOR STATE USE ONLY
Any Phone Co.
Anyone Installation Co.
123 Telephone St.
456 Dig Dr.
Bell
XX
A.G. Bell
XXX-XXX-XXXX
#72
XXXXX
Cable
XX
B.K. Fill
XXX-XXX-XXXX
36
County Line Rd.

07/15/XX
Backhoe
7 2
4 5
782
XXXXX
Conduit
09/15/XX
Install 18-strand optical fiber cable from pole #4380 to pole #4405
under state highway #72. Directional bore will be used under the
highway with a minimum depth of 48".
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
A.G. Bell - Eng. Mgr.
XX/XX/XX
XX-XXXXXXX
STATE USE ONLY DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE
APPRROVED FOR STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION BY
8-40
2004 BICSI

Figure 8.13
Associated construction drawing for state permit application
#4380
145'
18-Fiber
4-Fiber
Existing
riv
ew
ay
House
in
e
Gas
G
ar
ag
P
oo
l
in
e
3/8 Copper
gas line
(propane)
Direct bury 18-strand optical fiber

cable from west side of pole #4380
for 145' in a southwest direction, then
in a southeast direction across
State Highway 72 to pole #4405.
Use directional bore under State
Highway 72 with 2" plastic duct. Run
optical fiber cable in duct under
highway. Ensure 48" minimum depth
under highway.
Propane
R
W
33'
BLKTP
Centerline
State Highway 72
782' to
County Line Road
GRVL
Ditch line
33'
R
343'
Existing
Existing fiber route

(direct-buried)
N
4-Fiber
House
18-Fiber
#4405
B
B
BLKTP
GRVL
R/W
=
=
=
=
=
2004 BICSI
Future buried cable

Buried cable
Blacktop
Gravel
Right-of-way
8-41

Approval Process
The permit approval process consists of the:
Applicant submitting completed forms to the appropriate city/county/state office or

appropriate AHJ.
Resident maintenance engineer and district construction engineer reviewing the forms.
Approval and return of the permit to the applicant with the approved signatures, provided
that all details were submitted and consistent with DoT policies.
NOTE:
Even if not required, it is a good policy to notify the DoT prior to

beginning work.
Enforcing the Permit

The local AHJ or DoT engineer responsible for the job may visit the site during the work to
ensure conformance with the permit. A copy of the permit must be on the job site during
work. If the DoT engineer visits the site and a copy of the permit is not available, the engineer
has the right to shut down the work until a copy is available.
Railroad Right-of-Way
Railroad right-of-way are properties owned by rail companies and used for the construction
and maintenance of the companies tracks and buildings. Though privately owned, rail
companies are granted much greater power over land use and acquisitions than other private
landowners. In the United States, this power was granted by federal legislation passed during
the 1800s and early 1900s.
Railroad right-of-way are obtained in a manner similar to public right-of-way.
Railroads have predetermined limits of encroachment onto their properties, and their rules of
encroachment are much more stringent than for many public agencies. The details required
for their permits are also more specific. Each railroad companys requirements are different.
The engineering office at the rail companys corporate headquarters company can usually
provide the information required for obtaining encroachment permits or can determine the
specific company location that can provide this information.
Railroad Permit
The following requirements for obtaining an encroachment permit from the railroad illustrate
the typical requirements that railroads can impose.
Each railroad companys requirements are different. The engineering office at the corporate
headquarters of the railroad company can usually provide the information required for
obtaining encroachment permits or determine the specific company location that can provide
this information.
8-42
2004 BICSI
Railroad Permit, continued

Application
The applicant must prepare a letter transmitting the permit application to the designated
railroad system superintendent. This letter must indicate the location of the proposed railroad
crossing by milepost number and footage north, south, east, or west of the milepost as
appropriate and any discernible or identifiable crossroads.
The railroad can require a formal agreement between the applicant and railroad. If that
occurs, the applicant should obtain legal counsel to assist in the preparation of this agreement.
Allow for greater lengths of time for railroad permit approval.
Permit Approval and Starting Work
Work can begin when the approved permit is received from the railroad. Keep a copy of the
approved permit on the job site. Failure to do so could result in the railroad inspector halting
the job and revoking the permit. In most cases, a railroad inspector is required on all projects
and this cost could be invoiced to the permit applicant.
When Work is Completed
When the work is completed, the applicant must:
Send a letter to the railroad indicating the day, month, and year the work was completed.
Advise the railroad of any changes in crossing constructions.
Retention of Records
The applicant must keep a copy of all correspondence relative to the railroad permit on file as
long as the applicant owns the physical plant.
Sale of the Physical Plant
If the physical plant is to be sold to someone else, the railroad shall be notified in writing. The
railroad could:
Place additional requirements on the new owner prior to approval of the sale.
Require the physical plant be removed from the railroads right-of-way.
Require the proposed buyer to execute a new permit.
Change the cost of occupancy to the new customer.
Special Requirements for Direct-Buried or Underground Plant

If the physical plant is a direct-buried or underground plant, a casing must be installed under
the tracks to house the plant and its associated structures. The casing must extend beyond:
Both rails of a single track.

The outside rail of the outside tracks, if there are multiple tracks.
Check with railroad permitting authority for exact distances.
2004 BICSI
8-43
Railroad Permit, continued

See figures 8.14 and 8.15 for more information on special requirements for direct-buried or
underground plant:
Figure 8.14, Casing lengths for various crossing angles, shows the required length of
casing for various crossing angles.
Figure 8.15, Layout of a railroad crossing, shows the layout and relevant dimensions
for a railroad crossing.
Address questions regarding railroad crossings to the appropriate railroad system

superintendent.
Sample Letter of Request for Railroad Permit
<Name of Railroad Superintendent>
<Name of Railroad>
<Address>
<City, State Zip>
Dear <Name of Superintendent>:
<Name of client> hereby applies for permission to construct a telephone plant crossing at
<location-distance in meters (feet) to nearest milepost> near <city and state>. The facility
being placed at this location <will or will not> serve a patron of your company exclusively and
<will or will not> be located within the limits of a public road.
The review of this proposed crossing and your prompt approval will be appreciated.
Yours truly,
<Your name and company>

Attachment
8-44
2004 BICSI
Casing Lengths for Various Railroad Crossing Angles

Figure 8.14
Casing lengths for various railroad crossing angles
2.5 ft
2.5 ft
15 ft
15 ft
40
Rail
Rail
30
50
60
70
80
90
85
75
65
55
45
35
Angle
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
2004 BICSI
Length of Casing
35 ft
35.5
36 ft
36.5
37.5
38.5
40 ft
43 ft
46 ft
49.5
54.5
61 ft
70 ft
8-45
ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
Layout of a Railroad Crossing

Figure 8.15
Layout of a railroad crossing
R.R. R/W
15 ft
15 ft
Minimum
eral
r fed r
o
e
e
Stat numb
e
rout
Minimum
Milepost
See Note
. R/W
Hwy
B
B
R.R. R/W
Variable dimensions:
A = Width of R/W
B = Length of encasement
C = Length of encroachment
D = Distance from milepost
E = Distance from pavement
F = Angle of crossing
G = Depth of casing
To (nearest station)
Hwy. surface
Proposed physical plant

and casing on R.R. R/W
Subgrade
Profile
G
Drainage pipe where existing

12 in minimum (must
be 35 in if open ditch)
Type Facility
Cable Size
Proposed Crossing
Gauge
Strand
Maximum Voltage
Tracks of
DC
R.R.
Feet
Maximum Amps
In
Encasement Material
At or Near
Outside Diameter
Wall Thickness
of MP
County
Project Name
Project Number
Prepared By
NOTE:
Indicate date of approval for an existing crossing.
8-46
2004 BICSI
Chapter 9
Design Documentation
Focuses on work print specifications (site survey, field survey,
schematic design, and work prints) and CO-OSP design and
construction checklists. Includes butterfly drawings.
Table of Contents
Work Prints ............................................................................................................................. 9-1
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Schematic Design .............................................................................................................................
Cable Assignment .......................................................................................................................
Feeder Sizing .............................................................................................................................
Distribution Sizing .......................................................................................................................
Projection Planning .....................................................................................................................
Counts and Assignments ............................................................................................................
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-3
Work Prints ....................................................................................................................................... 9-4
CO-OSP Design and Construction Checklist ..................................................................... 9-6

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 9-6
CO-OSP Design Checklist ................................................................................................................ 9-6
1. Title Block .............................................................................................................................. 9-8
2. Required Information ............................................................................................................... 9-8
3. Electronic Telecommunications Equipment ............................................................................. 9-9
4. Notes ...................................................................................................................................... 9-9
5. Aerial Environment ................................................................................................................. 9-10
6. Direct-Buried Environment ..................................................................................................... 9-10
7. Conduit Environment ............................................................................................................. 9-10
8. Underground Environment ..................................................................................................... 9-10
9. Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................... 9-11
CO-OSP Construction Specifications Checklist ...............................................................................
1. General .................................................................................................................................
2. Title Block ............................................................................................................................
3. Safety ...................................................................................................................................
4. Notes ....................................................................................................................................
5. Cable and Stubs ...................................................................................................................
6. Terminals ..............................................................................................................................
7. Poles ....................................................................................................................................
8. Load Coils ............................................................................................................................
9. Maintenance Holes (MHs) .....................................................................................................
10. Conduit ...............................................................................................................................
11. Removals ............................................................................................................................
9-11
9-13
9-14
9-14
9-14
9-15
9-15
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-16
Work Print Information Examples .................................................................................................... 9-17
2004 BICSI
9-i
Figures
Figure 9.1
Splicing together two sections of BKMA-200 cable, clearing and capping the cable end...9-17
Figure 9.2
Splicing in a section of cable where a cable order may have been shorted. This causes
an additional splice, noted in a change order, with the additional splice noted as 3A.. 9-17
Figure 9.3
Splice together two cables of different size and clear the ends of the remaining pairs
in the BKMA-900 ...................................................................................................... 9-17
Figure 9.4
Splice a new branch cable to a feed cable. Also, place a pressure plug .................... 9-17
Figure 9.5
New cables and a terminal spliced ............................................................................ 9-18
Figure 9.6
Cross-connect cabinet terminating gel-filled cables ................................................... 9-18
Figure 9.7
Removal of NF-16 terminal ........................................................................................ 9-18
Figure 9.8
Replacing an NF-16 terminal with an NF-25 terminal ................................................. 9-19
Figure 9.9
Energizing dead pairs ............................................................................................... 9-19
Figure 9.10
Remove cross-connect terminal ................................................................................ 9-19
Figure 9.11
200-pair cable transfer at splice ................................................................................ 9-20
Figure 9.12
300-pair cable transfer to new feeder cable ............................................................... 9-20
Figure 9.13
Section replacement 300-pair cable .......................................................................... 9-20
Figure 9.14
Protector placement ................................................................................................. 9-20
Figure 9.15
Sample maintenance hole plan and profile drawing ................................................... 9-21
Figure 9.16
Butterfly detail worksheet .......................................................................................... 9-22
Figure 9.17
Butterfly detail ........................................................................................................... 9-23
Tables
Table 9.1
Work print specifications process ............................................................................... 9-5
Table 9.2
CO-OSP design checklist ........................................................................................... 9-7
Table 9.3
CO-OSP construction specifications checklist .......................................................... 9-12
9-ii
2004 BICSI
Work Prints
Introduction
Design documentation is an important set of deliverables in a customer-owned outside plant
(CO-OSP) project. These documents are used to construct the plant and should be readable
and well planned, with legends and a list of symbols and details. Technicians and contractors
must follow the documents produced by the telecommunications distribution designer. In cases
where the documents or intent of the work is questionable, the designer must be consulted.
The task of developing design documents begins early in the design process. The final work
prints or construction drawings are a compilation of all of the data that has been recorded by
the designer of the existing outside plant (OSP) conditions as well as all of the proposed
facilities. This data is detailed under each of the following steps.
Schematic DesignAt this stage, the designer uses the notes acquired during the field
survey to design the proposed OSP facilities. The designer may work directly on the field
notes, or may choose to have drafting personnel develop preliminary work prints to be
used by the designer to plot the proposed OSP facilities.
Work PrintsThese are the final drawings that will be issued to the construction forces
for the placement of the proposed OSP facilities. At this point, the designer will have
plotted all of the proposed information from the field notes onto the work prints. These
changes will be incorporated into the computer-aided design (CAD) drawings in order to
return a final set of work prints to the designer.
Schematic Design
Work prints need to be developed to determine the future cable and pair requirements. These
requirements can only be forecast after considering requirements for existing business and the
future use of vacant property, if known. Many times this information can be obtained through
population forecast, interviews with developers and planning departments, and through the site
survey. Once this information is determined, the forecast requirements must be analyzed to
identify immediate or future shortages and multiple conditions found with balanced twistedpair cabling. This information should also be included on cable prints to formulate a plan for
expansion.
Once the cable print is marked with this forecasted information, determine:
What distribution cables need immediate and future expansion.

Where new distribution cables will be needed.
The immediate or future rearrangements necessary for the distribution cables
and terminals.
Where main feeder cable expansion is needed.
How many immediate and future cables and cable pairs will be needed.
The most cost-effective technology that will accomplish the job.
When designing feeder and distribution cables in either new or rearranged CO-OSP, the
designer must ensure that the distribution cables provide a sufficient number of cable pairs,
optical fiber strands, and coaxial cabling for the ultimate needs of the business. Balanced
twisted-pair cables should be free from multiple appearances (not bridged) and should be
administered in groups of 25 sequential pairs (binder groups).
2004 BICSI
9-1
Schematic Design, continued

The success of any design depends upon in-depth planning and applying the fundamental
principles of designing CO-OSP. Gathering data is most important to the design. First, the
designer should obtain copies of the latest cable assignment records. Where existing cable
prints are available, the designer should determine the number of working pairs in the cable
sections and transcribe them onto the print at the locations where the cable sections taper.
This will provide a good depiction of the cabling layout and the number of working pairs.
Cable Assignment
The basic concept in CO-OSP is similar to exchange area cabling for central offices and can
be described as two general components: feeder cables and distribution cables.
Feeder cables are those coming from the campus MC (CD) and extend out to the last
branch cable splice or cross-connect point. These feeder cables will typically be spliced to
smaller distribution or branch cables that will terminate.
Distribution cables are those cables extended from a cross-connect or branching off a
feeder cable via splicing.
Feeder cables are planned and installed to provide coverage for a particular area or for a
specific route. Distribution cables are designed to provide service to specific discrete areas
within that feeders coverage area or route.
Another term that may be applied collectively to both feeder cables and distribution cables in
CO-OSP is backbone cabling. It is often called campus backbone or outside plant backbone.
CO-OSP cabling in campus environments has also been termed trunk cable although, in
exchange terminology, a trunk is a circuit or path between two switches of which at least one
is a telephone central office (CO) or switching center. Regular central office circuits are
called private branch exchange (PBX) trunks because there is a switch at both ends of the
circuit. Proper terminology for trunk cabling, therefore, is cable placed between two switching
centers. However, the term trunk cable has been applied in campus design to general OSP
cabling.
Feeder Sizing
The next determination is cable sizing. The first part is the size of the feeder cable. Feeder
pair count is based on the following:
Number of pairs required for initial use. This includes dry copper telephone pairs, special
service requirements (e.g., data, fire alarm, and security), and any immediate changes in
present services.
The feeder cable pair count is generally increased to provide a pair for pair match with all
the expected distribution cables.
Rate of growth of the designated area. This is to discern the types of service and the
quantity needed in the foreseeable future. The forecast should be planned for the longest
timeframe possible, perhaps 20 years or more. However, try to forecast at least 5 years or
more in the future.
The use of a campus master plan, if one is available.
9-2
2004 BICSI

Distribution Sizing
The next step is planning the distribution portion of the cable plant. Historically, in initial cable
placement for a coverage area, the distribution portion of the total cable plant had more pair
count than the feeder serving the area. In order for all pairs of the distribution cable to be
terminated, the practice of stubbing feeder pairs and/or bridging feeder pairs was used. Today,
those practices are no longer followed.
The evolution of design standards led to the placement of the ultimate size distribution cable
in the area, especially when buried to meet legislative requirements or for esthetic concerns.
Living units were assigned one and one-half to three or more distribution pairs in anticipation
of additional line growth for faxes, computers, alarm systems, and communication.
Projection Planning
Typically, planning feeder cable size is done based on an analysis of the cost of reinforcing
a route compared to the cost of investing in idle capacity until some future date, and a
consideration for technological advances that may emerge during the period. The future date
is determined by growth rate in the area, and consumption of the facilities provided.
Therefore, while planning is done on a multi-year basis, the plans should be periodically
reviewed to assure that the underlying assumptions are still valid. Some planners establish a
specific horizon for their planning cycle (e.g., a five-year projection).
In aerial plant (provided proper planning took place initially), additional cable can be
overbuilt onto the support strand of the initial cable, or there is sufficient clearance for
additional cable placement on the pole line.
In underground plant, additional cable can be placed in provided spare conduit within the
ductbank route.
Direct-buried plant requires oversizing of the feeder due to the difficulty in revisiting the
route and adding additional capacity at a later date. Therefore, for direct-buried plant,
cables should be sized to provide for at least 20 years.
When designing for campus area distribution, plan for a prospective growth pattern (e.g., five
years, 10 years, or longer) if such projections are reasonable, and plan pair count accordingly.
Information gathered from the site master plan can be used to assist the designer in
determining projections.
Counts and Assignments
Provide sufficient pair count plus a percentage of growth rounded up to the next full cable
size for the feeders service area. The method of providing sufficient pair count is to factor
in one-half pair for every two pair required; then add the growth factor. Growth factor is
typically 15 percent to 20 percent depending on projections. The less certain the projection,
the higher the growth factor needs to be.
When assigning pair count from the main feeder cables through to the distribution or lateral
cables, try to avoid leaving pairs unassigned cut dead in a splice. Only allow binder groups
cut, cleared, and capped in the splice if there is near-term future building placement and
anticipated service requirements. Otherwise, provide pair-for-pair full pair counts from the
feeder cable to the distribution cables.
2004 BICSI
9-3

Typically, the main or feeder cable originating at the campus MC (CD) should be assigned and
spliced out to the distribution cables serving the remote facilities using the following rules:
1. Never break up binder groups. Always assign full binders to all remote locations.
2. Use the tree concept. Assign the first binders in the center of the feed cable to the
farthest distribution points away from the campus MC (CD). Assign the next binders out
from the center of the sheath back toward the campus main feed point. Therefore, the
pairs in the center of the feed cable are the tallest (or longest) and the pairs outward
from the center are progressively shorter, giving the cable plant the image of a tree.
3. Place splices and terminations at logical junctures in the overall plant. Ensure that there is
security at the point of connection so that unauthorized individuals cannot cause harm but
also that craftspeople can work on the administration point. This will differ in planning
depending on the cable route construction.
Work Prints
After the site survey and schematic designs have been completed, the designer has the
necessary proposed information for plotting all final information onto a set of drawings. These
drawings will be issued to the construction forces for the placement of the proposed CO-OSP
facilities. Table 9.1 describes the work print specifications process.
The size of the medium should be large enough to be read and small enough to be easily
handled by construction personnel in the field. Black and white documents are also easier to
read in the field and are generally preferred. Multiple sets are usually distributed for bidding,
construction, or reference purposes. Distribution lists should be compiled to track the routing
of initial and revised issues. A routing cover sheet should accompany the set of drawings.
The final work prints must follow the CO-OSP design and construction checklists (see tables
9.2 and 9.3) for all applicable items. Work prints should be checked and approved before
issuing. These work prints will become a final as-built upon completion and will be used for
concluding recording. Approved revisions must be plotted on work prints and reissued when
required.
Once all work is completed and the job is tested and accepted, work prints then become a
final record that must be maintained for reference.
9-4
2004 BICSI
Work Prints, continued

Table 9.1
Work print specifications process
Site Survey
Obtain property owner permission.
Verify security requirements.
Identify special permits required.
Determine proposed route infrastructure.
Indicate splice locations available.
Field Survey
Make video of field conditions.
Obtain prints from other agencies for future plans.
Survey existing maps or records.
Survey and document detailed requirements.
Schematic Design
Future cable and pair requirements forecasted.
Cable assignments applied.
Feeder sized.
Projection plan posted.
Cable counts distributed and assigned.
Work Prints
See specific checklists (Table 9.2 and Table 9.3).
2004 BICSI
9-5
CO-OSP Design and Construction Checklist

Introduction
In the design and construction of telecommunication facilities there are many considerations,
documentation, evaluations, research, and identification of information required to successfully
build an OSP facility. An accepted method of being able to organize this information is
with the use of checklists. Checklists are used to generate a thought process about the
various questions that need to be answered regarding any project. Checklist contents (types
of questions and issues) will vary throughout the country and within the many different
companies doing this type of work. The following is an explanation of the CO-OSP design
and construction checklist.
CO-OSP Design Checklist
A checklist is an aid to the designer. This checklist assists the designer in considering all of
the information that may be pertinent to the CO-OSP project. A checklist contains multiple
categories with many sublistings of line items that may need to be considered. It also provides
additional information for interdepartmental requirements (e.g., accounting, operations, etc.).
Typically, a designer will review all of the line items on the entire checklist. If a line item is
pertinent to the project or the information has value to other departments or personnel involved
with the project, that particular information will be included or considered during the design
phase of the project.
Table 9.2 is a representative example of the quantity or type of information that a designer has
to consider for inclusion with the project. A checklist may be modified to suit the needs of a
particular design office or for local campus environments.
9-6
2004 BICSI
CO-OSP Design Checklist, continued

Table 9.2
CO-OSP design checklist
Ref.
No.
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
2.
2.1
2.2
Title and Subtitles

Title Block
Reference number
Service date
Geographic location
Exchange/campus site
Issue date
Municipality
County
Township
Section
Location and description
Street names
Initials of drafter
Initials of designer
Designer telephone number
Plant locator record (PLR) number
North arrow
Accounting data
Required Information
Cable ID and count
Telecommunications equipment room
direction
2.3 Streets (at least 2)
2.4 Loop and count qualification
2.5 Facilities mortality information
2.6 Regroup
2.7 Splice to splice measurements
2.8 Terminals involved
2.9 Wiring limits
2.10 Permits and rights-of-way
2.11 Fill boxes
2.12 Conductor/transmission study
3.
Electronic Telecom Equipment
3.1 Equipment information
3.2 Relay rack/bay
3.3 Remote terminal (RT), controlled
environment vault (CEV) information
2004 BICSI
9-7
Ref.
No.
4.
4.1
4.2
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
Title and Subtitles

Notes
Assignment
Construction
Aerial Environment
Anchor/guy
Lash/strand/self-support
Pole information
Span measurements
Direct-Buried Environment
Direct-buried/direct-buried joint
Pedestal information
Station marker/components
Underground (UG) utilities identified
Conduit Environment
Conduit description
Conduit configurations
Innerduct description
Tie-in measurements
Wall-to-wall measurements
Underground Environment
Air pressure information
Buffer information
Conduit selection
Optical fiber cable sections
Maintenance hole numbers
Miscellaneous
Bonding and grounding information
Caution information
Transfer splicing
9.4
Cross-connect box information

1.Title Block
1.1 Reference numberA means of identifying the current project. In case of projects that
may be designed or constructed sequentially or concurrently, this reference number is a
means of tracking the order of completion. Most reference numbers will identify the
year and month of the project.
1.2 Service dateThe service date of a project may be the completion of physical
placement of facilities, the completion of splicing operations, the cutover of the job, or
the actual date when the project will be ready to deliver service to the customer.
1.3 Geographic locationUsually means the approximate location of the work project with
regards to the telecommunications equipment room or a physical site that is known and
used as a reference.
1.4 Exchange/campus siteTerm that is used for customers who have multiple exchange
or campus sites. Identifying the campus or exchange site reduces the chance of
confusion with multiple projects.
1.5 Issue dateDate the document is issued.
1.6 MunicipalityIf the work project involves a municipality or other government entity, it
should be identified here.
1.7 CountyThe county where the work project is built (if applicable).
1.8 TownshipThe township where the work project is built (if applicable).
1.9 SectionA section number of the township (if applicable).
1.10 Location and description
1.11 Street namesProvides a locator map for the job and a brief description of what the
job does.
1.12 Initials of drafter
1.13 Initials of designer
1.14 Designer telephone number
1.15 PLR numberPlant locator record (PLR) is a reference to the schematics for the
work project. This is necessary if modifications are required and the designer has to
look at the current plant records.
1.16 North arrowImportant in the drafting process. The designer should ensure that the
north arrow is properly shown on the field notes.
1.17 Accounting data Information needed for the owner to maintain records for capital and
expense information associated with the network.
2. Required Information
2.1 Cable ID and countProvide the cable identification number and pair count of each
cable on the project (e.g., 06 cable, 1-400).
2.2 Telecommunications equipment room directionShow the direction back to the
MC(CD).
2.3 StreetsIdentify at least two street crossings near the project.
2.4 Loop and count qualificationAny terminals or looped cables should show all cable
counts.
2.5 Facilities mortality informationShow the current year, date, and month of cable
placements for this project.
9-8
2004 BICSI

2. Required Information, continued
2.6 RegroupIdentify any regroup activity required on this project. Regroup activity is
defined as customers who are currently working in cable that will be replaced or
removed with this project and need to be regrouped or cut onto the new facilities so
they will not lose service.
2.7 Splice to splice measurementsShow all cable measurements between splices
including cable stubs.
2.8 Terminals involvedA list of all terminals that will be involved in a cable throw or cable
cut. This will aid the construction personnel in cutover of the project and help to
eliminate any potential for cutting a customer out of service.
2.9 Wiring limitsRefers to the assignments of a particular terminal.
Typically, they will only assign a series of addresses within a specified limit
(10183 Hawthorne Lane - 10197 Hawthorne Lane) to a specific terminal. If a new
address falls outside those limits, it will require a designer to go to the field and look
at the situation to determine if a new terminal is needed or if the wiring limits need to
be modified.
2.10 Permits and right-of-wayWhat permits are involved with this project? State whether
they are municipalities, railroad, etc.
2.11 Fill boxesWhat is the existing cable fill (number of working lines) on the cables that
will be affected by this project?
2.12 Conductor/transmission studyDoes this project require an evaluation or transmission
study to determine correct signaling and supervision of the circuits?
3. Electronic Telecommunications Equipment
3.1 Equipment informationProvides all pertinent information (vendor, model number, etc.)
regarding the equipment to be installed with this project.
3.2 Relay rack/bayIdentifies the exact frame, rack, or bay in the telecommunications
room (TR) for the electronic equipment.
3.3 RT, CEV informationProvides all pertinent information regarding the placement of
remote terminals (RTs) or controlled environment vaults (CEVs).
4. Notes
4.1 AssignmentProvides any pertinent notes to assignments that may assist with the
smooth and efficient cutover of this project.
4.2 ConstructionProvides any pertinent notes to construction that may assist with the
smooth and efficient placing and splicing of this project.
2004 BICSI
9-9

5. Aerial Environment
5.1 Anchor/guyProvides information pertinent to the lead/height, angles of pole contact,
and size of anchor and guy.
5.2 Lash/strand/self-supportIdentifies if the cable is to be lashed to the strand, the size of
the strand, or if the cable is to be a self-supporting cable.
5.3 Pole informationDetermines the class and height of any new poles and whether the
existing poles are sufficient to support the weight of the new facility and are in good
condition.
5.4 Span measurementsLists all span-to-span pole measurements.
6. Direct-Buried Environment
6.1 Direct-buried/direct-buried jointWill the cable be direct-buried joint with power or
community antenna television (CATV) or by itself?
6.2 Pedestal informationWhat types and size of pedestals will be used for distribution/
splicing?
6.3 Station marker/componentsWhat type of equipment will be used at the customer
station and what, if any, additional components will be associated with this installation?
6.4 Underground (UG) utilities identifiedWhat utilities exist in the area that may affect
the installation (e.g., power, gas, CATV)?
7. Conduit Environment
7.1 Conduit descriptionDetermines the size and type of conduit (polyvinyl chloride
[PVC]/Schedule 40/60/80, concrete, steel).
7.2 Conduit configurationDetermines the configuration necessary for this installation
(e.g., 2 by 2, 2 by 3, 3 by 4). Show a profile of the conduit configuration for proper
water drainage.
7.3 Innerduct descriptionWhat type of innerduct will be used in this system (corrugated,
smooth inside wall)? How many and what size will be installed in which conduit? Will
there be any color-coding preferences; if so, what will they be?
7.4 Tie-in measurementsShow all tie-in measurements for the conduit run including all
lateral ducts for both horizontal and vertical distances.
7.5 Wall-to-wall measurementsShow all wall-to-wall measurements between every
maintenance hole (MH) and wall-building measurements where entrance facilities are
required.
8. Underground Environment
8.1 Air pressure informationIdentify any air pressure systems involved with the project
and describe how it will affect the work.
8.2 Buffer informationIf a facility will require buffering, describe how to buffer the cable
and prevent activating air pressure alarms. Proper buffering techniques will also protect
the cable from water damage.
9-10
2004 BICSI

8. Underground Environment, continued
8.3 Conduit selectionMake a conduit selection based on the most feasible and efficient
route for placing and splicing procedures. Always consider the next placing project
when selecting a conduit.
8.4 Optical fiber cable sectionsEnsure that the optical fiber cable has sufficient cable
ends to be spliced out of the MH and coil wrapped back in the hole (approximately
30 m [98 ft]) for future arrangements.
8.5 Maintenance hole numbersEnsure that each MH is numbered in a sequential manner
and identified on the work prints.
9. Miscellaneous
9.1 Bonding and grounding informationIdentify all of the appropriate bonding and
grounding requirements for this project and ensure that these requirements meet with
the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) and National Electrical Code
(NEC) codes and/or local practices.
9.2 Caution informationList in bold letters any warnings or cautions that may affect the
safety of personnel on the project or that may damage the facilities.
9.3 Transfer splicingIdentify any working cable pairs that will be transferred from one
cable count to another through a cutover process. Identify the use of any sequence of
work operations and the order for this work.
9.4 Cross-connect box informationIdentify the type and style of cross-box to be used.
Identify the lateral feed and distribution cables entering and leaving the cross-box. Show
the number of working lines and spare facilities in the box upon completion. Detail any
special placing or splicing configurations that may be necessary because of the
geography. Always tie in measurements with the cross-connect box location and the
nearest pole, pedestal, or roadway.
CO-OSP Construction Specifications Checklist
A CO-OSP construction specifications checklist (see Table 9.3) is similar to the CO-OSP
design checklist. A designer checks off the items on the checklist that are used to design the
project. The designer then determines with a CO-OSP construction specifications checklist
what information is pertinent to construction personnel. This construction specifications
checklist contains common items with the design checklist but in many cases may not be
required to be on the construction work prints. The information placed on the construction
work prints is required to:
2004 BICSI
Assist construction in completing the work project in a timely manner.

Limit any unnecessary delays.
Reduce liabilities.
Increase safety.
Identify and document pertinent information.
9-11
CO-OSP Construction Specifications Checklist, continued

Table 9.3
CO-OSP construction specifications checklist
Ref.
No. Title and Subtitles
Ref.
No. Title and Subtitles
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
8.
8.1
8.2
9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
10.
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
11.
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
General
City/county
Permits required
Service date/ship date
Million conductor feet (MCF)
Copies to
Service order information
Transmission information
Billing
North arrow
Joint-use caution note
Street names
Right-of-way and easement information
Distance to telecom equipment room
Symbols
Existing plant
Joint trench bonding information
Special services
Title Block
Nature/necessity
Work order number
Voltage
Maintenance
Safety
Clearances/separations
Traffic lights
Other utilities
Special notes for work personnel
Pole condition
Direct-buried power
Notes
Existing facilities
Shield continuity/conformance
Cable acceptance
Building terminal sketch
Cutover drops
Contact owner
Sequence of splicing operations
Cable and Stubs
Reenterable/encapsulate
Type/gauge/size
Cable ID/pair count
Attachment height
Markers
Obstructions
Conduit or pipe
Reel number
Measurements
9-12
Pressurization and buffering/material

Fuse link
Final counts
Direct-buried drops
Terminals
Type/size/count
Protection/grounding information
Address/wiring limits
Backboard sketch
Terminal equipment/connecting blocks
Poles
Size/class
Staking information
Joint use
Lead/height
Span lengths
Caution notes
CATV/electric co. request
Pole removal information
Load Coils
Type case
Pair count
Maintenance Holes
Length/width/height
Number
Frame and cover/collar
Diagram/detail
Windows entrance
Ventilation
Conduit
Wall-to-wall measurements
Conduit identification
Placement method
Depth
Laterals
Maintenance hole size
Removals
Facilities mortality data
Cable length
Retire in place facilities
Record measurements
2004 BICSI

1. General
1.1 City/countyThe city or county where the work is performed.
1.2 Permits requiredAny permits that are required for completion of this project should be
attached to the construction drawings. These permits are usually necessary during
actual construction activity and may be required to be on site.
1.3 Service date/ship dateThe service completion of the project should be stated on the
work drawings. The ship date of any material (including vendor and telephone number)
should be on the drawings. This information is necessary to the construction work crew
when trying to understand the logistics of the project.
1.4 Million conductor feet (MCF). Used when calculating the quantity of copper conductors
that are placed in plant. This is used by accounting to determine the average costs of
facilities on a per conductor basis. Depending upon the administration, MCF may or
may not be useful.
1.5 Copies toWhat other departments have been sent or need copies of the construction
work drawing?
1.6 Service order informationAre there any service orders associated with this work
project? What are the numbers of the service orders, the number of line requests
associated with them, and how will they be integrated and completed with this work
project?
1.7 Transmission informationAre there any special transmission requirements for this
project (e.g., loading, capacitor build-out networks)?
1.8 BillingAre there any special billing or invoicing arrangements that construction needs
to know about to complete this work project?
1.9 North arrowThe north arrow should be on every work print.
1.10 Joint-use caution notePlace any joint-use caution notes for the work project.
1.11 Street namesStreet names should be indicated on the work plans.
1.12 Right-of-way and easement informationAll right-of-way measurements and
easements should be noted on the work prints.
1.13 Distance to telecommunications equipment room/ultimate distribution pointThe
kilometers (kilofeet) from the start of the project back to the equipment should be noted.
If this is a distribution area, the distance from the project location to the end of the area
should be stated. This point is typically known as the ultimate design point.
1.14 SymbolsEnsure that all symbols used on the construction work prints adhere to the
OSP design practices.
1.15 Existing plantShow any existing plant that may affect the successful completion of
this project or may be an integral part of the project. Show any utility company or thirdparty plant that passes through the project work area. State the owner of the plant, the
telephone number, and any limitations or cautions associated with their plant.
2004 BICSI
9-13

1. General, continued
1.16 Joint trench bonding informationNote any bonding or grounding information or
configurations appropriate for joint trench operations. Consult the most current edition of
the NEC/NESC regulations.
1.17 Special servicesIdentify any special service circuits working in the existing cable that
may require special handling.
2. Title Block
2.1 Nature/necessityProvide a brief description of the nature and necessity for this work
project.
2.2 Work order numberThis identifies a particular work order.
2.3 VoltageWhat is the voltage of the power lines associated with this project that the
working personnel will be exposed to?
2.4 MaintenanceAre there any plant maintenance issues associated with this project that
need to be corrected at the time of the work?
3. Safety
3.1 Clearances/separationsAre the power clearance and separations adequate to
undertake this project?
3.2 Traffic lightsWill traffic lights and vehicular traffic need to be managed to complete
this project?
3.3 Other utilitiesWhat other utilities are in the general work area of the project?
3.4 Special notes for work personnelAre there any special notes regarding the
environment or construction area that the work personnel need to be aware of?
3.5 Pole conditionHave the poles been inspected?
3.6 Direct-buried powerIs there direct-buried power in the area?
4. Notes
4.1 Existing facilitiesAll indicated.
4.2 Shield continuity/conformanceHas the cable shield been bonded properly and is there
conformance testing for the entire project?
4.3 Cable acceptanceHas the cable been tested and accepted both prior to installation
and after construction?
4.4 Building terminal sketchIs the placing and splicing sketch of the building terminals
adequate?
4.5 Cutover dropsHave the number of drops to be cutover and the terminal locations on
this project been identified?
4.6 Contact ownerContact the owner who will be affected by the work projects.
4.7 Sequence of splicing operationsHas a sequence of splicing operations been prepared
by the designer? (The development of a splicing sequence is needed to ensure that any
pair transfers or cable throws are done only after connectivity is established so that
customers do not get disconnected. The technician must understand his obligation to
follow it as written, and to coordinate with the designer if there is any problem.)
9-14
2004 BICSI

5. Cable and Stubs
5.1 Re-enterable/encapsulateWhat type of splice case and sealant or insulant will be
used?
5.2 Type/gauge/sizeDoes the type/gauge and sizes of the cable match the design
specifications?
5.3 Cable ID/pair countIs the cable ID and pair count correct?
5.4 Attachment heightIs the strand size and attachment height specified on the work
drawings?
5.5 MarkersWhat type of cable markers are specified for placement in direct-buried
situations?
5.6 ObstructionsAre there any obstructions?
5.7 Conduit or pipe (push or cut hard top surfaces)Is the conduit placed with directional
boring, pushing, jack and boring, or will the pathway be open cut?
5.8 Reel numberHave the cable reel numbers been assigned to project locations for
appropriate setup and placing operations?
5.9 MeasurementsAre all the measurements available to complete the project?
5.10 Pressurization and buffering/materialIs there sufficient pressure and buffering
information if the work involves an underground conduit cable system? Is the material
available?
5.11 Fuse linkHave all the fuse links been identified on the work prints?
5.12 Final countsAre the cable counts complete and correct?
5.13 Direct-buried dropsAre all direct-buried drops to customers identified and routed
properly?
6. Terminals
6.1 Type/size/countIs the terminal information provided on the work prints?
6.2 Protection/grounding informationIs the terminal protection information on the work
prints?
6.3 Address/wiring limitsIf the project requires wiring limits, are they provided on the
work prints?
6.4 Backboard sketchIf there are inside building terminals, is there an appropriate detail
sketch?
6.5 Terminal equipment/connecting blocksHave the terminal equipment and connector
blocks been specified?
7. Poles
7.1 Size/classHas pole size/class been noted?
7.2 Staking informationHas pole staking been provided?
7.3 Joint useAre there any joint-use requirements?
7.4 Lead/heightHas the lead and height of guy and the pull on the pole been noted?
2004 BICSI
9-15

7. Poles, continued
7.5 Span lengthsAre the span lengths noted?
7.6 Caution notesAre caution notes used?
7.7 CATV/electric company requestAre there any CATV or electric company requests?
7.8 Pole removalIs pole removal information shown on the work prints?
8. Load Coils
8.1 Type caseIs the correct type of splice case noted on work prints?
8.2 Pair countIs the pair count for the load coil noted?
9. Maintenance Holes (MHs)
9.1 Length/width/heightIs length x width x height and headroom noted?
9.2 NumberIs the MH numbered?
9.3 Frame and cover/collarIs the frame and cover/collar included?
9.4 Diagram/detailIs there a MH diagram/detail layout of the placing/splicing
arrangements?
9.5 Windows entranceIs the MH windows entrance straight, splayed, or custom?
9.6 VentilationHas the MH ventilation information been provided?
10. Conduit
10.1 Wall-to-wall measurementsHave the wall-to-wall measurements been
provided?
10.2 Conduit identificationHas the conduit configuration been identified?
10.3 Placement methodHas the placement method (e.g., direct-buried, concrete
encasement) been specified?
10.4 DepthHas the depth of the conduit placements been specified?
10.5 LateralsAre the laterals detailed with measurements, angles, and directional
information?
10.6 Maintenance hole sizeHas the size of the MH been specified?
11. Removals
11.1 Facilities mortality dataHas the mortality (date of removal) date been noted?
11.2 Cable lengthHas the cable length been noted?
11.3 Retire in place facilitiesAre there any retire in place facilities noted? (These facilities
will not be removed.)
11.4 Record measurementsAre all record measurements available? Is there a positive
statement regarding the actions to be taken to ensure that the facilities to be removed
are out of service and cannot create troubles (e.g., the splicer must contact the
administrative center to verify that all working pairs have been removed)?
9-16
2004 BICSI
Work Print Information Examples

Figure 9.1
Splicing together two sections of BKMA-200 cable, clearing and capping the cable end
1
2
BKMA-200
01, 1-200
Figure 9.2
Splicing in a section of cable where a cable order may have been shorted. This causes an additional splice, noted in a
change order, with the additional splice noted as 3A.
3A
BKMA-200
02, 1-200
52'
Figure 9.3
Splice together two cables of different size and clear the ends of the remaining pairs in the BKMA-900
Future cable
BKMA-900
03, 1-900
BKMA-400
03, 1-400
Figure 9.4
Splice a new branch cable to a feed cable. Also, place a pressure plug.
6
BKMG-900
05, 1-900
BKMG-900
05, 1-500
100 XD
05, 601-900
BKMA-100
05, 501-600
2004 BICSI
9-17
Work Print Information Examples, continued

Figure 9.5
New cables and a terminal spliced
NF-16P
BKMA-50
08, 1-50
08, 1-16
BHMA-50
08, 1-50
Figure 9.6
Cross-connect cabinet terminating gel-filled cables
AFMW-900
10, 901-1800
SA46
10, 901-1800
SA46, 1-1800
4
AFMW-900
SA46, 1-900
AFMW-900
SA46, 901-1800
NF-16P
X X
12, 51-66
Figure 9.7
Removal of NF-16 terminal
BKMA-100
12, 1-100
16
9-18
2004 BICSI

Figure 9.8
Replacing an NF-16 terminal with an NF-25 terminal
14
N
F-
12
25
66
16
,5
1-
F-
-7
1
,5
12
BKMA-100
12, 1-100
Figure 9.9
Energizing dead pairs
BKMA-100
(50 XD) 14, 51-100
14, 1-50 + 14, 51-100
BKMA-100
14, 1-100
Figure 9.10
Remove cross-connect terminal
BKMA-200
15, 1-200
2004 BICSI
X
X
X
X
XXX
XX
BKMA 1-100
(AER2, 1-100) 15, 101-200
(15, 1-100 IN)

(AER2, 1-100 OUT)
9-19

Figure 9.11
200-pair cable transfer at splice
BKMH-600
4, 1-600
BKMH-400
(4, 1-400)
4, 401-600 + 200 XD
3
200
Figure 9.12
300-pair cable transfer to new feeder cable
1
300
BKMA-600
12,1-600
BKMA-300
14, 1-300
BKMA-300
(14, 1-300) 12, 1-300
Figure 9.13
Section replacement 300-pair cable
3
X X X X
BKMH-3
16, 301-600
BKMA-300
(16, 301-600)
BKMH-300
16, 301-600
Figure 9.14
Protector placement
PL 1800
ARMM-18
302B-100
W/50' STUB
4B1E protector units
A PL 145' ARMM-18
Building #1 entry wall
3-302B1-100 37
5-302B1-100 36
5-302B1-100 35
Vertical
5-302B1-100 34
Material
PL 145'
PL 18
4
1
INS.JT
A
ARMM-18
24, 1-1800
See print #2.
AFMW-1800
24, 1-1800
9-20
2004 BICSI
Pannel Pl.
Rountdree Dr.
Figure 9.15
Sample maintenance hole plan and profile drawing
02
MH30
03
Williamson Rd.
6'
01
6'
50'
04
P 1497
H3
1
Plan view
Profile
Conduit Summary
Length
Designed Actual
5'
5'
85'
435'
2004 BICSI
Total
Conduits
2
2
2
6
Maintenance Hole Summary

Sec.
01
02
03
04
Type
D
B
B
B
9-21
MH30 12 by 6 by 7 Type A splay

MH31 12 by 6 by 7 Type A splay

Figure 9.16
Butterfly detail worksheet
Locator coordinates:
Maintenance hole/Vault number:
Date:
Inspector:
Re-inspection?
Butterfly detail
1. Mark North point.

2. Identify as either:
Magnetic North.
True North.
Site plan North.
Provide:
Ductbank
identifiers
Ductbank
detail per wall:
Interior dimensions
Height:
Width:
Length:
Number and
size of conduits
Percentage of
fill per conduit
Racking detail
Splice case position(s)
Notes:
9-22
2004 BICSI

Figure 9.17
Butterfly detail
To MH E
900 PR, 09
2301-3200
(4) 45 F10,11,12,&13
900 PR, 09B

3601-4500
(4) 4S
F10, 11, 12, 13
(2) 24M/12S
F8 & F9
(1) 400 PR CA8
3201-3600
8M/4S
Building 5 to
power plant
48M/224S
to facilities
(2) 24M/12S
F8 & F9
(1) 400 PR, CA8

3201-3600
Spare
Cut lead
25 PR
4" Conduit
(Typical)
Telco
fiber
900 PR
Telco
900 PR
3601-4500
(1) 100 PR
unknown
900 PR
Telco splice
(1) 50 PR
unknown
To Building 5
50 PR
To power
plant splice
Maintenance
hole G
900 PR, 09B

3601-4500
900 PR, 09
2301-3200
3" Conduit
(Typ 4 places)
(1) 100 PR (Unknown)
900 PR Telco
Telco fiber
(1) 50 PR (Unkown)
(1) 8M/4S
Building 5 to
power plant
(1) 50 PR
3601-3650
09A
Power plant
Spare
To MH 7
N
XYZ
BICSI
8610 Hidden River Pkwy.
Tampa, FL 33637-1000
800-242-7405
Drawn XX
2004 BICSI
Check XX
Date XX
9-23
Scale
Proj. No. XXX
Sheet No.
Ref.
Dwg. X-XX
9-24
2004 BICSI
Chapter 10
Scope of Work
Outlines the major requirements of a scope of work
including a task timeline and required resources.
Updated with text on narrative and proposal drawings,
and the project managers role in defining expectations.
Table of Contents
Scope of Work ....................................................................................................................... 10-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Narrative ......................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Project Drawings ............................................................................................................................ 10-2
Systems Structure .......................................................................................................................... 10-2
Associated Hardware ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
Method of Placement ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
Splicing Twisted-Pair Cable ............................................................................................................ 10-3
Splicing Optical Fiber Cable ........................................................................................................... 10-3
Splicing Coaxial Cable .................................................................................................................... 10-3
Terminating Twisted-Pair Cable ...................................................................................................... 10-4
Terminating Optical Fibers .............................................................................................................. 10-4
Terminating Coaxial Cable ............................................................................................................. 10-4
Maintenance Hole (MH) Plan View and Elevation Detail Drawings ................................................ 10-4
Material List .................................................................................................................................... 10-5
Final Acceptance ............................................................................................................................ 10-5
Project Specific Note Section ......................................................................................................... 10-5
Optional Considerations ................................................................................................................. 10-6
Additional Issues ............................................................................................................................ 10-6
2004 BICSI
10-i
Scope of Work
Introduction
A scope of work (SOW) is necessary for any project. A SOW should provide detailed
statements and descriptions of the work content to meet the project requirements.
A well-written SOW should ensure:
The desired end result.
A common bidding basis for competitors.
The desired schedule of completion.
Time and resources necessary.
Participants understand responsibilities.
Coordination requirements.
This chapter outlines the major requirements of a good SOW and describes the need for
each item. In addition, a description of the work to be accomplished and the resources to be
supplied are included. Chapter 11: Project Management, covers some methods of determining
scheduling requirements.
Narrative
The first part of a well-written scope of work includes a concise narrative. The narrative
should explain why, what, and when the project is required.
The project schedule should include all material and services that are required from sources
not under the contractors direct control to include actions required by the owner. The project
manager (PM) should describe any dependencies upon the owner, and third parties, as well as
all:
Project assumptions.
Expediting methods.
Active system interfacing requirements.
Other management-related issues critical to the timely and successful completion of this
project.
The plan should describe the manpower and mobilization requirements in terms of functional
responsibility, level, and head count.
2004 BICSI
10-1
Project Drawings
Project drawings help give specific overviews of the SOW as it relates to materials, system
structures, and placement locations. All information in the descriptions should match the
drawings. Symbols should be consistent and labeled clearly. There should be a cover sheet
with a drawing table of contents and a symbol key.
The project drawings should be detailed enough to allow the bidding contractor enough
information to make an accurate bid. At a minimum, the drawings should include:
MapLayout of the general area of construction.
Supporting structure depictionAll details of the pole line, conduit, utility tunnel, bridge
attachments, etc. should be shown.
Media planDisplays all splicing and terminating details.
Termination hardwareProvides details on requirements for termination hardware.
Additional drawingsPlans, elevations, and cross sections as required.
Systems Structure
Systems structure should be outlined in the SOW, such as:
PathwaysIs the proposed customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP) aerial, directburied, underground, or a combination? Are the pathways existing or proposed (e.g., does
the pole line or underground conduit exist or does it have to be built)?
CableWhat type and size cable(s) are being placed?
Associated Hardware
Associated hardware includes cabling hardware, closures, pathways, and connecting
hardware. Details for these items should be listed in the material lists. Any significant
requirements for these items may be included in the descriptions.
Method of Placement
The telecommunications distribution designer should include SOW descriptions that designate
all applicable methods of placement, including:
AerialFor sections where aerial plant is proposed, it should be clear whether the
proposed cable is to be placed on a new support strand, lashed to an existing support
strand, or be self-supporting. Are new facilities required?
UndergroundFor underground sections, it should be clear whether the proposed cable is

being placed in an existing conduit or new conduit. Are new facilities required?
Direct-buriedFor direct-buried sections, information should be provided as to the soil

conditions (e.g., rock and sand).
TunnelWhen tunnel requirements exists, describe means for entry and exit of both cable
and personnel.
TransitionsBe clear on how transitions occur between aerial, direct-buried, and

underground cables.
10-2
2004 BICSI
Splicing Twisted-Pair Cable

The SOW should identify the splicing closures and connector requirements for the project.
Options to consider include:
EncapsulatedIf moisture protection is required, specify encapsulated closures that

contain a filling and/or desiccant.
NonencapsulatedIf moisture protection is not required, specify this type.
Cabling hardware and connecting hardwareMake sure that the splice closures and
connecting hardware specified are compatible with the end result required (e.g., sealed
case for moisture protection requirements).
Connecting methodsIndividual or multipair systems may be used. Typically, product

specifications are included (e.g., modular systems or single pair systems).
Splicing Optical Fiber Cable

The methods of splicing optical fiber should be specified within the SOW. Some of the
considerations should include:
Mode of optical fiber.
Type of splice (e.g., fusion or mechanical).
Cabling hardware/connecting hardwareMake sure that the splice closures and

connecting hardware specified are compatible with the end result required (e.g., sealed
case for moisture protection requirements). Identify the type(s) of splicing closures
required for the project.
Acceptable loss levels (e.g., connector, cable, link).
Splicing Coaxial Cable

Specify the type of splicing materials required, such as:
2004 BICSI
Terminating hardwareSpecify type or brand.
Splicing and connecting hardware.
Passive hardware.
Insertion loss.
Structural return loss.
10-3
Terminating Twisted-Pair Cable

The SOW should specify some of the following termination requirements for twisted-pair
cable:
Protected twisted-pair cable. If the CO-OSP facilities are exposed to lightning or

electrical contact, both ends of the cable runs should be protected. The type of protection
required should be outlined in the document.
Unprotected twisted-pair cable should be identified.
Termination hardware (e.g., patch panel, cross-connect).
Grounding and electrical protection hardware and methodologyEven though

construction personnel should be familiar with grounding and protection requirements,
it is necessary to detail these requirements in the SOW.
Number and type of cross-connects.
Number and type of patch cables to be furnished or installed.
Terminating Optical Fibers

The designer may include specifics concerning the termination of all optical fibers, such as:
Mode of optical fiber.
Connector types.
Termination hardware.
Acceptable loss levels.
Terminating Coaxial Cable

Identify the type of patch panel or other termination hardware to be used by:
Selecting the connector.
Selecting termination hardware.
Maintenance Hole (MH) Plan View and Elevation Detail Drawings

To minimize bid variances, include MH detail drawings that depict:
Size and shape.
Racking detail.
Cable routing showing the path of all cables in the MH. Include MH lay-down.
Splice location. All splice locations should be identified.
Meets American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

standards for application.
10-4
2004 BICSI
Material List
All major items should be summarized from the construction drawings. Major items are
considered to be cable, conduit, poles, guys, anchors, support strands, terminals, protectors,
and closures. Items (e.g., nuts, bolts, cable ties) should be included in a material list as
miscellaneous items.
The following information should be included in the material list:
Description of items.
Manufacturer and part numberInclude if no substitutions are allowed.
Unit price should be provided only when projects are completed in-house or when
estimating a reasonable price in relation to a contractors bid.
Availability and delivery.
Final Acceptance
Acceptance criteria specify what constitutes substantial and final completion of the project.
Criteria may address loss limits, transmission characteristics, the percentage of total facilities,
which must meet or exceed performance standards.
Project-Specific Note Section
This section is provided for the designer to add project notes. The notes may include:
2004 BICSI
Alternatives and substitution processIt is up to the designer to determine if equivalent

substitutions will be allowed. If so, state under what conditions they will be allowed.
Reference codes, standards, and regulationsThe designer should include reference to

applicable documents, such as BICSI, National Electrical Code(NEC), National
Electrical Safety Code(NESC), Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Telecommunications Industry
Association (TIA), and other standards setting organizations when appropriate.
Descriptions of site conditionsSome conditions that may affect the project include
access limitations, security inspections, hours of work, hazardous materials, permits or
authorizations required, and similar conditions.
Employee requirementsSome projects may require employees with minimum levels of

experience or expertise, citizenship, security clearance, and absence of criminal records.
Additional recommendations as appropriate.
10-5
Optional Considerations
The following items, if applicable, are optional based on the designers responsibilities for
the project and the SOW:
Present design/estimate to customer.
Assist customer in preparation of request for proposal (RFP).
Prepare final construction drawings and specifications.
Assist customer in evaluating response to RFPs.
Additional Issues
The SOW will ideally include items listed previously in this chapter as a definitive
product. However, even on major projects this may not be the case and the document
will be less precise.
Depending on whether the SOW is intended for a design, construction, or a turnkey product,
some elements may be missing. For example, on an engineering design, the owner may
describe the desired end and encourage the designer to develop a cost effective solution
to meet the owners requirements. On a construction project, the owner may not have a
complete knowledge of the existing infrastructure (i.e., condition of poles and conduit systems,
availability of spare facilities), and will leave it up to the participating bidders to conduct a site
survey to become familiarized with the work effort required.
The SOW may specify the desired completion date without a full consideration of the
conditions that will have to be addressed to bring this about. Consequently, it will fall to the
estimator, the project manager, and the construction contractor to provide an acceptable
price, an acceptable delivery interval, and an acceptable end product to the owner.
A SOW is required in all instances that a client and a bidder enter into an agreement to
exchange money for a product. The smaller the cost is to the owner, the less likely that the
scope of work will be definitive. Even so, there is a requirement that a full understanding
between the parties be established before the agreement to perform work is made.
Chapter 12: Cost Estimation, discusses the process associated with change orders which
may supplement an open project when shortcomings or changed conditions are found.
10-6
2004 BICSI
Chapter 11
Project Management
Covers the project management process and the role of a
project manager (PM). Includes information on project
schedule and tracking, with an emphasis on the role of
project scheduling software as an aid to the PM. Discusses
preliminary estimates and other project management
responsibilities. Defines terms and conditions used in
contract documents.
Table of Contents
Project Management ............................................................................................................ 11-1

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 11-1
General Project Management Concepts .......................................................................................... 11-1
Project Tracking .............................................................................................................................. 11-2
Example Project Outline .................................................................................................................. 11-3
Project Scheduling .......................................................................................................................... 11-4
Preliminary Planning ....................................................................................................................... 11-6
Project Cost Estimate for Supporting Structure ......................................................................... 11-6
Physical Media Estimate .......................................................................................................... 11-6
Special Handling ....................................................................................................................... 11-7
Other Roles for Project Managers (PMs) ................................................................................... 11-7
Logistic Planning ...................................................................................................................... 11-7
Material Management ............................................................................................................... 11-8
Master Equipment List .............................................................................................................. 11-8
Contractor and Vendor Information Files .................................................................................... 11-9
Material Procurement Tracking System .................................................................................... 11-9
Backups and Spare Parts ....................................................................................................... 11-10
Maintenance Considerations .................................................................................................... 11-11
Maintenance Analysis .............................................................................................................. 11-11
Special Tools ........................................................................................................................... 11-11
Special Access Requirements................................................................................................... 11-11
Project Management Responsibilities ............................................................................................
Coordination Drawings ............................................................................................................
Submittals and Approvals ........................................................................................................
Environmental Protection Considerations ................................................................................
Proposal Language .................................................................................................................
Posting Progress and Coordination .........................................................................................
11-12
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-14
Schedule Updating ........................................................................................................................ 11-15

Project Management Terms and Conditions ................................................................................... 11-16
2004 BICSI
11-i
Project Management
Introduction
If a project is to be completed on schedule, everyone must know when each portion of the job
and related dependencies need to be completed. For example, if the proposed project consists
of a new conduit run with new cable pulled inside, the correct size and type of conduit
between the correct points must be completed prior to pulling the cable. The question is, when
must the conduit be started and completed allowing enough time to pull the cable and still meet
the required milestone. This same logic can apply to many other aspects of the project (e.g.,
pole lines and aerial cable or innerduct and optical fiber cable). Project management software
is useful in documenting and managing this process.
The project manager (PM) should verify all distances and cable lengths. The owner normally
does not accept responsibility as to the accuracy of distances on drawings.
The PM should verify:
All dimensions in the field.
Locations and types of cabling to be used in completing the job.
Lengths of new cable or ducts to be furnished and installed.
Capacity and condition of conduits, cable ladders, and sleeves.
Space requirements.
Equipment operating envelopes.
Personnel safety envelopes.
Physical confines of the areas of the project to ensure that materials can be installed in
the spaces allotted (e.g., including riser space, heights of poles, stub-ups, guy right-ofways, sleeves/conduits/slots, and cable separation space).
Special access requirements (e.g., Homeland Security at airports).
Additionally, the PM must verify the load bearing capacity for cable trays and floors. A
Professional Engineer (PE) licensed in that jurisdiction or the authority having jurisdiction
(AHJ) must approve the floor loading.
General Project Management Concepts
To manage a project, it must be broken down into measurable and clearly defined steps.
These steps must have clear tasks, milestones, time periods or durations, assigned resources
(e.g., personnel, equipment, tools, facilities, transportation, flaggers, traffic control, and
material), and associated costs. Each task must be related to each other in a proper sequence,
even if there are no other task dependencies. Task dependence is when one task must be
completed before the next task can begin (e.g., a hole must be dug before the utility pole can
be placed).
These defined and ordered tasks form what is generally known as a work breakdown
structure (WBS). The order and sequence of the WBS is normally established by the:
2004 BICSI
Nature of the work.
Knowledge and experience of the person forming and ordering the WBS logic.
11-1
General Project Management Concepts, continued

Many tasks must be performed sequentially, while other tasks may be performed concurrently
or independently from the others. All information must be organized in a format that can be
viewed to see the full project timeline and tasks sequence. One such format is called a
GANTT chart.
After the WBS is determined, the PM must establish milestones for the project. Once the
WBS and the project milestones are established, resources must be assigned to each task.
It is important to understand that resources can be people, equipment, tools, space, utilities,
and materials. Many different resources may be required for one task.
NOTE:
The PM needs to and similar statements in this text do not mean that the PM has
to personally perform the work or required action. The PM must ensure that
someone with the appropriate expertise completes the task.
Project Tracking
It is important to know that all plans and schedules must be updated to report current
conditions. As the project progresses, the PM must adjust the WBS, the milestones, and the
resources. A PM identifies the upcoming problems early and intervenes quickly to minimize
schedule impacts.
According to the Project Management Institute (PMI), the project management process
includes project:
Integration.
Scope.
Time.
Cost.
Quality.
Human resource management.
Communications.
Risk.
Procurement.
All these areas continually interact to cause project management responses.
11-2
2004 BICSI
Example Project Outline

Before a project can be started, it must be defined. The definition of a project may not be
clear-cut (e.g., the setting of a new telephone pole and the extension of a feeder cable). Some
questions to ask include:
What must be accomplished?
What information is needed?
More importantly, what should have been done?
Why is this project being built?
Perhaps there is a new building site being proposed and cables must be extended to feed this
building. The as-built (as-is) records of the existing aerial plant must be located and plans for
the new building site procured. Field and utility information must be gathered. The local onecall system should be contacted to locate all the participating utilities. (Note that nonparticipants and/or private organizations are not members, and a field survey is required.)
A field survey should be made to check the as-built and new building plans and to recheck the
located utilities. Anything that can affect the design must be located. The PM must verify the
pole, necessary guys, cable extension, and determine any right-of-way or permit requirements.
This includes any local governing rules (e.g., building or occupancy permits).
Once completed, the bill-of-material should be developed. The lead time of each item and the
availability of resources must be calculated. Material must be ordered, permits requested, and
right-of-way obtained. The PM should schedule the construction crews and coordinate any
traffic control. Once the project is completed, the PM should document the as-built records.
The following baseline tasks are implied and form the high level of the GANTT chart:
2004 BICSI
Obtain necessary permits and licenses.
Find the as-built (as-is) records of the existing aerial plant.
Obtain the plans for the new building.
Obtain floor-loading approvals.
Compute cable tray loads.
Determine the right-of-way requirements.
Obtain the right-of-way.
Obtain local right-to-work permits.
Obtain the field and utility information.
Obtain the utility records.
Have a one-call service locate all public utilities.
Make a field survey to check the as-built and building plans.
Schedule the pole placement.
Schedule necessary guys.
Schedule the cable extension.
Determine the bill-of-material.
11-3
Example Project Outline, continued
Determine the lead time of each item.
Determine availability of the resources.
Schedule the resources.
Install a new telephone pole.
Coordinate any traffic control.
Install additional cable run.
Document the as-built records.
Schedule the customer invoice.
Project Scheduling
Scheduling is a major function of a PM. Ideally, a project is defined so that the delivery date is
known and the process of achieving the date can be determined by working back to the
necessary start date. The individual activities comprising the project should be identified and
planned to make best use of the combination of people, time, equipment, materials, and other
resources that will be required to complete the project. Once these individual activities are
identified, it is necessary to place them in an orderly sequence that will support the
accomplishment of the project. By following this sequence, the desired project will be
delivered:
On time.
Within budget.
With a high degree of quality.
Project scheduling in todays microprocessor-based environment is greatly facilitated by using

automated systems. While the concept of scheduling is still necessary, much of the tedious
effort that was required in manually preparing charts, graphs, and time lines (and the
associated tasks of maintaining them when conditions changed) has been eliminated by
computer-based scheduling programs.
Computer-based project scheduling software has been designed for different size projects.
Also, the software can be designed to be client specific by a consulting firm (e.g., either as
programs to be administered by the client, or as a service to be provided by the vendor) who
will provide the oversight to achieve the desired results. The software programs themselves
are based on GANTT Charts, critical path methods (CPM), program evaluation review
technique (PERT), or other systems that track and analyze activities. The main feature in any
scheme for planning a schedule is to identify the tasks that comprise the overall project. By
analyzing the sequence in which these tasks must occur (e.g., by determining which tasks are
dependent on or independent of other tasks), it is possible to develop a work schedule that
minimizes the overall interval for completing the project. It also assists in the recognition of
when materials must be ordered, and when delivery intervals will affect the schedule. The
economic balance between just-in-time delivery and the penalty for lost efficiencies from
absent materials can be factored into the project costs.
11-4
2004 BICSI
Project Scheduling, continued

Critical path analysis is an extremely effective method of analyzing a complex project. It
allows the calculation of the minimum length of time in which the project can be completed,
and which activities should be prioritized to meet the schedule. Where a task has to be
completed by a specific date, critical path analysis helps to focus on the essential activities to
which attention and resources should be devoted. It gives an effective basis for the scheduling
and monitoring of progress.
The essential concept behind critical path analysis is that some plan activities are dependent
on other activities being completed first. For example, a design must precede the start of
construction. These dependent activities need to be completed in a sequence, with each
activity being more-or-less completed before the next activity can begin. Dependent activities
are also called sequential activities. Other activities are not dependent on completion of any
other tasks, or may be done at any time before or after a particular stage is reached. These
are nondependent or parallel tasks.
Program management cannot be done without a full appreciation of the need for, and
understanding of, project scheduling. Whether the scheduling is done by computer-based
programs, or manually created and maintained graphics, stick diagrams, or other means, there
is a need for a representation of the activities. Scheduling will:
Allow resources to be assigned in a manner that avoids duplication.
Assure that necessary intervals for ordering and delivery can be recognized in advance of
the need and with knowledge of vendor capabilities to meet client requirements.
Enable efficient management of the project.
Depending on the sophistication, computer-based programs are capable of generating many

different types of management reports to assist in controlling the project(s). The programs
would include:
Jeopardy reports regarding the amount and type of resources required.
Inadequacy of the delivery schedule to support the dates established as milestones in the
schedule.
Identification of tasks (on the critical path) that are in danger of slipping, and thereby
causing the schedule to slip.
An effective critical path analysis (or other means of project control that is able to quantify,
monitor, and inform) can make the difference between success and failure on complex
projects, and can be an effective tool for assessing the importance of problems faced during
the implementation of the plan. It is most effective when the:
Model is updated regularly to reflect current conditions on the project.
Structure of the project is well defined and understood.
Time and resource estimates are reliable.
Activities do not share resources.
Data generated are shared and acted on by all organizational levels.
While the basics of CPM can be performed manually, the availability of sophisticated project
management software programs and the presence of personal computer (PC) based support
systems makes the use of this software a practical choice.
2004 BICSI
11-5
Project Scheduling, continued

The ability to appreciate the power of computer-based programs that provide scheduling
information does not require that the manager or engineer actually administer the software.
Depending on the degree of complexity of the project, or the scope, timeline, or other factors,
it may be desirable to contract this particular function to a consulting or project management
firm.
No matter who administers the software program, it is still no better than the validity of the
data used. Unless there is a commitment to spend the time and effort it takes to ensure that
current and accurate information are provided, the data generated will not be helpful.
Preliminary Planning
Project Cost Estimate for Supporting Structure
If the project is being contracted, it is important to have an idea of what to expect from the
contractor. Pricing data should include material, equipment, labor, testing, documentation, and
the estimated cost for:
Aerial.
Underground.
Direct-buried.
Physical Media Estimate

The same logic applies for the cost of the customer-purchased materials. If pricing data is
available, estimate the cost for the following materials for:
Aerial.
Underground.
Direct-buried.
PMs should develop a logistics support plan for outside plant (OSP) projects. Prior to
establishing the details of a logistics plan, estimate the parameters of the materials and
equipment to be utilized for the total project. One method to do this is to gather information
from groups of repeating-type projects and apply the information to the proposed project.
These are ball park or rough-order of magnitude (ROM) estimates used to facilitate the
planning effort.
Elements considered for a ROM include the:
Identification of subsystems and major components within the subsystems.
Range and types of material and equipment within each major WBS element.
Definition of high-dollar or long-lead critical items of material and equipment.
Identification of long-lead items that should be performed on a continuing basis and a

format developed for obtaining required information.
Isolation of special-handling requirements for material and equipment, right-of-way

activities, and permit processes.
11-6
2004 BICSI
Preliminary Planning, continued

These elements should include the cost of:
Permits, bid bonds, and insurance.
Testing and test documentation.
Producing as-built documentation.
Traffic control.
Security systems, trailers, and guards.
Project manager.
Storage and trash removal.
Cost due to unavoidable waiting time (e.g., paid lost production).
Special Handling
Major components may require special handling and storage. Some components may have a
very short shelf life (e.g., cement).
PMs should consider procuring the following type of items early:
Materials that must be ordered in advance of awarding a contract, due to limited

availability.
Materials and equipment with long engineering or production manufacturing times.
These materials are usually those designed to meet unusual system specifications of a project
and are normally purchased as a complete system:
Large quantity buys to avoid repeated set-up costs that are significant in value.
Items common to existing project equipment or systems.
Materials and equipment that are relatively standard in nature and where price-quantity
discounts may be attained through large-volume procurement.
Items that require special handling requirements of an unusual nature (e.g., electronic
control components, calibrated machines, and test equipment), or those that require heavy
lifts or handling equipment.
Other Roles for Project Managers (PMs)

There are cases when the most limiting resource available is time. To prevent loss of the time
resource during the proposal, bid, and contract negotiation phase, some project tasks can be
performed simultaneously with the bid process. For example, early identification of staff
training requirements and the training itself may be conducted during this period.
Logistic Planning
Logistics activities are accomplished during early stages of the planning. However, the need
for additional logistics planning activities will arise during the life of a project. Logistic analyses
should include shipping costs and modes of transportation from the point-of-origin to the job
site (e.g., traffic analysis for material and equipment to be shipped, acceptable alternates).
2004 BICSI
11-7

The planning should contain information that reflects every facet of the logistics process.
Inputs from all organizations concerned with the material and equipment process should be
collected and stored in data files that will comprise the logistics database.
Logistics planning is normally based upon input from planners who provide appropriate
advance identification of required project materials and equipment. This input is based upon
experience and information extracted from the design package and appropriate consultants,
staff, or vendors.
Material Management
For material management analysis, warehousing is a planning factor. Warehousing needs must
be identified early in a project to ensure that material is received in usable condition and
available for scheduled delivery to the job site. Ideally, material should be delivered to the job
site. Some long-lead time items may be stored for long periods of time or as little as a week or
less. A conservative assumption of a three-month average holding time is recommended for
sizing warehouse space for most projects.
Material inspection and document review need to be performed. The PM may purchase
spares for maintenance-repetitive items upon approval and funding. Items such as poles or
pre-cast maintenance holes (MHs) need to be inspected upon delivery at the job site and
before placement.
All storage areas may not be protected from the weather. Determine which items require
weather protection or other storage techniques. Determine locations and configurations of
storage facilities as soon as possible. Safety and security play a major role in storage area cost
and selection.
Master Equipment List
During the design phase, materials and equipment are added to a master equipment list, which
is a cumulative record of all material and equipment to be used. Items are classified as critical
and noncritical.
Critical items are those that due to unique or unusual specification or market conditions require
lead times. These lead times are in excess of what can be handled by the contractor during
the scheduled construction period and are flagged for special treatment. Similarly, miscellaneous and consumable items may also become critical when they are not available. A work
crew could be standing by waiting for an item (e.g., duct lubricant) in order to place cable.
Selection of these items should occur as soon as possible after the award of the contract
design. The designer should be provided with a list of anticipated critical items, showing their
respective lead times. This allows the designer to understand the effect that the material
specified in the design has on the overall schedule.
Less critical items form the majority of items needed in a project. Together with the critical
items for the same project, a design material list should be prepared. Certain items used in
projects have waste (e.g., cable or connectors are broken during the normal course of
installation). When ordering, include an estimated increment above the required quantity for
these types of items. Use judgment or get advice from someone with experience. For
example, short cable reel lengths of 305 m (1000 ft) versus 1520 m (5000 ft) will cause more
waste than a large reel, and a long section pull is less wasteful then several short ones.
11-8
2004 BICSI

The design material list is a complete record of material and equipment that is expected to be
used in a project. A decision should be made as to who will procure these items (e.g., primary
contractor, a subcontractor, or the client).
Contractor and Vendor Information Files
The contractor information file maintains a list of prospective contractors (architect or
engineer [A/E], construction, suppliers, and others). Contractors or vendors can be notified of
pending procurement activities within their area of expertise. This may reduce the procurement lead time.
The WBS can be created to show each task in the procurement cycle. Some of these tasks
include:
Identify the item.
Write a purchase order (PO).
Approve the PO.
Order the item.
Determine the item shipping period.
Receive the item.
Inspect the item.
Approve, test, and store the item.
Stage the item.
Ship the item to job site.
Install or consume item.
Field verify the items installation or consumption.
Return item for credit.
Material Procurement Tracking System

A tracking system should be established to monitor the progress of all procurements. Each
item follows a path of milestones or activities that can be tailored to a particular item or preset
for classes of items.
The first phase of the monitoring process begins with the requisition for material and
equipment, and ends with the receipt of that material at the job site or the warehouse.
A second phase is the audit trail. It must be confirmed that the item is installed into the project,
returned for credit, put into spares, or turned over to the client for inventory.
The tracking system should contain information concerning:
2004 BICSI
Expediters.
Delivery schedules.
Shipping instructions.
Engineering.
Quality control considerations.
11-9

The selected activities or milestones are used to monitor progress by comparison of scheduled
and actual completion dates. These activities occur in chronological sequence and are linked
together to form an audit trial. Separate audit trails can be established for each class of
material or equipment.
An entry is made in the inventory system for material or equipment that is not delivered
directly to the contractor. This system maintains all pertinent information about material that is
in the possession of the PM, pending release to the project contractor or job site. The
inventory system maintains:
A work identification number.
The number of items on hand.
An exact location.
Value.
A special handling or storage requirements.
A scheduled delivery date.
Backups and Spare Parts

A major element of a logistics plan is the identification of spares and maintenance support
requirements. Operational support costs are a major portion of the total cost of ownership of
any system. Downtime must be minimized to avoid a failure capable of causing a delay or
interruption in the operation of the system. This is important during the burn-in, testing, and
acceptance phases. Equipment may be delivered on time and then fail testing, thus causing a
milestone due date to be missed.
After the evaluation of the design package, shop drawings, and the receipt of vendor data,
a master spare parts list is initiated. This list consists of items that are considered for
maintenance.
The preliminary master spare parts list:
Contains the spare part requirements of the system or subsystem.
Serves as a baseline standard.
Is utilized for performance of system validation procedures.
Is a mandatory prerequisite for preparation of a recommended spare parts list.
When preparing the recommended spare parts list, consider part criticality, availability, lead
time, repair or replacement requirements, part cost, and shelf life. Consideration is given to
equipment subject to the following:
Pilferage.
Wear, corrosion, or erosion during normal operation.
Failure that may cause shutdown of the equipment.
Damage or breakage during maintenance, inspection, or transport.
11-10
2004 BICSI

Maintenance Considerations
Maintenance procedures for critical and noncritical subsystems are also developed from this
list. Maintenance analyses should be performed on equipment and facilities items such as:
Installation identification of special tools and test equipment required.
Preventive maintenance identification of actions and resources needed to maintain the

system or equipment in an operation state.
Corrective maintenance identification causing a malfunction or failure, and methods to

return the item to an operational state.
Special licenses or security clearances.
Maintenance Analysis
The maintenance analysis will provide:
Definition and schedule for servicing inspection, calibration, and preventive maintenance.
Definition and procedure for fault isolation.
Definition of function and procedure for corrective maintenance.
Identification of requirements (characteristics and quantities) for maintenance equipment,

soft goods, and consumables.
Identification of tasks, skills, and quantitative requirements for maintenance personnel.
Staffing tables, including quantities and skill requirements.
Personnel training requirements (e.g., licenses and certifications).
Special Tools
In addition to the master equipment list and the recommended spare parts list, PMs may
prepare a special tool and a test equipment list based upon engineering drawings, bills of
material, vendor recommendations, system technical documents, and maintenance parameters.
The special tools list should define all tools required to perform maintenance and installation of
an unusual nature and not readily available off-the-shelf. A test equipment list should identify
all test equipment required to perform analyses of components of equipment and systems.
Special Access Requirements
Special access requirements include:
2004 BICSI
Homeland Security inspections.
Security clearances.
Background checks.
11-11
Project Management Responsibilities

The PM is responsible for properly scheduling all required material, tools, documentation, test
equipment, and labor to meet the project schedule. PMs should visit the site of the project
often and attend all meetings. PMs should fully familiarize themselves with the existing
conditions including contracts, state and local codes, licensing and permit requirements, union
requirements, labor rates and fringe benefits, travel costs, affiliations fees, and transportation
expense prevailing in the local labor market. The PM must carefully examine all drawings,
specifications, and other contract documents. If any discrepancies exist between drawings,
specifications, and the project, the discrepancies must be brought to the AHJ for resolution.
The PM or an assigned delegate should obtain appropriate reference manuals, codes,
standards, installation instructions, drawings, shop drawing submittals, and/or information
required for installation prior to installation. The PM should plan for items of labor, material,
and equipment not specified in detail or shown on drawings, but are incidental to or necessary
for the complete installation and proper operation of the project. The PM should ensure that all
proper certificates of inspection and approval from the AHJ have been requested, obtained,
and available for resolution.
Coordination Drawings
Coordination drawings are to be completed. The drawings must show the relationship and
integration of different construction elements that require close and careful coordination during
fabrication or during installation to fit in the restricted space provided or to function as
intended.
Shop drawings should show the complete system and all system features and equipment or
setting options that are required. Product cut-sheets should be keyed to the shop drawings so
that during review it can be determined how each component fits into the design.
Test plans may be submitted for cabling, grounding, and system testing. Where necessary for
clarity, drawing details should show the test setup. Plans should include types of test
equipment to be used.
11-12
2004 BICSI
Project Management Responsibilities, continued

Submittals and Approvals
A PM should coordinate preparation and processing of all submittals and transmit each
submittal sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of related construction and
installation of testing activities to avoid delay. The PM should coordinate related transmittals of
submittals for the same element of the project and different elements of the project. This will
assure that processing will not be delayed by an owners need to review related submittals
concurrently for coordination in order to approve. The PM should allow sufficient review time
so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals,
including time for resubmittals. The PM should work to gain early approval to long-lead items
or items that may require special permits or custom requirements.
Submittal preparation time and owners submittal review time should be shown on the project
schedule and considered in the computation of the project schedule. The PM should prepare
and maintain a submittal status log of each submittal item by submittal item number.
NOTE:
Requests for information or clarification are not submittal items. It is a good

practice to put these requests in writing and process these requests outside the
submittal process.
When a manufacturer or product is specified, and the term or approved equivalent is used,
the substituted item normally should conform in all respects to the specified item.
If it is necessary to request a substitution of an item specified, the PM should submit the
product cut-sheet for both the item to be used and the item specified. This submittal should
state why a substitution is being requested.
The client normally will mark each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory phrase. The
phrase normally has the following general meaning to indicate the action taken:
2004 BICSI
ApprovedWhere submittals are marked approved, that part of the project covered by
the submittal may precede provided it complies with requirements of the contract
documents. This approval is limited to determining that the submittal conforms generally to
the project request for proposal (RFP), design, plans, and specifications. The approval,
however, does not guarantee final acceptance, which is a process separate from this
action.
Approved with exceptionWhen submittals are marked approved with exception, that
part of the project covered by the submittal may precede provided it complies with either
the owners notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the contract
documents. This approval is limited to determining that the submittal conforms generally
with the project RFP, design, plans, and specifications. Approval with exception, however,
does not guarantee final acceptance, which is a process separate from this action.
RejectedWhen submittal is marked rejected, do not proceed with that part of the
project covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other
activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the owners notations;
resubmit without delay. Repeat as necessary, to obtain a different action mark. Submittals
marked rejected cannot be used.
11-13
Project Management Responsibilities, continued

Environmental Protection Considerations
The PM may need to provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent environmental
contamination. The project may be required to provide equipment and personnel, perform
emergency measures required to contain any spillages to include water, and remove
contaminated materials.
The PM needs to ensure adequate methods to control fumes from materials and operations
(e.g., paint/painting, stain, adhesives, power tools, glue/gluing, and welding). The PM must
provide and make readily available material safety data sheets (MSDS) for all substances
utilized in or during construction on the job site.
Proposal Language
Language used in RFPs and other contract documents is often abbreviated. Implied words
and meanings should be appropriately interpreted. Singular words may be interpreted as plural
and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable, as the full context of the contract
documents so indicates. Imperative and streamlined language is generally used. The following
information may be helpful:
Copies of standardsEach entity engaged in construction on the project is required to be

familiar with industry standards applicable to that entitys construction activity.
Abbreviations and namesTrade association names and titles of general standards are
frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used, they normally
mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization,
AHJ, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision.
Posting Progress and Coordination

The PM maintains and posts daily, in good order, a complete set of project plans. The PM
records the actual installation as the project progresses and maintains a set of these drawings
on-site for inspection.
The PM should plan for all material deliveries to be made. This may require after-hour
delivery and overtime. Arrangements will need to be made to access the job site as well as for
the receipt, staging, marshaling, and safe storage of all materials, tools, and supplies, and for
trash removal.
11-14
2004 BICSI
Schedule Updating
Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recognized or
made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
It is good practice for the PM to document certain elements of the project on a weekly basis
and to record the following information concerning events at the site:
List of subcontractors at the site
An approximate count of personnel at the site
Accidents and unusual events
Meetings and significant decisions
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses
Emergency procedures
Change orders received, implemented, and in process
Services connected and disconnected
Equipment or system tests and start-ups
Status of material orders
As-built documentation status report
Punch list status
Weather conditions
Time sheets
Daily job reports
The project schedule should include all material and services that are required from sources
not under the contractors direct control to include actions required by the owner. The PM
should describe any dependencies upon the owner, and third parties, as well as all project
assumptions, expediting methods, active system interfacing requirements, and other
management-related issues critical to the timely and successful completion of this project. The
plan should describe the staffing and mobilization requirements in terms of functional
responsibility, level, and head count.
The scheduling responsibilities of the PM must include the ability to determine the independence
and/or interdependence of the various construction crews. Depending on the time frame for
completing the project, and the availability of resources, the PM should consider whether the
schedule could be compressed. If the construction crews (aerial, underground, buried) can work
independently without creating situations where congestion can cause lost time, it may help bring
the project in on schedule. On the other hand, if the same personnel are shared on these crews,
scheduling simultaneous work may create problems. Similarly, the PM must address the
coordination of the material deliveries and the scheduling of equipment, since any change to the
staffing resources will affect the requirement for material and equipment.
2004 BICSI
11-15
Project Management Terms and Conditions

Contract documents use conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of
certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances.
Abbreviated language is used in RFP and contract documents. Implied words and meanings
need to be appropriately interpreted and understood when applicable. A PM should
understand the meaning of certain words contained within project documents. The following
definitions show what is, generally, the full meaning implied by the use of these word in RFPs,
contracts, or on contract drawings.
Applicability of standardsExcept where the contract documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry and telecommunications industry standards
have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the contract documents.
Such standards are made part of the contract documents by reference.
ApprovedThe term approved, when used in conjunction with the owners action on the
contractors submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the owners duties and
responsibilities as stated in submittals. This approval is limited to determining that the
submittal conforms generally with the project RFP, design, plans, and specifications. The
approval, however, does not guarantee final acceptance, which is a process separate from
this action.
Approved by the owner, or approved equal, or equal toWhere these terms appear in
specifications or RFPs, they could be interpreted as meaning as recommended by the
owner and approved by the authority in writing. This approval is limited to determining
that the submittal conforms generally with the project RFP, design, plans, and specifications. The approval, however, does not guarantee final acceptance, which is a process
separate from this action.
Assignment of specialistsOwners may require that specialists who are qualified in that
activity perform specific activities. This may include licensed, certified, security-cleared,
or specialty trained staff. This type request is not intended to interfere with trade union
jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
By referenceIf a standard or code is stated in contract documents, the referenced

standard or code must be followed.
CodeAny regulations and requirements of regulatory bodies, public or private, having

jurisdiction over the project involved.
ConcealedCabling embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall

furring or within double partitions, within wall/furniture systems, under raised floors, in
floor cell systems, or installed within ceilings or hung ceilings.
11-16
2004 BICSI
Project Management Terms and Conditions, continued
Conflicting requirementsOften, compliance with two or more standards will be

specified, while those standards have different or conflicting requirements. The PM
should, in writing, document those requirements for presentation to the owner for a written
decision.
Contract documentsThese are normally the contract; the RFP; the drawings;
addendums, change orders, bids, proposals, the submittals; the samples; the referenced
codes, test reports, standards, and regulations; and permits, inspections, and certifications.
DirectedTerms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required,

and permitted mean directed by the owner, requested by the owner, and similar phrases.
This does not infer that the owner has taken from the contractor the authority and
requirement to reject nonconforming work, and to control the means, methods, and
procedures of the contractors and subcontractors work.
2004 BICSI
ExposedCabling not installed underground or concealed or when appropriate, as defined

in the National Electrical Code (NEC).
FurnishTo supply (provide) and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, test, and similar operations.
HookupsProvide, install, or connect to all utility extension runs, boxes, wires, cables,
pipes, conduits, traps, drains, switches, contact points, transformers, grounding, feeds,
meters, valves, and other appropriate actions necessary to provide utility services.
If appropriate, where appropriate, or when appropriateThere are common

industry standards as to when equipment, hardware, and devices require an assembly or
operating manual. Provide manufacturer documentation when available.
IndicatedRefers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the drawings,

paragraphs, or schedules in specifications and RFPs, and similar requirements in the
contract documents. Where terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are
used, it is included to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is
intended.
InstallDescribes operations at the project site, including the actual unloading, unpacking,
assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, testing, documenting, and similar operations.
InstallerContractor or an entity engaged by the contractor, either as an employee, or

sub-subcontractor, for performance of a particular construction activity, including
installation, erection, testing, splicing, documenting, application, and similar operations.
Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are hired to perform.
11-17
Long-lead itemAny item that is not off-the-shelf, any item that takes longer than fifteen
working days to obtain, any item that may prevent the project due date from being met,
and any item that an in-writing delivery guarantee has not been given and listed on the billof-material.
Minimum quantity or quality levelsThe quantity or quality level shown or specified shall
be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with
the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer
uncertainties, in writing, to the owner for a written decision before proceeding.
OthersSomeone outside the contract will provide the requirements. The contractor is
still required to perform the coordination with others to assure that the project performed
by others will be completed on time to meet the projects approved schedule.
OwnerThe person or firm for whom the project is performed.
PermitA document or fee that should be obtained and paid for before work can begin
(e.g., licenses, right-of-way, right-to-work permits, and professional engineers seal floor
loading approval, or any other requirements imposed by the owner, federal, state, or local
government, railroads, utilities).
ProductMaterial, equipment, services, machinery, software, tests, documentation,

manuals, and/or appliances directly or indirectly required to complete the specified
and/or indicated project.
ProjectProducts, documentation, testing, site management, operator manuals, system

manuals, labor, equipment, tools, appliances, transportation and related items, directly or
indirectly required to complete the specified and/or indicated project.
Project siteSpace available to the contractor for performance of installation and

construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other
work as part of the project.
ProvideTo furnish, install, test, and document, complete and ready for the intended use.
Publication datesWhere the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified,

comply with the standard in effect as of the date of the contract documents.
RegulationsLaws, ordinances, statutes, codes, and lawful orders issued by authorities

having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction,
computer, and telecommunications industry that control performance of the project.
Standard productTypically, a manufactured product, illustrated and/or described in

technical product cut-sheets.
11-18
2004 BICSI
2004 BICSI
Telecommunications systemsThis term includes but is not limited to voice, data, video,
radio, wireless, infrared (e.g., closed circuit television [CCTV], community antenna
television [CATV], radio paging, sound reinforcement, nurse call, local area networks
[LANs], private branch exchanges [PBXs]), and all supporting infrastructure.
TestTo furnish test equipment, labor, and documentation of tests as required in approved
test plans, and record and report results. All tests are of the nondestructive type.
TradesUse of titles such as electrical typically does not intend to imply that certain
construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a
corresponding generic name. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply
exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name or any trade.
Testing laboratoriesAn independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or

tests, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret
results of those inspections or tests.
11-19
11-20
2004 BICSI
Chapter 12
Cost Estimating
This new chapter covers the factors that must be considered
to develop realistic cost estimates and includes one method
for developing a cost estimate for a given project.
Table of Contents
Cost Estimating .................................................................................................................... 12-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Statement of Work (SOW) ............................................................................................................... 12-2
Site Conditions ................................................................................................................................ 12-3
Outside Plant (OSP) Cost Estimating ............................................................................................. 12-5
Labor (Hourly or Unit) ................................................................................................................. 12-6
Material (Item Cost Plus Delivery Fees) ..................................................................................... 12-8
Restoration (Hourly Plus Material or Unit) .................................................................................. 12-8
Special Equipment Situations (Hourly Plus Material) .................................................................. 12-9
Services, Fees, and Purchases of Licenses/Permits ................................................................. 12-9
Estimating the Cost of a Small Project (Example) ......................................................................... 12-10
Services Needed ...................................................................................................................... 12-11
Given ....................................................................................................................................... 12-11
Assumptions ........................................................................................................................... 12-11
Requirement ............................................................................................................................ 12-11
Labor ....................................................................................................................................... 12-12
Material .................................................................................................................................... 12-12
Equipment ............................................................................................................................... 12-12
Estimating Costs ..................................................................................................................... 12-13
Change Order Cost Estimating ...................................................................................................... 12-15
2004 BICSI
12-i
Figure
Figure 12.1
New construction proposal to ABC corporate office ....................................................... 12-10
Table
Table 12.1
Matrix for estimating costs ............................................................................................. 12-13
12-ii
2004 BICSI
Cost Estimating
Introduction
Cost estimating is one of the keys to success in business life. The difference between survival
and elimination as a businessperson is being successful in business by engaging in ones
endeavor and having a positive end result. Both the buyer and the seller should estimate the
cost of a project realisticallyby doing so the buyer receives a product that meets the
designated requirements without paying an excessive amount, and the seller makes enough
profit after expenses to continue in business.
Because this arrangement is important to both parties, considerable effort should be spent in
development of cost estimates that are both accurate and provide some margin for comfort.
Larger entities could have separate organizations that provide this service, but a one-person
organization (e.g., a plumber or an electrician) must cover its costs and realize a profit to stay
in business.
Even a personal transaction (e.g., purchasing a car or an appliance) involves cost estimating.
Most people have an idea of what they are willing to spend before they enter the marketplace
to buy something. The figure could be accurate or inaccurate, and the consequences could be
of great or little significance, but the more important the transaction, the more time a person
will spend getting the numbers right. The benefits are obvious, but the methodology for
developing the numbers is not.
Comparison shopping, seeking advice, or paying another to make the purchase in your name
are some methods used. Similarly, cost estimating in the industrial or commercial arena is not
done uniformly. Some rely heavily on experience and use historical records from past designs,
while others prefer to approach each new project as a unique entity.
Cost estimating is both an art and a science. It requires:
2004 BICSI
An understanding of the work that has to be done.
Breakdown/quantification of the work by the labor skills required.
Identification and quantification of the material and equipment requirements.
Knowledge of the price of labor, material, and equipment.
Recognition of any special circumstances that will affect the project.
Familiarity with the site conditions.
Availability of the resources needed.
An understanding of direct management cost.
An awareness of any unique conditions that will be present.
12-1
The estimator gains the knowledge to bid by developing or by reviewing a statement of
work (SOW) and by being familiar with the actual site where the work will be accomplished.
This will establish the particulars for a project. Then the knowledge of prices, availability of
resources, and other factors can be applied.
The difference between cost and price is significant. The estimator should determine the cost
to the organization for doing the work described in the SOW. The price that is quoted to a
buyer will allow the contractor to recover the costs and other financial requirements (e.g.,
overhead, operating expenses, and profit). The words cost and price are not interchangeable.
Statement of Work (SOW)
The client provided SOW is usually prepared to provide the basis for the work that is desired.
It should include:
A narrative description of the desired product.
Drawings.
Bills of material.
Material specifications.
A schedule.
While this is the basis on which most cost estimates are prepared, the document cannot fully
encompass the clients needs and therefore cannot provide all the information desired by the
bidder. While this is less of a problem when the client issues the document, the work
requirement still needs to be validated so that the work priced is consistent with the clients
expectation.
See Chapter 10: Scope of Work for a discussion on the contents of a SOW. If the reader is
the client or the contractor, there can be differences both in the expectation and in the content
of a SOW. A contractor will need to have all of the information described in Chapter 10 but
can find that the document is incomplete in several areas. A client can describe what is
wanted without clearly defining the manner in which it is provided or without defining the
specific process that should be followed.
If the SOW is not fully descriptive, the contractor should generate a cost estimate that
provides protection from a poorly worded and incomplete SOW. This incomplete SOW can
also deprive the contractor of presenting an appealing bid, since it could include contingencies
that are not needed or costs that should be avoided. Similarly, if the client is not fully
forthcoming in the description of what is wanted (the SOW could have been prepared by a
consultant, who interpreted the clients requests), the client could find that the final product is
a part of the investment and need to fund supplemental work to get the full product.
12-2
2004 BICSI
Statement of Work (SOW), continued

This chapter is written from the viewpoint of what a contractor should do in order to develop a
price proposal in response to a request for quote (RFQ). In a true win-win situation, both
parties benefit from having the project fully understood before entering into a contract or
offering and accepting a price. In many cases clients have a staff that bid against the clients
specifications in order to develop a basis for evaluating the bids that are submitted and to
determine in advance what the budget should be.
Site Conditions
Identification of work that has to be completed to comply with the SOW normally will include
an invitation to do a site survey. This will provide availability to examine the site to validate or
understand the SOW prepared by others. A site survey is a desirable and essential part of
preparing a cost estimate for a client, whether the client is seeking an engineering design only,
a construction price only, or a turnkey project where the bidder will offer a price to design and
build. It can also be useful when a change order or change in plan is requested for either
design and/or construction, although site familiarity is normally assumed for these situations. A
site visit, whether done alone or with competitors for the work opportunity, will provide a
chance to ask clarifying questions and to evaluate site conditions that will affect costs.
Situations exist in which a site survey does not occur because of time constraints or the
expense involved with a site visit, but a cost estimate is still requested. In those cases, the
contractor could have to rely on the SOW alone, or supplement the SOW with his own
knowledge of the site conditions, or rely on personal judgment and experience in producing a
price. Failure to conduct a site survey puts both parties at risk, and a general rule is that site
surveys are necessary for most projects.
If a site survey is not conducted, some problems that could be encountered by the bidding
contractor are:
2004 BICSI
Contingencies that can be added for protection that makes the estimate noncompetitive.
A costly impediment that is omitted in the pricing, which will obtain the contractor the
award but not the money needed to cover expenses.
12-3
Site Conditions, continued

The site survey should allow the contractor to estimate the costs associated with the:
Design (if done for an engineering design survey).
Identification (ID) of skill sets, special equipment, and time required.
Estimation of total time required for the project, including a preliminary work schedule to
meet the clients specifications.
NOTE:
There are time conditions associated with schedules. The client could allow the
contractor to establish a schedule that meets the contractors capabilities, or specify
the completion date as a requirement. If the client accepts the contractor proposal,
the job should be planned to allow effective use of existing and available contractor
assets. However, if the client has a specified completion date, the contractor must
determine the resources that are required to complete the work within that time
frame. In this instance, the contractors cost estimate should include the cost of
advertising for acquiring, training, and employing additional workers or subcontracting a portion of the work. If the contractor has insufficient resources, the contractor
must increase the work or plan on the use of overtime. If this is the case, the
contractor must estimate the additional payroll costs associated with the overtime
required.
Evaluation of site conditions and the effect on cost and time, including labor estimating and
pricing. Labor prices include:
Fixed costs (e.g., mobilization and demobilization).
Variable costs (e.g., directly related to the amount of units consumed/expended).
Nonstandard costs (e.g., can be related to volume or duration of the activity but are
not linearsome can be stepped or graduated, like volume discounts).
Material take-off and pricing that include:
A list of standards for the material requirements (acceptable substitutions for specified
materials that are not available).
Prices available for purchase of the materials required (e.g., the cost of delivery,
taxes, storage at a staging point).
Equipment costs including operation and maintenance.
12-4
2004 BICSI
Site Conditions, continued
Special site conditions that include:

Licenses, permits, and other approvalsAre these to be applied for or must they be
acquired? If acquired, the cost of acquisition could be more than the cost associated
with completing the forms. The fees could be high, there could be required attendance
at meetings with regulatory authorities to justify the request, and there could be time
lags. The contract should reflect clearly what the client will do and what he expects
the designer/contractor to do.
Hazardous materials and environments concernsIf hazardous materials or

environmental issues (e.g., wetlands) emerge, is the contractor expected to resolve
them, or refer to the client for resolution? If the contractor is responsible, is this an
item that will be handled apart from the contract? If the client is responsible, who
absorbs the cost of the downtime?
Nonstandard hours (e.g., out-of-hours access, nights and weekends, specific time
frames, nonrush hours, nonworking hours)If the contractor is obligated to pay the
employees for eight-hour workdays and does not get eight hours of useful employment, the bid price should address this.
Personnel restrictions (e.g., security clearances, special IDs, citizenship)Some

clients have restrictions against the employment of foreign nationals on their premises
or the use of employees that have criminal records or histories of substance abuse.
The topics noted above should be addressed in the development of a cost estimate. The site
visit is intended to establish the conditions under which the work will be done. This site visit
will provide the contractor with information to enable a match of resources that should be
committed to accomplish the requirements of the SOW to the cost of providing those
resources. Once the information is understood, the estimated costs will need to be developed.
Outside Plant (OSP) Cost Estimating
There are several ways to develop costs. To use an example, a craftsman could earn $25 per
hour and could earn this regardless of actual time worked (e.g., sick time, vacation, training,
holidays). The employer has to cover these costs, plus other business expenses (e.g., Federal
Income Contributions Act [FICA], unemployment insurance). In addition, employees could
need to be provided with tools, uniforms, motor vehicles, and other items. Some estimators
include a factor to determine the price that should be charged (e.g., loaded labor rate), while
others use the raw costs (e.g., labor, material, equipment) and subsequently factor them up to
address overhead (e.g., other direct costs, general and administrative costs). Others could rely
on historical records from prior jobs and apply a price per unit of property placed (e.g.,
inclusive of labor, material). In any case, the contractor has to cover the cost of maintaining a
properly equipped employee base while also making a profit.
2004 BICSI
12-5
Outside Plant (OSP) Cost Estimating, continued

The development of cost estimates requires the expenditure of time and labor for the bidder.
There is a balance between how thoroughly information is developed at the site visit and how
closely the actual cost of designing and building can be estimated. The extra time and cost
associated with a rigorous breakdown and pricing of work elements cannot be warranted.
Assuming that there are five contractors of equal competence, it would be reasonable to
figure that each will be awarded 20 percent of all opportunities over some period of time.
Therefore, the cost of the site survey and subsequent development of a cost estimate can be
factored five-fold to get the cost of estimating per job won. The profit margin on the job has to
cover these initial costs and still provide a profit. Consequently, the more effective the cost
estimating cycle can be made, the better the chances of profitability for the contractor. The
purpose of this chapter is to discuss how to effectively prepare cost estimates that reasonably
approximate the cost of doing the work but are not too expensive to develop.
One approach to estimating costs is to quantify the work requirement by the type of labor
skill or crew required. Because outside plant (OSP) projects have conditions that warrant
specialized crews, cost estimating can be organized under crew assignments. This also helps
determine scheduling issues associated with material availability and labor hour assignments.
When developing the cost of an OSP project, one of the first things the designer should do is
list all crews responsibilities.
Labor (Hourly or Unit)
An example of crew responsibilities, not necessarily all-inclusive, is shown below.
Splice crews
New splices cable and terminations/copper
New splices cable and terminations/fiber
Existing splices/dead splices/copper
Existing splices/dead splices/fiber
Throws/copper
Throws/fiber
Jumper rearrangements/copper
Jumper rearrangements/fiber
Testing for all circuit provisioning
Air pressure control setup
12-6
2004 BICSI
Aerial crews
Locating existing utilities
Tree trimming
Pole replacement
Cable rearrangements
New cable placement
New pole line
Cable replacement
Cable removals
Pole removals
Aerial drop wire
Bridge attachments/hardware
Underground crews
Pulling new cable in conduit
Maintenance holes (MHs) setup/barricade and purge
Air pressure equipment placement
Racking cables
Rearrangement of racked cables
Removal of cable in conduit
Innerduct placement
Buried/conduit crews
Locating existing utilities
Right-of-way clearing
Splice pits
MH/conduit placement
Buried cable placement
Innerduct placement
Boring
Erosion control measures
Drop crews (direct buried)

Plowing drop wires
Placement of drop pedestals
Storage of temporary wire
2004 BICSI
12-7

Materials (Item Cost Plus Delivery Fees)
Similarly, the materials needed to support these crews in their work should include the
following.
Splice crew
Aerial/buried terminals
Splice cases
Splice connectors
Aerial crew
Strand
Cable
Anchors/push bracing
Poles
Miscellaneous hardware
Underground crews
MHs
Conduit
Miscellaneous hardware
Buried crew
Pedestals
Maintenance holes
Conduit
Warning/locator tape
Aboveground markers
Restoration (Hourly Plus Material or Unit)

Further definition of the work breakdown should include the associated requirements for
restoration of the area to its preconstruction state as a separate item of work.
Asphalt
Concrete
Gravel
Grass/seed and/or sod
Shrubbery
Curb and gutter
Backfill
12-8
2004 BICSI

Special Equipment Situations (Hourly Plus Material)
Special equipment beyond that normally associated with a worker, but required for the specific
project, can be identified and included in the pricing module. This should include the following
items.
Large directional boring equipment and support materials (casings)

Cranes for material placements
Bridge accessibility
Extra-tall access
Sizeable backhoe jobs
Waterway crossing access
Submarine cable placement
Fiber blown cable equipment
Cast-in-place MH construction
Special traffic control measures

Large clearing jobs
Services, Fees, and Purchases of Licenses/Permits

There are specific fees or costs associated with the project that should be included in the
pricing.
Designers fees
Inspectors fees
Right-of-way consultants fees
Material costs associated with design (e.g., maps, documents, plotting)
Fees for permit applications and land-settlement costs

Railroad permits
City, county, or state permits
Interstate permits
Recording fees for easements or land titles
Cost of land purchase settlements
2004 BICSI
12-9
Estimating the Cost of a Small Project (Example)

Figure 12.1 illustrates one approach to estimating the costs for a small project.
NOTE:
Prices quoted in this example are used to show the designer one possible way to
estimate a job and should not be used on actual bids since the cost for labor,
material, and equipment varies from state to state and in different countries.
Figure 12.1
New construction proposal to ABC corporate office
ABC corporate office

137 m
(450 ft)
Place anchor
and guy
Place U-guard
P104
30 5
Place 6M strand
50
B
DCMZ-50
01, 1-50
60 m
(200 ft)
Place 50 pair
fixed count
terminal
1
P103
Splice to existing
P102
ANMA-50
01, 1-50
Remove anchor
and guy
P101
MH 1
ANMW-6
01, 1-600
ANMW
01, 1-500 + 100XD
Existing pole
Splice
Anchor and guy
Buried cable
MH
1
Maintenance hole
Splice and splice number
Protected fixed count terminal

splice to cable
12-10
2004 BICSI
Estimating the Cost of a Small Project (Example), continued

Services Needed
ABC Corporation requires 30 pairs for telecommunication.
Given
The existing cable in MH 1 feeds a 50-pair aerial cable that extends from Pole 101 to
Pole 103. New cable (shown in bold) will be placed from existing Pole 103 to a new
Pole 104. The cable will extend vertically to the base of the pole and placed in a 0.6 m (2 ft)
trench to the building. Cable will be routed up the wall and placed into the building at a height
of 2.4 m (8 ft). A U-guard will serve to protect the cable on the outside of the building.
The cable will terminate on a 50 pair protected terminal that is properly bonded and grounded.
Assumptions
There are no unusual factors that would adversely affect the bid. The design as shown is not
negotiable. A site survey has been done by the design engineer.
Requirement
Develop the cost of constructing this project.
The information from the site survey should allow the job to be broken into the following
elements:
Length and type of cable to be placed
Whether the route will be aerial, buried, or in conduit (or some portion of each)
Numbers of poles to place or make ready
Numbers of splices to design
Route followed
Any special equipment requirements (e.g., road boring equipment, digger trucks, plows)
This information is further divided into the:
2004 BICSI
Estimated length of each type of cable.
Number of pairs or fibers to be spliced.
Characteristics of the route (e.g., field- or road- side pole attachments, rocky or swampy
soil, private property, public right-of-ways).
12-11

Labor
A crew will be required to remove an anchor and guy at Pole 103, set a new pole (104),
and place a new anchor and guy. The crew will place 60 m (200 ft) of 50 pair cable and 6M
strand between poles 103 and 104. Extend the cable down the pole and trench 137 m (450 ft)
to the building.
A splicing crew will splice 50 pairs on a fixed count protected terminal that will be properly
bonded and grounded. They will also straight splice the new cable into the existing at
Pole 103.
Surfaces will be restored to original or better condition upon completion of work activities.
Material
Major components include:
Cable types and lengths.
Poles, guys, and anchors.
Protected terminals.
These pieces are identified and priced individually. Miscellaneous hardware (e.g., bolts,
clamps, u-guards) are usually not priced separately unless requested by the customer.
Equipment
Heavy equipment will be required to place the pole and anchor and to remove the existing
anchor.
12-12
2004 BICSI

Estimating Costs
Once the job components have been identified, they can be inserted into existing tables that
contain unit prices based on experience or actual compilation of data locally developed.
Table 12.1 is one example that can be used.
NOTE:
The unit price data shown is totally illustrative and not representative
of any actual job.
Table 12.1
Matrix for estimating costs
Item
description
Install "U" guard 2 in (riser)
Install aerial cable BKMS-50
Install case on old cable
Install direct buried copper
Number
of items
each
foot
220
each
foot
450
Material
cost per
item
Estimated
material cost
Labor cost
per item
Estimated
labor cost
Estimated
total cost
$32.04
$64.08
$8.24
$16.48
$80.56
$0.90
$198.00
$1.50
$330.00
$528.00
$139.92
$139.92
$12.00
$12.00
$151.92
$0.90
$405.00
$5.50
$2,475.00
$2,880.00
$210.00
$210.00
$75.00
$75.00
$285.00
$0.50
$50.00
$1.00
$100.00
$150.00
each
pair
100
Set 30 foot pole
each
$300.00
$300.00
$80.00
$80.00
$380.00
Place anchor
each
$40.00
$40.00
$40.00
$40.00
$80.00
Place down guy
each
$5.00
$5.00
$20.00
$20.00
$25.00
Remove anchor and guy
each
$0.00
$0.00
$20.00
$20.00
$20.00
lump sum
$0.00
$0.00
$300.00
$300.00
$300.00
$3,468.48
$4,880.48
Install term 50 pr
Splice copper
Restoration of buried route
$1,412.00
TOTAL PRICE
The estimated cost for this example is $4,880.48comprised of $528.00 for the aerial section,
$2,920.28 for the buried section, $545.28 for the structural work (poles, anchors, and guys),
$586.92 for the splicing, and $300.00 for restoration.
The table does not include any statement that addresses allowances for weather delays,
equipment failure, or other contingency conditions that could drive the time and cost higher.
Moreover, there are no clarifying assumptions that have been included. Any response should
include the assumptions upon which it was based so that any future discussions will have the
same basis.
Note that no schedule is provided. A complicated job will require a schedule to be factored
into the estimating process. One product of a cost estimate is the calculation of the hours
needed to complete the tasks. This allows a schedule to be established. Most SOWs specify
a target completion date. The amount of time available from the award of a contract to the
delivery date sets the parameters in which the required labor hours or equipment hours for
completing the design or construction should be accomplished (or for acquiring the licenses
and permits). This establishes the crew sizes, equipment usage, and material delivery intervals.
12-13
2004 BICSI

If any of these result in an unusual drain on the available resources, it could affect the:
Number of crews that are required.
Need for extraordinary schedules (e.g., shift work, weekends, or overtime).
Substitution of materials that cannot be acquired in the time available.
Need to modify the design to avoid time-consuming impediments.
These factors could affect the initially developed cost estimate. A final cost estimate can
require several iterations of the estimating process to ensure that all influencing factors have
been considered.
Any tabular system for estimating should be checked for rationality once a number has been
developed. Reliance on a spreadsheet price estimate without doing a sanity check can lead to
considerable discrepancy from the actual cost. For example, although a unit labor cost can be
historically accurate, if unusual conditions are experienced (e.g., night work only, double shifts,
limited access time during the work period, mandatory overtime), the rates will have to be
adjusted or the overall labor price will have to be modified. Additionally, if a job takes six labor
hours to complete, it is unlikely that the employee will be able to gainfully perform other tasks
that day, so it suggests that a full eight-hour cost be estimated. Similarly, if vendors prices
fluctuate, a more costly substitute has to be used because of schedule demands, or the product
normally used is unavailable, adjustments should be made. The effort in placing a 50-pair cable
is not much different than placing a 25-pair. Whether the estimating template used should
address such fine differences is up to the estimator to determine. Usually, reliance on
judgment and experience is used to supplement the basic number produced from the
spreadsheet.
In todays environment of electronic data processing and computer availability, software
programs are available for estimating construction prices. These software programs should be
evaluated for availability and effectiveness. Any cost data needed should be validated for
regional differences, current economic climate, and other factors. Maintaining an accurate
price database can become a time-consuming task. However, a pricing program created for
estimating telecommunications design and construction costs can be useful, since it will save
time or allow more time to focus on the identification and quantification of the work elements
in the project.
12-14
2004 BICSI
Change Order Cost Estimating

Change orders are a serious issue, because the contractor can be expected to work quickly to
address the item in order to maintain the schedule. This urgency brings risks. Occasionally the
requester is not the authorized client agent, and the cost or the work itself is not consistent
with client requirements. The contractor agent on site (usually a foreman or lead technician),
in an effort to please the requester, can make changes and incur charges that are not
compensable. These changes could impact the design itself and the functionality of the
finished product.
The entire issue of the acceptable procedure for requesting and responding to change orders
is one that should be covered in detail either in the contract (preferably) or with the client
before work begins. The procedure can spell out the time frame for the contractor to respond
with a redesign or a price for the changes, but it should be predicated upon getting a clear
SOW describing the modification. This change order shall come from an authorized agent of
the client and be responded to by an authorized contractor agent.
An example of such a procedure would be the following:
The authorized client representative defines the change (e.g., addition, deletion, or other
modification) to the work. This change is spelled out in writing. If it is offered verbally, the
contractor should also put the request in writing and get the document signed.
The contractor accepts the proposed change order and agrees to respond with a price for
the work within a specific time frame (e.g., two days for a minor [$5K] change or one
week for a change that could require investigation of available material, equipment, impact
of change on the design).
The contractor provides the proposed price to the client representative, along with a
statement of the impact of the change on the time line of the project.
The client representative accepts or declines the price and the associated work.
It is desirable to develop the actual procedure for change orders and include it in the contract
language. If no agreement is reached, some contracts could specify that the contractor be
required to do the work specified, retain records of the costs of doing so, and subsequently
negotiate a price with the client or submit the dispute to binding arbitration. The client may feel
that the time loss associated with amending the issue is potentially more damaging than the
consequences of clashing with the contractor. The contractor should be aware of the
implications of these situations before they arise and have contract provisions to address them.
If this is not done in advance, the contractor and client both should have a clear understanding
of what is being requested and what is being priced, as well as any impact on the overall
project.
2004 BICSI
12-15
Change Order Cost Estimating, continued

The process of cost estimating change orders is no different from that of estimating the cost
of a new job and can be done in the same way as described above. The cost to the contractor
should usually be less than that of a new job of equal dimensions since the crew is already
familiar with the environment and the up-front costs of mobilization are not pertinent.
However, since this could be a noncompetitive bid situation, the owner should evaluate the
price offered carefully and seek an independent estimate to be satisfied the price is
reasonable. There could be an option to defer the work or use some other vendor if the price
is unreasonable. Some contracts contain clauses allowing the owner to demand that work be
done under a change order, and negotiate the price later, or are submitted to an arbitrator for a
decision.
12-16
2004 BICSI
Chapter 13
Maintenance
This new chapter covers issues associated with maintaining
CO-OSP facilities after they have been built, both on a
routine (scheduled) basis and on a demand (service failure)
basis. These include having the records, materials, tools and
skilled personnel available to respond.
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Restoration ............................................................................................ 13-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 13-1
Maintenance Issues ........................................................................................................................ 13-1
Routine Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 13-2
Demand Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 13-4
Restoration Issues .......................................................................................................................... 13-5
Operations Support Centers ............................................................................................................ 13-6
Locations of Operations Support Centers ........................................................................................ 13-7
Outside Plant (OSP) Infrastructure Characteristics .......................................................................... 13-8
Detailed Maintenance Plan .............................................................................................................. 13-8
Emergency Restoration Procedures ................................................................................................ 13-9
2004 BICSI
13-i
Maintenance and Restoration

Introduction
There are differences between the maintenance and the restoration of outside plant (OSP)
infrastructures, even though both fall under the general description of maintenance.
Maintenance is associated with insuring the continued operability of an existing system, while
restoration requires the reestablishment of some component(s) following their failure. The
information applies to balanced twisted-pair, optical fiber, or any other transmission medium.
Maintenance Issues
Maintenance practices can be divided into several categories. One such basic separation is the
distinction between routine and demand maintenance. No OSP infrastructure can be built that
does not require ongoing maintenance. Age, exposure to weather, and other factors may cause
this need for maintenance. The purpose of maintenance is to extend the useful life of the
installed product.
OSP products have varying life expectancies. Items like poles and conduit are expected to last
for many years. Cables have a shorter duration but can still be useful for 30 to 40 years. It is
not uncommon to find creosoted wood duct still carrying lead-sheathed cables, although for
many reasons (e.g., capacity, service, environmental concerns) these are unusual situations.
The capital investment cost may turn out to be only a fraction of the total cost of maintaining
the facility during its useful life. Consequently, there is a strong need to design the initial
installation minimizing the long-term cost of keeping it in service. The facility shall be
maintained during its life in order to extend and enhance its usefulness.
Many of todays OSP products are associated with electronics and microtechnology. The
development and evolution of these products continue even after they have been put into
service, so each succeeding generation may be smaller, faster, more competent, more robust,
or another combination of desirable features. The decision of when to replace existing OSP is
usually an economic one. It may be better to remove a component with a remaining life in
order to upgrade the capability of the OSP infrastructure, rather than to extend the life and
live with a (comparatively) reduced capability. This chapter is concerned with how to get the
maximum use of installed components. Determining when to replace OSP that has remaining
life is an economic one and will not be addressed in this chapter.
2004 BICSI
13-1
Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance is the periodic and continued examination of the facility for abnormal
conditions. This may be done physically by inspection, or it may be done using sophisticated
network monitoring and surveillance systems that can detect abnormalities in the facility (e.g.,
changes in resistivity, indications of loss of sheath integrity, or similar indications of
degradation). These do not necessarily affect service, but are indicators that a failure may be
imminent. The network monitoring and surveillance systems enable the targeted dispatch of a
technician without routinely spending time while covering cabling routes that are not in a
prefailure mode.
Routine maintenance frequently gets less support because it is difficult to place a value on
troubles not received and fixed, as opposed to the cost of the routine maintenance program.
Routine maintenance involves more than looking for potential problems. It ensures that the
OSP infrastructure is safe and that employees and the public are not exposed to dangerous
conditions. As a result, maintenance includes ensuring cabling/optical fiber integrity, as well
as verifying that:
Poles are sound.
Markers are in place to protect the OSP.
No dangerous electrical conditions have developed from unauthorized attachments or

defective or missing grounds.
Some specific programs that would fall under routine maintenance include:
T zone inspectionsCable attached to a pole and extending 0.9 m (3 ft) to either side
(effectively forming a T when viewed as a segment) can be a major area of trouble.
This zone normally includes the terminal, service wire attachments, and splices. It is a
location for high technician activity. Consequently, some owners focus routine
maintenance efforts here, checking that splices and splice cases have integrity, terminals
are clean (e.g., no dead service drops, no wasp nests or rodent intrusion, no open covers),
poles are structurally sound, clearances are up to standard, and any attachments by foreign
companies are authorized and compliant.
Tree trimmingPeriodic tree trimming is necessary to prevent problems of sheath abrasion or

damage that degrades transmission capabilities. Routine tree trimming and vegetation
management is required in pathways that are off-premises and cross-country or along right-ofways with overhanging tree branches. Annual work is usually required for this process and
some chemical management policies can be put in place to reduce manual labor.
13-2
2004 BICSI
Routine Maintenance, continued
2004 BICSI
Pole inspectionsPoles are periodically checked for ground line rot, sufficient pole
height to carry the facilities, unauthorized attachments (this is similar to T zone
inspections but does not involve climbing the pole to check for bonding, grounding, and
terminal face plate conditions), or any other abnormalities (e.g., defective guys or ground
wires). Pole inspection ensures employee and public safety.
Buried cable terminal maintenanceSimilar to aerial terminals, the conditions of the

terminal and surrounding environment are checked for items like housekeeping (e.g.,
dead jumpers, stenciling, pea gravel, corrosion) and vandalism. This program could
include large cross-connect interfaces and smaller distribution terminals, while other
programs would focus only on serving area interfaces because of normal high activity.
Maintenance of underground facilities Over time, debris and contamination can enter
maintenance holes (MHs) through conduits and moisture seepage. These can damage
cables, splices, and MH hardware if ignored and can create an unsafe environment for
workers.
Maintenance of OSP identificationOSP is labeled or stenciled for easy identification.

Over time, labels become damaged, fall off, or fade and become illegible. The owner of
CO-OSP should maintain proper labeling. Labels could be required for identification and
to contact the owner in case of emergency, damages, or relocation needs. The system
should be standardized and clear to anyone who needs to know the owner of the plant.
Right-of-way inspectionsThe route designed through the right-of-way may change due
to tree growth, the facilities of others, or infringements without permission. Right-of-way
may be managed by surveillance and routine inspections. Personnel assigned to this task
may have to request the removal or relocation of these encroachments on OSP right-ofways. A right-of-way grant must occasionally be defended.
Air-pressure maintenanceThe text in Chapter 7: Air-Pressure Systems, explains the

need to maintain existing cabling facilities protected by air pressure. Various air pressure
monitoring systems are commercially available to identify the location of air leakage
above target levels and to effectively direct labor to locate and fix leaks before cables
become wet.
Defective cable pair recoveryDepending on the demand for spare pairs, it may be
useful to identify locations where a cluster of defects exists and attempt to recover these
pairs. Defects usually occur at splice and termination points, as opposed to within the
sheath. At such locations, minimal effort can recover a number of cable pairs or prevent a
potential future failure.
13-3
Demand Maintenance
Demand maintenance may be caused by requirements, such as:
Responding to facility location requests from underground location services or one-call

centers. This is a mandated requirement in many jurisdictions and usually has a finite time
frame for the response. It is a significant factor in reducing the amount of service
interruptions caused by earth removal.
Responding to customer service demands.
Relocation of OSP due to road improvements. OSP located within a public right-of-way
may require relocation at owner expense because of road rebuild or relocation. With a
secured easement, the cost for relocations may allow for billing back to the agency doing
the improvements, but the relocation will still be required at the agencys schedule. The
property owner has the right to improve or widen within their area.
Site improvements (e.g., drainage problems).
Property additions that conflict with existing OSP (e.g., new buildings, driveways)
whether aerial, underground, or buried.
Changes in clearance, separation, and general pole spacing.
Obligations under joint use agreements. One advantage of joint use agreements is that
the cost of occupancy for the parties is reduced. However, joint use has disadvantages.
An obligation exists to rearrange the OSP to accommodate the other user, replace the
pole for additional height and clearance, or conduct periodic inspections to ensure
compliance with joint use regulations. Recordkeeping becomes more of an administrative
requirement, since both the user and the owner want to be sure that the costs are properly
allocated.
Obligations under each of these situations should be understood when the agreement is
negotiated. These obligations may include:
RearrangementWhenever the CO-OSP is located on joint use pole lines, the

requirements of other authorized tenants and/or the pole owner may necessitate
rearrangements to your cables. This may be as simple as a transfer and raising or as
complex as relocation to newly located poles. Someone should be assigned to address
these requests and to handle design and negotiation requirements.
13-4
2004 BICSI
Demand Maintenance, continued
Pole replacementPoles may need to be replaced because of damage, clearances, or other

reasons. Depending on the agreement, the pole owner may do the replacement and plant
transfers for all parties, or may require each tenant to do his own. This requirement
should be understood in advance. If the owner does the work, this cost can be billed
back to the CO-OSP owner. If the CO-OSP owner has to do the work, the appropriate
workforce should be available on demand.
Response to network monitoring and surveillance systems, which indicate imminent

trouble to a pressurized cable.
Changes in road elevation (e.g., repaving, rerouting) that require changes in the thickness
of the MH collar.
Demand maintenance can also be caused by damage to the facilities through weather, motor
vehicle collisions, road washouts, floods, and physical degradation. The damage may or may
not create an out-of-service condition. Hazards to the public or the risk of losing the facility
will require an immediate response. These conditions are addressed in detail later in this
chapter.
Restoration Issues
Maintenance will keep OSP in service, but there are occasions when a system or facility
failure occurs. The expectation of customers is that outages will be infrequent and of short
duration. A plan must exist for addressing any outage. This plan must be understood and
implemented by the responsible parties.
2004 BICSI
13-5
Operations Support Centers

Major repair support sites or operation support centers must be established within reasonable
sized areas of the expected coverage area. Personnel and equipment must be available to
respond in a quick and timely manner to any type of maintenance request. Each major repair
support site or operation support center must have:
Staff with necessary operational skills. The staff must be trained and competent in the
normal daily operations along with having necessary skills for restoration of the system.
Each staff member may not necessarily have the same skill sets or capabilities, but the
combined team must be capable of all aspects of restoration, maintenance, and operation
of the system. The same individual skill capabilities must exist in multiple personnel. As
time permits, individuals should be trained in the duties and responsibilities of other team
members. Through cross-training, team members are assured of having equal skill sets.
Complete end-to-end and up-to-date documentation. Each support site must have
thorough and complete documentation for the area for which it is responsible. In addition
to documentation for its own area, each support site must have ready access to
information for adjacent service areas. Documentation must include drawings and
procedures for all copper and coaxial cabling, optical fiber strands, circuits, and service
requirements at a minimum. Multiple copies of documentation must be maintained in
updated versions at multiple locations to prevent the loss or destruction of a single set
from jeopardizing operations. The documentation must exist both on the records and in
the field. Stenciling, tagging, and other marking is mandatory when trying to identify the
particular facility that is in trouble.
Basic troubleshooting capability. The staff must be able to resolve basic troubles by
employing simple troubleshooting techniques. These should include but are not limited to
optical fiber cuts, earth removal, circuit disruptions, equipment outages, and vandalism.
The staff must be able to test, troubleshoot, repair, and return the system to service
quickly and efficiently.
Easy access to next-level support. The staff involved in a given problem must be able to
reach the next level of problem support and trouble resolution quickly and easily. To
ensure a high reliability OSP infrastructure, personnel must be available on a 24/7 basis.
A plan must exist for the next tier. In addition to having an established and approved plan,
maintenance staff must be well-rehearsed in the procedures to the point that it is second
nature for them. Contact telephone numbers of key personnel must be posted at all key
locations.
Emergency restoration materials. Maintenance and repair equipment, test equipment,

repair materials, and other items routinely needed must be stored and available at strategic
locations. Included among these items are lengths of copper, coaxial, and optical fiber
cable for emergency restoration in case of an earth removal, along with necessary splice
material.
13-6
2004 BICSI
Locations of Operations Support Centers

To provide effective emergency restoration of the system emergency, on-call support centers
should be established in areas most likely to sustain damage or failure. These locations
should have a priority telephone line available both internally and to customers. These sites
must have tools, test equipment, and restoration materials readily available, along with
experienced emergency restoration crews. Emergency restoration procedures must be
documented, practiced, and well understood by all. Some items that must be included in
emergency plans are:
2004 BICSI
Notification procedures for crucial personnel, including contact telephone numbers.
Troubleshooting practices and procedures in the event of an incident. Key personnel

must have predetermined duties and responsibilities.
Detailed procedures for easy access of restoration materials that include where and how
these materials are stored and how to obtain them.
Details for insuring that restoration equipment and test gear are always available and
operational and the teams are proficient in the use of the equipment. A system must exist
for the replenishment and replacement of any materials used for emergency purposes.
Information identifying critical copper pairs, optical fibers, and priority circuits for
restoration. Restoration plans must be updated and maintained when circuit assignments
and changes occur. If the documentation available to restoration crews is not updated, it
is possible that actions taken by the team based on obsolete information may compound
the problems.
Methods to be used for OSP infrastructure restoration.
Plans and procedures for permanent repairs after the emergency situation has passed.
Plans for documenting the incident and preparing a report that analyzes the cause of
the incident, procedures followed to resolve the incident, and recommendations for
prevention in the future.
13-7
Outside Plant (OSP) Infrastructure Characteristics

A quality designed, reliable OSP infrastructure that is easily maintained must be based on the
following criteria:
Quality construction using premium materials while establishing the OSP infrastructure
Spare ducts, optical fiber strands, and copper pairs for future growth and expansion
Route diversity preventing service failures
Spare equipment capacity
Adequate equipment spares for a mean time between failures (MTBF)
Complete and detailed as-built documentation
NOTE: Consider the use of either a ring, mesh topology, or star for optical fiber OSP
infrastructures.
Detailed Maintenance Plan
System maintenance starts with a complete and thorough understanding of the system and its
associated documentation. A detailed maintenance plan must be established and in place to
ensure smooth system maintenance. At a minimum, the system maintenance plan must
address the following items:
Personnel availability and skill set requirements.
Current documentation with detailed records of circuits, optical fibers, and cables.
Installed equipment baseline. This includes the current version of installed equipment,
documented option settings, port configurations, and other items of information needed
for the repair or restoration of individual circuits.
Storage and availability of repair materials. Included with this item are the procedures and
process necessary for the replenishment of materials as they are used. Some quantity of
materials must be available to the restoration teams on a 24/7 basis. The maintenance plan
must address how this material is to be obtained by the restoration team outside the
normal working hours of the support center.
Initial and sustaining training. The maintenance plan must establish guidelines for
training of the initial skill sets necessary for normal operations as well as providing a
method for ensuring continued development of the workforce needed. Backup personnel
must be available for long-term support and operations.
Restoration procedures. The maintenance plan must establish policies and practices for
the routine maintenance and support of the system, demand maintenance, response to
requirements driven by public demand (e.g., road moves, customer demands), or natural
events (e.g., floods, lightning hits, structural failures). Along with the policies and
practices for routine and demand maintenance, special procedures and policies must be
established for emergency or quick system recovery as the result of unplanned system
outages.
13-8
2004 BICSI
Emergency Restoration Procedures

One of the more important parts of the maintenance plan is the section dealing with
emergency recovery procedures. Critical elements that an emergency recovery plan
must address include:
2004 BICSI
Identification and contact of essential personnel. During system outages, there must
be no delay in contacting key personnel who, in turn, must respond quickly and
possess the proper skill sets to repair the outages. These personnel must have
predefined duties and roles that are both understood and well practiced.
Access and obtain materials. Materials set aside for emergency restoration should be
easily accessible and readily available to restoration teams. Sufficient quantities and
types of material required during an emergency must be stored and available for
ready access.
Troubleshooting procedure. Basic emergency troubleshooting procedures must be

documented in a clear, concise, and to-the-point manner. Restoration teams must be
familiar with necessary tasks and duties expected of them. A step-by-step format is
recommended for documenting these procedures.
Restoration tools. Emergency restoration tools and equipment should be set aside
and readily available for access by the restoration teams. Reserved equipment
should be checked on a regular basis to guarantee its readiness and proper
functionality. Do not use worn or obsolete equipment for emergencies. Do not use
emergency equipment as a substitute for routine use equipment. Even short-term use
of emergency reserves for normal operations with planned replacement in the near
future must not be tolerated.
Critical circuits that must be restored promptly must be documented as part of the
emergency restoration plan. Priority circuits should be clearly marked and
identified. These circuits are the first to be restored. The first goal is to return the
OSP infrastructure to operations in a staggered but prioritized manner. The
secondary goal is to return the system to normal operations and restore it as closely
as possible to the original or improved operational parameters when the outage or
emergency occurred.
13-9
Emergency Restoration Procedures, continued

The emergency restoration plan must identify and include procedures for permanent
restoration and repair. These procedures must provide detailed information showing and
explaining the steps necessary for restoring the system to normal operational parameters after
an emergency restoration operation has been completed. This may involve creating a plan for
systematically cutting over a cable section to a new replacement section. It is insufficient to
revert to the normal routine once the service has been restored; the system itself must be
returned to normal. Temporary repairs cannot be left in a provisional status; they must be
made permanent. One problem with establishing priorities for the assignment of maintenance
resources is that service-affecting conditions normally take precedence over nonserviceaffecting conditions. Once an out-of-service condition is fixed, it drops in priority even
though the OSP condition is not returned to its pretrouble condition. The entire event must be
treated as one, and the permanent repair must be made before it is considered fixed.
While expensive to do, the plan should periodically be given a trial run to ensure that all
parties know what they are expected to do, that records are available and complete, and that
materials, tools, and equipment are ready. Finding flaws in the plan during its execution under
abnormal conditions is not acceptable.
The emergency restoration plan must provide procedures and guidelines for documenting the
restoration that occurred, circuit reassignments that may have occurred, and long term system
configuration after all permanent repairs have been completed.
Update the emergency restoration plan following the completion of the after-action report
(explaining in detail what caused the outage or emergency condition) and the long- and shortterm actions taken to repair the OSP infrastructure. The after-action report must identify any
OSP infrastructure documentation that must be revised and replaced. Most importantly, the
report must provide an analysis of the occurrence with recommended actions and plans of
how to prevent similar incidents from occurring in the future. These reports must remain in an
OSP infrastructure historical file for trend analysis, as well as copies provided to other
support regions to help prevent similar occurrences in other regions. If similar incidents
occur, the OSP infrastructure must be evaluated and possibly redesigned to prevent future
outages or problems.
Finally, any material or equipment resources that were expended in the restoration must be
replaced so the organization is ready to deal with the problem in the event of any future
system failure.
13-10
2004 BICSI
Glossary
Glossary of common definitions, including frequently used
symbols and acronyms.
Glossary
Table of Contents
Terms ..................................................................................................................................... G-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations ............................................................................................. G-23
Symbols ................................................................................................................................ G-33
Warning ................................................................................................................................ G-40
2004 BICSI
G-i
Glossary
Terms
A
acceptance tests
A test or set of tests performed to demonstrate satisfactory completion of

a predetermined task or group of tasks on which project acceptance is
dependent.
access floor
A system consisting of completely removable and interchangeable floor

panels that are supported on adjustable pedestals or stringers (or both) to
allow access to the area beneath. (TIA)
access provider (AP)
1. A company (e.g., a telephone company) that provides a circuit path

between a service provider and the client user. An access provider can also
be the service provider. See service provider. 2. The operator of any facility
that is used to convey telecommunications signals to and from a customer
premises. (TIA)
adapter
A device that enables any or all of the following:
Different sizes or types of plugs to mate with one another or to fit into a
telecommunications outlet,
The rearrangement of leads,
Large cables with numerous conductors to fan out into smaller groups of
conductors, and
Interconnection between cables. (TIA)
administration
The methodology defining the documentation requirements of a cabling

system and its containment, the labeling of functional elements, and the
process by which moves, additions, and changes are recorded. (ISO)
aerial cable
Telecommunications cable installed on aerial supporting structures (e.g., poles,

sides of buildings, and other structures). (TIA)
air feeder pipe
An underground pipe that parallels cable runs and is used to supply air for
pressurized cables.
all-dielectric selfsupporting (ADSS)
An optical fiber cable that is self-supporting and nonconductive/nonmetallic.
alternate entrance
A pathway facility into a building using a different routing to provide diversity

of service and for assurance of service continuity. (TIA)
alternate route
A secondary communications path used to reach a destination.
analog
A signal in the form of a wave that uses continuous physical variables (e.g.,
voltage amplitude or frequency variations) to transmit information.
2004 BICSI
G-1
Glossary
anchor
1. A fastening device. 2. In an outside plant environment, a device made up

of a single plate or series of flat plates and combined with a rod having a
connecting eye.
anchor rod
The portion of an anchor assembly that extends above the anchor plate below
ground level to a point above ground level.
antenna entrance
A pathway facility installed from the antenna to the associated equipment.

(TIA)
architectural
assemblies
Walls, partitions, or other barriers that are not load bearing. (TIA)
architectural
structures
Walls, floors, floor/ceilings, and roof/ceilings that are load bearing. (TIA)
armoring
Method used for protecting cables against crush, impact, rodents, etc. Can be
achieved through the use of corrugated steel, fiber-reinforced polymer rods,
steel wire, glass yarns, or other suitable materials under or over the outer
sheath of the cable.
attenuation
The decrease in magnitude of transmission signal strength between points,

expressed in dB as the ratio of output to input signal level. (TIA) See
insertion loss.
attenuator
A device used to reduce the amplitude of voltage, current, or power (signal

strength) without appreciable distortion.
B
backbone
A facility (e.g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between any of the following

spaces: telecommunications rooms, telecommunications enclosures, common
telecommunications rooms, floor-serving terminals, entrance facilities,
equipment rooms, and common equipment rooms. (TIA)
backbone cable
See backbone and backbone cabling.
backbone cabling
Cable and connecting hardware that provide interconnections between

telecommunications rooms, equipment rooms, and entrance facilities. See
backbone.
backfill
Earth placed outside foundation walls, or in cable trenches, for filling and
grading back to a finished state.
backscatter
The scattering of light into a direction opposite to the original direction.
G-2
2004 BICSI
Glossary
bandwidth
1. A measure of the range of frequencies associated with a given signal or

communications channel, typically expressed in hertz. It is used to denote the
potential capacity of the medium, device, or system. 2. The information
handling capability of a medium, expressed in units of frequency (hertz).
barrier
A partition installed in a raceway or cable tray that provides complete

separation of the adjacent compartment.
barrier (architectural)
Architectural structures or assemblies. (TIA)
bay
1. A regular repeated spatial architectural element defined by beams,

columns, or ribs and their support. 2. Similar to floor-standing racks, frames,
or cabinets to house telecommunications or equipment.
bend radius
1. Maximum radius that a cable can be bent to avoid physical or electrical

damage or cause adverse transmission performance. 2. Radius of curvature
that a media can bend without signal degradation.
berm
The stabilized or paved area of the shoulder.
bond
1. An electrical connection using a low-resistance path. 2. A written

obligation under seal to guarantee that specific documents are accurate or
that the bonded party will meet specific requirements, in a specific way,
within a specific time period.
bonding
The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path

that will ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any
current likely to be imposed. (TIA)
bonding conductor for

telecommunications
(BCT)
A conductor that interconnects the buildings service equipment (power)

ground to the telecommunications grounding system.
boring
A method to displace earth under the ground without breaking the ground
surface (trenching) or cutting ground surfaces (e.g., sidewalks, driveways,
parking lots, and road surfaces). Normally, as dirt is displaced or removed,
conduit is inserted.
bridged tap
A connection that enables multiple appearances of the same cable pair at

several distribution points. (TIA)
broadband
A general term for the transmission of signals that have wide bandwidth
(e.g., integrated services digital network) or multiple modulated channels
(e.g., 10BROAD-36).
buffer coating
A protective thermoplastic material that is applied to the acrylate layer of the

optical fiber to protect against environmental hazards. May be more than one
layer.
buffering
The process of providing a supplemental air supply to pressurized cables

during splicing operations.
2004 BICSI
G-3
Glossary
buffer tube
A supplemental loose-fitting cover, which is applied over the primary coated

optical fibers at the time of installation.
building entrance
The room or space inside a building where telecommunications cables enter

and leave the building. See entrance facility (EF [telecommunications]) and
entrance room or space (telecommunications).
bundled cable
An assembly of two or more cables continuously bound together to form a

single unit. (TIA) Contrast with hybrid cable.
buried cable
A cable installed under the surface of the ground in such a manner that it
cannot be removed without disturbing the soil. (TIA) See direct-buried cable
and underground cable.
bus topology
Each communications device or network has a single connection to a shared

medium that serves as the communications channel. Also called a point-tomultipoint topology.
butterfly detail
A maintenance hole diagram showing all four walls and detailing route and
splicing locations of cable passing through the maintenance hole.
C
cabinet
A container that may enclose connection devices, terminations, apparatus,

wiring, and equipment. (TIA)
cable
1. An assembly of one or more insulated conductors or optical fibers within

an enveloping sheath. (TIA) 2. An assembly of one or more cable units of the
same type and category in an overall sheath. It may include an overall screen.
(ISO, CENELEC) 3. The act of installing cable.
cable assembly
A cable that has connectors installed on one or both ends.
cable dip
Aerial cable that is transitioned down a utility pole and placed below grade
distribution, typically occurring at the pole closest to the building. Also called a
pole dip.
cable fill
The number of working pairs/fibers in a cable.
cable infrastructure
pull tension
The pulling force that cannot be exceeded on the cable-holding infrastructure

without affecting the structural integrity of the facility during cable pulling and
installation operations or rodding operations.
cable rack
The vertical or horizontal open support structure (usually made of aluminum

or steel) that is attached to a ceiling or wall.
cable sheath
A covering over the optical fiber or conductor assembly that may include one
or more metallic members, strength members, or jackets. (TIA)
cable terminal
An assembly used to access the conductors of a cable.
G-4
2004 BICSI
Glossary
cable throw
Changing the circuit identity of cable pairs by splicing to pairs of a different

identity.
cabling
A system of telecommunications cables, cords, and connecting hardware that

can support the connection of information technology equipment. (ISO,
CENELEC)
cabling hardware
See splice case.
campus
1. The buildings and grounds having legal contiguous interconnection. (TIA)

Some examples include a college, university, industrial park, or military.
2. A premises containing one or more buildings. (ISO, CENELEC)
catenary wire
See support strand (messenger).
cathodic protection
A system used to provide a constant low-current flow in equal and opposite

polarity to the existing electrolysis current flow.
cellular floor (CF)
A floor distribution system in which cables pass through floor cells

constructed of steel or concrete to provide a ready-made raceway for
distribution of power and telecommunications cables. (TIA)
cementitious
Material that is mixed with water. Similar in appearance to lightweight

concrete or mortar, it can be troweled to a smooth finish.
central office (CO)
A common carrier switching center office (also called central office or public
exchange) that is conveniently located in areas to serve subscriber homes and
businesses. They provide telephony services (lines) that are connected on
what is known as a local loop. The central office contains switching
equipment that can switch calls locally or to long-distance carrier telephone
offices.
channel
The end-to-end transmission path connecting any two pieces of applicationspecific equipment. Equipment cords and work area cords are included in the
channel. (CENELEC)
chemical electrode
Copper tubes containing a chemical that slowly leaches into the soil, lowering
the soils resistance. Also called a chemical ground rod.
chemical ground rod
See chemical electrode.
cladding
The outer concentric glass layer that surrounds the optical fiber core and has
a lower index of refraction than the core.
coaxial cable
A cable consisting of a central metallic conductor surrounded by a layer of

dielectric material. This material may be a solid material or air spaced. The
entire assembly is covered with a metallic braid or solid metallic sleeve. The
cable may be protected by an outer jacket of nonconducting material.
2004 BICSI
G-5
Glossary
composite
Made up of disparate or separate parts (e.g., copper and optical fiber cables
in one jacket).
compound curve
A series of two or more circular curves, each with a different radius, all
turning in the same direction.
concrete-encased
electrode
An electrode encased in concrete that is in direct contact with the earth.
concrete fill
A minimal-depth concrete pour to encase single-level underfloor duct. (TIA)
concrete universal
enclosure (CUE)
Above-ground environmentally enclosed cabinets.
conduit
A raceway of circular cross-section. (TIA)
conduit system
Any combination of ducts, conduits, maintenance holes, handholes, and vaults

joined to form an integrated whole. (TIA)
cone of protection
A cone-shaped space, the apex of which is the top of the conductor or

lightning protective mast and with the base being a circle at the earth surface.
connecting hardware
A device, or a combination of devices, used to connect cables or cable

elements.
controlled environment
An OSP-rated enclosure with humidity, temperature, flood, and wind controls

to provide protected conditions for sensitive electronic equipment.
core hitch
The weaving of copper conductors or pairs through a pulling eye for the
purpose of pulling the cable.
corrosion area
A space that is subject to a high degree or risk of deterioration to elements.
crossbar
An electromechanical switching system.
cross-connect
A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection

or cross-connection. (TIA)
crossover
The junction unit at the point of intersection of two cable trays, raceways, or
conduit (pathways) on different planes. (TIA)
customer premises
Building(s), grounds, and appurtenances (belongings) under the control of the

customer. (TIA)
customer premises
equipment (CPE)
Telecommunications equipment located on the customers premises. (TIA)
cut
An excavation or the removal of earth.
G-6
2004 BICSI
Glossary
cutsheet
1. A listing of cable pair assignments used to specify desired circuit

connections in a splice or cross-connect. This listing can also serve as the asbuilt of a splice or cross-connect field. 2. Cable documentation that shows the
existing cable plant, the new cable plant, and the cross-connects that will be
relocated during cutover. 3. Defines product specifications that may include
drawings.
D
decibel (dB)
A logarithmic unit for measuring the relative power or strength of a signal.
delta power system
A three-legged nongrounded configuration with one equal potential between

legs.
demarcation point
1. A point where the operational control or ownership changes. (TIA) 2. The

point of interface between service providers and customer facilities.
demultiplexer (DP)
A device that separates two or more signals that have been combined into a
multiplexed signal.
depressed clad
An optical fiber, usually singlemode, that has double cladding, with the outer
cladding having a refractive index between that of the inner cladding and the
core.
dielectric
1. The nonconducting properties of an insulating material that resists the

passage of electric current. The insulation surrounding a copper conductor is
known as a dielectric. 2. A material that is nonmetallic and nonconductive.
3. A nonconductor of direct electric current.
dielectric cable
A nonconducting cable (e.g., an optical fiber cable with no metallic members).
dielectric constant
The ratio of capacitance of an insulated wire measured against the same wire
without insulation but using air as the dielectric.
diffraction
The bending of radio, sound, or lightwaves around an object, barrier, or

aperture edge.
digital
1. A nominally discontinuous signal that changes from one state to another in

a limited number of discrete steps. 2. A data format that uses at least two
distinct states to transmit information.
direct-buried cable
A telecommunications cable designed to be installed under the surface of the

earth, in direct contact with the soil. (TIA) Contrast with underground cable.
dispersion shifted
A singlemode optical fiber that has a nominal zero-dispersion point in the

1550 nanometer transmission window.
dispersion unshifted
A singlemode optical fiber that has a nominal zero-dispersion point in the

1300 nanometer transmission window. Also called conventional or unshifted
fiber.
2004 BICSI
G-7
Glossary
distortion
A change in the shape of a signals wavelength.
distribution frame
A structure with terminations for connecting the cabling of a facility in such a

manner that interconnection or cross-connections may be readily made. See
main cross-connect (campus distributor).
MainWhen the structure is located at the entrance facility or main

cross-connect (campus distributor) and serving the building or campus.
(TIA)
IntermediateWhen the structure is located between the main crossconnect (campus distributor) and the telecommunications room. (TIA)
down guy
A steel messenger (strand) that connects the suspension strand, span guy, or
other items of aerial plant to an anchor and rod.
drag line
Pull cord or line installed in a cable pathway. The line may be used for pulling
in a stronger strength rope to pull cable(s) of greater mass and weight into the
finished conduits.
drip loop
The length of cable, usually on the exterior of a building, placed above the
entry hole of the building, extended to below the entry hole, and looped back
up to the entry hole of the structure. The use of such cable installation will
impede moisture infiltration.
drop wire
An aerial cable that connects a serving outdoor terminal to a building or

structure.
duct
1. A single enclosed raceway for conductors or cables. 2. A single enclosed

raceway for wires or cables usually used in soil or concrete. 3. An enclosure
in which air is moved. Generally part of the heating, ventilating, and airconditioning system of a building. (TIA)
ductbank (DB)
An arrangement of ducts, for wires or cables, in tiers. (TIA)
ductpic
Plastic insulated conductor cables designed for placement underground.
duct plug
A fitting capping the end of a duct, or fittings to surround cables within the
duct, designed to provide a gas- and liquid-tight seal.
E
easement
A right acquired by one party to use land belonging to another party for a
specific purpose.
effective ground
Intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections

of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity
to prevent the buildup of voltages that may result in undue hazards to
connected equipment or to persons. (NEC)
G-8
2004 BICSI
Glossary
electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
A measure of equipment tolerance to external electromagnetic fields.

(IEEE )
electromagnetic
induction
Current flow in telecommunications conductors produced by coupling of a

magnetic field (e.g., by current in power lines, the cable shield, or other cable
pairs).
electromagnetic
interference (EMI)
Radiated or conducted electromagnetic energy that has an undesirable effect

on electronic equipment or signal transmissions. (TIA)
encapsulant
Permanent or removable filling compound for a splice enclosure to prevent

water intrusion.
encroachment
The private use of another persons right-of-way for an indefinite term, with
or without permission, usually involving obstructions (man-made structures).
encumbrance
Any lien, claim, or liability attached to the land that affects or limits the fee
simple title to property.
end user
The owner or user of the premises cabling system. (TIA)
entrance facility (EF)
1. An entrance to a building for both public and private network service

cables (including wireless) including the entrance point at the building wall and
continuing to the entrance room or space. (TIA) 2. A facility that provides all
necessary mechanical and electrical services, that complies with all relevant
regulations, for the entry of telecommunications cables into a building. (ISO)
entrance point (EP

[telecommunications])
The point of emergence for telecommunications cabling through an exterior

wall, a floor, or from a conduit. (TIA)
entrance room or space A space in which the joining of inter- or intrabuilding telecommunications
(telecommunications)
backbone facilities takes place. (TIA)
equipment grounding
conductor
The conductor used to connect the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of

equipment, raceways, and other enclosures to the system-grounded
conductor, the grounding electrode conductor, or both at the service
equipment.
equipment room (ER

An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications

equipment that usually houses a main or intermediate cross-connect. (TIA)
exothermic weld
A method of permanently bonding two metals together by a controlled heat

reaction, resulting in a molecular bond. (TIA)
F
facility
1. A building or room that makes possible some specific activity. 2. Sometimes used to describe outside plant cables or pairs to provide service.
ferrule (optical fiber)
The alignment sleeve portion of an optical connector used to protect and align
the stripped fiber.
2004 BICSI
G-9
Glossary
fiber optic
See optical fiber.
fill
1. A sequence of bits used to meet timing, sizing, or spacing requirements in

and between messages. Some protocols require a continuous stream of data;
therefore, zero bits are inserted to ensure that the data stream is not broken.
For protocols that require a fixed-size frame, bits are inserted to make the
frame size equal to its required frame size to prevent data from being
interpreted as control information. 2. Use of material (or material used) to
equalize or raise earth topography to a certain elevation. 3. The amount of
cable in conduit/raceway.
franchise
A right-of-way granted for placement of outside plant facilities within the

domain of public or private property.
frequency (freq)
The number of cycles or sine waves occurring in a given time; if the unit of
time is one second, the frequency is stated in hertz (Hz). One Hz is equal to
one cycle per second.
frost lift
Ground buckling upward as a result of heavy frost.
frost line
The deepest level below grade to which frost penetrates in a particular

geographic area.
frost uplift
See frost lift.
fuse
An overcurrent protective device with a circuit-opening fusible element that

is severed (open) when heated by the passage of an overcurrent. Fuses are
normally onetime devices; once they are open, they are not reusable.
fuse link
A length of cable that is two gauges finer than the conductors of the cable
being protected (e.g., fuse cable).
fusing
1. The process of joining fibers together by fusion or melting. 2. The process

of joining materials through a chemical or heating process. This fusing can
occur as an unwanted action that can appear as an open or a short.
fusion splice
A permanent joint accomplished by applying localized heat sufficient to fuse

or melt the ends of two optical fibers together, forming a continuous single
fiber.
G
gap distance
The distance between fiber ends.
gas tube protector
An overvoltage protector featuring metallic electrodes that discharge in a gas

atmosphere within a glass or ceramic envelope. This type of protector does
not require replacement each time it discharges, so it requires fewer site
maintenance visits.
G-10
2004 BICSI
Glossary
grade
1. Another word for degree. The slope of a surface with a vertical rise
or fall expressed as a percentage of the horizontal distance. 2. For a
communications circuit, it defines the level of the circuits capability.
ground
A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an

electrical circuit (e.g., telecommunications) or equipment and the earth or to
some conducting body that serves in place of earth. (TIA)
ground enhancement
material
A material used to enhance a low resistance for electron (current) flow to

ground.
ground potential rise

(GPR)
A voltage difference between a grounding electrode system and the earth

return currents produced by a lightning strike or a power fault current.
ground resistivity
The measured direct current resistance of a volume of earth.
ground wire
See bonding conductor for telecommunications.
grounding conductor
A conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the buildings main

grounding busbar. (TIA)
grounding electrode
A conductor, usually a rod, pipe, or plate (or group of conductors), in direct

contact with the earth for the purpose of providing a low-impedance
connection to the earth. (TIA)
grounding electrode
system
One or more grounding electrodes bonded to form a single reliable ground

for a structure.
guy
A steel stranded wire used to provide counter tension to the pole opposite
that of the installed cable pull tension to keep the pole upright.
guy rod end
A single, double, or triple eye at the end of a guy rod for the attachment of
the guy wire to the connect point above the ground anchor.
H
handhole (HH)
A structure similar to a small maintenance hole in which cable can be pulled,

but not large enough for a person to fully enter to perform work.
heat coil
A device that grounds a conductor when the conductors current time limits
are exceeded. Heat coils are suitable for sneak current protection.
horizontal directional
drilling
A method for placing underground facilities that uses a directed horizontal

auger or drill to establish the path, place casings or cables, and minimize
restoration costs associated with plowing or trenching.
hybrid cable
An assembly of two or more cables, of the same or different types or

categories, covered by one overall sheath. (TIA) Contrast with bundled
cable.
2004 BICSI
G-11
Glossary
hydraulic cement
A material used to patch cracks, holes, or gaps in cement or concrete

structures in wet or damp environments.
I
ice load
The weight factor calculated from the potential amount of ice that can build
up on outside plant structures from storm conditions.
immunity
The ability of a device, equipment, or system to perform without degradation

in the presence of an electromagnetic disturbance.
index of refraction
(IOR)
The ratio of the velocity of light in a vacuum to the velocity of light in another
medium. Also called refractive index.
infrastructure
1. A collection of those telecommunications components, excluding

equipment, that together provides the basic support for the distribution of all
information within a building or campus. (TIA) 2. Substructure of the system
used to support the cable plant being installed.
ingress
An electrical characteristic associated with externally generated noise

induced into cable facilities.
innerduct
A nonmetallic raceway, usually circular, placed within a larger pathway.

(TIA)
insertion loss
The signal loss resulting from the insertion of a component, or link, or

channel, between a transmitter and receiver (often referred to as
attenuation). (TIA) See attenuation.
insulating joint
1. A splice in a cable sheath where the continuity of the sheath and shield is
deliberately interrupted to prevent the flow of currents that may cause
electrolytic corrosion. 2. A direct current isolation gap that is bridged by a
capacitor.
isolation gap
A procedure that isolates the building ground from the OSP ground by
removing the armor shield from the entrance cable for a short distance and
inserting a capacitor to connect from one side of the armor shield to the other
side. This may be accomplished at a splice point or in the entrance cable
sheath itself.
J
joint random
buried plant
Power, cables, and telephone cables that are placed in a common trench with
little or no separation.
G-12
2004 BICSI
Glossary
L
laser
A device that produces coherent, highly directional light with a narrow range
of wavelengths used in a transmitter to convert information from electrical to
optical form.
lateral conduit
A conduit toward the side.
lease
A contract that grants the lessee (tenant) the right to occupy the property of
the lessor (landlord) for a specified period of time.
license
An interest in property for a limited time and purpose.
lien
A claim on the property of another as security for the payment of a just debt.
light-emitting diode
(LED)
A semiconductor diode that spontaneously emits incoherent light from the

p-n junction when forward current is applied. It converts information from
electrical to optical form. An LED typically has a large spectral width. LEDs
give moderate performance at lower prices than laser diodes. LEDs are
commonly used with multimode fiber in data enterprise and industrial
applications.
link
A transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment,

work area cables, and equipment cables. Can be up to 90 m (295 ft) in length
for horizontal cabling.
link loss budget
The maximum allowable loss for the end-to-end cable system.
listed
1. Equipment included in a list published by an organization, acceptable to the

authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), that maintains periodic inspection of
production of listed equipment, and whose listing states either that the
equipment or material meets appropriate standards or has been tested and
found suitable for use in a specified manner. (TIA) 2. Buildings of historic/
public interest that structurally cannot be altered or can only be altered with
approval of the AHJ. 3. A product listed after it successfully completes a
series of mechanical, electrical, and thermal characteristic tests that simulate
all reasonable, foreseeable hazards.
loading coil
A low-resistance, high-inductance coil inserted in a voice copper circuit to

increase its inductance in order to compensate for the buildup of capacitance
in a cable pair.
load point
The point at which loading coils are attached.
local area network

(LAN)
A geographically limited data communications system for a specific user

group consisting of a group of interconnected computers sharing applications,
data, and peripheral devices (e.g., printers and CD-ROM drives) intended for
the local transport of data, video, and voice.
local exchange carrier

(LEC)
The telecommunications company that provides public switched network

access service. (TIA)
2004 BICSI
G-13
Glossary
loop
1. In telephone systems, the wire pair that connects the customer to the
switching center. This path is called a loop because it is generally two wires
electrically tied together through the customer terminal set when the
customer goes off hook. 2. The outside plant facilities that extend from a
serving main entrance facility or remote site to the exchange boundary.
3. A communications channel from a switching center or an individual
message distribution point to the user terminal.
loop diversity
The placing of alternate facilities to back up the main system in case of

failure. See alternate entrance.
loose tube
A type of optical fiber cable construction where one or more fibers are laid
loosely in a tube. Also called loose-tube fiber.
M
main cross-connect
(MC [campus
distributor (CD)])
The cross-connect normally located in the (main) equipment room for crossconnection and interconnection of entrance cables, first-level backbone
cables, and equipment cables. Campus distributor is the international
equivalent term for main cross-connect.
maintenance hole (MH

1. A vault located in the ground or earth as part of an underground duct

system and used to facilitate placing, splicing, and maintenance of cables, as
well as the placing of associated equipment, in which it is expected that a
person will enter to perform work. Formerly called manhole. 2. A hole
through which access to an underground or enclosed structure may be
gained.
mandrel
1. A rod or a shaft. 2. A mechanical device sized to fit the inside diameter of

a conduit. Pulled or pushed through a duct, it ensures concentricity of the
structure and frees the structure from debris.
matched clad
Optical fibers are made of a core and cladding glass, each with slightly
different compositions. The manufacturing process determines the
relationship between these two glasses. Singlemode optical fiber produced by
the outside vapor deposition process produces a matched-clad fiber with a
very low core/cladding concentricity error rate.
mechanical splicing
The joining of two optical fibers through mechanical means to enable a

continuous signal. These spliced connections may be temporary or
permanent.
media
Wire, cable, or conductors used for telecommunications. (TIA)
megahertz (MHz)
A unit of frequency equal to one million cycles per second (hertz).
G-14
2004 BICSI
Glossary
megger
1. A device that can be used to measure electrical resistance in a grounding

system. 2. A testing unit used to generate a high voltage between cable
conductors to detect current leakage between conductors or conductor to
ground.
membrane penetration
An opening through only one surface or side of a barrier. (TIA)
messenger
See support strand (messenger).
metes and bounds
A description of a parcel of land by reference to the courses bearings

(i.e., the angles east or west of due north or south) and distances (usually
measured in feet or chains) of the straight lines that form its boundary, with
one of the corners tied to an established point (e.g., the intersection of center
lines of two roads). If one part of the boundary is on a curve, it is described
by showing the number of degrees of the central angle subtended by the
curve arc, the length of the radius, and the length along the curve.
modular patch panel

(MPP)
A facility enabling the terminating of cable elements on insulation

displacement connector modules and their connections by means of a patch
cord. See patch panel.
modulation
Any of several techniques (e.g., AM and FM) used to modulate a carrier

signal with an information-bearing signal.
monolithic pour
The single, continuous pouring of a concrete floor or columns of any given

floor of a building structure. (TIA)
monolithic slab
The result of a monolithic pour. (TIA)
multiground neutral
(MGN) system
A utility power system where the neutral conductor is continuously

present along with the phase conductors. The neutral conductor is connected
to earth periodically along its path, typically, four times per 1.6 km (1.0 mi).
multimedia
1. An application that communicates to more than one of the human sensory

receptors. (TIA) 2. Applications that communicate information by more than
one means. (TIA)
multimode optical fiber
A graded-index or step-index optical fiber that supports the propagation of

more than one bound mode.
N
nonzero dispersion
shifted
2004 BICSI
A type of optical fiber designed to introduce a small amount of

dispersion without a zero point crossing being in the wavelength division
multiplexer passband. With this type of optical fiber, it is possible to eliminate
or at least greatly reduce the degradation due to four-wave mixing, a
distortion mechanism that requires the spectral components to be phase
matched along the optical fiber.
G-15
Glossary
O
optical fiber
Thin filament of glass or plastic that conducts a light signal. Optical fiber
consists of a central light-carrying core (glass or plastic) and an outer
refractive cladding.
optical fiber cable
An assembly consisting of one or more optical fibers. (TIA)
outside plant (OSP)
Telecommunications infrastructure designed for installation exterior to

buildings. (TIA)
overbuild
Customer-owned outside plant facilities placed in conjunction with existing

outside plant of a locally owned or competitive company.
P
patch cord
A length of cable with a plug on one or both ends. (TIA)
patch panel
A connecting hardware system that facilitates cable termination and cabling

administration using patch cords. (TIA) See modular patch panel.
pathway
1. A sequence of connections that provides the connectivity between devices

on a network or between networks on an internetwork. 2. The vertical and
horizontal route of the telecommunications cable. 3. A facility for the
placement of telecommunications cable. (TIA)
pedestal
A protective aboveground enclosure used most commonly to house a splice

point or administrative terminal location.
penetration
Opening made in a barrier (architectural structure or assembly). There are

two types of penetration:
Membrane penetration pierces or interrupts the outside surface of only

one side of a barrier.
Through penetration pierces or interrupts both outside surfaces of a

barrier.
plastic insulated
conductor (PIC)
A metallic conductor that is insulated with a plastic material.
plate anchor
An anchor composed of a rigid steel or other high-strength metal plate directburied in the ground.
point-to-point (PTP)
A direct connection established between two specific locations, as between

two buildings or devices.
pole
A column of wood, steel, fiberglass, or other material supporting overhead

cables, usually by means of arms or brackets; used in customer-owned
outside plant installations.
G-16
2004 BICSI
Glossary
pole class
A rating used to classify outside plant pole strengths. See pole.
polyvinyl chloride
(PVC)
A tough, flame-retardant, thermoplastic, water-resistant insulator.
precast concrete
A concrete member that is cast and cured in other than its final position.
premises
A generic term that includes interbuilding, intrabuilding, and horizontal cabling

that is owned by a single tenant or landlord.
pressurization
The use of pressurized gas or dry air inside cable sheaths to prevent the
entry of water at faulty splices or accidental sheath openings.
primary power system
The power distributed from an electric generation station usually consisting

of 2200 volts, 13,800 volts, or higher. Primary power lines are usually
referred to as supply wires.
primary protector
1. A device that limits voltage between telecommunications conductors and

ground (usually between 215 volt [V] direct current [dc] to 350 Vdc).
2. A protective device placed on telecommunications conductors in
accordance with NFPA 70.
propagation delay
The time required for a signal to travel from one end of the transmission path
to the other end. (TIA)
protector
A device used to protect facilities and equipment from abnormally high

voltages or currents.
protector unit
A device to protect against overvoltage, overcurrent, or both.
protocol
The rules and procedures governing the formatting of messages and the
timing of their exchange between devices on a network.
pull
1. The act of placing cable by pulling. 2. The longitudinal force acting on a

pole as a result of horizontal loading.
pull tension
The pulling force that can be applied to a cable. (TIA)
pulling iron
An attachment installed in maintenance holes to provide a point of connection

for blocks, sheaves, and other devices used for pulling cable into the duct
system.
push brace
Where guying is not feasible, bracing is provided by use of a pole of an

equivalent type to the pole being reinforced.
2004 BICSI
G-17
Glossary
R
rack
See cable rack.
radio frequency
interference (RFI)
Electromagnetic interference within the frequency band for radio

transmission. (TIA) See electromagnetic compatibility and electromagnetic
interference.
rearrangement
An action taken to replace, add, adapt, or remove existing premises wiring

system components. (TIA)
record
A collection of detailed information related to a specific element of the

telecommunications infrastructure. (TIA)
reinforced concrete
A type of construction in which steel (reinforcement) and concrete are

combined, with the steel resisting tension and the concrete resisting
compression. (TIA)
reinforcing bar
A steel bar or rod used in concrete construction to provide additional

strength. Also called rebar.
report
A presentation of a collection of information from the various records. (TIA)
right-of-way
A route across public or private lands over (or under) which

telecommunications facilities can be legally installed and maintained.
riser
1. Vertical sections of cable (e.g., changing from underground or directburied plant to aerial plant). 2. The space used for cable access between
floors.
roadbed
The graded portion of a roadway upon which the base course, surface
course, shoulders, and median are constructed.
rodding
Pushing or pulling a mandrel or duct brush through a conduit, using poles or

rods that join together to determine if the pathway is clear and can be used to
install a pull string.
S
scattering
The deflection of light from the path it would follow if the refractive index
were uniform or gradually graded. Caused primarily by micro defects,
impurities, and molecular structure in the fiber.
screen
A thin metallic wrapping (e.g., aluminum foil) used to isolate cable pairs from
interference.
section throw
Splicing of a new section of cable at both ends into existing cable plant.
service provider (SP)
The operator of any service that furnishes telecommunications content

(transmissions) delivered over access provider facilities. (TIA) See access
provider.
G-18
2004 BICSI
Glossary
service wire
An underground or aerial cable that connects a serving outdoor terminal to a

building or structure.
sheath
See cable sheath. (TIA)
shield
A metallic layer placed around a conductor or group of conductors. (TIA)
singlemode optical fiber 1. Optical fiber with a relatively small diameter, featuring a core of 8-9
micron (micrometers) and a cladding diameter of 125 micron; light is
restricted to a single path, or mode, in singlemode fiber. 2. An optical fiber
that carries only one path of light. (TIA)
sleeve
An opening, usually circular, through the wall, ceiling, or floor to allow the
passage of cables. (TIA)
slot
An opening through a wall, floor, or ceiling, usually rectangular, to allow the

passage of cables. (TIA)
source
The means (usually light-emitting diode [LED] or laser) used to convert an

electrical information-carrying signal into a corresponding optical signal for
transmission by an optical waveguide.
space
An area used for housing the installation and termination of

telecommunications equipment and cable (e.g., common equipment rooms,
equipment rooms, common telecommunications rooms, telecommunications
rooms, work areas, and maintenance holes/handholes). (TIA)
span
The length between two support points. In aerial plant, the span is the space
between two poles or building connection points.
span guy
Guying installed across a span placed on straight pole lines to reinforce them
against excess tension placed on them by severe weather conditions. Also
called a line guy or pole-to-pole.
splayed
Sloped, slanted, or spread outward. Splayed maintenance hole duct entrances

are placed toward the outward sides of an entrance wall rather than placed
in the center of the entrance wall.
splice
1. A joining of conductors meant to be permanent. (TIA) 2. A device that

joins conducting or transmitting media.
splice case
A metal or plastic housing with a semi-cylindrical cavity used in identical

pairs to clamp around a cable splice to provide a closure.
splice closure
A device used to protect a splice. (TIA) See splice case.
splicing
The act of joining copper conductors or fiber strands to like products.
star topology
A network topology in which services are distributed from a central point.
2004 BICSI
G-19
Glossary
strand
1. A single string of wire used to make up a larger wire or cable by twisting a

number of strands together. Galvanized steel stranded cable is used as
support strand and guy wire. Support strand is listed by strength (e.g., a 6M
strand is rated at 2.72 kg [6000 lb] of strength). 2. A single unit of optical
fiber within a cable (e.g., a 12-strand fiber cable has 12 individual optical
fibers within the cable sheath). 3. Steel cables composed of several wires
twisted together.
support strand
(messenger)
A strength element used to carry the weight of the telecommunications cable.

(TIA)
surge arrester
A protective device for limiting surge voltages by discharging or bypassing

surge current, and it also prevents continued flow of follow current while
remaining capable of repeating these functions. (NEC)
surge protective
device
See surge arrester.
T
tap
1. An electrical connection permitting signals to be transmitted onto or off a

bus. 2. The linking between the bus and the drop cable that connects the
workstation to the bus in 10BASE-5 Ethernet. 3. A device used on
community antenna television cables for matching impedance or connecting
service drops. See bridged tap.
taper point
A splice location where the cable size along a route is reduced.
telecommunications
Any transmission, emission, and reception of signs, signals, writings, images,

and sounds; that is, information of any nature by cable, radio, optical, or other
electromagnetic systems. (TIA)
telecommunications
main grounding busbar
(TMGB)
A busbar placed in a convenient and accessible location and bonded, by

means of the bonding conductor for telecommunications, to the building
service equipment (power) ground. (TIA)
telecommunications
room (TR)
An enclosed architectural space for housing telecommunications

equipment, cable terminations, and cross-connects cabling. (TIA)
tensile strength
The longitudinal pulling stress needed to break apart a cable or material.
terminal (TERM)
1. A point at which information may enter or leave a telecommunications

network. (TIA) 2. The input-output associated equipment. (TIA) 3. A device
by means of which wires may be connected to each other. (TIA)
terminal block (TB)
A protected or unprotected unit that serves to terminate cable conductors and

is a transition point between cable conductors.
G-20
2004 BICSI
Glossary
test hole
A hole or group of holes dug along a proposed underground route to

determine what utilities or other obstructions may be present. These holes
are normally hand dug for safety. They should only be dug after a one-call
type procedure has been followed and permits obtained.
thimble eye
A device for securing the end of a strand.
thimble eye rod
A device used to place the guy wire(s) within the eye opening when guying
from a main pole to a stub pole or when guying to the ground. Also called a
thimble eyebolt.
through penetration
A continuous opening that passes through both surfaces of a fire-rated

barrier. (TIA)
thunderstorm day
Any day thunder is heard at a specific observation point. Such observations

confirm the presence of lightning but do not provide information on the
number of strikes to earth.
topology
The physical or logical arrangement of a telecommunications system. (TIA)
transducer
In pressurized systems, a device that permits reading the cable pressure in a

pressurized cable.
transmission budget
The calculated limit for quality service available based on transmission

characteristics.
transverse
Lying or extending across or in a cross direction. To pass over, under, or

through.
traverse
See transverse.
trench
A furrow dug into the earth for the placement of direct-buried cable or for
the installation of conduit ducts.
twisted-pair
Two individually insulated copper wires physically twisted together to form a

balanced pair.
U
underground
Refers to conduit and maintenance hole systems installed below the surface
of the ground.
underground cable
A telecommunications cable designed to be installed under the surface of the

earth in a trough or duct that isolates the cable from direct contact with the
soil. (TIA) Contrast with direct-buried cable.
unshifted singlemode
See dispersion unshifted.
utility tunnel
An enclosed passageway, usually placed between buildings, for the

distribution of utility services. (TIA)
2004 BICSI
G-21
Glossary
V
vault
A telecommunications space, typically subterranean, located within or

between buildings and used for the distribution, splicing, and termination of
cabling. These spaces may be established as a maintenance hole in campus
environments or they may include active equipment in addition to passive
cabling such as in a controlled environment vault (CEV).
vertical down lead

(VDL)
A ground wire placed on a pole that leads down to the ground electrode at
the base of the pole.
W
wavelength
The length of a wave measured from any point on one wave to the
corresponding point on the next wave, (e.g., from crest to crest). The
wavelength of light is usually measured in nanometers (nm).
wire
An individually insulated solid or stranded metallic conductor.
wye
1. A power system in which only one point (usually the midpoint of a supply
transformer bank) is grounded. In this type of power system, the neutral
conductor may or may not be carried along with the phase conductors. If the
neutral is present, it is not grounded along the line. 2. A method of connection
for primary or secondary windings of a three-phase transformer bank in
which similar ends of each phase winding are connected at a common point
that forms the electrical neutral and is often grounded.
G-22
2004 BICSI
Glossary
Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AASHO
American Association of State Highway Officials
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ac
alternating current
ACR
attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
A-D or A/D
analog-to-digital conversion
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act
ADSL
asymmetric digital subscriber line
ADSS
all-dielectric self-supporting
A/E
architect or engineer
AEC
architect/engineer/contractor
AHJ
authority having jurisdiction
AIA
American Institute of Architects
ALPETH
aluminum polyethylene
ALVYN
aluminum polyvinyl chloride
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AP
access provider
APT
American pipe thread
APWA
American Public Works Association
ASCII
American standard code for information interchange
ASP
aluminum, steel, polyethylene
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
ATM
asynchronous transfer mode
AT&T
American Telephone & Telegraph Company
AWG
American wire gauge
2004 BICSI
G-23
Glossary
B
BCT
bonding conductor for telecommunications
BD
building distributor
BER
bit error rate
BICSI
Building Industry Consulting Service International
BLSR
bidirectional line switched ring
BOC
Bell Operating Comapnies
BOCA
Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc.
BOMA
Building Owners Managers Association
BRI
basic rate interface
BRISDN
basic rate integrated services digital network
BSI
British Standards Institution
C
CACSP
coated aluminum, coated steel, polyethylene
CAD
computer-aided design
CATV
community antenna television (cable television)
CCTV
closed circuit television
CD
campus distributor
CDF
combined distribution frame
CDM
code division multiplexing
CDMA
code division multiple access
CDO
community dial office
CEC
Canadian Electrical Code
CEV
controlled environment vault
CF
cellular floor
CFM
cubic feet per minute
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
ckt
circuit
CLEC
competitive local exchange carrier
CO
central office
CO-OSP
customer-owned outside plant
G-24
2004 BICSI
Glossary
codec
coder/decoder
COE
central office equipment
COT
central office terminal
CP
consolidation point
CPAMS
cable pressurization automatic monitoring system
CPE
customer premises equipment
CPM
critical path method
CPMS
cable pressure monitoring system
CPU
central processing unit
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute
CUE
concrete universal enclosure
D
D-A or D/A
digital-to-analog conversion
DAF
dedicated access facility
dB
decibel
DB
direct-buried
DB
ductbank
dBm
decibel milliwatt
dc
direct current
demarc
demarcation point
DEPIC
dual-expanded plastic insulated conductor
DLC
digital loop carrier
DNR
Department of Natural Resources
DoC
Department of Commerce
DoT
Department of Transportation
DP
demarcation point
DP
demultiplexer
DSL
digital subscriber line
DSX
digital signal cross-connect
DTE
data terminal equipment
DWDM
dense wave division multiplexing
2004 BICSI
G-25
Glossary
E
EB
encased buried
E&C
engineering and construction
EF
entrance facility
EMC
electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
electromagnetic interface
EP
entrance point
ER
equipment rooms
F
freq
frequency
G
ga
gauge
GACAN
gauge coding area number
GHz
gigahertz
GND
ground
GPR
ground potential rise
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communications
GTE
General Telephone and Electronics
GVWR
gross vehicle weight rating
H
HC
horizontal cross-connect
HDG
heavy-duty galvanized
HDPE
high-density polyethylene
HDSL
high bit-rate digital subscriber line
HDTV
high-definition television
HFC
hybrid fiber/coaxial
HH
handhole
HVAC
heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning
Hz
hertz
G-26
2004 BICSI
Glossary
I
IC
intermediate cross-connect
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ID
identification
ID
inside diameter
IDC
insulation displacement
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
IFMA
International Facility Management Association
ILEC
incumbent local exchange carrier
IOR
index of refraction connector
IRWA
International Right-of-Way Association
ISDN
integrated services digital network
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
ITU-R
International Telecommunication UnionRadio Sector
ITU-T
International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication
IW
inside wiring
IXC
interexchange carrier
J
JAN
joint Army Navy
K
km
kilometer
kPa
kilopascal
kV
kilovolt
L
LAN
local area network
laser
light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation
LATA
local access and transport area
LBO
line buildout
LEC
local exchange carrier (now called service provider[SP])
LED
light-emitting diode
2004 BICSI
G-27
Glossary
M
Mb/s
megabit per second
MC
main cross-connect
MCF
million conductor feet
MDF
main distribution frame
MF
pipe manifold
MGN
multiground neutral
MH
maintenance hole
MHz
megahertz
MM
multimode
modem
modulator/demodulator
MPD
multiple plastic duct
MPP
modular patch panel
MSDS
Material Safety Data Sheet
MTBF
mean time between failure
mux
multiplex; multiplexer
N
NBCC
National Building Code of Canada
NEC
National Electrical Code
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESC
National Electrical Safety Code
NEXT
near-end crosstalk
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association, Inc.
NGDLC
next generation digital loop carrier
NI
network interface
NIU
network interface unit
NOAA
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
G-28
2004 BICSI
Glossary
O
OAU
optimum air usage
OCSI
One Call Systems International
OD
outside diameter
OEM
original equipment manufacturer
OPE
outside plant engineer
OPGW
optical power ground wire
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSP
outside plant
P
PABX
private automatic branch exchange
PAP
polyethylene, aluminum, polyethylene
PASP
polyethylene, aluminum, steel, polyethylene
PBX
private branch exchange
PCM
pulse code modulation
PCS
personal communications service
PE
polyethylene
PE
professional engineer
PERT
program evaluation review technique
PIC
plastic insulated conductor
PLR
plant locator record
PM
project manager
PMI
Project Management Institute
PO
purchase order
POI
point of interface
PON
passive optical network
POP
point of presence
POTS
plain old telephone service (colloquial)
PP
air feeder pipe
PRI
primary rate interface
PTP
point-to-point
PVC
polyvinyl chloride
PVDF
polyvinylidene fluoride
2004 BICSI
G-29
Glossary
R
RCDD
Registered Communications Distribution Designer
REA
Rural Electrification Administration (now, Rural Utilities Services [RUS])
RF
radio frequency
RFI
radio frequency interference
RFI
request for information
RFP
request for proposal
RFQ
request for quote
RH
relative humidity
rms
root mean square
ROM
rough-order of magnitude
ROW
right-of-way
RT
remote terminal
RTV
room temperature vulcanization
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
S
SC
subscriber connector
SCC
Standards Council of Canada
SCFD
standard cubic feet per day
SCFH
standard cubic feet per hour
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc.
SDH
synchronous digital hierarchy
SDN
switched digital network
SDSL
symmetrical digital subscriber line
SE
station equipment
SI
International System of Units (Le Systeme International dUnites)
SLC
subscriber loop carrier
SM
singlemode
SMDR
station message detail recording
SNR
signal-to-noise ratio
SOE
standard operating environment
SONET
synchronous optical network
G-30
2004 BICSI
Glossary
SOW
scope of work
SOW
statement of work
SP
service provider
SRL
structural return loss
SR/WA
senior right-of-way agent
STALPETH
steel, aluminum, polyethylene
T
TB
terminal block
T&C
terms and conditions
TDM
time-division multiplexing
TDMA
time division multiple access
TDR
time domain reflectometer
TELCO
telephone company
TERM
terminal
TGB
telecommunications grounding busbar
TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
TMGB
telecommunications main grounding busbar
TP
twisted-pair
TR
telecommunications room
TSB
Telecommunications Systems Bulletin (formerly Technical Systems Bulletin)
U
UG
underground
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
ULC
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada
UP
universal pedestal
UPSR
unidirectional path switched ring
2004 BICSI
G-31
Glossary
V
V
volt
VDL
vertical down lead
VDSL
very high bit-rate digital subscriber line
Vrms
volts root mean square
W
WA
work area
WBS
work breakdown structure
X
xDSL
x digital subscriber line
XPE-PVC
expanded polyethylene-polyvinyl chloride
G-32
2004 BICSI
Glossary
Symbols
PL 70 m (230 ft)
BKMA - 400 pr
1.
Placing stamp
2.
Splice and splice number
3.
Transferred pairs in splice
4.
Fixed-count terminal block spliced to cable
5.
Ready-access type connecting block; pairs terminated on a

fixed-count basis
6.
Protected fixed-count type terminal block spliced to cable
7.
Protected block spliced to cable with pairs terminated on a readyaccess type connecting block
1
125
2004 BICSI
G-33
Glossary
8.
Optical fiber cable termination
9.
Existing cable
10.
Proposed cable
11.
Future cable
12.
Cable to be removed
13.
Buried cable
BJ
CEG
14.
Buried in a joint trench (C = communications, E = electric, G = gas)
15.
Underground duct or cable in duct with two maintenance holes

(MHs)
16.
Cable design, insulation type, gauge, sheath design, and pairs (greater
than or equal to 100 pairs)3 indicates the number of 100-pair
complements; in this example, the 3 may also appear on drawings as
300, meaning the amount of pairs within the cable.
TYPE
MH 1
MH 2
BKMA-3
G-34
2004 BICSI
Glossary
BKMA-16 Pr
17.
Cable containing less than 100 pairs; this symbol is a 16 pair (pr).
The pr symbolizes less than 100 pair.
SUBM
18.
Submarine cable
19.
Changes in cable size, gauge, count, type, or classification
20.
Point on cable (other than splice) where a division of measurement

or point of record is required
21.
Existing straight splice
22.
Proposed straight splice
23.
Encapsulated splice
24.
Cable loopno splice involved
25.
Pairs cut and ends cleared in splice closure
BKMA-3
BKMA-3
BKMA-2
310 m
(1017 ft)
103 m
(338 ft)
Enc
2004 BICSI
G-35
Glossary
26.
Cable cut, end cleared, and capped
27.
Insulating joint
28.
Fixed-count terminal
Type
53A4-50P
Count
P 1347
1-50
Address
NC 25 A1
51-75
P 1346
29.
Fixed-count terminal with cable protection
AT400-25P
76-100
P 1347
30.
Fixed-count terminal without cable protection
PM
31.
Interface with moisture plug
32.
Case with factory-equipped stub
33.
Load coils and case
34.
Ground
35.
Ground to multiground neutral vertical ground wire
BKMA-3
PM
LC
MGNV
G-36
2004 BICSI
Glossary
TGR
B.
36.
Power multiground neutral
37.
Telecommunications ground rod
38.
Power neutral bond
39.
Bond between separate metallic cable shields
40.
Anchor only
41.
Guy only
42.
Anchor and guy
43.
Anchor and insulated guy
44.
Sidewalk anchor and guy
45.
Push brace
.
.N
Cable
Bond
Cable
PB
2004 BICSI
G-37
Glossary
46.
Anchor and guy owned by others
47.
Existing poles
48.
Proposed pole
49.
Pole to be removed
50.
Nonwood pole (indicate material type)
51.
Repeater stationtwo way
52.
Capacitor (wire diagram)
53.
Buildout capacitors located in case
54.
Optical fiber cable
Pole
number
P 1375
30 ft 5
Length
and class
(P 1375)
(25 ft 41)
Year originally set
(Type)
G-38
2004 BICSI
Glossary
55.
Multiplexer
56.
Underground conduit, maintenance hole, and subsidiary conduit to

P1388
57.
Proposed maintenance hole type, length, width, headroom, and type

of frame and cover
58.
Trench meters (feet) of conduit and type of duct
59.
One 6-pair multiple drop wire
60.
Direct-buried wire
61.
Nonprotected wire terminal
62.
Protected wire terminal
P 1388
Type A
3.7 m x 1.5 m x 2 m
(12 ft x 5 ft x 6.6 ft)
0.76 m (2.5 ft) B F & C
175 m (574 ft)

12 - 40
100 mm (4 in)
CMDW - 6 PR
2004 BICSI
5-B5
G-39
Glossary
WARNING
It is the responsibility of the user of this manual to determine and use the applicable safety and health
practices (e.g., in the United States, Occupational Safety and Health Administration [OSHA],
National Electrical Code [NEC], National Electrical Safety Code [NESC]) associated with
customer-owned outside plant (CO-OSP). CO-OSP is inherently dangerous. BICSI shall not be liable
to the purchaser or any other entity with respect to any liability, loss, or damage caused directly or
indirectly by application or use of this manual. No project is so important, nor any completion deadline
so critical, to justify the non-conformance with industry standards.
This manual does not address safety issues associated with its use. It is the designers responsibility to
use established, and appropriate safety and health practices, and to determine the applicability of all
regulatory agencies.
G-40
2004 BICSI
Bibliography
Bibliography
3M Telecom Systems Division. Telecommunications Outside Plant Networks. St. Paul,
Minn.: 3M Telecom Systems Division, March 1998.
American National Standards Institute. ANSI J-STD-607-A. Commercial Building
Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. New York:
American National Standards Institute, 2002.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Insulated Cable Engineers Association
(ICEA). ANSI/ICEA S-85-625. Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated,Copper Conductors
Telecommunications Cable. Carrollton, Ga.: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 1996.
_______. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-2002. Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin
Insulated Copper Conductor. Carrollton, Ga.: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
_______. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2002. Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded
Twisted-Pair Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring
Systems. Carrollton, Ga.: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, 2002.
_______. ANSI/ICEA S-98-688. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable,
Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, Ga.: Insulated Cable
Engineers Association, 1997.
_______. ANSI/ICEA S-99-689. Broadband Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cable
Filled Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors. Carrollton, Ga.: Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, 1997.
American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A. Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard. Arlington, Va.: Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance, 1995.
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 1: General Requirements. Arlington, Va.: Telecommunications Industry
Association/Electronic Industries Alliance, 2001.
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-3. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards, Part 1: General Requirements; Addendum 3Supportable Distances and
Channel Attenuation for Optical Fiber Applications by Fiber Type. Arlington, Va.:
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance, 2001.
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components. Arlington, Va.:
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance, 2001.
2004 BICSI
B-1
Bibliography
Bibliography, continued
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard,
Arlington, Va.: Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance, 2000.
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B. Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces. Arlington, Va.: Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-570-A. Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
Arlington, Va.: Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance, 1999.
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure. Arlington, Va.: Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
_______. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Cabling Standard. Arlington, Va.: Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
American Society for Testing and Materials International. ASTM D2863-00. Standard Test
Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index). West Conshohocken, Pa.: American Society for
Testing and Materials International, 2000.
_______. ASTM F512-95 (2001)E1. Smooth-Wall Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Conduit
and Fittings for Underground Installation. West Conshohocken, Pa.: American Society for
Testing and Materials International, 1995.
American Public Works Association. One-Call Systems International Communications
One-Call Centers. Kansas City, Mo: American Public Works Association, 2001.
AT&T Network Systems. Customer Education and Training. Outside Plant Engineering
Handbook. AT&T, 1994.
Bell Atlantic Network Services. Outside Plant Engineering Reference Manual. South
Plainfield, N.J.: Bell Atlantic Network Services, January 1987.
BICSI. OSP 100. Introduction to Customer-Owned Outside Plant. Tampa, Fla.: BICSI,
2000.
_______. OSP 101.Customer-Owned Outside Plant Site Survey and Media Selection.
Tampa, Fla.: BICSI, 2000.
_______. OSP 110. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Cable Plant Design. Tampa, Fla.:
BICSI, 2003.
_______. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual. 10th ed. Tampa, Fla.:
BICSI, 2003.
B-2
2004 BICSI
Bibliography
GTE. OSP Engineering. Volumes I and II. Dallas, Tex.: GTE Technical Documentation,
1991.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. National Electrical Safety Code.
(NESC). Piscataway, N.J.: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 2002.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. P-61-694-1999. Coding Guide for Copper
Outside Plant and Riser Cable. Carrollton, Ga.: Insulated Cable Engineers Association,
1999.
. ICEA S104-696-2001. Standard For Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable. Carrollton,
Ga.: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc., 2001.
. ICEA S-83-596-2001. Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable. Carrollton, Ga.:
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc., 2001.
Jacobus, Charles J. Real Estate, An Introduction to the Profession, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice-Hall, 1999.
National Fire Protection Association, Inc. (NFPA). National Electrical Code (NEC ).
Quincy, Mass.: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 2002.
. NFPA 71. Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Signaling Systems for Central
Station Service. Quincy, Mass.: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 1989.
. NFPA 72. National Fire Alarm Code. Quincy, Mass.: National Fire Protection
Association, Inc., 2002.
. NFPA 75. Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment. Quincy, Mass.: National Fire Protection Association, Inc., 1999.
. NFPA 101. Life Safety Code. Quincy, Mass.: National Fire Protection
Association, Inc., 2003.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). UL 94. Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials
for Parts in Devices and Appliances. Northbrook, Ill.: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Revised 2000.
_______. UL 497A. Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits. Northbrook, Ill.:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 2001.
U.S. Departments of the Army and the Navy. FM 11-486-5, TO 31W-10-22. Telecommunications Engineering Outside Plant, Telephone. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Departments of the
Army and Navy, April 1992.
2004 BICSI
B-3
Bibliography
U.S. Government Printing Office. Bulletin 1751F-630. Design of Aerial Plant. Washington,
D.C.: Rural Utilities Service, January 1996.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-635. Aerial Plant Construction. Washington, D.C.: Rural Utilities
Service, June 1996.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-640. Design of Buried Plant-Physical Considerations.
Washington, D.C.: Rural Utilities Service, March 1995.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-641. Construction of Buried Plant. Washington, D.C.: Rural
Utilities Service, June 1995.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-642. Construction Route Planning of Buried Plant. Washington,
D.C.: Rural Utilities Service, June 1995.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-643. Design of Underground Conduit. Washington, D.C.: Rural
Utilities Service, September 2002.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-644. Underground Plant Construction. Washington, D.C.: Rural
Utilities Service, August 2002.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-650. Aerial Plant Guying and Anchoring. Washington, D.C.:
Rural Utilities Service, July 1996.
_______. Bulletin 1751F-815. Electrical Protection of Outside Plant. Washington, D.C.:
Rural Utilities Service, May 1995.
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910: Occupational Safety and Health
Standards. Washington, D.C.: U.S. National Archives and Records Administrations Office
of the Federal Register. Revised 2001.
. OSHA. Code of Federal Regulations. Title 29, Part 1926, Safety and Health
Regulations for Construction. Washington, D.C.: U.S. National Archives and Records
Administrations Office of the Federal Register. Revised 2003.
B-4
2004 BICSI
Index
Index
A
American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ....
1-8, 1-9, 10-4
National Standards Institute .......... 1-1, 1-8, 1-9, 3-146, 10-15
Society for Testing and Materials ........................... 3-25, 5-15
Telephone & Telegraph ....................................................... 1-1
wire gauge ........................................................................ 4-24
amplifier ..................................................................... 2-12, 4-70
analysis, cost ......................................................................... 3-61
anchor .................................................................................... 9-10
rods ..................................................................................... 6-5
anchors, types ...................................................................... 3-124
angle bracing ......................................................................... 3-53
ANSI ....................................................................... 1-8, 1-9, 10-5
ANSI/ICEA
P-61-694-1999 ................................................................. 4-28
S-84-608-2002 .................................................................. 1-11
S-85-625-2002 .................................................................. 1-11
S-90-661-2002 .................................................................. 1-11
ANSI-J-STD-607-A .................................................... 1-13, 6-19
ANSI/TIA/EIA568-B.1 ............................................................. 1-13, 4-6, 4-15
568-B.1-3 .......................................................................... 4-17
568-B.2 .............................................................................. 1-13
568-B.3 ...................................................................... 1-13, 4-6
569-B ................................................................................. 1-13
570-A ................................................................................ 1-13
606-A ............................................................ 1-13, 3-146, 5-28
607-A ................................................................................ 1-13
758 .............. 1-1, 1-3, 1-13, 3-141, 3-146, 3-148, 4-6, 5-1, 7-1
antennas ................................................................................. 4-74
AP .................................................................... 1-2, 1-5, 6-10, 8-7
applicability of standards ..................................................... 11-16
applications ........................................................... 2-4, 2-10, 8-39
digital ................................................................................ 4-49
long haul ............................................................................ 4-21
underground ...................................................................... 4-47
wide area ............................................................................. 2-3
appraisal .............................................................. 8-30, 8-32, 8-34
Appraisal Foundation ............................................................ 8-32
arc ................................................................................ 3-43, 8-19
arc length of bend .................................................................. 3-35
architect or engineer .............................................................. 11-9
architecture ............................................................................ 2-10
trunk and feeder ................................................................ 4-70
areas
corrosion ........................................................................... 6-19
noncorrosion ..................................................................... 6-19
areial cables ......................................................................... 3-104
arrow .............................................................................. 8-38, 9-8
A/E ......................................................................................... 11-9

AASHTO ........................................................................ 1-8, 1-9
ac ............................................................................................. 6-5
acceptance criteria ................................................................ 10-5
access ......................................................................... 3-61, 13-16
provider ..................................................................... 1-2, 6-10
accumulation, ice and snow ................................................... 3-80
acre ....................................................................................... 8-13
active solutions ...................................................................... 2-12
adjoining structures ................................................................. 3-9
ADSL/DSL ............................................................................ 4-26
adverse possession ................................................................. 8-29
aerial ......................................................... 1-7, 3-2, 6-1, 8-5,10-2
aerial pathways and spaces
anchors ................................................................................ 1-6
guys ..................................................................................... 1-6
poles .................................................................................... 1-6
support strands .................................................................... 1-6
aerial plant ............................................. 3-65, 6-5, 6-13, 7-1, 9-3
expected life ........................................................................ 3-3
aerial systems
advantages ......................................................................... 3-10
disadvantages .................................................................... 3-10
aesthetics ....................................................................... 3-3, 8-35
AHJ ........................... 1-6, 3-51, 3-68, 3-78, 3-81, 8-2, 8-6, 11-1
air core .................................................................................. 4-49
cables .................................................................... 1-7, 7-1, 7-8
air dryers .......................................................................... 7-3, 7-8
air-feeder pipe .......................................................................... 7-2
air flow .................................................................................. 3-43
air pipe ..................................................................................... 7-2
manifolds ............................................................................. 7-9
air pressure ............................................................................ 9-10
pipe .................................................................................... 6-18
system ......................................................................... 7-1, 7-8
air systems, compressed ........................................................ 3-29
airflow logistics ....................................................................... 7-5
airport ............................................................................ 3-77, 8-6
airtight joints .......................................................................... 3-29
alarms ............................................................................ 3-61, 7-7
ALPETH ............................................................. 4-29, 4-52, 4-61
alternating current .................................................................... 6-5
aluminum .............................................................................. 6-28
bare ................................................................................... 4-67
polyethylene ...................................................................... 4-29
steel, polyethylene ............................................................ 4-44
ALVYN ................................................................................. 4-32
ambient temperature .............................................................. 3-44
2004 BICSI
I-1
Index
as-built ....................................................... 8-8, 11-3, 11-7, 13-18

asbestos .................................................................................. 3-63
ASP ............................................................................. 4-44, 4-45
assembly
manifold .............................................................................. 7-4
units .................................................................................... 7-2
ASTM .......................................................................... 3-25, 5-15
asymmetrical digital subscriber loop ..................................... 4-26
asynchronous transfer mode .................................................... 2-3
AT&T ............................................................................... 1-1, 1-2
ATM ......................................................................................... 2-3
attenuation ............................................................................ 4-66
channel .............................................................................. 4-15
attenuators
fixed .................................................................................. 4-14
variable .............................................................................. 4-14
attics ..................................................................................... 3-131
auger ...................................................................................... 3-73
authorities ............................................................................... 6-2
local ..................................................................................... 1-5
authority having jurisdiction ......................... 1-6, 3-68, 8-2, 11-1
authorization .......................................................................... 10-5
authorized client .................................................................. 12-15
AWG ...................................................................................... 4-24
bend
offset .................................................................................. 3-43
radius ....................................................................... 4-19, 5-27
simple ................................................................................ 3-43
bending moments .................................................................. 3-79
bentonite ............................................................................... 6-26
BER ....................................................................................... 4-14
BICSI ..................................................... 1-1, 1-2, 1-8, 1-9, 10-5
Governmental Relations Committee ................................... 1-8
members .............................................................................. 1-9
publications ....................................................................... 1-11
bill-of-material ....................................................................... 11-3
billing .................................................................................... 9-13
binder groups ................................................................ 4-35, 9-4
binders ................................................................................... 4-38
color-coded ............................................................. 4-36, 4-59
bit rate ......................................................................... 4-34, 4-68
block, title ...................................................................... 9-8, 9-14
boat slip ............................................................................... 3-156
BOC ......................................................................................... 1-1
bond ....................................................................... 6-6, 6-16, 7-4
connection ........................................................................ 6-13
bonding and grounding ................. 6-1, 6-3, 6-7, 6-11, 6-16, 9-11
purpose ................................................................................ 6-5
bore
auger .................................................................................. 3-73
directional ............................................................... 3-73, 3-74
missile ..................................................................... 3-71, 3-75
bore route ............................................................................... 3-67
boxes
fill ........................................................................................ 9-9
cross-connect ..................................................................... 9-11
waterproof ......................................................................... 5-23
bracing ................................................................................... 3-53
angle .................................................................................. 3-53
longitudinal ....................................................................... 3-53
branch
runs .................................................................................... 3-15
splicing .............................................................................. 5-13
branches, exposed ................................................................... 6-2
bridges ........................................................... 2-5, 3-15, 3-51, 8-5
broadband .............................................................................. 4-34
BTR .................................................................... 3-35, 3-36, 3-37
budget .................................................................................... 11-4
buffer ..................................................................................... 9-10
buffering ................................................................................ 4-18
build-out capacitor ................................................................. 3-17
building, codes ......................................................................... 1-4
bus topology .......................................................................... 2-11
buyer ...................................................................................... 8-43
B
backhoe .................................................................................. 3-69
back tension ratio ................................................................... 3-35
backboard ............................................................................. 9-15
backbone .......................................................................... 4-5, 4-6
cabling ................................................................................. 9-2
interbuilding ............................................................. 2-5, 4-18
intrabuilding ...................................................................... 4-18
multimode ........................................................................... 4-6
ring ...................................................................................... 2-8
singlemode .......................................................................... 4-6
star ...................................................................................... 2-8
backfill ....................................................... 3-24, 3-45, 3-51, 3-91
background check ................................................................ 11-11
bandwidth ............................................................ 2-5, 4-25, 4-72
high ................................................................................... 2-10
bargaining .................................................................... 8-35, 8-36
barriers ................................................................................... 3-61
baseband ..................................................................... 4-34, 4-66
Bell
Laboratories ........................................................................ 1-1
Operating Companies ......................................................... 1-1
System ................................................................................. 1-2
type ................................................................................... 4-28
I-2
2004 BICSI
Index
category 3, 5, & 5e ................................................................ 1-11

cathodic protection ................................................................ 6-19
CATV ................... 2-11, 2-12, 3-8, 3-62, 3-99, 3-159, 4-4, 11-19
CCTV .................................................................................. 11-19
centerline ..................................................................... 8-22, 8-23
central office ............................................................................ 9-2
central switch location ........................................................... 4-76
CEV ........................................................ 3-131, 3-154, 4-75, 9-9
CFR .............................................................................. 1-10, 1-11
CGA ......................................................................................... 3-5
change orders .................................................... 10-6, 12-3, 12-15
changes, grade ...................................................................... 3-28
chemical electrodes ............................................................... 6-26
chemistry, soil ........................................................................ 6-25
chloride ................................................................................. 6-27
circuit
breaker ............................................................................... 6-10
critical ............................................................................... 13-9
noise .................................................................................. 6-30
operation ............................................................................. 6-5
primary ................................................................................ 6-6
priority ............................................................................... 13-9
secondary ........................................................................... 6-6
circuitry .................................................................................. 6-5
circuits ................................................................................. 3-124
citizenship .............................................................................. 10-5
claim ...................................................................................... 8-32
clamps .......................................................................... 6-10, 6-14
class, pole .............................................................................. 3-96
clay ........................................................................................ 6-26
clearance
attachment ....................................................................... 3-108
horizontal ........................................................................ 3-107
midspan ........................................................................... 3-108
security ................................................................... 10-5, 11-11
vertical ............................................................................. 3-107
clearance ..................................................................... 3-19, 9-14
Clerk of the Court .................................................................. 8-37
closed circuit television ....................................................... 11-19
closures
aerial .................................................................................... 5-4
direct-buried ........................................................................ 5-5
encapsulated ...................................................................... 10-3
nonencapsulated ................................................................ 10-3
optical fiber ......................................................................... 5-6
splice ............................................................... 5-25, 6-13, 7-1
underground ........................................................................ 5-5
clustered star, ........................................................................... 2-8
coaxial cable .......................................... 1-7, 2-11, 3-44, 4-2, 9-1
splicing .............................................................................. 10-3
Code of Federal Regulations ................................................ 1-10
codes ........................................................... 1-2, 6-2, 9-11, 11-16
building .............................................................................. 1-4
definition ......................................................................... 11-16
local ................................................................................... 3-26
purpose ................................................................................ 1-4
state and local .................................................................. 11-12
C
cabinets ................................................................................ 3-150
cable
aerial ...................................................................... 3-104, 7-12
air core ........................................................................ 7-1, 7-8
air core screened ............................................................... 4-49
balanced twisted-pair ......................................................... 4-4
buffering ............................................................................ 7-13
buried ............................................................................... 7-11
coaxial .............................................................. 3-44, 4-2, 4-64
coding ................................................................................ 4-21
elevation .......................................................................... 3-145
exposed ............................................................................. 6-19
fire rated .............................................................................. 5-8
gauges ......................................................................... 1-5, 3-4
hose-reeling ..................................................................... 3-156
identification ....................................................................... 1-5
loops .................................................................................... 3-4
loose tube .......................................................................... 4-18
markers .............................................................................. 3-75
non-self-supporting ........................................................... 4-38
optical fiber ........................................................................ 4-3
pair/strand counts ................................................................ 1-5
PASP .................................................................................. 4-41
patch ................................................................................ 10-14
pulling .............................................................................. 3-17
reels ................................................................................... 3-67
run length .......................................................................... 3-44
sizing ................................................................................... 4-1
stub .................................................................................... 5-11
tight buffered ..................................................................... 4-19
cable path, redundant ............................................................... 2-7
cabling ..................................................................................... 1-2
hardware ...................................................................... 1-2, 5-1
metallic ........................................................................... 5-1
nonmetallic ..................................................................... 5-1
cabling topologies .................................................................... 2-1
bus ....................................................................................... 2-1
ring ...................................................................................... 2-1
star ....................................................................................... 2-1
CAD ................................................................................. 8-8, 9-1
calculations .......................................................................... 12-13
power ................................................................................ 4-66
pull tension ........................................................................ 3-11
campus
environment ................................................................ 9-2, 9-6
premises ............................................................................. 6-3
site ....................................................................................... 9-8
capacitor ............................................................................... 6-12
build out ............................................................................ 3-17
capacity .......................................................................... 1-4, 3-61
capital ................................................................................... 8-29
capstan ................................................................................... 3-35
carbon blocks ......................................................................... 6-21
case law ................................................................................. 8-30
casing .................................................................................... 3-75
2004 BICSI
I-3
Index
codes and standards ......................................................... 1-2, 1-4

coefficient of friction .......................................... 3-28, 3-32, 3-33
collars .................................................................................. 3-129
color
code ................................................................................... 4-28
coding ................................................................................ 4-22
Common Grounds Alliance ..................................................... 3-5
community antenna television ............................ 2-11, 3-8, 11-19
completion date ..................................................................... 10-6
components ............................................................................ 4-13
compound
filling ................................................................................. 4-28
flooding ............................................................................. 4-68
computer-aided design ..................................................... 8-8, 9-1
concrete .............................................................. 3-45, 6-17, 6-26
pads ................................................................................. 3-150
slab .................................................................................... 3-21
concrete universal enclosure .......................... 3-131, 3-155, 4-75
condemnation, right of .......................................................... 8-29
conditions .............................................................................. 8-31
subsurface ............................................................... 3-12, 3-18
conductivity .......................................................................... 6-26
conductors ............................................................................. 9-13
center ...................................................................... 4-64, 4-71
copper concentric ............................................................. 6-14
ground ............................................................................... 6-27
grounded .......................................................................... 6-14
metallic ............................................................................. 6-15
power ................................................................................. 6-14
conduit .................................................................. 1-5, 9-15, 9-16
arrangement ....................................................................... 3-17
casings ............................................................................... 3-29
deformation ....................................................................... 3-19
depth ...................................................................... 3-139, 9-16
environment ............................................................. 9-10, 9-11
galvanized rigid steel .............................................. 3-25, 3-27
intermediate metallic ......................................................... 3-25
plastic ................................................................................ 3-43
rigid metallic ..................................................................... 3-25
rigid non-metallic .............................................................. 3-25
routes ................................................................................. 3-13
section ............................................................................... 3-17
space .................................................................................. 5-10
types ................................................................................. 3-25
configurations ............................................ 2-2, 3-104, 6-30, 7-13
corner .............................................................................. 3-112
deadend ................................................................ 3-112, 3-114
false deadend ................................................................... 3-112
hierarchical star ................................................................... 2-3
push brace ........................................................... 3-112, 3-113
ring ...................................................................................... 2-9
shielding ............................................................................ 4-73
sidewalk .......................................................................... 3-112
span guy .......................................................................... 3-112
splicing .............................................................................. 5-11
star ............................................................................... 2-6, 2-9
tangent ............................................................................. 3-114
unguyed ........................................................................... 3-112
connections .............................................................................. 6-5

physical ............................................................................... 1-2
connectors
single ................................................................................. 5-14
splicing ................................................................................ 5-3
constrained duct ..................................................................... 5-10
constraints .............................................................................. 3-17
construction .......................................................... 3-14, 9-9, 9-11
aerial .................................................................................. 3-78
all dielectric ....................................................................... 4-19
armored ............................................................................. 4-19
cable route ........................................................................... 9-4
riser-rated ......................................................................... 4-19
contamination ........................................................................ 3-32
content ..................................................................................... 1-4
continuity ............................................................................... 6-10
contract of sale ...................................................................... 8-29
contractor ................................................. 3-159, 9-1, 12-3, 12-14
contracts ........................................................ 11-16, 11-17, 12-14
controlled environment vault ................... 3-123, 3-154, 4-75, 9-9
convergence ........................................................................... 8-15
conveyance ................................................................... 8-9, 8-27
copper
magnesium sulfate ............................................................. 6-26
oxide .................................................................................. 6-28
core
hitch ................................................................................... 3-17
sleeves ................................................................................ 3-9
wrap ................................................................................... 4-38
corrosion ............................................................. 3-62, 4-39, 6-25
areas ........................................................................ 6-19, 6-20
galvanic ............................................................................ 6-25
cost
analysis .............................................................................. 3-61
environment ...................................................................... 12-5
estimating .......................................................................... 12-1
hazardous materials .......................................................... 12-5
installation ........................................................................... 3-4
material .............................................................................. 3-26
nonstandard ....................................................................... 12-5
raw ..................................................................................... 12-5
restrictions ......................................................................... 12-5
coupling ................................................................................. 6-30
covenants ............................................................................... 8-31
CPM ..................................................................................... 11-14
crews
labor cost ........................................................................... 12-6
onsite ................................................................................ 3-17
crimp protectors ..................................................................... 5-26
criteria, acceptance ................................................................ 10-5
critical
circuits ............................................................................... 13-9
path methods ..................................................................... 11-4
path analysis ...................................................................... 11-5
cross brace ............................................................................ 3-50
cross-connect ........................................................ 2-2, 5-10, 5-24
cross-training ......................................................................... 13-6
I-4
2004 BICSI
Index
crossings, railroad .................................................................. 3-15

crossover ............................................................................... 6-10
crosstalk .................................................................................. 4-5
CUE ................................................................ 3-131, 3-155, 4-75
current ..................................................................................... 6-2
induced ................................................................................ 6-5
surge ................................................................................. 6-11
curves ..................................................................................... 3-43
device
failure .................................................................................. 2-1
log ..................................................................................... 7-13
devices
current limiting .................................................................. 6-21
voltage limiting ................................................................. 6-21
diagrams, stick ....................................................................... 11-5
dial tone ................................................................................... 1-2
diameter
inside ................................................................................. 3-28
outside ............................................................................... 3-28
dielectric ................................................................................ 4-63
cable ........................................................................ 3-10, 3-75
teflon ................................................................................. 4-65
dielectric material ................................................................. 4-73
dig-ups ......................................................................... 3-28, 3-62
digital subscriber loop ........................................................... 4-26
direct
connectorization .................................................................. 5-8
current ................................................................................ 6-5
route .................................................................................... 3-4
direct-buried cable .............. 3-25, 5-9, 6-1, 6-13, 8-5, 8-43, 8-44
advantages ........................................................................... 3-9
disadvantages .................................................................... 3-10
displacement angle ................................................................ 3-35
distance, capabilities ................................................................ 2-5
distribution
cable ................................................................... 2-11, 9-2, 9-3
centers ................................................................................. 5-7
points ................................................................................. 3-16
districts
business ............................................................................. 3-61
storm loading .................................................................... 3-81
divestiture ................................................................................ 1-2
docks ........................................................................ 3-156, 3-157
finger ............................................................................... 3-160
main ................................................................................. 3-160
DoT ................................................................ 3-60, 8-2, 8-6, 8-42
down time, network ................................................................. 2-1
drain slope ............................................................................. 3-22
drawings ................................................................................ 13-6
coordination .................................................................... 11-12
elevation ............................................................................ 10-4
project ............................................................................... 10-2
shop ................................................................................. 11-12
SOW .................................................................................. 12-2
drop
length ................................................................................. 4-70
service ..................................................................... 3-88, 4-70
wire ........................................................................ 3-94, 6-21
aerial .................................................................................. 4-63
dry air ...................................................................................... 7-1
DS-1 ...................................................................................... 4-26
DS-3 ....................................................................................... 4-26
ductbank ................................................................................ 3-14
ductpic ................................................................................... 4-28
D
damage
plant ................................................................................... 6-15
prevention ......................................................................... 3-11
rodent ................................................................................ 4-45
data .................................................................................. 1-1, 9-8
acquisition ........................................................................... 5-7
pricing .............................................................................. 11-6
database .................................................................................. 8-8
DB-60 .................................................................................... 3-25
DB-100 .................................................................................. 3-25
DB-120 .................................................................................. 3-25
dc .................................................................................. 4-66, 6-5
dead weight ............................................................................ 3-90
deadends ........................................................................ 3-84, 6-1
deceased ................................................................................. 8-26
deed ........................................................... 8-27, 8-28, 8-31, 8-33
grant ........................................................................ 8-27, 8-28
quitclaim ............................................................................ 8-28
warranty .................................................................. 8-27, 8-28
deformation ............................................................................ 3-32
conduit ............................................................................... 3-19
delays ..................................................................................... 9-11
delta power system .................................................................. 6-8
Department of Natural Resources ........................................... 8-6
Department of Transportation ................................ 3-60, 8-2, 8-6
DEPIC ................................................................................... 4-28
deregulation ............................................................................. 1-2
description ............................................................................ 8-33
design
breakout ............................................................................. 4-20
cable core .......................................................................... 4-21
checklist .............................................................................. 9-7
distribution ........................................................................ 4-20
material list ........................................................................ 11-9
optical fiber ...................................................................... 4-21
oversheath ......................................................................... 4-21
reistance ........................................................................... 4-24
schematic ............................................................................. 9-1
sheath ................................................................................ 4-21
splice ................................................................................ 5-23
designer ..................................................... 1-2, 4-1, 9-1, 9-6, 9-8
detectors ................................................................................. 3-61
deviations ............................................................................... 3-32
2004 BICSI
I-5
Index
ducts
fiberglass ........................................................................... 3-25
individual .......................................................................... 3-16
lateral ....................................................................... 3-15, 3-16
length ................................................................................. 3-14
multiple ............................................................................. 3-16
multiple plastic .................................................................. 3-25
plugs ................................................................................ 3-146
subsidiary ......................................................................... 3-15
dynamometer ......................................................................... 3-31
environmental
awareness .......................................................................... 3-61
factors ................................................................................ 4-72
impact ................................................................................ 3-12
protection ........................................................................ 11-14
equipment
ground ............................................................................... 6-19
lists ................................................................................... 11-8
critical ........................................................................... 11-8
noncritical ..................................................................... 11-8
telecommunications ............................................................ 9-9
test ..................................................................................... 13-6
escrow .................................................................................... 8-27
estates .................................................................................... 8-26
excavation ............................................................... 3-5, 3-18, 8-8
existing
facilities ............................................................................. 9-14
plant ................................................................................... 9-13
route .................................................................................... 3-4
exothermic welding ............................................................... 6-28
expansion ..................................................................... 3-52, 13-8
extensions ................................................................................ 6-2
extent ....................................................................................... 1-4
exterior wall ........................................................................... 6-21
E
easement ....................................... 3-3, 3-4, 8-6, 8-22, 8-25, 8-33
document ........................................................................... 8-38
private ............................................................................... 8-37
EB-20 ..................................................................................... 3-25
EB-35 ..................................................................................... 3-25
Egress ............................................................................ 8-6, 8-25
EIA ................................................................ 1-1, 1-8, 1-9, 3-146
electrical
connections ......................................................................... 6-5
damage, risk of .................................................................... 6-1
protection ............................................................................ 6-1
electricity ............................................................................... 3-63
electrode system ..................................................................... 6-2
electrodes
chemical ............................................................................ 6-26
concrete-encased ............................................................... 6-27
copper ...................................................................... 6-25, 6-26
copper-clad steel ............................................................... 6-25
steel ................................................................................... 6-25
electromagnetic
induction ............................................................................. 6-3
interference ............................................. 3-60, 4-3, 6-29, 6-30
Electronic Industries Alliance ....................... 1-1, 1-8, 1-9, 3-146
electronics ............................................................................... 2-9
element
common ........................................................................... 3-156
limited common .............................................................. 3-156
emergency
recovery procedures .......................................................... 13-9
restoration ............................................................. 13-6, 13-10
EMI .............................................................. 3-60, 4-3, 6-29, 6-30
eminent domain ..................................................................... 8-29
encapsulate ............................................................................ 9-15
encasement ........................................................................... 3-45
encasing, concrete ................................................................. 3-51
enclosure, concrete universal ......................... 3-131, 3-155, 4-75
encumbrances ........................................................................ 8-32
end user .................................................................................... 1-3
engineer, professional ..................................................... 3-9, 11-1
engineering ............................................................................ 8-33
entrances, building ................................................................. 3-11
environment, campus .............................................................. 9-6
F
facility protection .................................................................. 3-61
factor of safety ....................................................................... 3-95
failure, device .......................................................................... 2-1
FDDI ........................................................................................ 2-7
federal
agencies ............................................................................... 8-2
government ....................................................................... 8-30
fee ownership ........................................................................ 8-24
feeder cable ..................................................................... 9-1, 9-2
pair .............................................................................. 9-2, 9-3
sizing ................................................................................... 9-2
fiber
mass ................................................................................... 5-25
to the curb ......................................................................... 4-26
to the home ........................................................................ 4-26
fiber distributed data interface ................................................. 2-7
field splicing
fusion ....................................................................... 5-25, 5-26
mechanical .............................................................. 5-25, 5-26
field survey ..................................................................... 3-1, 11-3
fire ......................................................................................... 3-63
fire alarm ................................................................................. 9-2
fire-rated cable ......................................................................... 5-8
flexpipe .................................................................................. 3-75
flooding ................................................................................. 3-63
floods ..................................................................................... 13-8
force, tensile .......................................................................... 3-44
foreclosure ............................................................................. 8-28
I-6
2004 BICSI
Index
foreign lines ............................................................................. 3-1

four-point method .................................................................. 6-24
framework ............................................................................ 3-106
franchise agreements ............................................................. 3-14
freeways ................................................................................. 3-15
frictional force ....................................................................... 3-33
frost line ...................................................................... 3-67, 4-20
FTTC ..................................................................................... 4-26
FTTH ..................................................................................... 4-26
fuel .......................................................................................... 3-1
fuse ................................................................................ 6-7, 6-10
links ................................................................ 6-21, 6-22, 9-15
grounded .................................................................................. 7-4

neutral ................................................................................. 6-5
grounding ................................ 4-5, 6-1, 6-3, 6-5, 6-7, 6-13, 6-24
growth .................................................................................. 13-18
GTE ......................................................................................... 1-2
guys ........................................................................... 3-111, 9-10
deadend .......................................................................... 3-112
down .................................................................................... 6-5
requirements ...................................................................... 3-84
H
H-10 ....................................................................................... 3-20
H-20 ....................................................................................... 3-20
H-40 ....................................................................................... 3-20
handholes .................................. 1-5, 3-11, 3-75, 3-131, 6-18, 7-1
hangers ................................................................................... 3-52
hardware ................................................................................. 3-3
cabling ....................................................................... 5-1, 10-3
connecting ......................................................................... 10-3
outdoor splice .................................................................... 5-10
passive ............................................................................... 10-3
termination .............................................................. 10-2, 10-3
harmonics .............................................................................. 6-30
hazardous ................................................................................. 6-5
materials ........................................................................... 10-5
HDD ............................................................................ 3-71, 3-72
headend source ........................................................................ 4-4
heat shrink ............................................................................ 5-26
height ..................................................................................... 9-15
heirs ....................................................................................... 8-26
heliopad ................................................................................. 3-77
hertz ......................................................................................... 6-1
HFC ............................................................................... 2-3, 4-26
HH ............................................ 1-5, 3-11, 3-75, 3-147, 6-18, 7-1
hierarchical star ....................................................................... 2-3
one-level .............................................................................. 2-4
two-level ............................................................................. 2-5
high bandwidth ............................................................ 2-10, 3-16
high-speed digital service ...................................................... 4-26
highway permit ................................................... 8-39, 8-40, 8-41
approval process ................................................................ 8-42
Homeland Security ................................................................ 11-1
hookups ............................................................................... 11-17
horizontal directional drilling ...................................... 3-73, 3-74
host switch ............................................................................. 4-25
housings ...................................................................... 3-150, 5-7
repeater ................................................................................ 7-9
hub ................................................................................... 2-3, 2-9
location .............................................................................. 2-11
site ..................................................................................... 4-25
hybrid
fiber/coaxial ...................................................................... 4-26
optical fiber/coaxial ............................................................ 2-3
G
GACAN ................................................................................. 4-24
gain, system ........................................................................... 4-11
galvanic corrosion ................................................................ 6-25
galvanization ........................................................................ 3-27
GANTT chart ................................................................ 11-2, 11-4
gas lines ......................................................................... 3-60, 8-2
gauge ............................................................................. 6-5, 9-15
coding area number ........................................................... 4-24
General Telephone and Electrical ............................................ 1-2
geographic area ............................................................. 2-11, 5-11
geographical
information system .............................................................. 8-8
points ................................................................................... 6-3
GIS .......................................................................................... 8-8
global telecommunications infrastructure ............................... 1-1
governmental agency ............................................................. 8-30
GPR ......................................................................... 6-1, 6-3, 6-4
grade
changes .............................................................................. 3-28
drop ................................................................................... 3-11
steep .................................................................................. 3-90
surface ............................................................................... 3-19
Grand Jury ............................................................................. 8-29
grantee ................................................................................... 8-27
grantor ................................................................................... 8-27
grid system
chains ................................................................................ 8-12
linear measurement ........................................................... 8-12
quadrangle ......................................................................... 8-11
ranges ................................................................................ 8-11
township ............................................................................ 8-11
U.S. Retangular ........................... 8-10, 8-13, 8-14, 8-15, 8-17
grommets ............................................................................. 3-140
ground .................................................................................... 6-10
conductors ......................................................................... 6-27
cover .................................................................................. 3-13
equipment ......................................................................... 6-19
potential rise ................................................................ 6-1, 6-3
power ................................................................................. 6-19
rods ................................................................. 6-13, 6-16, 6-25
2004 BICSI
I-7
Index
hybrid topology
clustered star ....................................................................... 2-1
hierarchical star ........................................................... 2-1, 2-3
star-wired ring ..................................................................... 2-1
tree and branch .................................................................... 2-1
hydrants ................................................................................... 3-2
HZ ............................................................................................ 6-1
International
Electrotechnical Commission ............................................. 1-8
Organization for Standardization ....................................... 1-8
Right-of-Way Association .................................................. 8-4
Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication ................ 1-3
Internet .......................................................................... 1-8, 4-76
interpolation ........................................................................... 3-36
intrabuilding, backbone ......................................................... 4-18
intrusion .................................................................................. 1-4
inventory system .................................................................. 11-10
irons, pulling ........................................................................ 3-133
IRWA ............................................................................. 8-4, 8-32
ISDN ............................................................................ 2-3, 3-132
ISO .......................................................................................... 1-8
ITU-T ...................................................................................... 1-3
I
IC (BD) ...................................................... 2-2, 2-4, 2-5, 2-7, 2-8
ICEA ............................................................ 1-8, 1-10, 1-11, 4-28
ICEA S-83-596-2001 ............................................................. 1-11
ICEA S-104-696-2001 ........................................................... 1-11
ID .......................................................................... 5-18, 7-2, 12-4
IDC ....................................................................................... 5-12
identification .............................................................. 12-4, 13-19
IEC ........................................................................................... 1-8
IEEE ..................................................................... 1-8, 1-10, 1-12
impact
environmental .................................................................... 3-12
moling ............................................................................... 3-73
impedance .................................................................... 6-22, 6-25
indicator, on/off ....................................................................... 7-7
induced, current ....................................................................... 6-5
noise .................................................................................... 1-4
induction, power .................................................................... 6-12
infrared .................................................................................. 3-63
infrastructure .......................................................... 1-1, 1-3, 10-6
characteristics .................................................................... 13-8
supporting ....................................................................... 11-19
ingress ............................................................................ 8-6, 8-25
innerduct ................................................................................ 9-10
corrugated ......................................................................... 3-32
polyethylene ...................................................................... 3-25
polyvinyl chloride ............................................................. 3-25
smooth bore ....................................................................... 3-32
inside diameter ..................................................... 3-28, 5-18, 7-2
inspections ................................................................... 6-12, 13-2
install ................................................................................... 11-17
installation ................................................................... 6-18, 6-27
cost ..................................................................................... 3-4
installer ................................................................................ 11-17
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. .. 1-8, 1-10
Insulated Cable Engineers Association ....... 1-8, 1-10, 1-11, 4-28
insulating
jacket ....................................................................... 6-14, 4-65
joints ........................................................................ 6-19, 6-20
insulation
color-coded polyolefin ............................................ 4-54, 4-56
displacement connectors .................................................. 5-12
polyethylene ................................................... 4-36, 4-38, 4-44
insurance .................................................................................. 8-8
integrated services digital network .......................................... 2-3
integrity, joint ........................................................................ 3-23
interbuilding, backbone ................................................. 2-5, 4-18
J
jack
and bore ............................................................................. 3-73
and plug ........................................................................... 3-156
jackets
insulating ................................................................ 4-65, 6-14
polyethylene .......................................... 4-38, 4-41, 4-54, 4-56
JAN ....................................................................................... 4-70
jetting ..................................................................................... 3-44
joints
expansion ....................................................... 3-52, 3-55, 3-56
insulating .......................................................................... 6-20
integrity ............................................................................. 3-23
isolation ................................................................................. 6-20
joint
Army Navy ....................................................................... 4-70
occupancy ........................................................................ 6-12
ownership ......................................................................... 8-26
tenancy ............................................................................. 8-26
joint use ...................................... 3-8, 6-2, 6-12, 6-29, 9-13, 9-15
joints
airtight ............................................................................... 3-29
connection ......................................................................... 3-23
junction, points ............................................................. 3-18, 6-1
K
key map ................................................................................. 8-39
keying .................................................................................... 3-90
L
L Series .................................................................................... 1-3
labels ............................................................................ 5-15, 5-28
labor ............................................................................. 12-4, 12-5
LAN Specialist ........................................................................ 8-4
language, proposal ............................................................... 11-14
I-8
2004 BICSI
Index
laterals .................................................................................... 9-16

laws, real estate ...................................................................... 8-24
LDPE ..................................................................................... 3-32
leasehold ................................................................................ 8-24
levels, OAU target ................................................................. 7-10
liability .................................................................. 3-1, 8-32, 9-11
license ................................................................. 8-24, 8-25, 12-9
liens .................................................................... 8-28, 8-31, 8-32
life
estate ....................................................................... 8-24, 8-25
expectancy ......................................................................... 13-1
Life Safety Code, 2003 ........................................................... 1-12
lightning ......................... 6-1, 6-2, 6-12, 6-13, 6-21, 6-29, 13-18
surges .................................................................................. 6-5
limitations, topographical ...................................................... 3-12
limits
transmission ........................................................................ 2-3
wiring .................................................................................. 9-9
lines
foreign ................................................................................. 3-1
frost ........................................................................ 3-67, 4-20
gas ..................................................................................... 3-60
leased .......................................................................... 1-6, 2-2
pole ................................................................... 3-4, 3-12, 3-77
linear measurement ................................................................ 8-12
link loss .................................................................................... 4-7
budget ...................................................................... 4-12, 4-13
links ......................................................................................... 2-4
fusible ................................................................................ 6-21
list ............................................................................................ 9-4
material .............................................................................. 10-5
loads
apparatus ............................................................................ 7-9
assumed ............................................................................. 3-93
balanced ............................................................................ 3-94
coil ........................................................................... 3-17, 9-16
dead ................................................................ 3-19, 3-21, 3-30
dynamic .......................................................... 3-19, 3-20, 3-30
earth ................................................................ 3-19, 3-21, 3-30
ice ...................................................................................... 3-94
live .................................................................. 3-19, 3-20, 3-30
maximum recommended ................................................... 3-31
points ................................................................................. 6-11
tail ........................................................................... 3-34, 3-39
loading
heavy ................................................................................. 3-79
light ......................................................................... 3-80, 3-81
medium .................................................................... 3-80, 3-81
transverse .......................................................................... 3-83
transverse storm ................................................................ 3-79
vertical ............................................................................... 3-79
wind ................................................................................... 3-81
Local Area Network Specialist ................................................ 8-4
2004 BICSI
local authorities ........................................................................ 1-5

locations
central switch .................................................................... 4-76
hub .............................................................................. 2-3, 2-11
route .................................................................................... 3-1
splice point ........................................................................ 5-24
locator, cable ......................................................................... 3-74
logistic planning .................................................................... 11-7
longitudinal bracing ............................................................... 3-53
loop .......................................................................................... 9-8
asymmetrical digital subscriber ........................................ 4-26
digital subscriber ............................................................... 4-26
resistance ........................................................................... 4-66
loss
characteristics .................................................................... 2-11
connector ............................................................................ 4-9
insertion ............................................................................. 10-3
levels ................................................................................. 10-3
optical fiber ......................................................................... 4-9
return ................................................................................. 10-3
splice ................................................................................... 4-9
values ................................................................................ 4-11
low density polyethylene ....................................................... 3-32
low-risk area ......................................................................... 6-19
low-voltage systems ........................................................ 1-1, 1-9
M
main
cross-connect ....................................................................... 2-2
entrance facility ................................................................... 7-8
maintenance ................................................................. 9-14, 13-3
analysis ............................................................................ 11-11
demand ............................................................................ 13-14
holes ..... 1-5, 2-12, 3-131, 3-141, 6-15, 7-1, 9-11, 10-14, 13-3
routine ............................................................................... 13-2
system ............................................................................... 13-8
underground ...................................................................... 13-3
management, material ............................................................ 11-8
mandreling ............................................................................. 3-27
manifolds
air pipe ............................................................................... 7-9
assembly ............................................................................. 7-4
system ................................................................................. 7-3
map ....................................................................... 8-8, 8-39, 10-2
marina
conditions ........................................................................ 3-156
owner .................................................................. 3-157, 3-159
markers .................................................................................. 9-15
cable .................................................................................. 3-75
electronic ........................................................................... 3-75
post .................................................................................... 3-75
station ................................................................................ 9-10
I-9
Index
materials
dielectric ............................................................................ 4-64
list ...................................................................................... 10-5
management ...................................................................... 11-8
safety data sheets ............................................................... 11-4
MC (CD) .... 2-2, 2-4, 2-5, 2-7, 2-8, 2-11, 2-12, 7-3, 9-2, 9-4, 9-8
MCF ....................................................................................... 9-13
mean time between failures ................................................... 13-8
mechanical ............................................................................. 5-25
media
physical ............................................................................. 11-6
plan .................................................................................... 10-2
megger ................................................................................... 6-24
meridian .................................. 8-10, 8-15, 8-16, 8-18, 8-19, 8-31
metallic, shield ....................................................................... 6-18
meteorological service ........................................................... 3-81
metes and bounds ................... 8-10, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20, 8-21, 8-23
methods
connecting ....................................................................... 10-13
critical path ...................................................................... 11-14
four point ........................................................................... 6-24
three point ........................................................................ 6-24
two point ........................................................................... 6-24
method of placement ........................................................... 10-12
methodology ............................................................................ 1-5
MGN ................................ 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9, 6-10, 6-12
power system ................................................ 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9
MH ................................................................................................
1-5, 3-2, 3-4, 3-11, 3-17, 3-22, 3-131, 3-137, 3-141, 5-10,
6-15, 6-16, 6-18, 7-1, 9-11, 9-16, 10-4
microwave ............................................................................... 2-2
midspan .................................................................................... 6-7
milepost ................................................................................. 8-43
milestones ........................................................................... 11-11
million conductor feet .......................................................... 9-13
modular splicing .................................................................... 5-15
module types
dry ..................................................................................... 5-15
encapsulated ...................................................................... 5-15
modules ........................................................................ 5-14, 6-23
moisture ................................................................................. 6-17
moling, impact ...................................................................... 3-73
moment .................................................................................. 3-89
bending .................................................................... 3-79, 3-96
resistant ................................................................... 3-83, 3-89
monolithic .............................................................................. 6-16
monopolies .............................................................................. 1-1
mortgage ..................................................................... 8-28, 8-32
MPD ...................................................................................... 3-25
MRIL ..................................................................................... 3-31
MS2 ............................................................................. 5-12, 5-18
MSDS ................................................................................. 11-14
MTBF .................................................................................... 13-8
multiground neutral ................................................................. 6-4
multigrounding ......................................................................... 6-7

multimode, fibers ........................................................... 4-6, 5-25
multipair ............................................................................... 5-14
multiple plastic duct ............................................................. 3-25
municipality ............................................................................. 9-8
N
narrative ....................................................................... 10-1, 12-2
National Electrical Code 1-1, 1-10, 1-12, 4-20, 6-1, 9-11, 10-5
National Electrical Safety Code ... 1-1, 1-12, 3-8, 6-1, 9-11, 10-5
National
Electrical Manufacturers Association ....................... 3-25, 5-7
Fire Protection Association ............................ 1-8, 1-10, 1-12
Security Agency ............................................................... 6-25
National Fire Alarm Code ................................................... 1-12
NEC ...... 1-1, 1-10, 1-12, 4-20, 6-1, 6-23, 6-28, 9-11, 9-14, 10-5
Section 250.52(A)(2) ....................................................... 6-24
Section 250.52(A)(7) ....................................................... 6-24
needs assessment ........................................................... 1-5, 3-12
negotiation ............................................................................. 8-35
NEMA ................................................................ 3-25, 5-7, 5-10
NESC ....................................... 1-1, 1-12, 3-8, 3-19, 3-80, 3-81,
3-108, 6-1, 6-14, 9-11, 9-14, 10-5
network ................................................................ 2-5, 4-70, 7-13
interface ............................................................................ 4-63
monitoring ......................................................................... 13-5
synchronous optical ........................................................... 2-3
neutral
grounded ............................................................................. 6-5
primary .............................................................................. 6-13
secondary .......................................................................... 6-13
neutral conductor .................................................................... 6-8
newtons .................................................................................. 3-83
NFPA .................................................................. 1-8, 1-10, 1-12
node site ................................................................................ 2-11
noise
circuit ................................................................................ 6-30
induced ................................................................................ 1-4
levels ................................................................................. 6-12
ratio ......................................................................... 4-34, 4-68
shield ................................................................................ 6-10
non-MGN ................................................................................ 6-6
noncorrosion area .................................................................. 6-19
North pole .................................................................... 8-15, 8-18
NSA ....................................................................................... 6-25
O
OAU ...................................................................................... 7-10
obstacles .................................................................................. 3-7
occupancy .............................................................................. 8-43
I-10
2004 BICSI
Index
Occupational Safety and Health Administration ........... 1-1, 1-8,

1-10, 1-12, 1-13, 3-131, 10-15
OCSI ........................................................................................ 3-5
OD ........................................................................ 3-28, 5-18, 7-2
one-call
centers .............................................................................. 13-7
services ................................................................................ 8-8
systems ..................................................................... 3-78, 11-3
One-Call Systems International ............................................... 3-5
one-level hierarchical star ....................................................... 2-4
operation support centers ....................................................... 13-6
optical
fiber ................................................. 1-7, 2-8, 3-16, 9-11, 10-4
junction ............................................................................. 5-26
optical fiber
cable .................................................................................... 4-3
dielectric ............................................................................ 3-10
ring .................................................................................... 2-10
optimum air usage ................................................................. 7-10
option settings ....................................................................... 13-8
ordinances ................................................................................ 3-7
organizations
professional ......................................................................... 1-8
United States ...................................................................... 1-9
OSHA ........................... 1-1, 1-8, 1-10, 1-12, 3-47, 3-131, 10-15
provisions .......................................................................... 1-10
publications ....................................................................... 1-12
standards ........................................................................... 1-12
OSHA Regulations (Standards-29 CFR)
1910 ................................................................................... 1-12
1910.146 ............................................................................ 1-12
1910.268 ............................................................................ 1-13
1926 ................................................................................... 1-13
outside diameter ................................................... 3-28, 5-18, 7-2
over-current device .................................................................. 6-7
overbuilds ................................................................................ 3-3
ownership ................................................................... 8-25, 8-30
joint ................................................................................... 8-26
single ................................................................................. 8-26
patch cords ............................................................................ 4-18

patent ..................................................................................... 8-28
path
inspection .......................................................................... 3-62
primary .............................................................................. 2-10
secondary ......................................................................... 2-10
pathways and spaces ................................................ 1-2, 1-6, 3-1
aerial ............................................................................ 1-6, 3-9
underground ................................................................ 1-6, 3-9
PBX .............................................................................. 9-2, 11-19
PE ........................................................................................ 11-11
pedestals ........................................................... 3-150, 6-13, 9-10
ground level .................................................................... 3-151
secondary .......................................................................... 6-13
performance ............................................................................. 1-4
permission .............................................................................. 3-18
permit-required confined space ........................................... 3-131
permits ................... 3-3, 8-6, 8-43, 9-9, 9-13, 10-5, 11-12, 11-18
approved .......................................................................... 11-13
approved with exception ................................................. 11-13
highway ............................................................................. 8-39
rejected ............................................................................ 11-13
PERT ...................................................................................... 11-4
phase velocity ........................................................................ 4-66
physical
connection ........................................................................... 1-2
media ................................................................................. 11-6
plant .................................................................... 6-2, 8-1, 8-36
star ....................................................................................... 2-5
star/logical ring ................................................................... 2-9
topology ............................................................................. 1-5
wired star/logical ring topology .......................................... 2-6
PIC ......................................................................................... 4-28
pipe ........................................................................................ 3-75
air feeder ............................................................................. 7-2
routes ................................................................................. 7-10
system ................................................................................ 7-1
plant locator number ................................................................ 9-8
plastic ..................................................................................... 3-30
plat ...................................................................... 8-21, 8-24, 8-33
plow
rip ............................................................................ 3-70, 3-72
route .................................................................................. 3-67
share .................................................................................. 3-72
trencher ......................................................... 3-69, 3-70, 3-71
vibratory .................................................................. 3-70, 3-71
PLR .......................................................................................... 9-8
plumb .................................................................................... 3-91
PM ................................................................................ 10-1, 11-7
PMI ........................................................................................ 11-2
PO ........................................................................................ 11-19
point
of interest .......................................................................... 3-33
of origin ............................................................................ 11-7
P
Pacific coast ............................................................................. 6-2
pads, concrete ...................................................................... 3-150
pair count ................................................................................. 9-3
parallel ......................................................................... 8-10, 8-31
parts
master .............................................................................. 11-10
spare ................................................................................ 11-10
PASP cable ............................................................................. 4-41
passive
optical network .................................................................. 2-12
solutions ............................................................................ 2-12
2004 BICSI
I-11
Index
points
anchor ................................................................................ 3-53
distribution ........................................................................ 3-16
junction ............................................................................. 3-18
terminating ........................................................................ 3-16
pole
class ................................................................................... 3-85
height ................................................................................. 3-84
lines ................................................................ 3-4, 3-12, 3-111
poles ........................................................ 1-5, 9-15, 9-16, 13-2
inspections ......................................................................... 13-3
polyethylene ................................................................ 3-148, 7-2
insulation ........................................................................... 4-36
jacket ................................................................................. 4-38
polyvinyl chloride .............................................. 3-51, 4-63, 6-29
PON ....................................................................................... 2-12
port configurations ................................................................ 13-8
possession .............................................................................. 8-29
post markers .......................................................................... 3-73
potholes .................................................................................. 3-7
power
company .................................................................. 6-10, 6-12
conductors ........................................................................... 6-2
contact ......................................................................... 6-1, 6-2
contacts ............................................................................... 6-4
facilities ............................................................................. 6-15
fault ..................................................................................... 6-4
ground ............................................................................... 6-19
induction ..................................................................... 6-3, 6-4
line ....................................................................................... 6-3
line faults ............................................................................. 6-3
network ............................................................................... 6-3
substation ............................................................................ 6-6
power penalties ...................................................................... 4-12
PRC ..................................................................................... 3-131
precast .................................................................................... 6-16
pressure .................................................................................. 3-78
levels ................................................................................... 7-1
minimum ............................................................................. 7-8
transducer ............................................................................ 7-5
wind ................................................................................... 3-93
pricing data ............................................................................ 11-6
primary
path .................................................................................... 2-10
system ................................................................................. 2-1
prints ........................................................................................ 9-1
work ............................................................................ 9-1, 9-4
private branch exchange ............................................... 9-2, 11-19
professional engineer ...................................................... 3-9, 11-1
program evaluation review technique ................................... 11-4
project
drawings ............................................................................ 10-2
manager .................................................................... 10-1, 11-1
outline ............................................................................... 11-3
tracking ............................................................................ 11-2
Project Management Institute ............................................... 11-2
property ................................. 8-10, 8-19, 8-26, 8-30, 8-32, 8-38

description of ........................................................... 8-9, 8-10
owners ................................................................................. 8-2
proposal language ................................................................ 11-14
proposed route ........................................................................ 3-4
protection
bonding and grounding ....................................................... 1-5
facility .............................................................................. 3-60
overcurrent ......................................................................... 1-5
overvoltage ................................................................ 1-5, 6-23
routing ................................................................................. 2-1
protective measures ................................................................. 6-1
protector
entrance ............................................................................ 4-63
stubs .................................................................................. 6-22
protector housings ................................................................. 6-21
fused .................................................................................. 6-21
fuseless .............................................................................. 6-21
proximity ................................................................................ 6-4
PTR .............................................................................. 3-36, 3-37
public demand ....................................................................... 13-8
publication dates .................................................................. 11-18
publications, United States ................................. 1-11, 1-12, 1-13
pull
corner .............................................................................. 3-116
finder ............................................................................... 3-116
tension ............................................................................... 3-11
pulling
eyes ................................................................................... 3-63
tension ratio ............................................................ 3-35, 3-36
pumps .................................................................................... 3-61
punch list ............................................................................. 11-15
purchase order ..................................................................... 11-19
purpose .................................................................................. 8-33
PVC ................................................ 3-25, 3-45, 3-52, 4-63, 6-29
Q
quadrangle ............................................................................. 8-15
quality .................................................................................. 11-18
quantity, minimum .............................................................. 11-18
quicksand ................................................................................. 3-2
quitclaim deed ....................................................................... 8-28
R
racking ......................................................................... 3-22, 3-23
radio frequency ...................................................................... 4-65
radius, curvature ......................................................... 3-35, 3-43
railroad ........................................................................... 3-12, 8-6
application ......................................................................... 8-43
crossing angles .................................................................. 8-44
permit ................................................................................ 8-42
requirements of ................................................................. 8-42
right-of-way ...................................................................... 8-42
I-12
2004 BICSI
Index
railroad permit, sample .......................................................... 8-44

range ...................................................................................... 8-11
ratio
back tension ................................................... 3-35, 3-36, 3-37
pulling tension ................................................ 3-35, 3-36, 3-37
RCDD ...................................................................................... 8-4
REA ........................................................................................ 1-2
real estate ............................................................................... 8-35
law ..................................................................................... 8-24
value .................................................................................. 8-32
reconfiguration ........................................................................ 2-4
records .................................................................... 3-1, 3-8, 13-4
redundant
cable path ............................................................................ 2-7
routing ................................................................................. 2-1
Registered Communications Distribution Designer ............... 8-4
regulations .................................................................... 6-2, 11-18
safety ................................................................................... 1-5
relay protection ........................................................................ 6-7
remote
dryers ................................................................................... 7-3
terminal ............................................................................... 9-9
repeater housings ..................................................................... 7-9
reports
jeopardy ............................................................................. 11-5
management ...................................................................... 11-5
request
for information ................................................................... 1-5
for proposal ....................................................................... 10-6
requirements
guy ..................................................................................... 3-84
transmission ........................................................................ 1-5
Residential Network Cabling Manual ................................... 1-11
resistance ..................................................................... 4-24, 6-24
loop ................................................................................... 4-66
under bend ............................................................... 3-35, 3-36
resistivity ............................................................................... 6-17
responses, evaluation ............................................................... 1-5
restoration ........................................................... 12-8, 13-1, 13-5
emergency ......................................................................... 13-6
equipment ......................................................................... 13-7
procedures ......................................................................... 13-8
tools ................................................................................... 13-9
restrictions ..................................................................... 3-1, 8-31
RF .......................................................................................... 4-65
RFI ........................................................................................... 1-5
RFP ................................................................. 10-6, 11-13, 11-16
ribbon
bonding ......................................................... 6-16, 6-18, 6-20
vertical bonding ................................................................ 6-18
2004 BICSI
right-of-way
acquisition ................................................................. 8-9, 8-24
easement ............................................................................. 8-3
jurisdiction ......................................................................... 8-5
leased lines .......................................................................... 1-6
planning ............................................................................... 1-5
private ......................................................... 3-8, 8-2, 8-3, 8-36
public .................................................................... 3-8, 8-3, 8-5
purchasing of ....................................................................... 8-3
railroad ...................................................................... 8-3, 8-42
width ................................................................................. 8-39
right-to-work ....................................................................... 11-18
rigid metallic conduit ............................................................. 3-25
ring
configuration ....................................................................... 2-9
optical fiber ....................................................................... 2-10
physical ............................................................................... 2-7
token .................................................................................... 2-7
topology ............................................................................ 5-24
RNCM .................................................................................... 1-11
road surface ............................................................................ 3-8
roadway ................................................................................. 9-11
rock ................................................................................ 3-2, 3-47
salt ..................................................................................... 6-26
ROM ...................................................................................... 11-6
rough-order of magnitude ...................................................... 11-6
route
bore ................................................................................... 3-67
conduit ............................................................................... 3-13
existing ...................................................................... 3-4, 3-13
new .................................................................................... 3-13
plow ................................................................................... 3-67
proposed .............................................................................. 3-4
selection ............................................................................ 3-65
routine maintenance .............................................................. 13-2
routing ........................................................................... 2-1, 3-60
fault-tolerant ............................................................. 2-10, 2-11
RT ............................................................................................ 9-9
RUB ............................................................................. 3-35, 3-36
Rule ....................................................................................... 6-14
261A1c .............................................................................. 3-82
261A2f .............................................................................. 3-82
Rural ...................................................................................... 8-24
Electrification Administration ............................................. 1-2
Utilities Service ........................................................ 1-2, 4-22
RUS ...................................................................... 1-2, 3-82, 4-22
I-13
Index
slag ........................................................................................ 3-47

sleeve
core ...................................................................................... 3-9
heat shrink ......................................................................... 5-26
slip ..................................................................................... 3-51
slips
boat ...................................................................... 3-156, 3-160
condominium .................................................................. 3-156
finger ............................................................................... 3-160
slope, drain ............................................................................ 3-22
slurry ...................................................................................... 3-74
soil
conditions ............................................................................ 3-2
erosion ............................................................................... 3-90
type .................................................................................... 3-21
solutions
active ................................................................................. 2-12
passive ............................................................................... 2-12
SONET ............................................................................ 2-3, 2-7
South pole .............................................................................. 8-15
SOW ....................................... 10-1, 10-2, 10-4, 10-6, 12-2, 12-3
SP ............................................................................................. 1-1
spaces
allocation ........................................................................... 4-75
attachment ......................................................................... 3-98
confined ............................................. 1-12, 3-121, 3-122, 3-62
hazards ................................................................ 3-131, 3-132
subsurface ......................................................................... 3-51
vertical ............................................................................... 3-27
work ................................................................................ 3-131
spacing, vertical ..................................................................... 3-50
span ....................................................................................... 9-10
length ....................................................................... 3-91, 9-16
slack ................................................................................ 3-105
special
handling ............................................................................. 11-7
situations ........................................................................... 12-9
tools ................................................................................. 11-11
specialists ............................................................................. 11-16
specifications, RUS ............................................................... 3-89
speed, vehicle ........................................................................ 3-20
speed of light ......................................................................... 4-66
splice .............................................................................. 6-15, 9-9
closures ........................................................... 5-7, 5-25, 6-18
classifications ........................................................ 5-1, 5-2
coding ................................................................................ 5-15
design ................................................................................ 5-23
methods ............................................................................. 5-16
nonmetallic ........................................................................ 6-15
points ......................................................................... 3-3, 5-24
protection .......................................................................... 5-26
trays ................................................................................... 5-25
splicing .................................................................................. 9-14
configurations ................................................................... 5-11
mass ................................................................................... 5-26
modular ............................................................................. 5-15
transfer .............................................................................. 9-11
S
safety .................................................. 3-4, 3-61, 5-11, 9-11, 9-14
hazards ................................................................................ 3-1
precautions ........................................................................ 3-47
regulations .......................................................................... 1-5
satellite ..................................................................................... 2-2
SCFD ....................................................................................... 7-7
SCFH ....................................................................................... 7-7
scheduling ..................................................................... 11-4, 11-5
schematic design ...................................................................... 9-1
scope of work ........................................................................ 10-1
screened cabling ...................................................................... 1-7
secondary
path ................................................................................... 2-10
power system ...................................................................... 6-5
security .................................................................................... 9-2
clearance .................................................................. 10-5, 11-1
Senior Right-of-Way Agent ..................................................... 8-4
sensitivity, receiver ................................................................ 4-12
service ...................................................................................... 1-2
date ............................................................................ 9-8, 9-13
drop ................................................................................... 3-88
order .................................................................................. 9-13
serving area .............................................................................. 1-1
sewer ..................................................................... 3-1, 3-60, 3-61
shale ....................................................................................... 3-47
sheath ............................................................................... 5-1, 7-1
cable .................................................................................. 6-12
kilometer ........................................................................... 7-10
plastic ............................................................................... 6-15
shield
aluminum .......................................................................... 4-61
cable ......................................................................... 6-11, 6-13
continuity .......................................................................... 6-13
metallic ............................................................................. 6-18
ship date ................................................................................. 9-13
shoring ................................................................................... 3-47
shutoff valve ............................................................................ 7-4
signal
degradation ........................................................................ 4-75
level ................................................................................... 4-72
silicone sealant ...................................................................... 5-26
silt .......................................................................................... 3-28
single connectors ................................................................... 5-14
sinh ........................................................................................ 3-35
site
assessment ........................................................................... 3-3
conditions ......................................................................... 10-5
improvements .................................................................... 13-4
survey ............................................................... 3-2, 8-33, 12-3
sizing ..................................................................................... 3-61
skill capabilities .................................................................... 13-6
slack
cable .................................................................................. 5-24
span ................................................................................. 3-105
I-14
2004 BICSI
Index
splicing methods
butt .................................................................................... 5-13
branch ................................................................................ 5-13
foldback ............................................................................. 5-17
four-bank ........................................................................... 5-21
in-line ..................................................................... 5-13, 5-16
three-bank ......................................................................... 5-20
two-bank ............................................... 5-17, 5-18, 5-19, 5-22
split duct ................................................................................ 3-66
STALPETH ........................................................................... 4-31
stand-alone system .................................................................. 7-7
standard cubic meters per hour ................................................ 7-7
standard cubic meters per day ................................................. 7-7
standardization ................................................................. 1-2, 1-3
star
clustered .............................................................................. 2-9
configuration ....................................................................... 2-9
physical .............................................................................. 2-5
topology ...................................................... 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 5-24
star-wired network topology ................................................... 2-9
statement of work .................................................................. 12-2
statistics ................................................................................. 8-32
steel
corrugated ............................................................... 4-39, 4-50
galvanized ......................................................................... 3-27
stick diagrams ........................................................................ 11-5
strands .................................................................................... 9-10
support .......................................... 1-5, 3-99, 3-111, 6-10, 6-11
suspension ......................................................................... 6-10
stress, tensile ......................................................................... 3-21
structures
adjoining ............................................................................. 3-8
support ................................................................................. 1-5
stub cable ............................................................................... 5-11
stubbing ................................................................................... 9-3
submittals ............................................................................. 11-13
subscriber service drop .......................................................... 4-70
subsurface
conditions .......................................................................... 3-18
space .................................................................................. 3-51
utilities ................................................................................. 3-5
sulfate .................................................................................... 6-27
sulpher ................................................................................... 6-25
sump .................................................................................... 3-133
pumps .............................................................................. 3-154
supply and demand ................................................................ 8-34
support
strands ...................................................................... 1-5, 3-111
high-strength ..................................................................... 4-39
structures .................................................................. 1-5, 3-63
technologies ........................................................................ 2-2
supporting structure ............................................................... 10-2
supports, conduit ................................................................... 3-51
surface
grade .................................................................................. 3-19
restoration ......................................................................... 3-12
2004 BICSI
surge currents ......................................................................... 6-11

surveillance ............................................................................ 13-5
survey
field ............................................................................ 3-1, 11-3
site ..................................................................................... 12-3
surveyor ................................................................................... 8-9
suspension strands ................................................................. 6-10
swamp ...................................................................................... 3-2
switches ......................................................................... 2-5, 6-24
symbols .................................................................................. 9-13
synchronous optical network ................................................... 2-3
systems
air-pressure .......................................................... 1-7, 7-1, 7-8
cost-effective ..................................................................... 4-74
design ................................................................................ 4-13
gain ......................................................................... 4-11, 4-12
inventory ......................................................................... 11-10
low voltage .......................................................................... 1-9
manifold .............................................................................. 7-3
monitoring ........................................................................... 7-7
one-call .............................................................................. 3-78
pipe ...................................................................................... 7-1
stand alone .......................................................................... 7-7
tracking .......................................................................... 11-19
traffic ................................................................................. 2-11
T
T-1 .............................................................................. 3-16, 3-132
T zone .................................................................................... 13-2
table, water ............................................................................ 3-28
tabular system ...................................................................... 12-14
tagging ................................................................................... 13-6
tail load ........................................................................ 3-34, 3-39
tape
dielectric ............................................................................ 4-38
measure ........................................................................... 3-116
target levels ............................................................................ 7-10
taxes ....................................................................................... 8-32
TC-2 ....................................................................................... 3-25
TC-6 ....................................................................................... 3-25
TC-8 ....................................................................................... 3-25
TCIM ..................................................................................... 1-11
TDMM ............................................................................ 1-9, 1-11
technology ............................................................................... 9-1
baseband ............................................................................ 4-68
optical fiber ......................................................................... 4-5
telecommunications
distribution designer ............................................................ 3-1
equipment ............................................................................ 9-9
infrastructure ....................................................................... 1-3
main grounding busbar ..................................................... 6-19
rooms .................................................................. 2-2, 5-24, 9-9
systems ........................................................................... 11-19
I-15
Index
Telecommunications Act of 1996 ............................................ 1-2

Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual ............... 1-11
Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual ............. 1-11
Telecommunications Industry Association ..................... 1-1, 1-9,
1-10, 3-136, 10-5
temperature ........................................................................... 3-63
ambient .............................................................................. 3-44
tenancy in common ............................................................... 8-26
tensile
force .................................................................................. 3-44
stress .................................................................................. 3-21
tension
conductor ........................................................................... 3-91
maximum pulling .............................................................. 3-31
pull ........................................................................... 3-11, 3-39
terminals .................................................... 3-158, 6-13, 9-9, 9-15
termination hardware ............................................................. 10-2
terrain ..................................................................................... 3-17
test ....................................................................................... 11-19
equipment ......................................................................... 13-6
hole ..................................................................... 3-1, 3-7, 3-18
thunderstorm ........................................................................... 6-2
TIA .................................... 1-1, 1-2, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 3-146, 10-5
tiers, upper ............................................................................. 3-16
title
block .......................................................................... 9-8, 9-14
chain of .............................................................................. 8-31
claim of ............................................................................. 8-29
transfer .............................................................................. 8-28
TMGB ................................................................................... 6-19
token ring ................................................................................. 2-7
tolerance zone ......................................................................... 3-7
tonnage, vehicular ................................................................. 3-20
tools, special ........................................................................ 11-11
topographical limitations ....................................................... 3-12
topography .................................................................. 3-1, 3-149
topology
bus .............................................................................. 2-1, 2-11
hybrid .................................................................................. 2-1
mesh ................................................................................. 13-8
physical ............................................................................... 1-5
physical wired star/logical ring .......................................... 2-6
ring ................................................................... 2-1, 5-24, 13-8
star ............................................................... 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 5-24
star-wired ............................................................................ 2-9
tree and branch ................................................. 2-1, 2-11, 2-12
township ....................................................................... 8-11, 9-8
chains ............................................................................... 8-12
linear measurement ........................................................... 8-12
TR .................................................................... 2-2, 2-4, 5-24, 9-9
tracking system
first phase ........................................................................ 11-19
second phase ................................................................... 11-19
tract ........................................................................................ 8-21

tractor ..................................................................................... 3-67
trades ................................................................................... 11-19
traffic ................................................................. 3-1, 3-14, 3-109
analog ................................................................................ 4-68
control ...................................................................... 3-18, 11-1
flaggers .............................................................................. 11-1
lights ................................................................................. 9-14
system .............................................................................. 2-11
vehicular ............................................................................ 3-20
warning devices ............................................................... 3-18
transducer
pressure ..................................................................... 7-5, 7-12
transfer ................................................................................... 9-20
transformers ........................................................ 3-79, 6-12, 6-22
transitions .............................................................................. 10-2
underground ...................................................................... 6-13
transmission ........................................................................... 9-13
bi-directional ..................................................................... 4-49
continuous ........................................................................... 6-3
high bandwidth .................................................................. 3-16
limits .................................................................................... 2-3
lines .................................................................................... 8-2
requirements ........................................................................ 1-5
temporary ............................................................................ 6-3
transportation ......................................................................... 11-1
trays
cable .................................................................................. 4-75
splice ................................................................................. 5-27
tree trimming ......................................................................... 13-2
trees and branches ................................................................. 2-12
trench ........................................................................... 3-25, 9-14
width ................................................................................. 3-17
trenching, methods ............................................................... 3-67
trolley ..................................................................................... 6-19
trouble resolution ................................................................... 13-6
troubleshooting ................................................... 13-6, 13-7, 13-9
trunk and feeder architecture ................................................. 4-70
trunk cable ............................................................................... 9-2
trunks ...................................................................................... 9-2
tugger ..................................................................................... 3-31
tunnels ........................................................................... 3-4, 10-2
pedestrian .......................................................................... 3-60
utility ................................................................................. 3-60
vehicular ............................................................................ 3-60
TWCS TAC ........................................................................... 1-11
twisted-pair ............................................................................ 3-44
cable ............................................................................ 1-7, 5-3
protected ............................................................................ 10-4
unprotected ........................................................................ 10-4
two-level hierarchical star ....................................................... 2-5
Type 710 ................................................................................ 5-12
Types A, J, L, T ................................................................... 3-141
Types B, C, D, E, ................................................................... 3-24
I-16
2004 BICSI
Index
U-guard .................................................................................. 3-66

UL ................................................................................ 5-15, 6-23
uncertified territory .................................................................. 1-1
underground cable
advantages ........................................................................... 3-9
disadvantages ...................................................................... 3-9
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ................................... 5-15, 6-23
unexposed ................................................................................ 6-2
uninterruptible power supply ................................................. 4-75
unit, pressure transducer .......................................................... 7-5
United States .......................................... 1-1, 6-1, 8-1, 8-29, 8-42
Coast and Geodetic Survey .............................................. 8-16
Coast Guard .............................................................. 8-6, 8-16
Army Corps of Engineers ........................................ 1-10, 8-6
Department of Labor ......................................................... 1-10
rectangular grid system ..................................................... 8-10
units of area ........................................................................... 8-13
upper tiers ............................................................................. 3-16
UPS ........................................................................................ 4-75
urban area .............................................................................. 8-24
user grouping .......................................................................... 2-5
utility poles ........................................................................... 6-12
utilities .................................................................... 3-2, 8-2, 9-14
subsurface ........................................................................... 3-5
wall racking ........................................................................... 3-23

warranty, deed ............................................................. 8-27, 8-28
water ............................................................................ 6-26, 8-29
crossings ............................................................................ 3-12
main ..................................................................................... 3-1
run-off ............................................................................... 3-11
table ................................................................................... 3-28
wavelength ............................................................................. 4-22
WBS ............................................................................. 11-1, 11-9
weather ................................................................................ 11-15
weight
cable ........................................................................ 3-31, 3-32
dead ................................................................................... 3-97
vehicle ............................................................................... 3-20
Western Electric ....................................................................... 1-1
wetland .................................................................................... 8-6
wide area applications ............................................................. 2-3
winch, line ................................................................... 3-28, 3-31
windows ................................................................................. 9-16
wire
aerial distribution .............................................................. 4-63
copper ...................................................................... 6-14, 6-20
drop ....................................................... 3-94, 3-97, 4-63, 6-21
ground ............................................................................... 6-27
line .................................................................................... 3-94
top ....................................................................................... 6-6
wireless .................................................................................... 8-5
wires, service ........................................................................ 4-70
wiring ....................................................................................... 1-2
limits .................................................................................... 9-9
work
breakdown structure ......................................................... 11-1
order .................................................................................. 9-14
prints .................................................................. 9-1, 9-4, 9-11
site ....................................................................................... 3-1
workstation .............................................................................. 2-3
wye power system ................................................................... 6-8
V
vacuum .................................................................................. 4-66
values, loss ............................................................................. 4-11
valves
check .................................................................................. 7-4
shutoff ................................................................................. 7-4
vaults ............................................................................... 3-150
VDL ...................................................... 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-12, 6-13
ventilation ......................................................... 3-61, 3-139, 9-16
vertical
down lead ............................................................................ 6-5
spacing .............................................................................. 3-50
video, cameras ......................................................................... 5-7
view, plan ................................................................................. 1-5
volcanic ash ........................................................................... 6-24
volt .......................................................................................... 6-1
voltage ................................................... 6-2, 6-4, 6-5, 6-30, 9-14
high ..................................................................................... 6-6
induction ............................................................................ 6-1
source ................................................................................ 6-24
volume ................................................................................... 3-45
2004 BICSI
X
x digital subscriber line ........................................................... 2-3
xDSL ....................................................................................... 2-3
Z
zinc, coating ................................................................ 3-27, 3-111
zone, tolerance ......................................................................... 3-7
I-17
Index
I-18
2004 BICSI

Coosp 3

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Coosp 3

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Thank you for ordering the Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual, 3rd edition, 2004.

Printed in the United States of America

BICSI World Headquarters

George Fewell, RCDD, World IT Solutions LLC.

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

BICSI Policy for Numeric Representation of Units of Measure

Manufacturer requirement for a product.

Standard or code requirement.

For metric conversion practices, refer to ANSI/IEEE/ASTM SI 10-1997, Standard for

When Celsius temperatures are used, an equivalent Fahrenheit temperature is placed in

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

BICSIAn International Telecommunications Association

BICSI Member Benefits

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

BICSI Member Benefits, continued

The title Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) is awarded to BICSI

The Customer-Owned Outside Plant Specialty (RCDD/OSP Specialty) designation

The Registered Cabling Installers and Technicians demonstrate their proficiency in

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

BICSI Member Benefits, continued

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

BICSI Member Benefits, continued

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

How to Use this Manual

Chapters are divided into sections.

Bullet important terms and phrases.

Bullets are often followed by more detailed information.

Figures, examples, and tables are numbered sequentially in a given chapter.

Page numbers are

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

Readers Comment Form

Please complete the following information:

Thank you for your cooperation.

TI&M committee chair signature

TI&M panel chair signature

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

Chapter 2: Cabling Infrastructure

Topology .................................................................................................................................. 2-2

Chapter 3: Pathways and Spaces

Pathways .................................................................................................................................. 3-9

Section 1: Underground Pathways

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

Economics ....................................................................................................................................... 3-12

Tunnels .................................................................................................................................. 3-60

Utility Tunnels .................................................................................................................................. 3-60

Disadvantages .................................................................................................................................. 3-62

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

Fire Detection 3-63

Section 2: Direct-Buried Pathways

Placing Direct-Buried Cable ................................................................................................ 3-69

Section 3: Aerial Pathways

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

Support Strands ........................................................................................................................ 3-111

Handholes (HHs) ................................................................................................................. 3-148

Pedestals, Cabinets, and Vaults ........................................................................................ 3-150

Controlled Environment Vault (CEV) ................................................................................ 3-154

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition

Appendix ................................................................................................................................ 3A-1

Recognized Cable .................................................................................................................. 4-3

Optical Fiber Cabling .............................................................................................................. 4-5

Twisted-Pair Cabling ............................................................................................................ 4-24

Coaxial Cabling ..................................................................................................................... 4-64

CO-OSP Design Manual, 3rd edition